The New Syriac Primer, 2nd Edition 9781463210298

Citation preview

‫ܘܐ‬

‫̈ ܐ‬

‫ܪ ܐ‬

‫ܐ‬

THE NEW SYRIAC PRIMER

Gorgias Handbooks

9 Series Editor George Anton Kiraz

Gorgias Handbooks provides students and scholars with reference books, textbooks and introductions to different topics or fields of study. In this series, Gorgias welcomes books that are able to communicate information, ideas and concepts effectively and concisely, with useful reference bibliographies for further study.

The New Syriac Primer ̈

‫ܘܐ‬

‫ܐ‬

‫ܪ ܐ‬

‫ܕܘ ܐ ܙܪ ܒܐ‬ ‫ܐܙ‬

‫ܢ ܕܒ‬

‫ܘܐ‬

‫ܪ ܐ‬

‫ܐ‬

‫ܐ‬

‫ܓ ܪܓ ܒ ܐ‬

‫̈ ܐ‬

‫ܪ ܐ‬

‫ܐ‬

THE NEW SYRIAC PRIMER

George Anton Kiraz

9

34 2013

‫ܐ‬

Gorgias Press LLC, 954 River Road, Piscataway, NJ, 08854, USA www.gorgiaspress.com Copyright © 2013 by Gorgias Press LLC

All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise without the prior written permission of Gorgias Press LLC.

2013

9

‫ܘ‬

ISBN 978-1-59333-325-6

ISSN 1935-6838

First edition (Syriac for Beginners) 1984. Second edition (The Syriac Primer) 1990. Third revised edition (The New Syriac Primer) 2007. Second printing with corrections 2013.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Kiraz, George Anton. The new Syriac primer / George Anton Kiraz. -- 1st Gorgias Press ed. p. cm. Includes a glossary of grammatical terms and a Syriac-English glossary. ISBN 978-1-59333-325-6 1. Syriac language--Grammar. 2. Syriac language--Composition and exercises. I. Title. PJ5421.K57 2007 492’.38242--dc22 2007028646 Printed in the United States of America

ťŨǁĪ ťƍƃŴƣ ljĿŴƌ ĸŴƌŤƀƟŴƆĭ ŧƢƍƃ ķŤƀźƐũƏĭ ŦƦƇſĥƢũū ŦƼũźƆ To Tabetha Gabriella, Sebastian Kenoro, and Lucian Nurono

Table of Contents List of Tables..............................................................................................................xvi Audio Tracks .............................................................................................................xvii Preface ........................................................................................................................xix Note to the Second Printing........................................................................................xx About Syriac ...............................................................................................................xxi 1 Introduction to Reading and Writing .................................................................... 1 1.1 Olaph, Béth, Gomal, and Dolath .................................................................................................. 1 The Letters.............................................................................................................................. 1 Some Vowels.......................................................................................................................... 2 Reading for the Very First Time.......................................................................................... 3 Notes ....................................................................................................................................... 3 Phrases .................................................................................................................................... 4 Writing Syriac for the Very First Time ............................................................................... 4 Review..................................................................................................................................... 6 Exercise 1.1............................................................................................................................. 6 1.2 Hé, Waw, and Zayn......................................................................................................................... 6 Another Vowel....................................................................................................................... 7 Reading.................................................................................................................................... 7 Phrases .................................................................................................................................... 8 The Power of Waw................................................................................................................ 8 Writing .................................................................................................................................... 9 Review..................................................................................................................................... 9 Exercise 1.2........................................................................................................................... 10 1.3 Ḥéth, Ṭéth, and Yudh................................................................................................................... 10 One Final Vowel.................................................................................................................. 12 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 12 Masculine and Feminine ..................................................................................................... 13 Beware of ‫ ܚ‬Next to ‫ ܝ‬....................................................................................................... 13 Phrases .................................................................................................................................. 13 Writing .................................................................................................................................. 14 Review................................................................................................................................... 14 Vocabulary Review .............................................................................................................. 15 Exercise 1.3........................................................................................................................... 16 1.4 Koph, Lomadh, Mim, and Nun .................................................................................................. 16 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 17 Where Did the Waw Go? ................................................................................................... 18 Phrases .................................................................................................................................. 19 Writing .................................................................................................................................. 19 Review................................................................................................................................... 20 Exercise 1.4........................................................................................................................... 21 ܽ Letters............................................................................................................................ 21 1.5 The ‫͗͠ܘܠ‬ ܰ Inserting An ◌ ..................................................................................................................... 22 Olaph is Too Lazy to Hold a Vowel!................................................................................ 22 More than One ‫ ܒ ܽ ܘܠ‬....................................................................................................... 23 Review................................................................................................................................... 23 Exercise 1.5........................................................................................................................... 23 1.6 Simkath, ‛é, Phé, and Ṣodhé......................................................................................................... 23

vii

viii

The New Syriac Primer Reading.................................................................................................................................. 24 What are Those Two Dots? ............................................................................................... 26 Phrases .................................................................................................................................. 26 Writing .................................................................................................................................. 26 Review................................................................................................................................... 27 Exercise 1.6........................................................................................................................... 28 1.7 Qoph, Rish, Shin, and Taw .......................................................................................................... 28 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 29 Phrases .................................................................................................................................. 30 Writing .................................................................................................................................. 30 Ŀ with Syomé......................................................................................................................... 31 Review................................................................................................................................... 32 Exercise 1.7........................................................................................................................... 32 1.8 Review of the Alphabet ................................................................................................................ 32 Rukokho and Qushoyo....................................................................................................... 34 1.9 I Don’t Need Those Vowels, Do I? ........................................................................................... 36 ž Do I Really Need º¡ ? ........................................................................................................... 36 When Can I Omit º? .......................................................................................................... 37 ¨ How about Doing Without º ? .......................................................................................... 37 ¥ Can I Omit º Now?............................................................................................................ 38 Review................................................................................................................................... 38

2

Reading with Gender ........................................................................................... 39 2.1 Getting Our Feet Wet With Gender........................................................................................... 39 New Words........................................................................................................................... 39 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 39 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 39 Exercise 2.1........................................................................................................................... 40 2.2 Gender and Verbs ......................................................................................................................... 40 New Words........................................................................................................................... 40 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 41 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 41 Exercise 2.2........................................................................................................................... 41 2.3 Review............................................................................................................................................. 41 New Words........................................................................................................................... 41 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 41 Review................................................................................................................................... 42 Exercise 2.3........................................................................................................................... 42 2.4 Gender and Adjectives ................................................................................................................. 42 New Words........................................................................................................................... 42 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 42 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 43 Ņ Ō ň Bonus Word: ŦƼƠƍƘ .......................................................................................................... 43 Ŕ Exercise 2.4........................................................................................................................... 43 2.5 Gender and Body Parts ................................................................................................................ 44 New Words........................................................................................................................... 44 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 44 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 44 Exercise 2.5........................................................................................................................... 45 2.6 Gender with Numerals ................................................................................................................. 45 New Words........................................................................................................................... 45 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 45 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 46

Table of Contents

ix

Punctuation Marks............................................................................................................... 46 Ņ Ņ ň ................................................................................................................ 46 Bonus Word: ŧƢƍƃ Ņ ň ............................................................................................... 46 Another Bonus Word: ŧĿűƏ Exercise 2.6........................................................................................................................... 46 2.7 Gender with Pronouns ................................................................................................................. 46 New Words........................................................................................................................... 46 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 47 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 47 Underlined Silent Letters .................................................................................................... 47 Ņ Bonus Word: IJôƢƉ ............................................................................................................... 48 Exercise 2.7........................................................................................................................... 48 2.8 How Do I Recognize Masculine and Feminine Words?.......................................................... 48

3

Reading with Number ......................................................................................... 50 3.1 Getting Our Feet Wet With Number ......................................................................................... 50 New Words........................................................................................................................... 50 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 50 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 50 Ņ òŅ Ņ ł ň ò Ņ ł and ŦŁųŨĥ Ņ ł (plural ŦųŨĥ Bonus Word: ťŨĥ Ŕ )......................................................................... 51 Exercise 3.1........................................................................................................................... 51 3.2 Number and Verbs........................................................................................................................ 51 New Words........................................................................................................................... 51 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 51 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 52 Exercise 3.2........................................................................................................................... 52 3.3 Number and Adjectives................................................................................................................ 53 New Words........................................................................................................................... 53 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 53 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 54 Bonus Word: ƼŨ Ŕ ň ............................................................................................................... 54 Exercise 3.3........................................................................................................................... 55 3.4 How Do I Recognize Singular and Plural Words?.................................................................... 55

4

Reading With Tense ............................................................................................ 56 4.1 The Present Tense......................................................................................................................... 56 New Words........................................................................................................................... 56 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 57 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 57 Exercise 4.1........................................................................................................................... 58 4.2 The Past Tense .............................................................................................................................. 59 New Words........................................................................................................................... 59 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 59 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 60 ¡ Verbs with º on the Second Letter .................................................................................. 61 Ņ ł ł .......................................................................................................... 61 Bonus Word: ťƐƀŹƢƟ Exercise 4.2........................................................................................................................... 61 4.3 Let’s Take a Break… and Chant ................................................................................................. 62 New Words........................................................................................................................... 62 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 62 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 62 Present Tense Revisited...................................................................................................... 63 Exercise 4.3........................................................................................................................... 64 4.4 The Future Tense .......................................................................................................................... 64

x

The New Syriac Primer New Words........................................................................................................................... 64 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 64 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 64 Other Usages of Ī (The Relative, Quotation Marker)..................................................... 66 Ņ ŏ ................................................................................................................ 66 Bonus Word: ťŶĭĿ Exercise 4.4........................................................................................................................... 66 4.5 Don’t Order Me Around: The Imperative and the Prohibitive .............................................. 67 New Words........................................................................................................................... 67 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 67 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 67 The Prohibitive .................................................................................................................... 68 Exercise 4.5........................................................................................................................... 68 4.6 The World of Participles .............................................................................................................. 68 New Words........................................................................................................................... 68 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 68 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 69 Exercise 4.6........................................................................................................................... 69 4.7 The Perfect and Imperfect ........................................................................................................... 70

5

Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes................................................................... 71 5.1 “It’s Mine”: Possessive Suffixes .................................................................................................. 71 New Words........................................................................................................................... 71 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 71 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 71 Possessive Pronouns with Plural Nouns .......................................................................... 72 Using ƇſĪ .............................................................................................................................. 73 Another Usage of Ī: Double Possessive .......................................................................... 74 Exercise 5.1........................................................................................................................... 74 5.2 Attaching the Object to the Verb................................................................................................ 74 New Words........................................................................................................................... 74 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 74 New Concepts...................................................................................................................... 75 Exercise 5.2........................................................................................................................... 76 5.3 Revisiting the ĵĭűŨ Prefixes ......................................................................................................... 76 5.4 Putting it All Together.................................................................................................................. 77 New Words........................................................................................................................... 77 Reading Sentences ............................................................................................................... 77 Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 77 Ņ The Noun Ending ťš (Absolute and Emphatic State)................................................... 79 Bonus Word: Ĭ} and the Abbreviation Mark.................................................................... 79 Ņ Enclitic ŦĭĬô ........................................................................................................................... 80 ňŅ Did I Hear ħĥŁ Correctly? ................................................................................................. 80

6

Readings .............................................................................................................. 81 6.1 Saint Ephrem ................................................................................................................................. 81 New Words........................................................................................................................... 81 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 81 Word Order.......................................................................................................................... 82 Use of ĭ in Narrative........................................................................................................... 82 ň Passive Verbs Beginning with ŁĥŔ ....................................................................................... 82 The ĵĭűŨ Letters With the Object Suffixes.................................................................. 82 Letter Numbers.................................................................................................................... 82 Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 84

Table of Contents

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

xi

About the Reading............................................................................................................... 84 Exercise 6.1........................................................................................................................... 84 Mimro (Verse) Poem .................................................................................................................... 85 New Words........................................................................................................................... 85 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 85 Verse Poetry: Meter of Saint Ephrem............................................................................... 85 Punctuation Marks............................................................................................................... 86 Ņ ł Construction ...................................................................................................... 86 The Ī ťƍſĥ Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 86 Exercises 6.2......................................................................................................................... 87 Madrosho Poem ............................................................................................................................ 87 New Words........................................................................................................................... 87 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 87 Madrosho Poems Meter ..................................................................................................... 88 Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 88 About the Reading............................................................................................................... 89 Exercise 6.3........................................................................................................................... 90 Sugitho (Dialogue) Poem ............................................................................................................. 90 New Words........................................................................................................................... 90 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 90 Sugitho Structure ................................................................................................................. 92 The Possessive Without Using Ī ........................................................................................ 92 Use of the Present Tense as Active Participles................................................................ 93 Attaching the Subject Pronouns to Verbs........................................................................ 93 Forms of the Object Suffix for him................................................................................... 94 Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 94 Exercise 6.4........................................................................................................................... 95 The Wolf, the Fox, and the Lion................................................................................................. 96 New Words........................................................................................................................... 96 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 96 ň ň , ƋƆł, ƎƉł, and ƎſĪň.................................................................................. 96 The Particles ĶűƉ Revisiting Ī for Introducing a Quotation.......................................................................... 97 Getting Rid of a Vowel....................................................................................................... 97 Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 97 Exercise 6.5........................................................................................................................... 98 John of Ephesus ............................................................................................................................ 98 New Words........................................................................................................................... 98 Reading.................................................................................................................................. 98 Ō Ņ Adverbs Ending in ƻŤ š ................................................................................................... 99 Ŕ Doing Without Two Vowels at the Same Time .............................................................. 99 Ordinal Numbers................................................................................................................. 99 ň ....................................................................................................... The Conjunction Ƣƀū 100 ł AfȨel: Verbs Beginning with ĥ ........................................................................................... 100 ň Revisiting Passive Łĥ Verbs............................................................................................... 101 The Construct:Ņ Revisiting the Possessive Without ƒ .................................................... 101 Bonus Word: ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ō ........................................................................................................ 101 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 101 Exercise 6.6......................................................................................................................... 102 The Proverbs of Ahiqar.............................................................................................................. 102 New Words......................................................................................................................... 102 Reading................................................................................................................................ 102 Revisiting the Prohibitive ................................................................................................. 103

xii

The New Syriac Primer

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13

Doing Without a Vowel.................................................................................................... 103 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 103 Summary of Assumed Knowledge.................................................................................. 105 About the Reading............................................................................................................. 105 Exercise 6.7......................................................................................................................... 105 Taw Mim Simkath ....................................................................................................................... 106 New Words......................................................................................................................... 106 Reading................................................................................................................................ 106 Ō Plurals Ending in Ǝſš ........................................................................................................ 107 ł ò Ņ Plurals like ťƀÿƇŶ ................................................................................................................ 107 Ņ The Verb ŦĭĬ ...................................................................................................................... 107 Œ The Diacritic Point in Ł .................................................................................................... 108 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 108 About the Reading............................................................................................................. 109 Exercise 6.8......................................................................................................................... 109 From the Eucharistic Liturgy..................................................................................................... 109 New Words......................................................................................................................... 109 Reading................................................................................................................................ 110 Space.................................................................................................................................... 110 Using the Future as Instruction ....................................................................................... 110 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 111 Exercise 6.9......................................................................................................................... 111 The Lord’s Prayer from the Peshitta Version.......................................................................... 111 New Words......................................................................................................................... 111 Reading................................................................................................................................ 112 ŏ ŏ The SuffixesŅ ķŴƃŔ and ķĭĬ ................................................................................................. 112 ł ł ò Adding ƎſųźŶĭ.................................................................................................................. 112 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 112 Exercise 6.10 ...................................................................................................................... 113 Aydin’s Introduction to Brock’s The Bible in the Syriac Tradition............................................. 113 New Words......................................................................................................................... 113 Reading................................................................................................................................ 113 ň ł ň ł ł Verb Types ƈƖƘ, ƈƖƘ, and ƈƖƘĥ ............................................................................ 114 The Root............................................................................................................................. 114 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 115 Exercise 6.11 ...................................................................................................................... 115 Doctrine of Simon Peter in Rome ............................................................................................ 116 New Words......................................................................................................................... 116 Reading................................................................................................................................ 116 Ambiguity With Unvocalized Text.................................................................................. 117 Ņ Ņ Revisitingň Use of ŦĭĬ Versus Enclitic ŦĭĬô ..................................................................... 117 Passive ŁĥŔ With Verbs ň Beginning With Į and Ľ .............................................................. 118 Roots of Passive ŁĥŔ Verbs................................................................................................. 118 ŏ ň Ņ Ō ł Revisiting the Object Suffixes Ĭš, IJųſš ô , IJĬŴſš ô , IJųſĭš ô , and IJĬĭš ô ..................... 118 Summary of Assumed Knowledge.................................................................................. 118 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 119 Exercise 6.12 ...................................................................................................................... 119 From the Discourses of Philoxenos of Mabbug..................................................................... 120 New Words......................................................................................................................... 120 Reading................................................................................................................................ 120 The Cross-Word Ligature ǃ ........................................................................................... 121 Usage of ħĭŁ ..................................................................................................................... 121

Table of Contents

6.14

6.15

6.16

6.17

6.18

6.19

6.20

7

xiii

Using the Diacritic Point To Distinguish Homographs............................................... 122 ŏ How can ĭĬ ‘he’ and IJĬŌ ‘she’ mean ‘is’ and ‘are’?........................................................ 122 Internal Vowel Changes.................................................................................................... 123 Revisiting the Subject Suffix............................................................................................. 123 Exercise 6.13 ...................................................................................................................... 123 A Colophon.................................................................................................................................. 124 New Words......................................................................................................................... 124 Reading................................................................................................................................ 124 ň Passive Łĥ With Verbs Beginning With ĸ or ŀ ........................................................... 125 The Diminutive.................................................................................................................. 125 Months and Seasons.......................................................................................................... 126 I am So Horrible ................................................................................................................ 126 Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 126 Exercise 6.14 ...................................................................................................................... 127 Patriarch Nuh the Lebanese....................................................................................................... 127 New Words......................................................................................................................... 127 Reading................................................................................................................................ 127 Ņ Ņ The Demonym Ņ ŏ Suffix ťſš ................................................................................................ 128 The Suffix ŦŁĭš.................................................................................................................. 128 ň Revisiting Passive Łĥ Verbs............................................................................................... 129 Resolving Ambiguities in Letter Numbers..................................................................... 129 › ŏ Letters ........................................................................................ 129 Revisiting º on ĵĭűŨ About the Reading............................................................................................................. 129 Exercise 6.15 ...................................................................................................................... 130 The Flooding of Edessa ............................................................................................................. 130 New Words......................................................................................................................... 130 Reading................................................................................................................................ 133 The Ligatures Nj and Ʃ...................................................................................................... 133 Vowels Under Letters ....................................................................................................... 134 Variant Spellings (Orthographic Variants) ..................................................................... 134 Grammar: Syomé......................................................................................................................... 133 New Words......................................................................................................................... 133 Reading................................................................................................................................ 133 ň ň The Construction ķĥĭ ÿ ķĥ Whether–Or........................................................................... 133 Revisiting ljĥŅô in Present Tense Verbs.............................................................................. 133 Exercise 6.17 ...................................................................................................................... 133 How to Cure a Hangover: From the Syriac Book of Medicine ............................................ 132 New Words......................................................................................................................... 132 Reading................................................................................................................................ 132 Exercise 6.18 ...................................................................................................................... 132 Syriac for Fun I............................................................................................................................ 132 New Words......................................................................................................................... 132 Reading................................................................................................................................ 132 Exercise 6.19 ...................................................................................................................... 132 Syriac for Fun II .......................................................................................................................... 132 New Words......................................................................................................................... 132 Reading................................................................................................................................ 132 Revisiting The Diminutive ............................................................................................... 133 Transliterating Foreign Words......................................................................................... 133 Word Play ........................................................................................................................... 133

Grammar ............................................................................................................ 135 7.1 Writing System............................................................................................................................. 135

xiv

The New Syriac Primer

7.2 7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

8

Scripts.................................................................................................................................. 135 The Alphabet...................................................................................................................... 135 Vowels................................................................................................................................. 137 Diacritic Points and Other Orthographic Signs ............................................................ 137 Punctuation ........................................................................................................................ 138 Ligatures.............................................................................................................................. 138 The ĵĭűŨ Prefixes .......................................................................................................... 139 Phonology .................................................................................................................................... 139 Syllabification ..................................................................................................................... 140 Rukokho and Qushoyo: ƦƙƃűŬŨ ................................................................................ 141 Pronouns ...................................................................................................................................... 142 Personal Pronouns ............................................................................................................ 142 Demonstrative Pronouns ................................................................................................. 143 Possessive Pronouns ......................................................................................................... 143 Interrogative Pronouns..................................................................................................... 143 Enclitics............................................................................................................................... 144 Nouns ........................................................................................................................................... 144 Gender ................................................................................................................................ 144 Number............................................................................................................................... 144 State ..................................................................................................................................... 145 Possessive Suffixes Attached to Nouns.......................................................................... 146 Nominal Forms.................................................................................................................. 146 Verbs ............................................................................................................................................. 147 Tense ................................................................................................................................... 147 Adverbs............................................................................................................................... 148 Object Suffixes................................................................................................................... 148 Subject Suffixes.................................................................................................................. 148 Ņ The Verb ŦĭĬ ...................................................................................................................... 148 Ō Conjugation of ƻĥ Ŕ ............................................................................................................ 149 Numbers and Numerals ............................................................................................................. 149 Using Letters to Represent Numbers ............................................................................. 149 Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers ....................................................................................... 150

The Estrangelo and East Syriac Scripts............................................................. 152 8.1 Estrangelo..................................................................................................................................... 152 The Alphabet...................................................................................................................... 152 Texts .................................................................................................................................... 153 8.2 East Syriac .................................................................................................................................... 155 The Alphabet...................................................................................................................... 155 Notes on Pronunciation ................................................................................................... 157 Texts .................................................................................................................................... 157

9

How Do I Do That? ........................................................................................... 160 9.1 How to Use the Dictionary? ...................................................................................................... 160 How to Find the Root?..................................................................................................... 161 9.2 How to Read Manuscripts?........................................................................................................ 161 9.3 How to Type in Meltho? ............................................................................................................ 162 Order of Key Strokes........................................................................................................ 163 Controlling Letter Shapes................................................................................................. 164 Fine Tuning Spacing.......................................................................................................... 164 Typesetting Poetry............................................................................................................. 164 Special Symbols.................................................................................................................. 165 How to Create a New Diacritic ....................................................................................... 165

Table of Contents

xv

9.4 Reading Garshuni........................................................................................................................ 167 Arabic Garshuni................................................................................................................. 167 Ottoman Turkish Garshuni.............................................................................................. 168 Malayalam Garshuni.......................................................................................................... 168

Appendix ................................................................................................................... 169 Verb Paradigms ..................................................................................................................................... 169 Table 1. Regular Strong Verbs ......................................................................................... 173 Table 2. Strong Verbs with Initial Sibilant Letters Į, ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ ................................. 181 Table 3. Strong Verbs with Initial ƌ ................................................................................. 191 Table 4. Strong Verbs Ending in a Guttural (Ĭ, į, ĺ) or Ŀ ........................................ 201 Table 5. Initial ĥ Verbs ...................................................................................................... 202 Table 6. Middle ĥ Verbs .................................................................................................... 209 Table 7. Final ĥ Verbs........................................................................................................ 215 Table 8. Initial IJ Verbs ..................................................................................................... 221 Table 9. Middle ĭ/IJ Verbs............................................................................................... 227 Table 10. Doubled Verbs ................................................................................................. 233 Tables 11 & 12. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs ................................... 239 Tables 13. Some Irregular Verbs and Four-Letter Verbs............................................. 257

Glossary of Grammatical Terms ............................................................................... 261 Syriac-English Glossary ............................................................................................ 264 Index.......................................................................................................................... 272 Colophon ................................................................................................................... 277

List of Tables Table 1. Masculine and feminine adjectives.................................................................................... 43 Table 2. Verbs according to number and gender. ......................................................................... 52 Table 3. Number and adjectives. ...................................................................................................... 53 Table 4. Present Tense Verbs (3rd Person). ................................................................................... 57 Table 5. Present Tense Patterns. ...................................................................................................... 58 Table 6. Past tense verbs.................................................................................................................... 60 Table 7. Present Tense Full Conjugation. .......................................................................................63 Table 8. Future Tense Verbs............................................................................................................. 65 Table 9. Imperative verbs. ................................................................................................................. 67 Table 10. Participle forms.................................................................................................................. 69 Table 11. Possessive suffixes............................................................................................................. 72 Table 12. Possessive suffixes with plural, masculine nouns......................................................... 73 Table 13. Object pronoun suffixes. ................................................................................................. 75 Table 14. Ordinal and Cardinal Numbers.....................................................................................100 Table 15. Conjugation of the verb ¿†….......................................................................................108 Table 16. Personal Pronouns. .........................................................................................................143 Table 17. Demonstrative pronouns. ..............................................................................................143 Table 18. Nominal State Endings...................................................................................................145 Table 19. Possessive suffixes with singular nouns.......................................................................146 Table 20. Possessive suffixes with plural nouns. .........................................................................146 ž ...............................................................................................148 Table 21. The Conjugation of ¿†… Table 22. Conjugation of ÿØ~ ­ ........................................................................................................149

xvi

Audio Tracks The readings are recorded and can be downloaded from www.gorgiaspress.com (search for The New Syriac Primer). Track 1 2 3 4 5 6

Section 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.7

Duration 1:21 2:23 2:28 3:53 3:57 2:31

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

1:10 1:22 0:57 0:58 0:56 1:33 1:14

14 15 16

3.1 3.2 3.3

1:01 1:46 2:20

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.5 4.6 5.1 5.2 5.3

1:52 2:10 1:44 1:00 0:49 1:31 1:50 2:54

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14

1:06 0:24 0:52 2:50 1:12 1:31 1:14 0:42 1:01 1:09 1:19 2:44 2:05 2:11 xvii

xviii Track 39 40 41 42 43 44

The New Syriac Primer Section 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 6.19 6.20

Duration 1:59 1:45 1:16 0:46 0:45 1:21

Preface The Second Edition of The Syriac Primer has long been out of print, and I have received numerous requests to bring it back. This third revised edition aims to fulfill this need, despite the appearance of a few excellent introductory books in recent years (Healey, CoakleyRobinson, and Thackston). The Primer has had a long history. The first edition, published under the title Syriac for Beginners, was written in my late teens back in 1984. I began work on it only months after immigrating to the United States from Bethlehem, feeling then that there was a need for a primer written in English for Sunday school and community-run programs. My primary audience at the time was the youth of the Syriac Church. All of this was reflected in the simplicity of the First Edition’s (sometimes imperfect) English, and its eastern-style pedagogical methodology. During the late 1980s, I used to exhibit my newly developed DOS-based Syriac fonts at academic meetings with Gamma Productions, makers of the software Multi-Lingual Scholar. It was one attendee (I wish I remember who he was) at an AAR/SBL meeting who came across a copy of my primer and thought that it should be published for the academic market. He introduced me to Philip Davies of Sheffield Academic Press who in turn accepted the work for publication. The English was polished, with the help of David Levinson, who regularly attended these meetings, and the Second Edition appeared under the title The Syriac Primer. The Eastern-style pedagogical methodology remained the same, and it did not seem to bother Western students. This Third Edition, published under the title The New Syriac Primer is a complete rewrite; in fact, it is a totally different book from its predecessors. The audience here is mixed. I still aim to make the Primer accessible to community members and non-academic enthusiasts, but also would like to reach the academic student, especially in universities where a course on Syriac is not offered. For this reason, the primary feature of the Primer remains its simplicity. Repetitiveness, especially in the first few chapters, is intentional. Grammatical jargon is minimized. The reading portions in Chapters 1-5 are primarily my own (i.e., not derived from the literature) in order to concentrate on the concepts being introduced. The texts of Chapter 1 are derived from Syriac literature. The approach taken in this Primer differs substantially from all other grammars. As mentioned, grammatical jargon is kept to a minimum. The idea is to introduce the student to the language itself and to make the student feel at home reading and understanding texts. Students who use this book as an introduction to Syriac but continue to do their studies at the university graduate level and need to understand the details of Syriac phonology, morphology, and syntax need to consult other available grammars. John Healey’s Leshono Suryoyo: First Studies in Syriac (Gorgias Press, 2005), with a audio recordings as well, is highly recommended as a first step after completing this book. Students can then move to Robinson-Coakley’s Robinson’s Paradigms and Exercises in Syriac Grammar (Oxford, 2003), or Thackston’s Introduction to Syriac (Ibex Publisher, 1999). Nöldeke’s Compendious Syriac Grammar (Eisenbrauns, 2001) can be used by the daring! The book is organized as follows: Chapter One introduces the basics of reading and writing, with some basic grammatical material. Chapters Two, Three and Four introduce the concepts of gender (masculine vs. feminine), number (singular vs. plural), and tense (past, present and future), respectively. Chapter Five shows how prefixes and suffixes get attached to words. These first five chapters give the student the basics needed to read texts. Chapter Six then gives 20 reading passages spanning almost 2,000 years of literature. Each reading xix

xx

The New Syriac Primer

passage is translated into English, followed by various explanatory notes on grammar, literature, and culture. Chapter Seven gives the actual grammar of the language, restricted mainly to what has been introduced in this book but with a few additional grammatical rules. Chapter Eight introduces the Estrangelo and East Syriac scripts. Finally, Chapter Nine answers a few practical questions: how to use the dictionary, how to read manuscripts, how to type Syriac on the computer, and how to read Garshuni. The Appendix gives verbal paradigms. I am most grateful to all those who kept asking me to bring my Primer back to life. A number of people provided invaluable comments. My friend and colleague Thomas Joseph meticulously read an earlier draft and pointed out places where clarifications were needed. The first five chapters were tested on two students of mine, Sami Mourad and Christine Kiraz. They too pointed out parts that were not clear. Lucas Van Rompay of Duke University read the entire final version and gave useful comments. Mor Polycarpus of The Netherlands kindly double checked the Syriac texts and the paradigm tables in the Appendix. Katie Stott and Robert Morehouse of Gorgias Press copy edited the penultimate version. Steve Wiggins kindly recorded the English portions on the audio. Syriac has never been the same for me as it has been in the previous five years. Until then, conversations in Classical Syriac were limited to scattered occasions when meeting clergy and malphoné. Not so recently. My six-year old daughter Tabetha grew up speaking Classical Syriac and has become a companion to me. I had to learn many new words to communicate with her, and sometimes I had to come up with others, some of which are to be found here. My three-year old son Sebastian Kenoro seems to follow suit. Christine, my wife, has been very supportive in cultivating a home environment where all this language madness can take place. Syriac can be a passion (or madness!), not just a language… It is my sincere hope that the Primer plants in you a love for an extraordinary language and cultural heritage. Piscataway, NJ Feast of Saint George, April 23, 2007 George Anton Kiraz

Note to the Second Printing The second printing incorporates many corrections. I would like to thank all the students and friends who pointed out mistakes especially Thomas Joseph. St. Mary’s Villa, Sloatsburg, NY Feast of the Ascention, June 13, 2013 George Anton Kiraz

About Syriac A Brief History of Syriac The Origins of Syriac

Syriac is a form of Aramaic,1 a language whose many dialects have been in continuous use since the 11th century BC. Originally the language of the Aramean people, Aramaic became the lingua franca of the Near East by the 6th century BC. It was the native tongue of the ancient Chaldeans, a second language to the Assyro-Babylonians, an official language of the Persian Achaemenians, and a common language of the Jews replacing Hebrew. Jesus and the Apostles spoke and preached in Aramaic. Syriac is the Aramaic dialect of Edessa (present-day Urfa in southeast Turkey), a center of early intellectual activity. It became an important literary language around the 2nd and 3rd centuries. The earliest dated Syriac inscription is from AD 6, and the earliest parchment, a deed of sale, is from 243. The earliest dated manuscript was produced in November 411, probably the earliest dated manuscript in any language. The oldest of the Syriac scripts, known as Estrangelo, meaning rounded, was fully developed by the 5th century. Later, two geographic scripts would derive from it: West Syriac, whose proper name is Serʜo, and East Syriac. This book uses Serʜo; Estrangelo and East Syriac are introduced in Chapter 8. The Syriac writing system lent its vocalization system to Hebrew and Arabic in the 7th century, before which Semitic languages were written using consonants only. At the time of Genghis Khan (12th century), the Mongolian script was derived from Syriac. The spread of Syriac was due to at least two factors: the spread of Christianity in the Semitic-speaking world, and commerce on the Silk Road, both activities sometimes combined. A testimony of this rather remarkable expansion is a bilingual Chinese and Syriac monument from Sian in China, constructed in 781. Likewise, today a few million Christians in India of various denominations follow the Syriac tradition. Within a few centuries from its origin, Syriac produced a wealth of literature in all sorts of fields: literary, philosophical, liturgical, scientific, historical, and linguistic, to name but a few. Early Literature (from 1st to 4th Centuries)

Early Syriac literature was produced in Mesopotamia, especially in and around Edessa, by pagans, agnostics, Jews, and Christians. Over sixty inscriptions, mostly pagan, and a few papyri from the first three centuries have come down to us. The language of these is midway between Official Aramaic (i.e., the Aramaic that we received from official documents) and literary Syriac, and represents the early development of the Syriac language. The literature of the first three centuries consists mostly of anonymous texts whose date and origin cannot be easily established. By the year 200, the books of the Old Testament were translated from Hebrew, probably by Syriac-speaking Jews and early Jewish converts. The earliest form of the New Testament, the Diatessaron, a harmony of the Gospels, appeared at the same time. A full translation of the Greek New Testament followed. To this period also belong the Odes of Solomon, 42 short lyrical poems; the story of the ‘Aramean Sage’ Ahiqar, a narrative set in the time of the Assyrian king Sennacherib 1

This introduction is based on my About Syriac Web page on www.bethmardutho.org.

xxi

xxii

The New Syriac Primer

(740–681 BC) which is given as a reading in Chapter 6; and the Acts of Judas Thomas, a narrative of the Apostle’s mission to India. The fourth century witnessed the first major writings that survived till this day. Of the writings of the ‘Persian Sage’ Aphrahat, twenty-three Demonstrations survive, twenty-two of which form an alphabetic acrostic. Amongst the topics discussed are faith, love, prayer, war, humility, the Sabbath, and food. Another work of this period is the anonymous Book of Steps, dealing with spiritual direction. The most celebrated writer of this period, however, is Saint Ephrem the Syrian. He is the theologian-poet par excellence, and “perhaps, the only theologian-poet to rank beside Dante” as Robert Murray states.1 Saint Ephrem produced a wealth of theological works in prose and artistic poetry. His fame resulted in many writings of later centuries to be attributed to him. Of his genuine works, however, we have received many commentaries, expositions, refutations, letters, and above all poetry. We will be reading some of his works in Chapter 6 as well. The Golden Age (from 5th to 9th Centuries)

This period witnessed a major intellectual activity in the Syriac-speaking world. Over 70 important writers are known, not counting numerous anonymous works and the writings of lesser authors. Almost all of the writers wrote across many disciplines, though some names stand out in specific fields. Amongst the many poets, we received the writings of Narsai (d. ca. 502) and Jacob of Serugh (d. 521). Of the Biblical commentators, Ishodad of Merv and John of Dara (both 9th century) stand out. The mathematicians and astronomers include Sergius of Resh Aina (d. 536), Severus Sebokht (d. 666/7), and George of the Arabs (d. 724). Those who wrote on grammar and rhetoric include Jacob of Edessa (d. 708), Anton of Takrit (9th cent.), and Isho Bar Nun (d. 828). The fifth century witnessed the division of the Christian Church into many factions. It is worth noting that the Syriac tradition is the only linguistic tradition that represents the rich diversity resulting from this division, and preserves it till this day. The Christological controversies produced many theological debates. Amongst the most prominent apologists were Philoxenos of Mabbug (d. 523) and Babi the Great (d. 628). Theologians of the period also include Dadisho (7th century), Isaac of Nineveh (d. 7th century), Timothy I (d. 823), Moshe Bar Kepha (d. 903), and Theodore Bar Koni (8th cent.). One could go on naming famous authors whose works have come down to us. Suffice it to say that the Golden Age covered all fields of study under the sun: philosophy, logic, medicine, mathematics, astronomy, alchemy, history, theology, linguistics and literature. A great deal of the scholarly activities were centered in schools and monasteries throughout Syria and Mesopotamia. Of the schools we cannot but mention are the School of Edessa, the School of Nisibin and that of Qenneshrin. These among others produced many of the best known scholars. It is remarkable that a few of the monastic schools of this period are still in use today, most notably Mor Gabriel’s Monastery in southeast Turkey, and Mar Musa (Moses) the Ethiopian in Syria. Part of the History of Civilization (from 9th to 13th Centuries)

The focal point of world civilization passes from one region to another, and from one language to another, by contact. If we are to trace the history of any field of science, we begin with the ancient Mesopotamians and Egyptians, moving to the Greeks and Romans, then to the Arabs, ending up in Western Europe (not to underestimate the civilizations of 1

Robert Murray, Symbols of Church and Kingdom (Gorgias Press, 2004).

About Syriac

xxiii

Asia and South America). One bus stop in this journey is almost always forgotten: Syriac Central Station. From the 4th century onward, the Greek sciences were translated into Syriac, including philosophy, logic, medicine, mathematics, astronomy, and alchemy. When the Arabs desired to transmit the Greek sciences into Arabic during the 8th and 9th centuries, they turned to their Syriac subjects, who have had already a long experience in this field, to do the task. In most cases, these Syriac scholars translated the works first into their native language then into Arabic. As a result, many of the Arabic scientific terminology, including the names of plants, are rooted in Syriac. Scientific works and terminology from other cultures, such as Persian and Indian, passed to Arabic via Syriac; a noted example is the name of the chemical element Zirconium (via Syriac zargono meaning “color of gold”). The most celebrated translator of the period is Hunayn Ibn Ishaq (d. 873 or 877), the son of a druggist. In addition to translating and revising the translations of others, many translators graduated at his hands. Another translator is Thabit Ibn Qurra (d. 901). He wrote 15 scientific works in Syriac and 150 in Arabic, translated and revised Archimedes, Euclid, Ptolemy, and others. Thabit is also credited with introducing the mathematical theory of amicable numbers. Alongside this translation movement, native Syriac authors continued to flourish. During this period, Elijah of Anbar (10th cent.) produced an extensive gnomic work, and his namesake Elijah of Nisibin (d. 1046) wrote a chronography and an Arabic-Syriac glossary. Bar Salibi (d. 1171) produced many encyclopedic-type works on various topics, while Michael the Great (d. 1199) composed a world history from the creation till his time. While Saint Ephrem witnessed the beginning of the greatest period of Syriac literature, the 13th century writer Bar Ebroyo marked its end. Along with Saint Ephrem, Bar Ebroyo is the most famous of Syriac writers. A true polymath, he wrote on every subject under the sun. He produced over 20 books in theology, history, liturgy, medicine, philosophy, logic, mathematics, grammar, poetry, and a book of jokes! Decline of Syriac Literature (from 14th to 19th Centuries)

Traditional historians of Syriac literature mark the 13th century as the end of Syriac literature. While there was indeed a general decline in intellectual activity in the Middle East after the 13th century, Syriac writers continued to produce a considerable number of works, most of which have not been studied nor published. Writers of this period include Isaiah of Bet Sbirina who produced a contemporary account, in poetic form, of the devastation of Timur Leng (d. 1407). Among the other poets are Nuh the Lebanese (d. 1509), about whom we shall read in Chapter 6, and David the Phoenician. In the 16th century, the mathematician and Patriarch Ignatius Nimatallah, who abdicated his office in fear of execution and left to Rome, was invited by Pope Gregory to join the Commission on Calendar Reform. Shortly after, he wrote an extensive critique of the reform proposal which helped in shaping the Gregorian calendar. In the 17th and 18th centuries, the Maronite Assemani family produced a number of excellent scholars, most notably Joseph Simon Assemani (1687-1768). They played a magnificent role in introducing the Syriac heritage to the West. Joseph produced Bibliotheca Orientalis (reprinted now by Gorgias Press), the first and best (till this day) encyclopedia of Syriac works. Along with his nephew Stephen, they introduced the works of Saint Ephrem in 6 volumes to the European reader. The Maronite College in Italy continued this tradition. In addition to the general decline in literary productivity in the Middle East during this period, the Syriac-speaking communities went through many hardships. Persecutions and massacres under Ottoman Turkey left the Syriac-speaking world in continuous fear. The persecutions culminated in 1915, what the Syriac people call Sayfo “[The Year of the]

xxiv

The New Syriac Primer

Sword” when hundreds of thousands were collectively massacred. The result was the migration of the Syriac people to other countries of the Middle East, as well as the Diaspora in the west. The Modern Syriac Renaissance (20th Century)

The late 19th and early 20th centuries witnessed a revival of Syriac literature, both secular and religious. At the end of World War I and the massacres of the Christians of Ottoman Turkey that ensued, a spirit of ethnic identity swept across some of the Syriac-speaking communities of the Middle East which played a role in shaping Modern Literary Syriac. Thomas Audo, Chaldean metropolitan of Urmia (1853-1917), composed a valuable large-size Syriac dictionary. The Syriac Catholic Patriarch Afram Rahmani (1848-1929) and his Orthodox counterpart Patriarch Afram Barsoum (1887-1969) were among the most distinguished Syriac scholars of the 20th century, each producing a large number of scholarly studies. Journalism was a new genre in the Syriac world. Naoum Faiq (1868-1930) founded in 1908 one of the earliest Syriac periodicals, Star of the East. Two years earlier, the NeoAramaic periodical Kokhwa ‘Star’ appeared in Urmia. Today, a few dozen periodicals publish in Syriac and Neo-Aramaic. A few translations from western books into Syriac also appeared, most notably Bernardin de Saint Pierre’s romantic novel Paul et Virginie, translated by Paulos Gabriel (d. 1971) and Ghattas Maqdasi Elyas; and Racine’s play Athalie, translated by Abrohom Isu. During this century, most of the liturgical Syriac works, of the various denominations, were translated from Syriac into Malayalam, the language of the St. Thomas Christians, for purposes of worship. Among the most celebrated translators is Mathen Konat. Along the revival of Syriac literature, the 20th century witnessed an increased interest in the study of the Syriac heritage by western scholars. Today, there is an international conference on Syriac studies almost every year. Features of the Syriac Language Syriac is not like any western language you may have studied. Its alphabet is distinct and has no resemblance to the ‘a,b,c,…’ you know. The letters look like this: ƎƊƿ ƁźŶ ĮĭĬ űŬŨĥ ƦƣƢƟ ƞƙƖƏ. Further, it is written from right to left. In the above letter sequence, űŬŨĥ is the first word and ƦƣƢƟ is the last. Syriac books and manuscripts will seem in reverse to you. The last page of the book is actually the first, and vice versa. You are about to learn how to read and write the other way. Syriac has two distinct dialects: East and West, each with its own distinct script. But that is only a script. West Syriac ťŨĥ and its East Syriac counterpart ťŨĥ mean the same thing, the same way the word father in this script-like font means the same thing as FATHER IN THIS OTHER FONT. A more pronounced difference between the two dialects is the sound of vowels, the same way tomato is pronounced differently in British and American English. Apart from this, the dialects are mostly identical in their grammar and lexicon. This book is mostly written in West Syriac, introducing the East Syriac script in Chapter 8. Like any other language you are familiar with, Syriac has nouns and verbs, singular and plural, past tense and present tense, etc. There are some grammatical concepts that may not be familiar to the English reader like ‘gender’ which indicates if an object is masculine or feminine. There are a few other concepts that do not correspond to anything you may have learned before, such as the ‘measure’ of verbs, and the fact that vowels are written above consonants. These will be introduced gradually. Five of the 22 letters have sounds that may also be foreign to you as they do not correspond to any sound in English. Two of them are close enough to t and s. This leaves only three letters to worry about. Hopefully the recording will be of help.

1 Introduction to Reading and Writing This introductory chapter teaches you the basics of reading and writing Syriac. Each section introduces three or four letters of the alphabet, as well as a few basic concepts. Upon completing this chapter, you should be able to • Read vocalized and partially vocalized texts • Write words and sentences • Understand more than 70 words • Understand basic sentences

1.1 Olaph, Béth, Gomal, and Dolath The Letters Each letter of the Syriac alphabet has a name. The first four letters are listed below: Name Olaph Béth Gomal Dolath

Syriac

Hebrew

Arabic

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī

ʠ ʡ ʢ ʣ

΍ Ώ Egyptian Ν

Ω

Sound (silent) b g d

The first column, labeled ‘Name’, gives the name of each of the four letters. The second column, labeled ‘Syriac’, gives the shapes of the letters in the Serto script (there are two other scripts, Estrangelo and East Syriac, which we will cover in Chapter 8). The next two columns give the Hebrew and Arabic equivalents in case you know either language (if you do not, simply ignore them). The last column gives the sound of the letters. This table structure will be followed in subsequent sections of this chapter. Béth is pronounced as b in boy, Gomal as g in give, and Dolath as d in Dad. In West Syriac pronunciation, Olaph is silent in most contexts, especially in words introduced in this chapter. Syriac is written from right to left. When letters are combined to form words, they are connected to each other, like English handwriting. For example, the sequence Gomal Béth is written as follows:

Ūū Some letters connect to other letters only on the right. Olaph and Dolath are such letters. For example, in the sequence Béth Olaph Béth, the letter Olaph connects only to the preceding Béth (i.e., the Béth on its right):

ħŤŨ 1

2

Introduction to Reading and Writing

Note also that in this context, Olaph takes a more straight shape. Compare Olaph when it is at the beginning of the word (with a curvy shape ĥ ), and when it is connected to another letter (with a straight shape ť) in the sequence Olaph Béth Olaph:

ťŨĥ Similarly, Dolath connects only to letters on its right as shown in the sequence Olaph Béth Dolath:

űŨĥ Note that the shape of Ī changes to ű when it connects to other letters. The following table summarizes how letters connect to each other. Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ťŨ Ūū ŭŨ űŨ

ħŤŨ ŭũū ŪŬŨ ħűŨ

ħĥ ŭŨ Ūū ħĪ

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī

Olaph Béth Gomal Dolath

The ‘Final Position’ column gives the shapes of letters at the end of words, the ‘Middle Position’ column gives the shapes of letters in the middle of words, etc. Some Vowels Try reading aloud the following sequences.

ĪĥűŬŨ

űŨűŨ

űū

Ūū

“How can I read sequences of letters if there are no vowels in between?” you say. Exactly! Unlike English, Syriac vowels are not written on the same line as letters. They are written above the letters (sometimes below, but I will not inflict that upon you). Imagine the English word boy, being written with the vowel o on top of the b as follows: o by Here are three Syriac vowels, the shape of each is shown above a dotted circle, ‫ڔ‬. The dotted circle represents the letter on which the vowel is written. Name

Phthoʘo Zqopho Rboʛo

› ºŅ š¡ º

Shape

Sound

Read a as in man Read o as in go Read e as in men

Each vowel has a name which you don’t have to memorize, but you can impress people if you do! (Don’t worry about the dots under ‘h’ in Phthoʘo and ‘s’ in Rboʛo for now.) You can get the exact pronunciation of the vowels when we read the text below. › Ņ Basically, placing º over the letter ħ gives ħł, which is read ba. Similarly, placing š over Ĩ ň gives ĨŅ, read go, and placing š over Ī gives Īň, read dé.

Olaph, Béth, Gomal, and Dolath

3

Reading for the Very First Time Read the following with the help of the audio files which you can download from www.gorgiaspress.com. For now, I will be giving you the transliteration. But start getting used to reading without transliterations as I will no longer give them in later sections. It’s a tough world out there! ň Ņ ł 1 ĥ ĥ ĥ é o a

English

Read

father

a-bo

baby

bo-bo

fruit

é-bo

uncle

do-do

side

ga-bo

bear

dé-bo

was lost

é-bad

Baghdad

bag-dad

elected, chose

gbo

ħň

ħŅ

ħł

bé

bo

ba

Ĩň

ĨŅ

Ĩł

gé

go

ga

Īň

ĪŅ

Īł

dé

do

da

2 3 4

Syriac Word

ł ťŨĥŅ ťũŅŨŅ ň ťŨĥŅ ŧ ĪŅĪŅ Ņ ł ťũū Ņň ťŨĪ ň űŨĥł ł ł ĪĥűŬŨ ťũŅū

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Read the above repeatedly until you are comfortable that you mastered each word before moving on. Notes 1. Did you notice that ħł and ťŨł sound the same? Similarly, Ĩł and ťūł, and Īł and ŧĪł have the same pronunciation, respectively. In other words, ĥ is silent at the end of words. This is also the case when other vowels are used as shown in the following example pairs:

ťŨŅ = ħŅ ťŨň = ħň

ŧ ĪŅ = ĪŅ ŧĪň = Īň

ťūŅ = ĨŅ ťūň = Ĩň

2. Did you notice that some words have the same letters but differ in vowels? Make sure you do not confuse them. Here are two pairs as an example:

4

ł ťŨĥŅ Ņ ł ťũū

Introduction to Reading and Writing

ň

father ťŨĥŅ fruit Ņ side ťũū elected 3. You may find it difficult at the beginning to pronounce two letters when they come next Ņ . This can be mastered to each other without an intervening vowel such as Ūū in ťũū only by practice and repetition. Phrases It is hard to come up with phrases or sentences with the few words we have covered, but let us try nevertheless. For each sentence, I will give the literal translation of each word directly under it, then give a more idiomatic English translation in italic.

ŧĪĪŅŅ

Ņ ťũū

ł ťŨŅĥ

1

uncle elected father The father elected the uncle.

ł ťŨĥŅ

Ņ ťũū

ŧĪĪŅŅ

2

father elected uncle The uncle elected the father.

ň űŨĥł

Ņň ťŨĪ

3

was lost bear The bear was lost. Writing Syriac for the Very First Time Remember that Syriac is written from right to left. The following images guide you to writing the letters we just learned. These were done by a calligrapher1 and differ a bit from the font used in the book. The numbers indicate the beginning of a stroke.

The letter ĥ is written from the top to the bottom with one stroke. The calligrapher in this case used a straight ĥ, but you can curve it a bit if you like. Note that the bottom of ĥ goes a bit below the writing line. The letter ħ is also written in one stroke. The letter sits on the writing line. The letter Ĩ is also written in one stroke. About one third of the letter is above the writing line. The calligrapher in this case writes Ĩ in a sharper angle than the printed version

ň ł ), ťƀſĿŴƏ ťŹĿŴƏ Ņ ł ) and ýshak Akan (ųƣĭƢŨ The images are taken from Erdas Salci (ťƣŴŶ (Södertälje, 1983). 1

Olaph, Béth, Gomal, and Dolath

5

shown in this book. It is up to you to use the angle you want. I usually write it closer to the printed version. The letter Ī is written in two strokes, but the arrow of the first stroke requires an explanation. In the first stroke, the pen starts from the white circle at point 1 and moves clockwise. When the pen reaches the white circle where you began, you start filling the top part clockwise with each circle moving closer to the center until the entire thing is filled. Then you move the pen to a position where you can begin writing the tail under the writing line, all of this in one stroke. When you fill in the top part, you basically go in a clockwise motion from the outside of the letter to the inside, and then move again to the outside to get to the point where you draw the tail. The second stroke is simply a dot under the letter. The following image illustrates how to write the three words ťŨĥ, ťũū , and ĪĥűŬŨ. The numbers show the motions of the pen. An asterisk, *, indicates the beginning of a stroke, while a ’ indicates the end of a stroke.

Let’s start with ťŨĥ. The ĥ is simply one stroke from point 1 to 2. Then ťŨ is written as one stroke. You start from point 3, moving to 4 and 5, then continue up to point 6. Now, you continue to write over the same line but downward from point 6 through 7 ending at point 8. Remember, the whole of ťŨ is one stroke. The word ťũū is written with two strokes. In the first stroke, you write ū from point 1 to 2 then to 3. In the second stroke you write ťŨ beginning at point 4 moving back and then down to point 3 to join with the first stroke, then moving to point 5. At point 5 you continue with the ť as in ťŨĥ. Let’s move to ĪŧűŬŨ. Two strokes take care of űŬŨ by following the points 1 through 6 for the first stroke, and then the dot at point 7 for the second stroke. Note that the connected Dolath does not have a circular part on top of the writing line and hence there is nothing to fill. The ĥ is then straightforward (you can choose to make it straight or curved), then you write the Ī as before. Let’s now turn our attention to the vowels. The following image gives the shapes of the three vowels we covered.

ł

Ņ

The vowel š is written with two strokes as shown. The vowel š is written with one ň stroke, and the vowel š looks like an umbrella and is written with two strokes. Practice by putting them on the words ťŨĥ, ťũū , and ĪĥűŬŨ. Make sure to practice the writing many times before going to the next section. You may want to get some see-through paper and place it on top of the above examples, and trace over the letters and words.

6

Introduction to Reading and Writing

Review • The first four letters of the alphabet are: ĥ (Olaph, silent), ħ (Béth, b), Ĩ (Gomal, g), and Ī (Dolath, d ). • Syriac is written from right to left. • Some letters connect on both sides; others connect only on the right. The letters ĥ and Ī connect only on the right, while ħ and Ĩ connect on both sides. Ņ ł. • The letter ĥ takes a straight shape when it precedes a letter, e.g., ťŨĥ ł ň. • The letter Ī takes the shape ű when connected on the right; e.g., űŨĥ ň Ņ ł • Vowels are written above letters. Three (out of five) vowels are: š (a), š (o), and š (é). • This section covered the following words: ł father ťŨĥŅ Ņ Ņ baby ťũŨ ň fruit ťŨĥŅ uncle ŧĪĪŅŅ Ņ ł side ťũū Ņň bear ťŨĪ

ň űŨĥł Ņ ťũū ł ł ĪĥűŬŨ

was lost elected Baghdad Exercise 1.1 1. Transcribe in Syriac the following syllables: a. ba b. go c. dé 2. Translate the following into English: Ņ Ņ łň ł ł b. űŨĥ c. ĪĥűŬŨ a. ťũŨ 3. Put vowel marks on the following sentences: b. ťŨĥ ťũū ŧĪĪ a. ŧĪĪ ťũū ťũŨ 4. Translate the sentences in 3 into English.

d. o

Ņ d. ťũū c. ťŨĥ

űŨĥ

1.2 Hé, Waw, and Zayn The next three letters of the Syriac alphabet are: Name Hé Waw Zayn

Syriac

Hebrew

Arabic

Ĭ ĭ Į

ʤ

˰ϫ ϭ ί

ʥ ʦ

Sound h w z

Hé is pronounced as h in home, Waw as w in we, and Zayn as z in zebra. All three letters connect only to the right.

Hé, Waw, and Zayn

7

Another Vowel ň Ņ ł In the previous section, we introduced three vowels: š (a), š (o), and š (é). We are now ready to introduce a fourth vowel. Its name is Ȩʛoʛo (again don’t worry about the dots under ŏ ‘s’ for now, or the first funny opening quote). What you need to know is its shape, š, and its sound, oo as in moon. ŏ Apart from two words which we will learn later (see section 1.4), š is always followed ŏ by the letter ĭ. In fact, the sequence ĭš forms the vowel oo. Examples are: ŴŨŏ boo, Ŵūŏ goo, ĭĪŏ doo, ĭĬŏ hoo, etc. The following table summarizes how the letters connect to each other. Hé Waw Zayn

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ųŨ ŴŨ ŵŨ

ħųŨ ħŴŨ ħŵŨ

ħĬ ħĭ ħĮ

Ĭ ĭ Į

Reading Read the following with the aid of the audio files. Try reading while covering the transliterations with a piece of paper. 1 ĭĬŏ Ĭň ĬŅ Ĭł hoo hé ho ha

ĭĭŏ

ĭň

ĭŅ

ĭł

woo

wé

wo

wa

ĭĮŏ

Įň

ĮŅ

Įł

zoo

zé

zo

za

English

Read

well (noun)

gu-bo

bell

za-go

goose

wa-zo

treasure

ga-zo

money, coin

zu-zo

nut

gaw-zo

flower

ha-bo-bo

behold

ho

that

haw

2

3

Syriac Word

Ņ ŏ ťŨŴū ťūŅ Įł Ŧ ĮĭŅł Ņ ł Ŧ ŵū Ņ ŏ Ŧ ĮĭĮ Ņ ł Ŧ ĮŴū Ņ ł ťũŅŨĬ ŦĬŅ ĭĬł

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

8

Introduction to Reading and Writing

hab

ĭĬŏ ħĬł

14

bgaw

ł ŴŬŨ

15

he

hoo

give (imperative) inside

13

Phrases

ŦĮĭŅł

ŦĬŅ

1

goose behold Behold! The goose. Or: Behold! A goose.

Father, give money.

Ņ ŏ ŦĮĭĮ

ħĬł

ł ťŨĥŅ

money

give

father

ň űŨĥł

Ņ ł Ŧŵū

was lost

treasure

2

3

The treasure was lost. Or: A treasure was lost.

Ņ ł ŦĮŴū

ħĬł

ŧĪĪŅŅ

nut

give

uncle

4

Uncle, give a nut.

Ņ ŏ ŴŬŨ ł ťŨŴū well

Ņ ł Ŧŵū

5

inside treasure

The/a treasure inside the/a well. Unlike English, Syriac does not have a clear DEFINITE ARTICLE (i.e., the), or INDEFINITE ARTICLE (i.e., a/an). So a sentence can be read both ways: Behold! The goose; or Behold a goose. Hopefully a larger context will give you a clue. The Power of Waw The letter ĭ also means and, but when it plays this role it attaches itself to the next word. Imagine the English sentence cat and mouse being written cat andmouse (without a space Ņ ł ‘father’ and ťũŨ Ņ Ņ ‘child’ as between and and mouse). For example, we can use ĭ with ťŨĥ follows: Ņ Ņ ťŨĥŅł father and child ťũŨĭ Here are additional examples: Ņ Ņ ťŨĥŅł father and uncle ŧĪĪĭ Ņ ŏ Ŧŵū Ņ ł treasure and money ŦĮĭĮĭ Ņ Ņ ł Ņ ł ťũŨĬ flower and nut ŦĮŴūĭ

Hé, Waw, and Zayn

9

Writing The following images illustrate how to write Ĭ, ĭ, and Į. The letter Ĭ is written in two strokes. The tail in the first goes a bit below the writing line. Stroke 2 is clockwise in some traditions, but in others counter clockwise and begins at the point where the circle meets the tail. Similarly, ĭ is counter clockwise in some traditions. The tip of Į ends just under the writing line.

The following example illustrates how some of the letters of words we studied connect to each other.

The word Ŧŵū is written in two strokes. In the first, the pen moves from 1 to 2, then to 3, then to 4 upwards. The pen then traces on the same line going down to point 5 and ends there. The second stroke is for the final ĥ. The word ŴŬŨ is written in one stroke. When ĭ is connected, it is written clockwise. ŏ The vowel š is written in two strokes, plus the dot as shown.

Review • We studied three more letters of the alphabet: Ĭ (Hé, h), ĭ (Waw, w), and Į (Zayn, z). All three connect only to the right. ŏ • We also covered the vowel š (oo) which is always followed by a ĭ. • Syriac does not have a clear definite article (e.g., the) or indefinite article (i.e., a/an). Nouns can be translated either way depending on the context. • The letter ĭ also means and. In such cases, it is attached to the word that follows it. • This section covered the following new words: behold that bell treasure flower

ŦĬŅ ĭĬł ťūŅ Įł Ņ ł Ŧŵū Ņ Ņ ł ťũŨĬ

10

Introduction to Reading and Writing

ĭĬŏ Ņ ŏ ťŨŴū ŦĮĭŅł Ņ ŏ ŦĮĭĮ Ņ ł ŦĮŴū ħĬł ł ŴŬŨ

he well (noun) goose money nut give (imperative) inside Exercise 1.2 1. Transcribe the following syllables in Syriac: a. boo b. zé c. ha e. woo f. ga g. zoo 2. Translate into English:

d. wo h. zo

Ņ Ņ ł ŦĮĭŅ ł ŦĬŅ ťũŨĬĭ Ņ ŏ ŴŬŨ Ņ ł ŦĮĭĮ Ņ ŏ ł Ŧŵūĭ ťŨŴū Ņ ł ĭĬł ħĬł ťŨĥŅ ł ŦĮŴū

a b c

ťū Į ħĬ ťŨĥ űŨĥ ťũŨ ŦĬ ŧĪĪ ťũū ťŨĥ ĭĬł

a b c

3. Translate into Syriac: a. Uncle, give money. b. The money was lost and the treasure was lost. c. The bear was lost inside the well. 4. Add vowel marks to the following sentences:

5. Translate the sentences in 4 into English.

1.3 ʙéth, ʝéth, and Yudh This section introduces three additional letters. They are: Name ʗéth ʝéth Yudh

Syriac

Hebrew

Arabic

į İ IJ

ʧ ʨ ʩ

Ρ ρ ϱ

Sound ʘ ʜ y

Now it is time to talk about the dots under letters! There are sounds in Syriac that do not exist in English. We simply use the closest English sound with a dot under it to designate the sound. Both ʗéth and ʝéth are such sounds.

ʗéth, ʝéth, and Yudh

11

Figure 1. The pronounciation of h (left) and į (right).

The closest English sound to į is h, but it originates deeper in the throat as illustrated in Figure 1. Basically, you need to place the back of your tongue (designated by T in the diagrams) closer to point 1 in the diagram. Listen carefully to the audio in the reading sections to get the gist of it. The image above compares English h (on the left) with į (on the right). Figure 2 shows the sound of the letter İ (on the right) as compared with English t (on the left). In the case of t, you place the top of your tongue against your teeth; in the case of İ, however, you place the entire tongue on the roof of your mouth (point 1 in the figure). It is not easy if you have no prior experience in another Semitic language; you just need to practice. Figure 2. The pronunciation of t (left) and İ (right).

The letter IJ is simply pronounced as y in yet. Note that it is similar in shape to į and they can be easily confused—more on this below. All three letters connect to both left and right. However, when İ connects to a letter on the right, a stroke going from the base line to the top tip of the İ makes that connection as in ŻŨ. The following table summarizes how letters connect to each other. ʗéth ʝéth Yudh

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ŸŨ ŻŨ ƁŨ

ŪŷŨ ŪźŨ ŪƀŨ

ŪŶ ŪŹ Ūſ

į İ IJ

12

Introduction to Reading and Writing

One Final Vowel We are ready now to introduce the last vowel. Its name is ʗboʛo (again, don’t worry about Ō the name for now). Its shape is š and it is pronounced ee as in meet. Ō Ō Usually, but not always, š is followed by Yudh when it forms this vowel as in IJš (the ŏ ŏ same way š is usually followed by ĭ to form ĭš). For example, IJĬŌ reads hee. Reading Read the following with the aid of the audio files. Pay special attention to the pronunciation of į and İ. 1 ŴŶŏ ƁÿŶŌ įň įŅ įł ʗoo ʗee ʗé ʗo ʗa

ŏ ŴŹ

Ō ƁŹ

ň İ

Ņ İ

ł İ

ʝoo

ʝee

ʝé

ʝo

ʝa

Ŵſŏ

ƁſŌ

IJň

IJŅ

IJł

Yoo

Yee

Yé

Yo

Ya

ŴŶŏ

ƁŶŌ

ťŶň

ťŶŅ

ťŶł

ʗoo

ʗee

ʗé

ʗo

ʗa

ŏ ŴŹ

Ō ƁŹ

ň ťŹ

Ņ ťŹ

ł ťŹ

ʝoo

ʝee

ʝé

ʝo

ʝa

Ŵſŏ

ƁſŌ

ťſň

ťŅſ

ťſł

Yoo

Yee

Yé

Yo

Ya

English

Read

hand

ee-do

good

ʜo-bo

thread

ʘoo-ʜo

duck

ba-ʜo

saw (to see)

ʘzo

sinned

ʘʜo

one (masc.)

ʘad

one (fem.)

ʘdo

brother

aʘo

2

3

4

5

6

Syriac Word

Ņ Ō ŧűſĥ Ņ ťũŅŹ Ņ ťŹŴŶŏ Ņ ťźŨł

10

Ņ ŦŵŶ

11

Ņ ťźŶ űŶł Ņ ŧűŶ ł ťŶĥŅ

7 8 9

12 13 14 15

ʗéth, ʝéth, and Yudh

13

Masculine and Feminine Ņ mean one? The first is designated as masculine and the Did you notice that both űŶł and ŧűŶ second as feminine. While numbers in English are not gender-specific (masculine versus feminine), they are in Syriac. Nouns are also classified as masculine or feminine. The nouns we have listed above Ņ Ō ‘hand’) are all masculine. When words modify each other, they must have the (apart from ŧűſĥ Ņ Ō ŧűŶ Ņ ‘one hand’ (both words are feminine), but ťŨĥŅ ł űŶł same gender. For example, we say ŧűſĥ ‘one father’ (both words are masculine). Recognizing feminine words is not as bad as it looks because most of them end in a letter called Taw. But as it is the last letter of the alphabet, you just have to wait until we learn it. Beware of į Next to IJ As mentioned above, the shape of į is similar to IJ and they can be easily confused. Can you read this word: ťſűƀíŷíſ? Ņ Ņ Ō Ō . Does that help? Here it is again with vowels: ťſűƀŷſ Ņ Ņ Ō Ō . So the first letter is Now, here it is with longer connections between the letters: ťſűƀÿŷÿſ Ņ Ņ Ō Ō (get used to it IJ (Yudh), the second is į (ʗeth) and the third is IJ (Yudh). The word ťſűƀŷſ without the longer connections) means single or solitary. It is also a reference to Christ as the only-begotten. Phrases

Ņ Ō ŧűſĥ

Ņ Ŧ ŵŶ

ł ťŶĥŅ

hand

saw

brother

Ņ ťźŨł

ŦĬŅ

1

The/a brother saw the/a hand.

Ņ ŏ ŴŬŨ ł ťŨŴū

Ņł Ŧ Įĭĭ

well inside Behold, the duck and the goose inside the well.

and+goose

Ņ Ņ ťũŹ

ŅŅ ŧ ĪĪĭ

good

and+uncle

2

duck behold

Ņ Ņ ťũŹ

ł ťŶĥŅ

3

good brother

Good brother and good uncle.

Ņ ŏ ŴŬŨ ł ťŨŴū well

Ņ ł Ŧ ŵū

inside treasure

Ņ Ŧ ŵŶ

ł ťŨĥŅ

saw

father

Ņ ťźŶ

ŧ ĪĪŅŅ

4

The father saw the treasure inside the well. sinned uncle The uncle sinned.

5

14

Introduction to Reading and Writing

Writing Each of the letters introduced in this section is written in one stroke as shown below. Note that į and IJ are similar. (Note that there are two ways to begin į and IJ. The first is as shown in į at point 1 where you start at the circle, move a bit up, then down and to the right. The second is as in IJ at point 1.)

Ō

Ņ Here are a few words that illustrate how letters connect with each other. The word ŧűſĥ is written in four strokes. First you write ĥ as before. Then you write űſ from point 3, moving to point 4, then tracing down to point 5, in addition to the dot at point 6. Then you write the final ĥ which is straight.

Ņ

The word ťŹŴŶŏ is written in two strokes. First ŴŶ is written following points 1 to 9. You start at point 1 at the writing line, then move a bit above the line to point 2, then back to the writing line at point 3. You repeat the same process going to point 4, then 5. Now you continue to point six to write the ĭ ending at point 9. The second stroke is for ťŹ. You start from the top at point 10, moving down to point 11, then counter clockwise to point 12 and continuing the circle and moving to point 13. From point 13, you write the final ť as you learned in the previous lesson, going to the top of the letter, then tracing on the same line to the bottom. Ņ Finally, ťźŨł is written in one stroke. You start from point 1, back to the writing line at point 2, then finishing the ħ at point 3. Now you go up to connect to the top of the İ at point 4. You then move down to point 5. From point 5, you follow the same steps as you Ņ did with ťŹŴŶŏ to finish the word. Ō The vowel š is written in three strokes as indicated. You can interchange the order of strokes 1 and 2.

Review • We studied three more letters of the alphabet: į (ʗéth, ʚ), İ (ʝéth, ʞ), and IJ (Yudh, y). The first two letters do not have equivalent sounds in English (see above for more details.)

ʗéth, ʝéth, and Yudh • • • • •

15

All three connect to the left and the right, but İ takes a long stroke from the base line to its top tip when it connects to preceding letters, e.g., ŻŨ. Ō We also covered the vowel š (ee) which is often followed by a IJ. Nouns in Syriac are classified as either feminine or masculine. Unless otherwise stated, you can assume that the nouns we introduce are masculine. Ņ Ņ ŷſ ŌŌ . Special attention must be paid in order not to confuse adjacent IJ and į ; e.g., ťſűƀ This section covered the following new words: Ņ Ō hand (feminine) ŧűſĥ ł brother ťŶĥŅ Ņ Ņ ťũŹ good Ņ thread ťŹŴŶŏ duck saw (past tense of to see) sinned one (masculine) one (feminine) single, solitary, only-begotten

Vocabulary Review All the words we have learned before are listed here in alphabetical order: father fruit was lost brother hand (f.) baby Baghdad inside duck elected side well (noun) nut treasure bear uncle behold give (imperative) flower

Ņ ťźŨł Ņ Ŧ ŵŶ Ņ ťźŶ űŶł Ņ ŧűŶ ŅŅ ŌŌ ťſűƀŷſ

ł ťŨĥŅ ňŅ ťŨĥ ň űŨĥł ł ťŶĥŅ ŌŅ ŧűſĥ Ņ Ņ ťũŨ ł ł ĪĥűŬŨ ł ŴŬŨ Ņ ł ťźŨ Ņ ťũū Ņ ł ťũū Ņ ŏ ťŨŴū Ņ ł ŦĮŴū Ņ ł Ŧŵū Ņň ťŨĪ ŧĪĪŅŅ ŦĬŅ ħĬł Ņ Ņ ł ťũŨĬ

16

Introduction to Reading and Writing

ĭĬŏ ĭĬł ŦĮĭŅł ťūŅ Įł Ņ ŏ ŦĮĭĮ ŅŅ ŌŌ ťſűƀŷſ űŶł Ņ ŧűŶ Ņ ŏ ťŹŴŶ Ņ ŦŵŶ Ņ ťźŶ Ņ Ņ ťũŹ

he that goose bell money single, solitary, only-begotten one (m.) one (f.) thread saw (past tense of to see) sinned good Exercise 1.3 1. Translate into English:

Ņ ŏ ł Ņ Ņł Ņ ŏ ŴŬŨ ł ťŹŴŶ ťŨŴū űŶ ŦŵŶ ťŨĥ Ņ ł ł łűŨĥň ťźŨ űŶ ł Ņ ŅŅ Ņ ťźŶ ŧĪĪĭ ťźŶ ťŨĥŅ

a b c

2. Translate into Syriac: a. A good uncle* sinned. b. One hand, and one good duck. c. The good uncle* saw a goose inside the well. * Hint: Look at sentence 3 above for the word order for good uncle (the adjective follows the noun). 3. Put vowel marks on the following:

ťũŨĭ ťŶĥ ŦŵŶ ťŨĥ ĭĬ ťũŹ ŧĪĪĭ ťŨĥ ŦĬ ťŨĥ űŶ ŧűſĥ ŧűŶ 4. Translate the sentences in 3 into English.

1.4 Koph, Lomadh, Mim, and Nun This section introduces the next four letters of the Syriac alphabet. They are: Name Koph Lomadh Mim Nun

Syriac

Hebrew

Arabic

Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ

ʫ ʬ ʭ ʰ

ϙ ϝ ϡ ϥ

Sound k l m n

a b c d

Koph, Lomadh, Mim, and Nun

17

The letter Ĵ sounds like k in kilo, ĵ as l in let, Ķ as m in meet, and ķ as n in not. There are two things that are unique about this set of letters. Firstly, their sequence in the alphabet corresponds to the sequence of their counterparts in the English alphabet, so it is easier to remember their sequence: k, l, m, n. Secondly, each of the above letters has two shapes. One used in the beginning and middle of words, and the other at the end of words. The forms shown above are the final forms that appear at the end of words. The forms that appear at the beginning and middle of words are: ÿƃ Koph Lomadh ÿƆ Mim ÿƉ Nun ÿƌ The following table summarizes how these letters connect to others. Koph Lomadh Mim Nun

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ƅŨ ƈŨ ƋŨ ƎŨ

ŪƄŨ ŪƇŨ ŪƊŨ ŪƍŨ

Ūƃ ŪƆ ŪƉ Ūƌ

Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ

One more thing before we move on… No two letters of the alphabet are more envious of each other than ĥ (whose shape is straight up) and Ɔ (whose shape is slanted like a back slash, \). How so? Well, if ĥ is immediately followed by Ɔ, it gets envious and wants to be slanted too. So you end up with ƭ instead of Ɔĥ. Now, if Ɔ is immediately followed by ĥ, it too gets envious and wants to be straight up. So you end up with Ƨ instead of ťƆ. In other words, whichever letter comes first, it assumes the shape of the following letter. While Ƨ is obligatory, ƭ is optional. Here are two examples: Ņ no Ƨ Ņ Ņ ł God (Ŧųƭ) ŦųëƆĥ Reading

Ŵƃŏ

ƁƃŌ

ÿƃň

ÿƃŅ

ÿƃł

koo

kee

ké

ko

ka

ŴƆŏ

ƁƆŌ

ÿƆň

ÿƆŅ

ÿƆł

loo

lee

lé

lo

la

ŴƉŏ

ƁƉŌ

ÿƉň

ÿƉŅ

ÿƉł

moo

mee

mé

mo

ma

1

2

3

18

Introduction to Reading and Writing

Ŵƌŏ

ƁƌŌ

ÿƌň

ÿƌŅ

ÿƌł

noo

nee

né

no

na

Ŵƃŏ

ƁƃŌ

ŴƆŏ

ƁƆŌ

ťƃň ň Ƨ

ťƃŅ Ņ Ƨ

ťƃł ł Ƨ

6

ŴƉŏ

ƁƉŌ

ťƉň

ťƉŅ

ťƉł

7

Ŵƌŏ

ƁƌŌ

ljň

ljŅ

ljł

8

English

Read

mother (f.)

é-mo

fish

nu-no

this (m.)

ho-no

this (f.)

ho-dé

sea

ya-mo

camel

ga-mlo

milk

ʘal-bo

salt

mél-ʘo

I

é-no

God

a-lo-ho

spoke

ma-lel

ate

é-kal

went

é-zal

from

men

every, each

kul

because

me-ʜul

4

5

Syriac Word

ň ťƉĥŅ ljŴŅƌŏ ljŅĬŅ ňŅ ŧĪĬ

ťƊſŅł Ņ ƨƊūł Ņ ł ťũÿƇŶ Ņ ň ťŷÿƇƉ ň ljĥŅ Ņ Ņ ł ŦųëƆĥ ň ł džƉ ň ƈƃĥł ň ĵĮĥł ƎƉň ƈƃŏ ŏ ƈźƉň

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Where Did the Waw Go? ŏ I mentioned earlier in section 1.2 that whenever there is the vowel š, it is always followed by ŏ ĭ. There are two words that violate this rule. They are ƈƃŏ ‘every’ and ƈźƉň ‘because’. In ŏ fact, in early Syriac manuscripts, even these two words appear with a ĭ as in ĵŴƃ and ŏ ň ĵŴźƉ. (Some contemporary educators, in particular the late Abrohom Nuro, call for bringing back the old tradition of using ĭ in these two words.)

Koph, Lomadh, Mim, and Nun

19

Phrases

The fish in the sea.

ťƊſŅł

ł ŴŬŨ

Ņ ŏ ljŴƌ

sea

in

fish

ň ťŨĥŅ

ň ƈƃĥł

Ņ ƨƊūł

ŅŅ ljĬ

fruit

ate

camel

this

1

2

This camel ate fruit.

ł ł ĪĥűŬŨ

ƎƉň

Ņ ł ťŷÿƇƉ Ņ ň ťũÿƇŶĭ

Baghdad from

and+milk

salt

ł ň ĵĮĥĭ

ň ł džƉ

ŧĪĪŅŅ

and+went

spoke

uncle

3

Salt and milk from Baghdad.

The uncle spoke and went.

Ņ ł ŦĮŴū

ň ƈƃĥł

Ņň ťŨĪ

ƈƃŏ

nut

ate

bear

each

4

5

Each bear ate a nut. Writing Recall that each of the letters introduced in this section has two shapes: one used in the beginning and middle of words, and another at the end. Here are the various shapes:

Initial ƃ and final Ĵ are written in one stroke. There is actually another tradition of writing final Ĵ in two strokes: you first write a IJ, then write the tail under it to make Ĵ. (The one stroke tradition prevails in Tur Abdin.) The letter ĵ is written in two strokes as shown; its initial version Ɔ is also written in two strokes where the second stroke is simply the connecting line. This will be illustrated in the example below. Initial Ɖ is written in two strokes, the second stroke being the connection line, while final Ķ is written in one stroke. Finally, initial ƌ and final Ǝ are written in one stroke. Here are some word examples in the image below. Remember that * marks a new stroke, and ’ marks the end of a stroke. The word ťŷƇƉ is written in three strokes. You begin writing Ɖ from point 1 to 4 in one stroke, then write its connection line starting at point 5 with a second stroke. The second stroke continues in writing the slanted portion of the letter Ƈ ending at point 7. The third stroke begins at point 8 writing the connection line for Ƈ and

20

Introduction to Reading and Writing

then continues to write Ŷ. Once at point 13, you write the final ť as before moving the pen to the top of the letter, then tracing on the same line to the bottom.

The word ƈƃ is written in two strokes. In the first stroke, you write ƃ starting from point 1, passing through point 2, then moving to point 3. With the same stroke you start writing Ɔ and end the stroke at the top of the letter at point 4. You then start the second stroke at point 5, moving to point 6 then 7. The word ƎƉ is written in two strokes. The Ɖ is written the same way as Ɖ in ťŷƇƉ. Then the final Ǝ is written as shown above. The rest of the words are written tracing the points as indicated. Note that Ŧųƭ has the ligature ƭ and ƨƊū has the ligature Ƨ. The latter is written like final ť where you begin at the bottom of the ligature (point 9 in ƨƊū ) moving up to point 10, then tracing down on the same line to point 12, then moving up to point 13, then tracing down on the same line through point 14 ending in point 15. Review • We introduced four more letters of the alphabet: Ĵ (Koph, k), ĵ (Lomadh, l ), Ķ (Mim, m), and ķ (Nun, n). All four connect on both sides. • All four letters have another shape that is used at the beginning and middle of words: ƃ (Koph), Ɔ (Lomadh), Ɖ (Mim), and ƌ (Nun). Ņ • When ÿƆ is followed by ĥ, it becomes straight (e.g., Ƨ ); when ĥ is followed by ÿƆ, it Ņ Ņ ł ). optionally becomes slanted (e.g., ŦųëƆĥ • This section covered the following new words: ň ťƉĥŅ mother fish ljŴŅƌŏ ŅŅ this (m.) ljĬ ňŅ this (f.) ŧĪĬ sea ťƊſŅł Ņ ł camel ƨƊū Ņ ł milk ťũÿƇŶ Ņ ň salt ťŷÿƇƉ ň I ljĥŅ Ņ Ņ ł God ŦųëƆĥ ň ł spoke džƉ

The Ž†ÊÁ Letters

ň ƈƃĥł ň ĵĮĥł ƎƉň ƈƃŏ ŏ ƈźƉň

ate went from all because Exercise 1.4 1. Translate into English:

ł ň ŦĮĭŅ ł ƈƃĥł ň ĵĮĥĭ Ņ ŧĪĪŅ Ņ Ņ ŏ ŦŵŶ ł ljŴƌ ťƊſŅł ŴŬŨ Ņ ł ň ťźŶ űŨĥĭ

21

ł ťŨĥŅ ŅŅ ljĬ ł ťŨĥŅ

a b c

_____ _____ _____ _____

a b c d

ĵĮĥ ťŨĥ ljĬ ťƉĥ ŧĪĬ ƈƃĥ ƨƊū ljĬ ŧĪĪĭ ljĥ

a b c d

2. Translate into Syriac: a. This father, and this mother. b. God spoke. c. This milk from Baghdad. 3. Write the number ‘one’ in Syriac in the following:

ťŨĥ ťƉĥ ŧűſĥ Ŧųƭ 4. Put vowel marks on the following:

5. Translate the sentences in 4 into English.

1.5 The ĵĭűŨ Letters Do you remember the Power of Waw? Recall from section 1.2 that the letter ĭ, which means and, attaches itself to the next Ņ Ņ ‘child’ gives ťũŨĭ Ņ Ņ ‘and child’. word. For example, ĭ attached to ťũŨ Three other letters operate in the same way: they attach themselves to the following word. Here they are listed along with ĭ: ħ meaning in Ī meaning of ĭ meaning and Ɔ meaning to

ŏ letters.’ (They have meanings other than the The four letters are known as ‘the ĵĭűŨ ones listed above depending on the context in which they occur.) Let us look at some examples.

22

Introduction to Reading and Writing

ł ł ĪĥűŬũŨ

ł ťŨĥŅ

in+Baghdad

father

1

The father in Baghdad.

Ņł ťƊſĪ

Ņ ŏ ljŴƌ

of+sea

fish

2

The fish of the sea.

ŅŅ ŧĪĪĭ

Ņ ł ťŨĥĪ

Ņ ł Ŧŵū

and+uncle

of+father

treasure

Ņ ŏ ťŨŴŬŨ

ň űŨĥł

Ņ ł ťŨĥĪ

Ņ ŏ ŦĮĭĮ

in+well The money of the father was lost in the well.

lost

of+father

Money

Ņ ŏ ťŨŴŬŨ

Ņ ł Ŧŵū

ŦĬŅ

in+well

treasure

behold

ŅŅ ŧĪűëƆ

Ņ ŏ ŦĮĭĮ

ħĬł

ł ťŨĥŅ

to+uncle

money

give

father

The treasure of the father and the uncle.

Behold! The treasure in the well.

3

4

5

6

Father, give money to uncle. Inserting An

šł

Try reading the following words:

Ņ and chose ťũūĭ Ņ Ũ in one ŧűŷ Ņ of one ŧűŶĪ You will find that it is not easy to read such words because the words begin with three ł letters without a vowel in between. To resolve this problem, Syriac adds an š vowel on the ĵĭűŨ letter as follows: Ņ ł and chose ťũūĭ Ņ Ũł in one ŧűŷ Ņ ł of one ŧűŶĪ Ņ ŏ then we simply If the word, however, has a vowel on the first letter such as ŧĪĪŅŅ or ŦĮĭĮ Ņ ŏ. Ņ Ņ , ŧĪűëƆ Ņ Ņ , ŦĮĭĮĪ add the ĵĭűŨ letter without a vowel; e.g., ŧĪĪĭ Olaph is Too Lazy to Hold a Vowel! Olaph does not like carrying a vowel, especially at the beginning of a word. It is just too ŏ letters joins a word that begins with much work for Olaph! So as soon as one of the ĵĭűŨ Ņ ł ‘and father’ ŏ letter. For example, ťŨĥŅł ‘father’, ťŨĥĭ Olaph, Olaph throws its vowel to the ĵĭűŨ

Simkath, Ȩé, Phé, and ʙodhé

23

Ņ ł ). Similarly, ĵĮĥłň ‘went’, ĵĮĥĭ ł ň ‘and went’ (not ĵĮĥĭ ł ň ). By the way… this rule applies (not ťŨĥĭ only to West Syriac. In East Syriac, Olaph retains the vowel. More than One

ŏ ĵĭűŨ

ŏ letter can be attached to words. For example, More than one ĵĭűŨ sea in the sea and in the sea ł Note that we added an š on the ĭ because ħ does not have a vowel on it.

ťƊſŅł Ņł ťƊƀŨ Ņł ł ťƊƀŨĭ

Review ŏ (i.e., ħ ‘in’, Ī ‘of’, ĭ ‘and’, and ĵ ‘to’) act as prefixes. • The four letters known as ĵĭűŨ ł • When a word begins with an unvocalized letter, the vowel š is placed on top of the ŏ letter (e.g., ŧűŶ Ņ ‘one’, ŧűŶĭ Ņ ł ‘and one’). ĵĭűŨ ŏ letter (e.g., ťŨĥŅł • If the word begins with an ĥ with a vowel, the vowel moves to the ĵĭűŨ Ņ ň ‘of the mother’). Ņ ł ‘and the father’; ťƉĥŅň ‘mother’, ťƉĥĪ ‘father’, ťŨĥĭ Ņ ŏ ł ‘and in the well’). ŏ letter may be attached to a word (e.g., ťŨŴŬŨĭ • More than one ĵĭűŨ Exercise 1.5 1. Translate into English:

Ņ ł ŅŅ ł ň ƈƃĥł ň ƨƊū ĵĮĥĭ ljĬ Ņ Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ł ĪĥűŬũŨ Ŧŵūł ŦŵŶ ťũŹ ťŨĥĪł ŧĪĪŅ Ņ Ņ ŏ ƈƃĥł ň ťŨĥŅ ł Ņ Ņ ljŴƌ ŧĪĪĪ

a b c

2. Translate into Syriac: a. And the father of the baby went to Baghdad. b. The uncle went and elected the mother. c. The father went because the uncle elected the mother.

1.6 Simkath, Ȩé, Phé, and ʛodhé This section introduces the next four letters of the Syriac alphabet. They are: Name Syriac Hebrew ʱ Simkath ĸ Ȩé ĺ ʲ Phé Ļ ʴ Ľ ʶ ʙodhé

Arabic

α ω ϑ ι

The letter ĸ sounds like s in sand, and not have an exact sound in English.

Sound s (see below) f ʛ

Ļ sounds like f in fat. The two other letters do

24

Introduction to Reading and Writing

The sound of the letter ĺ is the hardest to master as there is no corresponding, or even close, sound in English. The sound is achieved by closing the glottal (point 1 in Figure 3). Listen very carefully to the audio files.

Figure 3. The pronounciation of ĺ.

The shape of ĺ is similar to ĵ, but is shorter. Like ĵ, the letter ĺ has two forms. The first is used at the beginning of words, ÿƕ; the second is used at the end of words, ĺ. The letter ĺ is usually transliterated in the Roman alphabet by an open single quote ‘ or a similar symbol like Ȩ which we will use in this book. Sometimes you see it transliterated as a small superscript c, or something similar. The letter Ľ sounds like s but with the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth Figure 4. The pronounciation of s (left) and Ľ (right).

(point 1 in Figure 4), rather than the teeth, and by opening your mouth more. It connects only to the right. The following table summarizes how these letters connect to others.

Simkath Ȩé Phe ʙodhe

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ƑŨ ƗŨ ƚŨ ƞŨ

ŪƐŨ ŪƖŨ ŪƙŨ ħƞŨ

ŪƏ Ūƕ ŪƘ ħĽ

ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ

Reading Listen to the audio. Pay attention to the sound of ĺ (line 2) and Ľ (line 4). Also, compare the sounds in lines 4 and 5 to distinguish between ĸ and Ľ. I am providing the transliteration for lines 1 and 2 only.

Simkath, Ȩé, Phé, and ʙodhé

25

ŴƏŏ

ƁƏŌ

ÿƏň

ÿƏŅ

ÿƏł

soo

see

sé

so

sa

Ŵƕŏ

ƁƕŌ

ÿƕň

ÿƕŅ

ÿƕł

Ȩoo

Ȩee

Ȩé

Ȩo

Ȩa

ŴƘŏ

ƁƘŌ

ÿƘň

ÿƘŅ

ÿƘł

3

ĭĽŏ

IJĽŌ

Ľň

ĽŅ

Ľł

4

ŴƏŏ

ƁƏŌ

ťƏň

ťƏŅ

ťƏł

5

Ŵƕŏ

ƁƕŌ

ťƕň

ťƕŅ

ťƕł

6

ŴƘŏ

ƁƘŌ

ťƘň

ťƘŅ

ťƘł

7

ĭĽŏ

IJĽŌ

ŦĽň

Ŧ ĽŅ

ŦĽł

8

English

Read

world

Ȩol-mo

worlds

Ȩol-mé

people

Ȩa-mo

peoples, nations

Ȩa-mé

law

no-moo-so

laws

no-moo-sé

slave, servant

Ȩab-do

slaves, servants

Ȩab-dé

ground

ar-Ȩo

please!

bbo-Ȩoo

on

Ȩal

desired

ʛbo

wanted, asked for

bȨo

fell

nfal

* The letter Ŀ in line 17 is ‘r’ and will be introduced in section 1.7.

1

2

Syriac Word

Ņ Ņ ťƊÿƇƕ ňò Ņ ťƊÿƇƕ Ņł ťƊƕ ň ťƊò Ɗôƕł Ņ ŏŅ ťƏŴƊƌ ňò ŏ Ņ ťƏŴƊƌ Ņ ł ŧűũƕ ňò ł ŧűũƕ Ņ ł *ťƕĿĥ ŏŅ ŴƖũŨ ƈƕł ťŨĽŅ Ņ ťƖŨ ƈƙƌł

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

26

Introduction to Reading and Writing

What are Those Two Dots? You probably have noticed the two dots above some words. The dots mark plurals, and are ňò Ņ called in Syriac ťƊƀƏ syomé (itself a plural). There are many rules for forming plurals. The Ņ Ņ simplest rule applies to most masculine nouns ending with ťš. Simply, replace the final š ň ň ò Ņ ‘worlds’. Ņ Ņ ‘world’ becomes ťƊÿƇƕ with š and add the two-dot syomé. For example, ťƊÿƇƕ

Where does one place the two-dot syomé ? In older manuscripts, syomé tended to be ňò ŏ Ņ ň ò ŏ Ņ ň ò ŏ Ņ , ťƏŴƊƌ, ťƏŴƊƌ ‘laws’. towards the end of the word. You can put it anywhere as in ťƏŴƊƌ ň ò ŏ Ņ . Also, I try to Myself, I prefer to put it on a letter that does not have a vowel as in ťƏŴƊƌ avoid placing it above tall letters such as ĥ, ĵ, or İ. Phrases

ŧĪĪŅŅ

ƎƉň

uncle

from

ňòŏ ŦĮĭĮ

Ņ ťƖŨ

ł ťŨĥŅ

1

money wanted father

The father wanted money from the uncle.

Ņ ł ťƕĿĥ

ƈƕł

ƈƙƌł

Ņň ťŨĪ

ground

on

fell

bear

2

The bear fell on the ground.

ň ł ťƊò ƊôƕĪ

Ņ ŏŅ ťƏŴƊƌ

of+peoples law The laws of the people, not the law of the peoples.

Ņ Ƨ

Ņł ťƊƕĪ

ň ò ŏŅ ťƏŴƊƌ

not

of+people

laws

ŅŅ ł ŦųƭĪ

ŧűŅũƕł

ň ljĥŅ

of+God

servant

I

Ņ ł ŧűũƕ

Ņ ťƖŨ

3

4

I (am) the servant of God

Ņ Ņ ł ŦųëƆĥ God

ƎƉň

5

from servant asked

The servant asked of God. Writing The following image shows how the letters introduced in this section are written. The letter ĸ is written in one stroke. The stroke starts at the middle of the letter at point 1, moves clockwise to complete the first circle, then with the same stroke the second circle is written closing it at point 1, then tracing on the same line under the second circle to get to

Simkath, Ȩé, Phé, and ʙodhé

27

the end of the letter. The examples below illustrate this more clearly with various point marks on the letter. The letter ĺ is written with two strokes similar to the letter ĵ. The letters Ļ and Ľ are also written with one stroke each. Note that Ľ is mostly under the writing line. Here are some writing examples.

The word ťƊƕ is written in three strokes. The first stroke is for the slanted portion of ƕ from point 1 to 2. The second stroke begins at point 3 for the connection line of ƕ then moves to point 4 and begins writing the letter Ɖ, drawing a circle clockwise passing through points 5, 6, and 7, then back to point 4, then up to point 8 where the stroke ends. The third stroke starts at point 9 connecting Ɖ to the final ť and ends after writing ť as before. The word ťƏŴƊƌ is also written in three strokes. The first begins at point 1 for ƌ, passes through point 2, then to point 3. At point three, you draw the circle of Ɖ clockwise as you did in ťƊƕ before ending the first stroke at point 4. I did not put all the points for you for Ɖ; follow the points in ťƊƕ. The second stroke starts at point 5 and connects the Ɖ to the ĭ. At point 6, you draw the ĭ clockwise ending at point 7. The third final stroke is for writing ťƏ. It begins in the middle of Ə at point 8, then moves clockwise to points 9 and 10. Then you move to point 11 and start clockwise writing the second circle of Ə passing through point 12, and then point 8 again. Then you continue through point 11 again. Finally, you move to point 13 and finish the final ť. The word ƈƙƌ is also written in three strokes. In the first you write ƌ (points 1 to 3). In the second you write Ƙ and the the first line of ĵ. This stroke begins at point 4, then passes through points 5, 6, and 7. Before you get to point 8, you pass through point 3 again. From point 8, you move to point 9 then 10. The final stroke finishes ĵ starting at point 11, through 12 to 13. Finally, ťŨĽ is written in two strokes. The Ľ is simply written by tracing from point 1 to 2. ťŨ is written as before. Review • We introduced four more letters of the alphabet: ĸ (Simkath, s), ĺ (ȨE), Ļ (Phe, f ), and Ľ (ʙodhé, ʜ). The first three letters connect on both sides; Ľ connects only to the right.

28 •

•

Introduction to Reading and Writing

ň ò ł ‘servants’. The simplest rule of Plurals are marked with two dots called syomé as in ŧűũƕ ň Ņ making plurals, which applies to many masculine nouns, is changing the final ťš to ťš as ň ò ł ‘treasures’. Ņ ł ‘treasure’, Ŧŵū in Ŧŵū This section covered the following new words: Ņ Ņ world ťƊÿƇƕ Ņł people ťƊƕ Ņ ŏŅ law ťƏŴƊƌ Ņ ł slave, servant ŧűũƕ Ņ ł ground ťƕĿĥ ŏŅ please! ŴƖũŨ on ƈƕł desired ťŨĽŅ Ņ wanted, asked ťƖŨ fell ƈƙƌł

Exercise 1.6 1. Translate into English:

Ņ ł ƈƕł ƈƙƌł ŧűũƕ Ņ ł ťƕĿĥ ŏŅ Ņ ň ŦĮĭĮ ň ò ŏ ħĬł ŴƖũŨ Ņ Ņ ťƉĥĪ ŧĪűëƆ łŅ ň Ņ ň Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ťŨĥ ƎƉ ťŷÿƇƉ ťƖŨ ŧűũƕ ljĬĭ

2. Translate into Syriac: a. This world. Ō b. Please give me (ƁƆ) money and treasure. c. The servants of God, and not the servant of the peoples. 3. Form the plural for the following words: Ņ Ņ ł Ņł Ņł b. ŦųëƆĥ c. ťŨŅĪň d. ŦĮĭ a. ťŶĥ 4. Form the singular of the following words: ň ł ň ò ŏ ƌŅ ň òŅ ň ò ň b. ŧĪĪ c. ťŷÿƇƉ d. ťƏŴƊ a. ťźŨò

Ņ ł e. ŧűũƕ

1.7 Qoph, Rish, Shin, and Taw This section introduces the last four letters of the Syriac alphabet. They are: Name Qoph Rish Shin Taw

Syriac

Hebrew

Arabic

ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

ʷ ʸ ˇ ʺ

ϕ έ ε Ε

Sound close to q r sh t

a b c

Qoph, Rish, Shin, and Taw

29

The letter ľ does not have a similar sound in English, and is hard to master. Say k and notice where the back of your tongue touches the roof of your mouth (point 1 in Figure 5).

Figure 5. The pronounciation of k (left), q (middle) and ľ (right).

Now say q and notice that you have lowered the point where the back of your tongue touches the roof of your mouth (point 2). Now—get some cough syrup and—try to go ten times lower (point 3), hopefully without irritating your throat! The letter ľ is transliterated in Roman letters as q, the closest sound to it. The letter Ŀ sounds like r but rolled the Scottish way. Note that Ŀ looks exactly the same as Ī except that the dot is on top of the letter. Similar to Ī, it takes another shape when connected to the previous letter as in ƢŨ. It does not connect to the left. The letter ŀ sounds like sh in shame. It connects on both sides. Finally, the letter Ł sounds like t in tea. When Ł connects to the previous letter, a stroke that goes from the baseline to the top of the Ł makes the connection, as in ƦŨ (similar to the line that connects ŻŨ). It does not connect to the left. The following table summarizes how these letters connect to others. Qoph Rish Shin Taw

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ơŨ ƢŨ ƥŨ ƦŨ

ŪƠŨ ħƢŨ ŪƤŨ ħƦŨ

ŪƟ ħĿ Ūƣ ħŁ

ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

Reading The first line is transliterated for you. Follow the same vowel patterns in lines 2-4.

ŴƟŏ

ƁƟŌ

ľň

ľŅ

ľł

Qoo

Qee

Qé

Qo

Qa

ĭĿŏ

IJĿŌ

Ŀň

ĿŅ

Ŀł

Ŵƣŏ ŏ ĭŁ

ƁƣŌ Ō IJŁ

ŀň ň Ł

ŀŅ Ņ Ł

ŀł ł Ł

1

2 3 4

English

Read

Syriac Word

high

ro-mo

ťƉĿŅŅ

5

30

Introduction to Reading and Writing

Ņł ťŨĿ ťƣŅĬŅ Ņ ŦƦŶŅ Ō ťŷìŅ ƀƤƉ Ņ Ņ ťſƢƉ Ņ ŏ ťŶĭĿ

big

ra-bo

now

ho-sho

sister

ʘo-tho

Christ

m-shi-ʘo

Lord

mor-yo

spirit

roo-ʘo

holy

qa-dee-sho

true

sha-ree-ro

said

é-mar

went out

n-faq

son

b-ro

name

sh-mo

Ņ Ō ł ťƤſűƟ Ņ Ōł ŧƢſƢƣ ň ƢƉĥł ơƙƌł Ņ ŧƢŨ Ņ ťƊƣ

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Phrases

Ņ ł ŧƢŨĪĭ

Ņ ł ťŨĥĪ

Ņ ł ťƊƤŨ

and+of+son

of+father

in+name

1

In the name of the Father, and of the Son…

Ņ Ōł ŧƢſƢƣ

Ņ Ņ ł ŦųëƆĥ

űŶł

Ņ Ō ł ťƤſűƟ

Ņ ŏ ł ťŶĭĿĪĭ

true

God

one

holy

and+of+spirit

2

… and of the Holy Spirit, one true God.

Ņ Ņ ł ŦųëƆĥ

Ņ Ņ ťſƢƉ

God

Lord

Ņ ŧƢŨ

Ō ťŷìŅ ƀƤƉ

of+God son

Christ

3

Lord God!

ł ťŨĥŅ father

ŅŅ ł ŦųƭĪ

4

Christ, Son of God the Father.

ŅŅ ťƉĿĭ

Ņł ťŨĿ

Ņ ŦƼŨł

and+tall

big

house

5

A big and tall house. Writing The following graph illustrates how the letters of this section are written. The letter ľ is written with one stroke as shown. The letter Ŀ is written like Ī but with the dot on the top; remember the top portion has to be filled in a clockwise movement. The letter ŀ, as written

Qoph, Rish, Shin, and Taw

31

by the calligrapher below, is made of two strokes. I learned how to write it in one stroke by connecting both strokes at point 2, and filling out the interior of the letter in a counter clockwise, spiral motion, with each circile starting at point 2, and finally making the connection line also starting at point 2. The letter Ł is written in one stroke from top to bottom.

Here are some examples that illustrate how to write a few words. The word ťƣĬ is written in three strokes. The first two are for the letter Ĭ as we learned before (first stroke from point 1 to 2, and the second stroke from point 3 drawing a circle counter clockwise, or clockwise according to other traditions, back to point 3). The third stroke is for ťƣ. Start at point 4, up to point 5, then point 6, then point 7, then back to somewhere between points 7 and 4 to close the gap. Now fill in the ƣ in a counter clockwise movement. When you are done filling it, you should be at point 4. Now move to point 8, and draw the final ť as before. The word ťſƢſƢƣ is written in three strokes: the first for Ƣƣ, the second for Ƣſ and the

third for ťſ. Simply follow the points as before. The word ơƙƌ is written in two strokes: the first for ƌ from point 1 to 2 to 3, then the second for ơƘ starting at point 4. You then move clockwise to point 5, then 6, then 7, then 8 (passing through point 3 again), then 9. Now you continue with the same stroke in clockwise motion to point 10, 11, then 12 (passing by point 9 again), and finishing at point 13. The word ŦƦŶ is written in two strokes: one for ƦŶ and the other for ĥ. Simply follow the points.

Ŀ with Syomé When a plural word contains a Ŀ , then the syomé is usually placed on it like this: Ǔ (a total of ň Ņ . When there is more than one Ŀ, the syomé goes on the last two points, not three); e.g. ťƉǓ ň Ō ł . These, however, are late conventions as early manuscripts and texts can have one; e.g. ŧǔſƢƣ ňòŌ ł . syomé on letters other than Ŀ; e.g. ŧƢſƢƣ

32

Introduction to Reading and Writing

Review • We introduced the last four letters of the alphabet: ľ (Qoph, close to q), Ŀ (Rish, rolled r), ŀ (Shin, sh), and Ł (Taw, t ). Ņ • When Ŀ is connected to the preceding letter, it takes a different shape as in ŧƢŨ ‘son’. Ņ ł When Ł connects to the preceding letter, it takes a shape as in ŦƼŨ ‘house’. • This section covered the following new words: high ťƉĿŅŅ Ņł big ťŨĿ Ņ Ņ now ťƣĬ Ņ Ņ sister ŦƦŶ Ō Ņ Christ ťŷìƀƤƉ Ņ Ņ Lord ťſƢƉ Ņ ŏ spirit ťŶĭĿ Ņ Ō ł holy ťƤſűƟ Ņ Ōł true ŧƢſƢƣ ň said ƢƉĥł went out ơƙƌł Ņ son ŧƢŨ Ņ name ťƊƣ Ņ ł house ŦƼŨ Exercise 1.7 1. Put vowels on the following sentences:

ŦƦƍſűƉ ƎƉ ŦųƭĪ ŧƢŨ ơƙƌĭ ô ljĬ ťũū ťũū ŧűũƕĭ ò ƈƃĥ ƨƊū ƈƃ ŦĮŴū Ņ Ō 2. Translate the sentences in 1 into English (ŦƦƍſűƉ ô , with a silent ôƍ , means city).

a b c

3. Translate into Syriac: a. A good and true uncle went to the city. Ņ ł ) and fish of the sea. b. Lord God, give me bread (ťƊŷƆ c. Now, this servant ate the nuts, and went to the big house.

1.8 Review of the Alphabet Congratulations! You now know the entire Syriac alphabet. Before going forward, let us review the alphabet and learn something new: Rukokho and Qushoyo. First, here is a table of the entire alphabet.

Review of the Alphabet

33

Name Syriac Sound ĥ (silent) Olaph ħ b as in boy Béth Gomal Ĩ g as in give Dolath Ī d as in dad Ĭ h as in home Hé Waw ĭ w as in we Zayn Į z as in zebra į ʘ (listen to the audio files) ʗéth ʝéth İ ʜ (listen to the audio files) Yudh IJ y as in yet Ĵ k as in kilo Koph Lomadh ĵ l as in let Mim Ķ m as in meet Nun ķ n as in not Simkath ĸ s as in sand Ȩé ĺ (listen to the audio files) Ļ f as in fat Phe ʙodhé Ľ ʛ (listen to the audio files) Qoph ľ q (listen to the audio files) Ŀ r (rolled) Rish Shin ŀ sh as in shame Taw Ł t as in tea It would be a good thing if you can start remembering the sequence of the letters so that you can look things up in a dictionary. The audio file has a song that will help you do that, or you can memorize the mnemonic:

Ō ł łł ł ł ł ł ƎƊÿƿ ł ł ł ƁźŶ ł ł ƞƙƖƏ ƦƣƢƟ ĮĭĬ űŬŨĥ

The following table shows the various shapes of letters depending on their position in the word. The names are now given in the Syriac script. Name

ł Ņ ƚƆĥ ƼŨň ƈƊłūŅ ł Ņ ƦƆĪ ŦĬň ĭĥĭł ƎſĮł ƼŶň

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ť Ū ŭ ű ų Ŵ ŵ Ÿ

ť ũ Ŭ ű ų Ŵ ŵ ŷ

ĥ Ũ ū Ī Ĭ ĭ Į Ŷ

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ ĭ Į į

34

Introduction to Reading and Writing Name

ň ƼŹ ĪŴſŏ ƚƃŅ ł Ņ űƊëƆ ƋƀƉŌ ķŴƌŏ ł ň ǂƊƏ ťƕň ťƘň ŧĪň ĽŅ ƚƟŅ ƥſĿŌ ƎƀƣŌ ł ĭĥŁ

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

Ż Ɓ ƅ ƈ Ƌ Ǝ Ƒ Ɨ ƚ ƞ ơ Ƣ ƥ Ʀ

ź ƀ Ƅ Ƈ Ɗ ƍ Ɛ Ɩ ƙ ƞ Ơ Ƣ Ƥ Ʀ

Ź ſ ƃ Ɔ Ɖ ƌ Ə ƕ Ƙ Ľ Ɵ Ŀ ƣ Ł

İ IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

Let us also review the vowels: Name

Ņ Ņ ťŶƦƘ Ņ Ņ ťƙƟĮ ŅŅ ŦƞŨĿ ŅŅ ŦƞũŶ Ņ ŦĽŅ ƞƕ

› ºŅ š¡ ºŌ šŏ š

Shape

Sound

Read a as in man Read o as in go Read e as in men Read ee as in meet Read oo as in boo

Rukokho and Qushoyo If you have paid attention to the audio readings, you may have noticed that some letters sound differently in different words, or even in the same word. Did you notice, for example, Ņ Ņ how ŦƼŨł ‘house’ and ŦƦŶŅ ‘sister’ were pronounced? You may have noticed that while Ʀ in Ņ Ņ ŦƼŨł sounded like t as expected (bayto), in ŦƦŶŅ it sounded like th in thin (ʚotho). In fact, Ł has those two sounds. Sometimes it is read t and sometimes th as in thin. Determining if a Ł should be pronounced t or th is a complex business, and there is a whole section devoted to the subject in Chapter 7. It turns out that Syriac has a way to Ņœ indicate the sound. A t sound is marked by a little dot on top of the letter as in ŦƼŨł , while Ņ Ņ the th sound by a little dot under the letter as in ŦƦŶ Ŕ . Now, these dots, like vowel marks, are optional. So far we have not used these dots, but we shall do so from now on. ŏ Another letter that has two sounds is ƃ. The usual sound is k as in ƈƃ ‘every’, pronounced kool or like English cool. The other sound does not have a counterpart in English. If you know German, it sounds like ch in acht ‘eight’. If you know Arabic, it sounds like Υ. If you know neither, listen to the audio files! In Roman letters, we sometimes transliterate this sound as kh (not that it sounds like that). Again, Syriac has a way to mark

Review of the Alphabet

ŏ

35

these sounds. A k sound is with a dot above the letter as in ƈƃœ ‘every’, and a kh sound is ňŅ with a dot under the letter as in ƈƃĥŔ ‘he eats’. Ņ A third letter that has two sounds is Ĩ. The usual sound is g as in ƨƊūł ‘camel’. The other sound also does not exist in English—surprise, surprise! If you know French, it sounds like r in Paris (as the French say it). If you know Arabic, it sounds like ύ. This latter sound is transcribed into Roman letters as gh (again, not that it sounds like that). The g sound is Ņ indicated with a dot above the letter as in ƨƊūł œ , while the gh sound with a dot under as in Ņ ł ‘flesh’. ŧƢŬƘ Ŕ We are not done. There are three more letters to go, but these are less frequently used by Syriac speakers themselves. I shall introduce them, however, for completeness. Ņ ł œ ‘gold’ with a dot above the letter. The other The letter Ī is pronounced as d as in ťŨĬĪ ŌŅ sound is like th in that; e.g., ŧűſĥ Ŕ with a dot below the letter (so you end up with two dots, the original dot which is larger and the sound indicator dot which is smaller). The ĪŔ sound is still observed and you will hear it in the audio files, but not to the same extent as the ŁŔ, ƃŔ or ĨŔ sounds. The two remaining sound variations are almost never used today in West Syriac, except by a few pedantic individuals like myself who have nothing better to worry about. The letter ħœ with a dot above sounds like b as we already learned. The other variation is ħŔ which sounds like v. As I said, no one today reads it as v. Finally, the letter Ļœ sounds like p, and no one uses this sound today. The variant sound is ĻŔ and is the f sound we have been using thus far. (The sounds v and p are used in East Syriac, however, for which see Chapter 8.) So what are Rukokho and Qushoyo? They are exactly what I have just explained. Letters with a dot above are called by Syriac ŅŔ Ņ œ ŏ Ņ Ņ ŏ , Qushoyo, meaning a hard sound. Letters with a dot below are called ťƄƃĭĿ grammarians ťƀƣŴƟ , Rukokho, meaning a soft sound. The six letters which have these sound variations are known Ņ Ņ . by the mnemonic ƦƙƃűŬŨ I don’t want to bother you much with these sounds, so let’s agree on the following policy. There is no need to put a dot above a letter. If there is no dot, we assume the usual sound: ħ is b, Ĩ is g, Ī is d, ƃ is k and Ł is t—but Ļ is f. I shall mark the alternative sound only in words when the alternative sound prevails in contemporary usage; i.e., only for ĨŔ , ƃŔ, and ŁŔ (sometimes ĪŔ as well). Here are the words we learned for which we should start applying soft sounds. Ņ Ŕ Ō ‘hand’, ƈƃĥłŔň ‘ate’, ĪĥűŬŨ ł Ŕ ł Remember, we will only mark soft sounds with a dot below: ŧűſĥ Ņ Ņ ň Ŕ Ņ ‘this (f.)’, űŶ Ņ Ŕ ‘one (f.)’, ŦƦŶ ‘Baghdad’, ŴŬŨ Ŕ ł ‘one (m.)’, ŧűŶ Ŕ Ņ ‘sister’, and ŦƦƍſűƉ ô ŌŔ Ŕł ‘inside’, ŧĪĬ ‘city’.

36

Introduction to Reading and Writing

1.9 I Don’t Need Those Vowels, Do I? So far we have been reading ‘vocalized’ Syriac. That is, the vowel marks were fully written on each word. In reality, Syriac is usually written without vowel marks considering that vowel marks did not even appear until the seventh century. This is actually not as bad as it sounds as you will see below. The ancients did it, so can you! Let us start by reading some English sentences. Can you read the following? 1. I slept on the bd. 2. I ate a hmbrgr. 3. pls brng me a book. 4. I wnt to school 5. I wnt to eat. You probably figured out that bd in sentence 1 is bed but without the e, and hmbrgr in sentence 2 is hamburger without the vowels. Similarly, the first two words in sentence 3 are please bring. See it is not that bad after all. How did you read wnt in sentences 4 and 5? If you got it right, you would have read went in sentence 4. Actually, in sentence 5 it can be read either as want or went. This is an example of how a word written without vowels can be read in two (sometimes more) different ways. In most cases, as in sentence 4, the context of the sentence makes it clear as to which word you should be reading. In some cases, as in sentence 5, the sentence is not enough and one needs a larger context. Syriac operates in this same fashion. When you learn new words, try to learn them with and without the vowels. I promise to take it easy on you. Let us start omitting vowels one step at a time. Do I Really Need

šŅ?

Ņ

ň

ł

Ņ ‘father,’ ťƉĥŅ You may have noticed that the vast majority of nouns end in ťš such as ťŨĥ Ņ Ņ ł ‘flower’. Since we know that the last vowel is šŅ, let us take it out. For ‘mother,’ and ťũŨĬ ł ň Ņ ł . Here are more words: example, the previous three words can be written ťŨĥ, ťƉĥ and ťũŨĬ high ro-mo ťƉĿŅ 1 big

ra-bo

now

ho-sho

sister

ʘo-tho

Christ

m-shi-ʘo

Lord

mor-yo

spirit

roo-ʘo

ťŨĿł ťƣĬŅ ŦƦŶ Ŕ Ņ Ō ťŷìƀƤƉ ťſƢƉŅ ťŶĭĿŏ

2 3 4 5 6 7

I Don’t Need Those Vowels, Do I?

šŅ.

holy

qa-dee-sho

true

sha-ree-ro

37

Ō ł ťƤſűƟ Ōł ŧƢſƢƣ

8 9

Let us review some phrases from the previous section, but now we will omit the final

When Can I Omit

ŧƢŨĪĭł ťŨĥĪł ťƊƤŨł ŏ ł Ņ ł űŶ Ō ł ŦųƆĥ Ō ł ŧƢſƢƣ ťŶĭĿĪĭ Ŕ ł ťƤſűƟ Ņ ł ťſƢƉŅ ŦųƆĥ ł Ņ Ņ ťŷìƀƤƉ Ō ťŨĥ ŦųƭĪł ŧƢŨ ťƉĿĭŅ ťŨĿł ŦƼŨł

šň?

1 2 3 4 5

ň

We studied before (see section 1.6) that plurals of masculine nouns tend to end in ťš rather Ņ ò ŏ Ņ ‘laws’. In such cases, we than ťš. Additionally, the plurals take the two-dot syomé as in ťƏňŴƊƌ ň can omit the š vowel as the two-dot syomé is a sufficient indicator. Hence, we can write ò ŏ Ņ ‘laws’ (read no-moo-sé ). ťƏŴƊƌŏŅ ‘law’ (read no-moo-so), and ťƏŴƊƌ Here are additional examples for practice: world Ȩol-mo ťƊƇƕŅ 1

ò Ņ ťƊÿƇƕ ťƊƕł

worlds

Ȩol-mé

people

Ȩa-mo

peoples

Ȩa-mé

slave

Ȩab-do

ťƊòƊôƕł ŧűũƕł

slaves

Ȩab-dé

ò ł ŧűũƕ

ŏ How about Doing Without š?

2 3 4 5 6

ŏ

ŏŅ Recall that when we introduced š we also said that it is always followed by ĭ as in ťƏŴƊƌ ŏ ‘law,’ ljŴƌŏ ‘fish’, etc. In fact, it is the combination ĭš that makes this vowel. This does not mean that the reverse is true. If there is a ĭ in a word, it may be preceded ł by š as in ťƉĭĽł ‘fast.’ ŏ ŏ So let’s make a deal. When we have ĭš in a word, we will omit the š. The ĭ is enough Ņ ŏ Ņ. Ņ ŏ and ťƏŴƊƌŅ for ťƏŴƊƌ to tell us that the vowel is there. For example, we will say ljŴƌ for ljŴƌ Ņ ł (Remember, we are omitting the final š as well.) But we will keep showing š as in ťƉĭĽł for Ņ ł ‘fast’. ťƉĭĽ Let us practice reading some words: spirit roo-ʘo ťŶĭĿ 1 law

no-moo-so

ťƏŴƊƌŅ

2

38

Can I Omit

Introduction to Reading and Writing

šŌ Now?

fish

ljŴƌ

noo-no

Ņ

3

ŏ

OK, we are getting there. So far we were able to omit š at the end of words, and š because Ō it is usually followed by ĭ. Now, we will try to omit š in a specific context. Ō Ō You may have noticed that š is usually followed by IJ as in ťƤſĿ ‘head’. (Again, the Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ‘she opposite does not hold as IJ can be preceded by š or š as in ŦƼŨł ‘house’ and ťƊƀƟ Ō rises’.) So whenever we have the combination IJš, we will omit the vowel as in ťƤſĿ ‘head’ for Ō Ņ . But we will show other vowels before IJ as in ŦƼŨł ‘house’ for ťƤſŅĿŌ, and ŧűſĥ ‘hand’ for ŧűſĥ Ņ ŦƼŨł . Here are some words for practice: hand ee-do ŧűſĥ 1 which (f.)

ay-do

true

sha-ree-ro

ł ŧűſĥ ŧƢſƢƣł

2 3

Review • Syriac is usually written without vowel marks. We will begin omitting vowels bit by bit. ł Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ‘father’. • When a word ends in ťš, we will not show the š as in ťŨĥ for ťŨĥ ňò ŏ ň ň ò ŏ for ljŴƌ • When a masculine plural word ends in ťš, we will not show the š as in ljŴƌ . The two-dot syomé indicates that the word is plural. ŏ ŏ • When ĭ is preceded by š in the combination ĭš, we will omit the vowel mark as Ņ ŏ ‘owl’, but we will keep other vowels before ĭ as in ťƉŴſł ‘day’ for ťƉŴŨ for ťƉŴŨ Ņ ł. ťƉŴſ Ō Ō • When IJ is preceded by š in the combination IJš, we will omit the vowel mark as Ō ŧűſĥ for ŧűſĥ ‘hand’, but we will keep other vowels before IJ as in ŦƼŨł ‘house’ for Ņ ŦƼŨł .

2 Reading with Gender Syriac is highly gender-sensitive. That is, words are either masculine or feminine. Almost every word is classified either as masculine or feminine, though there are a few exceptions which will be noted. Prepositions like ƎƉň ‘from’, űſĽň ‘near’, etc. are not gender sensitive. This chapter introduces gender and how it is used with verbs, adjectives, nouns, numerals, and pronouns. This chapter also introduces about 80 words, giving you a vocabulary of about 150 words. Ņ Remember that in the reading sections we no longer show the š at the end of the word, šŌ before a IJ, or šŏ before a ĭ. Further, when a word occurs many times, we will start omitting its vowels bit by bit. The objective is to get you used to reading Syriac without vowels.

2.1 Getting Our Feet Wet With Gender New Words key pen

ŅŔ Ō ŧűƀƇƟ ťƀìŅ ƍƟł

Ņ ŏ ťŶŴƆ Ņ ťŨŅǁ Ŕ

board book

Reading Sentences This is the/a brother.

Ō ųƆň ƻĥ Ŕ Ō ñ Ņ ƻĥ ųëƆ Ŕ

(he) has (she) has

ł

ljĬŅ .ŦƦŔŶŅ ŧ ĪňŔĬŅ ł .ťŨĥ ljĬŅ ň .ťƉĥ ŧ ĪňŔĬŅ ň Ŕ ĥ ťŶĥł .ťƀìƍƟł ųƆ ƻ Ņ Ŕ ĥ ŦƦŔŶŅ .ťŶŴƆ ųñëƆ ƻ ł Ņ .ťŨǁ Ŕ ĥ ťŨĥ Ŕ ųƆň ƻ ň .ŧűƀƇƟ Ŕ ĥ ťƉĥ Ŕ Ō ųñëƆŅ ƻ .ťŶĥ

This is the/a sister. This is a father. This is a mother. The brother has a pen. The sister has a board. The father has a book. The mother has a key.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

New Concepts Unlike English, Syriac is very sensitive to gender (i.e., whether a word is masculine or feminine). Most words in Syriac are classified as being masculine or feminine. There are words whose gender is obvious from the meaning. For example, it is obvious Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ‘father’ and ťŶĥŅł ‘brother’ are masculine, while ťƉĥŅň ‘mother’ and ŦƦŶ that ťŨĥ Ŕ ‘sister’ are feminine. Now, when we want to say this is the/a father, it is important to use a masculine form for the word this. Similarly, when we want to say this is the/a mother, we need to use the feminine form of the word this. Syriac gives us two forms for the word this: 39

40

Reading with Gender

• •

Ņ Ņ for masculine nouns as in ťŶĥŅ ł ljĬ Ņ Ņ ň Ŕ Ņ for feminine nouns as in ŦƦŶ ŧ ĪĬ Ŕ

Ņ Ņ ‘this is the/a brother’. ljĬ ň Ŕ Ņ ‘this is the/a sister’. ŧ ĪĬ

In a similar fashion, if we want to say the brother has a book or the sister has a book, Syriac gives us two forms for the word has as follows: Ō Ņł ň Ŕ Ō ‘(he) has’ as in ųƆň ƻĥ • ųƆ ƻĥ ťŶĥ ‘the brother has’. Ŕ Ō Ō Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ñ ñ • ųëƆ ƻĥ Ŕ ‘(she) has’ as in ųëƆ ƻĥ Ŕ ŦƦŶ Ŕ ‘the sister has’. (The dot over the Ĭñ indicates ň the feminine form in case the vowel on Ɔ is not written; for example, ųƆ is ųƆ, and ñ is ųëƆ ñ Ņ . Note that even if you put the vowel on Ɔ, you still have to put the dot ųëƆ on Ĭñ.)

Ō

More on ƻĥ Ŕ Ō The word ƻĥ Ŕ has many usages in the language, and you will come across it frequently in this book and any other Syriac text. When it stands on its own, it gives the meaning of is, are. We will come across this usage in section 2.6. ň ň Ŕ Ō it means he For our purposes here, when it is followed by ųƆ as in ųƆ ƻĥ Ō ñ Ņ as in ųëƆ ñ Ņ ƻĥ has, and when it is followed by ųëƆ Ŕ (with a dot on the Ĭñ) it means she has. Exercise 2.1 1. For each of the following words, write a Syriac sentence that says Sara has this _____: Ņň Ņł Ņ ł a. Ŧŵū b. ťūŅ Įł c. ťŨĥ d. ťƉĥ Ņ (Hint: Sara is ŧƢƏł .) 2. For each of the following words, write a Syriac sentence that says Simon has this _____: Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņň a. ŦƼŨł b. ŦƦŶ c. ťƊƣ d. ťƉĥ Ŕ ŏ ň .) (Hint: Simon is ķŴƖƊƣ 3. Translate the sentences you came up with in 1 and 2 into English.

2.2 Gender and Verbs New Words church Mark Mary deaconess

Ņ ŦŁűƕŌ Ņ ł ĸŴƟƢƉ ł ł Ņ Ō Ņ ƋſƢƉ ł ŦƼƍƤƊ ƤƉ Ŕ

banana John chair Martha bench priest

Ņ ŏ ŦĮŴƉ Ņł ŏ ƎƍŶŴſ ŅťƀƏĿŴƃŏ Ņ ŦŁƢƉł Ņ ł ťŨŁŴƉ Ņ Ņ ljųƃ

(he) eats (she) eats (he) sits (she) sits (he) sings (she) sings

ňŔ Ņ ƃĥ ƈ Ņ Ņ ƨƃĥŔ ň ħƻ ŔŅ ťŨŅƻ ŔŅ ƢƉĮłŅ ŅŧƢƉĮŅ

Note. An indented word is usually a variation of the unindented word above it. For Ņ Ņ ňŅ example, ƨƃĥŔ ‘she eats’ has similarity to ƈƃĥŔ ‘he eats’ above.

Review Reading Sentences The father eats a banana.

41

Ņ ł ƈƃňŔĥ ťŨĥ Ņ Ņ ň .ljŴƌ ƨƃĥŔ ťƉĥ ň Ņ Ņł Ņ .ťƀƏĿŴƃ ƈƕł ħƻ Ŕ ƎƍŶŴſ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ł .ťŨŁŴƉ ƈƕ ťŨƻ Ŕ Ņ ŦŁƢƉł Ō ƢƉĮłŅ ljųƃŅ .ŦŁűƖŨ Ō ŧƢŅƉĮŅ ŦƼì Ņ ƤƉ ł .ŦŁűƖŨ Ŕ ƍƤƊ Ņ Ņ ł .ťŨǁ Ŕ ĸŴƟƢƉ Ŕ ųƆ ƻĥ ł ł ñ Ņ ƻĥ .ťƀìƍƟł ųëƆ Ŕ ƋſƢƉ .ŦĮŴƉ

The mother eats fish. John sits on the chair. Marta sits on the bench. The priest chants in the church. The deaconess chants in the church. Mark has a book. Mary has a pen.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

New Concepts Ņ Ņ ňŅ Gender affects verbs too. For example, ƈƃŔ ĥ is the masculine form of ‘is eating’, while ƨƃĥŔ is the feminine form of the same verb. Here is a list of the verbs introduced above: Masculine

ňŅ

Feminine

Ņ Ņ

eats ƈƃĥŔ ƨƃĥŔ ň Ņ Ņ sits ħƻ ťŨƻ Ŕ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ sings ƢƉĮłŅ ŧƢƉĮ We will learn more about verbs in Chapter 5. ň Remember that the word has has two forms in Syriac. Masculine ųƆ Ō ñ Ņ ƻĥ 7, and feminine ųëƆ Ŕ (with a dot above the Ĭ) as in Sentence 8.

Ō ƻĥ Ŕ as in Sentence

Exercise 2.2 1. Write one Syriac sentence for each verb: ň Ņ a. ŦƦƣ Ŕ ‘he drinks’ / ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ Ņ ‘she drinks’. ň Ŕ Ņ ‘he cries’ / ťƀŅƄŨ b. ťƄŨ Ŕ Ņ ‘she cries’. ň Ņ Ņ ‘she reads’. c. ŧƢƟŅ ‘he reads’ / ťſƢƟ 2. Translate into Syriac: a. Mary drinks water from the sea. Ņ Ņ ň Ņ ) to the church, and Martha runs (ťŹĬĿ ) to the house. b. Mark runs (İĬĿ c. Sara has a big pen, and Simon has a high chair.

2.3 Review New Words girl very (much) has in it (m.) has in it (f.)

Ņ Ō ŦƼǑ Ŕ Ō ł ƁŬƏ Ō ň ųŨ ƻĥ Ŕ Ō ñ Ņ ƻĥ ųŨ Ŕ

Reading Sentences Barsaum drinks milk.

juice water pitcher wine berry

Ņ ň ťſĿŁ òŅ ł Ņ Ō ťƀƉ ŦƼū Ŕ Ŕ ŴūŔŏ Į Ņ ł ŧƢƊŶ Ņ ŏ ŦŁĭŁ Ŕ

(he) drinks (she) drinks (he) likes (she) likes Barsaum

ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ ŅŔ ŅťſƦƣ ň Ņ ƋŶĿ Ņ Ņ ťƊŶĿ ł ł ĶĭĽƢŨ

ň ł ł .ťũƇŶł ŦƦŔ ƣŅ ĶĭĽƢŨ

1

42

Reading with Gender

ň

ł ł ťſƦŔƣŅ ƋſƢƉ Ņò ł ň .ťƀƉ ųŨ ƻ Ŕ ĥ ťŨŴūŏ Ņ Ō ŏ .ŧƢƊŶł ųñŨŅ ƻ Ŕ ĥ ŦƼūŴū Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Į Ņ ŏ ł ň ŅŅ Ō ťũŅŨŅ ljĬ .ŦĮŴƉ ƋŶĿ ƁŬƏ ŏ Ņ Ņ Ō ňŅ .ŦŁĭŁ Ŀ ƁŬƏł ŦƼǑ ŧ ĪĬŔ Ŕ Ŕ ťƊŶ .ťſĿŁ

Mary drinks juice. The well has in it water. The pitcher has in it wine. This baby very much likes banana. This girl very much likes berry.

2 3 4 5 6

Review The above sentences stress what we have covered so far. You will notice the various ň Ņ Ņ Ņ ). ň Ņ vs. ťƊŶĿ masculine and feminine forms of verbs (e.g., ŦƦƣ Ŕ vs. ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ Ņ , and ƋŶĿ Ō is masculine, while Also you will notice that the it of there is in it has two forms: ųŨň ƻĥ Ŕ Ō Ō Ō ň Ņ Ņ ñ ƻĥ ñ ƻĥ ųŨ Ŕ is feminine (compare that with ųƆ ƻĥ Ŕ ‘he has’, and ųëƆ Ŕ ‘she has’). Ņ Ņ is the masculine Finally remember the two forms of the demonstrative pronoun this: ljĬ ň Ŕ Ņ is the feminine form as in Sentence 6. form as in Sentence 5, and ŧ ĪĬ Exercise 2.3 1. Collect all the verbs from this chapter up to this point, and create a conjugation table with the masculine and feminine forms like this: Meaning Drinks

Masculine

ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ

Feminine

ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ Ņ

2. Rearrange the table you created in 1 in alphabetical order.

2.4 Gender and Adjectives New Words book large (m.) large (f.) heavy (m.) heavy (f.) volume, codex

Ņ ťŨŅǁ Ŕ ł Ņ ťŨĿ Ņ ł ŦƦŨĿ Ŕ Ņ Ōł Ņ Ō ŧƢƀƠſ ł ŦŁƢƀƠſ Ņ Ō ň ŦƼƠƍ Ŕ Ƙ

Reading Sentences An intelligent and diligent (male) student. An intelligent and diligent (female) student. A small and successful boy. A small and successful girl. A large and heavy book. A large and heavy volume.

ł

Ņ boy Ņ Ō ťƀÿǑ girl ŦƼǑ Ŕ Ņ ŏ small (m.) Ņ ŏ ŧĿŴƕĮ ŦŁĿŴƕĮ small (f.) Ņ Ō ł diligent, successful (m.) ŧƢƀƤƃ Ņ Ō ł diligent (f.) ŦŁƢƀƤƃ

student (m.) student (f.) bright (m.) bright (f.) diligent (m.) diligent (f.)

.ťźƀƙŶĭł

Ņ ŏŅ ťƘŴƇſ Ņ ŦƦƘŴƇſŏ Ņ Ņ Ōł Ņ Ō ŧƢſųƌ ł ŦŁƢſųƌ Ņ Ō ťźƀƙŶ Ņ Ō ŦƦźƀƙŶ

ŧƢſųƌł ťƘŴƇſŅ .ŦƦźƀƙŶĭł ŦŁƢſųƌł ŦƦƘŴƇſŅ ł .ŧƢƀƤƃłĭ ŧĿŴƕĮŏ ťƀǑ Ō .ŦŁƢƀƤƃłĭ ŦŁĿŴƕĮŏ ŦƼǑ Ŕ Ņ .ŧƢƀƠſłĭ ťŨĿł ťŨǁ Ŕ ł ň ł .ŦŁƢƀƠſĭ ŦƦŨĿ Ŕ ŦƼ Ŕ ƠƍƘ

1 2 3 4 5 6

Gender and Adjectives

43

New Concepts Examine the first two sentences. Both give the meaning an intelligent and diligent student, except Ņ ŏ Ņ ŏ that the student is male in the first sentence (ťƘŴƇſŅ ), and female in the second (ŦƦƘŴƇſŅ ). Each one of them is followed by two adjectives. An ADJECTIVE is a word that modifies a noun. For example, tall in tall tree is an adjective. It is important to note that word order in Syriac is different from that of English. While in English the adjective comes before the noun, it comes after the noun in Syriac. The adjectives in all the sentences above are listed here: Table 1. Masculine and feminine adjectives. Masculine

Ņ Ōł ŧƢſųƌ Ņ ŏ ŧĿŴƕĮ Ņ Ō ł ŧƢƀƤƃ Ņł ťŨĿ Ņ Ōł ŧƢƀƠſ Ņ Ō ťźƀƙŶ

intelligent small successful big, large heavy diligent

Ņ

Feminine

Ņ ŦŁƢſųƌŌ ł Ņ ŦŁĿŴƕĮŏ Ņ Ō ł ŦŁƢƀƤƃ Ņ ł ŦƦŨĿ Ņ Ŕ ŦŁƢƀƠſŌ ł Ņ Ō ŦƦźƀƙŶ

Ņ

The masculine adjectives above end in ťš, while the feminine ones end in ŦŁ. Also, you Ņ ŏ Ņ ł ‘boy’, will notice that the masculine nouns in the above sentences (ťƘŴƇſŅ ‘male student’, ťƀÿǑ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ and ťŨŅǁ student’, ŦƼǑ Ŕ ‘book’) also end in ťš, Ņwhile the feminine nouns (ŦƦƘŴƇſŏ Ņ ‘female Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ň ‘girl’, and ŦƼƠƍ Ŕ Ƙ ‘codex’) end in ŦŁ. Soon you will realize that the ending ŦŁ is the feminine’s best friend. When do we use masculine versus feminine adjectives? Simply, a masculine noun takes Ņ ŏ Ņ ł ‘small brother’), and a feminine noun takes a feminine a masculine adjective (e.g., ŧĿŴƕĮ ťŶĥ Ņ ŏ Ņ Ņ adjective (ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ŦƦŶ Ŕ ‘small sister’).

Ņ Ō ň

Bonus Word: ŦƼƠƍ Ŕ Ƙ

Ņ

ň

The word ŦƼƠƍ Ŕ Ō Ƙ ‘tablet, codex’ is used in a liturgical sense to indicate the large volume (traditionally a manuscript) that contains the hymns of the canonical hours for the liturgical year cycle according to the West Syriac tradition (Syriac Orthodox, Catholic and Maronite). Exercise 2.4 1. Give the feminine forms of the following adjectives: Ņ Ō ĥł ‘long’ c. ťƍƀƊƣ Ņ Ņ ‘high’ Ņ Ō ł ‘fat’ a. ťƉĿ b. ťƄſĿ 2. Give the masculine forms of the following adjectives: Ņ Ōł Ņ Ō ‘smart’ b. ŦŁƢƀƙƣł ‘beautiful’ a. ŦŁƢſųƌ 3. For each of the adjectives in 1 and 2 (including the ones you wrote), write Syriac sentences filling in the gaps: a. This boy is ____ and he has a treasure. b. This girl is ____ and she eats bread.

44

Reading with Gender

2.5 Gender and Body Parts New Words Susan nose mouth hair

ł ŏ ƎƣŴƣ Ņ Ōƌ ŧƢƀŷì Ņ ŏ ťƉŴƘ Ņ ł ŧƢƖƏ

Tabitha, gazelle eye also ear

Reading Sentences Tabitha has a beautiful eye.

Ņ Ō ŦƼũŹ Ŕ Ņ ł ťƍƀƕ Ņ Ļĥň ljŅĪĥŔ

Ņ Ō

ł beautiful, handsome (m.) ŧƢƀƙƣ Ņ Ō ł beautiful (f.) ŦŁƢƀƙƣ ł Ņ Ō long (m.) łŔ ĥ Ņ ŌťƄſĿ long (f.) ŦǂſĿ Ŕ ĥ ñ Ņ ƻĥ ťƍƀƕł ųëƆ Ŕ ŦƼũŹ Ŕ Ō Ņ ŏ ň ñ Ņ ƻĥ .ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ljĪĥŔ ųëƆ Ŕ Ļĥ ł ŏ ñ Ņ ƻĥ .ŧƢƀƙƣł ŧƢƀŷìŌ ƌ ųëƆ Ŕ ƎƣŴƣ Ņ ŏ ñ Ņ ƻ .ŧĿŴƕĮ ťƉŴƘ ųëƆ Ŕ ĥ Ļĥ ł ł ł ŧűſĥ .ŦǂſĿĥ Ŕ ƁŬƏł ƋſƢƉĪ Ŕ Ņ ł ł ł ł .ťƄſĿĥ Ŕ ƁŬƏ ƋſƢƉĪ ŧƢƖƏ Ļĥ

.ŦŁƢƀƙƣł

Also, (she) has a small ear. Susan has a beautiful nose. Also, (she) has a small mouth. The hand of Mary is very long. Also, the hair of Mary is very long.

1 2 3 4 5 6

New Concepts Like the sentences of the previous section, the above sentences also contain adjectives. They are: Masculine

beautiful small long

Ņ Ō ł ŧƢƀƙƣ Ņ ŏ ŧĿŴƕĮ Ņ Ŕ Ō ĥł ťƄſĿ

Feminine

Ņ Ō ł ŦŁƢƀƙƣ Ņ ŦŁĿŴƕĮŏ Ņ Ōł ŦǂſĿ Ŕ ĥ Ņ

Ņ

Recall that masculine adjectives end in ťš, while the feminine ones end in ŦŁ. Ņ ł ‘eye’ is feminine Here is a pop quiz… In the sentences above, can you figure out if ťƍƀƕ ŏ Ņ ‘mouth’? or masculine? How about ťƉŴƘ Ņ Ō Ņ ł Ņ Ō Here is the answer: Since in ŦŁƢƀƙƣł ťƍƀƕ the adjective ŦŁƢƀƙƣł is feminine (we know this Ņ Ņ ŏ ťƉŴƘ Ņ ŏ the Ņ ł must be feminine too. Similarly, since in ŧĿŴƕĮ because it ends in ŦŁ), then ťƍƀƕ Ņ Ņ ŏ Ņ ŏ must be adjective ŧĿŴƕĮ is masculine (we known this because it ends with ťš), then ťƉŴƘ masculine too. This is because the noun and the adjective that modifies it must be of the same gender. This was an easy quiz because the Syriac text is in front of you. How about if you were Ņ ł , but how would you asked to translate beautiful eye into Syriac? You know that eye is ťƍƀƕ know if it is feminine or masculine? One way is to look it up in the dictionary. It turns out, however, that there is a simple rule that tells you if a body part is masculine or feminine. Let us look at the body parts we Ņ Ō ƌ ‘nose’; the feminine ones are Ņ ŏ ‘mouth’ and ŧƢƀŷì covered so far. The masculine ones are ťƉŴƘ ň Ņ ł ‘eye’ and ljŅĪĥŔ ‘ear’. What is common about the masculine body parts? How about the ťƍƀƕ feminine ones? Think hard!

Gender with Numerals

45

Don’t look at the words. Stand in front of a mirror and look at your body parts. ŅŅ ň Ņ Ō ‘head’, and ťƍƤëƆ OK. Here is a hint. The following body parts are masculine: ťƤſĿ ŌŅ Ņ ň ‘tongue’. But the following are feminine: ŧűſĥ Ŕ ‘hand’ and ƨūĿ Ŕ ‘leg’. Ņ ł Ņ ł One more hint: ŦƞŶ ‘back’ is masculine, while ťƙƃ ‘palm’ is feminine. Look harder in the mirror. Did you get the rule? Here it is: if the body has a pair of the body part, then it is feminine; otherwise, it is Ņ Ō is masculine, but you have two masculine. For example, you only have one head, so ťƤſĿ ŌŅ hands so ŧűſĥ Ŕ is feminine. Ņ ň ‘wing’, ťƕĿĪ Ņ Ņ ‘arm’, and ŧ ĪŁ Ņ Ŕ ‘breast’. Are there exceptions? Of course! They include ťƙū They are masculine despite the fact that they are all pairs. Exercise 2.5 1. For each of the body parts in this section, write a Syriac sentence that says: A beautiful and small _____. 2. For each of the following body parts, write a sentence that says: A long _____: Ņ ň ŅŅ ň Ņ Ŕň Ņ Ŕ ĥŌ b. ljĪĥ c. ŧűſ d. ƨūĿ a. ťƍƤëƆ Ŕ

2.6 Gender with Numerals New Words gifts but Kenoro, harp pictures patriarch Antioch ordained deacons deaconess, maid deaconesses, maids

ň ò ĪŅ ťƍƣ Ņň Ƨĥ ŅŅň ŅŧƢƍƃ Ņ ŦŁǓĭĽ Ŕ łŏ ŅŔ ł Ō ťƃƢſƢźƘ Ō ł ĴŴƀźƌĥ Ŕ ŏ ł ł įƢƏĥ ňťƍƤƊƤƉ Ņ ò ł Ņ ŌŅ ł ŦƼƍƤƊƤƉ ŅŔ Ņ ò Ņ ł ƼƍƤƊƤƉ ŦŔ

ŏ

Simon ķŴƖƊƣň ň Ņ contain, carries ƈƊŶ ňò ł pages ťƘĪ Ņ Ņ ò ŏŅ ŦƦƘŴƇſ students (f.) Ŕ Ņ class ŧĿűƏ Ŕň ł our ƎƇſĪŌ Ņ ň ƼŨ ň school ŧƢƙƏ ňò Ņ Ŕ ł teachers (m.) Ņ Ņ ò ťƍƙÿƇƉ Ņ ł teachers (f.) ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ ŅŅ ł principal, administrator ljƢŨűƉ ň wants, asks for, seeks (m.) ťƖŨŅ Ņ Ņ wants, asks for, ťƀƖŨ seeks (f.)

one (m.) one (f.) two (m.) two (f.) three (m.) three (f.) four (m.) four (f.) five (m.) five (f.) ten (m.) ten (f.) there is, there are

űŶ Ŕł ŅŔ ŧűŶ ň ň ł ƎſĿ Ł ƎſŁĿŁ Ņ Ņ ŦƦëƆŁ Ŕ Ņ ƦƆŁ Ŕ Ņ ł ťƖŨĿĥ ł ł ƗŨĿĥ Ņ ł ťƤƊŶ ň ƥƊŶł Ņ ň ŧƢƐƕ ł ƢƐƕ Ō ƻĥ Ŕ

Reading Sentences

Ņ ł ò ł ŧƢƐƕň ƈƊŶ ł ŧűŶ ň Ņ ķŴƖƊƣĪ ň ťŨǁ .ťƘĪ Ŕ ķŴƖƊƣň Ŕ ĭł ťŨǁ Ŕ ųƆ ƻĥ Ŕ .ŦƼƠƍƘ Ŕ űŶ Ŕ

1

ò Ņ ťƤƊŶł ƻĥ ò Ņ Ņ ƥƊŶ ł ŧĿűƐŨ ň ł ĭ ťƘŴƇſ .ƎƇſĪ Ŕ Ŕ ň ŦƦƘŴƇſ Ŕ

2

Ņ ł ƦƆŁ ł ŧƢƙƏň ƼũŨ Ņ ł űŶĭ ò Ņ ł ŦƦƆŁ Ņ ł ŧűŶ .ŦƼì Ŕ ƎƇſĪ Ŕ ĭł ĜljƢŨűƉ Ŕ ł ĜŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ ň Ŕ Ņ ĭł ĜťƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ Ņ ƻĥ Ŕ Ņò Ŕ ƍƤƊƤƉ

3

Simon has one book and one codex. Simon’s book contains ten pages. There are five (male) pupils, and five (female) pupils in our class.

46

Reading with Gender

In our school, there are three (male) teachers, three (female) teachers, one principal, and one maid.

Ņ ň Ņ ŧƢƍƃ Ņ ł ťƀƖŨ ò Ņ ťƖŨĿĥ Ņ ň Ƨĥň ĜťƍƣĪ ł ł ťƖŨ Ņ Ņ ŦƼũŹ .ŦŁǓĭĽ Ŕ Ō Ŕ ŏ ƗŨĿĥ

4

ň ł òŅ ł Ō ň įƢƏĥ ò ł ƎſŁĿŁ ł ł ĴŴƀ .ŦƼì ĭ ťƍƤƊƤƉ ƎſĿŁ Ŕ ŏ źƌĥĪł ťƃƢſƢźƘ Ŕ łŌ ł Ŕ Ņ ƍƤŅ ƊƤƉ

5

Tabitha wants four gifts, but Kenoro wants four pictures.

The Patriarch of Antioch ordained two deacons, and two deaconesses.

New Concepts The numbers one through nineteen have masculine and feminine forms. For example, the number three has two forms in Sentence 3: Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ł. • ŦƦëƆŁ is the masculine form and is used with the masculine noun ťƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ Ņ ŌŅ ł . • ƦƆŁ Ŕ Ņ is the feminine formŅ and is used with the feminine noun ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Also note that in the word ŦŁǓĭĽ Ŕ ‘pictures’ (last word in Sentence 4), the two-dot syomé is collapsed with the dot of the letter Ŀ. So you get a total of two dots on the letter like this Ǔ. Punctuation Marks You may have noticed the usual period at the end of sentences, which is not surprising. You may have also noticed the slanted two-dot Ĝ within a sentence. This is a punctuation mark similar to the comma in English separating clauses within a sentence. Syriac does not have rigid rules on how to apply punctuation marks, the same way English did not have rigid rules until recent times. In this book, we use the two-dot mark Ĝ to indicate a small pause.

ŅŅň

Bonus Word: ŧƢƍƃ

ŏ

Ņ ň

Ņ ň

Ņ ‘harp’ is an epithet of a number of poets, each of whom is called ťŶĭĿĪ Ņ Ņ ŧƢƍƃ The word ŧƢƍƃ Ņ Ō ł ‘harp of the Holy Spirit’. It is applied to David, the Old Testament psalmist, the ťƤſűƟ theologian-poet Saint Ephrem the Syrian, and Mar Narsai of the Church of the East. It is also my son’s name!

Ņ ň

Another Bonus Word: ŧĿűƏ

Ņ

The word ŧĿűƏň (meaning ‘class’ in this lesson) actually means ‘an ordered list, array’. Hence, it denotes the line of pupils who stand in line before they go to their classrooms. Liturgically, Ņ there is a genre of prayers called ŧĿűƏň which consists of a list of petitions. Exercise 2.6 Give the masculine and feminine forms for the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 10.

2.7 Gender with Pronouns New Words story (f.)

Ņ Ō ł ŦƼ Ŕ ƖƣŁ

that (f.)

IJĬŅ

that (m.)

ĭĬł

said (m.) said (f.) Saint George

ň ƢƉĥł ň ŁƢƉĥ Ŕł IJƢƉ ô Ņ ł ň Ō ƁūĿŴū

Gender with Pronouns I today answered (m.) answered (f.) Holy Sara

ň ljĥŅ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍƉŴſ Ōł ƁƍƘ ł Ƽì Ŕ ł ƍƘ Ņ Ō ł ťƤſűƟ Ņ ł ŧƢƏ

47

Matthew what? reads (m.) reads (f.) you (m.) you (f.)

ł IJƦƉł ķŴƉŏ ň Ņ ŧƢƟ Ņ Ņ ťſƢƟ ł ł Ʀƌĥô IJƦƌĥ ô ô

Letters which are underlined are silent. See below for more on this. Reading Sentences

ł Ņ .ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ ĭĬł Ŕ Ō IJĬŅ ĜťŨǁ That book; that story. ł ł ň Ņ ķŴƉŏ :IJƦƉ Ņ ł Ʀƌĥôł ŧƢƟ ýťƍƉŴſ Matthew: What (are) you reading today? ň Ņ :ƢƉĥĭ ł ň ƁƍƘ Ō ł IJƦƉł .ťƤſűƟł ťŨǁ Ŕ ljĥŅô ŧ ƢƟ Matthew answered and said: I (am) reading the Holy Book (i.e., Bible). ł Ņ ł Ņ ł IJƦƌĥ Ņ Ņ ķŴƉŏ :ŧƢƏ ýťƍƉŴſ ô ô ťſƢƟ Sara: What (are) you reading today? ł Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ň ł ł Ņ ł Ō ł ň IJƢƉĪ Ƽì ljĥô ťſƢƟ :ŁƢƉĥĭ .ƁūĿŴū Ŕ ƍƘ ŧƢƏ Ŕ ô Ņ ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ Sara answered and said: I (am) reading the story of Saint George. ň .ƁūĿŴū IJƢƉĪ ŦƼƖƣŁ IJĬŅ ťſƢƟŅ ŧƢƏ Ƨĥ ĜťŨǁ Ŕ ĭĬł ŧƢƟŅ IJƦƉ Ŕ

1 2 3 4 5 6

Matthew is reading that book, but Sara is reading that story of Saint George.

New Concepts Ņ Ņ which is We learned before how the demonstrative pronoun this has two forms in Syriac: ljĬ ň Ŕ Ņ which is feminine. The demonstrative pronoun that also has two forms: masculine, and ŧ ĪĬ Ņ • ĭĬł used with masculine nouns such as ťŨŅǁ Ŕ ‘book’ in Sentences 1 and 6 above. Ņ Ō ł Ņ ‘story’ in Sentences 1 and 6. • IJĬ used with feminine nouns such as ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ The personal pronoun you also has two forms: ł ł • Ʀƌĥ ô isł the masculine form and is used with masculine nouns like IJƦƉł in Sentence 2. Ņ and is used with feminine nouns like ŧƢƏł in Sentence 4. • IJƦƌĥ ô ô is the feminine form ň The personal pronoun ljĥŅ ‘I’ is common to both masculine and feminine forms. So is ł ‘we’ (it does not appear in the reading sentences). ƎƍŶ ň Ņ Ņ ‘she reads’. Remember that verbs are gender-specific; e.g., ŧƢƟŅ ‘he reads’ vs. ťſƢƟ ň ň ł ł Ō ‘he answered’ vs. Ƽì Similarly, ƁƍƘ Ŕ ł ƍƘ ‘she answered’, and ƢƉĥł ‘he said’ vs. ŁƢƉĥ Ŕ ł ‘she said’. Underlined Silent Letters ł ł There are a few words above with underlined letters: Ʀƌĥ ô ô ‘you (f.)’ with two ô ‘you (m.)’, IJƦƌĥ underlined letters, and IJƢƉ ô Ņ ‘Saint’. These letters are silent, the same way k is silent in English know and knife. Underlining the letter is optional. For example, in sentence 5 we wrote IJƢƉ ô Ņ , but in sentence 6 we wrote IJƢƉ. You should try to get accustomed bit by bit to the words that have

48

Reading with Gender

silent letters. There aren’t that many of them in Syriac anyway. Other examples of words Ņ Ō Ņ Ņ ł ‘mighty’. containing a silent letter include ŦƦƍſ Ŕ ‘city’, and ŧƢũƍū ô űƉ ô

Ņ

Bonus Word: IJƢƉ ô

The word IJƢƉ ô Ņ , literally ‘my Lord’, has a number of meanings. It means ‘saint’ as in IJƢƉ ô Ņ Ō ł ň ‘Saint George’ above. It is also a title given to patriarchs and bishops; e.g., IJƢƉ ƁūĿŴū ô Ņ ŌŅ ł Ō ĸŴƀŹŤƍŬſĥ Ŕ ‘Mor Ignatius’ (here, one usually transliterates it into ‘Mor’ as it becomes part of the name). Exercise 2.7 For each of the verbs that you listed in Exercise 2.3, conjugate that verb with the following pronouns: ň ljĥŅô with the verb) ‘I’ a. ljĥ ô Ņ (becomes ł ł b. Ʀƌĥ ô ô ‘you (f.)’ ô ‘you (m.)’ c. IJƦƌĥ Example: Masculine I drink You drink He/she drinks

ljĥŅ ô ł Ʀƌĥô

ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ

Feminine

ljĥŅ ô ł IJƦƌĥ ô ô

ťſŅ Ʀƣ Ŕ Ņ ťſŅ Ʀƣ Ŕ Ņ ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ Ņ

Note that he and she do not require a pronoun; it is implied from the verb.

2.8 How Do I Recognize Masculine and Feminine Words? Here are some hints to help you recognize if a word is masculine or feminine: Ņ Ņ 1. Recall that masculine nouns tend to end in ťš, while feminine nouns tend to end in ŦŁ. Ņ ŌŅ ł Ņ Ņ ł ‘male teacher’, ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ ‘female teacher’. The same applies to Examples: ťƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ Ņ Ņ adjectives. There are a few exceptions such as ŦƼŨł ‘house’ which ends in ŦŁ but is Ņ Ņ ŏ ‘road’, masculine. Here is a list of common words that are feminine, but end in ťš: ťŶĿĭĥ Ņ ň ‘ship’, ťƕĿĥ Ņ ł ‘earth’, ťƍƀƄƏ Ņ Ō ł ‘knife’, and ŧĪŴū Ņ ŏ ‘choir’. ťƙëƆĥ ł ň ł ‘America’, and ƼŨň Ņ ŏ ‘Edessa’, ťƠſƢƉĥ 2. City and regional names are always feminine: IJĬĿĭĥ Ō ƎſǓųƌł ‘Mesopotamia’. 3. There are some nouns that can be used as masculine and feminine. Common nouns that Ņ ŏ ‘fire’, ťƀƊƣ Ņ Ņ ł ‘heaven’, Ņ ň ‘salt’, ŧĿŴƌ belong to this category include: ŧƢſĪł ‘monastery’, ťŷÿƇƉ ŏ Ņ Ņ ň ‘sun’, ŧĿųƏł ‘moon’, and last but not least ťŶĭĿ Ņ ‘spirit’ (for which see note 4 below). ťƤƊƣ Ņ ŏ ‘spirit’ is 4. One word of theological interest should also be mentioned. The word ťŶĭĿ Ņ Ō ł ťŶĭĿ Ņ ŏ , in which case it is masculine (so feminine unless it denotes the Holy Spirit, ťƤſűƟ Ņ Ō ł Ņ ŏ one does not say ŦƦƤſűƟ ťŶĭĿ ). Earlier Syriac writers, such as St. Ephrem, used feminine ŏ ł Ņ Ņ Ō imagery for ťƤſűƟ ťŶĭĿ and this can still be seen today in liturgical texts where feminine

How Do I Recognize Masculine and Feminine Words?

ŏ

49

Ņ Ņ Ņ ŏ ŏ Ƨűū Ŕ ťƣĪŴƟ Ŕ įĭĿ

verbs are used with ťŶŅĭĿ when it denotes the Holy Spirit. An example is Ņ Ņ ‘the Holy Spirit interweaves and puts’ where the verbs ƧŅűū ťƊƀƏĭ Ŕ Ņ ‘interweaves’ and Ņ Ņ ‘puts’ are feminine. The masculine forms of these verbs are ĵűū ň Ņ . (The ň Ŕ Ņ and ƋƀƏ ťƊƀƏ ŏ Ņ Ō ł ťŶĭĿ Ņ ŏ ‘Holy Spirit’ and is much older.) expression ťƣŅĪŴƟ Ŕ ŏ įĭĿ is a variant for ťƤſűƟ ň 5. Verbs can only be recognized from their form (e.g., masculine ŧƢƟŅ ‘he reads’ vs. feminine ň ň Ņ Ņ ‘she reads’; and masculine ƢƉĥł ‘he said’ vs. feminine ŁƢƉĥ ťſƢƟ Ŕ ł ‘she said’). These forms are covered in Chapter 4.

3 Reading with Number In the last chapter, we learned that Syriac is highly sensitive to gender (i.e., masculine vs. feminine). In this chapter, we will learn that Syriac is also highly sensitive to number (i.e., singular vs. plural). Almost every word is classified either as singular or plural. As in the case of gender, prepositions like ƎƉň ‘from’, űſĽň ‘near’, etc. are not number sensitive. This chapter demonstrates how number affects verbs, adjectives, and other word categories. You will also get introduced to 25 or so more words giving you a total vocabulary of over 250 words. Ņ Again, remember that in the readings we no longer show the š at the end of the word, šŌ before a IJ, or šŏ before a ĭ. Further, when a word occurs many times, we will start omitting its vowels bit by bit. The objective is to get you used to reading Syriac without vowels.

3.1 Getting Our Feet Wet With Number New Words black-board black-boards book

Ņ ŏ ňò ťŏ ŶŴƆ ťŶŴƆ Ņ ťŨŅǁ Ŕ

ň Ņ ťŨò ǁ Ŕ ň Ņ ƎƀƆĬ ł ťŶĥŅ

books these brother

Reading Sentences The father has a black-board.

brothers sister sisters

ňò ł ťŶĥ Ņ Ņ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ò Ŧł ƦŶ ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ

ł ųƆň ƻĥ Ŕ ťŨĥ ł ò .ťŶŴƆ ųƆ ƻĥ Ŕ ťŶĥ ň .ťŨǁ Ŕ ťƉĥ Ŕ ųñëƆŅ ƻĥ .ťŨòǁ Ŕ ŦƦŶ Ŕ ųñëƆ ƻĥ Ŕ Ņ .ťŶĥ ljĬŅ ňò ł ň Ņ .ťŶĥ ƎƀƆĬ ňŔŅ .ŦƦŔŶ ŧ ĪĬ ł .ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ Ņ ò ƎƀƆňĬŅ .ťŶŴƆ

The brother has black-boards. The mother has a book. The sister has books. This brother. These brothers. This sister. These sisters.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

New Concepts The sentences above demonstrate singular and plural word pairs. In Sentence 1, for example, Ņ ŏ ‘black-board’; its plural counterpart in Sentence 2 is we encounter the singular word ťŶŴƆ ňò ŏ ťŶŴƆ ‘black-boards’. The other words introduced above, which are highlighted, are: singular ňò Ņ Ņ ňò ł ŅťŨǁ Ņ ł ‘brother’ and plural ťŶĥ ‘books’; singular ťŶĥ ‘brothers’; singular Ŕ ‘book’ and pluralŅ ťŨǁ ł Ņ Ņ Ņ ò ŦƦŶ Ŕ ‘sister’ and plural ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ ‘sisters’.

50

Number and Verbs

51

In English, we typically form the plural by adding an ‘s’ at the end of the singular; e.g., singular book becomes plural books. Syriac works differently. To form a plural from a Ņ ň Ņ Ņ masculine, singular noun that ends in ťš such as ťŨŅǁ Ŕ ‘book’, we replace the ťš with ťš and ň Ņ Ņ add the two-dot syomé. Hence, singular ťŨŅǁ Ŕ becomes plural ťŨò ǁ Ŕ . As in English, there are always words that do not follow the rules. For example, English singular mouse becomes plural mice. In Syriac too there are such irregular words. You may Ņ Ņò ł Ņ Ņ have noticed above that the singular ŦƦŶ Ŕ ‘sister’ becomes plural ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ . These you simply have to remember. Note that even irregular formations of the plural still have the two-dot syomé.

Ņł

ň òŅ ł

Ņ òŅ Ņ ł

Bonus Word: ťŨĥ (plural ŦųŨĥ and ŦŁųŨĥ Ŕ ) Some nouns have more than one plural, each with its own meaning. One such frequent Ņ ł ‘father’. It has two plural forms: noun is ťŨĥ ňò Ņ ł ł ł ňò Ņ ł • ŦųŨĥ means parents; e.g., IJƦƉĪ ŦųŨĥ ‘Matthew’s parents’. Ņ Ņ òŅ ł Ņ Ņ ŏ Ņ Ō Ņ Ņ òŅ ł ŦŁűƕĪ ŦŁųŨĥ • ŦŁųŨĥ Ŕ means forefathers or ancestors; e.g., ŦƼſĿŴƏ Ŕ ‘the Fathers of the Syriac Church’. Exercise 3.1 1. Put vowels on the following sentences:

2. Fill in the following gaps:

ŧűƀƇƟ ųƆ ƻĥ IJƦƉ ñ ƻĥ ŦƦŶ ťŨǁ ųëƆ

a b

Ņ Ō ł ťƄſĿĥ Ņ ł ÿÿÿÿÿ ƻĥŌ ŧƢƏ Ņ ł Ņ ł ŧƢƖƏ ŧƢƀƙƣĭ Ō Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ljĬ ň ò Ņ ŦƦëƆŁ ŅŅ ťƍƣĪ ÿÿÿÿÿ ƻĥ ĸŴƟƢƉ

a b

3. Translate the sentences in 2 into English.

3.2 Number and Verbs New Words eat (pl., m.) eat (pl., f.) sit (pl., m.)

Ō Ņ ƎƀŅ ƿĥŔ Ņ ò Ǝƿĥ Ŕ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ

sit (pl., f.) sing (pl. m.) sing (pl., f.)

Reading Sentences The brother eats an apple. The brothers eat apples. The boy sits on the chair. The boys sit on the bench. The deacon chants in the church. The deacons chant in the monastery. The sister eats bananas.

Ņ Ņ ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ Ō Ņ ƎſƢƉĮ ŅķǔƉĮŅ

Ņ ŏł ŧĿĭŵŶ ň ŏł ŧǓĭŵŶ

apple apples

Ņ ł ƈƃĥňŔ ťŶĥ Ņ ňò ł .ŧǓĭŵŶł ƎƀƿĥŔ ťŶĥ ň Ņ ł Ņ .ťƀƏĿŴƃ ƈƕł ħƻ Ŕ ť ƀǑ ňò Ņ ł Ņ ł .ťŨŁŴƉ ƈƕ ƎƀŨƻ Ŕ Ņ ťƀÿǑ Ō ƢƉĮłŅ ťƍƤƊƤƉ Ņ ł .ŦŁűƖŨ Ņ ł ƎſƢƉĮ Ō Ņ ťƍƤƊƤƉ ňŅ ò ł .ŧƢſűŨ Ņ Ņ ò .ŦĮŴƉ ƨƃĥŔ ŦƦŶ Ŕ Ņ

ŏł .ŧĿĭŵŶ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

52

Reading with Number

ł Ņ ò ĥŅ ŦŁŴŶĥ Ǝƿ Ŕ ŔŅò Ō .ťƀƏĿŴƃ ƈƕł ťŨŅƻ Ŕ Ņ ŦƼǑ Ŕ Ņ Ņ òŅ ł .ťŨŁŴƉ ƈƕł ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ ŦƼ Ŕ ÿǑ Ō Ņ Ņ ł .ŦŁűƖŨ ŧƢƉĮ ŦƼì Ŕ ƍƤƊƤƉ Ņ Ņ ŦƼìŅ ƍƤŅ ƊƤƉ Ņ ł ķǔƉĮ ò ł .ŧƢſűŨ Ŕ .ŧǓĭŵŶł

The sisters eat apples. The girl sits on the chair. The girls sit on the bench. The deaconess chants in the church. The deaconesses chant in the monastery.

8 9 10 11 12

New Concepts ňŅ The above sentences give pairs of singular and plural verbs; e.g., singular ƈƃĥŔ ‘he eats’ in Ō Ņ Sentence 1 and plural ƎƀƿĥŔ ‘they eat’ in Sentence 2. The next two sentences give an example ň Ņ of singular ħƻ Ŕ ‘he sits’ and plural ƎƀŨŌƻ Ŕ Ņ ‘they sit’. The next two sentences give an example Ō ł Ņ of singular ƢƉĮ ‘he sings’ and plural ƎſƢƉĮŅ ‘they sing’. The verbs in Sentences 1-6 are used Ņ ł is masculine, the verb ƈƃĥňŔŅ is also masculine. with masculine subjects. Since, for example, ťŶĥ Sentences 7-12 are the feminine counterparts of Sentences 1-6. You will see that Ņ Ņ Ņ òŅ feminine verbs also have singular and plural forms, such as ƨƃĥŔ ‘she eats’ and ƎƿŔ ĥ ‘they (fem.) eat’ in Sentences 7 and 8. Note that in plural feminine verbs, we use the two-dot syomé, but not in the plural masculine verbs. Why? That’s how it is! Syriac, like all other Semitic languages, has many verb forms. In fact, every grammar book, including this Primer, contains tables that list hundreds of verb forms. So pay attention to new verbal forms that get introduced and learn them well; otherwise, you will be overwhelmed. The following table summarizes the verbal forms we have already covered. Table 2. Verbs according to number and gender. Masculine Feminine Singular Plural Singular Plural

Ņ ƈƃĥňŔ ň Ņ ħƻ Ŕ ƢƉĮłŅ

eat/eats sit/sits sing/sings

Ō Ņ ƎƀƿĥŔ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ Ō Ņ ƎſƢƉĮ

Ņ Ņ ƨƃĥŔ ťŨŅƻ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ŧƢƉĮ

Ņ ò ĥŅ Ǝƿ Ŕ Ņò Ņ ƎŨƻ Ŕ ķǔƉĮŅ

To help you distinguish the various verbal forms with respect to gender and number, ŏ ň ‘they (m.)’, here is the same table repeated below with the pronouns ĭĬŏ ‘he’, IJĬŌ ‘she’, ķŴƌĬ ň ň ‘they (f.)’ and ƎƀƌĬ Masculine Singular Plural

eat/eats sit/sits sing/sings

Ņ ƈƃĥňŔ ň Ņ ħƻ Ŕ ƢƉĮłŅ

ĭĬŏ ĭĬŏ ĭĬŏ

Ō Ņ ŏň ƎƀƿĥŔ ķŴƌĬ ŏň ƎƀŨŌƻ Ŕ Ņ ķŴƌĬ Ō Ņ ķŴƌĬ ŏň ƎſƢƉĮ

Exercise 3.2 1. Fill in the blanks in the following sentences:

Feminine Singular Plural

Ņ Ņ ƨƃĥŔ IJĬŌ ťŨŅƻ Ŕ Ņ IJĬŌ Ņ Ņ IJĬŌ ŧƢƉĮ

Ņ ò ĥŅ ƎƀƌĬ Ǝƿ Ŕ ňň Ņ Ņ ňň ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ ƎƀƌĬ ŅķǔƉĮŅ ƎƀƌĬ ňň

Ņ ł Ņ ł ƈƕł ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ƋſƢƉĭ ł ł ŧƢƏ ťŨŁŴƉ

a

Number and Adjectives

Ņ Ō ŅŅň ŦŁűƖŨ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ŧƢƍƃ ň ŏł Ņ ł ƎƍŶŴſ Ņł ŏ ŧǓĭŵŶ ÿÿÿÿÿÿ ĸŴƟƢƉĭ Ņ Ō Ņ Ō ŦŁűƖŨ ÿÿÿÿÿÿ ŦƼũŹ Ņ ł ƎƍŶŴſ ł Ņ ł Ņł ŏ *ťŨŁŴƉ ƈƕ ÿÿÿÿÿÿ ŧƢƏĭ

53 b c d e

* Hint: with a combination of masculine and feminine nouns, the verb is masculine. 2. Translate the sentences in 1 into English. ł Ņ ‘he says’ as ƢƉĮłŅ in the table above. 3. Conjugate (i.e., list all forms) the verb ƢƉĥ ň ňŅ 4. Conjugate the verb ơƇƏŅ ‘he ascends’ the same way as ƈƃĥ above. Ņ Ņ ‘they sing’? Ō Ņ and ķǔƉĮ ł Ņ ‘he sings’, ƎſƢƉĮ 5. What is the root of ƢƉĮ Roots

Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ ňŅ You may have noticed that ƈƃĥŔ ‘he eats’, ƨƃĥŔ ‘she eats’, ƎƀƿĥŔ ‘they (m.) eat’, Ņ òŅ and ƎƿĥŔ ‘they (f.) eat’ share some letters. All three forms have the letters ĥ, ƃ, and ĵ, put together in ƈƃĥ. We call this the root. Usually the root has three letters. ň Ņ ò Ņ Ŕ Ņ ‘they Ņ Ŕ Ņ ‘she sits’, ƎƀŨƻ Ō Ŕ Ņ and ƎŨƻ Similarly, the verbs ħƻ Ŕ ‘he sits’, ťŨƻ sit’ share three letters in common: IJ, Ł, and ħ, put together in ħƻ which is the root of these verbs. Ņ Ņ ‘they Ņ Ņ ‘she sings’, ƎſƢƉĮ Ō Ņ and ķǔƉĮ ł Ņ ‘he sings’, ŧƢƉĮ What is the root of ƢƉĮ sing’? This is part of your homework below.

3.3 Number and Adjectives New Words The following table gives the various adjectival forms which appear in this section: Table 3. Number and adjectives. Masculine Feminine Singular Plural Singular Plural

intelligent diligent small successful big heavy

Ņ Ōł ŧƢſųƌ Ņ Ō ťźƀƙŶ Ņ ŏ ŧ ĿŴƕĮ Ō ł ŧƢƀŅƤƃ Ņł ťŨĿ ŧƢƀŅƠſŌł

ň Ōł ŧǔſųƌ ň òŌ ťźƀƙŶ ň ŧ ǓŴƕĮŏ ň Ƥƃ Ō ł ŧǔƀ ňł ťŨǓ ň ƠſŌł ŧǔƀ

The other new words are: (he) goes (she) goes

Ņ ĵĮĥňŅ Ƨô ĮĥŅ

(they m.) go (they f.) go

Reading Sentences An intelligent and diligent (male) student.

Ņ ŦŁƢſųƌŌ ł Ņ Ō ŦƦźƀƙŶ Ņ ŦŁĿŴƕĮŏ Ņ Ō ł ŦŁƢƀƤƃ Ņ ł ŦƦŨĿ Ņ Ŕ Ōł ŦŁƢƀƠſ

Ņ ƎƀƆôĮĥŌŅ Ņ ƎƆĮĥ ô ò

ŅŅ Ōł ŦŁŔ ǔſųƌ Ņ Ņ ò ŦƦŔ źƀƙŶ Ņ Ņ ŏ ŦƻǓŴƕĮ ŔŅ Ō ł ŦŁŔ ǔƀŅƤƃ Ņ Ņ ł ŦƦŔ ŨǓĭĿ Ņ Ņ Ōł ŦŁŔ ǔƀƠſ

library, archives small, young

.ťźƀƙŶĭł

ň ł ƼŨ ťƃǓĥ ŔŅ ň ŧĿŴƕĮŏ

ŧƢſųƌł ťƘŴƇſŅ

1

54

Reading with Number

ňò Ņ ň ł ťƘŴƇſ ŧǔſųƌ An intelligent and diligent (female) student. .ŦƦźƀƙŶĭł ŦŁƢſųƌł ŦƦƘŴƇſŏŅ ŅŅ Ņ òŅ Ņ Intelligent and diligent (female) students. .ŦƦźƀƙŶ Ŕ ò ĭł ŦŁŔ ǔſųƌł ŦƦƘŴƇſ Ŕ Ņ ł A young and successful boy goes to school. .ŧƢƙƏň ƼũëƆ Ŕ ň ĵĮĥ ŧƢƀƤƃłĭ ŧĿŴƕĮŏ ťƀǑ ň ł ĭ ŧǓŴƕĮŏ ťƀÿǑ ň ƎƀƆôĮĥŌŅ ŧ ǔƀƤƃ ò Ņ Young and successful boys go to school. .ŧƢƙƏ Ƽ Ŕ ũëƆ Ņ Ō A young and successful girl goes to school. .ŧƢƙƏ ƼũƆ Ƨô ĮĥŅ ŦŁƢƀƤƃłĭ ŦŁĿŴƕĮŏ ŦƼǑ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł Ņ ł Young and successful girls go to school. .ŧƢƙƏ Ƽ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ŦƼ Ŕ ò ÿǑ Ŕ ũƆ ƎƆĮĥ Ŕ ĭ ŦƻǓŴƕĮ ô ò ŦŁǔƀƤƃ ò ĭł .ťźƀƙŶ

Intelligent and diligent (male) students.

ł ň ł ƼũŨ .ŧƢƙƏ ƼŨĪ ťƃǓĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň ŧƢƀƠſłĭ ťŨĿ ťŨǁ Ŕ There is a large and heavy book in the library of the school. .ŧƢƙƏ Ƽ ŧǔƀƠſĭ ťŨǓł ťŨòǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŨĪ ťƃǓĥ ƼũŨ Ŕ There are large and heavy books in the library of the school. ł ł Ō ťƃǓĥ ƼũŨ .ŦŁűƕĪ ŦŁƢƀƠſłĭ ŦƦŨĿ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŦƼƠƍƘ There is a large and heavy codex in the library of the church. Ņ Ō ł ł Ņ ò ł Ņ .ŦƦƍſô űƉĪ ŦŁǔƀ Ŕ ťƃǓĥ ƼũŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŦƼƠƍƘ Ŕ Ŕ Ơſĭ ŦƦŨǓĭĿ

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ƻ Ŕ ĥ

9

ƻ Ŕ ĥ

10

ƻ Ŕ ĥ

11

ƻĥ Ŕ

12

There are large and heavy codices in the library of the city.

New Concepts Adjectives are also number-sensitive, as well as gender-sensitive. For example, the adjective bright has four forms: Ņ Ō ł is masculine singular as in Sentence 1. • ŧƢſųƌ ň Ō ł is masculine plural as in Sentence 2. • ŧǔſųƌ Ņ Ōł • ŦŁƢſųƌ is feminine singular as in Sentence 3. ŅŅ Ōł • ŦŁǔſųƌ Ŕ is feminine plural as in Sentence 4. Other sets of adjectives also appear in the above sentences. They were tabulated at the beginning of this section. It is probably a good time to start paying attention to how these forms differ from each other so that you can start recognizing other forms of adjectives. Can you find out on your own what is the common denominator in each column in the table above? Look at the endings. You may have noticed that all the words in each column have the same ending (or suffix). The following table gives the suffixes: Masculine Singular Plural

ťšŅ

ťšň

Feminine Singular Plural

Ņ ŦŁ

Ņ Ņ ŦŁš Ŕ

ň

Bonus Word: ƼŨ Ŕ

Ņ

The word ƼŨ Ŕ ň , which is a short form of ŦƼŨł ‘house’, means ‘house of’ or ‘place of’. It is used in combination with other words to create names of place. An example we have already Ņ ň means ‘book’. Another Ņ seen is ŧƢƙƏň ƼŨ Ŕ ň ‘school’, literally ‘house of the book’ as ŧƢƙƏ

ň ł ƼŨ ťƃǓĥ Ŕ ň

How Do I Recognize Singular and Plural Words?

‘library’, literally ‘house of archives’ example is common Greek origin).

ň ł (ťƃǓĥ

55

and English archive share a

Exercise 3.3 1. Form the various masculine/feminine and singular/plural combinations for the following adjectives: Ōł Ō b. ƄſĿ ĥ ‘long’ a. Ƣƀƙƣł ‘beautiful’ Ō ł ‘holy’ c. ƤſűƟ d. ƤƀŨŌ ‘evil’ 2. Classify the following adjectives by number and gender: ň ò Ō Ņ Ō ‘glorious’ b. ťźƀÿƇŶ ‘mixed’ a. ŦƦŷìƀũƣ Ņ Ņ Ņò Ō ł Ņ c. ŦƦƍƀƤ d. ťũŹ ‘good’ Ŕ ƕ ‘strong’ 3. For each adjective in 2, make a table of all the other masculine/feminine and singular/plural forms.

3.4 How Do I Recognize Singular and Plural Words? In the case of nouns and adjectives, it is easy. Plurals have the two-dot syomé on top of them ň Ņ Ņ (e.g., ťŨŅǁ Ŕ ‘book’ vs. ťŨò ǁ Ŕ ‘books’). That’s it! In the case of verbs, you can usually tell from verb endings. These will be covered in the next chapter.

4 Reading With Tense Now we turn our attention primarily to verbs, and here you need to start paying serious attention. Syriac, like all other Semitic languages, has a bewildering number of verbal forms. Have you ever learned a foreign language? I mean apart from Syriac of course. At elementary school, I was fortunate to have been introduced to English and German. To this day I remember some of the lessons: I am… you are… he is… she is.. we are… you are.. they are. Ich bin… du bist… er ist… sie ist…, and I cannot remember the rest now. This is called conjugation, which tells us the various verb forms. Syriac is rich with verb forms. In fact, if you pick any grammar you will find that a large portion of it is dedicated to verb forms. We will not be doing that here. As it turns out, many of the verb forms are not as frequent as others, and you may not come across them for some time. Instead, we will concentrate here on a few verb forms that appear in introductory texts. While I will try to make your experience with verbs as pleasant as possible, there is no way around you looking at tables, understanding them, memorizing them, and writing them again and again and again with different verbs until you feel you understand them. That is the only way to learn verbs. Sorry! In this chapter, we will learn the basic verb forms and tenses: past, present, and future. We will also take a look at participles. Additionally, this chapter will introduce you to 30 or so additional words.

4.1 The Present Tense

Singular

New Words The following table gives the various verbal forms introduced in this section: He sits F She sits M Plural

Ņ ƈƃĥňŔ

ň Ņ ħƻ Ŕ

M

They sit F

ťŨŅƻ ŔŅ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ

They sit

He eats She eats They eat

ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ He drinks

Ņ Ņ ƨƃĥŔ

She drinks

Ō Ņ ƎƀƿĥŔ

They drink

Ņ ò ĥŅ Ǝƿ Ŕ

They eat

Ņ ł ĸŴƆŴƘ Ņ ƨƄŔƉň

ň Ņ ƎſƦƣ Ŕ Ǝſò Ņ Ʀƣ Ŕ Ņ

They drink

The other new words are: Paul food

ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ Ņ

earth, land, floor Peter

56

Ņ ł ťƕĿĥ Ņ ň ĸĭƢźƘ

ƢƉĮłŅ He sings She sings

Ņ Ņ ŧƢƉĮ Ō Ņ ƎſƢƉĮ

They sing

Ņ Ņ ķǔƉĮ

They sing stair, step David

Ņ ł ťūĿĪ űſĭĪŌł

The Present Tense

Ņ Ō ťƀÿLJ ŅŔ ĶűƟ Ņ Ŀł ťƤƉ

night in front evening

57

Ņł ťƍŶ ň Ō ł ƗũƤƀƆĥ Ņ Ņ ťſƢƉ

Hannah Elizabeth Lord

Ņ Ľł ŧƢƘ Ņ ł ŧƢſĪ Ņ Ņ Ō ťƊƊſĥ

morning monastery (f.) day

Reading Sentences

Ņ ň Ņ ň Ņ Ņ ł .ťũƇŶł ŦƦƣ Ŕ ň ƈƃňŔĥ ĜťƀƏĿŴƃŏ ƈƕł ħƻ Ŕ ĸŴƆŴƘ Ŕ ĭ ƨƄƉ Paul sits on the chair; (he) eats food and drinks milk. ł Ņ Ņ ł ł .ťũƇŶ ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ ň ƨƃĥŔ ĜťƕĿĥ ƈƕł ťŨŅƻ Ŕ Ņ ƋſƢƉ Ŕ Ņ ĭ ƨƄƉ Mary sits on the floor; (she) eats food and drinksŅ milk. ň Ņ Ō Ņ ł ĸĭƢźƘ Ņ ň Ņ ł ƈƕ ƎƀŨŌƻ .ŧƢƊŶł ƎſƦƣ Ŕ ƎƀƿŔ ĥ ĜťŨŁŴƉ Ŕ Ņ ĸŴƆŴƘĭ Ŕ ĭ ƨƄƉ Peter and Paul sit on the bench; (they) wine. ň eatŅ food andŅ òdrink Ņ ň ƋſƢƉ ł ł ƈƕ ƎŨò Ņ ƻ ł ł .ťſĿŁ Ǝſò Ņ Ʀƣ ĭ ƨ ƄƉ Ǝ ƿ ĥ Ĝť ūĿĪ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ƗũƤƀƭĭ Ŕ

1 2 3 4

Mary and Elizabeth sit on the stair; (they) eat food and drink juice. In the night, David sings in front of God. In the evening, Hannah sings in front of the Lord. In the morning, the holy (men) sing in the church.

Ņ ł ĶűƟ Ņ Ō Ņ Ŕ űſĭĪŌ ł ƢƉĮłŅ ťƀÿLjŨ .ŦųƆĥ Ņ Ņ ťƤƉƢŨ ł Ņ ł ŧƢƉĮ Ņ Ŕ ťƍŶ .ťſƢƉŅ ĶűƟ ňò ł Ō Ņ ł Ō ťƤſűƟ .ŦŁűƖŨ ƎſƢƉĮ ŧƢƘƞŨ Ņ ł Ņ Ō ò Ņ Ō ł .ŧƢſűŨ ŦƦƤſűƟ ķǔƉĮŅ ťƊƊſŤŨ Ŕ

5 6 7 8

In (i.e., during) the day, the holy (women) sing in the monastery.

New Concepts If you look at the English verbs above, you will find that there are two forms such as eats (for singular) and eat (for plural). In Syriac, there are a lot more forms. There is a form for every combination of gender (masculine or feminine) and number (singular or plural). Most of the verbs that we have come across previously were in the present tense. The verbs introduced in the reading sentences above are also in the present tense. There are four forms in the present tense, classified by gender, and number. The various combinations are listed below:

Singular

Table 4. Present Tense Verbs (3rd Person).

He sits F She sits M

Plural

Ņ ƈƃĥňŔ

ň Ņ ħƻ Ŕ

M

They sit F They sit

ťŨŅƻ ŔŅ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ

He eats She eats They eat They eat

Ņ Ņ ƨƃĥŔ Ō Ņ ƎƀƿĥŔ Ņ ò ĥŅ Ǝƿ Ŕ

ň Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ

He drinks She drinks They drink They drink

ťſŅƦƣ Ŕ Ņ ň Ņ ƎſƦƣ Ŕ Ǝſò Ņ Ʀƣ Ŕ Ņ

ƢƉĮłŅ He sings She sings They sing

Ņ Ņ ŧƢƉĮ Ō Ņ ƎſƢƉĮ Ņ Ņ ķǔƉĮ

They sing

Let’s look for patterns to help us remember these four forms. Ignoring the highlighted words for now, take a look at the verbs in the singular masculine row. Do you see a pattern? ň Ņ It seems that there is always an š on the first letter, and š on the second letter, with no vowel on the last letter. (The last letter never takes a vowel in Syriac.) If we use a dotted

58

Reading With Tense

š¡

ž

circle to represent each letter, then our pattern is ºº. (Don’t start coloring circles with crayons. That’s not the point!) ł Ņ and it does not fit the pattern as the vowel The last highlighted verb in this row is ƢƉĮ ň ł of the second letter is š, not š. This is actually not an exception, but governed by a rule. All what you need to know now is that if the third letter is Ŀ then the vowel of the second letter ł ł Ņ is š. Here, the pattern is Ŀšš (since we know the third letter is Ŀ we use it in the pattern instead of a dotted circle). Let’s now find a pattern for the plural masculine row. Again, ignore the highlighted ň Ņ Ņ ƎſƦƣ Ŕ for now. The vowel of the first letter is š. The second letter has no vowel. The vowel Ō Ō Ņ of the third letter is š. Then follows the suffix Ǝſ. The pattern then is Ǝſš š. Now it is your turn to find the patterns of the two feminine rows. Simply, look at the verbs in each row. If you see a letter that changes in each instance, replace it with a dotted circle. What do you get? Ņ Ņ If you got it right, you would have the pattern ťš š for the singular feminine row, and ķšŅ šŅ for the plural feminine row (with the two-dot syomé). The following table summarizes the patterns:

š

š

š

Plural

Singular

Table 5. Present Tense Patterns.

M F M F

ššňšŅ

ł Ņ Ŀšš ťšŅššŅ ƎſšŌššŅ ò Ņ ššŅ ķš

Such patterns or templates govern verb formation in Syriac and all other Semitic languages. It will help you a great deal if you start looking for patterns in verbs. Exercise 4.1 1. Give the feminine forms of the following verbs: ň Ņ ň Ņ ‘he takes’ a. ħǁ b. ŪƐƌ Ŕ ‘he writes’ ňŔ Ņ ‘he worships’ c. űŬƏ d. Ʀŷƌ Ŕ ň Ņ ‘he descends’ 2. Give the masculine forms of the following verbs: Ņ Ŕ Ņ ‘she closes’ Ņ Ņ ‘she ascends’ b. ŧƢƄƏ a. ťƠÿƇƏ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ‘he exits’ c. ƨźƟ ‘she kills’ d. ťƠƙƌ ŏ ň with ŧƢƏ Ņ ł in the following sentence, changing verbs as appropriate: 3. Replace ķŴƖƊƣ

Ņ Ō ł ŅŅ ň ň Ņ Ņ ł Ņ ň Ņ ł ň Ņ ł ŏ ň ň Ņ ŦƼŨ ƎƉ ŧƢƘƞŨ Ʀŷƌ .ŦƦũſǁĭ Ŕ ťƍſƢƟ ƚƇſ ƎƉŁ .ŧƢƙƏ ƼũëƆ Ŕ Ōň ĵĮĥĭ Ŕ ň Ņ ķŴƖƊƣ Ņ ň Ņ Ņ ň ‘reading’, ŦƦũſǁ (Vocabulary: ƚƇſŅ ‘learns’, ťƍſƢƟ Ŕ ‘writing’.) ł Ņ Ņ ňò Ņ ò in the following sentence, changing verbs as appropriate: 4. Replace ťƀÿǑ with ŦƼÿǑ Ŕ Ō Ō Ņ ň ňò Ņ Ō Ņ ƎſƢƉĮĭ Ō Ņ ƎƀŨƻ Ō Ņ Ǝƀƿĥ Ō Ŕ Ņ ťƀÿǑ .ƎſƦŷƌĭŅ ƎƀƠÿƇƏĭ Ŕ Ǝƃĭ ĜƎƀƙÿƇſĭ 5. Translate the sentences in 3 and 4 (including the ones you modified) into English.

The Past Tense

59

Templates and Syriac Morphology The term MORPHOLOGY is used in linguistics to describe how words are formed. For example, the English word unsuccessful is formed by the sequence un + success + ful. Most languages derive words by simply adding prefixes like un and suffixes like ful. Word formation in Syriac (and all other Semitic languages) also uses prefixes and suffixes, but makes use of a more complex system—especially in verbs—called templates or patterns. We have seen templates above. As it turns out, templates are a blessing and help you recognize words. ň Ņ ň Ņ ň Ņ , ƈźƟ Take a look at the following verbs: ŪƐƌ , ĴƢƃ Ŕ . Do you think you can tell something about them, even if you don’t know what they mean? Compare their pattern with the patterns in the table above. You will find ¡ ž that they have a pattern that matches ºº. So now you know that these are present tense verbs. They are also masculine and singular. See, simply by recognizing the pattern, you can tell something about the verb even if you don’t know the meaning.

š

4.2 The Past Tense New Words letter paper afterwards painted, engraved picture paper, leaf, card then

Ņ łň ŦŁƢūĥ Ŕ Ņ ł ťƟĿĭ ł Ņ ňƎƃĿƦŨ Ŕ ł ƋƣĿ Ņ ŏ ŦŁĿĭĽ Ņ ł ł ťƐƀŹƢƟ Ǝƃň

wall Rachel short fathers Syriac (f.) useful (pl.) scribes

Ņ ŏ ŧĿŴƣ ň Ņ ƈŶĿ Ņ Ō Ŧƻ Ņ Ŕ Ņ Ƣƃò Ņ ł Ŧ ŁųŨĥ Ņ ŅŔ ŏ ŦƼſĿŴƏ Ņ ł ljň ǓŁŴƉ ňŔ ò ŏ Ņ ťƃŴƐƌ

ł

they scribed, copied (m.) ŴŹƢƏ ô ň ŏ them Ņ Ņ ò Ō ķŴƌĥł ŦŁűƀƊëƆŁ pupils (f.) Ŕ ň yesterday ƁƇƉ ô Ņ ŁĥŔ day ĶŴſŏ

Reading Sentences

ň ł ł ł Ņ ň ƦŨĭ ł ƎƃĿ .ťŶŴƆ ƈƕł ŦŁĿĭĽ ƋƣĿ Ŕ ťŨĥ Ŕ ĜťƟĿĭł ƈƕł ŦŁƢūĥ Ŕ ł ħǁ The father wrote a letter on paper; and then (he) painted a picture ł ł onł the board. ł ň ň ň ň ĜťƐƀŹƢƟ ƈƕ ŦŁƢū .ŧĿŴƣ ƈƕł ŦŁĿĭĽ ƦƊƣĿ Ŕ ťƉĥ Ŕ ǁ Ŕ ł Ǝƃĭ Ŕ ĥ ƦŨ The mother wrote a letter on paper; and then (she) painted a łpicture on ł theł wall. ł ł ł Ņ .ŦǂſŔ Ŀĥ ŦƼƖƣŁ ƦŨǁ Ŕ Ʀƌĥô :IJƦƉ Ŕ Matthew: you wrote a long story. ł ł ł Ņ Ō ň Ņ ŦƼƖƣŁ IJƦŨ .ŦƻƢƃ Ŕ Ŕ IJƦƌĥ Ŕ ô ô :ƈŶĿ ô ǁ Rachel: you wrote a short story. ň ł .ťƄſŔĿĥ ťŨǁ Ŕ ň ljĥŅ Ŕ ƦŨ Ŕ ňǁ

1 2 3 4 5

I wrote a long book.

ň ł Ņ ł Ņ ł Ō ŦŁųŨĥ ň Ņ ł ťŨò ǁ Ņ .ķŴƌĥ ŴôŹƢƏ ťƃŴŔòƐƌĭŅ ĜljǓŁŴƉ ŦŁűƕĪ Ŕ ŴŨ Ŕ ŦƼſĿŴƏ Ŕò Ņ ô ǁ

6

60

Reading With Tense

The Fathers of the Syriac Church wrote useful books; ň ł and the scribes copied them.

ł ł ŦŁűƀƊƆŁĭ Ņ ł .ķŴƌĥ ƁŹǔƏ ĜťŨò ǁ Ŕ ƁŨ Ŕ ŧƢƙƏň ƼŨĪ Ŕ Ņò Ŕ ň ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ ô ô òǁ Ŕ ŅŔ ò The (female) teachers of the school wrote books, and the (female) pupils copied them. ŏ ł Ņ ł ķĭƦŨ Ņ ň ƁūĿŴū Ō ł ň ýťƍƉŴſ ǁ Ŕ ķŴƉŏ :ŧƢƍƃĭ George and Kenoro: What (did) you write today? ň òň ł ł ŏ ŦƼũŹ ýƁƇƉ ǁ Ŕ ķŴƉŏ :ƎƣŴƣĭ Ŕ Ō ô Ņ ŁĥŔ ƎſƦŨ Tabitha and Susan: What did (you) write yesterday? ł ł ł ǁ .ĶŴſŏ ƈƃŏ ƎƍŨ Ŕ ƎƍŶ

7 8 9 10

We wrote every day.

New Concepts The above sentences show a number of verbs in the past tense. In addition to being gender and number sensitive, verbs are also person sensitive. PERSON can be 1st (e.g., I/we), 2nd (i.e., you), or 3rd (i.e., he/she/they). So now our tables will become more complicated when we add ł the person variable. The table for the various past tense forms for the verbs ħǁ Ŕ ‘to write’, ň ł ƋƣĿ ‘to draw’, and Ǝƙƃ ‘to be hungry’ is given below. Table 6. Past tense verbs.

Singular

3

M F

2

M F

1

Plural

3

M F

2

M F

1

ł ħǁ Ŕ ƦŨ Ŕň Ŕ łǁ ł ƦŨǁ Ŕ ł IJƦŨ Ŕ ô ǁ ň ƦŨ Ŕň Ŕ ǁ ł ŴŨ Ŕ ô ǁ ł ò ƁŨ Ŕ ô ǁ ŏ ł ķĭƦŨǁ Ŕ ň ł òƎſƦŨ ǁ Ŕ ł ł ǁ ƎƍŨ Ŕ

ł ƋƣĿ ň ƦƊƣĿ Ŕ ł ł ƦƊƣĿ ł IJƦƊƣĿ ô ň ƦƊƣĿ Ŕ ň ŴƊƣĿ ô ł ƁƊƣǓ ô ł ŏ ł ķĭƦƊƣĿ ň ł ƎſƦƊƣǓ ł ł ƎƍƊƣĿ

ň Ǝƙƃ ƦŔƍłƙƃň ň Ʀƍƙƃ ň IJƦ ô ƍƙƃ ƦŔňƍƙƃň ň Ŵôƍƙƃ Ɓôƍòƙňƃ ŏ ň ķĭƦƍƙƃ ň ƎſƦƍòƙňƃ ň Ǝƍłƍƙƃ

ł Łš Ŕ Ł IJŁ ô ň Łš Ŕ ĭô IJôò ŏ ķĭŁ òň ƎſŁ Ǝƌł

As before, we will look at common denominators to help us remember these forms. If you examine each row, you will note that—apart from the first row—each row has a specific ł suffix. For example, all singular 3rd feminine forms (row 2) end in Łš Ŕ ň ‘she Ŕ łǁ Ŕ such as ƦŨ ň wrote’, ƦƊƣĿ Ŕ ł ‘she drew’, and ƦŔƍłƙƃň ‘she was hungry’. Also, all the plural 1st masculine and ł ň ‘we ł ǁ ł ł ‘we drew’, and Ǝƍłƍƙƃ feminine forms (last row) end in Ǝƌł as in ƎƍŨ Ŕ ‘we wrote’, ƎƍƊƣĿ were hungry’. The last right-most column in the table gives these endings. Note that the singular 3rd masculine forms (first row) have no endings. Also note that in the first person, the masculine and feminine forms are the same. So a man or a woman can say ƦŨ Ŕ ň ‘I wrote’. Ŕ ňǁ Take a minute to count the number of rows in the table above…

The Past Tense

61

Yes, we learned in this lesson ten verbal forms, and much more are coming. As I stressed at the beginning of this chapter, keep practicing each set of forms that you learn before you move on to the next section. In addition to doing the exercises below, you can create tables for various verbs following the above table. The most common cause of Syriac course drop outs is the verb. One final important note, especially if you are reading other grammars. All European and American grammars of Syriac call the past tense PERFECT TENSE (if you are interested why, read Section 4.7). We shall follow here the Syriac grammatical tradition which calls this Ņ ł ‘the time which passed’. ł ł ťƍŨĮ tense ƢũƕĪ

ň

Verbs with š on the Second Letter

ł

ł

ň

ň

ł have š on the second letter, the verb Ǝƙƃ has š Note that while the verbs ħǁ Ŕ and ƋƣĿ ň ň ‘he ascended’. You instead. Other past tense verbs with š are Ʀŷì Ŕ ň ƌ ‘he descended’ and ơƇƏ learn this by experience or by looking up the verb in the dictionary. (Hint: Transitive verbs, ł i.e., those which take an object, tend to have an š vowel, while intransitive verbs, i.e., those Ņ łň ł ň that do not take an object, tend to have š. In Sentence 1, ŦŁƢūĥ Ŕ .) Ŕ is the object of ħǁ The endings in the above table are the same regardless of the vowel of the verb: Ʀŷì Ŕň ƌ ł ň ‘he descended’, ŁƦŷƌ ‘she descended’, ŁƦŷì Ŕ Ŕ ň ƌ ‘you (m.) descended’, IJŁƦŷì ô ň ƌ ‘you (f.) descended)’, etc.

Ņ ł ł

Bonus Word: ťƐƀŹƢƟ

ł

Ņ ł ‘card’ shares a common ancestry with the English word card. Both come The word ťƐƀŹƢƟ from Greek chartés. While the Syriac comes directly from Greek, the English comes from a long journey: from Middle English carde, from Anglo-French, alteration of Middle French carte, probably from Old Italian carta (literally ‘leaf of paper’), from Latin charta ‘leaf of papyrus’, from Greek chartés. This common ancestry helps you remember words. Here are a few more words which ň ł ‘archive’, and ŧƢƀƙƏ Ņ Ō ‘sphere’. Ņ ł Ō ł ‘Patriarch’, ťƃǓĥ share a common ancestry: ťƃƢſƢźƘ Exercise 4.2 1. Conjugate the following verbs as in the table above: ł ‘he sang’ ł ‘he took’ a. ƢƉĮ b. ŪƐƌ ň ň ƌ ‘he descended’ c. Ʀŷì d. ơƇƏ ‘he ascended’ ł ł 2. Change the verb ħǁ to ƅƐƌ ‘copied’ in sentences 1-10 above. 3. Conjugate the verbs in 1 above in the present tense as in section 4.1. 4. Translate into English:

Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƀÿŶĭ ň Ņ ƅƉ .ťũƖŨ Ŕ ň ĪĭŅ ƈƃĥň Ŕ ƨìƀƘŌ ň ŏ ł ł ŅŌ ł Ņ ł Ōł .ŧǓŴƉŵƉ ħǁ Ŕ ťƀũƌĭ ťƄÿƇƉ űſĭĪ Ņ ł Ņ łň Ņ Ņ Ŵłſ .ŦǂſĿĥ ƦŨǁ Ŕ ŦŁƢūĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň ťƍƉ Ŕ

a b c

62

Reading With Tense

Ņ Ō Ņ ŏ ł Ņ ł ‘king’, ťƀũƌ Ņ Ņ ‘forest’, ťƄÿƇƉ ň Ņ ‘lives’, ťũƕ Ņ Ō ‘prophet’, ŧĿŴƉŵƉ Note. ƨìƀƘ ‘elephant’, ƅƉĪ Ŕ ň Ņ ‘sleeps’, ťƀŶ ‘psalm’.

4.3 Let’s Take a Break… and Chant Thus far we have introduced fourteen verbal forms: four present-tense forms and ten pasttense forms. So let’s take a break and do a bit of reading (and chanting if you like). Unlike the sentences which we have thus far read (which I imposed on you from my own composition), the reading in this section is a hymn from the liturgy. New Words they are flying (f.) they are coming (f.) pigeons beautiful

ŅòŅ ƎƐƀŹ Ņ Ǝſò Ņ ŁĥŔ ňòł Ņ ljŴſ Ņò ł ŦƻŤƘ Ŕ

Ņ ŦƼƉŅ űƟ Ŕł Ō ƎƀƖŹ Ō ŅťƍƀƖŹ ň ŏ ƈſĥŴƊƣ

first is carrying (m.) is carrying (f.) Samuel

middle creation

Ņ Ņ ň ŦƼƕƞƉ Ņ Ņ ň ŦƻǔŨ Ŕ

Reading Sentences The following is a hymn consisting of four lines:

Ņ òŅ ł ò ł Ņ òŅ Ņ Ņ ò Ņ .ŦƻŤ Ŕ Ƙ ljŴſ ƦŔƆŁ ƎſŁĥĭ Ŕ ƎƐƀŹ ň ł Ō ĜƈſĥŴƊƤƆ ťƍƀƖŹ ŦƼƉŅ űƟ Ŕł Ņ ň Ō ŦƼƕƞƉ Ņ ł ƀƆ ťƍƀƖŹ ĜƎƍŶŴ Ō ƦƆŁĪ Ņ ł ųƆň ťƍƀƖŹ .ŦƻǔŨ Ŕ Ņ ň ƎƀƖŹĪł ĭųëƆ Ŕ Ņ ł IJĬĭ

1. 2. 3. 4.

1 2 3 4

Three beautiful pigeons are flying and coming. The first (one) is carrying Samuel, The middle (one) is carrying John, And that, the third, is carrying Him, that Who is carrying the Creation.

New Concepts The above text is a hymn from the West Syriac tradition. Let’s first concentrate on the language, then I will tell you a bit about it. Sentence 1: Note that the word order in the Syriac phrase and its English translation Ņ òŅ ł ň ò ł Ņ Ņ ò Ņ ŦƻŤƘ ò Ņ Ņ ƎƐƀŹ ljŴſ ƦƆŁ, but this will not fit the melody don’t match. Actually, we can say ƎſŁĥĭ of the hymn. Syriac word order then is more free than English. There are two verbs here: Ņ ò Ņ ‘are flying’ and ƎſŁĥ ò Ņ Ņ ‘are coming’; both are present-tense, 3rd person feminine plurals. ƎƐƀŹ Ņ ł ‘pigeon’ looks like a masculine noun because it does not end in ŦŁŅ, but since The noun ljŴſ Ņ òŅ ł Ņ Ņ ł must the number ƦƆŁ ‘three’ and the adjective ŦƻŤƘ ‘beautiful’ are both feminine, then ljŴſ be feminine too (in fact it is one of few words that can be both feminine and masculine). Sentences 2 and 3: The letter ĵ is frequently used to mark the object in a sentence. In ň ŏ Ņ ł ŏ ‘John’. This marker will Sentence 2, the object is ƈſĥŴƊƣ ‘Samuel’, and in Sentence 3 ƎƍŶŴſ

Let’s Take a Break… and Chant

63

help you recognize the object of a sentence, especially when the sentence can be read different ways. We will see some examples later on. Ņ Ņ does not have a clear Sentence 4 is a bit complicated. The construction ƦƆŁĪł IJĬĭ equivalent in English. It literally means ‘and that, the third’, and can be translated more Ō ł ĭĬł means literally ‘that, idiomatically into English as ‘and the third’. The construction ƎƀƖŹĪ who carries’. We will cover constructions like Ī IJĬŅ and Ī ĭĬł in Chapter 1. You can hear the hymn chanted in the audio files. Did you guess the symbolism behind the hymn? The first pigeon is Hannah, the mother of Prophet Samuel who prophesied the coming of Christ. The middle one is Elizabeth, the mother of John the Baptist who prepared the path for Christ. Who is the third one? Present Tense Revisited We covered the present tense in section 4.1, but only for the third person. The rest of the ň ł conjugation of the present tense follows the third person, but adds pronouns like ljĥŅ ‘I’, Ʀƌĥ ô ł ŏ ł ň ł ł ‘we’, ķĭƦƌĥ ‘you (m.)’, IJƦƌĥ ô ô ‘you (f.)’, ƎƍŶ ô ‘you (pl. m.)’, and ƎſƦƌĥô ‘you (pl. f.)’. The following table gives the entire conjugation. Table 7. Present Tense Full Conjugation.

Ņ ň Ņ ŦƦƣ ƢƉĮłŅ ƈƃĥňŔ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ F ƨƃĥŔ ťſŅƦƣ ŧƢƉĮ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł ł ň Ņ ł 2 M Ʀƌĥô ƈƃĥňŔ Ʀƌĥô ŦƦƣ Ʀƌĥô ƢƉĮłŅ Ŕ ł Ņ Ņ ł ł Ņ Ņ F IJƦƌĥ IJƦƌĥ IJƦƌĥ Ŕ Ņ ô ô ƨƃĥŔ ô ô ťſŅƦƣ ô ô ŧƢƉĮ Ņ ň Ņ 1 M ljĥŅô ŦƦƣ ljĥŅô ƢƉĮłŅ ljĥŅô ƈƃĥňŔ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ F ljĥŅô ƨƃĥŔ ljĥŅô ťſŅƦƣ ljĥŅô ŧƢƉĮ Ŕ Ņ ň Ņ Ō Ņ Ō Ņ 3 M ƎſƢƉĮ ƎƀƿĥŔ ƎſƦƣ Ŕ Ņ ò ĥŅ Ņ Ņ ķǔƉĮ Ǝƿ Ǝſò Ņ Ʀƣ F Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ŏ ŏ ň Ņ Ō Ņ Ō Ņ 2 M ķĭƦƌô ĥ ƎſƦƣ ķĭƦƌô ĥ ƎſƢƉĮ ķĭƦƌô ĥ ƎƀƿĥŔ Ŕ ň ň ň Ņ ò ĥŅ Ņ Ņ ƎſƦƌô ĥ ķǔƉĮ ƎſƦƌô ĥ Ǝſò Ņ Ʀƣ ƎſƦƌô ĥ Ǝƿ F Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ň Ņ Ō Ņ Ō Ņ ł ƎſƦƣ ł ƎſƢƉĮ ł Ǝƀƿĥ 1 M ƎƍŶ ƎƍŶ ƎƍŶ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ò ĥŅ Ņ Ņ ł Ǝſò Ņ Ʀƣ ł ķǔƉĮ ł Ǝƿ ƎƍŶ ƎƍŶ ƎƍŶ F Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ň Note that in the present tense context, ljĥŅ is read ljĥŅô without a vowel on the ĥ. You will ŏ ł ň ł ł and ƎſƦƌĥ also note that there is no š on the ĥ of ķĭƦƌĥ ô above. This is so because the phrase ô ŏ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƦƌĥô ƎƀŨƻ ƌĥ of ķĭƦƌĥô are Ŕ is read yoth-bee-toon as one word, where the final Ǝ of the verb, and ô ň ł Ņ Ņ all silent even though we only put a line under the ô ƌ. Similarly, we read ƎſƦƌĥ Ŕ yoth-bo-tén ô ƎŨƻ ŏ ň Ņ (with a long é), ķĭƦƌĥ ô ƎſƦƣ sho-té-toon, etc. Plural

Singular

3

M

ň Ņ ħƻ Ŕ ŅťŨƻ ŔŅ ł ň Ņ Ʀƌĥô ħƻ Ŕ ł Ņ Ņ IJƦƌĥ Ŕ ô ô ťŨƻ ň Ņ Ņljĥô ħƻ Ŕ ljĥŅô ťŨŅƻ ŔŅ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ ŏ ķĭƦƌĥô ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ ň Ņò Ņ ƎſƦƌô ĥ ƎŨƻ Ŕ łƎƍŶ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ ł ƎŨò Ņ ƻ ƎƍŶ ŔŅ

64

Reading With Tense

Exercise 4.3 ł ‘he took’ in the past tense. 1. Conjugate the verb ŪƐƌ 2. For each verbal form in the tables you created in 1, construct a meaningful sentence. 3. Translate into Syriac: a. The big boy wrote a letter. b. The female-teacher wrote a long book. Ņ Ō ). c. I carried the cross (ťũƀƆĽ 4. Conjugate the following verbs in the present tense (1st, 2nd, and 3rd person): ł ł a. ħǁ b. İƢƏ Ŕ

4.4 The Future Tense New Words

ň ł we shall thank ŧĪŴƌ ŏ they (m.) will thank ķĭĪŴƌł ĪŴŬƐƌ we shall worship Ŕ ŏ ň ŏŔ ň they(m.)will worshipķĭűŬƐƌ ň Ō ŦŁŤƌ he will come Ŕ

ň Ō

she will come ŦŁĥŁ Ŕ ň ł he will rest ƎūŤƌ ł ň ƎūĥŁ she will rest ŏ ň they (m.) will cry out Ō ķŴƖƠƌ ŏ łł Emmanuel ƈſĥŴƍƊƕ

descended my bones tomb she gave birth virgin

Ō ł ň IJƦŶŁŁĥ ł ł ƁƉǔū Ņ ł ŧƢũƟ Ŕłŏ ň Ņ ŁűÿƇſ ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ Ŕ

Reading Sentences

Ō ŏ łł Ō ł ň ł ĜųƆň ĪŴŔŬƐƌňĭ ŧĪŴƌ .IJƦŶŁŁĥ Īň ƈſĥŴƍƊƖëƆ We shall thank and shall worship him, Emmanuel who (from heaven). ł ň descended ł ŏ Ŕ ň ĭ ķĭĪŴƌł .IJƦŶŁŁĥ Ī ƈſĥŴƍƊƖëƆ ĜųƆň ķĭűŬƐƌ They will thank and will worship him, Emmanuel who descended [from heaven]. ň ł ĭ ťƤſűƟł ťŶĭĿŏ ŦňŁŤƌ .űŶ Ŕ ł ƈƃŏ ƈƕł ƎūŤƌ ŔŌ The Holy Spirit will come (masculine) and will rest upon each one. ł Ō ň Łĭ ťƤſűƟł ťŶĭĿŏ ŦňŁĥŁ .űŔŶł ƈƃ ƈƕ Ǝūĥ Ŕ The Holy Spirit will come (feminine) and will rest upon each one. ŏ Ņ ł ł ķŴƖƠƌň .ŦƦƆĭƦŨ Ŕ ŁűÿƇſ Ŕ ł ň ŦųƭĪł ŧƢũƟł ƎƉň ƁƉǔū

1 2 3 4 5

My bones will cry from the tomb, “the Virgin gave birth to God.”

New Concepts The above sentences show a number of verbs in the future tense. As with the past tense, the future tense verbs are sensitive to number (singular or plural), gender (masculine or feminine) and person (1st, 2nd, and 3rd). You do the math. This gives 12 formations (actually 10 because the 1st person masculine and feminine are the same). All the highlighted verbs, apart from the ones in Sentence 4 which we will come to later, begin with a ƌ. This is your clue that the verb is in the future tense. It is also a clue that the verb is masculine.

The Future Tense

65

ň ł and ĪŴŬƐƌ ŏ ň in Sentence 1, and their Do you see a difference between the verbs ŧĪŴƌ ŏ ł and ķĭűŬƐƌ ŏ ň in Sentence 2? The second set ends in ķĭšŏ. This is your clue counterparts ķĭĪŴƌ that they are plural (the first set is singular). The verbs in Sentence 4 begin with a Ł. This is also a clue that they are in the future tense, but they are feminine. But be careful. These prefixes are all clues, not assurances that the verbs are in the ň Ņ ‘he is taking’. It too begins with ƌ, but notice its pattern šňšŅ. future. Consider the verb ŪƐƌ We said already that such patterns are in the present tense. It turns out the initial ƌ is part of the verb’s root. ł The following table gives the conjugation of the future tense with the verbs ħǁ ‘to ł ł ‘to draw’, and įƦƘ write’, ƋƣĿ ‘to open’. Note that the vowel of the future tense varies from ŏ ň ł ň ŏ ŏ ň , but šł in įƦƙƌ . The only way to know is to look it verb to verb: it is ĭš in ħĭǂƌ and ĶŴƣƢƌ up in the dictionary. The last two columns on the right give the prefixes and suffixes of these forms.

š

Table 8. Future Tense Verbs.

3

M

Singular

F 2

M F

1 3

M F

Plural

2

M F

1

ŏ ħĭǂƌň ŏ ň ħĭǁŁ ŏ ň ħĭǁŁ Ō ň ƎƀŨǁŁ ŏ ň ħĭǁĥ ŏ ň ķŴŨǂƌ òŅ ň ƎŨǂƌ ŏ ň ķŴŨǁŁ òŅ ň ƎŨǁŁ ŏ ħĭǂƌň

ł įƦƙƌň ł ň įƦƘŁ ł ň įƦƘŁ Ō ň ƎƀŶƦƘŁ ł ň įƦƘĥ ŏ ň ķŴŶƦƙƌ Ņ òň ƎŶƦƙƌ ŏ ň ķŴŶƦƘŁ Ņ òň ƎŶƦƘŁ ł įƦƙƌň

ŏ ň ĶŴƣƢƌ ŏ ň ĶŴƣĿŁ ŏ ň ĶŴƣĿŁ Ō ň ƎƀƊƣĿŁ ŏ ň ĶŴƣĿĥ ŏ ň ķŴƊƣƢƌ Ņ ň ƎƊƣǔƌ ŏ ň ķŴƊƣĿŁ Ņ ň ƎƊƣǓŁ ŏ ň ĶŴƣƢƌ ŏ

ňƌ ň

Ł ň ň

ƎſšŌ ķĭšŏ ò Ņ ķš ķĭšŏ

ň

ò Ņ ķš

ň ň

Ł Ł ň ĥ ňƌ ňƌ Ł Ł ňƌ

Ō ? Can you Did you notice that some forms do not have the ĭš vowel such as ƎƀƊƣĿŁ figure out which verb forms have this vowel deleted? Look at the suffixes. You will find that ŏ forms with suffixes do not have the ĭš vowel. All European and American grammars of Syriac call the future tense IMPERFECT (if you are interested why, read Section 4.7). We shall follow here the Syriac grammatical tradition Ō Ņ ł ‘the time that shall (come)’. which calls this tense űſƦƕ Ŕ Īł ťƍŨĮ

66

Reading With Tense

Ī

Other Usages of (The Relative, Quotation Marker) You may have noticed that the letter Ī appears as a prefix to a number of words and it is highlighted in the above sentences. Remember that Ī is one of the ĵĭűŨ letters and it means ‘of’. Another usage of Ī (and trust me, it has many others!) is in a relative clause. A RELATIVE CLAUSE is the part of the sentence that gives extra information. It is usually introduced by a RELATIVE PRONOUN. In the English sentence here is the bottle which I bought this morning, the relative pronoun which introduces the relative clause (i.e., extra information) I bought this morning. Another example is this is the girl who comes from Edessa; here, the relative pronoun who introduces the relative clause comes from Edessa. In Syriac, Ī is the mother of all relative pronouns. Ō ŏ łł Ō ł ň ł ‘We shall thank and shall In Sentence 1, IJƦŶŁŁĥ Īň ƈſĥŴƍƊƖëƆ ĜųƆň ĪŴŬƐƌĭ Ŕ ŏ ň ŧĪŴƌ worship him, Emmanuel who descended (from heaven)’, the letter Ī is the relative pronoun for who. Another usage of Ī is to introduce a quotation. This is illustrated in Sentence 5 which ŏ Ņ ŏ ň ‘My bones shall cry from the tomb, “the Ņ ł ƎƉň ƁƉǔū Ņ Ņ Īł ŧƢũƟ ł ł ķŴƖƠƌ reads ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ Ŕ ŁűÿƇſ Ŕ ł ň Ŧųƭ Virgin gave birth to God”.’

ŏ

Ņ Bonus Word: ťŶĭĿ

ŏ

Ņ Ō ł ťŶĭĿ Ņ , is commonly used in the feminine in earlier Syriac literature, The Holy Spirit, ťƤſűƟ especially in the writings of Saint Ephrem. Traces of this remain in the liturgy today. You will notice that in Sentences 3 and 4, we used both masculine and feminine verbs to refer to ň Ō Ņ Ō ł ťŶĭĿ Ņ ŏ ŦŁŤƌ the Holy Spirit. In this particular instance, the liturgy uses the masculine form: ťƤſűƟ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ň űŶŔ ł űŶŔ ł ƈƕł ƎūŤƌĭ łŔ űŶ łŔ means each one, literally one one). ň ł (the phrase űŶ ķŴƄƍƉ Exercise 4.4 1. Conjugate the following verbs in the future tense: ŏ ł a. ħĭǂňƌ ‘he shall write’ b. įƦƙňƌ ‘he shall open’ ł ň ‘he shall carry’ ł ň ‘he shall sign’ c. ƎƖźƌ d. ƢƉŵƌ 2. What is the meaning and function of Ī in the following sentence?

Ņ

Ņ Ō ł Ņ ň ň ĵĮĥł ň ƎƍŶŴſ Ņł ŏ ň Ŕ Ņ ŦƦƍſűƊŨĪ .ŧĪĬ ŧƢƙƏ ƼũëƆ Ŕ Ŕ ô ňł ň ň Ņ ŧƢƙƏ Ņ ň ƼŨĪ ŅŅ ł .ĵĮĥ ĶŴſŏ ƈƃŏ ħǁĭ Ŕ Ņ ŧƢƟĪ Ŕ ň ťƍƙÿƇƉ Ņ ťŨĥŅ ł Ņ Ņ ťƖƟ .IJƢŨ ô ň ljĬĪ

a b c

Note. ťƖƟ ‘cried, shouted’, IJƢŨ ô ň ‘my son’. 3. Write three sentences one with Ī meaning ‘of’, a second for Ī as a relative pronoun, and a third with Ī marking a direct quote. 4. Translate the sentences in 2 and 3 into English.

Don’t Order Me Around: The Imperative and the Prohibitive

67

4.5 Don’t Order Me Around: The Imperative and the Prohibitive New Words

ŅŅ ł ĶĬƢŨĥ ł įƦƘł Ņ ťƕĿŁ Ņ Ņł ŦƻĪĿ ĵŴƕŏ

Abraham open (sing., m.) door car enter

window exit (pl., m.) outside train look (pl., f.)

Reading Sentences Abraham, open the door of the car and enter. Sara, open the window of the house. Boys, open the door and exit outside. Girls, open the door of the train and look there.

Ņ ŦŁŴƃł ŏ ŴƟŴƘ ô ł ƢũëƆ Ņ ŅŧƢźƟ IJǓŴŶ ô ŏ

there for us full of mercy

ł ŅŅ ł Ņ ł ťƕĿŁł įƦƘ .ĵŴƕŏĭ ŦƻĪĿĪ ĜĶĬƢŨĥ ł Ņ ł ł ŦŁŴƃł ƁôÿŶƦƘ .ŦƼŨĪ ĜŧƢƏ ł ł ŏ ł ŴƟŴƘ ò Ņ .ƢũëƆ ô ĭ ťƕĿŁ ŴôÿŶƦƘ ĜťƀÿǑ Ņ ł Ņ òŅ ł Ņ ł IJǓ .ƎƉŁ ô ŴŶŏĭ ŧƢźƟĪł ťƕĿŁ ƁôŶòƦƘ ĜŦƼÿǑ ň ł ł Ņ ł ł ł ƨƉĪ ťŨĿ ťƕĿŁ IJƢƉ ô Ņ ƎƆł įƦƘ

Open for us, My Lord, the big door, which is full.ťƊŶǓ

Ņł ƎƉŁ ł ň ƎƆ ƨÿƉ ň ł ťƊŶǓ

1 2 3 4 5

of mercy.

Plural Sing.

New Concepts The above highlighted verbs are all imperative. The IMPERATIVE tense refers to commands, instructions, or requests for action. While the imperative is gender- and number-sensitive, luckily all forms are almost the same. They only differ in the endings, which at any rate are silent (as indicated by the line ł ł under the endings). So įƦƘ (masculine, singular), Ɓìô ŶƦƘ (feminine, singular—with a silent IJ ł ł at the end), ŴŶƦƘ (masculine, plural—with a silent ĭ at the end), and ƁŶƦƘ (feminine, ôò ô plural—with a silent IJ at the end and a syomé ) all sound the same and mean ‘open (as a command)’. In Sentence 5, note the use of Ī as a relative pronoun for which. ł The following table gives the conjugation of the imperative with the verbs ħǁ ‘to ł ł ‘to draw’, and įƦƘ ‘to open’. Note that the vowel of the future tense (see Table write’, ƋƣĿ ŏ ł ŏ ŏ , but šł in įƦƘ 8) is retained in the imperative: ĭš in ħĭǁ and ĶŴƣĿ . The last column gives the suffixes of these forms. M F M F

ŏ ħĭǁ ŏ ƁŨĭǁ ô ŏ ŴŨĭǁ ô ŏ ƁŨĭǁ ôò

Table 9. Imperative verbs.

ŏ ĶŴƣĿ ƁƉŴƣĿ ô ŏ ŴƉŴƣĿ ô ŏ ƁƉŴƣǓ ô ŏ

ł įƦƘ ł Ɓìô ŶƦƘ ł ŴŶƦƘ ô ł Ɓìô ŶƦƘò

IJô ĭô IJôò

68

Reading With Tense

Note that the table does not have the person variable. This is because all imperatives are in the 2nd person (you can order around someone you are speaking to, but you cannot order around someone in the next room or order yourself around). You can easily figure out the imperative of the singular masculine from the future tense: ŏ ŏ simply remove the ňƌ prefix; e.g., ħĭǂƌň ‘he shall write’ becomes ħĭǁ ‘write (imperative)’, ł ň ‘he shall sing’ becomes ƢƉłĮ ‘sing (imperative)’, etc. ƢƉŵƌ The Prohibitive In English one prohibits an action by negating the imperative; e.g., open the door vs. do not open Ņ the door. In Syriac, the prohibitive is formed by using the negation particle Ƨ with the future Ņ tense verb, not the imperative. The reading sentences above are rewritten with Ƨ ň Ņ ł ł ň :Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ł ŏ Ņ .ĵŴƕŁ Ƨĭ ŦƻĪĿĪ ťƕĿŁ įƦƘŁ Ƨ ĜĶĬƢŨĥ 1 Abraham, do not open the door of the car and do not enter. Ņ ł 2 ł ŦŁŴƃł ƎƀŶƦƘŁ Ō ň ƧŅ ĜŧƢƏ .ŦƼŨĪ Sara, do not open the window of the house. ł ķŴƠŏƘŁň ƧŅ ĭ ťƕĿŁł ķŴŶƦƘŁ ò Ņ ŏ ň ƧŅ ĜťƀÿǑ .ƢũëƆ 3 Boys, do not open the door and do not exit outside. Ņ ł Ņ òŅ ł Ņ ł ķǓŅŴŶŁ ŏ ƧŅ ĭ ŧƢźƟĪ Ņ ò ň ƧŅ ĜŦƼÿǑ .ƎƉŁ ťƕĿŁ ƎŶƦƘŁ 4 Girls, do not open the door of the train and do not look there. Note: you have to choose the future verb with the proper person, number and gender. Exercise 4.5 1. Derive the imperative from the following future verbs, and give the various forms like in the table above: ł ŏ ň ‘he shall draw’ a. įƦƙƌň ‘he shall open’ b. ĶŴƣƢƌ ł ň ‘he shall carry’ ł ň ‘he shall sign’ c. ƎƖźƌ d. ƢƉŵƌ 2. Derive the future tense verbs from the following imperative verbs: ŏ ŏ Ŕ ‘close’ b. ĿŴƄƏ a. ĵŴźƟ ‘kill’ ł ‘put on clothes’ ŏ ‘anoint’ c. ƥũëƆ d. įŴƤƉ 3. For each imperative verb in 2, write a Syriac sentence and translate it into English. 4. Convert each sentence in 3 from the imperative to the prohibitive. 5. For each verb in 2, construct tables in the past, present, future, and imperative.

4.6 The World of Participles New Words eagle old

Ņ ň ŧƢƤƌ Ō ł ơſƦƕ

Ņ Ņò

ň ò

days ŦƦƉŴſł and ťƉŴſł Ņ ƢŌŨ blessed (m. sing.) ťƄſ

Reading Sentences God is carrying all the creation.

blessed (m. pl.) blessed (f. pl.)

Ō Ō ƎƀƄſƢŨ Ņ Ō ƎƄſǔŨ

Ņ Ņ ň Ņ ł Ō ŦųƆĥ .ŦƻǔŨ ƈƃŏ ƎƀƖŹ Ŕ

1

The World of Participles The young girl-pigeon is carrying the

Ō Ņ ł Ņ Ņ òł Ō ŦƼǑ ň ťƍƀƖŹ ljŴſ ơſƦƕł ŧƢƤƍëƆ .ŦƦƉŴſ Ŕ Ŕ

old eagle (i.e., of old times).

ŅŔ Ō .ljĬŅ ťƉŴſł ťƄſƢŨ ň Ņ ťƉŴſ ò ł ƎƀƄſƢŨ ŌŔ Ō .ƎƀƆĬ Ņ òŅ ł Ņ Ō ò ň ŦŁŴëƆĽ .ťƤƌĪ ƎƄſǔŨ Ŕ Ŕ

Blessed is this day. Blessed are these days. Blessed are the prayers of the women.

69 2 3 4 5

New Concepts The PARTICIPLE is a form of the verb, but it is not a verb. It usually acts like an adjective modifying a noun. In English, participles end in ing, ed, or en such as I like to see smiling faces and I ate a boiled egg (the participles are underlined). Ō ‘carrying’ in In Syriac, the participles are also a form of the verb. For example, ƎƀƖŹ ł ‘he carried’. This is the singular masculine form. Sentence 1 derives from the verb ƎƖŹ Ņ Ņ Ō in The singular feminine form of the same participle adds ťš at the end, e.g., ťƍƀƖŹ Ņ Sentence 2. (This is a case where the final ťš ending is actually feminine.) Ō : the plural masculine adds The plural forms are also derived by adding endings to ƎƀƖŹ Ņ ò Ō . The Ō Ō , and the plural feminine by adding ķšŅ with the two-dot syomé as in ƎƍƀƖŹ ƎſšŌ as in ƎƀƍƀƖŹ ł following table gives all the participles derived from the verb ħǁ:

Plural Sing.

Table 10. Participle forms.

M F M F

Ō Ūſǁ Ŕ Ō Ņťũſǁ Ŕ Ō Ō Ǝƀũſǁ Ŕ Ō ŅƎũſò ǁ Ŕ

ťšŅ ƎſšŌ ò Ņ ķš

Exercise 4.6 1. Read the discussion on patterns in section 4.1. Find the patterns in the participle forms in the above table using dotted circles ‫ ڔ‬for root letters. 2. Derive the various participle forms for the following verb roots, and give their English meaning: a. ƈźƟ b. ƢƄƏ c. ƥũƆ d. įƦƘ 3. Translate into English: Ō Ņ ł Ņ ł Ō ťƕĿŁ .ťŷìſƦƘ ŦŁŴƃĭ ƢƀƄƏ a ł Ņ Ō ł Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ň ŏ Ō ň ł ł ƈƃ ƎƀƖŹĪ ĭĬ b .ųƍƖŹ ťũƀƆĽĪ ťƐƀƟ ŦƻǔŨ Ŕ ł Ō ł Ņ ň Ņ Note. ťƐƀƟ ‘wood’, ťũƀƆĽ ‘cross’, ųƍƖŹ ‘carried him’.

70

Reading With Tense

4.7 The Perfect and Imperfect In this chapter, we have studied verbs in the past tense, present tense, and future tense. The TENSE expresses the time at which an event described by a sentence occurs. For example, a sentence with a past tense verb such as I went denotes that the event took place in the past. Ņ ł ‘the past ł ł ťƍŨĮ Syriac grammars give three tenses, which we have studied already: ƢũƕĪ ň Ņ Ņ ł Ō ł Ņ ł tense’, ĶŤƟĪ ťƍŨĮ ‘the present tense’, and űſƦƕĪ ťƍŨĮ ‘the future tense’. Western grammars of Syriac, however, tend to use other terms. They talk of perfect and imperfect verbs. Where do these terms come from? Strictly speaking, perfect and imperfect are not tenses but aspects. In language, ASPECT marks the verb as being complete (i.e., not in a state of change or flux), or incomplete (i.e., in progress or otherwise conveying a sense of change). A verb whose event has completed is said to be a perfect verb; a verb whose event is still not complete is said to be an imperfect verb. Semitic philologists and linguists still argue about how to describe the Semitic verb, and how aspect and tense are related. This is not something for you to worry about. Most Syriac grammars use the terms perfect and imperfect as if they are tenses, the perfect corresponding to past tense, and imperfect corresponding to future tense.

5 Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes Ņ

Ņ ł ‘and book’. Syriac also We have come across the ĵĭűŨ prefixes such as the ĭ ‘and’ in ťŨǁĭ allows for suffixes, making the word even longer. This chapter introduces two types of suffixes: possessive pronouns (like my, your, his, etc.) and object pronouns (like me, you, him, etc.). Unlike English, these are attached at the end of words. We will also review the ĵĭűŨ prefixes. This chapter introduces about 50 additional words.

5.1 “It’s Mine”: Possessive Suffixes New Words Isaac grapes Shmuni pancake* O! sinner awaken (m. sing.) awaken (f. sing.)

Ņ Ō ơŷƐſĥ ň òň ťũƍƕ Ō ŏ ƁƌŴƊƣ ŏ ł ŅťƃŴƄƍƘ Ņ ĭĥ ŅŅ ł ťƀźŶ Ōł Ƣƀƕĥ łŌ IJƢƀƕĥ ô

awaken (m. pl.) awaken (f. pl.) sister his sister her sister self, soul yourself (m. sing.) yourself (f. sing.)

ł ĭƢƀƕĥ ô Ōł IJǔƀƕĥ ô Ō Ņ Ŕ Ņ ň Ņ ŦƦŶ ĬƦŶ Ŕ ñ ŅŔ Ņ ĬƦŶ Ņ ł ťƤƙƌ ƅƤƙƌ ŔŅ ł ƁôƄƤƙƌ Ŕň ł

Ņ

ò

ŦƦƤƙƌ selves, souls Ŕ Ņ òł ŏ yourselves (m. pl.)ķŴƃƦƤƙƌ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ òł ňŔ Ŕ Ņ ł yourselves (f. pl.) ƎƀƃƦƤƙƌ Ņ ŏŅ ŦŁŴũſŁ repentance Ŕ ł my God IJųƆĥ ô Ņ ł ł Ņ ķųëƆĥ our God Ņ Ņ Lord ťſƢƉ ł Ņ our Lord ķƢƉ

* A word I coined to use with my kids! Reading Sentences Isaac and his sister are eating grapes. Shmuni and her sister are eating pancakes. O (male) sinner, awaken yourself for repentance. O (female) sinner, awaken yourself for repentance. O (male) sinners, awaken yourselves for repentance. O (female) sinners, awaken yourselves for repentance. My Lord, and my God. Our Lord, and our God.

Ō Ņ ň Ņ ò ň Ǝƀƿĥ Ņ Ō .ťũƍƕ Ŕ ĬƦŶĭ ơŷƐſĥ Ņ Ņ Ō ŏ Ņ ò ĥŅ ĬñƦŶĭ ò ŏ ł Ǝƿ .ťƃŴƄƍƘ ƁƌŴƊƣ Ŕ ł Ņ ł Ņ ł ł Ņ Ņ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ Ŕ ƅŔƤƙƌ Ƣƀƕĥ ťƀźŶ ĭĥ Ņ ł Ņ ł ň ł IJƢƀƕĥ Ņ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ Ŕ ƁôƄŔƤƙƌ ô Ō ŦƼźŶł ĭĥ

1 2 3 4

ł òŅ ł Ņ Ņ ĭĥ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ Ŕ ò ł ĭƢƀƕĥ Ŕ ł ķŴƃŏŔƦƤƙƌ ô Ō ťƀźŶ

5

ł Ņ òŅ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ĭĥ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ Ŕ ò ł IJǔƀƕĥ Ŕ Ŕ ƎƀƃňŔƦƤƙƌ ô Ō ŦƼźŶ

6

Ņ .IJôųƭĭł IJôƢƉŅ ł Ņ ł ķƢłƉŅ .ķųƭĭ

7 8

New Concepts The same way the English your attaches to self to form yourself, all possessive pronouns in Syriac attach to words (but at the end as suffixes). A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN, like the English my or your, attributes ownership to someone or something.

71

72

Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes

ň

Ņ

For example, in Sentence 1 the possessive pronoun Ĭš ‘his’ attaches to ŦƦŶ Ŕ Ņ ‘sister’ to ň Ņ Ņ Ņ form ĬƦŶ Ŕ ‘his sister’. Note that the noun ending ťš of ŦƦŶ Ŕ Ņ gets removed in the process. Try ŅŅ Ņ ň Ņ forming his book from ťŨǁ Ŕ . First, remove the ending ťš to get Ũǁ Ŕ , then add the Ĭš to get Ņ ųŨňǁ Ŕ ‘his book’. Possessive pronouns are gender, number, and person sensitive too, the same way ñ Ņ as English has my, your, his, her, etc. In Sentence 2, you will note that the suffix for her is Ĭš Ņñ Ņ Ņ ñ Ņǁ in ĬƦŶ Ŕ ‘her book’. The following table gives the entire list of Ŕ ‘her sister’, and ųŨ Ņ possessive pronouns with the noun ťŨŅǁ Ŕ ‘book’: Table 11. Possessive suffixes.

Ņ His book Ĭšň ųŨňǁ Ŕ Ņ ñ Ņ ñ Ņǁ Her book F ųŨ Ĭš Ŕ Ņ Your book 2 M ƅŨ ĴŔšŅ ŔŅǁ Ŕ Ņ Your book F ƁôƄŨ ƁôƃŔšň Ŕňǁ Ŕ Ņ My book 1 IJô ƁŨ Ŕ ô ǁ Ņ ŏ Their book 3 M ķĭųŨǁ ķĭĬŏ Ŕ Ņ ň ǁ Their book F ƎſųŨ ƎſĬň Ŕ Ņ ŏŔ ǁ Your book 2 M ķŴƄŨ ķŴƃŏŔ Ŕ Ņ ňŔ ǁ Your book F ƎƀƄŨ ƎƀƃňŔ Ŕ Ņ Our book 1 ķšł ƎŨłǁ Ŕ ň Ņ ‘his book’ and ųŨǁ ñ Ņ Ņ ‘her book’ are homographs, In the case of unvocalized text, ųŨǁ but the dot on the Ĭ is enough to indicate if the suffix is masculine or feminine; e.g., ųŨǁ is ň Ņ and ųŨǁ ñ ñ Ņ Ņ . The dot is obligatory. ųŨǁ is ųŨǁ M

Plural

Singular

3

Possessive Pronouns with Plural Nouns There is a second set of possessive pronouns that are used when the noun is masculine and Ņ łŅ plural. For instance, while his book is ųŨňǁ Ŕ , his books (plural) is IJĬŴŨ Ŕ (note the use of syomé ô òǁ with the plural noun). Do you know what the possessive pronoun suffix is in this case? If Ņ ł you take out Ũòǁ Ŕ , we end up with IJĬĭš ô . This is the suffix. In this suffix, both the Ĭ and the IJ are silent, even though only the Ĭ is underlined. There are some modern texts where one ł finds both letters underlined like IJĬĭš ô ô , but the orthographic tradition only underlines the Ĭ ł like IJĬĭš ô and this is my preference. The other suffixes are straightforward. They are listed in the following table with the ň Ņ plural noun ťŨò ǁ Ŕ ‘books’.

“It’s Mine”: Possessive Suffixes

73

Table 12. Possessive suffixes with plural, masculine nouns.

Singular

3

M F

2

M F

1

Plural

3

M F

2

M F

1

łŅ IJĬŴŨ Ŕ ô òǁ ň Ņ ò ñ ǁ ųƀŨ Ŕ łò Ņ ƅƀŨǁ Ŕ łŅ ò ƁƄƀŨ Ŕ ô ǁ łŅ ò ƁŨǁ Ŕ łŅ ŏ ķĭųƀŨò ǁ Ŕ łŅ ò ň ƎſųƀŨǁ Ŕ łŅ ŏ ò ķŴƄƀŨǁ Ŕ łŅ ň ò ƎƀƄƀŨǁ Ŕ łŅ ò ƎƀŨǁ Ŕ

His books Her books Your books Your books My books Their books Their books Your books Your books Our books

ł IJĬĭš ô ñ ň ųſš ƅſšł ł ƁƄſš ô IJšł ŏ ł ķĭųſš ň ł Ǝſųſš ŏ ł ķŴƄſš ň ł ƎƀƄſš Ǝſšł ł

ň

ñ ), all What is common in the above table? Apart from the first two rows (IJĬĭš ô and ųſš ł of the possessive suffixes that attach to a plural noun begin with IJš. Also, don’t forget that since the noun itself is plural, it takes the two-dot syomé. What if the noun is feminine and plural? You simply use the first set as in Table 11. For ň ò Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ò ł ‘queen’ (which is feminine) is ŦƦŔ ƄÿƇƉ . Then we say ĬƦŔ ƄŅÿƇƉł example, the plural of ŦǂƇƉ Ŕ Ņ ò ł ‘her queens’, etc. ñ Ņ Ŕ ƄÿƇƉ ‘his queens’, ĬƦ Using

ƇſĪ

There is a way to designate possessiveness without attaching the possessive pronoun to the word. This is done with ƇſĪŌ which is always followed by the suffixes listed in Table 11. (If you are interested to learn about the history of ƇſĪŌ, read this footnote.1) The sentences introduced at the beginning of this chapter are repeated here with ƇſĪŌ. Ō Ņ ň Ō Ņ Ņ ň ò ň Ǝƀƿĥ Ņ Ō 1 .ťũƍƕ Isaac and his sister are eating grapes. Ŕ ųƇſĪ ŦƦŶĭ Ŕ ơŷƐſĥ

Ņ Ņ Ō ŏ Ņ ò ĥŅ ųÿƇſĪ ò ŏ ł Ǝƿ .ťƃŴƄƍƘ Ŕ ñ Ņ Ō ŦƦŶĭ Ŕ ƁƌŴƊƣ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ł ł Ņ O (male) sinner, awaken yourself for repentance. .ŦŁŴ Ŕ Ī ťƤƙƌ Ƣƀƕĥ ťƀźŶł ĭĥ Ŕ ƅƇſ Ŕ ũſƦƆ Ņ ł Ņ O (female) sinner, awaken yourself ŦƼźŶł ĭĥ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ Ŕ ň Ī ťƤƙƌ IJƢƀƕĥ Ŕ ł ƁôƄƇſ ô Shmuni and her sister are eating pancakes.

for repentance. O (male) sinners, awaken yourselves for repentance. O (female) sinners, awaken yourselves for repentance. My Lord, and my God. Our Lord, and our God.

2 3 4

ł ò Ņ òł ŏŔ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ ŦƦƤŅƙƌ ĭƢƀ ĭĥ Ŕ ķŴƄÿƇſĪ ô ƕĥ ťƀźŶ

5

ł Ņ òŅ Ņ ł ň Ŕ Ō ŦƦŔƤƙƌ ò IJǔƀƕĥ ŦƼźŶ .ŦŁŴŔũſƦƆ ĭĥ Ŕ ƎƀƄÿƇſĪ Ŕ ô

6

Ņ Ņ ł ƁƇſĪ .ƁƇſ ô ĪŌ Ŧųƭĭ ô Ō Ņ ł Ō Ŧųƭĭ ł Ō Ņ ł ƎƇſĪ .ƎƇſĪ

ťŅſƢƉŅ ťŅſƢƉŅ

7 8

ƇſĪŌ is composed of IJĪŌ, which itself is an old form of the relative pronoun Ī meaning of, and the Ņ preposition ĵ meaning to. So ƅƇſĪŌ would literally mean of to you; that is, belonging to you. 1

74

Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes

Ī

Another Usage of : Double Possessive There are several ways in English to indicate the possessive. You can say, for example, the book of the boy. If you know that we are talking about the boy, you can even simply say his book. But you cannot say his book of the boy. That is ungrammatical. But Syriac is not English, and as it turns out this is actually grammatical and frequently used in Syriac. The double way to indicate the possessive can be used for emphasis. For Ņ Ņ ł ųŨň ǁ example, one can say ťƀÿǑĪ Ŕ literally ‘his book of the boy’ (or the book of him, who is a boy). Ņ Ņ ł ųŨň ǁ This usage is reserved only for the third person such as ťƀÿǑĪ Ŕ ‘his book of the Ņ Ņ Ō ł ñ ŅŅ ňò Ņ ł ŏ Ņ ŏò łǁ boy’, ŦƼǑĪ ųŨǁ Ŕ ‘her book of the girl’, ťƀÿǑĪ ķĭųŨǁ Ŕ ‘their book of the boys’, ķĭųƀŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ òŅ ł ň Ņ ňò Ņ ł ƎſųŨǁ ťƀÿǑĪ ‘their books of the boys’, ŦƼÿǑĪ Ŕ ‘their book of the girls’. Of course when you Ŕ translate the phrase into English, you have to obey English grammar; so you would say the book of the boy or the boy’s book. Exercise 5.1 1. Add all the possessive suffixes to the following nouns in tabular form: Ņ ł ‘milk’ Ņ Ŕ Ō ‘hand’ b. ťũÿƇŶ a. ŧűſĥ ň ò ł ‘sides’ ň Ņ ò ł ‘teachers’ c. ťũū d. ťƍƙÿƇƉ 2. Repeat 1 above using ƇſĪ. 3. Translate into English:

ŏ Ņ ŏ ň Ņ ł ƎƉň ƁƉǔū Ņ Ņ ł ŧƢũƟ ł ł ķŴƖƠƌ .ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ Ŕ ŁűÿƇſ Ŕ ł ň ŦųƭĪ ł Ņ ƅƇſĪĭ Ņ ł ƁƇſĪ .ťƕĿĥ Ŕ Ņ ň Ō ťƀƊƣ ô łŌ Ņ ł ň ň (full of) ƨƉ ŦųƭĪ Ņ ł ųƕĿŁ .ťƊŶǓ ł ŏŅ ŅŅ ňŅ Ņ Ō ťƕĿƦŨ Ņ ł ƨƟ ƥƠƌ (Merciful One) ťƍìŅ ƍŅ Ŷł ƅƇſĪ .ķŁŴƖŨĪ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏŅ Ņ ň Note. ƥƠƌŅ ‘to knock’, ƨƟŅ ‘voice’, ŦŁŴƖŨ Ŕ ‘petition’

a b c d

5.2 Attaching the Object to the Verb New Words A number of names which appear in the translation. The other new words are: sent it (m. it) sent it (f. it) Tur Abdin taught (m.)

ň ł Ņ ł ĬĿűƣ ñ ł ŏ ĬŁĿűƣ Ō ł ĿŴŹ Ǝſűũƕ ň ł ƚƆĥ

Reading Sentences

taught (f.) guided me guided us printing press

ł ł ƦƙëƆĥ Ɓìô ƍłſĪĬł ł ł Ņ ƎſĪĬł ł ŦƦƖũźƉ

succeeded (m. pl.) succeeded (f. pl.)

ł ĭƢƤƃĥ ô łł IJǔƤƃĥ ô ł

ł ň ł ťŨǁ ħǁ Ņ ł Ņ ķŤƀźƐũƏ ł ł ëƆ ĬĿűƣĭ ł ł ň ťƍƙÿƇƉ .ŦƦƖũźƊ Ŕ Ŕ ĴĭƢŨ

1

Malphono Sebastian Brock1 wrote a book and sent it to the press.

Sebastian Brock is the former Reader of Aramaic and Syriac at the University of Oxford. He retired in 2003. 1

Attaching the Object to the Verb

ň Ņ ł ŦƻƢſĪ Ņ ł ł ŏ ĬñŁŅĿűƣĭ ł ł ŦŁƢūĥ .ƎſűũƕĿŴźëƆ Ŕ ň ťƀìł ƌĭƢũƘ Ŕ ł ƦŔŨłǁ Nun Phabronia1 wrote a letter and sent it to Tur Abdin. ł Ņ ł ĜťƀÿǑ ň ĴĭƢŨ Ņ ķŤƀźƐũƏ ò Ņ ł ł ň ťƍƙÿƇƉ .ķŴƄŏŔƙƆĥ Boys, Malphono Sebastian Brock taught you. ł Ņ òŅ ł Ņ ł ŦƻƢſĪ Ņ ł ĜŦƼÿǑ .ƎƀƃňŔƦƙłëƆĥ ťƀìł ƌĭƢũƘ Girls, Nun Phabronia taught you. ł ł ĴĭƢŨ Ņ ķŤƀźƐũƏ ł ƁôìƍƙëƆĥ ł ł ň ťƍƙƇƉł .ƁôìƍłſĪĬĭ Malphono Sebastian Brock taughtł me and guided me. ł Ņ ƼŨĪ Ō Ņ ķĭųÿƿ òŅ ł ŏ ŏ ťƍƙÿƇƉ ł ƎƙëƆĥ ł ł ň ťƍƙƇƉĪł ƎſƢƉĥ .ƎłſĪĬĭ ĴĭƢŨ Ŕ ň ķŤƀźƐũƏ All Malphonos say, “Malphono Sebastian us and guided us.” ň Brock ł Ņ taught ŏ ň ł ł ňò Ņ ň ŏ ł ň ťƍƙƇƉ ƈźƉ ł ĭƢƤƃĥ ťƀÿǑ .ķŴƌĥ ƚƆĥ ĴĭƢŨ ķŤƀźƐũƏ ô The boys succeeded because Malphono Sebastian Brock taught them. ň ł ł ł Ņ ł ŏ ň ł ł Ņ ŅŅ ł Ņ ł ƈźƉ IJǔƤƃ ťƀìƌĭƢũƘ ŦƻƢſĪ .Ǝƀƌĥň ƦƙëƆĥ Ŕ Ŕ ô ĥ ŦƻǔſĪ

75 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The nuns succeeded because Nun Phabronia taught them.

New Concepts The OBJECT is what is affected in the sentence. In the English sentence I read the book, the object is the book. If we already know the object, we can replace it by an OBJECT PRONOUN; e.g., I read it. Other English object pronouns are me, you, him, her, it, us, and them. Syriac also has object pronouns; they just don’t like to stand on their own and so they attach themselves to the verb as suffixes. Imagine saying in English I readit (without a space between read and it). Note: in Sentences 7 and 8, the object pronouns are not suffixes but words on their own. You just need to be careful and note that vowel changes take place within the verb when the object suffixes are added. No need to learn any rules as to what sort of changes ň ł ‘he sent it’. ł ł ‘he sent’ becomes ĬĿűƣ take place; just be aware that they do. For example, Ŀűƣ ň ł ł ł disappeared. The suffix is Ĭš, but note that the š on ű of Ŀűƣ ł The following table gives all the object suffixes with the verb ħǁ: Table 13. Object pronoun suffixes.

Singular

3

M F

2

M F

1 3

M

Plural

F 2

M F

1 1

ųŨňǁ Ŕ ł ñ Ņǁ ųŨ Ŕ ł ƅŨŔŅǁ Ŕ ł ƁôƄŨ Ŕňǁ Ŕ ł Ɓìô ƍŨł ǁ Ŕ ł ňŏ ł ķŴƌĥ ħǁ Ŕ ň ł ň Ǝƀƌĥ ħǁ Ŕ ł ķŴƄŏŔŨǁ Ŕ ł ň ƎƀƄŔ Ũǁ Ŕ łƎŨǁ Ŕ ł

He wrote him/it He wrote her/it He wrote you He wrote you He wrote me He wrote them He wrote them He wrote you He wrote you He wrote us

Ĭšň ñ Ņ Ĭš Ņ Ĵš Ŕ ň Ɓôƃš Ŕ Ɓìô ƌšł ň ķŴƌĥŏ ň Ǝƀƌňĥ ķŴƃŏŔ ƎƀƃňŔ ķšł

Sister Phabronia is a nun at the Monastery of Mor Gabriel, southeast Turkey.

76

Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes

ł Again, note the changes to the vowels of the verb. In ųŨňǁ Ŕ ł ‘he wrote him/it’ the š of ł ł ł ħǁ Ŕ moved from the Ʀ to the ƃ, but in ķŴƄŏŔŨǁ Ŕ ‘he wrote you (plural)’ the š remained in its place. Look at all the instances. Can you figure out when the vowel shifts place and when it does not? Hint: Look at the last column on the right that gives the suffix forms. Does this help? ň You will note that if the suffix begins with a vowel as in Ĭš ‘him’, the vowel shifts place in the verb. If, on the other hand, the suffix begins with a consonant as in ķĭĬŏ, no shifting takes place. Also note that many of the object endings in Table 13 are the same as the possessive ň endings in Table 11. This is a good thing because you have to learn less suffixes; e.g., Ĭš is ň Ŕ ł ‘he wrote it’ and the possessive suffix in ųŨǁ ň Ņ Ŕ ‘his book’. But this the object suffix in ųŨǁ will cause you confusion when there are no vowels: what is ųŨǁ? You need a larger context (try the sentences in Exercise 3 below). Exercise 5.2 1. Conjugate the following verbs with the object pronouns: ł ł ‘scribed’ a. ƈźƟ ‘killed’ b. İƢƏ ň ł ‘served’ ł ‘took’ d. ƥƊƣ c. ŪƐƌ 2. Translate into English:

Ņ ŏ

Ņ Note. ljĿĪŴƕ ‘help’. 3. Translate into English:

ł Ņ ĴŴŔ ƤƊƣĪ ň Ņ ò ł ł ljųƃ ňò Ņ ŏ ł ťƍƤƊƤƉĭ ĖķƢƉ ŏ Ŕ ŏ ťƊÿƇƣ ł ĖķŴƄÿǀëƆ Ņ Ņ Ņ ŏ Ƌƕĭ ĖƅƇſĪ Ŕ Ņ Ō ťŶĭĿ Ņ ł Ņ ťſƢƉ ł Ņ Ŕ ŏ ŦŁ ķƢƉ ł ň Ņ Ņ Ņ ƅƆ ĖƎƌĿĪŴƖëƆ Ŕ Ņ ƎƍſƢƟ

a b c

Ņ ň ƼũëƆ ł ł ň ųŨǁ ŪƐƌ .ŧƢƙƏ Ŕ ň ĵĮĥĭ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ljĬ ŅŅ Ō ł ň ťŨǁ .ųŨǁ ƁūĿŴū Ņ ň ƼũëƆ ł ł ň ųŨǁĪ ųŨǁ ŪƐƌ .ŧƢƙƏ Ŕ ň ĵĮĥĭ

a b c

5.3 Revisiting the ĵĭűŨ Prefixes This chapter has so far introduced suffixes. We have already studied the ĵĭűŨ prefixes. Let us review them here. Four letters act as prefixes. They are: ħ meaning in. Ī meaning of, as well as acting as a relative pronoun, or a quote marker. ĭ meaning and. ĵ meaning to, and acting as an object marker. You can review Section 1.5 regarding some of the rules that govern these letters.

Putting it All Together

77

5.4 Putting it All Together New Words Words with prefixes and suffixes are listed in the Analysis subsection below. Other new words are: Adam Jesus to be lover of mankind

Ņ ĶĪĥŅ ĺŴƤſŏň Ņô ŦĭĬ ň Ņ ƋŶĿ Ņ Ņô ťƤƌĥ

Ņ

come ŦŁ ň mercy ťƊŶǓł ð abbreviation for Hallelujah Ĭ ň Ņ ťźŶ he sins ňŅ repents ħĥŁ

in the beginning earth speaker praise (n.)

ƼƤſƢŨ Ŕ Ō Ō Ņ ł ŧƢƙƕ Ņ Ņ ł ƨÿƇƉ Ņ ŏ ťŷŨŴƣ

Reading Sentences

ň Ņ ł ň Ņ ĴĿĬŴƍŨ .ŧĿĬŴƌ ƨƉ ĺŴƤſň ĜŧĿĬŴƌ ƎƍſŵŶ Ŕ ŏ With (literally, in) your light we see light; Jesus full of light. Ņ Ņ ł ł ł Ņ Ņ ł ŦĭĬ Ņ ô ĴƢƟ ł ň Ņ ťƤƉƢłŨĭł .ťƤƌĥŅ ô ƋŶĿ ň Ņ IJųſƼƍƕĭ ŧĿŴŹ ƥſĿ ƈƕł .ĶĬƢŨĥ ŦŁ .ƅƆ Ŕ Ņ ł ťƤƉƢŨ Ŕ Ņ ƎƍſƢƟ ô ł Ņ ł ð ł Ņ ŏ ł ł ł ň Ō ķųëƆĥ ƎƌĿĪŴƖëƆ .ƎƀƇƕ ƋŶĿĭ Ĭ .ťƊŶǓ ƁŬƏ Ŕ

In the evening Abraham had called you on the peak of the mountain, and you answered him, (O) lover of mankind. And in the evening we call (to) you. Come to our help, our God full of mercy. Hallelujah. And have mercy uponň Ņ us.

ň Ņ Ņ ň Ņ ň ĜljĥŅ ô ťźŶ .ljĥŅ ô ħĥŁ Ɓìô ƍƀŨƞŨ Ɓìô ƍƀŨƞŨ Of (literally, in) my (own) will I sin; of my will I repent. ł ł .ŧƢƙƕł ƎƉň ĶĪƧŅ Ņ ŦųƆĥ ň ł ƼƤſƢŨ Ņ ł ųƇũū ł ň ƨÿƇŅƉł Ĭűũƕĭ ň ł ťŶĭĿ ųŨň Ÿƙƌĭ ųƆň ƢƉŵƌĪ Ŕ Ō ŦƦŨĭƢƖŨł ň ũŬëƆ ň ł Ĭð ĭ Ĭð ťŷŨŴƣ Ņ ŧĪŴƌĭ .ųƆŴ

1 2

3 4

On the Friday in the beginning, God fashioned Adam from earth. And he breathed in him a spirit and he made him talkative (i.e., endowed him with the power of speech), that he shall sing praise to Him. Hallelujah and Hallelujah. And he shall thank his maker. Analysis There are not that many new concepts in this lesson, except how everything that we learned thus far can appear all together in texts. So let us analyze each of the words given above that contain prefixes and/or suffixes. Sentence 1

Ņ Ņ Ņ Ĵš Ŕ + ŧĿĬŴƌŏ + ħ = ĴĿĬŴƍŨ Ŕ ŏ

With + light + your = with your light. ħ is the prefix meaning ‘in’ (although it is more Ņ Ņ idiomatic to say ‘with’ in English here). The main word is ŧĿĬŴƌŏ ‘light’ but the final ťš is Ņ deleted when the word attaches to the object suffix Ĵš Ŕ ‘your’. Sentence 2

Ņ ł + ħ = ťƤƉƢŨ Ņ ł ťƤƉĿ Ņ ł ‘evening’. In + evening = in the evening. ħ is the prefix meaning ‘in’. The stem is ťƤƉĿ Ņ Ņ = ĴƢƟ Ņ Ĵš Ŕ + ŧƢƟ

78

Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes

Ņ

Ņ

Called you. The stem is the verb ŧƢƟ ‘called’, but the final ĥš is deleted when it attaches to Ņ the object pronoun suffix Ĵš Ŕ ‘you’.

Ņ ł ł Ņ ł + ĭł = IJųſƼƍƕĭ IJųſš ô + Ƽƍƕ ô ł And + you answered + him = and you answered him. The prefix ĭ means ‘and’; it has a š ł ‘you answered’. The vowel because the next letter, ƕ, has no vowel. The stem is Ƽƍƕ ň Ņ suffix IJųſ ô š is the object pronoun for ‘him’; it is a variant of the suffix Ĭš (see section 6.4).

Ņ ł + ħ + ĭł = ťƤƉƢŨĭ Ņ ł ł ťƤƉĿ

Ņ ł above, but with the prefix And + in + evening = and in the evening. Same analysis as ťƤƉƢŨ ĭ for ‘and’ (again, it has a šł vowel because the next letter, ħ, has no vowel).

Ņ Ņ ŏ + Ɔ = ƎƌĿłŅĪŴƖëƆ ķšł + ljĿĪŴƕ Ŕ ŏ Ņ Ņ Ņ ĪŴƕ To our help. The prefix Ɔ is for ‘to’. The stem is ljĿ Ŕ ŏ ‘help’ again without the ťš ending. ł The suffix is the possessive pronoun ķš for ‘our’. Ņ Ņ ł = ķųëƆĥ ł Ņ ł ķšł + ŦųëƆĥ Ņ Ņ ł ‘help’ without the ťšŅ ending. The suffix is the God + our = our God. The stem is ŦųëƆĥ ł possessive pronoun ķš for ‘our’. ł Ǝſšł + ƈƕł = ƎƀƇƕ Upon + us = upon us. The stem is ƈƕł ‘upon’ but when it connects to the possessive ł ł ł ł pronoun Ǝſš ‘our’ it looses the š (i.e., the š of ƎƀƇƕ belongs to the suffix, not the stem). Sentence 3

Ņ Ņ ň + ħ = Ɓìô ƍƀŨƞŨ Ņ ň IJô + ťƍƀŨĽ In + will + my = literally in my will, but more idiomatically from an English point of view Ņ Ņ ň ‘will’ without the ĥšŅ ending. The of my will. The prefix ħ is for ‘in/of’. The stem is ťƍƀŨĽ suffix is the possessive pronoun IJô ‘my’ which is silent. Sentence 4

Ņ ŏ Ņ ŏ ł ŦƦŨĭƢƕ + ħł = ŦƦŨĭƢƖŨ

In + Friday = literally in Friday, more idiomatically on Friday. ħ is the prefix meaning Ņ ŏ ł ‘in/on’ but with š since the next letter, ƕ, does not have a vowel. The stem is ŦƦŨĭƢƕ ‘Friday’.

ł

ň ł ł = ųƇũū Ĭšň + ƈũū

ł but the š on ħ shifts one position Fashioned + him = fashioned him. The stem is ƈũū ň back to Ĩ because the object pronoun suffix Ĭš begins with a vowel. Ņ

Ņ Ņ ĶĪĥŅ + Ɔ = ĶĪƧŅ

Adam. The prefix Ɔ is the object marker. The stem ĶĪĥŅ is the object of the phrase but Ņ the š of ĥ shifts back to Ɔ (remember, ĥ is too lazy to carry a vowel at the beginning of words).

ł ł Ÿƙƌł + ĭł = Ÿƙƌĭ

Putting it All Together

79

And + he breathed = and he breathed. The prefix ĭ means ‘and’; it has a ł the next letter, ƌ, has no vowel. The stem is Ÿƙƌ ‘he breathed’.

šł vowel because Ĭšň + Ũ = ųŨň

ň

In him. The prefix ħ means ‘in’. The object pronoun suffix Ĭš is for ‘him’. This is an interesting word in that it has no stem, just a prefix and a suffix.

ł + ĭ = Ĭűũƕĭ ň ł Ĭšň + űũƕ ł ‘he And + he made + him = and he made him. The prefix ĭ means ‘and’. The stem is űũƕ ň ł made’ but the š of ħ shifts back to ƕ because the object pronoun suffix Ĭš begins with a vowel.

ł ň + Ī = ƢƉŵƌĪ ł ň ƢƉŵƌ

That + he shall sing = that he shall sing. The prefix is the relative pronoun Ī for ‘that’. The ł ň ‘he shall sing’. stem is ƢƉŵƌ

ň ł + ĭ = ŧĪŴƌĭ ň ł ŧĪŴƌ ň ł ‘he And + he shall worship = and he shall worship. The prefix ĭ is for ‘and’. The stem is ŧĪŴƌ shall worship’.

Ņ ŏ Ņ ň ŏ Ņ Ĭšň + ƧŴũū + Ɔ = ųƆŴũŬëƆ

(object marker) + maker + his = his maker. The prefix Ɔ is the object marker. The stem, Ņ ŏ Ņ ň Ņ ‘maker’ without the ĥš ending. The suffix Ĭš which is the object of the phrase, is ƧŴũū is the possessive pronoun ‘his’.

Ņ

The Noun Ending ťš (Absolute and Emphatic State)

Ņ

Ņ

ŏ Ņ In many of the sentences above, we noticed that nouns which end in ťš such as ƧŴũū ‘maker’ lose this ending when the noun is attached to a suffix that begins with a vowel such ň ň ŏ Ņ ‘his maker’. Is this a hint that the ending ťšŅ is in fact not part of the as Ĭš as in ųƆŴũū noun and is itself an addition? Historically speaking, yes. Once upon a time this ending used to mean ‘the’; e.g., Ņ ŏ Ņ ŏ ĵŴũūŅ ‘a maker’, ƧŴũū ‘the maker’. But this function has long been lost in the language. Ņ The fact that ťš was historically a suffix and not part of the noun may make it clearer to you ň why it is compromised and deleted when suffixes like Ĭš are added. Also, knowing this is important because in some dictionaries, such as J. Payne Smith’s A Compendious Syriac Dictionary (which you need to get if you are serious about Syriac, and I Ņ know you are since you are still with me), you need to look up nouns without the ťš ending. Ņ Ņ Ō ‘cut’ (because the The form without the ťš ending is called in Syriac grammars ťƊſűū ending is cut). In western grammars it is called the ABSOLUTE STATE of the noun; the form with the ending is called the EMPHATIC STATE. Bonus Word: Ĭ and the Abbreviation Mark

ð

You may have noticed that the word for Hallelujah in Syriac was simply Ĭ in the text above. ł ŏ ň ł. The line above is an abbreviation mark; the full word is ųſŴLJĬ

80

Longer Words: Prefixes and Suffixes

The abbreviation mark is used in familiar words, and can be decorated in various ways. Ņ ŏ ‘praise’. Usually one comes across such For example, one can write ħŴƣ for ťŷŨŴƣ abbreviations in manuscripts and printed liturgical texts.

Ņ

Enclitic ŦĭĬô

Ņ

Ņ ô ĴƢƟ In sentence 2, you encountered ŦĭĬ Ŕ ‘had called’. You will encounter the auxiliary verb ŅŦĭĬô after verbs a lot in Syriac. It gives a sence of the distance past; e.g. ĴƢƟ Ņ ô ĴƢƟ Ŕ Ņ ‘called’, ŦĭĬ ŔŅ ł ł Ņ ô ħǁ ‘had called’, ħǁ Ŕ ‘wrote’, ŦĭĬ Ŕ ‘had written’.

ňŅ

Did I Hear ħĥŁ Correctly?

ňŅ

If you pay attention to the audio of sentence 3, you will notice that ħĥŁ is pronounced toyeb, not to-eb. In West Syriac, when ĥ is surrounded by vowels on both sides, it is pronounced as if ň łŅ it was IJ; e.g. Ŀĥĥ ‘air’ is oyar; ĶŤƟŅ ‘he stands’ is qoyem.

6 Readings This chapter gives 20 reading passages from Syriac literature, spanning from the early periods until the 20th century. With each reading, we also introduce new grammatical concepts. In the first few readings, we will be omitting some of the following vowels as before: ŏ ň Ņ Ō final ťš of masculine nouns, final ťš in plurals, ĭš, and IJš. Words that occur more than once will be given gradually without vowels. Remember that one or more ĵĭűŨ letters can be prefixed to a word. Also remember that possessive suffixes attach to nouns, and object suffixes attach to verbs. If you feel you need to revisit them, make sure to read Chapter 5 again. Note that the translations of the reading passages are extremely literal and in many cases not idiomatic—or even grammatical—as far as English is concerned. The aim is to illustrate Syriac sentence structure.

6.1 Saint Ephrem New Words Edessa Ephrem he came was born was baptized became a pupil Daughters of

Ņ ŏ IJĬĿĭĥ ň ł ƋſƢƘĥ Ņň ŦŁĥ Ō Ŕň űƇſ Ŕ ň ŁĥŔ ň űƊƕ Ŕ ň ł ŁĥŔň űƊëƆŁŁĥ Ŕł Ņ Ņ ƦƍŨ ťƊƀƟ Ŕ Ņò

the Covenant virgin Jacob couplet poem metrical poem commentator Nisibis

ŏ Ņ ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ Ŕ ŏ ł ħŴƠƖſ Ņ Ō ŧƢƉŤƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƣĿűƉ ŅŅ ł ťƍƠƤƙƉ Ō Ō Ǝƀũſƞƌ

women dialogue poem put, composed died year

ňò ň Ņ Ō ťƤƌŏ ŦƼūŴƏ Ŕ Ŕ ƋƏŅ űƍƕ Ŕł Ʀƍƣ Ŕł

Reading The following passage gives a brief biography of Saint Ephrem (d. 373).1

ň ł IJƢƉ Ņ ł ƋſƢƘĥ Ņ ň ťƍƠƤƙƉ .ťŶĭĿĪŏ ŧƢƍƃĭ ô Ņ Saint Ephrem, the interpreter (of the Bible), and the Harp of ň the Ō ň spirit. ł (Holy) Ņ Ō ň ň Ņ Ō ł .űƊƕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ƎƉŁĭ .űƇſ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ŕ ƎƀũſƞƍŨ In the city of Nisibin he was born; and there he was baptized. ł ň ŅŅ ł Ņ .űƊëƆ IJƢƉĭ ħŴƠƖſł IJƢƊëƆĭ Ŕ ł ŁœŁĥœ ĶĬƢŨĥ ô ô Ņ ł And of Saint Jacob and Saint Abraham he became aŅ ň pupil. ł Ņ ŭƐƣ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ņ Ƨŏ ķƢƉĪ .ŦŁĥŔ ŦƦƍſűƉ Ŕł ł ô Ō Ŕ IJĬĿĭ And in the year 363 of our Lord, to the city of Edessa he came. Ņ Ņ ò ŏ Ņ ł ŧǔƉŤƉŌĭ ťƣǓűƉĭ .ƋƏŅ ŦƼūŴƏĭ Ŕ Ŕ

1

Passage is adapted from Isʘaq Armalat, ŧǔũƣĪ

81

ŦƦūĿ (1908), vol. 2, pp. 105-106.

1 2 3 4 5

82

Readings

And Mimré (couplet poems), and Madroshé (metrical poems), and Sughyotho (dialogue poems) he composed. ł

Ņ Ņ òŏ ł òň ł Ņ ň ŦƦëƆĭƦũƆĭ ťƤƍëƆĭ ťƊƀƟ ƦƍũëƆĭ .ƚƆĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņò ł

6

Ņ ŏ ųŨĭ ñ .űƍƕ Ŕ ł ŦƦƍſô űƉ Ŕ IJĬĿĭŤŨ

7

And the Daughters of the Covenant, and women, and virgins, he taught. And in it, in the city of Edessa, he died.

Word Order Have you ever heard Yoda in the Star Wars epic series speak? Here are a few examples: “Powerful you have become,” “help you I can,” “agree with you the council does,” “When 900 years you reach, look as good, you will not.” Note that in all of these examples, the verb is at the end of the sentence. This is unusual in English, but is quite OK in Syriac. The Syriac verb clause can appear towards the end of the sentence. This is not to say that putting the verb at the beginning is not grammatical. For Ōň Ņ Ō Ņ ł űƊƕ Ō Ō ł űƇſ example, you can rewrite Sentence 2 to read as follows: ƎƉŁ Ŕ ň Łĥĭ Ŕ ƎƀũſƞƍŨ Ŕ ň ŁĥŔ Ŕ ň .ŦƦƍſô űƉ ‘he was born in the city of Nisibin, and he was baptized there’. Word order in Syriac sentences is more free than in English. Use of ĭ in Narrative Note that Sentences 3-7 all begin with events in a chronological sequence.

ĭ ‘and’. The ĭ is used frequently in narratives to link

ň

Passive Verbs Beginning with ŁĥŔ

ň

ň Ōň

ň

There are three verbs in the above passage that begin with ŁĥŔ: űƇſ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ‘was born’, űƊƕ Ŕ ň ŁĥŔ ‘was ň ň ł baptized’, and űƊëƆ Ŕ ł Łœ Łĥœ ‘became a pupil’. Verbs that begin with ŁĥŔ are usually passive. In a sentence that has a PASSIVE VERB, the subject receives the action expressed in the ň ł verb. In other words, the subject is acted upon. In this case ƋſƢƘĥ in Sentence 1 is the subject receiving the action of birth or baptism. ň Ņň But be careful, there are verbs that originally contain ŁĥŔ at the beginning like ŦŁĥŔ ‘he ň came’ in Sentence 4. If you actually take away the ŁĥŔ, not much is left except the last ĥ, and ň that is a good indication that the ŁĥŔ is original in the verb, not a passive marker. The ĵĭűŨ Letters With the Object Suffixes

Ņ

Ņ ŏ ųŨĭ Ō Ŕ IJĬĿĭŤŨ ñ ‘and in it, in the city of Edessa, he died’, the In Sentence 7 űƍƕ Ŕ ł ŦƦƍſô űƉ ñ ‘in it’, and once with the city preposition ħ ‘in’ occurs twice: once with the object suffix, ųŨ ŏ Ņ name, IJĬĿĭŤŨ ‘in Edessa’. This double usage of the preposition is frequently used in Syriac and gives a sense of stress; i.e., really in Edessa he died. In later readings we will see examples of other ĵĭűŨ letters being used this way. Letter Numbers The word ŭƐƣ must have looked weird to you. Actually, it is not a word, but a number.

Saint Ephrem

83

Syriac uses letters to designate numbers the same way we use letters for Roman numerals: I for 1, III for 3, VI for 6. Roman numerals can also get complicated: MMVII is 2007. The Syriac system is actually much simpler. Let’s create our own system of letter numbers from the English alphabet. Let’s use a for 1, b for 2, c for 3, d for 4, e for 5, f for 6, g for 7, h for 8, i for 9, and j for 10. Easy so far? Now, let’s come up with letters for 11. If j is 10 and a is 1, let’s put the two letters together: ja for 11. Think of it as simple addition: j + a = 10 + 1 = 11 This way jb is 12, jc is 13, …, jh is 18 and ji is 19. Are you with me so far? Now we need a letter for 20. Let’s pick the next available letter we have not used so far. It is k. So if k is 20, then ka is 21, kb is 22, kc is 23, …, until ki for 29. I hope I did not loose you. Let’s assign the next letter, l, for 30. So la is 31, lb is 32, etc. Continuing with the same idea, we will pick m for 40, n for 50, o for 60, p for 70, q for 80, r for 90, and s for 100. So what is 125 in letters using our system? Just split it into hundreds, tens, and ones: 100 + 20 + 5 = s + k + e = ske. What is spb in numbers? Just split the letters and add their numerical counterparts: s + p + b = 100 + 70 + 2 = 172. What is the largest number you can come up with using our system? If you answered 199 you are correct. It will be sri (s + r + i = 100 + 90 + 9 = 199). How about if we need to go higher. What would the letters be for 200? Well, we have now used the letters up to s. What is next? Let’s use t for 200. Now, ta is 201, tb is 202, tj is 210, tja is 211, tkb is 222, etc. The next available letter, u, becomes 300, then v becomes 400, w becomes 500, x becomes 600, y becomes 700, and z becomes 800. So zri is 899 and it is the largest number we can manage with our system. Syriac works exactly in the same way we just described: ĥ is 1, ħ is 2, Ĩ is 3, Ī is 4, Ĭ is 5, ĭ is 6, Į is 7, į is 8, İ is 9, and IJ is 10. So ťſ is 11, Ūſ is 12, …, Ÿÿſ is 18, and Żſ is 19. The next available letter in the alphabet is Ĵ and it is assigned 20. So ťƃ is 21, Ūƃ is 22, …, and Żƃ is 29. Then ĵ is assigned 30, Ķ is 40, ķ is 50, ĸ is 60, ĺ is 70, Ļ is 80, Ľ is 90, and ľ is 100. So ŪƊƟ is ľ + Ķ + ħ = 100 + 40 + 2 = 142. Next, Ŀ is assigned 200, ŀ is 300, and finally Ł is 400. So ŦŁ is 401, and ŵƃŁ is 427. Now test yourself with the number in Sentence 4. What is ŭƐƣ? It is ŀ + ĸ + Ĩ = 300 + 60 + 3 = 363. Now, what is the line above ŭƐƣ? It is the abbreviation mark we talked about earlier in section 5.4. It is used on top of letters to mark them as numbers. In some texts, the mark ð . may be a simple line above only one of the letters; e.g., ŭƐƣ

84

Readings

Finally, how does one read ŭƐƣ? The proper way is reading the number as if it were Ō written in words: Ʀƣĭ Ŕ ň ƎſƦƣĭł ŦŤƉŅ ƦƆŁ Ŕ Ņ ‘three hundred, and sixty, and six’ (note the double ł use of ĭ ‘and’). The lazy way is to read the letters with š in between each pair of letters; e.g., ł ł shasag! ŭƐƣ A table of the numbers appears in section 7.6. Analysis Sentence 1

Ņ ň

ŏ

Ņ ‘and harp’, and ťŶĭĿĪ Ņ ‘of the spirit’. We have seen The only words with prefixes are ŧƢƍƃĭ many examples before using ĭ as a prefix for ‘and’, and Ī for ‘of’. From now on we will not note them any more. Sentence 2

Ō Ō ł ‘in Nisibin’ is used for ‘in’. We have seen other examples for this usage The ħ of ƎƀũſƞƍŨ before, and we will no longer note it in later readings. About the Reading Ņ Ņ ň ‘harp of the (holy) spirit’. We actually came Ņ ŏ ŧƢƍƃ In Sentence 1, we have come across ťŶĭĿĪ across this term earlier. Do you remember it? It is an epithet of a number of poets such as David who wrote, according to tradition, the Old Testament Psalms, and Saint Ephrem who wrote much poetry. ň Sentence 5 lists three types of poetry. ŧǔƉŤƉŌ are couplet-based poems often used in ň Ņ ł are stanzaic and have narratives, where each line has the same number of syllables. ťƣǓűƉ more complex metrical structures; Saint Ephrem is the most famous of all poets who wrote Ņ Ņ ò ŏ are simple metrical poems often in the form of dialogues, building on a in this type. ŦƼūŴƏ Ŕ Ŕ tradition that goes back to ancient Mesopotamia. We will introduce these types of poems in the next three sections. Sentence 6 alludes to Saint Ephrem’s teaching activities. He was probably the first to Ņ Ņ Ņ ƦƍŨ introduce women choirs to the church. The term ťƊƀƟ Ŕ ò ‘daughters of the Covenant’ refers to a group of people who were known by that name. Not much is known about the Children of the Covenant, but it seems that they were lay people involved in the service of the church. There is much literature about them in Robert Murray’s book Symbols of Church Ņ Ņ ŁƢŨ and Kingdom (Gorgias Press, 2004). Today, the term ťƊƀƟ Ŕ ô ł ‘daughter of the covenant’ (ŁƢŨ Ŕô ł with a silent Ƣô is the singular of ƦƍŨ Ŕ Ņ ò ) is used to address the wife of a priest. Let’s go back to Sentence 3. Two names are mentioned. Saint Ephrem served as a deacon under four bishops of Nisibin. Two of them were called Jacob and Abraham. Exercise 6.1 1. Rewrite the reading passage moving the verbs to the front of the sentences. 2. Translate into Syriac:

Mimro (Verse) Poem

85

ň

ł ł ƍƀƕ), and became a pupil of Severus Saint Jacob of Edessa was born in Andiba (ťŨĥű Ō ň ň ). He came to ň ň ) in the Monastery of Qenneshrin (ƎſƢƤƍƟ Ņ Ō ſŴƏ Sebokht (ǂŨŴ Ŕ Ņ Ə ĸŴſƢ Edessa in the year 648 of our Lord. He taught in Edessa and Antioch. He died in the year 708 of our Lord. 3. Translate into English:

ł ň Ņ ŏ ł Ō Ņ Ņ ŏ Ņ Ō ŅŅ ł ŏ ł ħŴƠƖſ ŏ ł IJƢƉ Ņ Ņ ň ĨĭƢƏĪ Ņ Ō ł ťŶĭĿĪ Ņ ŏ ŧƢƍƃ űƊëƆŁŁĥ .ťŷŨŴƣ ŁƞŔ ſĿŁ ŦƼſĿŴƏ ŦŁűƕĪ ťƍƙÿƇƉĭ ĜťƤſűƟ Ŕł ô Ņ Ŕ ň ł Ņ Ō ň ł ł Ņ ŻƀƟŁ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ņ ŏ Ņ ł Ņ .ƎƍźũëƆ Ņ ł įƢƏŁŁĥ ťƀƐŶ ķƢƉĪ Ʀƍƣ Ŕ ł ŧǔƉŤƉŌ ƋƏĭ Ŕ ł ł .ŦƦƍſűƉ Ŕ ł űƍƕĭ ô Ŕ IJĬĿĭŤŨ ĖķƢƉĪŅ ťƄƟŁ Ō ŏ = Sarug, a place name.) Ņ ł = Batnan, a place name; ĨĭƢƏ Ņ ŏ ŁƞſĿŁ (Hint: ťŷŨŴƣ Ŕ ł = orthodox; ƎƍźŨ

6.2 Mimro (Verse) Poem New Words learning who, which, what he who teaches

ŅŅ ŏ ťƍƙëƆŴſ Ņ ł łŅ ťƍſĥ Ī ťƍſĥ ň ł ƚƇƉ

make make him kingdom he shall

ň űũƕ ň IJųſűũƕ ô ŅŅ ŏ ł ŦŁŴƄÿƇƉ Ŕ ňŦĭųƌň

idleness no, not can, able

Ņ Ņ ň ťƍÿƇźŨ Ņ Ƨ ň ŦƞƉ

Reading Ņ The following passage is the first stanza of a ŧƢƉŤƉŌ ‘verse poem’ attributed to Saint Ephrem.1

Ņ Ņ ſŏ ƋŶĿĪ Ņ ł ň Ņ ťƍſƧ Ņ ŏ .ťƍƙëƆŴ Ņ ł IJųſ ŅŔ ň ĖŦŁŴƄÿƇƊŨ Ŕ Ņ ł ťŨĿ ô űũƕ ň ň ň Ō ł Ŧĭųƌ .ųƍƙëƆŴſ ƁŬƏ ň ƧŅ ĖŧƢƀƤƃł ŦĭųƌĪň Ŧ ƞƉ

1. 2. 3. 4.

Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ſŏ ħĬł ŦųëƆĥ ĜťƍƙëƆŴ Ō ł ƚƇƉĪ ň ł ťŨƢëƆĭ Ņł ł ĜƢƀƙƣ ň Ņ ťƍſĥł ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ƋŶĿĪ Ņ ň ƋŶĿĪŅ ťƍſĥĭł ĜťƍƇźŨ

1 2 3 4

God, give learning, to him who loves learning. And the master who teaches well, make him great in the Kingdom. He who loves learning, his learning will be much. And he who loves idleness is not able to become diligent.

Verse Poetry: Meter of Saint Ephrem In verse poetry, a poem consists of stanzas, which in turn consist of lines. The above passage gives the first stanza of a longer poem. The stanza consists of four lines. Ņ Ō ). Verse writing, as opposed to prose writing, makes use of meter (called in Syriac ťƤƀƌ The Syriac meter is simply defined by the number of syllables (or vowels) in a line. In the above poem, you will note that each line is split into two portions. Count the vowels in each portion. I have fully vocalized the first two lines. Each portion has 7 syllables (or 7 vowels). Each line has 7 + 7 vowels (because of the two portions). This 7-syllabic meter is very popular with Saint Ephrem. Some even argue 1

The full poem is found in Dolabani’s ŦƻĿŴŨĪĪ

ťŨǁ (1914), vol. 2, pp. űƀƟ -ťƟ.

86

Readings

that he is the one who invented it. For this reason, poems in this meter are usually headed ň ł ô Ņ ťƤƀƍŨ Ņ Ō ‘in the meter of Saint Ephrem’. This resulted in many poems which with ƋſƢƘĥ IJƢƉĪ were not written by Saint Ephrem being attributed to him, simply because it is in his meter. So be careful when you come across poems—especially in the liturgy—that claims to be by Saint Ephrem. They may not be. The above poem is probably not by Saint Ephrem as it does not follow his fluent style of writing. Punctuation Marks PUNCTUATION MARKS are symbols, in Syriac primarily points, which serve to indicate the structure and organization of writing, as well as intonation and pauses to be observed when reading aloud. In all languages, punctuation marks evolve over time and this cannot be more true in the case of Syriac. We do not even understand fully all the usages of punctuation marks over various historical periods. The late J. B. Segal wrote an entire book about this subject called The Diacritical Point and the Accents in Syriac (Gorgias Press, 2004). Four points, Ė, are usually used at the end of a paragraph, stanza, or, as in the above case, couplet (i.e., two lines of poetry). The period marks the end of a sentence. Small clauses of a sentence can be marked with :, ĝ, or Ĝ. Unlike modern English, there are really no conventions of punctuation in Syriac. The

Ņ ł Construction Ī ťƍſĥ ł

Ņ is used three times, in Sentences 1, 3, and 4. In all instances it is The construction Ī ťƍſĥ Ņ ł as he who loves (or him who loves ň Ņ . We translated ƋŶĿĪ ň Ņ ťƍſĥ followed by the present tense verb ƋŶĿ Ņ ł ). in Sentence 1 because of the object marker Ɔ in ťƍſƧ Ņ ł on its own is an INTERROGATIVE who? which? what? The Ī is the relative pronoun we ťƍſĥ Ņ ł becomes he who. came across before for who. When put together, Ī ťƍſĥ Analysis Verse 2

Ņ ł ł , the Ɔ is the object marker. In ťŨƢëƆĭ ň ł is for the relative pronoun who. The Ī of ƚƇƉĪ Ō ł is the short (absolute) form of ŧƢƀƙƣ Ņ Ō ł. Ƣƀƙƣ Ņ ň is made of the imperative verb űũƕ ň ‘make’ and the object suffix IJųſš IJųſű ô Ņ ũƕ ô ‘him’. Here we have another Yoda-type sentence where the verb is left until later in the sentence. Ņ ł . It appears twice. In the first instance it is a noun meaning Note the word play using ťŨĿ master (compare with Hebrew Rabbi ). In the second instance, it is an adjective meaning great. Verse 3

Ņ

Ņ

ň Ņ ŏ ‘his learning’ is ťƍƙëƆŴſ ŏ ‘learning’ followed by the possessive pronoun The last word ųƍƙëƆŴſ Ĭšň ‘his’. Recall that the ťšŅ ending of the noun is removed when the suffix is attached.

Madrosho Poem

87

Exercises 6.2 1. Fill in the blank spaces of the following verse poem with the following words: Ņ Ņ ŅŔ a. ŧƢƉŤƉŌ b. ťŨǁ Ņ łň Ņ Ō ł c. ŦŁƢūĥ d. ŦƼƠƍƘ Ŕ Ŕ

ł ł Ņ ň ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ƦŨǁ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ħǁ ň ťŨĥŅ Ŕ ł ł Ŕ ň ťƉĥĭ ł ł ĻĥĭŅ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ƦŹƢƏ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ƦŹƢƏ Ŕ ň ƋſƢƉ Ŕ ň

ł

ŦĬŅ ň ljĥŅ

Ņ : 2. Translate into Syriac using Ī ťƍſĥ a. He who copies a codex. b. To him who sings in the church. c. He who went to Edessa. Ņ ł is Ī ŧűſĥ Ņ ł . Change the sentences in 2 to the feminine 3. The feminine counterpart of Ī ťƍſĥ form; e.g., She who copies a codex, etc.

6.3 Madrosho Poem New Words or my brothers lamb if they compare

ł ĭĥł òł ƁŶĥ ň ň Ņ ŧƢƉĥ ƢƉĥł ň ķĥ ň ƎƀƉĪŅ

ň ň ƎſĿƞƉ Ō Ņ ƃŴƌ ƎƀſƢ Ŕ ŏ ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ ň ň Ŧŵŷƌ ƑƀƄƌŌŔ

Egypt they differ let us look let us see slaughtered

Zion truth killed, slain both of them

ŏ ň Ņ ķŴſĬĽŏ ŦƦƣŴƟ Ō ƈƀźƟ ŏ ł ķĭųſǓŁ

Reading The following passage makes up the first two stanzas of a Madrosho poem written this time genuinely by Saint Ephrem.1

Ņ ň .Ņ ťŶƞƘ ĖŦƦƣŴƟŏ

ň ƢƉĥłň ƢƉĥł

Ō ň ň ƈƀźƟ ƎſĿƞƊŨ ŦĬŅ Ō ŏ ň ƑƀƄƌĭ ķŴſĬƞŨ Ŕ ł

Behold, the Passover lamb is slain in Egypt (literally: behold, is slain in Egypt the lamb of Passover). And the True Lamb is slaughtered in Zion (literally: and is slaughtered in Zion the Lamb of True). ň ł

ò ł ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ .ƁŶĥ ł Ō Ņ ƃŴƌ ĖƎƀſƢ Ŕ ŏ ĭĥ

ň ķĭųſǓ ŏ ł ƦŨ ŧǔƉĥ Ŕ ł ň ň ň ƎƀƉĪŅ ķĥĪň Ŧŵŷƌĭ

1

2

At the two lambs, let us look my brethren. And let us see if they compare or differ.

1 The Madrosho belongs to the Cycle on Unleavened Bread. It can be found with an English translation in Sebastian P. Brock and George A. Kiraz, Ephrem the Syrian, Select Poems: Vocalized Syriac text with English translation, introduction, and notes (2006), pp. 112-121 (my English translation above is more literal for pedagogical purposes). The later version, cited below in this section, is based on Qarabashi’s ŦŁűƕĪ ŦŁǔƀƉĮ (1968), p. 135.

88

Readings

Madrosho Poems Meter In verse poetry, the meter of a line is repeated throughout the entire poem. In Madrosho poetry, a larger unit defines the meter. This larger unit is the whole stanza. Some Madroshé have stanzas that are long and complex in meter. Others, like the stanzas of this particular Madrosho, have a simpler structure. Each stanza above consists of two lines. In each line, the first part has 5 syllables (or vowels) and the second part has 4 syllables (or vowels). Do you believe me? Count them. Ō ň ň ƈƀźƟ You may think I am not telling you the truth. You say, “look at ƎſĿƞƊŨ ŦĬŅ ; it only has 4 vowels, not 5.” You are quite right. But I am also right. How so? If in a word like ťŷìŅ ƌűƉł ‘east’ there are two consecutive letters without a vowel on top of ň them (ƌű in this case), it becomes difficult to read the word. Syriac allows you to insert an š sound on the first letter (ű in this case), but you cannot write it; i.e., you read it as if it were Ō ň ň ƈƀźƟ ň ł madenʚo. This rule applies across word boundaries. In ƎſĿƞƊŨ the two written ťŷìŅ ƌűƉ ň letters Ũ ƈ have no vowels on them. Hence, we are allowed to add an š sound on the ĵ as ň ň ƈƀźƟ ň Ō ŦĬŅ . Now count the vowels. How many do we have? if the phrase were written ƎſĿƞƊŨ Ō Ŕ ł . Read it as if it were Ƒƀ ŌŔ ł ň Ƅƌĭ ŏ ň ƑƀƄƌĭ Yes, we now have 5 vowels. The same applies to ķŴſĬƞŨ ŏ ň (with šň sound on the ĸ). ķŴſĬƞŨ This is called poetic permissibilities. That is, the poet is permitted to add a vowel in such cases to fit the meter. Now count the syllables of each stanza. Does each line fit the 5 + 4 meter? ò ł ł ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ contains only 3 vowels and we are expecting 4. You may have found out that ƁŶĥ So how do we deal with this one? Here pretty much each letter has a vowel, apart from the first ƌ. So if we read it as if it ò ł ł ĿŴŷƌŏ ň , we will be in a good shape. In fact, later liturgical versions have it were written ƁŶĥ ň written with an initial ňƌ. If you are interested in the details that explain this insertion of š, then read this footnote.1 As you can see, scholars who study the metrical structure of Madroshé have to consider many complications. But unless you plan to become an Ephrem guru, you have nothing to worry about. Analysis Stanza 1

Ō

Ō Ŕ are participles, similar to the ones we studied in section 4.6. Both ƈƀźƟ and ƑƀƄƌ

1

Historically, there was a short vowel on the initial ƌ called Schwa (a term actually borrowed

from Syriac through Hebrew) in modern linguistics. The Schwa sounds like a short

ň

have taken the function of a full š sound to fill in the meter.

šň and it must

Madrosho Poem

89

Ņ ň ‘lamb’. Do not confuse it with the ł ň is the short form (absolute) of ŧƢƉĥ The word ƢƉĥ ł ň ‘he said’. verb ƢƉĥ Stanza 2

ň

ł

ŏ ƦŨ The first word ķĭųſǓ Ŕ ł is made up of Ũ ‘in’, and ƎſǓŁ ‘two’ which looses its final Ǝ when it ŏ ł. connects to the object suffix ķĭųſš ň ň ‘let us see’ are in the future tense. Note that the The two verbs ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ ‘let us look’ and Ŧŵŷƌ future tense here begins with ƌ. ķĥĪň is made of the relative pronoun Ī ‘that’ (which was omitted in the English translation ň for idiomatic reasons), and ķĥ ‘if’. Literally, the whole word means ‘that if’. About the Reading This Madrosho, of which we only have seen the first stanza, is significant for at least two reasons. First, it represents a text written in the fourth century by Saint Ephrem which has been continuously used in the Syriac churches until the present day. Many church goers can chant the above stanza by heart, albeit the modern version reads as follows: Ō ň ň ĭĬŏ ƈƀźƟ Ņ ň ƢƉĥł ň .ťŶƞƘ ŦĬŅ 1 ƎſĿƞƊŨ ô ň

Ņ ĖŦƦƣŴƟł ŏ ƢƉĥł ò ł ĿŴŷŏ ňƌ .ƁŶĥ ł Ō Ņ ƃŴƌ ĖƎƀſƢ Ŕ ŏ ĭĥ

ŌŔ ł ŏ ň ĭĬô ŏ ƑƀƄƌĭ ķŴſĬƞŨ ňŧǔƉĥň ķĭųſǓ ŏ ł ƦŨ Ŕ ł ň ň Ņ ķĥ Ŧŵŷƌĭ ň ň ƎƀƉĪ

2

The differences in the version that came down to us in the liturgical tradition are highlighted. Can you tell why these changes took place? It seems that after the time of Saint Ephrem someone figured out a way to compensate for the lack of vowels that we talked about above. By adding ĭĬŏ in both lines of stanza one, later users of the hymn ensured 5 syllables in the first portion of each line. They also fixed ň ŏ ň (although this šň is not allowed in prose, it is the problem in stanza 2 by adding š in ĿŴŷƌ allowed in poetry). Can you find another variation between the liturgical version on this page, and the reading passage? Search hard! ň Look at the last line. In Saint Ephrem’s version, you find in the last line ķĥĪň which is ķĥ in the liturgical version. This is simply a variant reading. When texts get copied for hundreds of years, copiests introduce variants intentionally or unintentionally. Scholars usually spend years comparing the same text found in various manuscripts to arrive to a perfect edition of the text. They give their ‘perfect’ text in the body of the book, either taking one manuscript as the basis of this perfect text, or coming up with one text from the various manuscripts. In the footnotes, they note all variant readings from various manuscripts. Such an edition is called a CRITICAL EDITION. The second significance is the content of the Madrosho. There are two lambs mentioned in stanza 1, and in fact the whole Madrosho, as one can learn from stanza 2, Ņ ň ƢƉĥł ň , compares and contrasts these two lambs. The first lamb is that of the Passover, ťŶƞƘ

90

Readings

mentioned in the Book of Exodus, chapter 12. The second lamb is Christ, the new Passover Ņ ŏ ł ň ‘the True Lamb’. If you are interested to Lamb, or as Saint Ephrem calls him ŦƦƣŴƟ ƢƉĥ learn more about how the structure of the poem ingeniously compares the two lambs, read Brock’s description in this book: Sebastian P. Brock and George A. Kiraz, Ephrem the Syrian, Select Poems: Vocalized Syriac text with English translation, introduction, and notes (Brigham Young University Press, 2006), pp. 112-121. Exercise 6.3 1. Fill in the blank spaces of the following poem with the following words: Ņ Ņ Ō ł Ņ Ņ ŅŔ b. ťŨǁ c. ŧƢƙƏň ƼŨ d. ŦŁűƕŌ a. ŦƼƠƍƘ Ŕ Ŕ ň

Ņ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ Ũ ĬƦƊƏĭ

ň ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ƦŹƢƏĭ Ŕ ň

ň ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ƦƊƣĿ Ŕ ň ŦĬŅ

2. Translate the poem in 1 into English. 3. Define a meter for a Madrosho, and compose two stanzas in that meter.

6.4 Sugitho (Dialogue) Poem New Words This section has a lot of new words. Try to go over them a few times.

Ņ

I (f.) go Ɓìô ƍƆĮĥ ô Ņ say (imperative, f.) IJƢƉĥ ô ł ôň she said ŁƢƉĥ Ŕł ł Ņ Ņ you IJôƦƌĥ ŔŅ Ŕ = IJƼ ô ł ƄŨ ô ťƀƄŨ (f) are crying son, son of ƢŨł Ō ł ŁƢŨ daughter of David űſĭĪ Ŕô ł Ņ he reclined ťƍū Ņ perhaps ťƊëƆĪł Ņ Ņ Ɓìô ƍſĭĬ I am becoming I was ƻĭ Ŕ Ō Ĭô łŔ Ņ like this, in this manner ťƍŅƃĬ Ņ ŏ ťŨŴŶ love òł ň debts, sins ťŨŴŶ Ņň ò sins ŦųźŶ ł ł ƎƍƀźŶ we sinned Ņ Ņ ł sinner (f.), sinful woman ŦƼźŶ Ņ more than ƎƉň ŪŹň Ņ ťũŹ news

ĺűłŌſ he knew, recognized Ņ ł today ƎƉŴſ Ņ ł birth ŧűÿƇſ Ņ ň ťũëƆ heart ł dressed, put on (garment) ƥũëƆ to, towards ŁŴëƆ ŔŅ ƁƆŌ for me, to me ŏ why? ķŴƊëƆ Ņ why? ƎƊëƆ ňň ƨƉò words ň Ņ Lord of all ƈƃŏ ŧƢƉ ň ł he appeases ťƕƢƉ Ņ ł ƦƉ she is approaching, ťŨƢƟ Ŕ ň coming near ł Ō he shall say ƢƉŤƌ űŬƌ attracted Ŕł ł ŏ attracted him IJĬĭű ô Ŭƌ ŔŅŅ Ņ Satan ťƍźƏ ł ň Ņ ň Ņ you hate Ʀƌĥ ô ťƍƏ = ƼƍƏ

Ņ

łŔ ťƉűƕ until Ņ compelled Ŧƞƕ compelled him IJųſƞƕ ô ŅŅ ł ŧƢŬƘ body Ŕ ň near ŅŔ ň Ņ űſĽ ò crafts, deceits ŦƦƖƌĽ Ŕ ň he approached, came near ħƢƟ Ō Ō they are angry ƎſŵƀūĿ ň loved ones ťƊŶǓŅ ň Ǔł ťƊŶ mercies ł forgave ơũƣ ŏ forgive (imperative)ľŴũƣ ň Ņ ơũƣ forgiver, forgives Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ I listen ljĥô ťƖƊƣ = Ɓìô ƍƖƊƣ she heard ƦƖƊƣ Ŕ Ņł ň ŦŁĭƢƣ banquet Ŕ ŏŅ Ōł began Ņ IJƢƣ ŏ ŦŁŴũſŁ repentance Ŕ ŅŅ Ō ƎƀũſŁ repenting ones

Reading Ņ Ō ŏ The following passage gives a few stanzas from a longer ŦƼūŴƏ in the form of a dialogue Ŕ Ŕ poem. The dialogue takes place between the sinful woman who went to Jesus when he was

Sugitho (Dialogue) Poem

91

at the house of Simon, one of the Pharisees, and washed his feet (Luke 7:36-50), and Satan who is preventing her from repenting.1

ł òł ň Ņ ĜƦŷì ơũƣ Ŕ ň ƌ ťƕĿƧ ťŨŴŶ

ň ł ŧƢŬƘł űſĭĪł ŁƢŨ .ƥũëƆ Ŕ ô ł ƎƉĭ Ŕ ň ŏ IJĬĭű ł ťƊŶǓł ĜIJųſƞƕ ô Ņ ųŨŴŶĭ ô ŏ Ŭƌ Ŕ ŏ ň ł ŦŁĥĭ Ėƈƃ ŧƢƉŅ ŧűƇƀëƆ Ŕň

The forgiver of sins to earth descended, And from the daughter of David wore a body. Mercies attracted him, and his love compelled him. And he came to birth, the Lord of all.

Ņ ķŴƖƊƣĪ ň ĬňŁĭƢƤŨĪ .ťƍū Ŕ Ņ ł ň Ņ ĭĬ ł ò ł ƈƃŏ ƁƆ ơũƣ ĖƁŨŴŶ The (female) sinner heard (of) his news. That in the banquet of Simon He reclined. And she said in her heart that if I go, He forgives me all my sins.

Ņ ł ƦƉ .ťŨƢƟ Ŕ ň ŦŁŴŔũſŅƦƆĪ Ŕ ł ł Ŕ Ņ IJƢƣĭ ł Ō ƎƃĬĪ ł ñ Ņ ƢƉŤƌ ĖųëƆ

Ņ ň ň ƦƖƊƣ ĜŦƼźŶł ųũŹ Ŕ ł ň Ņ ñ Ņ ň ŁƢƉĥĭ ĜƁìô ƍƆĮĥ Ŕł ň ô Ņ ķĥĪň ųũÿƇŨ

Ņ Ņ Ņ ł Ŕ Ō ťƍźÿƏ ñ ĺűſĭ ŦŵŶ ĜųëƆ ň òŅ ň ł ň ųñ ſűſĽ ň Ŕ ň ĬƦƖƌƞŨĭ ħƢƟ Ŕ

1

2

3

Satan saw and he recognized her. That to repentance she is nearing. And with his deceits he came near next to her, And started in this manner to say to her:

.ƁƄƀƇƕ ô ł ĖIJƼ ŔŅ ô ł ƄŨ

Ņ Ņ : ť ƍźÿƏ Ō ŏ ŦƼǑ Ņ ķŴƊëƆ ł ƄŨ ƁƆ IJƢƉĥ ĜIJƼ Ŕ Ŕ ô ô łô Ņ ł ł Ō ƁƄƀƊŶǓ ƎſŵƀūĿ ô Ŕ ťƊƆĪ ň Ņ ĜljĥŅô ĵĮĥň ķĭĬŏ ŁŴëƆ Ŕ Ņ ljĥŅ ň ł ŏ ljĥŅ ô ťƕƢƉ Ņ ķĭųëƆ ƎƊëƆ

4

Satan:

Say to me girl why are you crying. Perhaps your loved-ones are angry at you. I shall go to them, (and) appease them; why are you crying?

Ņ œ ň Ņ ƁŬƏĪ Ō ł .ƎƀũſŁűƆł ƼƍƏ Ņ ł ł ƎƉŴſĭ Ņ Ņ ƋſƢƉ ł ł ƢŨĪ ĖƁôìƍſĭĬ 1

ò Sebastian P. Brock, ŦƼũŬƉ

Ņ :ŦƼźŶł ň ł ň ljĥŅ Ņ Ņ Ƨ ƅƀò ÿƇƊëƆ ĜƁìô ƍƖƊƣ Ņ ł ťƉűƕ łŔ Ĝƻĭ Ŕ Ņ Ō ƎƉŴƀëƆ Ŕ Ō Ĭô ƅƇſĪ

ò ŦƼūŴƏ (1982), pp. 50-55, stanzas 1, 6, 8, 9, 14, and 55.

5

92

Readings

The Sinful (Woman):

I am not listening to your words. For you very much hate those who repent. Until today I was yours. And today I am becoming of the son of Mary.

ł Ņ ł ł ł ĜįƦƘ ťƕĿŁ ŦųƆĥ ƢŨ

Ņ ł ł ł ųƀŨŴŶ ñ ň ò ł ŦƼźŷëƆĭ .ơũƣ ŏ ł ò ł ƎƆł ľŴũƣ ò ł Ņ ł ƎƀŨŴŶ ĜƎſųźŶĭ Ņ ł Ņ ł ł ĖIJĬŅ ƎƉň ŪŹ ƅƆ ƎƍƀźŶĪ

6

The Son of God opened a door. And he forgave the (female) sinner her sins. Forgive us our offenses and trespasses, For we have sinned against you more than that one (i.e. her). Sugitho Structure The history of dialogue poems goes back to ancient Mesopotamia and is found in Sumerian and Akkadian literature. The Syriac fathers composed many dialogue poems. Usually, the dialogue takes place between two biblical figures, but there are a few on other matters. There is a Sugitho, for example, that gives a dialogue between the body and the soul. Another gives a dialogue amongst the months of the year. Some of these dialogue poems, like the one we just read, are still used in the liturgy (this particular one on Thursday of Passion Week in the Night Office). Regarding meter, dialogue poems are actually couplet poems. Each line has the same number of syllables (or vowels). A dialogue poem begins with an introduction that sets the stage (e.g., stanzas 1-3 above). Then a dialogue begins (e.g., stanzas 4 and 5) above. The poem ends with a conclusion giving the moral of the story (e.g., stanza 6). The above ŦƼūŴƏ is much longer: the setting of the stage has 8 stanzas, the dialogue 45 stanzas, and the conclusion 3 stanzas. Usually scholars have to reconstruct these dialogue poems from various manuscripts because liturgical scribes tend not to write the whole thing to shorten services. One common method used by scribes to shorten hymns is to skip over every other stanza. This has terrible consequences in the case of dialogue poems: one ends up with a monolog! Even today deacons skip stanzas in a similar manner to shorten services (Syriac services are very long). Hint for deacons: if you plan to skip in a ŦƼūŴƏ, chant one stanza and skip 2 stanzas. This way you maintain the dialogue and you don’t end up in a monolog! The Possessive Without Using Ī We have seen thus far how to use the possessive in a number of ways. For example, David’s Ņ ł daughter (or the daughter of David) can be expressed using the possessive particle Ī as in ŦŁƢŨ Ŕ Ō ł űſĭĪĪ.

Sugitho (Dialogue) Poem

93

There is another way to say the same thing. We can use the short (absolute)1 form of Ņ ł Ņ the word ŦŁƢŨ Ŕ , which in many cases you can obtain by removing the ending ťš, and getting Ō ł ŁƢŨ rid of the possessive Ī as in űſĭĪ Ŕ ô ł (in this particular word, the Ŀ is silent in the short form ŁƢŨ Ŕ ô ł but this has nothing to do with the possessive). ò ł ťƤſĿ Ņ Ō ‘head of the apostles’ can be expressed as ň ƀƇŌ ƣĪ Here are some other examples: ťŷì Ņ ł ‘big/head of the priests’ can be expressed as ljųƃ ň ò Ņ ťŨĿ ň ò Ņ ħĿł . ťŷňìƀƇŌƣò ƥſĿŌ . Similarly, ljųƃĪ Sometimes the short form (absolute) of the noun cannot be achieved by simply Ņ ň Ņ . Hence you see Ņ Ņ ‘Lord’, for example, is ŧƢƉ removing the final ťš. The absolute form of ťſƢƉ ŏ ň ŏ Ņ Ņ ). in Stanza 1 ƈƃ ŧƢƉŅ ‘Lord of all’ (which can be expressed as ƈƃĪ ťſƢƉ Use of the Present Tense as Active Participles ň Ņ ‘forgives’, can also be used as a noun for forgiver. This is The present tense verb, e.g. ơũƣ ň ò ł ơũƣ ň Ņ similar to the English end -er that changes the verb write into noun writer; e.g., ťŨŴŶ ‘forgiver of sins’. Notice also the use of the possessive without Ī as described above. Attaching the Subject Pronouns to Verbs We have already covered the present tense in section 4.1. Frequently, the present tense is followed by a personal pronoun (e.g., I, you, he, she, etc.). For instance ťƀŅƄŨ Ŕ Ņ ‘(she) is crying’ ł Ņ Ņ can be used with pronouns as follows: IJôƦƌĥ Ŕ ‘you are crying’, ljĥŅ ô ťƀŅ ƄŨ Ŕ Ņ ‘I am crying’. ô ťƀƄŨ Syriac allows you to join the verb and the pronoun together. The operation is called Ņ CONTRACTION. It is done as follows: remove the final vowel of the verb (in this case š) as ł well as the final ť, then remove the ô ƌĥ of the pronoun but keep the š, then join the rest together. The bits that need to be removed are shown shaded below: You end up with IJƼƄŨ ô ł Ņ ‘you are crying’ which appears twice in stanza 4 above. Why would one want to do that? Look at stanza 4 and see if you can figure out the answer. Hint: It has to do with the meter. This ŦƼūŴƏ is in the meter of Saint Ephrem; i.e., each ½ line has 7 syllables (or ł Ņ Ņ has three vowels, which does not fit in with the rest of the text vowels). The full IJƦƌĥ ô ô ťƀƄŨ in stanza 4. But the short IJƼƄŨ ô ł Ņ has only two vowels giving a total of 7 vowels in ƁƆŌ IJƢƉĥ ô łô Ō Ņ ŏ ŦƼǑ. IJƼƄŨ ô ł Ņ ķŴƊëƆ Stanza 5 has two verbs that make use of contraction. These are shown below with the bits that are removed shaded:

Ņ

Note that in the case of Ɓìô ƍƖƊƣŅ ‘I (feminine) am listening’, there is the Ɓô ending. When the short form of the noun is used for the possessive, it is called in grammars the ‘construct’ state (see §82 in section 7.4). 1

94

Readings

Can you find another verb that makes use of contraction which we may have missed? Hint: Look at Stanza 2. Ņ Ņ It is Ɓìô ƍƆĮĥ ô Ņ (the Ɔ is silent in this verb). Compare it ô Ņ ‘I am going’. It is equivalent to ljĥŅ ô ƧĮĥ Ņ to Ɓìô ƍƖƊƣŅ above. Forms of the Object Suffix for him In the first stanza, we came across two forms of the object suffix for him. The first is IJĬôĭ in ł IJĬĭű ô ŏ Ŭƌ Ŕ ‘persuaded him’. The verb here isŏ the past tense ĭôűŬƌ Ŕł ‘they persuaded’. When the suffix IJĬô was added, the Ī took on an š vowel (because it is followed by ĭ) so we get ł ł. IJĬĭű to the ƌ. The result is IJĬôĭűŏŬƌ ô ŏ Ŭƌ Ŕł . Then the š moved Ŕ Ņ Ņ ‘compelled’. The The second is IJųſš ô in IJųſƞƕ ô Ņ ‘compelled him’. Here, the verb is Ŧƞƕ Ņ Ņ form IJųſš ô is always used when the verb ends in ťš. ň ň Ŕ ł ‘he (not they) persuaded Don’t forget the more common suffix for him: Ĭš as in ĬűŬƌ him’. The form of the suffix depends on the tense, gender, number and person of the verb. (See Table 11 in the Appendix if you want to learn more.) Analysis Stanza 1

ł We have covered the object suffixes in IJĬĭű ô Ņ above. ô ŏ Ŭƌ Ŕ and IJųſƞƕ ň ŏ ‘and his love’ is made of ĭ ‘and’, ťŨŴŶ Ņ ŏ ‘love’ (the final ųŨŴŶĭ ‘his’. Stanza 2

ťšŅ is removed), and ųšň

ň

ł ň ‘she heard’ and ŁƢƉĥ The verbs ƦƖƊƣ Ŕ ł ‘she said’ are in the past tense, feminine, singular. ňň Ŕ ňŅ ųũŹ ‘his news’ is ťũŹ ‘news’ and ųšň ‘his’. ň ŏŅ ł Ņ ŏŅ ĬŁĭƢƤŨĪ ‘that in his banquet’ is the relative pronoun Ī ‘that’, the prefix Ũ ‘in’, ŦŁĭƢƣ Ŕ Ŕ ň ŏŅ ň ŏ ň ‘banquet’, and Ĭš ‘his’. Note the double possessive usage in ķŴƖƊƣĪ ĬŁĭƢƣ Ŕ , literally ‘his banquet of Simon’. Ņ Ņ ‘heart’, and ųñšŅ ‘her’. ñ Ņ ň ‘in her heart’ is the prefix Ũ ‘in’, ťũëƆ ųũÿƇŨ ň ķĥĪň is the relative pronoun Ī ‘that’, and ķĥ ‘if’. Ņ Ņ Ɓìô ƍƆĮĥ ô Ņ ‘I am going’. Note that the Ɔ is silent in this verb. ô Ņ is a contracted form of ljĥŅ ô ƧĮĥ Stanza 3

Ņ ŏŅ ł Ņ ŏŅ ŦŁŴũſƦƆĪ ‘that to repentance’ is the possessive pronoun Ī ‘that’, the prefix Ɔ ‘to’, and ŦŁŴũſŁ Ŕ Ŕ

‘repentance’.

ň òŅ ň ł Ņ òŅ ň ň ĬƦƖƌƞŨĭ ‘and with his crafts’ is ĭ ‘and’, Ũ ‘in’, ŦƦƖƌĽ Ŕ Ŕ ‘crafts’, and Ĭš ‘his’. ň ň Ŕ ň ‘near her’ is űſĽ ųñſűſĽ Ŕ ň ‘near’ and ųñſš ‘her’ (because some prepositions, like űſĽ Ŕ ň , take the

plural suffixes). ł Ŕ Ņ , the prefix In ƎƃĬĪ manner’.

Ī

is a relative pronoun introducing a relative clause

łŔ Ņ ƎƃĬ

‘in this

Sugitho (Dialogue) Poem

95

Stanza 4

The verb IJƢƉĥ ô ł ô ‘tell me’ is imperative in the feminine 2nd person. ŏ Ņ are interrogatives, both meaning why? which? ķŴƊëƆ and ƎƊëƆ Ņ ł ‘your’ which is used ň ǓŅ ‘loved-ones’, and the suffix ƁƄſš ƁƄƀƊŶǓ ô ł ‘your loved-ones’ is ťƊŶ ô with plural nouns. ł ‘your’. Note the change in the ƁƄƀƇƕ ô ł ‘on/at you’ is ƈƕł ‘on’ and the same suffix ƁƄſš ô šł vowel from ƕ to Ƈ. to’ and ķĭĬŏ ‘them’. ķĭĬŏŁŴëƆ Ŕ Ņ is ŁŴëƆ Ŕ Ņ ‘towards, Ņ ň ł ‘I am appeasing’ are in the present tense. The verbs ljĥ ô Ņ ĵĮĥň ‘I am going’ and ljĥŅ ô ťƕƢƉ Stanza 5

Ņ

ň Ņ , and ƁìƍſĭĬ Ņ Ņ were discussed above. The verbs Ɓìô ƍƖƊƣŅ , ƼƍƏ ň ňò ł ò ł ň is the object market Ɔ, ƨƉ ƅƀÿƇƊëƆ ‘words’, and ƅſš ‘your’ which is used with plural nouns. Ō Ņ ł is the object marker Ɔ, the relative pronoun Ī ‘those who’, and the verb ƎƀũſŁ Ō Ņ ƎƀũſŁűƆ ‘repent’ in the present tense. Ņ ł ‘to today’ is Ɔ ‘to’ and ƎƉŴſ Ņ ł which is the short (absolute) form of ťƍƉŴſ Ņ Ņ ł ‘today’. ƎƉŴƀëƆ Ņ ł is the possessive prefix Ī ‘of, belonging to’ and ƢŨł is the short (absolute) form of ŧƢŨ ƢŨĪ ‘son’. Exercise 6.4 Ņ ? ł ł over ťƍƉŴſ Ņ Ņ ł in Stanza 5? Why did he chose ƢŨł instead of ŧƢŨ 1. Why did the poet choose ƎƉŴſ 2. Conjugate the following verbs in the present tense using the full and contracted forms. ň Ņ The verb ħƻ Ŕ is given here as an example. Note that the 3rd person does not have any suffixes. 3

M

Singular

F 2

M F

1

M F

3

M

Plural

F 2

M F

1

M F

ň Ņ ħƻ Ŕ ŅťŨƻ ŔŅ

ł ň Ņ Ʀƌĥô ħƻ ƦŨłƻ Ŕ ŔŅ ł Ņ Ņ IJƦƌĥ IJƦ Ŕ ŔŅ ô ô ťŨƻ ô Ũłƻ ň Ņ ň Ņ ljĥŅô ħƻ ťƍŅŨƻ Ŕ Ŕ ŅťƍŨŅƻ Ņljĥô ťŨŅƻ ŅŔ ŔŅ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ƎŨò ƻ Ŕ ŏ ł Ō Ņ ŏ ķĭƦƌĥô ƎƀŨƻ ķĭƼŨŌ ƻ Ŕ ŔŅ ň ł òŅ Ņ ň òŅ Ņ ƎſƦƌĥô ƎŨƻ ƎſƦŨƻ Ŕ Ŕ łƎƍŶ ƎƀŨŌƻ łƎƍƀŨŌ ƻ ŅŔ ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ł ƎŨò ƻ łòƻ ƎƍŶ ƎƍŨ ŔŅ ŔŅ

ň Ņ ƋƣĿ

ň Ņ İƢƏ

ťƄň Ŕ ŨŅ

96

Readings

6.5 The Wolf, the Fox, and the Lion New Words

Ņ ł

ň Ņ

ƎƀƆĬ these ł ơƍŶ strangled ň ł strangled him ųƠƍŶ Ņ Ō Ņ dinner ŦƼƊƤŶ Ŕ ň you (sing., m.) learned ƦƙƇſŌ Ņ Ō fair, just ljŤƃ when, at the time űƃł ň ň ĶűƉ certain, some Ņ king ťƄÿƇƉł goat ŦŵìŅ ƕň

where ťƄſĥ Ņ ł ƨìſĥň stag them ķŴƌĥŏł Ņ lion ťſĿĥ ł Ņ ťũƌĿĥň rabbit they (m.) became friendsĭƢũŶ ô ł ł ŁĥŔň became furious ƦƊŶ Ŕ ł ł ł ŁĥŔ ķƦƍƀŨ between us ŔŅ ł Ņ Ō wolf ťŨĥĪ ň Ņ then ƎſűſĬ

division divide (imperative) lunch they hunted in front in front of you lying jumped breakfast fox

Ņ ŏ ťŬëƆŴƘ ŔŅ ň ł ŭƇƘ ŅŔ Ņ ŦƼƍƘ ĭĪô ĽŅ ŅŔ ĶűƟ ł Ņ ƅƀƉűƟ Ŕ ň ťƉĿ ł Ņ ĿŴƣ ŦŁĭƢƣ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ņł ƨíƕŁ

Reading The following passage is taken from stories collected by the thirteenth century polymath Bar Ebroyo.1

ł ň ň Ņ ł ƨìſĥĭł Ŧŵƕň ĭô ĪŔ ĽŅ ĭƢ ł ł ŁŔĥň űƃŔł .ťſĿĥĭł ƨíƕŁĭ .ťũƌĿĥĭ ĶűƉ ťŨĥĪŌ ô ũŶ

A certain wolf, and a fox, and a lion. When they became friends, they hunted a goat, and a stag, and a rabbit. ň ł ň

ł Ņ ł ň ł ťŨĥűëƆ ň Ņ Ō ťſĿĥ ƢƉĥł ƎſűſĬ .ķƦƍƀŨ ķŴƌĥ ŭƇƘĪ Ŕ Ŕ Then the lion said to the wolf, “divide them amongst us.” ł ň ťŨĥĪŌ ƢƉĥł ň .ƨíƕƦëƆ ťũƌĿĥĭł ĜƁƆ ƨìſĥĭł ĜƅƆ Ŕ Ņ ƋƆł ŦŵƕĪ The wolf said, “The goat for you, and the stag for me, and the rabbit ň for the fox.”

ň Ņ ťſĿĥ ƗƊƣ ň ł ťŨĥĪŌ ƈƕł ĿŴƣĭ ł ł ł ƦƊŶ ł űƃĭ .ųƠƍŶĭ Ŕ ł ł ŁĥŔ ƎƀƆĬ

And when the lion heard these, he became furious and jumped on the wolf and strangled him. ł

ł ł ň .ŭŔƇƘł Ʀƌĥô :ƨíƕƦëƆ ƢƉĥĭ And he said to the fox: you divide. Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ň ƨíƕŁ ųƆň ƢƉĥ ň ň ƎƉł ŦŵƕĪ ŦĭĬŁ .ĴŔƼƊƤŷƆ ƨìſĥĭł ĜĴƼƍƙƆ Ŕ Ņ ł ťũƌĿĥĭł ĜĴŔŁĭƢƤëƆ Ŕ Ŕ The fox said to him, “let the goat be for your breakfast, and the rabbit for your lunch, and the stag for your dinner.” ł

ň Ō ťƄſĥ ƎƉĪ Ņ ljųëƆ ň ųƆ ƢƉĥ Ņ ƦƙƇſ .ljŤƃŌ ťŬƆŴƘ Ŕ He said to him, “from where did you learn this fair division.” ň ł ťŨĥĪ ƎƉň :ƨíƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ Ņ Ŕ ťƉĿĪ ĖťƄƇƉł IJƢƉ ô Ņ ƅƀƉł űƟ

1

2 3 4

5 6

7 8

The fox said to him, “from the wolf which is lying in front of you my Lord king.”

ň

ł

ł

The Particles ĶűňƉ, ƋƆ, ƎƉ, and ƎſĪň

Ņ Ō ‘a certain wolf’. The word ĶűƉ ň ň ťŨĥĪ ň ň can also mean some, Sentence 1 above begins with ĶűƉ somewhat. It is usually used with inanimate objects and animals. One uses ƥƌĥŅô ‘human’ or űŶ Ŕł E. A. Wallis Budge, The Laughable Stories Collected by Mar Gregory John Bar Hebraeus (London 1897; Gorgias Press edition 2004), no. 371. 1

The Wolf, the Fox, and the Lion

97

Ņ ł Ņ ł Ņ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ŦŁƦƌĥ ‘one’ instead with humans; e.g., ƥƌĥŅô ŧƢũūł or űŶł ŧƢũūł ‘a certain man’; ƥƌĥŅ ô ŦŁƦƌĥ Ŕ ô or ŧűŶ Ŕ ô ł Ņ ‘a certain woman’. (Note that ŧűŶ Ŕ is the feminine form of űŶ Ŕ .) ł In Sentence 3 you may have noticed that we left ƋƆ out of the translation. It is a

particle of explanation, corresponding to English namely. It is usually used to mark a quotation and takes the position of the second word in the quotation as in ƅƆ Ŕ Ņ ƋƆł ŦŵìŅ ƕň Ī. In Sentence 6, ƎƉł (not to be confused with ƎƉň ‘from’), is a particle that is used to introduce the first element of a list. In this case, the list is: Ņ ŏŅ ň ň ŦŵìŅ ƕň 1. ĴŔŁĭƢƤëƆ ŦĭĬŁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł 2. ĴƼƍƙƆ Ŕ Ņ ł ťũƌĿĥ Ņ Ō Ņ ł Ņ ł 3. ĴŔƼƊƤŷƆ ƨìſĥ Ŕ Usually, though not in this case, the second element is introduced by ƎſĪň ; e.g., The ƎſĪň

Ņ ŏŅ Ņ ň ň ƎƉł ŦŵìŅ ƕň Ņ ł ĜĴŔŁĭƢƤëƆ ĴƼƍƙƆ ŦĭĬŁ Ŕ Ņ ł ƎſĪň ťũƌĿĥĭ Ŕ

ÿ ƎƉł usage corresponds to English on the one hand—on the other.

Revisiting Ī for Introducing a Quotation Recall that the prefix Ī can be used to introduce a quotation. You can see examples in Sentences 2, 3, 6, and 7. Getting Rid of a Vowel Ņ The suffix Ĵš 6. From now on we will do without its Ŕ ‘your’ appeared three times in Sentence Ņ ŏŅ Ņ for ĴŔŁĭƢƣ vowel. For example, we will write ĴŔŁĭƢƣ Ŕ . Further, we will no longer indicate this Ŕ suffix in the Analysis sections. Analysis Sentence 1

ň

ň

ł ł ŁĥŔ ‘they became friends’ the prefix ŁĥŔ is the passive marker. In ĭƢ ô ũŶ ĭôĪŔ ĽŅ ‘they hunted’ is a past tense plural masculine verb. Sentence 2

ł Ņ ł ŏň ň ł is Ī which is introducing the quotation ķƦƍƀŨ ň ł ň ł ‘divide’ ŭƇƘĪ ķŴƌĥ ŭƇƘ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ , then comes ŭƇƘ Ŕ which is an imperative verb. ł Ņ ł ł ķƦƍƀŨ Ŕ is ƦƍƀŨ Ŕ Ņ ł ‘between, among’ and ķš ‘us’. Sentence 4

ň ň ƦƊŶ Ŕ ł ł ŁĥŔ ‘became furious’ is also a passive verb by virtue of the prefix ŁĥŔ. ň ł ‘and he strangled him’ is ĭ ‘and’, ơƍŶ ł ‘strangled’, and Ĭšň ‘him’. Note the shift of ųƠƍŶĭ ł the vowel š from ƍł back to Ŷ when the suffix was added. Sentence 6

Ņ ŏŅ Ņ ŏŅ Ņ ĴŔŁĭƢƤëƆ is the prefix Ɔ ‘for’, ŦŁĭƢƣ Ŕ ‘your’. Ŕ Ŕ ‘breakfast’, and Ĵš

98

Readings

Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ ł ĴƼƍƙƆ have the same construction. Ŕ Ņ ł and ĴŔƼƊƤŷƆ Ŕ Sentence 7

ň Ō ‘you learned’ is a past tense verb, singular, 2nd person, masculine. ƦƙƇſ Sentence 8

ň ł is the relative pronoun Ī ‘which’ and ťƉĿ ň ‘lying’. ťƉĿĪ Exercise 6.5 Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ō Ņ ł 1. What is ĴŔƼƍƙƆ made of? What is ĴŔƼƊƤŷƆ made of? Ŕ 2. Translate into Syriac using Ī to introduce quotations: a. The uncle said to the father, “divide the treasure amongst us.” b. Sara said to Simon, “the deacons sing in the Church.” c. I told Joseph, “Mary’s hair is too long.” 3. Rewrite the reading sentences in section 4.3 using ƎſĪň ÿ ƎƉł to list the pigeons in sentences 2 and 3.

6.6 John of Ephesus New Words

ň ł

he wrote ħǁĥŅ űƀƉĥ Amid, Diyarbakir Ŕ Ōł ł Asia ťƀƏĥ ň Ņ ŏ bishop ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥŌ ň Ņ ň ĸŴƐƘĥ Ephesus ł they aroused ŴƊƀƟĥ ô ŌŌł he left ƁƘĿĥň Ō ƋƀƏŁŁĥ was made ł ł ň was ordained įƢƏŁŁĥ òł children ƁƍŨ ł ĶƢŨ but Ņ Ņ ň òł golden ťƀƍŨĬĪ century ŧĿĪŅŅ Ƣƀūň a particle ŌŔ Ņ now ƈƀƃĬ

Ņ ł time Ņ ťƍŨĮŏ small, minor Ņ ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ŦŁŴƀÿƇŶ pleasantness Ŕ ŏ ł Ņ Ōł fervent ťƊƀƊŶ ŅŅ ŏ ťƍŨŴŹ blessed ŅŅ ŏ ł Jacobite ťƀŨŴƠƖſ ň Ņ ò űƉ easterners ťƀŷƌ Ŕł Ņ ň from this time Ņ ťƄƉň ŦƦÿƇƉ word Ŕ ł Ņ shines ťūƢƙƉ ŔŅ Ņ ł ťƍƤƊƤƉ deacon ň was called, was named ŧƢƟƦƉ Ŕ ň ňŅ ł ň the Severians ťƍſǓĭŤƏ Ō ƻŤſĿŴƏ in Syriac Ŕ Ņ ŏ ň òŏ Ņ authors ťƉŴƀƏ

polish ecclesiastical reason ran away part parts Constantinople persecution beginning simple sixth faith three (feminine) story, chronicle stories

Ņ ŏ Ō ŦŁŴƇƀƠƏ ŔŅ Ņ òŌ ŦƼƌ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Łűƕ ƦƇƕ Ŕ łň ł Ņ ŏ ľƢƕň Ŕ ň Ƙ Ņ Ņ ŦòŁŴŬÿƇ ŦŁŴŬÿƇ Ƙ Ŕ ł Ō Ō ł ƏŴƟŏ ťƀƍƀźƍź Ņ ŏ ťƀƘĭĪĿ Ņ ŏ IJĿŴƣ Ņ Ō ťƊƀŷƣ ŅŅ Ō ťſƻƦƣ ŔŅ Ŕ ł ŦƻĪĭŁ Ŕ Ō Ŕ Ņł Ņ ƦƆŁ Ŕ łŌ Ņ Ņ ŦƼƖƣŁ ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ ò

Reading The following passage is a biography of John of Ephesus by Eugene Manna (d. 1928).1

ň Ņ Ō Ņ ŏ ŦƦƍſűƉ űƀƉŤŨŅ ljĬŅ ƎƍŶŴſ Ņł .űƇſ Ŕ Ŕ ŧĿĪŅ IJĿŴƤŨ Ŕ ň ŁĥŔ ťſƻƦƣ ô Ŕ Ŕ This John in the city of Amid in the beginning of the sixth century wasł born. ł ň ŻƄƟŁ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ņ ł įƢƏŁŁĥ ł ťƍƤƊƤƉ ñ Ņ ƎƍŶŴſ IJƢƉĪ .űƀŔƉŤŨ ųŨĪ Ŕł ł ô Ņ ŧƢſűŨ 1

Eugene Manna, ťƀƉǓĥĪ

ò ŦŁĭĪƢƉĪ ťƀƍƀŬƘ ťūǔƉ (1901), p. Ÿƣ.

1 2

John of Ephesus And in the year 529 he was ordained a deacon in the monastery of Saint John which is in it (i.e.) in Amid. ł

ŅŅ ł ĶĬƢŨĥĭ

ň ł Ņ ŏ ł ł Ō źƘł ƦƇƖŨ ĶƢŨ ťƃƢſƢ ƋſƢƘĥ ŴƊƀƟĥĪ ťƀƘĭĪĿ Ŕ łň ô ł ł Ōň ŏ ľƢƕĭ ł ł ƁƘĿĥ ĜťƍſǓĭŤƏ Ņ ł ň ƈƕł űƀƉĥĪ ł Ō źƍźƏŴƠëƆ .ťƀƍƀ Ŕ Ņ ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ

ŌŔ ŏ ł ƁƃŴƀźƌĥĪ

99

3

But on the account of the persecution which Ephrem, Patriarch of Antioch, and Abraham, Bishop of Amid, aroused against the Severians (i.e., followers of Severus of Antioch), he left and ran away to Constantinople.

Ņ ł .ťƊƀƊŶł Ƣƀūň ŦĭŅ Ĭô ťƀŨŴƠƖſ But he was a fervent Jacobite. Ņł Ō ň ƎƉŁĭ ł ł ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥŌ ň ƋƀƏŁŁĥ .ŦŁĿŴƕĮŏ ťƀƏƧ And there he was made Bishop for Asia Minor. ň ƦƉ ň Ņ ň ň ƎƍŶŴſĭ ŏ ťƀƏĥĪ ł ł ƎƍŶŴſ ĻĥŅ ťƄƉĭ .ŧƢƟ Ŕ ň ĸŴƐƘĥĪ And from this time, he was called also John of Asia and John of Ephesus. Ō ň ł ň Ō ł òł òŅ ł òŅ ŏ Ņ Ņò ł Ō Ņ ħǁĥ .ĬƻĪĭŁ ƁƍŨ ťƀŷìƌűƉ űƀƉŤŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ə ƈƀƃĬ Ŕ ťƍŨŴŹĪ ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ Ņ ƻŤſĿŴ Ŕ He, now, wrote in Syriac in Amid the stories of the blessed easterners, the followers of his faith. Ņ Ņ

Ņ òŅ Ņ Ō ò ň Ņ ł ŦƼƌ .ŦŁŴŬÿƇ ťƀƏŤŨĭ Ŕ Ŕ Łűƕ ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ò Ƙ ƦƆƦŨ And in Asia the ecclesiastical chronicles in three Ņ parts.ł Ņ ł Ņ ň ň Ņ Ō Ņ Ņň ò Ņ ťūƢƙƉĪ ň ł ťƀƍŨĬĪ ò Ņ Ņ ł ťƉŴƀƐŨ ŅŔ ł ŦŁŴƇƀƠƏĭ .ųƍŨĮĪ ŦŁŴƀƇŶ IJųŨ ĬƦÿƇƉ ťƊƀŷƣ Ƨ Ƨ ĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ

4 5 6 7

8 9

But his word (i.e., writings) is not simple in that (same) pleasantness and polish which shines in (the case of) the golden authors of his time.

Ō Ņ

Adverbs Ending in ƻŤ Ŕ š ADVERBS are used to describe or modify verbs; e.g., quickly in he is working quickly. Adverbs in Ō Ņ Ō Syriac have the ending ƻŤ Ŕ š as in ƻŤſĿŴƏ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ‘in Syriac’ in Sentence 7. Doing Without Two Vowels at the Same Time Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņò ł You may have noticed that many feminine plural words end with ŦŁš as in ŦƼƖƣŁ ‘stories’ Ŕ Ņ Ō Ņ Ņ ò ň Ŕ ł Ņ òŅ Ņ Ņ Ō Ō Ņ Ņ ), ŦƼƌ Ƙ ‘parts’ (singular (singular ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ Łűƕ ‘ecclesiastical’ (singular ťƀƌ Łűƕ), and ŦŁŴŬÿƇ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ň Ŕ ł òŅŅ Ō ŦŁŴŬÿƇ Ƙ). We shall start omitting the vowels in this suffix; we will write ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ ò , ŦƼƌ Ŕ Łűƕ, Ŕ ň ò and ŦŁŴŬƇ Ƙ. Ŕ Ordinal Numbers ORDINAL NUMBERS are used to express orders (e.g., first, second, third), as opposed to CARDINAL NUMBERS which are used to count (e.g., one, two, three). We came across Ņ Ō cardinal numbers before. Sentence 1 above gives an example of an ordinal number, ťſŅƻ Ŕ Ʀƣ Ŕ ‘sixth’. Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ for masculine numbers and Ŧƻš for feminine Ordinal numbers have the ending ťſš ones (but see the exception for second below). The following table gives the various forms from 1 to 10.

100

Readings Table 14. Ordinal and Cardinal Numbers.

Cardinal Numbers Number

Masc.

Ordinal Numbers Fem.

Number

Masc.

Ņ Ņ ł One First ťƀƉűƟ ŅŅ ł Two Second ťƍſĿŁ Ņ Ō Three Third ťſŅƼƆŁ Ŕ ŅŅ Ō Four Fourth ťƀƖƀŨĿ ŅŅ Ō Five Fifth ťƀƤƀƊŶ Ņ Ō ťſŅƻ Six Sixth Ŕ Ʀƣ Ŕ Ņ Ō Ņ Seven Seventh ťƀƖƀũƣ Ō Eight Eighth ťƀŅƍƀŅƉŁ ŅŅ Ō Nine Ninth ťƀƖƀƣŁ ŅŅ Ō Ten Tenth ťſƢƀƐƕ ň ň ł The number two appears sometimes with Syomé; e.g., ƎſǓŁ, ƎſŁǓŁ. űŶ Ŕł ň ƎſĿŁ Ņ Ņ ŦƦëƆŁ Ŕ Ņ ł ťƖŨĿĥ Ņ ł ťƤƊŶ Ņ ŦƦƣ Ŕ ŅťƖũƣł Ņ ťƀìŅ ƍƉŁ Ņ ň ťƖƣŁ Ņ ň ŧƢƐƕ

ŅŔ ŧűŶ ň ł ƎſŁĿŁ ƦƆŁ Ŕ Ņ ł ł ƗŨĿĥ ň ł ƥƊŶ Ʀƣ Ŕň ł Ɨũƣ ň Ņ ťƍƉŁ ł ƗƣŁ ł ƢƐƕ

Fem.

Ņ Ņ ł ŦƼƉűƟ Ņ ŌŅ ł ŦƼƍſĿŁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƻƼƆŁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƖƀŨĿ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƤƀƊŶ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƻƻƦƣ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƖƀũƣ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƍƀƉŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƖƀƣŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƻƢƀƐƕ

ň The Conjunction Ƣƀū

ň gives a number of meanings: for, but, indeed, however. It appears in The conjunction Ƣƀū Sentence 4 above. Manna, the writer of the above passage was a Catholic (not a ‘Jacobite’), ň for disapproval. and may have used Ƣƀū

ł

AfȨel: Verbs Beginning with ĥ

ł

Ō ł

ň ł

There is a class of verbs that begin with ĥ such as ƁƘĿĥ ‘he left’ in Sentence 3, and ħǁĥ ‘he ł wrote’ in Sentence 7. Usually, but not always, these verbs have another form without the ĥ ł Ņ such as ťƘĿ ‘he loosened’, and ħǁ is Ŕ ‘he wrote’. In some cases the meaning of the verbs ł ł ň ł Ņ Ō different as in ťƘĿ and ƁƘĿĥ. similar as in ħǁ Ŕ and ħǁĥ, but in others the meaning is very ł ň ł Another example is ƈƖƘ ‘he labored’, and ƈƖƘĥ which actually has no meaning. Classical Syriac grammarians used this particular verb to denote the various verb types by ň ł ł Ņ ł -type verbs, and that ħǁ and ťƘĿ are ƈƖƘ ĥ and analogy. For instance, they said that ħǁ Ŕ ł ł Ō ň ƁƘĿĥ are ƈƖƘĥ-type verbs. This tradition was picked up by later grammarians, even western grammarians. For this reason, you will find in Syriac grammars terms like PȨAL verbs or ň ł (the ł and ƈƖƘĥ AFȨEL (sometimes APHȨEL) verbs. These are simply transliterations of ƈƖƘ symbol Ȩ is used to transliterate ĺ). ň ł ł A few grammars use the verbs ƈźƟ ‘he killed’ and ƈźƟĥ, which also has no meaning, ň ł ł ň ĥł. They would then say that ħǁ ł and ƈƖƘ instead of ƈƖƘ Ŕ is a QʝAL-type verb and ħǁĥ is an AQTEL-type verb.

ň Revisiting Passive Łĥ Verbs

John of Ephesus

ň

101

ň Ōň

A number of verbs above have the passive marker ŁĥŔ such as űƇſŁĥŔ ‘he was born’. Two of the ň verbs begin with ŁŁĥ (two Łs). ň ł -type verbs. The Łĥň prefix is used with them ł - and ƈƖƘĥ We mentioned above the ƈƖƘ ň ň ň ň ł ł to create the passive version of the verb; e.g., ħǁ becomes ħǁŁĥŔ, ƈźƟ becomes ƈźƟŁĥŔ. Ŕ ň ň ł ň ł ł ł ŁĥŔň. Here the ĥ of ƈƖƘĥ When we add the passive Łĥ to ƈƖƘĥ-type verbs, we get ƈƖƘĥ ł œ œň ł ŁłœŁĥœ (both Łœ s become hard). In Sentence 2, we have įƢƏ ł ŁŁĥ assimilates into the Ł giving ƈƖƘ ň ł ł giving įƢƏĥ ł ł ŁĥŔň then įƢƏ ł ŁłœŁĥœň ). (from ŁĥŔ and įƢƏĥ ň ł ň So whether you see Łĥ or ŁŁĥ, this should be a good indication that the verb is passive. ň ň ĥł-type. ł -type, while ŁŁĥň indicates that it is ƈƖƘ Also Łĥ indicates to you that the verb is ƈƖƘ Ņň But be careful when these prefixes are actually part of the verb. In ŦŁĥŔ ‘he came’, for example, ň Łĥ is part of the verb. If you take it out, you are left with ťšŅ, a good indication that it must be Ņň part of the verb. Also ŁŔŁĥŔ ‘she came’ when not vocalized will appear as ŁŁĥ; it cannot be ł ň passive because if you take out the supposed ŁŁĥ prefix, you will end up with nothing. The Construct: Revisiting the Possessive Without Ī We saw in the previous sections how we can use the possessive using the absolute form of Ņ Ņ the noun. We have more similar examples in the above passage: ŧĿĪŅ IJĿŴƣ ‘beginning of Ņ Ņ Ņ ŏ ), ťƀƘĭĪĿ ł ň ‘for the reason of the persecution’ (instead of Ņ ŏ ƦƇƖŨ century’ (instead of ŧĿĪĪŅ ťſĿŴƣ Ŕ ň Ō ł òł ň Ō ł òŅ ł Ņ ň Ņ ŏ ł ŦƦÿƇƖŨ ťƀƘĭĪĿĪ ), and ĬƻĪĭŁ ƁƍŨ ‘the children of his faith’ (instead of ĬƻĪĭŁĪ ťƀƍŨ). Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Western grammars call the short (absolute) form that is used to construct the possessive expression the CONSTRUCT STATE of the noun.

Ņ

Bonus Word: ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ō

Ņ

The shorter form of ŦƦƍſűƉ Ŕ ł Ō Ŕ which is used with other words to indicate certain ô Ō Ŕ is ƦƍſűƉ ł Ņ Ņ ƦƍſűƉ Ņ Ņ ƦƍſűƉ Ņ Ŕ ŏ ƦƍſűƉ cities: ŦųëƆĥ Ŕ ł Ō Ŕ city of God=Antioch, ťƣĪŴƟ Ŕ ł ŌŔ Ŕ ł Ō Ŕ the holy city=Jerusalem, ťƊÿƇƣ city of peace=Baghdad! Analysis Sentence 2

Ņ ł ł ł is ĭ ‘and’, and Ʀƍƣ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ŕ ł ‘year’ which is the short (construct) form of ŦƦƍƣ ô . The year ŻƄƟŁ is Ł + ľ + Ĵ + İ = 400 + 100 + 20 + 9 = 529. ñ Ņ ‘in it, in Amid’ is used for stress. Recall that city The double usage of ħ ‘in’ in űƀƉŤŨ Ŕ Ō Ņ ųŨ names are all feminine giving rise to the feminine usage of the suffix ųñ ‘it/her’. Sentence 3

ł ŴƊƀƟĥĪ ô Ō ł ‘which they aroused’ is Ī ‘which’, and ŴƊƀƟĥ ô Ō ‘they aroused’. Sentence 7

ň Ō ł Ņ Ō ł ň ĬƻĪĭŁ is ŦƻĪĭŁ ‘faith’, and Ĭš ‘his’. Ŕ Ŕ

102

Readings

Sentence 9

ň ň Ņ ň ň ĬƦÿƇƉ is ŦƦÿƇƉ ‘word’, and Ĭš ‘his’. Ŕ Ŕ ň ł is Ī ‘of’, ťƍŨĮ Ņ ł ‘time’, and ųšň ‘his’. ųƍŨĮĪ

Exercise 6.6 ň ň , ƈƖƘĥ ň ł , or ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł , ƈƖƘŁĥ ł ł ň: 1. Classify the following verbs as ƈƖƘ ł ł ł ň ň Ŕň ł a. ħǁ b. ħǁŁŁĥ c. ƋƣĿŁĥ d. ƋƣĿ Ŕ ł ň Ōň ł ň Ō ł f. įƢƏĥ g. ƢƉłĥ h. űƇſŁĥ e. ŴƊƀƟĥ Ŕ Ŕ ł ň ô ň ł ň ň ň ň ł ł i. ƦŨǁ j. ƎƍŨǁĥ k. ŴŨǁŁĥ l. ƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ô 2. Give the tense, gender, number, and person for each of the verbs in 1. Ō 3. Write the following phrases ƻŤſĿŴƏ Ŕ Ņ ŏ: a. The first man. b. Ten elephants. c. The third hand. d. The seventh day. e. Four deacons. f. The fourth deaconess. 4. Translate into Syriac using the construct state for the possessive: a. The king’s mouth. b. The door’s key. c. Church law. d. The king’s son.

6.7 The Proverbs of Ahiqar New Words Ahiqar others as, as if taught people wife of pour my son after after you lest glory remember righteous friend rods wise man

ł Ōł ƢƠƀŶĥ ňŅ ô ljǔŶĥ ł ƅſĥ Ŕł ň ƚƆĥ ŅŅ òťƤƌĥ ł ôł ŁƦƌ Ŕ ô ĥł ŏ ĪŴƣĥ IJƢŨ ôł ň ĿƦŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ĴĿŔƦŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł ťƊëƆĪĪ ŧĿŅĪĬŔň ň Ņ ƻĭĬ ł Īųƕ ň ò Ō Įł ťƠſĪ ŅŧƢũŶł Ō ŏ ƎſǔŹŴŶ Ņ Ō ł ťƊƀƄŶ

Ņ

wine ŧƢƊŶł ł Ņ taste ťƊƖŹ ňò Ō ťƘŤƃ stones Ņ ł dog ťũÿƿ Ņ ň heart ťũëƆ Ņ ł ťƊƐũƉ perfumed Ō strike (imperative) ƁŷƉ Ō strike him IJĬŴƀŷƉ ô ò ł ň ƁÿƇƉ my words ň Ņ his lord ĬƢƉ Ņ ň oil ťŷƤƉ ŏ ŏ ķĭĿŴŬƌ they shall commit adultery Nadan ķűƌŅŅ ň ň ťŷƊƌ he shall strike ł ň he/we shall anoint ŸƤƊƌ ň he shall anoint ƅŷƤƊƌ ŔŅ

you Ōò Ō ł many ƎſŤƀŬƏ Ņ ł fool ƨƄƏ ň Ŕ òŅ ł wicked ƧŴƕ ň ł tombs ŧǔũƟ ł ơũƣ he left Ņ beauty ŧƢƘŴƣŏ ł listen (imperative) ƗƊƣ łŌ ĵĮĥŁ you shall go ŏ you shall commit ĿŴūŁ adultery łň Ĩ ĿŁ you shall desire ň Ō ñ ūĿŁ you shall desire her ųƀ ł my sense, my mind IJôƼƕĿŁ Ŕň Ō ň you shall drink ň Ō ŦƦƣŁ you shall drink it IJĬŴſƦƣŁ ô

Reading The following passage is taken from the Syriac version of the Story of Ahiqar.1 1

Dolabani, ťƊƀƄŶĭ

ŧƢƙƏ ĿŤƠƀìŶĥ (1962), numbers 1, 6, 10, 19, 35, 73.

The Proverbs of Ahiqar

Ņ ł Ņ ł ƁÿƇƉ ň Ņ ƻĭĬĭ ł ł ĜIJô Ƽ ł ò ł ň ƅſĥł ƁÿƇƊëƆ ò ł ň Īųƕ .ŦųƆĥ Ŕ ƕĿƦëƆ ŦŁĭ ķűƌŅ Ņ IJƢŨ ô ň ƗƊƣ

103 1

Listen my son Nadan and come to my sense (i.e., accept my way of thinking), and remember my words as the words of god.

ł Ņ ŏ ťƊƆĪĪł .ĴŔƢũŶł ŁƦƌŤŨ ŏ ƧŅ ĜIJƢŨ .ĴŔŁƦƌŤŨ ô ň Ŕ ô ł ĿŴūŁ Ŕ ô ł ljǔŶĥô ķĭĿŴŬƌ

2

Ņ ò ł Ō ò Ņ ł ťƤƌĥ ò Ņ Ņ ô Ƌƕł IJĬŴſƦƣŁ .ƧŴƕ Ƨĭ ĜťƠſĪĮĪ ŧǔũƟł ƈƕł ĴŔƢƊŶł ĪŴƣĥ ĜIJƢŨ ô ň ô

3

Ņ ŏ ł Ņ Ņ ň ųƀ ł ƧŅ ŦŁƦƌĥĪ ň ñ ūĿŁ ñ Ņ Ƨĭ ĵĮĥŁ ųƊƖŹ ŦŁƦƌĥĪ ĿƦŨ Ŕ ĜIJƢŨ Ŕ ô ł ŧƢƘŴƣ Ŕ ô ŧƢƘŴƣĪ ƈźƉň ĜƅŔũÿƇŨ ô Ņ ň Ņ ñ ųƉŴƘ ñ ƦƇƉĭ .ĬĿĪĬ Ŕ ł ň

4

My son, do not commit adultery with the wife of your friend, lest others commit adultery with your wife. ň ł My son, pour out your wine on the graves of the righteous, and do not drink it with ň Ņ Ō ł wicked people. My son, after the beauty of a woman do not go, and do not desire her in your heart, for the beauty of a woman is her taste, and the word of her mouth is her glory.

ò Ō ĴĿƦŨŅ ŦŁĥĭň ĬƢƉŅ ơũƣĪ ł ł ťũƿł ĜIJƢŨ .IJĬŴƀŷƉ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ô Ō ťƘŤƄŨ My son, the dog that leaves his owner and came after you, stones strike him. Ō ò Ō with Ņ ł ťŷƤƉň ƨƄƏ ł ƎſǔŹŴŶ ťƊƀƄŶł ƅŔŷƊƌň ĜIJƢŨ .ťƊƐũƉ Ŕ ł ƅŔŷƤƊƌň Ƨĭ ĜƎſŤƀŬƏ My son, let a wise (person) hit you many rods (i.e., many times with a rod), and not a fool anoint you (with) perfumed oil. ł

ň ň Ņ ł ŅŅ Ņ .ĬƦŶ Ŕ ƢŨ ķűƍëƆ ƢƠƀł ìŶĥ ƚƭĪł ťƍƙëƆŴſ ljĬ

5 6

7

This teaching which Ahiqar taught to Nadan, the son of his sister.

Revisiting the Prohibitive Recall from section 4.5 the prohibitive, when one prohibits an action. The prohibitive is Ņ ŏ ƧŅ ‘do not commit adultery’, ƧŅ formed by Ƨ ‘not’ followed by the future tense; e.g., ĿŴūŁ Ō ň ł Ō ƧŅ ‘do not go’, etc. IJĬŴſƦƣŁ ‘do not drink it’, ĵĮĥŁ ô Doing Without a Vowel ñ Ņ ‘her’ appears three times in Sentence 4. Going forward, we will start writing it The suffix Ĭš ł ñ ñ ŏ ‘her mouth’, ĬĿĪĬ ñ ň ‘her glory’. Another without the vowel; e.g., ųƊƖŹ ‘her taste’, ųƉŴƘ ň ñ ň as in ųƀūĿŁ ñ ň ‘desire her’ (see analysis of sentence 4 below). version of the suffix is ųſš ň Recall that the masculine form of the suffix is Ĭš ‘his’, but without a dot on top of the Ĭ. Hence, the dot can be your guide to distinguish between her and his. For instance, ųƉŴƘŏ is ň ŏ ‘his mouth’, while ųƉŴƘ ñ ŏ is ųƉŴƘ ñ Ņ ŏ ‘her mouth’. ųƉŴƘ From now on, we will no longer indicate these endings in the Analysis sections nor will we vocalize them. Analysis Sentence 1

ł Ņ Ō ł IJôƼƕĿƦëƆ is Ɔ ‘to’, ŦƼƕĿŁ ‘sense’, and the silent possessive suffix IJô ‘my’. Ŕ Ō Ŕ Ņ ň IJƢŨ ô is ŧƢŨ ‘son’, and IJô ‘my’. Note the changes that take place in the word

suffix is attached.

when the

104

Readings

ł ł is ĭ ‘and’, and ƻĭĬ ł which is the singular 2nd person masculine of the verb to be, ƻĭĬĭ ň Ņ ‘remembers’ gives an imperative-like verb Ņ . The combination with the present tense Īųƕ ŦĭĬ ň Ņ ƻĭĬ ł ‘remember’. Īųƕ ň ňò ò ł ň is Ɔ the object marker, ƨƉ ò ł ‘my’ which is ƁÿƇƊëƆ ‘words’, and the possessive suffix IJš ò ł ň ‘my words’ is the same but without the prefix. used with plural nouns. ƁÿƇƉ Sentence 2

Ņ ł ł ł ł ł ĴƢũŶ Ŕ Ņ ł ŁƦƌĥ Ŕ ô ‘woman, wife’ Ŕ ô ‘wife of your friend’: ŁƦƌĥ Ŕ ô is the short (construct) form of ŦŁƦƌĥ (note the silent ô ƌ ). The usage of the construct form gives the possessive notion. Ņ ł literally ‘that lest’, but more idiomatically the whole thing is translated ‘lest’. It is ťƊëƆĪĪ Ņ ł ‘lest’. the relative pronoun Ī ‘that’ followed by ťƊëƆĪ ŏ ŏ is in the future tense, plural 3rd person masculine form. ķĭĿŴŬƌ Ņ Ņ ł Ņ ĴŔŁƦ Ŕ ‘your’. Ŕ ô ƌ ŤŨł is Ũ ‘in/with’, ŦŁƦƌĥ Ŕ ô ‘wife’, and Ĵš Sentence 3

Ō ň IJĬŴſƦƣŁ ô

ň ň

is ŦƦƣŁ ‘you shall drink’, verb in the future tense singular 2nd person masculine ň ň Ō ‘him/it’. You may have expected to see ĬƦƣŁ form, and the suffix IJĬŴſš , but this verb ends ô in ĥ and takes different object suffixes from a regular verb (see Table 12 in the Appendix if you want to learn more about this).

Sentence 4

Ō ň is Ĩ Ŀł ňŁ ‘you shall lust’, future tense verb in the singular 2nd masculine form, and the ñ ūĿŁ ųƀ ň ñ Ņ , but this verb is called a feminine possessive suffix Ĭñ. You may have expected to see ųūĿŁ

‘doubled’ verb (see Table 10 in the Appendix if you are interested), and as such it takes the ñ šŌ. suffix ųſ Ņ Ņ ň ‘heart’, and Ĵš ƅũÿƇŨ Ŕ ‘your’. Ŕ Ņ ň is the prefix Ũ ‘in’, ťũëƆ Ņ ň ñ Ņ ŏ ƦƇƉ ųƉŴƘ Ŕ ł ň ‘the word of her mouth’: ƦƇƉ Ŕ ł ň is the short (construct) form of ŦƦÿƇƉ Ŕ ŏ ŏ Ņ Ņ ñ ñ Ņ ‘word’. The use of the construct gives the possessive sense. ųƉŴƘ is ťƉŴƘ ‘mouth’, and Ĭš ‘her’. Sentence 5

Ō ‘him’. This verb tool ends in ť and has a different suffix. Ņ , and IJĬŴſš IJĬŴƀŷƉ ô Ō ‘hit him’ is ťŷƉ ô Sentence 6

Ōò Ō ł ƎſŤƀŬƏ ƎſǔŹŴŶ ‘many rods’ refers to one physical rod being used many times to hit. ň is Ɔ ‘for’, ťŷƤƉ Ņ Ņ ň ‘oil, anointment’, and ĴšŅ ‘your’. ƅŷƤƊëƆ Sentence 7

ň ň ł ‘taught’. ƚƭĪł is the relative pronoun Ī ‘which’, and ƚƆĥ

The Proverbs of Ahiqar

105

Summary of Assumed Knowledge From now on, I shall assume that you are able to recognize the following prefixes and suffixes which we will indicate without vowels: Prefixes

• • • •

Ũ ‘in’. Ī ‘of’ (we will indicate it when it is used as a relative pronoun). ĭ ‘and’. Ɔ ‘to’ (we will indicate it when it is used as an object marker).

Suffixes

• • • • •

Ņ Ĵš Ŕ ‘your’. Ĭšň ‘his’ ñ Ņ and ųſš ñ ň ‘her’. Ĭš ň Ņ ťšň, ending of plural masculines such as ťŨò ǁ Ŕ ‘books’. Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ òŏ ŦŁš ‘virgins’. Ŕ Ŕ , ending of plural feminines such as ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ

About the Reading The Story of Ahiqar,1 also known as the Words of Ahiqar, first appears in an Aramaic papyrus from 500 B.C. The narrative of the initial part of the story is expanded greatly by the presence of a large number of wise sayings and proverbs that Ahiqar is portrayed as speaking to his nephew. It is suspected by most scholars that these sayings and proverbs were originally a separate document, as they do not mention Ahiqar. Some of the sayings are similar to parts of the Biblical Book of Proverbs, others to the apocryphal Ecclesiasticus, and others still to Babylonian and Persian proverbs. The collection of sayings is in essence a selection from those common in the Middle East at the time, noticeably preferring those in favor of corporal punishment. Ahiqar’s name is mentioned in the Book of Tobit, and the legend’s tradition continued in Syriac. In the story, Ahiqar was chancellor to the Assyrian kings Sennacherib and Esarhaddon. Having no child of his own, he adopted his nephew Nadan, and raised him to be his successor. Nadan ungratefully plotted to have his elderly uncle murdered, and persuades Esarhaddon that Ahiqar has committed treason. Esarhaddon orders Ahiqar be executed in response, and so Ahiqar is arrested and imprisoned to await punishment. However, Ahiqar reminds the executioner that the executioner had been saved by Ahiqar from a similar fate under Sennacherib, and so the executioner kills one of his (innocent) eunuchs instead, and pretends to Esarhaddon that it is the body of Ahiqar. Exercise 6.7 1. List the following words with the possessive suffixes in section 5.1: Ņ ł ł Ņ Ņ Ņ ň ‘oil’ a. ŧƢƊŶł ‘wine’ b. ťŷƤƉ c. ŦŁƦƌĥ d. ĿƦŨ Ŕ ‘after’ Ŕ ô ‘woman’ 1

Adapted from Wikipedia on http://www.wikipedia.org.

106

Readings

ł Ņ ł Note. The š of ĿƦŨ Ŕ is deleted when the possessive suffix begins with a vowel. 2. Translate the following into Syriac: a. John, do not write a letter. b. Sara, do not write a Phanqitho. c. Boys, do not draw on the board. d. Girls, do not sing in the house. e. Boys and girls, do not sing today.

6.8 Taw Mim Simkath New Words feather, wing ground (pl.) I drank ignorant within wing wings mind palm (fem.) she made wise, gave wisdom

Ņ ň ł Ņ ŧƢŨĥ ŦƦƕǓĥ ŔŌ Ņ ň ƻƦƣĥ Ŕ Ō ƢſƢŨ Ŵūł Ņ ň ťƙū Ō ò ň Ǝƀƙū Ņ ł ljĭĬ Ņ ŏ ťƍƘŴŶ ŒƦƊ Ŕł Ŕ ł ƄŶ

sweet (sing., m.) sweet (pl., m.) good young youthfulness, youth she fed association crumbs virtues he is jumping

Ņ ł Ņ ł ťƀÿƇŶ òťƀÿƇŶ Ņ Ņ ŦƦũŹ Ŕ ň ƨŹ Ņ ŏ ł ŦŁŴƀÿǑ Ŕ ł ł ŒƦƊƖŹ ŅŔ ŏ ŦƦƣŴƍƃ Ņ ň Ɔ Ņ ťźƠ Ņ ł ŦŁǓƼƉ Ŕ łł ĿŴƤƉ

plucked blind she held fast bird she adorned person clipped (adj.) adolescence tutor

Ō ƚſƦƌ ň ťƊƏ ŒŔ ł ň ǂƊƏ Ņ ł Ņ ŦƦŶƢƘ Ŕł ŒŁƦŨĽ Ŕ ł Ņ ŏ ťƉŴƍƟ Ō Ņ ŏƞſƞƟł ŦŁĭƢũƣ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ŦĥĿŁ

Reading During the aftermath of the massacres that befell the Syriac-speaking Christians of Ottoman Turkey in 1895, Syriac-speaking immigrants in the United States established an Association named by the acronym .ĸ.Ķ.Ł. The Association established an orphanage that produced a number of Syriac educators. One of them was Fawlos Gabriel (1912-1971) who composed this poem in recognition of .ĸ.Ķ.Ł.1

Ō Ō ųſǔŨĥĪ ñ ň ň ƎƀƙſƦƌ ò ň ƞſƞƟĭł Ǝƀƙū Ņ ł ò ťźƠò ëƆň ťƀÿƇŶ Ō ň ò Ņ ł ƻƦƣĥ ťƀƉ Ŕ

I was a bird, whose feathers (were) plucked. And I was jumping, and my wings clipped On the ground. In her (i.e., the Association’s) hands it fed sweet crumbs.

1

Gabriel Asad, ŦŁűŶ

ƎƇſĪ ƁƠƀƏŴƉ ƎƉ (1953), pp. 34-37.

Ņ ƻĭĬ Ŕ Ō ô ŦƦŶƢƘ Ŕ ł łł ł Ŕ ô ĿŴƤƉĭ Ņ Ņ ł ł ƻĭĬ ŦƦƕǓĥ Ŕ ƈƕ Œ Ŕ ł ł ųſűſŤŨ ñ ň Ŕò Ō ƦƊƖŹ ň ñŅ ųƍƘŴŶ Ŵūł ƎƉĭ ŏ ŦƦƣŴƍƃ ŦƦũŹĪ Ŕ

1

Taw Mim Simkath

107

And from within her palms I drank water Of the good Association

ň Ō ł ƻĭĬ ň ł Ņ ł ťƊƏĭ ljĭĬ ƢſƢŨĭ Ŕ ô ƨŹ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƍƙƇƉł Ļĥ ŦĥĿŁ ƁƆŌ ŁĭĬ ŔŅ ł Œ Ŕ ň IJŁĭƢũƣĭ ł ô ł ǂƊƏ Ņ ŏ ƈƄŨ ŏ ł ŒƦƊƄŶ ŏ ł Ǝƀìò ƍƙëƆŴſ Ŕ ł IJô ŁŴƀÿƇźëƆ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł ŒŁƦŨĽ ŦŁǓƼƊŨĭ ô ŏ Ŕ ł ł Ŕ ł ƁƉŴƍƠƆ ł ň .Ķ .Ł ǂƊƏ Ŕ

2

I was young and ignorant, and (with a) blind mind. She became for me a tutor, also a teacher. And she held fast my adolescence. With all learning, she made wise my youth. And with virtues, she adorned my person. Taw Mim Simkath

Ō

Plurals Ending in Ǝſš

Ņ

ň

ň Ņ

We have covered so far the masculine plurals that end in ťš; e.g., ťŨŅǁ Ŕ ‘book’, ťŨò ǁ Ŕ ‘books’. Ņ Ō Ō ò There is another form of plurals ending in Ǝſš; e.g., ƎƀŨǁ Ŕ ‘books’. The two-dot Syomé is still Ņ Ō used. Like the short (absolute) form ħǁ Ŕ ‘book’, the plurals ending in Ǝſš are also called absolute forms. ò Ō ň ‘wings’ (as In the above text, there are two nouns making use of this plural type: Ǝƀƙū ňò ň ňò Ņ ŏ ò Ō Ņ ŏ ‘learnings’ (as opposed to ťƍƙëƆŴſ opposed to ťƙū ), and ƎƀƍƙëƆŴſ ). Ō Ō Plural adjectives can have the same ending: ƎƀƙſƦƌ ‘plucked’ but without Syomé.

ł

Ņ ò Plurals like ťƀÿƇŶ

ň

Ņ ł

ò . Masculine nouns that ò ł ? It is ťƀÿƇŶ Ņ ł ‘sweet’ is not ťƀÿƇŶ Did you notice that the plural of ťƀÿƇŶ Ņ ò ł ‘pens’; ťƀƐŶ Ņ ł ‘epithet for bishop’, end in ťƀŅ have a plural in in this pattern; e.g. ťƀìŅ ƍƟł ‘pen’, ťƀƍƟ Ņò ł ťƀƐŶ ‘bishops’.

Ņ

The Verb ŦĭĬ

Ņ corresponds to the English verb to be (i.e., present am, is, are, or past was, were), The verb ŦĭĬ to become. We have already came across it before: ƻĭ Ŕ Ō Ĭô ‘I was’ in Stanza 1 above, and ƻĭłĬ ‘you became’ in Sentence 1 of Section 6.7 (although there it got lost in the translation as saying become remember is not idiomatic). You would have noticed that sometimes there is a line under the Ĭô indicating that it is silent, and sometimes there is no line. With the line it usually corresponds to the verb to be, and without the line it means to become. The verb is conjugated in the following table.

108

Readings Table 15. Conjugation of the verb ŦĭĬ.

Singular

3

Ņ ŦĭĬ ŁĭĬ ŔŅ ł ƻĭĬ IJƻĭĬ ô ł ƻĭĬ Ŕ Ō ł ĭĭĬ ò IJĭĬ ŏ ł ķĭƻĭĬ ň ł ƎſƻĭĬ ł ƎſĭĬ

M F

2

M F

1

Plural

3

M F

2

M F

1

He became She became You became You became I became They became They became You became You became We became

Ņô ŦĭĬ ŁĭĬ ŔŅ ô łô ƻĭĬ IJƻĭĬ ô łô ƻĭĬ Ŕ Ōô łô ĭĭĬ ò IJĭĬ ô ŏ ł ķĭƻĭĬô ň ł ƎſƻĭĬ ô łô ƎſĭĬ

He was She was You were You were I was They were They were You were You were We were

Ņ ł ‘and he became man’. In Stanza 5 Ņ Ņ ô ƢŨł ŦĭĬĭ For example, we have in the Nicene Creed ťƤƌĥ Ņ Ņ ł ťƉűƕ Ņ ł ‘until today I was yours’. Ō ô ƅƇſĪŌ ƎƉŴƀëƆ of section 6.4, we had ƻĭĬ

Œ

The Diacritic Point in Ł You may have noticed that in past tense verbs, the singular 1st person and the singular 3rd feminine are homographs. For example, ƦŔŨǁ Ŕ couldł be ƦŔŨňǁ Ŕ ň ‘I wrote’, or ƦŔŨłǁ Ŕ ň ‘she ł ň ‘I fed’, or ƦŔƊƖŹ ł ‘she fed’. The former has the ending wrote’; similarly, ƦŔƊƖŹ could be ƦŔƊƖŹ ň ŁŔš, while the latter has the ending ŁŔšł. In the absence of vowels, one can use a diacritic point on the top-left of the ŁŔ to Œ Ŕ Ũǁ indicate the singular 3rd feminine form. Hence, Ʀ Ŕ , by virtue of the dot, is ƦŔŨłǁ Ŕ ň , and ł ł . Do not confuse this dot which appears on the left of ŒŁ with the Qushoyo Œ Ŕ ƊƖŹ is ƦŔƊƖŹ Ʀ ‘hard’ dot which appears on the right of Łœ. Analysis Sentence 1

ñ ň ň ųſǔŨĥĪ

is the relative pronoun Ī ‘whose’, plural nouns. ñ ň ò Ō has a similar formation. ųſűſŤŨ

ň ň ŧǔŨĥ

‘feathers’, and

ñ ň ųſš

‘her’ which is used with

Sentence 2

Ņ ŏ ł ‘adolescence’, and the silent suffix IJô ‘my’. IJôŁĭƢũƣĭ Ŕ ŏ ł is ĭ ‘and’, ŦŁŔ ĭƢũƣ Ņ ŏ ł ł ŏ IJôŁŔŴƀÿƇźëƆ is the object marker Ɔ, ŦŁŔ ŴƀÿǑ ‘youth’, and the suffix IJô. ƁƉŴƍƠƆ ô ŏ ł

has a

similar formation. We will no longer indicate the silent suffix IJô ‘my’ in later sections. ł ň is the letter name for ĸ of ĸ.Ķ.Ł, the Associations acronym, but is also a verb ǂƊƏ meaning ‘she (the Association?) held fast’. The fact that the letter is spelled out may indicate a play on words by the author.

From the Eucharistic Liturgy

109

About the Reading On October 8, 1899, a group of young men who fled Ottoman Diyarbakir (the historic city of Amid we read about) after the horrific massacres of 1895, met in Sterling, New Jersey. They organized a club to help their fellow Syriac Christians who remained in Amid. They started with an initiation fee of one dollar and weekly dues of five cents. The year 1915 brought further massacres and killings of Christians in Ottoman Turkey, Ņ a year called now in Syriac the year of ťƙƀƏł ‘sword’ (two excellent accounts of these massacres are David Gaunt’s Massacres, Resistance, Protectors: Muslim-Christian Relations in Eastern Anatolia During World War I (2006), and Sebastien de Courtois’ The Forgotten Genocide: Eastern Christians, The Last Arameans (2004), both available from www.gorgiaspress.com). Following the massacres, many were displaced. The New Jersey group began to think about establishing an orphanage for the survivors. Their club became known as ĸ.Ķ.Ł, an acronym not for a Syriac name but an Arabic one taraqqĪ al-madćris al-suryćniyyah ‘progress of Syriac schools’, with the English name The Assyrian National School Association of America. It is now the oldest organization of this immigrant community that is still functioning, sometimes known in English as T.M.S. The Association managed to establish an orphanage in Adana where many survivors received education. A few graduates of this school became luminaries of 20th century Syriac literature. One such luminary was Fawlos Gabriel. Born in Kharput in 1912, he was sent to the orphanage after the massacres of 1915. During WWI, the orphanage moved to Beirut. Later he joined the American College, and after his graduation he became the principal of the orphanage. He co-authored with Costaz a number of textbooks for teaching Syriac at the Lebanese University. Exercise 6.8 ñ ň ò Ō made of? What is ƁƉŴƍƠƆ 1. What is ųſűſŤŨ ô ŏ ł made of? ň 2. Give the plural of the following nouns using ťš and ƎſŌ : ň Ņ ň Ņ Ņ ŏ Ņ ŏ a. ŧƢŨĥ b. ťƙū c. ťƍƘŴŶ d. ťƉŴƍƟ 3. Translate into Syriac without using vowel marks on verbs: a. I wrote a book. b. She sang in the church. c. She wrote a letter. d. I sang with him.

6.9 From the Eucharistic Liturgy New Words divine (m.) divine (f.)

Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ťſųëƆĥ Ņ Ņ Ņ ł ŦƻųëƆĥ

person grant

ƥƌĥŅôł Ņ ŦŴƣĥ

was given bless IJƢƉ ô Ņ

Ōň ň Łĥ ħųſ Ŕ ňĴƢŨ ň Ņ ł Ŕ = IJƢƊ Ŕ ł ô ƃƢŨ

110 my lord together love our lives priest

Readings

ň ŔŅŔ ò ŧ ĪűŶ Ņ ŏ ťŨŴŶ òłł ƎƀƀŶ Ņ Ņ ljųƃ

all of you merciful deacon kiss let us bow

ķŴƄŏŔÿƿŏ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍƊŶƢƉ ŅŅ ł ťƍƤƊƤƉ Ņ ł ŏ ŦƦƠƣŴƌ Ŕ ň ł ƎƃƢƌ

let us give people holy (f.) neighbor peace

ň ĵƦƌň Ņł Ņ ťƊƕ Ō ł ŦƦƤſűƟ Ņ Ō ł ťũſƢƟ Ņ Ņ ťƊÿƇƣ

Reading The following passage is taken from the Eucharistic Liturgy of the Syriac Orthodox Church at the time of the giving of the Kiss of Peace. Deacon: Bless my lord.

Ņ ł .IJƢƊ Ŕ ň ł :ťƍƤƊƤƉ ô Ņ ƃƢŨ

1

Ņ :ljųƃŅ .ķŴƄǀëƆ Ŕ ŏ ťƊƇƣ

2

Priest: Peace unto you all.

ł :ťƊƕł .ƅƇſĪ Ŕ ťŶĭĿ Ƌƕĭ People: And with your spirit. ň ň ł ƥƌĥŅ ô ƈƃŏ ĜŧĪŔűŷëƆ Ņ Ņ ł ŦƦƤſűƟł ŦƦƠƣŴƍŨ ł ŏ ĜŦƻųƭĭ Ņ Ŕ ò ł ťƊƇƣ ĵƦƌ ųŨŴŷŨ Ŕ ł ŏ ĜųũſƢƠëƆ Ņ :ťƍƤƊƤƉ ł ł ł Ėķųƭĭ ķƢƉĪŅ Deacon: (Let) us give peace to each other, each person to his neighbor, with a holy and divine kiss, in the love of our Lord and our God. ł ł

Ņ ťſƢƉŅ ƎƆł ŦŴƣĥ ò ł ķĭųƿŏ ljĬŅ ťƊƇƤƆł ŦųƆĥ Ņ :ťƊƕł ò ł ł ŦƦƉŴſ ĖƎƀƀŶĪ People: Grant to us Lord God this peace all (of of our lives. Ō ň them) Ņ ofł the days ł Ō Ņ ł ň ł ň Ņ ł ł Ņ .ƎƃƢƌ ƎƀƤſǓ ťƍƊŶƢƉ ťſƢƉ ĶűƟ Ŕ ĜħųſŁĥĪ Ŕ ťſųƭĭ ťƤſűƟ ljĬ ťƊƇƣ ĿƦŨŅ ƎƉň :ƋƤƉ

3 4

5 6

Deacon: After this holy and divine peace which was given, in front of the merciful Lord (let us) bow our heads. People: In front of you, our Lord and our God.

ł Ņ ƅƀƉł űƟ ł Ņ ł ķƢƉ Ņ Ŕ :ťƊƕ .ķųƭĭ

7

Space Space between words appears first in Aramaic, at least as early as the 5th century BC, but does not become the norm, even in Greek in the West, until the early Christian period. Syriac documents, the earliest of which is from December 240, always had space between Ņ Ŕ ň ł above, from words. Sometimes, however, one finds words without a space such as IJƢƊƃƢŨ ô ł ł ł Ŕ ň for ƎƀƇƕ ł ƋŶĿŁĥ ł ł Ŕ ň ‘have mercy upon us’, and in IJƢƉ Ŕ ň ł . One sometimes finds ƎƀƇƖƊŶĿŁĥ ô Ņ ĴƢŨ ł Ņ ‘forever and ever’, and even Ō Ņ ł Ņ for ƎƀƊÿƇƕ Ō Ņ ƋƇƖëƆ manuscripts phrases like ƎƀƊÿƇƖƊƇƖëƆ ł Ņ for ťŷìŅ ƀƤƉ ł Ņ ‘our Lord Jesus Christ’. ŏ ň ƌƢƉ Ō Ō ĺŴƤſŏ ň ķƢƉ ťŷìŅ ƀƤƊƕŴƤƀì Using the Future as Instruction ňœň In the liturgical text above, you may have noticed that the future tense verbs ĵƦƌ ‘we shall ň ł give’ (line 4) and ƎƃƢƌ ‘we shall bow’ (4) are used in the form of instruction; i.e. ‘let us give’, ŏ ‘let us bow’. You can say, for example, ĵŴƃŤƌň ‘let us eat’.

The Lord’s Prayer from the Peshitta Version

111

Analysis Sentence 1

IJƢƊ Ŕ ň ł ‘bless’, and Ŕ ň ł ‘bless my lord’ is made of two words joined together: the imperative ĴƢŨ ô Ņ ƃƢŨ Ņ Ņ ‘lord’ and IJô ‘my’). Note that the ťſŅ of ťſƢƉ Ņ Ņ is deleted when the IJƢƉ ô Ņ ‘my lord’ (itself from ťſƢƉ suffix IJô is added. The word occurs so frequently in the liturgy asking the priest to bless, that it has become a common greeting for priests. When you meet a Syriac priest, you do not say good Ņ Ņ ł morning, good evening, or good day. You simply say IJƢƊ Ŕ ň ł ŦųëƆĥ Ŕ ň ł . The priest then replies ĴƢũƌ ô Ņ ƃƢŨ ‘God will bless’. Sentence 2

ŏ Ŕ ŏ ‘to you all’ is Ɔ ‘to’, ƈƃŏ ‘all’, ķŴƄŏ ‘you’ (pl.). ķŴƄÿǀëƆ

Sentence 4

ň ĵƦƌň is the future tense verb in the plural 1st person. ł Ņ is the possessive pronoun Ī ‘of’, ťſƢƉ Ņ Ņ , and ķšł ‘our’. The same changes that occur in ķƢƉĪ ł Ņ when the suffix is added. IJƢƉ ô Ņ occur in ķƢƉ Ņł ł Ņ Ņ ł ‘God’, and ķšł ‘our’. ķųƭĭ is ĭ ‘and’, ŦųëƆĥ ł We will no longer indicate the suffix ķš ‘our’ in future readings. Sentence 6

Ņ Ņ ł ‘deacon’. ƋƤƉ is the abbreviation for ťƍƤƊƤƉ Ō Ōň ň Łĥ ň is the possessive Ī ‘which’, and ħųſ ħųňſŁĥĪ Ŕ Ŕ ‘was given’. The verb is passive by virtue ň of the ŁĥŔ prefix to the verb. Exercise 6.9 ŏ Ŕ ŏ ťƊÿƇƣ Ņ Ņ to 1. Using the possessive suffixes from section 5.1, change the phrase ķŴƄÿǀëƆ read: a. Peace be unto us. b. Peace be unto them. c. Peace be unto them (fem.). d. Peace be unto you (pl. fem.). Ņ ł ŏ with its masculine 2. Rewrite sentence 4 from the reading replacing feminine ŦƦƠƣŴƌ Ŕ Ņ ŏ counterpart ťƠƣŴƌ.

6.10 The Lord’s Prayer from the Peshitta Version New Words your (pl.) father our Father as evil, evil one children of man, people

ŏŔ ŏ ł ķŴƃŴŨĥ ł ķŴŨĥŏł Ņł ťƍƄſĥ Ņ Ō ťƤƀŨ Ņò ł ŅťƤƍƀƍŨ

Ō Ņ

then (adverb of time) ƈƀƃĬ Ŕ ň òł ťŨŴŶ debts ň Ņ ò sins, trespasses ŦųźŶ ŅŅł debtor ťũƀŶ Ņ ƨìƀŶł power

bread Ō ƕŅ foreverandeverƎƀƊÿƇ temptation he shall forgive our need

Ņ ł ťƊŷƆ ł Ņ ƋƇƖëƆ Ņ ŏ ň ljŴƀƐƌ ŏ ň ľŴũƤƌ Ņ ŏ łƎƍƠƌŴƏ

112

Readings

Ņ ò ł ŦŁŴŔ Ņ ÿǀƏ offenses Ŕ Ņł deliver ŦƞƘ ŅŅ ň ťƍƀŨĽ will (n.) ł pray (imperative, pl.) ŴƆĽł

ł he forgave ơũƣ ł we forgave ƎƠũƣ ň Ņ ơũƣ he forgives ŏ forgive (imperative)ľŴũƣ

Ņ ł heaven ł ťƀƊƣ ł ł ň ł make us enter ƎƆ ƈƕŁ=ƎƇƕŁ Ņ ŏ ň ŦƦŶŴũƣŁ glory ŏ ň you shall forgive ķŴƠũƣŁ

Reading The following passage is taken from the Peshitta version of Matthew, Chapter 6, verses 9-15.

ł ł ƈƀƃĬ Ō Ŕ Ņ ťƍƃł Ŕ ĬŅ ł ł ķŴŨĥł :ķĭƦƌĥô ł ŴƆĽ ł ł Ʀƌ .ƅŔƊƣ ŀűƟ Ŕ ň ĜťƀƊƤŨĪ In this manner then you pray: Our Father who are let your name be holy. ň Ō Ņ inł Heaven, ł ł ƅƍƀŨ ň ň ĜĴŔŁŴƄƇƉ ł ŦŁĥŁ ł ťƍƄſĥ .ťƕĿŤŨł Ļĥ ťƀƊƤŨĪ Ŕ Ņ Ľň Ŧĭųƌ Ŕ Ŕ

9 10

Let your kingdom come; let your will be (done) as in heaven also on earth.

Ņ ŏ ťƊŷƆł ƎƆ ħĬł Ņ łſ ƎƍƠƌŴƏĪ .ťƍƉŴ Give us bread of our need today. ł Ņ Ŷĭ ł ƎƍŶ ò ł Ņ ł ƎƠũƣ ò ł ł ƎƆ ľŴũƣĭł ò ł ) ƎƀŨŴŶ ł ĻĥĪŅ ťƍƄſĥł Ĝ(Ǝſųź .ƎƀũƀŷëƆ And forgive us our as also we forgave our debtors. ň ň debts Ņ ł (and sins), ł Ņ ĜŦƦŶŴũƣŁĭ ň ƎƇƕŁł ƧĭŅ ł Ņ ł ƧŅ ĥ ĜljŴƀƐƍëƆ ƋƇƖëƆ ƨìƀŶĭ ŦŁŴƄƇƉ IJĬ Ŕ Ņ Ō ƈźƉ ĜťƤƀŨ ƎƉň ƪƘ Ŕ ô ƅƇſĪĪ Ō Ņ ĖƎƀƊÿƇƕ

11 12 13

And do not make us enter into temptation, but deliver us from evil, for yours is the kingdom, and the power, and the glory, forever and ever.

Ņ ł ŏ ň Ƣƀūň ķĥň Ņ ò ł ťƤƍƀƍũƆ Ņ ò ł ł ķŴƠũƣŁ .ťƀƊƤŨĪ ķŴƃŴŔŨĥ ķŴƄƆ Ļĥ ľŴũƤƌň ĜķĭĬŁŴÿǀƏ

If, therefore, you shall forgive people their offenses, your father who is in heaven shall also forgive you. ň Ņ

14

Ņ Ņ Ņ ò Əł ķŴƄƆ ơũƣ ň Ņ ķŴƃŴŨĥ ƨƘĥ ĖķŴƃŁŴÿǀ ĜťƤƍƀìò ƍũƆ ķŴƠũƣŁ Ƨ ƎſĪň ķĥ

15

If, however, you do not forgive people, neither your father forgives you your offenses.

ŏ

ŏ

The Suffixes ķŴƃŔ and ķĭĬ

ŏ

We have come across these plural suffixes before: ķŴƃŔ for the second person, and ķĭĬŏ for the third person. We will no longer indicate them or vocalize them in later sections.

łŅ ł

ò Adding ƎſųźŶĭ

ò

ł ł. There are two versions of the Lord’s Prayer in the Gospels: In Matthew, verse 12 uses ƎƀŨŴŶ Ņ ò ł . The liturgical practice combines both. The corresponding verse in Luke uses ƎſųźŶ Analysis Verse 9

ł ł is an imperative plural. ŴƆĽ Verse 13

ł ł is from ƎƆł ƈƕŁ ň ł : ƈƕŁ ň ł is the future tense verb, the Ɔ of ƎƆł is the object marker, and ƎƇƕŁ Ǝšł is the object suffix ‘us’. Ņ ł . Note the ligature Ʃ. (See section 6.16 for Ņ ł is from the contraction of ƎƆł ŦƞƘ Similarly ƪƘ ligatures.)

Aydin’s Introduction to Brock’s The Bible in the Syriac Tradition

113

Verse 14

Ņ Ņ ò ł ł ‘people’ (literally ‘children of man’) is ťƤƌĥ Ņ Ņ ô ƁƍũƆ ò ł ł but without a space (in which case ťƤƍƀƍũƆ òŅ ł ò ł is the construct form of ťƀƍŨ the silent ôĥ is removed). The Ɔ is the object marker, ƁƍŨ Ņ Ņô . ‘children’ and gives the notion of the possessive when used with the next noun ťƤƌĥ Verse 15

Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ƨƘĥ is Ļĥ ‘also’ and Ƨ ‘not’ (i.e., also not, or neither), but without a space. Exercise 6.10 ł in the past and future tenses. 1. Conjugate ơũƣ ňò Ņ Ņ ŏ ň. 2. Add the possessive suffixes introduced in section 5.1 to ŦųźŶ and ljŴƀƐƌ

6.11 Aydin’s Introduction to Brock’s The Bible in the

Syriac Tradition

New Words I gazed nation my sisters my brothers my hands as English I shall translate it I translated it became certain through are immersed studies composed enviable

ł ƦƠſĪĥ ŔŅ ň Ō ŏ ŦƦƉĭĥł IJôŁŴŶĥ Ŕ Ņ òł ł ò ƁŶĥ Ō IJűłŔòſĥł ƅſĥ Ŕ ŅťƀƤƀƇŬƌĥ Ņ Ō ň Ō ł IJĬŴſƢũƕĥ ô ň ł ŁƢũƕĥ ł Ŕ ł ĥň ŒŁĿĿƦƣ Ŕ űƀŨ Ŕł Ō ł Ō ƎƀƖƀƇŨ ňò Ņ ŏ ťƀūĭĬ Ō Ņ ƢƀƟĮ Ō ŦƦƊƀƐŶ

much are buried chief benefit heavy, rich heritage trouble deserves according tongue, language beneficial immediately honorable fully I present

Ņ ŪŹ Ņ Ō ķǔƀƊŹ Ņ ł ťƟƢŹ ljĿŅŅŁŴſ Ŕ ŏ ŅŧƢƀƠſŌ ł Ņ ŏ Ņ ŦŁĭŁƢſ Ŕ Ņ ŏň ŦŁĭƧ Ŕ ň Ņ ƋŷëƆ ŏ ŁŴƙëƆ Ŕ ŅŅ ň ťƍƤëƆ Ņ Ņ ł ljĿŁŴƉ Ņ ň ŧűŷƉ ŅŧƢƠƀƉ ł ŌŅ ł ƻŤƀÿƇƉ Ŕ ň ł Ņljĥô ħƢƠƉ

Ņ

Ņ

ł tradition ŦŁŴƍƊÿƇƤƉ Ŕ ŏ ň ł ƦƉ ťƍƃ titled, named Ŕ ň ŏ they shall become aware ķŴƇŬňƌ ŏ ňƌ ķĭƢƙŷ they shall dig ŏ they shall pick ķŴƙźƠƌň Ņ ł hope ŧƢũƏ ŅŅ literary work Ņ ťƊƀƏŌ treasure ŦƦƊƀƏ Ņ ň book ŧƢƙƏ Ņ ƨƊƕł hard labor òŔ ł the ancient ones ťƉňűƟ ŅŅ ŏ gift ťƍƀƉĭĿ ň love of Ŕ ł Ņ ƦƊŶĿ Ō glorious ŦƦŷìƀũƣ under ƼŶŁ Ŕ ň

Reading The following passage is taken from the preface of (Mor Polycarpus) Eugene Aydin’s translation of Brock’s The Bible in the Syriac Tradition (Gorgias Press, 2006).1 ŏ ťƤſűƟ ťŨǁ» ťňƍƃłƦƉĪ Ņ Ɖł ŁŴŔƙëƆ ň ƈƙƌł űŔƃł 1 Ņ IJűſłŔòĥŌ Ƽ «ŦƼŅſĿŴƏ ŦŁŴƍ Ŕ Ŕ ň ł ŧƢƀƠłſ ťƊƀƏ Ŕ ň ŶŁ Ŕ ƊÿƇƤ

Ņ ƊëƆ ň ƢƀƟĮĪł Ņ ķŤƀźƐũłƏň ťƟƢŹ ťƍƙÿƇ ł ťƀƤƀƇŬƌ Ņ ł ĴĭƢŨ ĥ ťƍƤŅÿƇŨ ĜŧƢƠƀƉ

When fell under my hands the rich literary-work which is titled The Holy Bible According to the Syriac Tradition which is composed in the English language (by) the chief Malphono the honorable Sebastian Brock,

1

Eugene Aydin, ŦƼìſĿŴƏ

ŦŁŴƍƊƇƤƉ ŁŴƙƆ ťƤſűƟ ťŨǁ (Gorgias Press, 2002).

114

Readings

ł ň Ņ Ɖł ŪŹĪŅ ƁƆ ŒŁĿĿłƦƣ Ō ň ł ķĿŁŴ ň Ņ ƁŬƏĭ ĥ ŧűŷƉĭ ťƍƤŅňÿLJ IJĬŴſ Ŕ ô Ƣũƕĥ Īł ƋŷëƆ Ņ Ņ Ō Ō ŦƼìſĿŴƏ ŦƦƉĭĥ .ŦƦƊƀƐŶ ĭŏ ŦƦŷìƀũƣ ŦƼìſĿŴƏ ŦŁűƕŌ

ł ŌŅ ł ųŨ ƦƠſĪĥ ƻ Ŕ ŤƀÿƇƉ Ŕ ň ł Īł ljĿŅŁŴŔƀëƆ ŏ ťƀŅſĿŴƏŏ ƁòƍŨ

I gazed at it fully, and immediately it became certain to me that it (will be) much beneficial and very much deserves that I translate it into the Syriac tongue (i.e., language) for the benefit of the children of the glorious Syriac Church and the happy/enviable Syriac nation. ň ł ł Ņ

2

ł Ņ ŏ ł ň ĥ ŦŁŤƀ ł ĭł ŧƢƀƠłſ ljĬ ťƊƀƐ Ņ Ņ Ɔł ŁŔƢũƕ ƁŶò ł Ƨ ťƍƀƉĭĿ ƅſŔĥ ųƆ ljĥŅô ħƢňƠƉ ŬŌƏł ŦŁĭƧĭ ƨƊƕł ĿƦŔ ŨŅ ťƍƃłŔĬĭ Ŕ Ņ ň ň ŏ Ņ ò ĭł ł ƢŨ ƎƀƖƀƇŨĪ ł ƎƀƆĬŅ IJôŁŔŴŶĥ Ņ Ĭĭ ťƤſűƟ ťŨǁ .ųƀūĭ Ŕ Īł ťƍƙëƆŴſ ƦŔƊŶ

3

ł Ņ Ō ŦŁĭŁƢ ł ťƉòűŔƟĪł ŦƦŷìƀũƣ Ŕ ŧƢũƏĭ Ŕ łł ł ťŨĿ Ņ ljĿŁŴſ Ŕ Ņſ ƈƕł ķŴƇŬňƌ ĬűƀŨĭ Ŕ ųƍƉň ķŴƙźƠňƌĪ ƁƆ ƻĥ ł ò ň ň ł Ō ò ł ł .ķĭųſǔƙƐŨ ķǔƀƊŹĪ ŦŁǔƀƠ Ŕ ſ ŦƦŔƊƀƐŨ ķĭƢƙŷƌĭ ķĭųſųŨŅĥ

4

And as such, after hard labor and much trouble I translated this rich work and I present it as a gift to my brothers and my sisters, those who are immersed in the love of the learning of the Holy Bible and its study.

And I have hope that they pick from it great benefit and through it they become aware of the glorious heritage of the ancient, their forefathers, and they dig in the rich treasures which are buried in the books (i.e., of the writings of the Fathers).

ł

ň ł

ň ł

Verb Types ƈƖƘ, ƈƖƘ, and ƈƖƘĥ

ň ł

ł and ƈƖƘĥ. There We have already discussed that verbs belong to various types such as ƈƖƘ ł ň is also the ƈƖƘ-type verb. Let us look at various verbs from the above passage and see if we can classify them ł ł according to their types. The first verb that occurs above is ƈƙƌ. Does it look like a ƈƖƘ ł ł ň ň verb, ƈƖƘ verb, or ƈƖƘĥ verb? Compare their letter positions and vowels. You will find ł ł . that ƈƙƌ matches ƈƖƘ ň Ō ł ‘I gazed’. What type of a verb do you think it is? Sentence 2 begins with the verb ƦƠſĪĥ Ŕ ł ň ł The ĥ at the beginning is a good indication that the verb is of the ƈƖƘĥ type even though the ň ł vowels may not match exactly. Another verb of this type is ŁƢũƕĥ ‘I translated’ in Sentence 3. ň ł ň ň ł ł in Sentence 3. Its vowels match There is one verb of type ƈƖƘ. It is ħƢƟł in ħƢƠƉĭ ł ň . ƈƖƘ How important is it to recognize the various verb types? Well, that depends on what you really want to do with Syriac. If all that you aim at is understanding simple texts, you need not worry about the verb typology. If you were to ask the average Syriac speaker, she would not even know of the existence of this typology (the same way the average English speaker hardly knows the details of English grammar). Yet, she understands and speaks the language. However, if you plan to become a serious student of Syriac, knowing the verb typology will help you a lot in understanding the numerous verbal forms of the language. The Root ň ł ‘I translated’ and IJĬŴſƢũƕĥ Ō ł ‘I shall translate it’? They both Do you see a similarity in ŁƢũƕĥ Ŕ ô ł ł ň ł begin with Ƣũƕĥ. The initial ĥ may indicate to you that this is an ƈƖƘĥ type verb. In fact, it is. ł form is Ƣũƕ ł . The root of the verb are the three letters Ƣũƕ. The basic ƈƖƘ

Aydin’s Introduction to Brock’s The Bible in the Syriac Tradition

ŏ

115

ŏ

Let us find the roots of ķĭƢƙŷƌň and ķŴƙźƠƌň . These are in the future tense, and are ŏ plurals. As such, they begin with ňƌ and end in ķĭš (review Table 8 in section 4.4). If you remove them, you end up with the roots ƢƙŶ and ƚźƟ. ŏ Now let us find the root of ķŴƇŬƌň . It too is a future plural form. Removing the prefix ňƌ ŏ and the suffix ķĭš, we end up with Ƈū. Hmm! Roots usually have three letters, not two. There is a class of verbs whose third root letter is ĥ. Do you remember what we said about ĥ before: that it is too lazy to carry a vowel. Well, ĥ is also a push-over! If a suffix comes near ŏ it, it runs away. The root here is ƨū but when the suffix ķĭš got attached, ĥ disappeared. Analysis Sentence 1

ł Ŕ ò Ō ‘my hands’ is ťſò Ņ űſĥ ł Ŕ Ō ‘hands’ and IJšł ‘my’. The final ťſŅ of the noun is removed when the IJűſĥ suffix is attached. Sentence 2

Ō ŌŅ ł ‘fully’ is an adjective with an ƻŤ ƻŤ Ŕ ending. Ŕ ƀÿƇƉ Ņ ł is the short (absolute) form of ljĿŁŴƉ ŅŅ ł. ķĿŁŴƉ ň ł Ō ł ‘that I translate it’ is the relative pronoun Ī ‘that’, Ƣũƕĥ ł ł ‘I translate’ (ƈƖƘĥ IJĬŴſƢũƕĥĪ ô Ō ‘it’. Note the removal of the second šł in Ƣũƕĥ ł ł when the suffix is type), and the suffix IJĬŴſš ô added.

Ņ Ņ Ņ ô ƁƍŨ ò ł ‘children of the church’ has the same formation as ťƤƌĥ ò ł in the previous ŦŁűƕŌ ƁƍŨ

section. Sentence 3

Ņ ň ň Ņ Ņ ŏ ŦƦƊŶĿ Ņ Ņ ŏ ƦƊŶĿ ťƍƙëƆŴſ . It should not be confused Ŕ ł ‘love of learning’ is a construct for ťƍƙëƆŴſĪ Ŕ ň ł with the feminine past tense verb ƦƊŶĿ ‘she loved’. Ŕ Exercise 6.11 ň ň , ƈƖƘ ň ł , ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ł , or ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł , ƈƖƘŁĥ ł ł Ŕ , ƈƖƘĥ ł ł ň ) of the following 1. Give the typology (ƈƖƘ verbs. ň ň ł ň ł ł b. ųŨǁ c. ƚƆĥ d. džƉł a. ơũƣ ł ň ň ň e. ħǁŁĥ f. ŴŶƢƏŁŁĥ ô Ņ Ņ Ņ Ħ Ņ with feminine ŦƦƊƀƏ . Note: feminine 2. Rewrite the reading passage replacing ťƊƀƏ adjectives (participles) are introduced in section 4.6, and verb conjugations in other sections ł Ŕ ň. ň ł ň is ťƀìŅ ƍƃƦƉ of chapter 4; feminine form of ťƍƃƦƉ 3. Give the root of the following verbs: ŏ ŏ ŏ ň b. ķŴƟƢƖƌň c. ķŴƄũƌň a. ķŴŨǂƌ ŏ ň ň ň d. ƦŨǁ e. ľĭƢƖƌň f. ťƄũƌň

116

Readings

6.12 Doctrine of Simon Peter in Rome New Words

Ņ ŏ

meeting, welcoming ťƕĿĭĥň ň Ņ ŦĭĬô ƚƟĪĮĥ he was crucified Ņ ł we go ƎƍƀƆĮĥ ôŌ Ō ł ł ô IJĬŴſƻĥ they brought himĭĭĬ ô ŅŅ sign Ņ Ņ ł ŦŁĥŔ ł countries Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ņ Ņ ŦŁĭǓ ñ Ņ immediately ŦƦƖƤŨ ųŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ô ťƖŨ ŦĭĬ he requested Ņ Ņ man, human (lit. ‘son ťƤƌĥô ƢŨł of man’) ł Ņ ň Ō ĿƦŨ ųƤſĿ head down Ņ Ŕŏ ł ŦŁĭűŶ joy Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ô ťƀìŅ Ŷ he became alive ŦĭĬ Ņ Ņł ťƣƢŶ sorcerer Ņ ň gathering ťƤƍƃ ňŔ ł Ņ he captured him ŦĭĬô ųƄũƆ ň ň ĶűƉ some

ł ł is trusted, believed in ƎƊſųƉ ň ł restores to life Ņ ťŷƉŌ dead man Ŕ ł ŦƼƉ ň Ŕ ł you are preaching Ʀƌĥ ôŅ Ņ ĮƢƄƉ ł teaching, doctrine ŦŁŴƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ ŏ Ņ ł ł he was preaching ŦĭĬô ƢũƐƉ ł ł is accepted ƈũƠƉ ł Ō ĵĮŤƌ he shall go ň ň he shall be crucified ƚƟĪŵƌ ŌŅ Ō hesitatingly ƻƨì Ŕ ƀźƌ ĵŴƖƌŏň he shall enter went out ơƙƌł ł they went out ô ňò ŴƠƙƌ Ō ł ŦŤƀŬƏ many ň make (imperative) űũƕ Ņ ô Ƣũƕ łŅ was passing ŦĭĬ Ņ ťƏƢƕł bed

Ņ

ł

ŦĭĬô űƠƘ he ordered IJĬĭĪĥĽ near him ô łň ŅŅ ň will ň ťƍƀŨĽ ň ł received him ĬƦÿƇũƟ ĶŴƟŏ rise, get up Ņ ł ň ĸĭĪŅŴƇƟ Claudius CaesarƢƐƟ Ņ cried aloud ťƖƟ Ō ł Ņ ô ŪſƢƟ ŦĭĬ he was near Ō Rome ťƉĭĬĿŏ ł ô ĭĿűƣ łł they sent ĭĭĬ ł Œ ň ƦƊÿƇƣ ended Ŕ ł ô ŴƖƊƣ they heard ĭĭĬ ô ł Ņłò years ťƀƍƣ Ōł Ņ ô IJƢƣ ŦĭĬ he began Ō ł true Ņ Ō Ō ƢſƢƣ confidently ƻƨì Ŕ Ō ƀƃŁŔ ƎſƦëƆŁ thirty Ŕ Ņ

Reading The following passage is adapted from the Doctrine of Simon Peter in Rome, edited by William Cureton.1 Ō Ŕ ŏ Ō ł ƎƉ ťƘŤƃŌ ķŴƖƊƣň ŦĭĬ Ņ ô ơƙƌł ĜƢƐƟ Ō ŏ ųƆ ĵĮł ljĪŌ ƁƃŴƀźƌĥ ł ň ĸĭĪŴƇƟĪł ƎſƦƆŁ ł ł 1 .ťƉĭĬƢëƆ Ŕ Ņ ƦƍƤŨ In the the year thirty2 of Claudius Caesar, Simon Cephas went out from Antioch to go to Rome. ł ł ŦĭĬ ł Ņ ô Ƣũƕ ł Ņ űƃĭ ł ĜŦĭĬ .ķƢƉĪŅ ĬƦƇƉ 2 Ŕ ň ŦŁĭǓ Ŕ ŁŤŨ Ŕ Ņ ô Ƣũł ƐƉ And as he was passing, he ŏ was preaching in the countries the word of our Lord. ł ŦŤƀŬƏ ł Ņł ł ô ŴƖƊƣ ò Ō ĭĭĬ 3 .ųƕĿĭƧ ŴƠƙƌĭ ŦĭĬô ĵŴƖƌĪň ŦĭĬô ŪſƢƟł űƃĭ ô ô ł ĜƎƉƦëƆ And when he was near to enter there, many heard and went out to meet him. ł ň ł ñ ŏ ŦŁűƕŌ ŁĭĬ 4 .ŦƦŨĿ Ŕ ł ųÿƿ Ŕ ŦŁĭŔűŷŨ Ŕ Ņ ô ĬƦƇũƟĭ And the entire church received him in great joy. ł Ŕ Ņ ķĭųƆ ƢƉŤƌĪ ł Ō ŦĭĬô IJƢƣĭ ł ƎƉň Ʀŷì ł ł :ťƍƃĬ ň ķŴƄƆ ł 5 ŦĭĬĭł ťƀƊƣ Ŕ ljĥŅ ô ƢũƐƉ Ŕ ň ƌĪł .ŦųƭĪł ĬƢŨ ĺŴƤƀëƆ

.ťƤƌĥŅ ô ƢŨł

And he started to say to them like this: I am preaching to you, Jesus the son of God, who descended from heaven and became man.

ò Ņ ł IJűſłŔòĥ ƎƉň ųƍƀŨƞŨ Ņ ň ŦĭĬô ƚƟĪň Įĥĭň .ťƀźŶ And was crucified hands of the sinners. Ņ ň by his will from the Ō ł Ņ ł ķŴƊƀƐëƆ ň ň Ņ ł ł ô IJĬŴſ Ņ ųŨĭ Ņ ñ ťƣƢŶ ĭĭĬ ĶűƟ ĶűƉ ŦŁĥŔ űũƕ :ųƆ ĭĭĬô ĭƢƉĥĭ ô ô ƻĥ ĭĿűłƣł ĜŦƦƖƤŨ .ƎƆŴƃŏ 1 2

William Cureton, Ancient Syriac Documents (Gorgias Press, 2003), p. ŴƆ-ųƆ. Cureton has “third year” by mistake.

6 7

Doctrine of Simon Peter in Rome And immediately, they sent and brought him, Simon the Sorcerer, and said to him: make some sign in front of all of us. Ņ

117

ł ł ô ƎſƢƉĥ ťƍƃĬŅ űƃĭ ł Ņ ĜĭĭĬ .űŶł ŦƼƉ ŦĭĬô Ƣũƕ

8

ł ô ĭƢƉĥĭ ł ł ł ƢſƢƣł ĭĬŏ ĭĬł ĜŦƼƉ ł ł ł ƎƊſųƉĭ ň ł ķŴƄƍƉ ljųƆ ųƆ ťŷƉĪ ĬĿƦŨĭ Ŕ ň ťƍſĥĪł ĭĭĬ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ĜƈũƠƉĭ ô ňŅ .ƎƍƀƆôĮŌ ĥ

9

ŌŅ Ō ň ƻƨì ň .ŦŁŤƀŅŬƏ Ņ ô ŦĭĬ Ņ ƧŅ ĶűƉĭ ł Ŕ ň ŦĭĬô ħƢƟ òŌ ł ƨƉňò ŦĭĬô ƢƉĥł űƃł ŦƼƉĪ .ŦĭĬ Ŕ ƀźƌ ƎſĪ ķŴƊƀƏŌ Ŕ Ō IJĬĭ ô ĪĥĽ

10

ŌŅ Ō ň ŦƦƖƤŨ Ņ ł ĜĭĬł ŦƼƉĪ Ņ Ŕ ŦĭĬô ťƖƟĭ ñ ųŨĭ ĬŁŴëƆ :ťƤƍƃň ųƿŏ ĶűƟ Ŕ ťƘŤƃŌ ķŴƖƊƣň ŦĭĬô ħƢƟ Ŕ ƀƃŁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ƻƨì

11

Ņ ƎƉň ĶŴƟ ťŷìƀƤƉ Ō ĺŴƤſĪň ųƊƤŨł .ƎƉŁ

12

Ņ ĜĭĬł ŦƼƉ ñ ł ŦĭĬô ťƀìŅ Ŷ ķŴƖƊƣĪ ŦƦƇƉĪ .ťƏƢƕł ƎƉ ŦĭĬô ƋƟĭ Ŕ Ŕ ň ųƊƕĭ

13

And while they were saying this, a (funeral of a) dead man passed.

And they said that either of you who restores this dead man to life; that one, he is true, will be trusted and accepted, and weŅ will follow him.

Simon then hesitatingly drew near the dead man, while saying many words, and nothing happened. And immediately, Simon Cephas drew confidently near that dead one, and cried in front of all the gathering. ł In the name of Jesus Christ, rise from there.

And with the word of Simon that dead (man) became alive, and he rose from the bed. ł

Ņ ł ł :ķŴƖƊƤƆ ųƆ ĭĭĬô ĭƢƉĥĭ ťƊƕł ųƿ ŦŵŶĭ .ųƆ Ʀƌĥô ĮƢňƄƉĪ Ŕ ł ťŷìƀƤƉ ĭĬô ƢſƢƣĪ And all the people saw and said to Simon, “Christ, whom you preach, is true.” ň Ņ ĿƦŨ ň ò Ņ ł ƎƀƆĬ ł ň ķĭƢƌň ŦĭĬô ųƄũƆ .ƢƐƟ Ŕ ł Ĝťƀƍƣ Ŕ ƎƉĭ And after these years, Niron Ceasar captured ł him. Ņ ň ň ƢƐƟ Ņ ł ł ł ň ŦĭĬô űƠƘĭ .ŦĭĬô ťƖŨ ĭĬĪ ƅſĥ ųƤſĿ ĿƦŨ Ŕ ķŴƖƊƣ ŦĭĬô ƚƟĪŵƌĪ And Ceasar ordered that Simon be crucified head down as he (Simon) had requested. Ņ ł ƦƊÿƇƣ ŒŔ ł ň .ťƘŤƃ ķŴƖƊƣĪ ĬŁŴƍƙÿƇƉ

14 15 16 17

The Doctrine of Simon Cephas ended.

Ambiguity With Unvocalized Text Most Syriac texts, especially the texts found in manuscripts, usually have no vowel marks. This sometimes creates ambiguity even if a larger context is present. Ō ŏ ųƆň ĵĮŤƌ ł Ō in Sentence 1 which we (and the editor Cureton) Let us consider ťƉĭĬƢëƆ translated as ‘(he shall) go to Rome’. The unvocalized version is ťƉĭĬƢƆ ųƆ ĵĮŤƌ. The manuscript from which Cureton took this text is quite ancient. Could there have been a dot ñ Ņ ? If that was so, the translation will change to ‘(he shall) go to it, on ųƆ rendering it ųëƆ Rome’ (recall that city names are feminine). The only way to really get to the bottom of this is to get on a plane (or a train if you are in England) and go to the British Library where the manuscript is to be found, and check it out. In this case it is probably not worth your time, but frequently scholars find themselves in situations where they need to go and examine a manuscript personally. Revisiting Use of

Ņ Versus Enclitic ŦĭĬ Ņô ŦĭĬ

An enclitic is an element (could be a verb, pronoun, etc.) which is joined at the end of a word and is read with it as one word; e.g., English can’t for cannot, shouldn’t for should not.

118

Readings

Ņ can become an enclitic in which case the Ĭ becomes silent resulting in ŦĭĬ Ņô, The verb ŦĭĬ Ņ ô ơƙƌł ‘had gone out’, or and is used after verbs. In Sentence 1, for example, we have ŦĭĬ simply ‘went out’. Here, it is attached to a past tense verb, and in such cases it does not affect how you translate the verb into English. Ņ ô Ƣũƕ łŅ It can also attach to present tense verbs. In Sentence 2, for example, we have ŦĭĬ ł Ņ ‘he is passing’. In such cases, it gives a past continuous ‘he was passing’, as opposed to Ƣũƕ sense. Ņ ô ĵŴƖƌŏ ň . The It can even be used with the future tense as well. In Sentence 3, we have ŦĭĬ Ņ ô is used because the event as a whole is taking place in the past. enclitic ŦĭĬ

ň

Passive ŁĥŔ With Verbs Beginning With Į and Ľ

ň

When the passive marker ŁĥŔ is prefixed to a verb that begins with Į (such as ƚƟĮł ‘crucified’) ň or Ľ (such as ŪƆĽ also meaning ‘crucified’), two things happen in sequence: ň 1. The Į or Ľ split from the verb, and place themselves in the middle of the Łĥ as in ň ň ň ƚƟňŁĮĥ and ŪƆňŁĽĥ, where Łĥ is highlighted. This operation is called in grammars METATHESIS. ň 2. Then the Ł of ŁĥŔ turns into Ī in the case of initial-Į verbs, or to İ in the case of ň ň ň ň ň initial-Ľ verbs. The result is ƚƟĪĮĥ and ŪƇŹ Ľĥ. The original Łĥ is highlighted.

ň

Roots of Passive ŁĥŔ Verbs

ň

ň

ň

If I were to ask you to find the root of ħǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ , you can simply remove the ŁĥŔ giving the root ħǁ. Similarly, you can find the root of the future verb ħǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ň by removing Ʀƌ Ŕ ň giving the same root, ħǁ. ň ň How about finding the root of ƚƟĪĮĥ? We just learned that the Ī is the Ł of the Łĥ prefix; ň ň hence, removing the ĥ and Ī, we end up with the root ƚƟĮ. In a similar way, the root of ƚƟĪŵƌň in Sentence 16 above is found by removing the prefix ňƌ and the Ī which gives ƚƟĮ.

ň

Ņ

Ō

ŏ

ł

Revisiting the Object Suffixes Ĭš, IJųſš ô , IJĬŴſš ô , IJųſĭ ô š, and IJĬĭš ô We mentioned that there are a number of forms for the object suffix for him: ň ň ł ň • Ĭš as in ĬƦÿƇũƟ ‘received him’ in Sentence 4. Ō ł Ō • IJĬŴſš as in IJĬŴſƻĥ ‘brought him’ in Sentence 7. ô ô ł ň ł • IJĬĭš ô as in IJĬĭűſĽ ô Ņ ‘near him’ as in Sentence 10. Ņ ň ł ‘you (m.) received him’. • IJųſš ô as in IJųſƦÿƇũƟ ô ŏ ŏ ł ‘they (m.) received him’. • IJĬĭš ô as in IJĬŴƇũƟ ô These forms are found in Table 11, column B in the Appendix. From now on, we will not indicate these various suffixes in the Analysis sections. Summary of Assumed Knowledge So far, we will assume that you are able to recognize the following prefixes and suffixes. We will no longer vocalize them.

Doctrine of Simon Peter in Rome

119

Prefixes

• • • •

Ũ ‘in’. Ī ‘of’, and a relative pronoun meaning, who, where, which, etc. ĭ ‘and’. Ɔ ‘to’ and as an object marker.

Suffixes

• • • • • • • • • •

Ņ Ĵš Ŕ ‘your’. ñ Ņ and ųſš ñ ň ‘her’. Ĭš Ɓô ‘my’. ķšł ‘our’. ķŴƃŏŔ ‘your’ (plural masculine). ķĭĬŏ ‘their’ (plural masculine). ň Ņ ťšň, ending of plural masculines such as ťŨò ǁ Ŕ ‘books’. Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ òŏ ŦŁš Ŕ Ŕ ‘virgins’. Ŕ , ending of plural feminines such as ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ ŏ Ō ł The variants for him: IJųſ ô , IJĬŴſš ô , IJųſĭš ô , and IJĬĭš ô . Ō Ņ ƻŤ Ŕ š, the adverbial ending.

Prefix and Suffix Combinations

Additionally, we will assume from now on that you can decipher words that have the above Ņ ł prefixes and suffixes such as ųŨňǁĭ Ŕ ‘and his book’. Analysis Sentence 1

Ō Ņ ƎſƦëƆŁ ƦƍƤŨ Ŕ Ŕ ł ł ‘in the year thirty’ makes use of the construct form of the noun Ʀƍƣ Ŕ ł , instead Ō Ņ ł Ņ ł of ƎſƦëƆŁĪ ŦƦƍƣ Ŕ ô (with a silent ôƍ ). Sentence 5

ň is ŧƢŨ Ņ and the possessive suffix Ĭšň ‘his’, followed by the possessive Ī and ŦųëƆĥ Ņ Ņ ł. Ņ Ħ Ņ ł ĬƢŨ ŦųƭĪ From now on, we will not indicate this usage of the double possessive. Sentence 7

ł ŏ. ł ŏ is the ancient form of Ǝƿ ƎƆŴƃ Exercise 6.12 Ņ ô ơƙƌł using the past tense table in section 4.2 and the ŦĭĬ Ņ table in 1. Conjugate the phrase ŦĭĬ ł ł Ņ Ņ section 6.8; e.g., ŦĭĬô ơƙƌ (sing. 3rd masc.), ŁĭĬ Ŕ ň (sing. 3rd fem.), etc. Ŕ ô ƦƠƙƌ 2. Translate into Syriac: a. In the fifth year of King Abgar (ƢŬŨĥ ). [Hint: year in Syriac is feminine.] b. In the seventh year of our Lord and God. c. In the tenth year of Patriarch Matthew.

120

Readings

6.13 From the Discourses of Philoxenos of Mabbug New Words

Ņ ň ł

gave birth to you ĴŁűƆĭĥ Ŕ łň ĿĬĪĮĥ beware ł Amen ƎƀƉĥŌł is said ƢƀƉĥŌł desirable ťŬƀūĿĥ ŔŅ Ō ň Ņ sacraments ŦĮǓĥ Ņ ňô without űƖÿƇŨ ň Ņ then ƎſĪň IJĬŅ = ƎſűſĬ ł ò Ņ your thoughts ƅƀũƣŴŶŏ Ņł living ťƀŶ ňò ł ťƀŶ life ŏ Ņł he ought ĭĬô Ņ ŅŪƀŶ ò beautiful ŦƼÿƇŶ Ŕ ł Ņ ł wine Ņ Ņ ŧƢƊŶ ŦŁŴƀƖŹ straying, error Ŕ ŏ suckle ơƍſňŌ ň ň ŏ Ņ ŏ Ņ ƈƃ = ķűƖÿƿ every timeķűƕ Ņ ł bread ťƊŷƆ

ł

ƼƆ there is not Ņ ŏ ł ťƕŴũƉ spring ň Ņ then ƎſűƉ ŅŅ ł life-giving Ņ Ō ťƍƀìŏ ŷƉł baptism Ŕ ł ň ł ŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ ň ł you grow Ʀô ƌĥ ťŨƢƉ=ƼŨƢƉ ł ň Ņ ł ƉŅ you cleanseƦƌĥ ô ľƢƉ=ƦƟƢ ň ł ťƠƤƉ gives to drink ň ł is shown ŦŴŶƦƉň Ņòł ň are shown (f.) ƎſŴŶƦƉ łł ň you are remembering ŁĪųƕƦƉ ł ł ň becomes near ħƢƟƦƉ ł ň Ņ is required ťƖŨŁƦƉ ň ł ň ťƏĿŁƦƉ nourishes ň ł he shall believe ƎƊſųƌ Ņ Ņòň melodies ŦƦƊƖƌ Ŕ ňŅ òň splendor Ņ ťƍł Ŷƞìł ƌ food ŦŁƢũƀƏ

Ņ Ņ

ŦƦƊƀƏ treasures Ŕ ò Ō űƊƕ is baptized Ŕ ň ŅŅ Ņ quenches ťŬƀƘ ŏ Ņ Ņ table ŧĿĭƦƘ ŔŅ Ŧ impurity ŔŅ Ņ ŏ ŁĥĽ ŦŁŴſĬĽ thirst Ŕ ł listen ŁĭĽ Ŕ ŏ Ō ƁƆĽ turn ŏ rise ĶŴƟ ŅŅ voice ƨƟ Ņ ŏ = ħŴƣ praise ťŷŨŴƣ Ņ Ō simple ťƊƀŷƣ ňŅ carries ƈƠƣ Ņ ł ŦƦŨƢƣ tribe Ŕ Ņ breast Ņ ŏ ŧ ĪŁŔň miracle ŦŁĿŴƉĪŁŔŏ again łħĭŁň ł you shall be changed ƚƇŶƦƣŁ

Reading The following passage is taken from the introduction to the Third Discourse, on Faith, by Philoxenos of Mabbug (d. 522).1 Ņ ł Ņ ł ł ò Ņ ň ñ ìƍŶƞƌ ŧűƀƊƆŁ ųƀ ĭĥ ƗƊƣ ħĭŁ ŦŁ 1 .ŦŁŴƍƊſĬĪ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ł ťŬƀūǓĥ Ŕ Come again, listen O pupil (about) the desirable splendors of faith. ò ł ŦƼÿƇŶ .ƅƆ ťŨųſŅ ťƀŶ Ŕ ň ƨƟŅ ŁĭĽ Ŕ ò ł Ĭñ ƦƊƖƍ Ŕ Ņ ò ň ŨĪł ĜƅƉĥĪ Ŕ ŦŁ 2 Come, listen (to) the voice of your mother, in whose beautiful melodies she gives you life. Ņ ŏ ťƀŶł ťũƇŶł ơƍłŌſ ŦŁ 3 Ņ Ŕ ƎƉõ ĝťƍƙëƆŴſĪ .ĴŁűƆĭĥĪ Ŕ ň ł ťƉĥĪň ťƀìŶ ŧ ĪŁ Come, suckle the living milk of learning, from the living breast of the mother who gave birth to you. Ņ Ņ ň Ņ ł ŏ ň ň ł ťƕŴũƉł ƈƕł ĶŴƟ ŦŁ 4 ťƍſDŽƃĪ ĝŦƦŨǔƣł ťƠƤƉĪ .ťŬƀƘŅ Ƨ ĬŁŴſĬĽł ĜŦƦƣŅ Ƨ ųƍƉĪ Come, rise on the spring which gives drink to the tribes [literally, which gives to drink the tribes], which whoever does not drink from it, his thirst will ň ł not quench. ň Ņ ò ł ň ł ň Ƨ ųƍƉĪ ň ƎƉñ ƈƃĪ ĜťƀŶĪ ł ł ƨƉĪ ò ł ŦŁƢũƀƏ .IJĬŴƀŷŨ ŧĿĭƦƘ Ŕ ƈƕ ħŁ ŦŁ 5 ô ł ł ťƀìò Ŷ ƼƆ ĝťƏĿŁƦƉ Come, sit at the table which is full of the food of life, which whoever is not nourished from it, has no life in his life. ł Ņ ň Ō ł ƅƀƍƀƕ Ō ŦŁ 6 ł ł ƅŔƌĪĥŔň ƁƆĽ ò ł ł įƦƘ Ņ ò ł ƦƉ ŦŁ ĜƗƊƣĭ .ƎſŴŶ Ŕ ň ŦŁŴƍƊſųŨĪ Ŕ ĪŁŔ IJŵŶĭ Ŕ Ņ ł ł ŦŁǔƉ Come, turn your ear and listen; come open you eyes and see the miracles which in faith are shown. Budge, The Discourses of Philoxenus, Bishop of Mabbogh (1894), p. 52 lines 1-9, p. 53 lines 17-21, p. 73 lines 9-14. 1

From the Discourses of Philoxenos of Mabbug

121

ł ň Ņ ƎſűſĬĭ Ņ .űƊƕĪ Ņ ł ł űƖÿƇŨ ò Ņ ł ƎƉõ ŦƦƊƀƏ ƈƃ Ƣƀūň ŦŁŴƍƊſĬ Ŕ Ņ ň ĜťƀƉ Ŕ ň Ņ ĭĬñ ƎƉõ ťƖŨŁƦƉň ŦŁŴŔƍƊſĬ Ŕ ò ƈƠƣ Ŕ ł Ō ň ň .ĭĬô ťƊƀŷƣ ĶűƉ

7

Faith is required from that one who is baptized, and then he carries treasures from the water. Without faith, then, everything is simple.

Ņ .ŦŁŴƍƊſĬ űƖƇŨ IJĬô ťƀò Ɖł ĜŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ Ŕ Ŕ Baptism is (only) water without faith. ł Ō Ņ ò ł ŦĮǓĥŅô ł ťƊŷƆł ťƍƀŷƉ .ŦŁŴƍƊſĬ űƖƇŨ ķĭųſƻĥ Ŕ ŧƢƊŶĭ Ŕ Ŕ The life-giving sacraments are bread and wine without faith. ł ł ň ƧĪŅ .ƎſűƉ Ņ ł ĬƦƇƉ ł ƚƇŶƦƣŁ ł ł ň ķűƖÿƿ łň ň Ņ ĿĬĪĮĥ Ņň űƃł ĝĴŔŁŴƍƊ .ĸŴƆŴƘĪ Ŕ ň ŁĪųƕƦƉ Ŕ Ņ ſųŨ

10

ł ƉŅ ĝĴŔŁŴƍƊſ ň ł ųŨĭ ò ł Ņ ƦƟƢ ñ ŦŁĥŔ ĽŅ ƎƉõ ƅƀũƣŴŶ .ŦŁŴƀƖŹĪ Ŕ Ŕ Ĭ ƼŨƢƉ

11

ł ł Ō ň ł ł ł ł ƦƉĪ Ņ ł ƢƀƉĥĪł IJĬñ ƅſĥ ħŴƣ ųƆĪ .Ŧųƭ IJĬĭ ƎƊſųƌĪ ĜŦųƭ ŁŴëƆ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ň ƎƉñ ĭĬô ŏ ŪƀŶĪ Ŕ Ņ ħƢƟ ô ƻĥĪ ł Ņ ĖƎƀƉĥŌ ƎƀƊƇƖëƆ

12

8 9

Beware, then, that you do not change in your faith, remembering every time the word of Paul. Ņ Ņ

And in it (i.e., the word of Paul) you grow your faith, (and) you cleanse your thoughts from the impurity of straying.

As that (word) which is said, “he who becomes near God ought to believe that He is God,” to whom is praise forever. Amen. The Cross-Word Ligature ǃ

ł ŏ

ł

ŏ

Ņ Ņ ƈƃĪ for ťƍſĥ There is one ligature in Syriac that crosses word boundaries as shown in ťƍſDŽƃĪ ‘whoever’. The ligature ǃ appears when a word ends in ĵ and the next word starts with ĥ. This ligature is optional. Usage of ħĭŁ

ŏ

The word ħĭŁ ‘again’ is used in to mark a new division (chapter, section, etc.) of a text, linking it to a previous division. Here, for example, the book by Philoxenus has many ŏ discourses preceding the one cited above. The word ħĭŁ marks the beginning of the discourse on faith. ŏ Church goers may be familiar with the phrase ƎſĪň ħĭŁ (the particle ƎſĪň comes from ŏ Greek and while it sometimes translates into but, however, in many cases—as in ƎſĪň ħĭŁ—it gets lost in the translation). It is used in the Diptychs, which are recited by deacons standing in the middle of the altar. There are six Diptychs in the Syriac Orthodox tradition, and each ŏ one of them—apart from the first of course—begins with ƎſĪň ħĭŁ ‘also’ linking it to the previous one. Here are the first phrases of each: Let us pray and beseech … for all the Fathers Also we remember all our brothers Also we remember all the kings

ňł Ņ Ņòł ŏ ŏ Ņ ł ł Ŕ ň Ƨƞƌ ŦŁųŨĥ ķĭųÿƿ ƚƇŶ ... ƚƤƃƦƌĭ Ŕ

1

ŏ ƎſĪň ħĭŁ ŏ ƎſĪň ħĭŁ

2

ŏ ŏ ƎƍſĪųƕƦƉ ò ł ł ķĭųÿǀëƆ ł Ō ł ň ƎƀŶĥ ň ò ł ķĭųÿǀëƆ ŏ ŏ ƎƍſĪųƕƦƉ ł Ō ł ň ťƄÿƇƉ

3

122

Readings

Also we remember … the Mother of God Mary Also we remember those who are in the Beth Qadishé (tombs of the Fathers, i.e., the departed Fathers) Also we remember all the departed

Ņ ł ŁűÿƇſ ł Ō ł ň ƎſĪň ħĭŁŏ ŦųëƆĥ Ŕ ł Ņ ... Ɔ ƎƍſĪųƕƦƉ ł ł ƋſƢƉ ŏ Ņ ƎƍſĪųƕƦƉ ł Ō ł ň ƎſĪň ħĭŁŏ ƼũŨĪ Ŕ ň ł ķŴƌųëƆ Ņò Ō ł ťƤſűƟ ŏ ŏ ƎƍſĪųƕƦƉ ò Ō ł ķĭųÿǀëƆ ł Ō ł ň ƎſĪň ħĭŁŏ ŧűňŔƀƍƕ

4 5

6

This led many to call the Diptychs in English the tub-déns. Using the Diacritic Point To Distinguish Homographs ň We have already seen that a point distinguishes the masculine suffix Ĭš ‘his/him’ from the ñ Ņ ‘her’. This is important in the absence of vowels; e.g., ųŨ ‘in him’ while feminine suffix Ĭš ñ ‘in her’. ųŨ The point can also distinguish other homographs. A HOMOGRAPH is a word that has the same spelling as another. Homographs differ from each other in meaning, origin, and sometimes pronunciation. For instance, the following three words in English are homographs: bow (the front part of a ship), bow (to bend), and bow (a decorative knot). Most homographs in Syriac are the result of the lack of vocalization, in which case they differ in pronunciation; e.g., ƎƉ (for ƎƉň ‘from’), and ƎƉ (for ƎƉł ‘who? which? what?’). In order to help us recognize which is which, some texts use a diacritic point in lieu of vowels. In this case ƎƉõ is ƎƉň and ƎƉñ is ƎƉł. These are conventions which you will learn by experience. We will indicate in subsequent sections common ones. Another common convention is ĭĬ õ for ĭĬŏ ‘he’, and ĭĬñ for ĭĬł ‘that (masculine)’. Another one is IJĬ õ for IJĬŌ ‘she’, and IJĬñ for IJĬŅ ‘that (feminine)’. Sometimes the point appears in manuscripts between the two letters.

ŏ

Ō

How can ĭĬ ‘he’ and IJĬ ‘she’ mean ‘is’ and ‘are’?

One of the most difficult concepts to understand in Syriac is that the pronouns ĭĬŏ ‘he’ and IJĬŌ ‘she’ can be used as the verb to be meaning is and are. Ņ ŏ Ņ ł Ņ ł Ō ĶűƉ ň ň ƈƃŏ ŦŁŴƍƊſĬ In Sentence 7 we came across the phrase ĭĬô ťƊƀŷƣ űƖÿƇŨ ‘without Ŕ Ŕ ŏ ň faith, everything is simple’ (I removed the Ƣƀū because it is not relevant). Here, ĭĬ is used as Ņ Ō is pronounced an enclitic ĭĬô; that is, pronounced with the previous word. As a result ťƊƀŷƣ Ņ ł ł Ō sh-ʚee-maw meaning ‘is with š at the end instead of š, so the whole thing is read ĭĬô ťƊƀŷƣ simple’. In a way, you can think of the phrase in a literal sense meaning ‘without faith, everything—he/it—is simple’ where he/it refers to everything. Ņ Ō ŏ ł ò Ņ ł ŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ ‘baptism is water’, literally it means A similar formation is found in IJĬô ťƀƉ Ŕ Ņ Ō ŏ ł is feminine). Also ‘baptism; she is water’ where she/it refers to baptism (note that ŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ Ŕ Ņ ł ò here, you read IJĬô ťƀƉ as one word, ma-yoy. Ņ ł ; read it as one word ʚa-yo-boo. ‘he ought’. Another example is ĭĬô ŏ ŪƀŶ

From the Discourses of Philoxenos of Mabbug

123

Internal Vowel Changes Ņ Ņ ł ł ‘she gave birth’, and the object suffix Ĵš ĴŁűƆĭĥĪ ŁűëƆĭĥ Ŕ ň ł is the relative pronoun Ī ‘who’, Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ł ň ł ‘you’. How did we end up with š in ĴŁűƆĭĥĪ go? Ŕ ň ł , and where did the š of ŁűëƆĭĥ Ŕł If you wish to understand the process (and you really don’t have to if you feel this is too much detail), then read on… The basic form of a verb in Syriac is the singular 3rd masculine form. In this case it is ł ňűƆĭĥ ň ĥł-type verb. The feminine counterpart is achieved by adding Ŕ ‘he begat’ which is an ƈƖƘ ł ň ł ł the suffix Łš Ŕ so now we have ŁűëƆĭĥ Ŕ ł ň . But Syriac does not allow for the vowel š (or even š)ł to be in an open syllable (a syllable that does not end in a consonant). The syllables of ŁűëƆĭ Ŕł ň ĥ ł ň are Łű Ŕ ł Ɔň ĭĥł . Since š cannot be in an open syllable, it is removed and we get the feminine ‘she gave birth’. form ŁűëƆĭĥ Ŕł Ņ Now when we add the object suffix Ĵš Ŕ we have

Ņ ł ň ł Ĵš Ŕ + Łš + űƆĭĥ

Let’s divide the whole thing into syllables. We get Ņ ł ĴŁŔ űł Ɔň ĭĥ (aw-lé-da-tok) ň ł As I mentioned before, Syriac does not like š or š to be in an open syllable. So we have to start getting rid of them. But there is another rule: Syriac wants you to start getting rid of these vowels backward, starting from the end of the word moving to the beginning of the word. So starting from the end, the first vowel we encounter in an open syllable is the one on űł. We remove it, and end with: Ņ ł ĴŁŔ űƆň ĭĥ (aw-léd-tok) Ņ ł ň As a result, now the š is in a closed syllable so we keep it and end up with ĴŁűƆĭĥ Ŕ ň ‘she gave birth to you’. Again, if this is too much detail and you don’t want to get into it, then you can ignore all of this. You just have to accept that when suffixes are added, there will be changes to the vowels in the word. Revisiting the Subject Suffix Recall that Syriac allows for subject pronouns to be used as suffixes. The above passage gives additional examples. ł ƉŅ is Ʀƌĥôł ľƢňƉŅ in Sentence 11. In this case of the former, ň ł is Ʀƌĥô ł ťŨƢƉ ň ł , and ƦƟƢ ƼŨƢƉ the final ĥ turned into IJ. Exercise 6.13 Ņ in Sentence 3 masculine or feminine? Why? 1. Is ŧĪŁ 2. Put diacritical marks on the following:

.IJĬ ŦƦŨĿ ĬƼƠƍƘ .ŦƼƠƍƘ ųƆ ƻĥ ƋſƢƉ .ĭĬ ƋſƢƘĥ IJƢƉ ƈƕ IJƦƉĪ ųŨǁ .ŦƦƍſűƉ ƎƉ ƎƍŶŴſ ŦŁĥ .ťŨǁ ųƆ ƻĥ ƎƉ

a b c d

124

Readings

3. Find the enclitics in 2. ň ł ň 4. Optional. ħǁĥ is an ƈƖƘĥ-type verb. The singular 1st person form is ł ň ň and explain vowel changes, if any. suffix Ĭš to ƦŨǁĥ

ł ƦŨǁĥ Ŕ ň . Add the

6.14 A Colophon New Words

ł

as, according to ƅſĥ ŔŌ Ǝſĥł yes, yea! ň Ņ ò ƃĥŔ foreigners ťƀƍƐ ň Ņ one thousand ƚƆĥ ł ň űūĿƦƏĥ was arranged Ŕ ł ň ň became complete ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ł ŁĥŔň was gathered, compiled ƥƍƃ ň Ņ ł ƼŨ refuge ťƏŴū Ō ł Ŕ ň Mesopotamia ƎſǓųƌ ƼŨ Ŕ dwelling in a strange country North Denha shaking my strength mistakes days of month priesthood priest booklet

Ņ ŏŅ ł ŦŁŴŨŁĭƦŨ Ŕ

Ņ ł ťƀŨƢū ťŷìł ƌĪň ŅťƕŵƕĭĮ Ņ ŏ ƁƇƀ ô ò Ŷłł ňŅ ljŴƖŹ ł òł ƁƉŴſ Ņ ł Ņ ťŶƢſ ŏ ŦŁŴƌųƃ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ŏ ŧƢƉŴƃ Ņ Ņ ŏǁ ljŴŨ Ŕ

Ņ Ņò

ŏ end of days ŦƦƉŴſ Ŕ ł ĻŴƐëƆ Ņ łł ŦǁƢũƉ blessed Ŕ East ťŷìŅŅ ƌűƉ Ŕł Ō weak ƨìƀŷƉ Ņ ł Ņ ljƢũƖƉ the one who makes (something) pass Ņ ł West ťŨƢƖƉ ł ł defiled ł ł ň ƈƙÿƇƙƉ you findƦƌĥ ô ŸƄƤƉ=Ʀł œ ŷłł ƄƤƉň ň changes ň ƚƇŶƦƤƉ becoming man ĬŁŴƍƤƌƢŨ Ŕ ň Ŕ ŏ Ņ Ō ł ƦƉ ł are named ƎƀLJĪƦƉň łł Ŕ ň ĵűƕ to blame ł ł ƦƉ ň is settled Ņò ł ħŁĭŁƦƉ Ņ ŏ a long time ťƀƍƣĪł ŧƢūŴƌ ŏ he shall extend įĭƦƊƌň (in length) ł ł Ʀƌ he shall be confirmed ƋƀƟ Ŕň ň Ņ is witnessing ĪųƏ ŅŅ ŧűũƕ deeds łŅ passes Ƣũƕ

Ō

is clothed ƚƀźƕ Ņ Ņň upper ňò ťƀÿƇƕ Ņ prelates ťƍÿƇÿƇƕł ň ň I made, worked ƦƇƊƕ ňŔ ŏ ł ł ƈſĥŴƍƊƕ Emmanuel Ņ strong (f.) ŦƦƍƀƤŌ ƕł Ņ ŏŅ savior ťƟĭƢƘ Ņ ŏ ŦŁŴƆĽ prayer, intercession Ŕŏ Ō Ņ Catholicos ťƠƀƆĭƦƟ Ŕ łł Ō far (absolute) ơƀŶĿ Ņ Ō ťƠƀŶĿ far (emphatic) Ņ ŅłŅ ŦŁŴƕǓ shepherds Ŕ Ņ ł Ō Chicago ŴŬƄƀƣ Ō ťŷìňò ƀƇƣ apostles Ņ ł Ņ come to an end ťƊëƆŴƣŏ ƈƠƣ Ņ ł tribe ŦƦŨƢƣ Ŕ Ō Ņ ƎƀƍƉŁ eighty ł correct (imperative) ĽĿň Ł Ņ ł nine hundred ŦŤƊƖƣŁ Ņ Ō ň IJƢŶĥô ƎſƢƣŁ November

Reading The following passage is taken from a classic colophon by Mar Emmanuel Ammanuel (1958-).1 Ņ ň ň Ņ ƦƍƣĪ Ņ Ņ ƎſƢƣŁ Ō ň ťƄſƢŨ ł ň ĜťƊƆŴƣ ł ljĬ ljŴŨǁ ťŶƢƀŨ ƚƆĥ ƈƠƣ 1 Ŕ Ŕ ƋƆƦƣĥĭ Ŕ ł ł ųñŨŅ űƃ IJƢŶĥ ô

Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ƎƄƇƉĭ Ņ ł ŦŤƊƖƣŁĭ Ņ ł ł ł ķųƭĭ Ņ ł ƦƊëƆ ł ł ƎƀƍŌ ƉŁĭ ķƢƉĪ ĬŁŴƍƤƌƢŨ .ťŷìƀƤƉ ĺŴƤſň ƎƟĭƢƘĭ Ŕ ň ƗƣŁĭ

Came to an end, and was completed this booklet in the blessed month of November 24 in it, of the year one thousand and nine hundred and eighty and nine of the becoming man of our Lord and our God and our King and our Savior Jesus Christ.

Ņ ł Ō ĜŦŁŴƕǓĪ ł Ņ ƦƟ ò Ņ ł ťƤſĿĭ łòł ł ťƃƢſƢźƘ Ŕ ł Ō ł ťƠƀƆĭ Ŕ ł ťŷìł ƌĪň IJƢƉ Ŕ ò Ņ ł ťŨĥ ƁƉŴƀŨĭ ô Ņ ťŨĿ ŧƢƉŴƃ ĜťƍÿLjƕĪ Ŕ ł ťŨĿĭ ĜŦŁųŨĥĪ .ťŷìƌűƉĪł 1

Emmanuel Joseph, The Little Chronicle (Chicago, 1990), p. 14-143.

2

A Colophon

125

And in the days of the father of fathers, and the great of the shepherds, and the head of the prelates, the great priest Mar Denha the Catholicos Patriarch of the East.

ŏ ƋƀƟ ŏ ųƀƏĿŴƃ ŏ ĬƦƉŴſ Ņ ƧĪŅ ŦƦƉŴſ ň Ņ ł ò ł ŧƢūŴƍëƆ ł ł Ʀƌĭ .ĺŵƕĭĮ Ŕ Ņ ò ł įĭƦƊƌň ķƢƉ ťŷìƀƤƉ Ŕ ò ł ĻŴƐëƆ Ŕ ň .ťƀƍƣĪ Ŕ Ō ŁŴƆƞŨ ĖƎƀƉĥĭł Ǝſĥ .ŦŁųŨĥĭ Ŕ ò Ņ ł ťŷìò ƀƇƣ Ŕ ł

The Messiah (i.e., Jesus), our Lord, shall extend his days for a very long time, and may his See be confirmed to the end of days unshaken, with the intercession of the Apostles and Fathers. Yea and Amen! ň

Ņ ò ł Ņ ł ł ł ł ĜťƀźŶ Ņ ô űƀŨ ł ł ŁĥŔ Ņ ł ljŴŨǁ ł ųƊƀƏĭ Ō ł ł ň ƥƍƃ ƨìƀŷƉ ĜIJĬĭ ƈƙÿƇƙƉĭ ƥƌĥ űūĿƦƏĥĭ Ŕ Ŕ ô ųźŷŨ ň ł Ō ň ł ò Ņ ł ŏ ł ƢŨł ƚƏŴ Ņ ƚƀźƕ ƈſĥŴƍƊƕ ň łſ ƢŨł ĮƢƉŁ ƢŨł ljĬĿ Ņ ł ĜŦŁŴƌųƃĪ łł ł ł ƢŨł ĜơƀìŶĿ ŧűũƖŨĭ ťƊƣ ƢŨł ŴƊƏ Ŕ Ŕ ł ŏ ťſǔſĪ Ņ ł ƎƀLJĪƦ Ņ ł ň ŦƦŨƢƣ ò ł Ņ ł ƎſĪŵƊƣĪ Ō ň ł ťƟƦƏĭĿĪ ł ł ł ƉĪ ƼŨĪ Ŕ ň ŧĿŁĥĪ Ŕ ł ƎƉõ ĜťƀÿǑ Ŕ ł ťƀƇƕň ťƀŨƢūł ƁŷƌűƊŨ .ƎſǓųƌł

The booklet and its content was compiled and arranged by the hand of a sinful person, and (who is) defiled in his sins, the weak Emmanuel—(who is) clothed (in the) name of priesthood, and in deeds is far (from it)—son of Rehana son of Tamraz son of Joseph son of Samu son of Talya from the tribe (members) who are named the Monks of Rustuqa of Shamezdin in the Upper Eastern North (i.e., Northeast) of the region of Mesopotamia. ŏ ł ł ł

3

4

ò ò ł IJĬĭ ł ĜĬƦƉĭĥ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƦƍſô űƊŨ Ō ł ťŨƢƖƊŨ Ō Ŕ ł ĜťƠƀŶĿ ĜŦǁƢũƉĭ ƁƍłŨĭ Ŕ ł ł ł ŦƦƍƀƤƕ ô ųŨĥŅ Ƌƕł ħŁĭŁƦƉň ťƣĬĭ Ņ Ŕł ł ò Ņ ƃĥĪ Ņ Ō IJĬĪõ ĜťƀƍƐ ĜŴŬƄƀƣ .ŦŁŴŨŁĭƦŨ Ŕ ł ťƏŴūł ƼŨĭ Ŕ ň Ŕ

5

ň Ņ ĭĥ ł ň ljŴƖźëƆ ň Ņ ķƢƉĭ ň Ƨ ĜljĬ ljŴŨǂŨ Ņ ĜƦœŷłƄƤƉĪ Ņò ł ł ł ƦƉ ƁƆ ĪųƏ ĽĿň Ł Ƨĥ ĜƁŨŌ ĵűƕ Ŕ ŧƢƟĪ Ŕ ň ŦĭĬŁ .ƦƇƊƕ Ŕ Īł Ŕ ň ň ƁƇƀŶ ô ł ƅſĥ

6

ł ł ň Ƨĭ Ƣũƕ Ņ ł ťŷŨŴƣŏ ò ł ljƢũƖƊëƆ Ō ł Ǝſĥ .ƎƀƊÿƇƕ Ō Ņ ƁƊÿƇƖëƆ ł Ņ Ƨ ĭĬĭ ò ł Ņ ƚƇŶƦƤƉ ĖƎƀƉĥĭ õ ĜťƍŨĮĪ

7

And now is settled with his parents and the sons (i.e., members) of his nation in the far West, in the strong and blessed city, and the refuge of foreigners, which is Chicago, dwelling in a strange country. ň Ņ ł O, he who reads in this booklet, do not blame me, but correct the mistakes which you find, and our Lord is my witness that according to my strength I have worked. Ō Praise to (Him who) makes times pass away, and He does not pass and does not change forever and ever. Yea and Amen!

ň

Passive Łĥ With Verbs Beginning With ĸ or ŀ

ň

ň

When the passive prefix ŁĥŔ attaches to verbs that begin with ŀ, such as ƋƇƣ ‘ended’, the ŀ ň ň ň ň splits from the verb and inserts itself inside the ŁĥŔ like this: ƋƆƦƣĥ (the ŁĥŔ part is highlighted) which appears in Sentence 1. ň ł and begins with ĸ. The ł ƦłƏĥň. Here, the verb is űūƢƏ The same thing took place in űūĿ ĸ split from the verb and placed itself inside the prefix. The Diminutive The DIMINUTIVE is a form of the word that describes the smallness of an object. One way to ŅŅ Ņ ŏ , instead of the usual ťšŅ. Hence, ťŨǁ form the diminutive in Syriac is by using the suffix ljĭš Ņ ŏ Ņ ‘booklet’ which appears in Sentence 1. ‘book’ becomes ljŴŨǁ Another example, which does not appear in the above passage but you may come Ņ ŏ ł ‘little brother’ from ťŶĥŅł ‘brother’. It is used in a more general way to simply across is ljŴŶĥ

126

Readings

mean ‘my brother, comrade’. When His Holiness Mor Ignatius Zakka I, Syriac Orthodox Ņ ŏ ł, a Patriarch of Antioch, was consecrated back in 1980, he began calling his bishops ljŴŶĥ ł Ņ departure from ƎƇſĪŌ ŧƢŨ ‘our son’. Months and Seasons We came across a number of months before. Here is a list of all the months: January February March April

Ņ ķŴƍƃ Ņ IJƢŶĥ ô ŏ Ņ ŻũƣŅ ĿĪĥŅŔ Ņ ƎƐƀƌŌ Ō ň is name ƎſƢƣŁ

May June July August

Ō ƢſĥŅ Ņ Ō ķƢſŵŶ ŏł ĮŴƉŁ Ņ ħĥ

September October November December

Ō ĵŴƇſŏň ĥ Ō ň Ŕ ƎſƢƣŁ ƋſűƟ Ņ ƎſƢƣŁ Ō ň IJƢŶĥ ô ŏŅ ň ķŴƍƃ ƋſűƟ

The used for both months: October is the former Tishrin, and November is the latter Teshrin. One can also use the abbreviations ĥ Ł for October, and ħ Ł Ņ Ņ ň for November. The plural ŦƻǔƣŁ denotes the autumn months. Ŕ Ņ ŏ The name ķŴƍƃ is also used for two months: December is the former Kanun, and January is the latter Kanun. The abbreviations ĥ ķŴƍƃ and ħ ķŴƍƃ can also be used. Ņ ł Ņ ň Ņ ò ŏ . They are: ŦĭƦƏ Ņ Ŕ ł ‘winter’, ŦĥĪŁ The seasons are called ťƙÿƇŶŴƣ ‘spring’, ťźƀƟł ‘summer’, Ņ Ņ ň ‘autumn’. and ŦƻǔƣŁ Ŕ I am So Horrible Ņ ò ł Ņ ł ł ł ł ĜťƀźŶ In Sentence 4 above, the author of the colophon calls himself ĜIJĬĭųźŷŨ ƈƙÿƇƙƉĭ ô Ō ‘a sinful person, and (who is) defiled in his sins, the weak’. This is actually a mild ƨìƀŷƉ version of what other colophon authors call themselves. Here is a colophon written in Kerala, a state in India, at the end of a manuscript containing the Anaphora of Dionysios Bar Salibi:

ťũƀìŶĭ ťƤƇŶĭ ťſĭĪĭ ťƀźŶĭ ƨìƀìŷƉ IJűòſŤŨ ƁũƀƆĽ ƢŨ ĸŴƀƏŴƍƌŴſĪ IJƢƉĪ ŧĿŴƘŤƍƌĥ ƦƊƇƣ Ėĥ Ŕñ Ċ ŴƄſ ĊĊ ŴƘ÷ĥ ťƍƃƦƉĪ ƑƀūĿŴū ťƤƀƤƟ ťƉŴƉ ƨƉĭ ƨƄƏĭ The translation is: “Ended this Anaphora of Mor Dionysios Bar Salibi by the hands of the weak, and sinner, and wretched, and feeble, and guilty, and fool, and full of fault, the Elder (i.e., priest) George who is called Edapullikulangra”. The last name is in Malayalam and is written in a mixture of Syriac and Malayalam scripts. See section 9.4 if you are interested in this. Analysis Sentence 2

ò ł ł ĭł ƁƉŴƀŨ

ò ł ł ‘days of’ which gives the is ĭ ‘and’, Ũ ‘in’, and the plural construct form ƁƉŴſ Ņ òŅ Ņ ł Ņ ł ò ł ł ł possessive form. Hence, ŦŁųŨĥĪ ťŨĥ ƁƉŴƀŨĭ is and in the days of the father of fathers.

Sentence 4

ňò Ņ ł ò Ņ IJĬĭųźŷŨ ô ł ł is Ũ ‘in’, ŦųźŶ ‘sins’, and IJĬĭš ô ‘his’.

Patriarch Nuh the Lebanese

127

Exercise 6.14 1. Rewrite sentence 2 above using the construct for the possessive instead of using Ī (review “Possessive without using Ī” in section 6.4). ň ň 2. Write the ƈƖƘŁĥŔ form for the following verbs: ł łŔ ň ł a. ħǁ b. ơũƣ c. ĪųƏ d. ƢƄƏ Ŕ 3. Form the diminutive for the following nouns: Ņ ň ‘bird’ c. ťũÿƿ Ņ ł ‘dog’ Ņ ł ‘boy’ b. ŧƢƘĽ a. ťƀÿǑ 4. Write a vocabulary list of all the words in the Indian colophon under the heading “I am So Horrible” above.

6.15 Patriarch Nuh the Lebanese New Words

Ņ Ņ ŏ

black ťƊƃĭĥŌ Ņ łŔò hands Ņ ŏ ŏ ťſűſĥ ňň ŦŁŴƘŴƠƐƘĥ bishopric Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł ĥł Arabic ťƀŨĿ Ņ ŏ ŅŅŅ Aramaic ŦŁŴƀƉĿĥ Ŕ Ō ŁĥŔň Ɓũū was elected ň became to be known Ʀƕ Ŕ ł űſŔłŁĥŔň Ō ł ŁĥŔ he was elevated ƁƇƕ ň IJĪĿŌŁĥŔ was instructed Ņ ł step, rank ťūĿĪ Ņ ŏ Ņ Damascene ťƀƟŴƐƉĿĪł ŏ Ĭŏ Ŵſĭ he is, that is to say ŅŅ Ō solitary ťƀƤƀũŶ ŏ their wisdom ķĭĬƦƊƄŶ Ŕ ł ň Ņ ƞƊŶ Homs (in Syria) ł Hamah (in Syria) ƦƊŶ ŔŅ ŦŁƢŶ end Ŕ ł

Ņ ŏ

mountain Ņ ŧĿŴŹ learnings Ŧň ƦŔ ƕŅűſòŔł òŅ ŏ ťƍƙëƆŴſ the arts, learnings he grew ħƢſňŌ Ņ ň Lebanon Ņ Ņ Ō ƎƍũƆ of Christ, A.D. ŦƼŷìƀƤƉ=Ķ Ņ ŌƉ diligent ŧƢſų ň ŏ Moses Ņ ò ŅťƣŴƉŏ ŦƦŷƣŴƉ poems ŅŔ ŏ ł ŦŅ ŁĭĿƼƉ virtue Ŕ ŦŁŴƍſƢƙƉ Maphrianate Ŕ ŏŅ ł ƅũƌłł al-Nabak (near Homs, Syria) ŏ ŏ they shall judge ķŴƌĭűƌ įŴƌŏ Nuh (Noah) ŏ ł they shall pray ķŴƆƞƌ ŏ ň they shall read ķĭƢƠƌ

I am putting apart from self-denial patriarchate stature Cyril reader village elder, priest he loved he departed is fit July correct faith, Orthodox

ň Ņ ljĥŅ ô ĶŤƏ ł Ə Ņ Ƣź Ņ ŏ Ŕ ƕŅł Ņ ŏ ŦŁŴſŴƍ ŦŁŴƃƢſƢźƘ Ŕ ŔŅłŌ Ŕ Ō ł Ņ ŦƦƉŴƟ ĸŴLjſĿŴƟŅ Ņ ŏ Ņ ťſĭƢƟ Ņ Ō ŦƻƢƟ Ŕ Ņ Ō Ɵł ťƤƀƤ ň ƋŶĿ Ōł Ɓƍƣ ŅŧƢƙƣŅ Ņ ĮŴƉŏŁ Ō Ņ ŏ ŁƞſĿŁ ťŷŨŴƣ Ŕł

Reading The following biography of Patriarch Nuh the Lebanese was written by Philoxenos Yuhanon Dolabani (1885-1969).1 ň Łĥň .ťƀƟŴƐƉ Ņ ł ň ƢŨ įŴƌ ŴſĭĬ 1 Ņ ň ŧĿŴźŨĪł ŦƻƢƟ .Ķ ljŁĥ Ʀƍƣ ĿĪł ƑƀūĿŴū ťƘŴƟ ƼũŨ Ŕ Ŕ ƎƍũƆĪ Ŕ ň űƇſ Ŕ He is Nuh son of George the Damascene. He was born in Beth Qopha, the village, which is in the mountain of Lebanon in the year 1451 A.D. ł ň Ō 2 űƊëƆŁŁĥ ŦƦƉŴƠŨ .ťŷŨŴƣ ŁƞſĿŁ Ŕł Ŕł Ŕ ł ħƢſňŌ űƃĭ Ŕ ƎƇſĪ ŦŁŴƍƊſųƆ Ŕ And when he grew up in stature, he became a pupil of our Orthodox faith.

1

Dolabani, ťƀìƍƍũƆ

ò (Mardin, 1956), p. Ĩ-ħ. įŴƌ ťƃƢſƢźƘĪ ŦƦŷƣŴƉ

128

Readings

ŅŅ ň Ņ ò Ņ ŏ ŦŁŴƀƉ ň ł ŦŁŴƍƊſĬĪ ťƍƙëƆŴſĭ ƋŶň Ŀĭł ťƣŴƉ IJƢƉĪ ŧƢſűŨ Ŕ ł IJĪĿŁĥŔĭň ŦŁŴſ Ŕ ò űƀŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŀ ĥ ŏ ƚƇſĭ .ŦƦƕ Ŕ Ŕ ŴŅƍƖëƆ ô Ņ ł Ņ Ō ł ł ł ł Ņ .ťƀƤƀũŶ ťƉĭĥŁ ťƤƀƤƟ ŁŴëƆ Ŕ ƅũƌĪ ŧĿŁŤŨĪ Ŕ ťƊƃĭĥ ŧĿŴźŨĪł

3

ň ł ň ň Ǝƃň ŦŁŴƌųƃĪŅ ťūĿűëƆ ň ł ŦŁŴƙƠƐƘƧ ň ƞƊŶĪ ł ƁũūŁĥŔ ň ĬŁĭĿƼƉ Ʀƍƣ ĸŴLjſĿŴƟ ƋƤŨ Ŕ Ŕ ł űſŔłŁĥŔ űƃĭ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ Ŕ ł Ʀƕ .Ķ ĻŁĥ

4

And he loved self-denial and was instructed in learning, and he studied Aramaic and the arts of faith in the monastery of Mar Moses in the black mountain which is in the region of Nabak under the priest Thomas the Solitary.

And when his virtue was known, he was chosen for the rank of priesthood, then to the bishopric of Homs in the name of Cyril in the year 1480 A.D.

ł ƁƇƕł ŁĥŔ ň ŦŁƢŷëƆĭ ťŷìƌűƉĪ Ŕ ł Ō ł ťūĿűëƆ Ŕ ł ŦŁŴŔƃƢſƢźƘĪ Ŕ ł ŦŁŴƍſƢƙƊëƆ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ł ƎƃĿƦŨ Ŕ ł ł ĜĶ ŻƘŁĥ ƦƍƤŨ ťŷìƌűƉĪ ł ł Ķ Ĩ ĽŁĥ ƦƍƤŨ ĖĶ Żƌĥ Ʀƍƣ Ŕ ł Ŕ ťŶƢłſ ĮŴƉŁ ŸƄŨ ƦƊŷŨ Ŕ Ņ ł ťſƢƉ ŁŴëƆ Ŕ Ņ Ɓìƍƣĭ

Then, to the Maphrianate of the East in the year 1489 A.D., and at the end was elevated to the rank of Patriarchate of the East in the year 1493 AD, and he passed to the Lord in Hamah in 28 Ō Ō of the month of July, the year 1509 A.D. ł

5

ł Ņ ł ò ł ljĬ ŦƦŷƣŴƉĪ ò Ņ ł ĥ IJĬŴƊƀƏ ł Ŕ ƈƕĪ .ťſò Ņ űſĥ Ŕ ťƀŨĿ Ŕ ųƆ ƻĥ Ŕ űŶ Ŕ ò ŏ ťŨǁ ô ł Ņ ƎƉõ ƢźƏ

6

ł ķŴƆƞƌĭ Ņ Ō ťſĭǔƟŅ ĶűƟ Ņ IJĬŅ ķŴƌĭűƌĭ ł ł IJųƀƌĭƢƠƌĪ ŏ ƁƇƕ Ņ Ŕ ųƆ ljĥô ĶŤƏŅ ŦĬĭ ŧƢƙƣĪ ô Ņ ň ŧǔſųƉ ł ň Ėťƀìƌ ŤũƆĭĪ.IJ.Ļ ĖķĭĬƦƊƄŷëƆ Ŕ

7

Apart from his Arabic writings, he has (i.e., wrote) one book of poems, this (one) which is in (our) hands. ň And behold, I put it in front of the diligent readers that they would read it and pray for me, and to judge that which their wisdom sees fit. Ph[iloxenos] Y[uhanon] Dolabani.

Ņ

Ņ The Demonym Suffix ťſš A DEMONYM suffix is used to denote the members of a people or inhabitants of a place. In English, for example, the suffix -an is used in American and Roman, and the suffix -ian is used Ņ Ņ. with Parisian (someone from Paris). Syriac uses the suffix ťſš ŏ ĿĪł Ņ Ņ ŏ ĿĪł ‘Damascene’, someone from ľŴƐƉ In Sentence 1 we came across ťƀƟŴƐƉ ł Ņ Ņ Ō ‘American’, ťƀſĿŴƏ Ņ Ņ ŏ ‘Syrian, Syriac’. ‘Damascus’. Similarly, one says ťƀƠſƢƉĥ The same suffix denotes members of a group of people. In Sentence 3, we came across Ņ Ņ ƀƤƉ ŅťƀƤƀũŶ Ņ Ō ‘the solitary’, a member of a monastic group. Similarly, one can say ťƀŷì Ō ‘Christians Ņ Ņ Ō ). (here it is with longer connections so you don’t confuse the letters: ťƀÿŷÿƀƤƉ

Ņ ŏ

The Suffix ŦŁĭš

Ņ ŏ

Ņ

The suffix ŦŁĭš nouns similar Ŕ which is feminine by virtue of the ŦŁ ending, is used to create Ņ ŏł to the English suffix -hood as in brotherhood, or –ness as in holiness; e.g., ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ ‘brotherhood’ ł Ņ from ťŶĥ. Many words in the above passage end in this suffix. It can be used for an office, dignity, Ņ ŏ Ņ Ņ ŏ ŏ Ōň Ņ ŏ ŏ ňň Ņ ŏŅ ł ‘priesthood’, ŦŁŴƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ (or ŦŁŴƘŴƠƐƘĥ ) ‘bishophood’, ŦŁŴƍſƢƙƉ or profession as in ŦŁŴƌųƃ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏ łŌ ł ‘Maph-rianate’, ŦŁŴƃƢſƢźƘ ‘Patriarchate’. Ŕ Ŕ

Patriarch Nuh the Lebanese

129

Ņ ŏ Ņ ł It can also indicate a state, condition, or quality as in ŦŁŴƍƊ Ŕ ſĬ ‘faith’, or to indicate a time Ņ ŏ ł Ņ ŏ ł or period as in ŦŁŴƀ ‘old age’. Ŕ ÿǑ ‘childhood’, and ŦŁŴũƀƏ Ŕ

ň

Revisiting Passive Łĥ Verbs

ň

ň Ōň

The above passage has a number of verbs beginning with ŁŔĥ; e.g. űŔƇſŁŔ ĥ ‘he was born’ from ň ł ň ň Ō ‘gave birth’ in Sentence 1, űŔƊëƆ ł ŁŁ ĥ ‘became a student’ in Sentence 2, ƦŔƕłűŔłſŁŔĥ ‘was known’ űŔƇſ Ņ ‘he Ō ŁŔĥň ‘was elected’ from ťũū in the singular 3rd person feminine form in Sentence 4, Ɓũū ň Ņ Ō elected’ in Sentence 4, and ƁƇƕł ŁŔĥ ‘was elevated’ from ƨíƕ ‘he elevated’ in Sentence 5. Sometimes the meaning of the passive form does not always correspond to the meaning of ň the original form; e.g., IJĪŌŔĿŁŔĥ ‘was instructed’ from ŧ ĪŅŔĿ ‘he followed’ in Sentence 3. Resolving Ambiguities in Letter Numbers In Sentence 1 ljŁĥ is ĥ + Ł + ķ + ĥ = 1,000 + 400 + 50 + 1 = 1451. Why is the first ĥ 1,000 and the second ĥ only 1? Since letter numbers do not allow us to go as high as 1,000, we usually use the corresponding letter from the ones instead, ĥ in this case. Its position in the sequence of letters indicates if it is a one or 1,000, the same way the position of Roman numeral I in IV (4) and VI (6) indicates if it should be added to or subtracted from V (5). In Sentence 4 ĻŁĥ is 1480. In Sentence 5 ŻƘŁĥ is 1489, Ĩ ĽŁĥ is 1493, and Żƌĥ is 1509. Here again, Ł (=400) is the last letter of the alphabet. What do we do to get 500? We simply use ķ which is also used for 50. Of course this causes ambiguity. Now, Żƌĥ could mean 1059 or 1509. But the larger context of the passage clearly indicates 1509. Nuh could not have died before he was born! In ŸƄŨ, note that the initial Ũ is a prefix for in, and Ÿƃ is 28. Of course, there is an ambiguity here as well. The same way we used ĥ for 1000, we can use ħ for 2000. The whole thing will be in this case 2028. But that does not make sense in the sentence as the month of September does not have that many days.

ł

ŏ Letters Revisiting š on ĵĭűŨ ł

We have by now come across many instances where a ĵĭűŨ prefix letter takes š when the Ņ ŏ ł in Sentence 3. From now on, ň ł and ŧĿŴźŨĪ first letter of the word has no vowel, such as ƋŶĿĭ we will no longer show this vowel. About the Reading Most of the ranks of the priesthood were mentioned in the above passage, so let’s list them here. ň Ņ ò ł ‘deacons’, ťƤƀƤƟ ň ò Ō ł ‘elders’, and ťƀƐŶ Ņ ł ò There are three primary ranks of priests: ťƍƤƊƤƉ Ņ ł ). Each rank has its own subranks as follows: ‘bishops’ (singular ťƀƐŶ Ņ Ņ ł ‘deacon’: 1. ťƍƤƊƤƉ Ņ Ņ ł ‘singer’. a. ljƢƉŵƉ

130

Readings b. c. d.

Ņ ŏ Ņ ‘reader, lector’. ťſĭƢƟ Ņ ł ŏ ł ‘subdeacon, half-deacon’. ťƍƠſĪŴƘĥ Ņ Ņ ł ‘evangelical deacon’, which is the first rank that counts as Ņ Ņ ň ł ň ťƍƤƊƤƉ ťƀÿƇŬƌĭĥ

part of the priesthood. ň Ŕ ł (or ķŴƠſűƀƃĿĥ Ņ ł Ō Ŕ ł ) ‘archdeacon’. Ņ ł ƃĿĥ e. ķŴƟŤſű Ņ ŏ Ō ň ŏ ‘chor-episcopos’. Ņ Ō ł ‘elder’. A senior ťƤƀƤƟ Ņ Ō ł may be named ťſĿŴƃ Ņ Ņ ŏ or ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥĿŴƃ 2. ťƤƀƤƟ Ņ ŏ Ō ň ‘bishop’: Ņ ł or ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ 3. ťƀƐŶ Ņ Ō Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ ł may be named ťźƀƆŴƘĭƢźƀƉ a. A senior ťƀƐŶ ‘metropolitan’. ł Ņ Ņ b. ťƍſƢƙƉ ‘Maphrian’, a rank within the Syrian Orthodox Church giving a bishop an autonomous authority in a particular region with other bishops under him. Ņ Ŕ ł Ō źƘł ‘Patriarch’, the supreme head of the church. c. ťƃƢſƢ Exercise 6.15 Ņ Ņ translate the following words into Syriac: 1. Using the demonym suffix ťſš Ō Ō ŏ a. European (Europe = ƁƙſĿĭĥ ) ŏ ň) b. Indian (India = ĭűƌĬ ň Ņ c. Persian (Persia = ĸƢƘ) d. Edessan e. Mesopotamian Ņ ŏ 2. Translate the following words using the suffix ŦŁĭš Ŕ : Ņ ł a. adolescence (from ŧƢũƣ ‘young person’) Ņ Ŕ ł ‘clean’) b. cleanness (from ťƀƃĪ Ņ Ō c. beauty (from ŧƢƀƙƣł ‘beautiful’) 3. Add 15 to each number mentioned in the reading passages, and write the result in letter numbers. 4. Explain the function of Ī in all words that contain it in the reading passage.

6.16 The Flooding of Edessa New Words

ł

ł Abgar ƢŬŨĥ ň Ņ ŦŴźƏĥŅ porch Ņ ł palace ljűƘĥ ň they suffocated ŴƠƍŶ ô ň ł ŁĥŔň ł ƚƏĭŁŁĥ was added òŌ ł sides Ǝƀũū ł (something) happened ŀűū Ņł ƪſĪ Daysan (a river’s name) yard ŦŁĿņĪŅ

nave wise man five hundred they are sitting more, a lot extra Christians night spring

Ņ ƨƄſĬł Ņ Ō ł ťƊƀƄŶ Ņ ł ŦŤƊƤƊŶ Ņ ƎƀŨŌƻ ŌŔ ł Ƣſƻ Ņ Ō ł ŧƢſƻ Ōƃ ňŅ ťƍƀźƐſǔ Ŕ ťƀÿŅLJŌ Ņ ŏ ł ťƕŴũƉ

rain died became full suddenly MaȨnu are thinking they shall do they became full ascended, raised

Ņ ň ŧƢźƉ ƼƉ Ŕ ň Ō Ņ ô ƨƉ ŦĭĬ ŅťƀÿƇƣň ƎƉň ŏ ł ŴƍƖƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀũƤŶƦƉ ŏ ň ķĭűũƖƌ ŏ ķŴƇƉƦƌ Ŕň ň ơƇƏ

Severus they damaged happening, doing slaves slaves of custom

ň ň ĸĭĿŴƏ ŴŶƢƏ ô ł ŅŅ ŧűũƕ ò ł ňŧűũƕ ł òł IJűũƕ ŅŔ Ņ ŧűƀƕ

The Flooding of Edessa

131

Ō Ņ ƎſƢƊƕ ĭƢƠƕ ô ł Ņ Ōł ťƍƀƤƕ ň ƎƤƕ Ņ ł ťſŤƘ Ņ ŏ ŧĿŴƣ

overflown ł Ɨƙƣ ň ň ƦëƆŁ thirteen ŧǔƐƕ Ŕ Ņł Ņ ťƍƟŁ table-land, plateau ł he broke ł ĺĿŁ ŏ they broke it IJĬŴƕĿŁ ô

they are living they tore strong became strong beautiful wall

ł

Reading The following passage is taken from a brief chronicle which is the first to mention the existence of a church in Edessa.1 Ņ ĭł ŦŤƊƤƊŶ Ņ ł ƦŔƍƤ ŏ Ɖł ƢŨł ťƄƇƉł ƢŬŨĥ ň ĬŁŴƄƇ ł ŧǔƐƕňƦłëƆŁ ł Ũł 1 ł Īł ĬŁŴƄƇƊŨĭ ŴƍƖ ĜĸĭĿŴňƏĪ Ŕ Ŕ ƊŨ ň

Ņ ĥ ƎſƢƣŁ įƢſŤ ł ŨŌ ĜťƄƇƉ .IJƢŶ ô

In the year five-hundred and thirteen in his kingdom of Severus, and in his kingdom of kingł Abgar son of king MaȨnu, in the month of November. Ņ

ł ťƀòƉĪł ťƕŴũƉł ŦĭŅĬ ƎƤƕ ň ň Ņ ƅſĥ ơƇƏĭ ĬűŔƀƕ ƎƤƕĭ .ťŨĿł ťƄƇƉ ƢŬŨĥĪ ťŨĿł ljűƘłĥ ƎƉõ ơƙƌĪ ô ň Ņ Ɵł .ťƀƉű

The spring of water which comes out of the great palace of the great king Abgar became strong. And it gained strength and was raised as its former custom. ň

2

ł ŦĭĬ ƨƉĭ Ņ ò ŦŴòźƏĥĭň ŦŁǓŔĪŅ ĭĭłĬô ŴſƢƣĭ ò ķŴƇƉƦŔňƌĪ ŦŁŴƄƇ ò ūł ĵŴƄƆ Ɨƙƣĭ ł ĜƎƀũ .ťƀƉ Ŕ ƉĪł ŦƦŔŨĭ ô

3

ł ň ťƄƇƉ ƢŬŨĥ ķƢƉŅ Ŧ ŵŶ ň ł Ņ űƃĭ ťƄſĥ ųƇſĪ ljűƘĥ ƎƉõ ƈƖëƆĪ ŧĿŴŹĪ ťƍƟƦëƆ ųƆ ŦĭĬô ơƇƏ Ņ ƎƀŨƻĪ ò ƕł IJűłũòƕł ƎſƢƊƕĭ ñ .ŦŁŴƄƇƉĪ ųÿƇſĪ ŧűũ ŔŅ Ŕ

4

ò ķĭųƆ ķĭűũƖňƌ ťƍƉĪŅ ĭĭĬ ƎƀũƤŶłƦŔƉň ťƊƀƄ Ņ ŀűū ò Ŷł űƃĭ ł ŁŁĥ Īň ŧǔſƻł ťƀƊëƆ ł ĜĭĭĬô Ŵƙ ŦĭĬĭ ô Əĭ ô Ō ł ň ł ł ł Ņ .ųŶƢƀŨ ƧĪĭ ųƉŴƀŨ ƧĪņ ƪſĪ ŦŁĥĭ .ťƀLjŨ ťƍƀƤƕĭ ťŨĿ ŧƢźƉň

5

ł .ŦƦƍſôűƉĪ ł ĭ .ŦƦôƍſűƉ Ņ Ɖł ŧĿŴƤëƆ ò ĭĭĬô IJĬŴƕǓ ŏ ťƀƉ ł ŴƇƕĭ ñ ljűƘƧ ĭƢƠƕ Ŕ ťƀŨƢƖ Ŕ ŴŬëƆ Ŕ Ũł ųŨĭ ô Ł ŦƦƖƤ .ťƄƇƉ ķƢƉĪ ťſŤƘĭ ťŨĿ

6

And it became full and overflown to every side, and the yards and porches and houses ł of the kingdom began to be filled (with) water. And when our lord king Abgar saw (this) he went up to the plateau which is above his palace where the servants of the servants of it–the kingdom–sit (i.e., reside) and live. ł

And while the wise were thinking what to do to the extra water which was added, it happened (that) a great and strong rain came at night, and (the river) Daysan came (i.e., overflowed) not in its (regular) day and not in its month. ł

And immediately, the water broke through the western wall of the city, and entered into the ł city. And they tore the great and beautiful palace of our lord the king.

ň Ō ƨƄſųŨ ł Ņ ljųŨ ĭĭĬô ƼƉĭ ł ħĭŁ ĭĭĬô ŴŶ ò ĥ ƎſǓŁ Ņ ǔŌƃĪŔ ŦŁűƕĪ ƎƀƙƆ ƎƉõ Ƣſƻł ŧűũƕ .ťƍƀźƏ Ŕ ô ƢƏĭ ł ò ķĭųƀƇƕ ŴôƇƕł .ťƤƍƀŅòƍŨĪ ł .ĭĭĬô ŴƠňƍŶŁĥĭň ťƀƇƣň ƎƉõ ťƀƉ

And they damaged also the nave of the church of the Christians. And many died in this happening, more than two thousand people. Water entered unto them suddenly and they suffocated.

1

Guidi, Chronica Minora I (1960), p. 1 lines 1-13 and 23-25, p. 2 lines 1 and 4-8.

7

132

Readings

The Ligatures Nj and Ʃ When the letters ĸ and İ come after each other in a word, one can—optionally—write Ņ ň ‘porch’ and ťƍƀźƏǔƃ ňŅ Ō them using the ligature Nj. Examples from the above passage are ŦŴźƏĥ ‘Christians’. Also, when Ľ is followed by ķ at the end of a word, it—optionally—appears as Ʃ. An Ņ ł ‘(river) Daysan’. example from the above passage is ƪſĪ While these ligatures are optional, they are built into many fonts, such as the Meltho fonts. See Section 9.3 on how to break them. Vowels Under Letters Take a look at the word ŦŁĿĪ ņ Ņ in the New Words list above. Note that the vowel is under Ł. ł ł , has a low Ľ which would hit the vowel on top This is so because the word right above it, ƪſĪ Ņ of Ł. To resolve the problem, the vowel was placed under the letter like this Łņ. This is purely a typesetting issue, but can also be found in some manuscripts and even some printed books. The vowels

šŏ šŌ šň šŅ šł

can be written

šŐ šō šʼn šņ šŃ Ņ ŏ . ‘Edessa is our mother.’ There Ņ Ő for ƎƉĥł ň IJĬŌ IJĬĿĭĥ ł ʼn IJĬŌ IJĬĿĭĥ For example, one can write ƎƉĥ are no rules dictating which vowels you can put under the letters, though usually one uses them in the case of tall letters. Variant Spellings (Orthographic Variants) Ņ ŏ Ōň Some words may have more than one spelling. We have come across the word ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ in Ņ ŏ ňň the previous section which is also spelled ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ. Actually both can also be spelled with ň ł ŴƟŅ instead of ŴƟŏ, or even ĥ instead of ĥ. This will give many combinations. Such variants in spellings are usually found in words that come from Greek. Native Syriac words that have ŏ ŏ variant spellings are more rare. We also came across ĵŴƃ and ĵŴźƉň , the older spellings of ŏ ƈƃŏ and ƈźƉň , respectively. These are called ORTHOGRAPHIC VARIANTS. One may also find, especially in older texts, variations in the use of Syomé. In Sentence ŏ ł ‘the water broke through it [the western wall]’. We learned ł ô IJĬŴƕǓŁ ò Ņ ł ĭĭĬ 6 above, we have ťƀƉ ô ł ł that masculine plural verbs like ŴƕĿŁ ô ‘they (m.) broke through’ or ŴŨǁ ô Ŕ ‘they (m.) wrote’ do ł not take Syomé, unlike feminine plural verbs which do such as ƁƕǓŁ ô ‘they (f.) broke through’ ł and ƁŨǁ (f.) wrote’. Our ancient manuscript, however, gives Syomé on the masculine ô ò ‘they ł ŏ . This is not simply a mistake by the scribe, or the editor of the text as one find plural IJĬŴƕǓŁ ô such variant orthographic traditions in other manuscripts.

Grammar: Syomé

133

6.17 Grammar: Syomé New Words

I say ljĥŅ ô masculine verbs, words they are called

Ņ Ņ łŅ ƢƉĥł = ljƢƉĥ Ņ Ņ Ņ ƃĪŔň ťƀƌƢ ňň ƨƉò ň ƦƉ ƎſƢƟ Ŕ ň

are placed dot feminine plural

Ō Ō ň ƎƀƊƀƏŁƦƉ Ņ ŏ Ņ ŦŵƟŴƌň ŅťƀƌŅ ƦũƠƌ Ŕ ŅŅ Ņ Ō ł ťƀƌŤƀŬƏ

we put suffice nouns

ł Ō ƀƏŅ ƎƍƀƊ Ņò Ņ ƎƠƙƏ ňò Ņ ŦųƊƣ

Reading The following passage is taken from the grammar of Elia of Sobha (975-1046).1

Ņ ň Ņ Īň ķĥň ĜťƀòƌŅ ŤƀŬ ò ň ƎſǓŁ Ņ ķĭųƿ ƈƕł ƎƀƊƀƏŁƦƉĪ Ņ Əł Ŧųò Ɗƣ ƈƀƃŔĬŅ ljƢŅł Ɖłĥ ťƀƌŅǔƃ ƎƀƆĬŅ ŦŵƟŴƌĪ Ō ťƤò ňƌĭ ŧǔũūł ƈƕ ƎƍƀƊƀƏĪ Ņ ƅſĥ ò ťƠſĪò Įĭł ŦƦƊòƀƇŶĭ ťƊòƀƇŶĭ ķĭųſƻĥ ŦƦƠſĪĮĭ Ŕ ťƀò ƌŅƦũƠ ņ Ŕ ňƌ ķĥĭ Ō Ņ Ņ ň ł ň ò ò ò ł ò ò ł ł ł ł .ƎƤſűƟ ƦƆŁĭ ƎƀƤſűƟ ŦƦƆŁĭ ƎƀƊƀƇŶ ťƤƊŶĭ ƎƀƠſĪĮ ŧƢƐƕĭ ƎƀƤƌ ƢƐƕĭ Ǝſǔũū ťƤƊŶĭ

1

I say, then, that these dots are two, which are placed on all the plural nouns, whether ň Ņ . ò ň , … , andƎƤſűƟ ò ƦƆŁ they are masculine or feminine, as we place on ŧǔũūł , and ťƤƌ

ň ł :ƅſĥ Ņ Ņ ò ňƌ ķűũƕ Ņ ò Ņ ķűũòƕł IJű ŦƼ ƨƉò ƈƃ ƈƕ ħĭŁ ƎƀƊƀƏŁƦƉĭ ķűũƖ Ŕ ŦƼ Ŕ ò ƌŤŅƀŬƏ Ŕ ò ìƌƦũƠƌ Ŕ ô ò ũƕ Ņ ò ƣĭ Ņ ò ƣĭ Ņ Ƥòňƌĭ ƎƇƠ ł Ņ ƎƇƠ ł ƁÿƇ ò Ơƣĭ .ƎƇƠ Ņ ň ł ò ò And they are placed also on all feminine plural verbs as IJűũƕ … ƎƇƠƤƌ. ô Ņ ŏ ň Ō Ņ ł ò ň ò Ņ .ťƊƀƏ ƎƀƊƀƏŁƦƉ Ƨ ķĭűũƖƌĭ Ǝſűũƕĭ űũƕ ƅſĥ Ŕ ŦƼì Ŕ ƌ ŤƀŬƏ ŦƼì Ŕ ƌǔƃĪ ƎſĪň ƨƉò ƈƕ Ņ ł ŏ ň , Syomé are not Ō and ķĭűũƖƌ On masculine plurals verbs, however, as űũƕ, and Ǝſűũƕ placed.

ň ŦŵƟŴƌò ƎſǓŁ ƈźƉň ƎƀƆĬ ĻĥĭŅ ò ƎſƢƟƦŔƉĪ ĖƎƠŅƙòƏŅ ťƊƀƏ

2

3

4

And also these (i.e., the above) regarding the two dots which are called Syomé suffice.

ň ÿ ķĥň Whether–Or

The Construction ķĥĭ

Ņ

ł Ō ňŅŅ ň ň ťƀƌǔƃĪŔ ķĥ

ŏ Ŕ ň Ņ Ŕ ò ň ķĥĭň ķĭųſƻĥ Sentence 1 has the phrase ťƀƌƦũƠƌ ň feminine’. The whether–or is achieved by ķĥĭň ÿ ķĥ.

‘whether they are masculine or

Revisiting ljĥŅô in Present Tense Verbs In older texts, one can find the Peshitta Bible.

Ņ ł Ņ for ljĥŅ ô ƢƉĥł Ņ ‘I say’. You will find many instances of this in ljƢƉĥ

Exercise 6.17 1. Translate into Syriac: a. Whether you are a boy or a girl. b. Whether he is a priest or a deacon. c. Whether they are deaconesses or students. 2. Place Syomé on the following when applicable:

.ŧĪĬ ŦŁűƖŨ ķƢƉĮ ŦƼìƍƤƊƤƉ .ŦƼƠƍƘ ƎſŁĿŁĭ ťŨǁ ťƤƊŶ ƎƆ ƻĥ 1

a b

Gottheil, A Treatise on Syriac Grammar by Mar(i) Elia of Sobha (1887, Gorgias Press 2003), p. Żƃ

41:30, 42:1-8, and p. ŪƆ 43:26.

134

Readings

.ŦƼũƆ ŴƆĮĥ ťƀǑĭ ťƉĥĭ ťŨĥ

c 3. The lists of words in the reading passage are not translated. Using Smith’s Compendious Syriac Dictionary (or another dictionary), complete the translation.

6.18 How to Cure a Hangover: From the Syriac Book of Medicine DISCLAIMER. Neither the author nor the publisher tried out the following treatment. It is not FDA approved, nor should you perform it. It is given here for amusement only. But if you are a daring person and want to try it, make sure to consult your physician first.

New Words bath blood (i.e., water) rose time it is required is necessary sickness juice

ňł ťƍŨ ò ł ƁƉĪ Ņ ł ŧ ĪĿĭ Ņ ł ťƍŨĮ ľĪĮňŅ łŅ ŸƤŶ ŅťŨŤƃŌ Ņ ƃŏ ĸŴƉŴ

anointing him viola bathing oil arrange, separate feeding lay food

ň ň ųŷƤƊƉ Ņ Ō Ņ ťƄƤƀƍƉ ŏ ŦŁŴƀŷƐƉ Ŕ Ņ ł Ņ ň ťŷƤƉ Ņ ŏ ƦƉ Ŕ ň ň ŴƏƢƘ ł ĬŁŴƀƏĿƦƉ Ŕ ŏ Ņ ň ň Ņ ł Ƨƞƌł ŦŁƢũƀƏ

Ņł ťƉűƕ ňŅò ŏ ƨŨŴƟ ň ŏ Ņ ŦŁŴſĭĿ Ŕ Ņ ň ťƀÿƇƣ ŦŁŴƀÿƇƣ Ŕ ŏ Ņł Ņ ťƠÿƇƣ Ņ ň ŦƦƍƣ Ŕ ň IJĬŴƀƠƤƘŁ ô Ō

until flower drunkenness quietness rest boiling sleep she/it eases him

Reading The following passage is adapted from The Syriac Book of Medicine (edited by Budge, 1913m chapter 17).

ň Ņ Ō ƎſĪ ųƆ ŸƤŶ ł ťƉűƕ ň ŦŁŴƀƇ łŅ ł ĜŦƦƍ .ĬŁŴſĭ ŁĪ ťƍŨŵëƆ Ŕ ƣĭ Ŕ Ŀ IJĬŴƀƠƤƘ Ŕ ƣł ljĬ ťŨŤƄëƆ ô

1

ł ł ň Ņ ƃŏ ƢƀƙƣĪ ň ł ĬŁŴƀÿŷƐƊëƆ Ņ ƦƊƆĭ ł Əł ĬŁŴƀƏĿ ł ŦŁƢŔũƀ Ņ ł ľĪĮň Ņ Ǝƃĭ .ķĭųƇſĪ ĸŴƉŴ ĜťƍũŨ

2

Ņ Ņ ƁƉĪ Ņ ò ŏ ťƠÿƇƣ Ō ł ĭĥ ŧĪĿĭĪł ťŷƤƉĭ Ņ ň ĜƨŨŴƟĪ ò ł Ƨƞƌň ųƤſĿ ƈƕĭ .ťƄƤƀƍƉĪ

3

For this sickness, quietness and sleep are necessary, until the time his drunkenness eases him (i.e., the patient). And then it is required to bathe him in a bath, and to feed him food whose juice is good. ň ň ł And on his head he (the physician) must lay the water of the boiling of flower, and the oil of roses or viola.

Ņ ň ň Ņ ł ĜųŷƤƊƊëƆĭ ħĭŁ ĬŁŴƀŷƐƊëƆĭ ĖŦƦƍƣĭ Ŕ ň ťƀƇƣň ųƆ ŴƏƢƘƦƊëƆĭ

4

And to bathe him again, and to anoint him, and to arrange for him quietness and sleep. Exercise 6.18 Do not do anything!

6.19 Syriac for Fun I New Words said, composed

ł ƢƀƉĥŌ

baptistery

Ņ Ō ŏ ł Ŧƻ Ŕ ĪŴƊƖƉ ƼŨ Ŕ ň

Ņ

ň

Ņ

ň

namesake ťƊƣ ƈƖŨ =ťƊƤƇƖŨ

blessed you are today harp, Kenoro birth

ł ŏ ƅƀŨŴŹ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍƉŴſ ŅŧƢƍƃ Ņň Ņ Ņ ł ŧűëƆŴƉ

Syriac for Fun I sings, chants ł you ƦƌDŽũƠƉ ô ň ł = are receiving womb

135

łł ƢƉŵƉ ł ł ƦƇũƠƉ Ņ ł ťƖŨƢƉ

you are born spiritual sign heavenly

ł ł ň ŁűÿƇſƦƉ Ņ ŌŅ ŏ ŦƼƍŶĭĿ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ťƊƣĭĿ ŅŅ ł ťƍƀƊƣ

Reading This passage demonstrates how Syriac can become a passion and part of your life. It is a Madrosho poem composed by Sebastian Brock on the occasion of the baptism of his namesake Sebastian Kenoro Kiraz in 2004. ł Ņ Ņ ł ň ň Īł ĬűƊƕ ĖŧƢƍƃ ķŤƀźƐũƏ ųƊƤƇƖŨ 1 Ŕ Ņ ƈƕ ĴĭƢŨ ķŤƀźƐũƏ ťƍƙƇƊƆ ƢƀƉĥ ťƣĿűƉ Madrosho said (i.e., composed) by Malphono Sebastian Brock on the Baptism of his Namesake Sebastian Kenoro. Ņ Ņ ł ł ĜķŤƀźƐũƏ ĭĥ ĝťƍƉŴſ ƅƀŨŴŹ 2

Blessed are you today, O Sebastian; For you are receiving the Sign of Heavenly Salvation In the womb of the Spiritual Mother, The Baptistery.

œ ł ł ò ł ĝťƊƣĭĿ ƦƇũƠƉĪ Ņ ł ò ťƀŶĪ ĜťƍƀƊƣ Ņ IJĬñ ĝťƉĥĪň ťƖŨƢƉł ŴŬŨ ĜŦƼì Ŕ ƍŶĭĿ Ŕł ň ł ƼŨĪ ĖŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ Ŕ Ŕ

œ ł ł ƦƉ ĜŁűÿƇſ ƅƀŨŴŹ Ŕ ň ƎƉŴſĪ ň ĝŧƢƍƃ ň ň ł ĜŧƢƍƃ ŦĭĬŁ ĝõƎſĿ ŁĪ ŧűƆŴƉ ŔŅ ł łł ł ĜŧƢũƆĭ ťŨƧ ųƆň ĝťŷŨŴƣ ƢƉŵƉĪ ĖťƣĪŴƟĪ ťŶĭƢƆĭ

3

Blessed are you Kenoro for today you are born A Second Birth. May you become a Harp That sings praise to the Father and the Son And the Holy Spirit. Exercise 6.19 1. Give the meter of the above Madrosho. Indicate any vowel additions/removals the author used to comply with the meter. 2. Rewrite the above Madrosho where the writer now is Mary Johnson, and the baptized child is Mary. 3. Are there any word plays in the above Madrosho? If so, explain them. 4. List any contracted forms in the above Madrosho, and give their full forms. 5. If you have gotten this far, that means you have begun to develop a passion for Syriac. Well done! Now it is time to initiate yourself. Write a poem! Pick a meter, or make up one, and compose away.

136

Readings

6.20 Syriac for Fun II New Words Words marked by * are my neologisms.

Ņ

Ņ

ň

small letter, e-mail* ŦƼƌ Ŕ Ō ŁƢūĥ Ŕ ł ŏ Ņ road, path, way ťŶĿĭĥ ŅŌ ŦŁƢŶĥ another (f.) Ŕ ôň ŏ ň Ņ ň ťƀƌĭǔźƠƆĥ electronic ň ň Ō Internet* ŻƌƢźƌĥ ł ł ň ŒŁĿĪƦƣĥ was sent (f.) Ŕ ł ł ň was presented (as a gift) ƎƣĪŁĥ ň Ņ ňƌ ƼŨ network* ťũƤ ŅŔ ŏ Ņ ŦŁŴƖŨ supplication ŅŔŅ ň Creation ŦƻǔŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ miserable ťſĭĪ ŅŅ ł monk Ņ ťſƢſĪ ŦŁŴƉĪĬ membership Ŕ ŏŅł

tailor computer money order, system* hand of is known knows nickname, last name how many intelligent taxation the one who sets in order

Ņ Ņł ťźƀŶ Ņ ŏŅ ŦƦŨŴƤŶ Ņ Ō ťƊƀŹ Ņ ň ťƐƄŹ űſŔł ƗſűſŌŔŌ ĺűſłŔŅ ŅŅ ŏ ťƀƌŴƃ Ņ ťƊƃ Ņ Ō ťũƀũëƆ Ņ ł ł ŦŁĥűƉ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍƐƄźƉ

Ņ

arrived ƦźƉ Ŕ Ō ň Ņ poor ťƍƄƐƉ ŅŅ ł monitor* Ņ ŏ Ņ ťƍſŁƢƉ ł ň joining (in an ŦŁŴƍƘŁĭƦƤƉ Ŕ activity) ł ň Ƣƃűƌ he shall mention ň Ņ takes ŪƐƌ ŒŁƢƖƏ visited Ŕł ň ł Ņ Ņ ťƀƍƉŁŴƕ Ottoman Ŕ ŏŏ ŅŅ payment ťƍƕĿŴƘ ňŅ worthy, deserving ŅŅ ŦŴƣŏ ťƍźëƆŴƣ Sultan Ņ Ō amazing ŦųƀƉŁ

Reading Here are more passages from real life that were composed by folks with passion for Syriac. E-mail Colophon by George A. Kiraz

Scribes end their manuscripts with long and sometimes very informal colophons (see section 6.14 for an example). I usually end all my books in a colophon, just for fun. Recently, I added the following colophon to my e-mail signature. Ņ łň Œ ł ł ł ƈźƉ ƧŅ ĥň ųƊƣ ł ňƌĪ ŦŴňƣŅ ƧĪŅ ťƀźŅŶĭ ň Ƣƃű Ņ ŦŁŴŔòëƆĽ ł ŧĪĬŔ ŦƼì ł ťſĭĪŅ űŔŶł űŔƀŨ ƌ ŁƢ ŦŁŴƖ Ŕ Ŕ ūĥ ƦŔ ŨǁŁĥŔ 1 Ŕ ò Ũĭ Ō

ň ł Ō Ƨł ŦƦŨŴƤŶŅ ƎƉ ŻňƌƢźƍ ň ŦųƀƉŁ Ō ťŶĿĭŤŨŏ ƎſĪň ŒŁŔ ĿĪłƦƣĥĭ ň ƗſűſĪ ŦŁŔƢŶ ſĥ ƋƤŨ ĜťſĭƢƟĪŅ Ŕ ł ťũƤňƌ Ƽ Ŕ ŨĪ õ ňò Ņ ň ł Ņ Œ ł Ō ł ł Ņ łŔ ťƐƄŹ ťƊƄƆĭ ĜĺűłŔŅſ Ƨ ƥƌôĥ ŁŔ Ƣũƕ ŧĿŁŔĥ ťƍſŤŨĭ ƦŔźƉĪł ťƉűƕ ň ł ĜťũƀũëƆ ťſĭƢƟĪ ťƍſŁƢƊëƆ ŏ ň ŏ Œ ł ň ň Ņ Ņ ň ĖŦƻǔ Ŕ Ũ ƎſųƿĪ ťƍƐƄźƉ Ŧųƭ Ƨĥ ĺűſŔ Ƨ ƥƌôĥ Ļĥ ŁŔ ƢƖƏ ťƀƌĭǔźƠƆĥ

This small-letter (i.e., email) was written by one miserable (person) and sinner who does not deserve to mention his name, but for (the sake of receiving) the prayers and supplications of the reader, and it was sent through the amazing way of the network which is known by the name Internet, from (one) computer to another until it reached the monitor of the intelligent reader; and through which region it passed, no one knows, and how many electronic systems it visited, also no one knows, but God who sets in order all the Creation. Stamp by David Taylor of the University of Oxford

2

Syriac for Fun II

137

David who is ‘Taylor’ by nickname, the miserable who is sinner by nature. 2007 A.D. Ex Libris Note by Eugene Aydin

Fr. Eugene, a monk (recently consecrated as Mor Polycarpus of The Netherlands), had asked if he can get a subscription to Mardu, the newsletter of Beth Mardutho (The Syriac Institute). I told him he had to pay—in one way or another—the membership dues. So he donated a book to the Institute in lieu of membership in which he inscribed: ł ł Ņ ł Ņ ł ň ťƊƀŹ ƎƕĿŴƙƆĪ Ņ ł ł ƅſĥ ƎƉõ ŦŁĭĪƢƉ ƼũƆ ljĬ ťŨǁ 3 ŦŁŴƉĪĬĪ Ŕ Ǝƀūĭĥ ťſƢſĪ Ŕ ƎƣĪŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ł ŦŁŴƍƘŁĭƦƤƉĪ Ŕ

Ņ Ō ò ň ťſǔſĪ ƎƉõ ŦŁĥŔűƉ ň Ņ Ļĥ ťƀƍƉ Ņ ł ŁŴƕ ł Ŕ ł ŪƐƌ .ťƍƄƐƉ ƼŨĪ Ŕ Ŕ ťƍźëƆŴƣ ƅſĥ ƁūĿŴū .ŦŁĭĪƢƉ Ŕ

This book was presented to Beth Mardutho from the monk Eugene instead of paying the money of joining of the membership of Beth Mardutho. George, like an Ottoman Sultan, also takes taxation from poor monks. Revisiting The Diminutive Ņ ŏ as in ljŴŨǁ Ņ ŏ Ņ Ŕ . The feminine We came across the diminutive suffix for masculine nouns, ljĭš Ņ ŌŅ Ņ ŌŅ łň suffix is ŦƼƌš as in ŦƼƌ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƢūĥ Ŕ , a neologism I came up with for an e-mail message. Transliterating Foreign Words Every language has foreign words, and Syriac is no exception. We came across many in this Ņ Ŕ ł Ō ł ‘Patriarch’, ťƠſƢƉĥ Ō Ŕ ‘Christian’, etc. ł Ō ň ł ‘America’, ťƐƀŹƢƟ Ņ ł ł ‘paper, card’, ťƀƍƀźƐſƢƃ ŅŅŅ book: ťƃƢſƢźƘ The Syriac fathers used emphatic letters, like İ and ľ, when they transliterated Greek t ł Ō ň ł and ŻƌƢźƌĥ ň ň Ō. and k. I followed the same tradition in ťƠſƢƉĥ Word Play Because words in Syriac are derived from roots, this gives the writer a good opportunity to use word play. A word play is a literary technique used by authors to use the same word in different ways; e.g., the use of hang in If we don't hang together, we'll hang separately by Benjamin Franklin. Ņ ň,a In the first reading passage, I used two words from the root ƑƄŹ. The first is ťƐƄŹ word that already exists in Syriac to mean order for which I assigned the meaning system. The Ņ Ņ ł , a reference to God who sets things (i.e., the Creation) in order. second is ťƍƐƄźƉ David Taylor also uses word play in his stamp. Can you find it? Ņ Ņł Ņ Ņ , and ťźƀŶ Ņ Ņ ŏ with ťƍƀƃ Ņ Ņ ł . Here each pair does not originate from with ťƀźŶ Compare ťƀƌŴƃ the same root, but by simply shifting a few letters, David came up with different senses for the word. Smart isn’t it?

7 Grammar This chapter gives a grammatical description of what has been covered in this book and much more. Additional information is marked with New. The style in this chapter, written as a reference, differs from previous chapters which were written in a tutorial style.

7.1 Writing System Scripts §1. There are three Syriac scripts: Estrangelo, Serto or West Syriac, and East Syriac. §2. Estrangelo is the oldest. It first appears in coins and inscriptions of the first century. The first dated manuscript using Estrangelo is from 411 A.D. Estrangelo is found in many scholarly editions of texts. Within the Syriac communities, today it is mainly used for headings. Estrangelo is introduced in Chapter 8. §3. Serto is also called West Syriac because it is used by the West Syriac churches. While it has an ancestry that goes to the first centuries of the Christian Era, it emerged as a distinct script around the seventh century. §4. East Syriac is used by the East Syriac Churches. It emerged as a distinct script around the sixth or seventh century. It is introduced in Chapter 8. The Alphabet §5. The Syriac alphabet consists of 22 letters. They appear in the following table along with their counterparts in Hebrew, Arabic, and the closest corresponding English sound. Name Syriac Hebrew ĥ Olaph Béth ħ Gomal Ĩ Ī Dolath Hé Ĭ Waw ĭ Į Zayn ʗéth į ʝéth İ IJ Yudh Koph Ĵ Lomadh ĵ

Arabic

Sound

ʠ ʡ ʢ ʣ

΍ Ώ Egyptian Ν

Ω ˰ϫ ϭ ί Ρ ρ ϱ ϙ ϝ

ʤ

ʥ ʦ ʧ ʨ ʩ ʫ ʬ 139

(silent) b as in boy g as in give d as in dad h as in home w as in we z as in zebra ʘ (see §6) ʜ (see §6) y as in yet k as in kilo l as in let

140

§6. §7. §8. §9.

Grammar

Ķ ʭ ϡ m as in meet Mim Nun ķ ʰ ϥ n as in not ĸ ʱ α s as in sand Simkath Ȩé ĺ ʲ ω (see §6) Phe Ļ ʴ ϑ f as in fat Ľ ʶ ι ʛ (see §6) ʙodhé Qoph ľ ʷ ϕ q (see §6) Rish Ŀ ʸ έ r (rolled, see §6) ŀ ʹ ε sh as in shame Shin Taw Ł ʺ Ε t as in tea The following letters do not have exact corresponding sounds in English, for which see the respective sections in Chapter 1: į, İ, ĺ, Ľ, ľ, and Ŀ. Syriac is written from right to left. When letters are joined they connect with each other. The following letters are rightjoining only: ĥ, Ī, Ĭ, ĭ, Į, Ľ, Ŀ, and Ł. Letter shapes change depending on their position in the word as shown below: Name

ł Ņ ƚƆĥ ƼŨň ł Ņ ƈƊū ł Ņ ƦƆĪ ŦĬň ĭĥĭł ƎſĮł ƼŶňň ƼŹ ĪŴſŏ ƚƃŅ ł Ņ űƊëƆ ƋƀƉŌ ķŴƌŏ ł ň ǂƊƏ ťƕň ťƘň ŧĪň ĽŅ ƚƟŅ ƥſĿŌ ƎƀƣŌ ł ĭĥŁ

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Stand-alone Position

ť Ū ŭ ű ų Ŵ ŵ Ÿ Ż Ɓ ƅ ƈ Ƌ Ǝ Ƒ Ɨ ƚ ƞ ơ Ƣ ƥ Ʀ

ť ũ Ŭ ű ų Ŵ ŵ ŷ ź ƀ Ƅ Ƈ Ɗ ƍ Ɛ Ɩ ƙ ƞ Ơ Ƣ Ƥ Ʀ

ĥ Ũ ū Ī Ĭ ĭ Į Ŷ Ź ſ ƃ Ɔ Ɖ ƌ Ə ƕ Ƙ Ľ Ɵ Ŀ ƣ Ł

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ ĭ Į į İ IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

Writing System §10.

§11.

141

Alterations take place with some letters when they connect to others: When rightjoining, ĥ becomes ť, Ī and Ŀ become ű and Ƣ, respectively, and İ and Ł become Ż and Ʀ. When left-joining, Ĵ, ĵ, Ķ, and ķ become ƃ, Ɔ, Ɖ, and ƌ, respectively. At the end of the word and when right-joining ķ becomes Ǝ. New. The following pairs of letters resemble each other in shape: ĥ and Į, ħ and ƃ, Ī and Ŀ, Ĭ andĭ, IJ and į, ĵ and ĺ, and Ļ and ľ.

Vowels §12. Syriac vowels are symbols that are written above (sometimes below) the letters they affect. West Syriac has five vowels. They are: Name

Ņ Ņ ťŶƦƘ Ņ Ņ ťƙƟĮ ŅŅ ŦƞŨĿ ŅŅ ŦƞũŶ Ņ ŦĽŅ ƞƕ §13.

§14. §15. §16.

› ºŅ š¡ ºŌ šŏ šŏ

Sound

ő šŇŎ š º£ IJõ ĭõ

Sound

Shape

Read a as in man Read o as in go Read e as in men Read ee as in meet Read oo as in boo ŏ The vowel š is always followed by ĭ as in ĭĬŏ ‘he’ with the sole exception of ƈƃ ‘all’ ŏ ň and ƈźƉ ‘because’ (both of which appear with ĭ in early texts). It is this combination that makes the vowel. Ō The vowel š is usually, but not always, followed by IJ as in IJĬŌ ‘she’. Vowel signs are optional and rarely appear in texts. New. The vowel shapes shown in §12 were introduced by Jacob of Edessa (d. 708). There is an older system using dots which is still used today in combination with the Jacob of Edessa vowels. These are shown below:

Name

Ņ Ņ ťŶƦƘ Ņ Ņ ťƙƟĮ ŅŅ ŦƞŨĿ ŅŅ ŦƞũŶ Ņ ŦĽŅ ƞƕ

Shape

ő

e.g., ĭĬŎ for ĭĬł ‘that’.

Ň

e.g., ŦĬ for ŦĬŅ ‘behold’.

Ň

Ņ

e.g., ŧƢƐŨŊ for ŧƢƐŨň ‘flesh’. e.g., IJĬ õ for IJĬŌ ‘she’.

e.g., ĭĬ õ for ĭĬŏ ‘he’.

ň

ŏ

In addition, there is a (longer) variant of š, šŋ as in ƎƉŋ for ƎƉň ‘from’, and a variant of š, ŏ ‘to you’. These mostly affect pronunciation in East Syriac but ñ for ķŴƄëƆ ĭñ as in ķŴƄƆ can be found in West Syriac texts. Diacritic Points and Other Orthographic Signs ňò Ņ §17. Two dots called ťƊƀƏ appear on plurals. Historically, the dots appear closer towards the end of the word. §18. A single dot above the feminine suffix Ĭñ distinguishes it from its masculine ň Ņ ‘his book’, ųŨǁ ñ Ņ Ņ ‘her book’. counterpart Ĭ; e.g., ųŨǁ

142 §19. §20. §21.

§22.

§23.

§24.

Grammar

Ņ

Ņ

Ņ ł , appears with a line under it; e.g., ŦƦƍſűƉ A silent letter, called ťƍÿƇźũƉ ô Ō ‘city’ with a silent ƌ. In some traditions the line is slanted, and sometimes is placed above the letter. Ņ ŏ A ‘decorative’ line is used above abbreviations and numbers; e.g., ħŴƣ for ťŷŨŴƣ Ņ ł ƢźƘ Ō ł ‘Patriarch’, űƟ ƦƍƤŨ ł ł ‘in the year 104’. ‘glory’, ƢźƘ for ťƃƢſ The letters in ƦƙƃűŬŨ can be pronounced with a ‘hard’ (plosive) sound, or with a corresponding ‘soft’ (fricative) sound (see §48 ff. for details). A dot under the letters indicates the fricative sound, e.g., ħŔ , and a dot above it indicates the plosive sounds, e.g., ħœ. These dots are optional. A single dot above or below words is used to distinguish homographs; e.g., ƎƉñ for ƎƉł and ƎƉõ for ƎƉň. Following is a list of common homographs: a. ĭĬñ for ĭĬł ‘that (m.)’, ĭĬõ for ĭĬŏ ‘he’. b. IJĬñ for IJĬŅ ‘that (f.)’, IJĬõ for IJĬŌ ‘she’. c. ƎƉñ for ƎƉł and ƎƉõ for ƎƉň ‘from’. New. A single dot above the first letter of a verb indicates the present tense; e.g., ň ħƦƃñ for ħǁŅ ‘he is writing’. A single dot below the first letter indicates the past ł tense; e.g., ħƦƃõ for ħǁ ‘he wrote’. A single dot to the right of a final Œ Ł marks a verb in the past tense singular 3rd ł Œ Ŕ ł Ŕ ň ‘she wrote’, as opposed to ƦŨǁ feminine form, e.g., ƦŨǁ Ŕ ‘you Ŕ ň Ŕ ň ‘I wrote’ or ƦŨǁ wrote’. In East Syriac, two dots under the ŁŒ is used for this purpose, e.g., ƦŨ Œ Ʀƃ (the East Syriac script is introduced in Chapter 8).

Punctuation §25. Four points, Ė, are usually used at the end of large units such as paragraphs and stanzas or as couplet in poems to mark the end of the unit. §26. The period marks the end of a sentence. §27. Clauses within a sentence are marked with :, ĝ, or Ĝ. Other variant points can be found in manuscripts and Bible editions. §28. New. A series of marks can be used to mark the end of a chapter or text division, especially in Biblical editions, e.g., Ė.Ė.Ė.Ė. Ligatures §29. Ligatures occur when two or more letters are joined as a single glyph (character). In the Serto script, ťƆ is written Ƨ, and Ɔĥ at the beginning of a word is optionally, but Ņ Ņ ł ‘God’. frequently written ƭ as in ŦųëƆĥ §30. Optional ligatures include Nj for ĸ followed by İ , and Ʃ for Ľ followed by final ķ . A cross-word ligature is ǃ for ĵ ending a word followed by ĥ beginning a new word, Ņ ł ł ň for ťŨĥŅł ĵĮĥłň ‘the father left’. e.g., ťŨǃĮĥ §31. Some printed types and fonts implement ligatures that are less recognizable. Examples include the following ligatures from the Serto Jerusalem font (part of the

Phonology

143

Meltho font package available from www.bethmardutho.org): Ǒ for ƇŹ, and LJ (two Lomadhs) for ƇƆ. The ĵĭűŨ Prefixes

ŏ

ǁ for Ʀƃ, ƻ for Ʀſ ,

ŏ

Ņ ‘mouth’: ťƉŴƙŨ Ņ The letters in ĵĭűŨ act as prefixes; e.g. with ťƉŴƘ ‘in the mouth’, ŏ ŏ ŏ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƉŴƘĪ ‘of the mouth’, ťƉŴƘĭ ‘and the mouth’, ťƉŴƙëƆ ‘to the mouth’. More than one ĵĭűŨ letter may be prefixed to a word. When the word to which a ĵĭűŨ letter is attached begins with a consonant that has ł Ņ Ņ ‘book’: ťŨǂŨ Ņ Ņ ł ‘in the book’, ťŨǂŨĪ ŅŅ ł no vowel, the ĵĭűŨ letter takes š; e.g. with ťŨǁ Ņ Ņ ł ł ‘and which is in the book’. ‘which is in the book’, ťŨǂŨĪĭ ŏ letter is prefixed to a word that begins with ĥ, the vowel of the ĥ moves When a ĵĭűŨ Ņ ł ‘father’, ťŨĥŅĭł ‘and father’. In East Syriac, however, the to the ĵĭűŨ letter; e.g., ťŨĥ Ņł . vowel remains on the ĥ; e.g., ťŨĥĭ The prefix ħ means in. Ņ ŏ ‘of the book’. 2) As The prefix Ī has many usages: 1) For the possessive of; e.g., ťƉŴƘĪ ň ŏ łł ł Ō ‘Emmanuel a relative pronoun introducing a relative clause; e.g., IJƦŶŁŁĥĪň ƈſĥŴƍƊƕ Ņ łň who descended’. 3) To introduce quotations; e.g., ŦŁĪ ƢƉĥ ‘he said, “come”.’ The prefix ĭ means and. ł The prefix ĵ means to, but is also frequently used as an object marker; e.g., ƈũū ŅŅ Ņ Ņ ĶĪƧ Ŧųƭ ‘God fashioned Adam’.

§32. §33. §34.

§35.

§36. §37.

§38. §39.

7.2 Phonology §40.

When there is a sequence of two consonants in a word without a vowel on either of ň them, a schwa (short š sound) is read, but not written, after the first consonant; e.g., ň ł (the sequence of three consonants is ŷìƌű).1 ťŷìŅ ƌűƉł is read as if it were ťŷìŅ ƌűƉ The Term Schwa Ņ ł ò were two The linguistic term schwa originates in Syriac. The Syriac ťſŴƣ vertical points, : , next to a word and marked accent. The mark first appears in a manuscript from 411, now preserved at the British Library—it is also the first dated Syriac manuscript. The term itself was used by the Syriac grammarian Jacob of Edessa (d. 709).

1

ŅŅ ł There are two types of schwas, vocal and silent. The vocal is marked with a line called ťƍƀūųƉ

Ņ Ņ ł ‘runner’ to denote that the first consonant ťƍŹĬƢƉ Ņ Ņ ł is used when the second should be pronounced fast. In his lexicon, Thomas Audo states that ťƍƀūųƉ Ņ ł Ņ ł ł ŏ Ņ of the two consonants is one of the letters in ŧĿĬŴƌ ƁƇƊƕ, and ťƍŹĬƢƉ is used with the first of the Ņ ł ł two consonants is not one of the letters in ŧĿĬŴƌŏ ƁƇƊƕ.

‘vocal’ and the silent with a similar line called

144

Grammar Later, Hebrew borrowed the sign and term schwa but for a different function, marking a very short vowel. The term was then adopted by German philologists, and later by modern linguists. The Oxford English Dictionary gives a citation for the word schwa in English from as early as 1895. The International Phonetic Alphabet symbol for schwa (ԥ) was in the original IPA of 1886.

§41.

§42. §43.

§44.

§45.

New. Historically, the schwa mentioned above used to be after the second consonant as Ņ ň ł . This is known to us from other phonological phenomena of if the word was ťŷƌűƉ the language. Unlike this Primer, all western grammars of Syriac note the historical schwa and not the one received from the reading tradition. ł ň Short vowels (š, š, and ĭñ—see §16 for the latter) in open syllables are deleted. For Ņ ł Ņ ł ň ł becomes ĴŁűƆĭĥ example, Ĵš Ŕ ň (see section 6.13 for more detail). Ŕ + Łš + űƆĭĥ The six letters in ƦƙƃűŬŨ have two pronunciations, plosive and fricative. For the dot that distinguishes the sounds, see §21. For more details on the rules that govern these sounds, see §48 ff. New. Doubling of letters in pronunciation occurs in East Syriac only. (Knowing its rules helps learning ƦƙƃűŬŨ rules.) A consonant that is preceded by a short vowel ł ň (š, š, and ĭñ—see §16 for the latter), and also has a vowel is doubled; e.g., the İ in ň ƈźƟł is preceded by šł and has the vowel šň. In East Syriac only, it is read qaʞʞel. Ņ Ņ ñ (it is ťƣĪŴƟ Ņ Ņ ŏ in West Syriac); it is pronounced quddasha with a Another example is ťƣĪŴƟ double Ī. New. A number of words have an historical ƌ which is written but not pronounced; ł ł ŏ ł ň ł Ņ ł Ņ Ō e.g., ŦƦƍƣ ô ô , ķĭƦƌĥô and ƎſƦƌĥô ‘you’. ô ‘year’, ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ŕ ‘city’, and the pronouns Ʀƌĥô, IJƦƌĥ

Syllabification §46. New. SYLLABIFICATION is the process by which one divides a word into syllables, and is helpful to determine if a ƦƙƃűŬŨ letter is hard or soft. There are two types of Ņ syllables in Syriac: open syllable consisting of a consonant and a vowel such as Ƨ, and a closed syllable consisting of two consonants separated by a vowel such as ķŴƉŏ. Using C to denote a consonant and V to denote a vowel, the two syllable types are Ņ ŏ ł ŏ then is made up of the syllables ƇƉł (CVC), Ŵƃ (CV), CV and CVC. The word ŦŁŴƄÿƇƉ Ŕ Ņ ł Ņ is made up of the syllables ƉŅ (CV) and ķƢł (CVC). Using a and ŦŁŔ (CV); the word ķƢƉ Ņ ŏ dash to separate syllables, the syllabification of ŦŁŴƄÿƇƉł is CVC-CV-CV (as the final ĥ Ņ ł Ņ is CV-CVC. is silent, it counts as part of the final ťš vowel), and that of ķƢƉ §47. New. An extra consonant may appear in a consonant cluster. In such a case, the syllable begins with two consonants instead of one. This syllable type is denoted by Ņ Ņ Ņ Ŕ , for example, is made up of the syllables ǁ CCV. The word ťŨǁ Ŕ (CCV) and ťŨŅ (CV);

Phonology

145

Ņ Ņ Ŕ is Cł , for example, has one syllable CCVC. The syllabification of ťŨǁ the verb ŪƐƌ CV-CV, and that of ŪƐƌ is C-CVC. Rukokho and Qushoyo: ƦƙƃűŬŨ §48.

§49. §50. §51. §52.

§53.

§54.

§55.

§56.

Six letters of the alphabet in the mnemonic ƦƙƃűŬŨ have two sounds each, one hard Ņ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ). The sounds are: Ņ Ņ ŏ ) and one soft (called in Syriac ťƄƃĭĿ (called in Syriac ťƀƣŴƟ ŅŔ Ņ ŏ ) Ņ Ņ ŏ ) Soft Sound (ťƄƃĭĿ Letter Hard Sound (ťƀƣŴƟ ħ b as in boy v in victory Ĩ g as in give German ch in acht ‘eight’ or Arabic ύ Ī d as in dad th in that ƃ k as in kilo French r in Paris or Arabic Υ Ļ p as in pin f in fat Ł t as in tea th in thin œ œ œ űŬŨ œ œ œ and a soft The hard sound is optionally marked with a dot above the letters Ʀƙƃ sound with a dot under ƦƙƃűŬŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ. West Syriac today almost never uses soft ħŔ or hard Ļœ. New. The four rules of Qushoyo and Rukokho presented below are based on syllabification1 (see above §46 and §47). New. The Rule of Qushoyo (Q). A ƦƙƃűŬŨ letter is Qushoyo when it follows a Ņ œ Ņ (CVC-CV where I denote the ƦƙƃűŬŨ letter in bold) closed syllable CVC; e.g., ťũƐƌ Ņ œ ł (CVC-CV) ‘where?’, ň œ ŁŃ (CVC-CVC) ‘translated’, ŧĪňœ Ŵƌł (CVC-CV), ťƄſĥ ‘she took’, ƋūĿ Ņ œ ň (CVC-CV) ‘potter’s vessel’, ŁƢƉĮ œ ł (C-CVC-C) ‘you sang’. ťƘƞŶ New. The First Rule of Rukokho (R1). A ƦƙƃűŬŨ consonant is Rukokho when it Ņ Ŕ Ņ (CV-CV) ‘good’, ťŬƀƏ follows an open syllable CV; e.g., ťũŹ ŔŅ Ņ (C-CV-CV) ‘fence’, Ņ Ŕ Ō ł (CV-CV-CV) Ņ Ŕ ƤŏŶň (CV-CV-CV) ‘dark’, ťƙſƞſ Ņ Ŕ ŏ Ņ (CV-CV-CV) ‘rebellious’, ťƃŴ ŧĪĭƢƉ Ņ ŏ Ņ ł ‘careful’, ŦŁŴƍƊſĬ (CVC-CV-CV-CV) ‘faith’. Ŕ New. The Second Rule of Rukokho (R2). A ƦƙƃűŬŨ letter is Rukokho when it ł Ŕ (C-CVC) ‘purchased’, ŴŬŨ follows an extra consonant C; e.g., ƎŨĮ Ŕł Ņ (C-CVC) ‘inside’, ł ł Ņ Ŕ (C-CV) ‘one’, ƢƄƏ ŧűŶ Ŕ (C-CVC) ‘closed’, ơƙƌŔ (C-CVC) ‘went out’, ŦƦƣ Ŕ (C-CVC) ‘six’. New. The Third Rule of Rukokho (R3). A ƦƙƃűŬŨ letter is Rukokho when it ends a Ņ Ŕ ł (CVC-CV) ‘hope’, ŧƢŬƘ Ņ ł (CVC-CV) ‘flesh’, űƍƕ closed syllable CVC; e.g., ŧƢũƏ Ŕ ł (CŔ ł Ņ Ŕ ł (CVC-CV) ‘morning’, Ʀŷì ł Ŕ (CVC-CVC) ‘succeeded’, ŧƢƘĽ CVC) ‘died’, ƢƤƃĥ Ŕ ň ƌ (C-CVC) ‘descended’. Ņ Ņ œ ƎƉň New. The above rules apply across word boundaries in West Syriac only; e.g., ljųƃ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ljĬ Ņ Ņ ‘this priest’; ljųƃ Ņ Ņ œ ĭĬł ‘that priest’ but ljųƃ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ĭĬŏ ‘he, the ‘from the priest’ but ljųƃ Ņ ł ‘mind’ priest’ (note that the ĭ and IJ in diphthongs count like a consonant, as in ljĭĬ Ņ and ŦƼŨł ‘house’). If a ƦƙƃűŬŨ begins a sentence or phrase, it is always hard.

The rules above are based on George A. Kiraz’s Introduction to Syriac Spirantization (Rukkňkhô and Quššňyô) (Bar Hebraeus Verlag, 1995). 1

146

Grammar New. Doubling (see §44) must be applied when determining if a ƦƙƃűŬŨ letter is ň ł hard or soft. For instance, in ƈƖƘ-type verbs the second consonant is doubled; e.g., ň ł is qabbel and its syllabification is then CVC-CVC (as if with two ħs). By rule R3 ƈũƟ the first ħŔ would be soft, and by rule Q the second ħœ would be hard as in qavbel. By ňœ ł assimilation, however, the first ħ turns hard and the whole thing would be ƈũƟ qabbél. Rule Q also applies on a doubled letter that looses its vowel through Ō œ ł ‘they accept’ from ƎſšŌ+ƈũƠƉ ň œ ł , ƦƇũƟ derivation; e.g., ƎƀƇũƠƉ Ŕ ł œ ł ‘she accepted’ from ł ň ł. Łš Ŕ +ƈũƟ Ņœ New. The silent ƌ is also considered in syllabification; e.g., ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ŕ with a hard Łœ. New. Greek words retain the original Greek sound in West Syriac, but in East Syriac Ņ Ŕ ł Ō Ƙłœ Patriarch, ťƀƘŴƏŴƇƀƘ ł Ō Ŕ ŏ ŏ ŏ Ŕ Philosophy (Greek p is the above rules are applied; e.g., ťƃƢſƢź soft ĻŔ when it appears as ph in English, e.g., philosophy). New. Exceptions to the above rules include: ň a. The suffixes ķŴƃŔ and ƎƀƃŔ always have a soft ƃŔ regardless of what comes before them. ŏ ł ‘afraid’. Ņ Ņ Ŕ is always with a soft ŁŔ as in ljƦëƆŴŶĪ Ņ ŅŔ b. The suffix ljŁ c. The 3rd person feminine and the 1st person when attached to the object pronoun are distinguished from each other by a soft ŁŔ in the former and a ň ňœ ł ň ł hard Łœ in the latter; e.g., ĬƦÿƇźƟ ljĥŅ ‘I killed him’, ĬƦÿƇźƟ IJĬŌ ‘she killed Ŕ him’. Ņ d. In verbs whose roots end in ĥ as ƨū, the Ł of the 1st person is soft as ň œ Ō ł Ʀƌĥł . expected, ƼƇū Ŕ Ō ł ljĥŅ but hard in the 2nd person ƼƇū ô ň ň e. A soft ŁŔ assimilates into a hard Łœ if followed by Ī, İ, or another Ł; e.g., ĪƢŹŁĥœ ł ł œ œň ò Ņ ł œ ł ‘and breasts’, ħǁŁŁĥ ‘was kicked out’, ťſĪŁĭ ‘was written’. f. The third consonant in a number of nouns is soft regardless of rule Q. The Ņ ł Ņ Ŕ ł ‘milk’, ťŨĬĪ Ņ Ŕ ł ‘gold’, and ŦŁűŶ most common ones are ťũÿƇŶ Ŕ Ŕ ‘new’. New. Some homographs are distinguished from each other using soft and hard Ņ ŏœ ł Ņœ Ō Ņ Ō ‘treasure’, and ŦŁĭűŶ sounds. The most common are ŦƦƊƀƏ ‘composition’, ŦƦƊƀƏ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏł ‘bride’, ŦŁĭűŶ Ŕ Ŕ ‘joy’.1

§57.

§58. §59.

§60.

§61.

7.3 Pronouns Personal Pronouns §62. The personal pronouns are:

Ņ ŏł ŦŁĭűŶ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ł ŏ had to be read as bi-syllabic to fit the poetic meter: ŦŁĭűŶ Ŕ Ŕ (without š). This may indicate a historical bi-syllabic origin of the word, which would then explain the soft ĪŔ (Brock, personal communication). 1

Sebastian Brock found an instance in a poem (may have been by Saint Ephrem) where

Pronouns

147

Singular

Table 16. Personal Pronouns.

3

2

ĭĬŏ IJĬŌ ł Ʀƌĥô ł IJƦƌĥ ô ô ň ljĥŅ ŏň ķŴƌĬ ňň ƎƀƌĬ ŏ ł ķĭƦƌĥô ň ł ƎſƦƌĥô ł ƎƍŶ

M F M F

1

Plural

3

2

M F M F

1

He She You You I They They You You We

Demonstrative Pronouns §63. The demonstrative pronouns are:

Singular

Table 17. Demonstrative pronouns.

This

Plural

That This That

M F M F M F M F

ŅŅ ljĬ ňŔŅ ŧĪĬ ĭĬł IJĬŅ ň Ņ ƎƀƆĬ ŏŅ ķŴƌĬ ňŅ ƎƀƌĬ

Possessive Pronouns ň Ņ Ŕ ‘his book’ or as a §64. The possessive pronouns can take the form of suffixes as in ųŨǁ ň Ņ Ņ Ŕ . The various forms are listed in section 5.1. separate word as in ųƇſĪŌ ťŨǁ Interrogative Pronouns Ņ Ņ , and ƎƉŅ §65. New. The interrogative pronouns are ƎƉł ‘who?’ (of person), and ťƉŅ, ťƍƉ ‘what?’ (of things). ň ł for plural Ņ ł for masculine, ŧűſĥ Ņ œ ł for feminine, and ƎƀƇſĥ §66. The pronoun for which? is ťƍſĥ feminine and masculine.

148

Grammar

Enclitics ł ô ‘we’; e.g., §67. The 1st person personal pronouns appear in enclitic form as ljĥŅô ‘I’ and ƎƍŶ ň Ō Ŕ Ņ ‘we write’ (read koth-bee-nan). When the 1st ł ô ƎƀŨǁ ljĥŅ ô ħǁ Ŕ Ņ ‘I write’ (read ko-theb-no), ƎƍŶ person pronoun is coupled with itself, it gives the meaning of the verb to be (i.e., am); ň e.g., ljĥŅ ô ljĥŅ ‘I am’. §68. New. The 3rd person personal pronouns appear in enclitic form as ĭĬô ‘he’ and ‘IJĬô’. When coupled with the 2nd person pronoun, it gives the meaning of the verb to be; ŏ ł Ō ł e.g., ĭĬô Ʀƌĥ ô ô ‘you are’. ô and IJĬô IJƦƌĥ ł Ņ ‘this is’, and ŧĪňŔĬŅ Ņ Ņ becomes ŴƌĬ §69. New. With the enclitic pronouns ĭĬô and IJĬô, ljĬ Ņ Ŕ Ņ ‘this is’. becomes IJĬô ŧĪĬ

7.4 Nouns §70.

Nouns are classified by gender and number. Gender can either be masculine or feminine. Number can be either singular or plural. Another classification peculiar to Aramaic is state which is discussed below.

Gender Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ Ņ ł ‘boy’ and ŦƼǑ §71. Masculine nouns typically end in ťš and feminine ones in ŦŁ; e.g., ťƀÿǑ Ņ ŌŅ ł Ņ Ņ ł ‘(male) teacher’ and ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ ‘(female) teacher’. ‘girl’, ťƍƙÿƇƉ §72. These endings can be used as a clue to determine the gender of words. Hence, one Ņ Ō ł Ņ Ņ ‘book’ is masculine, while ŦƼƠƍƘ can conclude that ťŨǁ ‘codex’ is feminine. Care Ņ must be taken as in rare occasions the ŦŁ ending may be part of the word and not an Ņ Ņ ending; e.g., ŦƼŨł ‘house’ is masculine. There are also feminine words that end in ťš; Ņ ň ‘ship’, ťƕĿĥ Ņ ł ‘earth’, and ťƍƀƄƏ Ņ Ō ł ‘knife’. Ņ ŏ ‘road’, ťƙëƆĥ e.g., ťŶĿĭĥ Ņ ŏ §73. Pair body parts are usually feminine while single ones are masculine; e.g., ťƉŴƘ Ņ Ō ‘hand’ is feminine. Exceptions include the masculine ‘mouth’ is masculine, while ŧűſĥ Ņ ň ‘wing’, ťƕĿĪ Ņ Ņ ‘arm’, and ŧĪŁ Ņ ‘breast’. ŧƢŨĥ §74. Place names (countries, states, cities, villages, etc.) are all feminine. §75. Some nouns can be used as both masculine and feminine. Common nouns that Ņ ŏ ‘fire’, ťƀƊƣ Ņ Ņ ł ‘heaven, Ņ ň ‘salt’, ŧĿŴƌ belong to this category include: ŧƢſĪł ‘monastery’, ťŷÿƇƉ ŏ Ņ Ņ ň ‘sun’, ŧĿųƏł ‘moon’, and ťŶĭĿ Ņ ‘spirit’. ťƤƊƣ Ņ ň §76. New. The word ŦƦÿƇƉ ‘word’ is feminine, but when it refers to the ‘Word’ (i.e., Jesus), it is masculine. Number ň òŅ . §77. Plurals are marked with the two-dot ťƊƀƏ ň Ņ §78. Singular masculine nouns typically end in ťš, while plural masculine nouns end in ťš; ňò Ņ Ņ Ņ ‘book’, ťŨǁ e.g., ťŨǁ ‘books’.

Nouns

§79.

149

Ņ Ņ Ņ Singular feminine nouns typically end in ŦŁ, while plural feminine nouns end in ŦŁš Ŕ ; Ņ ŅòŅ ł Ņ ŌŅ ł e.g., ŦƼ ‘(female) teachers’. Ŕ Ŕ ƍƙÿƇƉ ‘(female) teacher’ and ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ

State §80. New. Nouns appear in three ‘states’: absolute, construct, and emphatic. Ņ Ņ §81. The absolute is the basic form of the noun, usually before adding the final ťš or ŦŁ ; Ņ Ņ ł , of ťƤſĿ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ‘book’ is ħǁ Ņ Ņ ł ‘teacher’ is ƎƙÿƇƉ Ņ Ō ‘head’ is e.g., the absolute of ťŨǁ Ŕ , of ťƍƙÿƇƉ Ņ ł ‘king’ is ƅƇƉ Ņ ł ‘great, chief’ is ħĿł , and of ťƄÿƇƉ ƥſĿŌ , of ťŨĿ Ŕ ň . Note that in some nouns Ņ ł , the absolute has different vowels. Nouns rarely appear in their absolute as ťƄÿƇƉ form. Some dictionaries, like Margoliouth’s Compendious Syriac Dictionary, list nouns in their absolute form. §82. The construct in the singular masculine is the same as the absolute and differs only in ň ò Ō ƥſĿŌ ‘head of usage. It is used to mark the possessive, but without the Ī; e.g., ťŷƀÿƇƣ Ņł ň ò Ņ ħĿł ‘chief of the priests’ instead of ťŨĿ Ņ Ō , ljųƃ ň ò Ō ł ťƤſĿ the Apostles’ instead of ťŷƀÿƇƣĪ ň ò Ņ . Using the construct or the Ī to mark the possessive is optional, but using the ljųƃĪ former gives you fewer syllables and this can be handy in poetry when the poet is constrained to the number of syllables in a verse. Ņ Ņ ŌŅ ł Ņ Ņ Ņ Ŕ , ťƍƙÿƇƉ Ņ Ņ ł , ŦƼƍƙÿƇƉ , etc. §83. The emphatic is the noun with ťš or ŦŁ endings, e.g., ťŨǁ Ŕ §84. The following table gives an example of the various states with their endings: Table 18. Nominal State Endings.

Singular

Absolute

Emphatic

Construct

Plural

Absolute

Emphatic

Construct

M F M F M F M F M F M F

Ō ł Ƣƀƙƣ Ņ Ō ł ŧƢƀƙƣ Ņ Ō ł ŧƢƀƙƣ Ņ Ō ł ŦŁƢƀƙƣ Ō ł Ƣƀƙƣ Ō ŁƢƀƙƣ Ŕł ł Ō Ō ł ƎſƢƀƙƣ Ņ Ō ł ķǔƀƙƣ ň Ō ł ŧǔƀƙƣ ŅŅ Ō ł ŦŁǔƀƙƣ Ŕ ł ł IJǔƀƙƣ Ņ Ō Łǔƀƙƣ Ŕ ł

ťšŅ ťšŅ Ņ ŦŁ ł Łš Ŕ ƎſšŌ ķšŅ ťšň Ņ Ņ ŦŁš Ŕ IJšł Ņ Łš Ŕ

150

Grammar

Possessive Suffixes Attached to Nouns §85. Possessive suffixes attach to nouns. There are two sets of suffixes: one set attaches to singular nouns, and the other to plural nouns. These were discussed in section 5.1, and are reproduced in the following tables. Table 19. Possessive suffixes with singular nouns.

3

M

Singular

F 2

M F

1 3

M

Plural

F 2

M F

1

Ņ ųŨňǁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ñ ǁ ųŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ƅŨŔǁ Ŕ Ņ ň ƁôƄŨ Ŕ ǁ Ŕ Ņ ƁŨ Ŕ ô ǁ Ņ ŏ ķĭųŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ň ƎſųŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ ǁ Ŕ Ņ ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ ǁ Ŕ Ņł ƎŨǁ Ŕ

His book Her book Your book Your book My book Their book Their book Your book Your book Our book

Ĭšň ñ Ņ Ĭš ĴŔšŅ ƁôƃŔšň IJô ķĭĬŏ ƎſĬň ķŴƃŏŔ ƎƀƃňŔ ķšł

Table 20. Possessive suffixes with plural nouns.

łŅ IJĬŴŨǁ ô ò Ŕ ñ ňò Ņ Ŕ ųƀŨǁ òł ŅŔ ƅƀŨǁ łŅ ƁƄƀŨǁ ô ò Ŕ òł ŅŔ ƁŨǁ ŏ òł ŅŔ ķĭųƀŨǁ ň òł ŅŔ ƎſųƀŨǁ ŏ òł ŅŔ ķŴƄƀŨǁ ň òł ŅŔ ƎƀƄƀŨǁ òł ŅŔ ƎƀŨǁ

§86.

ł IJĬĭš ô ñ ň Her books F ųſš Your books 2 M ƅſšł ł Your books F ƁƄſš ô My books 1 IJšł ŏ ł Their books 3 M ķĭųſš ň ł Their books F Ǝſųſš ŏ ł Your books 2 M ķŴƄſš ň ł Your books F ƎƀƄſš Our books 1 Ǝſšł The particle ƇſĪŌ takes the same suffixes as the singular nouns; e.g., ƅƇſĪ Ŕ Ņ Ō ‘yours’, ƁƇſĪ ô Ō

§87.

‘mine’. Ņ ł , ťƉĥŅň, and ťŶĥŅł take irregular forms when they attach to the suffixes. The nouns ťŨĥ

Plural

Singular

3

M

His books

Nominal Forms Ņ Ņ Ŕ ‘book’ ljŴŨǁ Ņ ŏ , e.g., ťŨǁ Ņ ŏ or ťƏĭš Ņ ŏ ŅŔ §88. The diminutive is formed by the suffix ljĭš Ņ Ō Ņ Ņ ‘baby’ ťƏŴũŨ Ņ ŏ Ņ ‘little baby’. The feminine suffix ŦƼƌ ‘booklet’, ťũŨ Ŕ attaches to feminine ň Ņ Ņ Ō ł nouns; e.g., ŦƼƌ Ŕ ŁƢūĥ Ŕ ‘little letter’.

Verbs §89.

§90.

151

The demonym (used to denote members of a people or inhabitants of a place) is Ņ Ņ ŏ ‘Syrian, Syriac’, ťƀƤƀũŶ Ņ Ņ Ō ‘solitary’, ťƀŷì Ņ Ņ ƀƤƉ Ņ Ņ , e.g., ťƀſĿŴƏ Ō formed by the suffix ťſš ‘Christian’. Ņ ŏ Ņ ŏł The suffix ŦŁĭš Ŕ Ņ forms nouns similar to the English suffixes –hood and -ness, e.g., ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ‘brotherhood’, ŦŁŴƌųƃ ‘priesthood’. It is also used to create nouns that indicate a state, Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ņ ł Ņ ŏ ł ‘faith’, or a period of time, e.g., ŦŁŴũƀƏ ‘old age’. condition or quality, e.g., ŦŁŴƍƊſĬ Ŕ Ŕ

7.5 Verbs §91. §92.

§93.

§94.

§95.

Verbs are classified by tense, number, person, and gender. Another classification peculiar to Semitic languages is the measure discussed below. Verbs are derived from roots. A root is usually made up of three letters, though there are a few roots made up of two or four letters. For example, the following verbs are all derived from the root ħŁĴ (or ħǁ if you were to connect the letters together): ň ň ň ŏ Ō Ņ ł ħǁ ‘he wrote’, ħǁŅ ‘he is writing’, ķĭƼŨǁ ‘you (pl.) are writing’, ħǁŁĥ ‘it was ň ł written’, ħǁĥ ‘he caused to write’. Hundreds of verbs (in combination with number, person, and gender) can be generated from one root. While the singular third ł -type verb is also derived from the root, it is usually used to masculine of the ƈƖƘ indicate the root as its consonants, in most cases, match those of the root. Verb conjugation is quite complex. In addition to the number-person-gender variables, verbs are also classified into classes called MEASURES (also called in other ň ł (paȨel), ł (pȨal), ƈƖƘ grammars forms or conjugations). The basic measures are: ƈƖƘ ň ĥł (afȨel). The three letters Ļ, ĺ, and ĵ are place holders for the root. For ƈƖƘ ł example, if we were to replace them with the letters from the root ħǁ we get ħǁ, ň ň ł ħǁł , and ħǁĥ, respectively. Each of the measures mentioned above has a passive counterpart measure that begins ň ň ň , of ƈƖƘ ň ł is ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ł is ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł is ƈƖƘŁĥ ł ł ň , and of ƈƖƘĥ ł ł ň. with ŁĥŔ. The passive of ƈƖƘ ň ň ł ł ň ł ł ň For example, using the root ħǁ one gets ħǁŁĥ, ħǁŁĥ , and ħǁŁŁĥ. New. Additionally, verbs with certain letters in specific slots in the root may be conjugated differently. For instance, the future tense of a verb whose first letter is ƌ conjugates differently from a verb whose first letter is ħ. For this reason, a form of a verb depends on: root content, measure, number, person, and gender. These variables are the driving force behind the verbal conjugation tables in the Appendix. The peculiarities of each verb type are discussed also in the Appendix.

Tense §96. There are the following tenses in Syriac: the past tense, present tense, and future tense. To these one adds the imperative, passive participle, and infinitive. These were all introduced in Chapter 4. Their full conjugations appear in the Appendix.

152 §97.

Grammar The past tense is called in western grammars the perfect and the future tense the imperfect. These are terms that, strictly speaking, denote aspect rather than tense (see section 4.7). Further, the present tense is also called the active participle.

Adverbs §98. Adverbs are formed by adding the suffix Syriac’.

Ō Ņ Ō ŌŅ Ō ƻŤ Ŕ ‘confidently’, ƻŤſĿŴƏ Ŕ š; e.g., ƻƨì Ŕ ƀƃŁ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ‘in

Object Suffixes §99. Object suffixes attach to verbs, prepositions, and some particles; e.g., ƅƇźƟ Ŕ Ņ ł ‘he killed ň you’, ųƆ ‘to him’. These suffixes are given in section 5.2. Subject Suffixes §100. Subject suffixes attach to the present tense (also called active participle) and passive participles as contracted forms. The conjugation of these is given in the Appendix.

Ņ

The Verb ŦĭĬ

Ņ ‘became’ corresponds to the English verb to be when used as an enclitic. §101. The verb ŦĭĬ The following table gives the conjugation of the verb, with the corresponding enclitic Ņô. ŦĭĬ Ņ

Table 21. The Conjugation of ŦĭĬ.

Singular

3

M F

2

M F

1

Plural

3

M F

2

M F

1

Ņ ŦĭĬ Ņ ŁĭĬ ł ƻĭĬ IJƻĭĬ ô ł Ō ƻĭĬ ł ĭĭĬ łò IJĭĬ ŏ ł ķĭƻĭĬ ň ł ƎſƻĭĬ ł ƎſĭĬ

He became She became You became You became I became They became They became You became You became We became

Ņô ŦĭĬ Ņô ŁĭĬ łô ƻĭĬ IJƻĭĬ ô łô Ōô ƻĭĬ łô ĭĭĬ ł ôò IJĭĬ ŏ ł ķĭƻĭĬ ô ň ł ƎſƻĭĬô łô ƎſĭĬ

He was She was You were You were I was They were They were You were You were We were

Numbers and Numerals

Ō

Conjugation of ƻĥ Ŕ

Ō

§102. The following table gives the conjugation of ƻĥ Ŕ ‘to be’. Table 22. Conjugation of ƻĥ Ŕ .

Singular

3

M F

2

M F

1

Plural

3

M F

2

M F

1

ł Ō IJĬĭƻĥ ô Ŕ ň Ō ñ Ŕ ųſƻĥ œ łŔ Ō ƅſƻĥ ł Ō ƁƄſƻĥ ô Ŕ ł Ō IJƻĥ Ŕ ł Ō ŏ ķĭųſƻĥ Ŕ ł Ō ň Ǝſųſƻĥ Ŕ ł Ō ŏ ķŴƄſƻĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň Ŕ łŔ Ō ƎƀƄſƻĥ ł Ō Ǝſƻĥ Ŕ

7.6 Numbers and Numerals Using Letters to Represent Numbers §103. The letters of the alphabet are used to represent numbers. The basic numbers are: Letter

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ ĭ Į į İ IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ

Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

153

154

Grammar

Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

80 90 100 200 300 400 §104. The letters ĥ to İ represent the ones, IJ to Ľ represent the tens, and ľ to Ł represent the 100s until 400; e.g., ĥ is 1, IJ is 10, ťſ is 11, Ūƃ is 22, ŭƇƟ is 133 (see section 6.1 for more details). §105. The number 500 may be expressed by ľŁ (400+100), 600 as ĿŁ, 700 as ŀŁ, and 800 as ŁŁ, 900 as ľŁŁ (400+400+100). Alternatively, they can be expressed with ƌñ (50 with a dot above) for 500, ĸñ for 600, etc. §106. Similarly, the number 1,000 is expressed with ĥ, the number 2,000 with ħ, etc. One can optionally put a dot or a dash above the letter. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers §107. Numbers are specific to gender. The following table gives a list of ordinal and cardinal Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ for masculine numbers and Ŧƻš for feminine numbers. Ordinal numbers end in ťſš numbers, with the exception for second. Cardinal Numbers Number One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Nine Ten Eleven Twelve Thirteen Fourteen Fifteen Sixteen

Masc.

űŶł ň ƎſĿŁ Ņ Ņ ŦƦëƆŁ Ņ ł ťƖŨĿĥ Ņ ł ťƤƊŶ Ņ ŦƦƣ Ņ ł ťƖũƣ Ņ ťƀìŅ ƍƉŁ Ņ ň ťƖƣŁ Ņ ň ŧƢƐƕ ł łŔ ƢƐƕűŶ ł ň ƢƐƕĿŁ ł łŔ Ņ ƢƐƕƦëƆŁ ł ł ł ƢƐƖŨĿĥ ł ł ł ƢƐƖƤƊŶ ł ł ƢƐƕƦƣ

Ordinal Numbers Fem.

Ņ ŧűŶ ň ł ƎſŁĿŁ Ņ ƦƆŁ ł ł ƗŨĿĥ ň ł ƥƊŶ Ʀƣň ł Ɨũƣ ň Ņ ťƍƉŁ ł ƗƣŁ ł ƢƐƕ ň ň łŔ ŧƢƐƕűŶ ň ň ł Łł ŧƢƐƕŁĿ ň ň łŔ Ņ ŧƢƐƕƦëƆŁ ň ň ł ł ŧƢƐƖŨĿĥ ň ň ł ł ŧƢƐƖƤƊŶ ň ň ł ŧƢƐƕƦƣ

Number First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Seventh Eighth Ninth Tenth Eleventh Twelfth Thirteenth Fourteenth Fifteenth Sixteenth

Masc.

Ņ Ņ ł ťƀƉűƟ ŅŅ ł ťƍſĿŁ ŅŅ Ō ťſƼƆŁ ŅŅ Ō ťƀƖƀŨĿ ŅŅ Ō ťƀƤƀƊŶ ŅŅ Ō ťſƻƦƣ ŅŅ Ō ťƀƖƀũƣ Ō ťƀŅƍŅƀƉŁ ŅŅ Ō ťƀƖƀƣŁ ŅŅ Ō ťſƢƀƐƕ Ņ Ņ Ō łŔ ťſƢƀƐƕűŶ ŅŅ Ō ň ťſƢƀƐƖſĿŁ Ņ Ņ Ō łŔ Ņ ťſƢƀƐƕƦëƆŁ ŅŅ Ō ł ł ťſƢƀƐƖŨĿĥ ŅŅ Ō ł ł ťſƢƀƐƖƤƊŶ Ņ Ņ Ō łŔ ťſƢƀƐƕƦƣ

Fem.

Ņ Ņ ł ŦƼƉűƟ Ņ ŌŅ ł ŦƼƍſĿŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƻƼƆŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƖƀŨĿ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƤƀƊŶ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƻƻƦƣ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƖƀũƣ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƍƀƉŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƖƀƣŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƻƢƀƐƕ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƻƢƀƐƕűŶ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ň ŦƻƢƀƐƖſĿŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ł Ņ ŦƻƢƀƐƕƦëƆŁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ł ŦƻƢƀƐƖŨĿĥ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ł ŦƻƢƀƐƖƤƊŶ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƻƢƀƐƕƦƣ Ŕ

Numbers and Numerals Cardinal Numbers Number Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty Twenty one Thirty Forty Fifty Sixty Seventy Eighty Ninety Hundred Two hundred Three hundred One thousand Two thousand

Masc.

ł ł ƢƐƖũƣ ł ł Ņ ƢƐƖƍƉŁ ł ł ƢƐƖƣŁ

155 Ordinal Numbers

Fem.

ň ň ł ŧƢƐƖũƣ ň ňł Ņ ŧƢƐƖƍƉŁ ň ň ł ŧƢƐƖƣŁ

Ō ň ƎſƢƐƕ Ō ň Ō ň Ņ Ŕ ł ƎſƢƐƕ űŶĭ ŧűŶĭ Ŕ ł ƎſƢƐƕ Ō Ņ ƎſƦëƆŁ Ŕ Ō ł ƎƀƖŨĿĥ Ō ł ƎƀƤƊŶ Ō ƎſƦƣ Ŕ Ō ƎƀƖũƣł Ō Ņ ƎƀƍƉŁ Ō ň ƎƀƖƣŁ ŦŤƉŅ ň ƎſŁŤƉŅ

Number Seventeenth Eighteenth Nineteenth Twentieth Twenty first Thirtieth Fortieth Fiftieth Sixtieth Seventieth Eightieth Ninetieth

Masc.

Fem.

ŅŅ Ō ł ťſƢƀƐƖũƣ Ō ł Ņ Ņ Ņ ƐƖƍƉŁ ťſƢƀ ŅŅ Ō ł ťſƢƀƐƖƣŁ ŅŅ Ō ň ťƀƍſƢƐƕ ŅŅ Ō ň űŶĭ Ŕ ł ťƀƍſƢƐƕ

Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƻƢƀƐƖũƣ Ņ Ņ Ō ł Ņ ŦƻƢƀƐƖƍƉŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƻƢƀƐƖƣŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ň ŦƼƍſƢƐƕ Ņ Ņ Ō ň Ņ Ŕ ł ŦƼƍſƢƐƕ ŧűŶĭ

Ņ Ņ ŌŔ Ņ ťƀƍſƦëƆŁ ŅŅ Ō ł ťƀƍƀƖŨĿĥ ŅŅ Ō ł ťƀƍƀƤƊŶ Ņ Ņ ŌŔ ťƀƍſƦƣ ŅŅ Ō ł ťƀƍƀƖũƣ ŅŅ Ō Ņ ťƀƍƀƍƉŁ Ņ Ō ň ťƀƍƀƖƣŁ

Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ ŦƼƍſƦëƆŁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƼƍƀƖŨĿĥ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƼƍƀƤƊŶ Ņ Ņ Ō ŦƼƍſƦƣ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ō ł ŦƼƍƀƖũƣ Ņ Ņ Ō Ņ ŦƼƍƀƍƉŁ Ņ Ņ Ō ň ŦƼƍƀƖƣŁ

Ņ Ŕ Ņ ŦŤƉƦƆŁ Ņ ł ťƙëƆĥ ň ł ň ťƀƙëƆĥ ò Ņ ł ł ƎſŁĿŁ ò Ņ ł ł ƎſĿŁ ťƀƙëƆĥ ň

ň ł

Ņ Ņ

§108. New. One can also form ordinal numbers with Ī as in ƎſĿŁĪł , ƎſŁĿŁĪ ‘second’; ŦƦëƆŁĪł , Ņ ł ‘third’, etc. (but not for first, for which ťƀƉűƟ Ņ Ņ ł is always used). This usage of Ī is ƦƆŁĪ Ņò ł ł ň ł useful in higher numbers; e.g., ťƀƙëƆĥ ƎſĿŁĪ ‘two thousendth’.

8 The Estrangelo and East Syriac Scripts We have thus far used the Serto script, also called the West Syriac script. There are two other scripts which are introduced in this chapter: Estrangelo and East Syriac. Both Serto (i.e., West Syriac) and the East Syriac script have been called, in older grammars, after the various religious groups that use them. Serto, for instance, is sometimes called the Maronite script (the Maronites are a West-Syriac religious community centered in Lebanon). You may also come across Serto being called the ‘Jacobite’ script. Why is this word in single quotes? Because you should never use the ‘J’ word. Historically it has been used as a derogatory term for the Syrian Orthodox Church. Similarly the East Syriac script is sometimes called Chaldean. It is also called with the ‘N’ (i.e., ‘Nestorian’) word which is a derogatory term for the Church of the East. So do not use the ‘J’ word or the ‘N’ word, neither to denote the scripts nor to refer to the communities. Some may be offended.

8.1 Estrangelo Estrangelo, introduced in this section, is the oldest Syriac script. It is used in all early manuscripts, and is found in many scholarly editions of Syriac texts. Today, Estrangelo is also used in headings. When I was taught Syriac as a young kid, I was taught the Serto script. How did I learn Estrangelo and East Syriac? I simply picked up a table of the alphabet that gave Serto in one column , Estrangelo in the next column, and East Syriac in the third column. I memorized it. Mission accomplished! That’s all that you need. Look up the letters in the following tables, compare them to Serto, and start practicing on some texts. To make the job easier for you, I will give you texts in both Serto and Estrangelo so that you can compare them. The Alphabet

Name

ł Ņ ƚƆĥ ƼŨň ł Ņ ƈƊū ł Ņ ƦƆĪ ŦĬň

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Standalone Position

Serto

ť Ū ŭ ű ų

ť ũ Ŭ ű ų

ĥ Ũ ū Ī Ĭ

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ

156

Estrangelo Name

ĭĥĭł ƎſĮł ƼŶňň ƼŹ ĪŴſŏ ƚƃŅ ł Ņ űƊëƆ ƋƀƉŌ ķŴƌŏ ł ǂƊƏň ťƕň ťƘň ŧĪň ĽŅ ƚƟŅ ƥſĿŌ ƎƀƣŌ ł ĭĥŁ

157

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Standalone Position

Serto

Ŵ ŵ Ÿ Ż Ɓ ƅ ƈ Ƌ Ǝ Ƒ Ɨ ƚ ƞ ơ Ƣ ƥ Ʀ

Ŵ ŵ ŷ ź ƀ Ƅ Ƈ Ɗ ƍ Ɛ Ɩ ƙ ƞ Ơ Ƣ Ƥ Ʀ

ĭ Į Ŷ Ź ſ ƃ Ɔ Ɖ ƌ Ə ƕ Ƙ Ľ Ɵ Ŀ ƣ Ł

ĭ Į į İ IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

ĭ Į į İ IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

Texts Estrangelo texts are usually unvocalized, so I removed all vowel marks. St. Ephrem

ŧƢƍƃĭ ťƍƠƤƙƉ ƋſƢƘĥ ôIJƢƉ .ťŶĭĿĪ ƎƉŁĭ .űƇſŁĥ ŦƦƍſűƉ ƎƀũſƞƍŨ ô .űƊƕŁĥ ĶĬƢŨĥ ôIJƢƉĭ ħŴƠƖſ ôIJƢƊƆĭ .űƊƆŁŁĥ IJĬĿĭŤƆ ķƢƉĪ ŭƐƣ ƦƍƤŨĭ .ŦŁĥ ŦƦƍſűƉ ô ò ŦƦƀūŴƏĭ ťƣƭűƉĭ ŧƮƉŤƉĭ .ƋƏ ò ò ò ŦƦƆĭƦũƆĭ ťƤƍƆĭ ťƊƀƟ ƦƍũƆĭ .ƚƆĥ ñ IJĬĿĭŤŨ ųŨĭ .űƍƕ ŦƦƍſűƉ ô

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Mimro

ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ħĬ ŦųƆĥ .ťƍƙƆŴſ ƋŶĿĪ ťƍſŤƆ

1

ň ł IJƢƉ Ņ ł ƋſƢƘĥ Ņ ň ťƍƠƤƙƉ .ťŶĭĿĪŏ ŧƢƍƃĭ ô Ņ Ņ Ō ň Ō ň ŦƦƍſűƉ ň ň ƎƉŁĭ Ņ ł .űƇſŁĥ Ō ł .űƊƕŁĥ ƎƀũſƞƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ ł IJƢƉĭ ł ł ň ĶĬƢŨĥ .űƊëƆŁŁĥ ô Ņ ħŴƠƖſł IJƢƊëƆĭ ô Ņ ł Ņň ł Ņ ŭƐƣ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ņ ŏ ķƢƉĪ ł ł .ŦŁĥ ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ō IJĬĿĭƧ Ņ Ņ ò ŏ Ņ ł ŧǔƉŤƉĭ ň Ō .ƋƏŅ ŦƼūŴƏĭ ťƣǓűƉĭ Ņ Ņ ò ŏ ł ň ňò ł Ņ Ņò ł ŦƦëƆĭƦũƆĭ ťƤƍÿƆĭ ťƊƀƟ ƦƍũëƆĭ ň ł .ƚƆĥ ł ŦƦƍſűƉ ñ IJĬŅ ĿĭŤŨŏ ųŨĭ .űƍƕ ô Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ŏ ħĬł ŦųëƆĥ ĜťƍƙëƆŴſ Ņ Ņ ŏ ƋŶĿĪ Ņ ł ň Ņ ťƍſƧ .ťƍƙëƆŴſ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

158

The Estrangelo and East Syriac Scripts

ĜƢƀƙƣ ƚƇƉĪ ťŨƢƆĭ ĖŦŁŴƄƇƊŨ ťŨĿ IJųſűũƕ ô ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ƋŶĿĪ ťƍſĥ .ųƍƙƆŴſ ƁŬƏ Ŧĭųƌ ĜťƍƇźŨ ƋŶĿĪ ťƍſĥĭ ĖŧƢƀƤƃ ŦĭųƌĪ ŦƞƉ ťƆ

2 3 4

Madrosho

ƎſĿƞƊŨ ƈƀźƟ ŦĬ .ťŶƞƘ ƢƉĥ ķŴſĬƞŨ ƑƀƄƌĭ ĖŦƦƣŴƟ ƢƉĥ ŧƮƉĥ ķĭųſƭƦŨ ò ĿŴŷƌ .ƁŶĥ ƎƀƉĪ ķĥĪ Ŧŵŷƌĭ ĖƎƀſƢƃŴƌ ĭĥ

1

2

The Wolf, the Fox, and the Lion

űƃ .ťſĿĥĭ ťƇƕŁĭ ĶűƉ ťŨĥĪ ťƇſĥĭ Ŧŵƕ ĭĪ ô Ľ ĭƢũŶŁĥ ô .ťũƌĿĥĭ ŭƇƘĪ ťŨĥűƆ ťſĿĥ ƢƉĥ ƎſűſĬ .ķƦƍƀŨ ķŴƌĥ ĜƅƆ ƋƆ ŦŵƕĪ ťŨĥĪ ƢƉĥ .ťƇƕƦƆ ťũƌĿĥĭ ĜƁƆ ťƇſĥĭ ƦƊŶŁĥ ƎƀƆĬ ťſĿĥ ƗƊƣ űƃĭ .ųƠƍŶĭ ťŨĥĪ ƈƕ ĿŴƣĭ .ŭƇƘ Ʀƌĥ ô :ťƇƕƦƆ ƢƉĥĭ ƎƉ ŦŵƕĪ ťƇƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ ťũƌĿĥĭ ĜĴŁĭƢƤƆ ŦĭĬŁ .ĴƦƀƊƤŷƆ ťƇſĥĭ ĜĴƦƀƍƙƆ ťƌųƆ ƦƙƇſ ťƄſĥ ƎƉĪ ųƆ ƢƉĥ .ťƌŤƃ ťŬƆŴƘ ťŨĥĪ ƎƉ :ťƇƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ ĖťƄƇƉ ôIJƢƉ ƅƀƉűƟ ťƉĿĪ

1

2 3 4 5 6

7 8

Ō ł ƚƇƉĪ ň ł ťŨƢëƆĭ Ņł ł ĜƢƀƙƣ Ņ ŏ ł Ņł ĖŦŁŴƄÿƇƊŨ ťŨĿ IJųſűũƕ ô Ņň ň Ņ ťƍŅ ſĥł ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ƋŶĿĪ ň ň ňŅ Ō ł Ŧĭųƌ .ųƍƙëƆŴſ ƁŬƏ Ņ ň ƋŶĿĪŅ ťƍſĥĭł ĜťƍƇźŨ Ņ Ō ł ŦĭųƌĪ ň ň ŦƞƉ ň ƧŅ ĖŧƢƀƤƃ Ō ň ň ƈƀźƟ ƎſĿƞƊŨ ŦĬŅ ň .ťŶƞƘň ƢƉĥł Ō ł ŏ ň ƑƀƄƌĭ ķŴſĬƞŨ ň Ņ ĖŦƦƣŴƟŏ ƢƉĥł ň ň ķĭųſǓƦŨ ŏ ł ł ŧǔƉĥ ò ł ł ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ .ƁŶĥ ň Ņ ķĥĪň Ŧŵŷƌĭ ň ň ƎƀƉĪ Ō Ņ ŏ ĭĥł ĖƎƀſƢƃŴƌ Ņ ł ň ň Ņ Ō Ņ ł ƨíƕŁĭ ĭƢũŶŁĥ ĶűƉ ťŨĥĪ ô ł ł űƃł .ťſĿĥĭ Ņ ł ƨìſĥĭł Ŧŵƕň ĭĪô ĽŅ .ťũƌĿĥĭ ň ň ł Ņ Ō ł ň ň Ņ ķŴƌĥŏ ŭƇƘĪ ťŨĥűëƆ ťſĿĥ ƢƉĥł ƎſűſĬ ł Ņ ł .ķƦƍƀŨ Ņ ł ĜƁƆŌ ƨìŅ ſĥĭł ĜƅƆŅ ƋƆł ŦŵìŅ ƕň Ī ťŨĥĪ Ņ Ō ƢƉĥł ň ťũƌĿĥĭ Ņ ł .ƨíƕƦëƆ ň Ņ ťſĿĥ ƗƊƣ ł ł ł ƦƊŶŁĥ ł ł ň ƎƀƆĬ ł űƃĭ ƈƕł ĿŴƣĭ ň ł ťŨĥĪŌ .ųƠƍŶĭ ł ň ł Ʀƌĥł :ƨíƕƦëƆ ł ň ƢƉĥĭ .ŭƇƘ ô Ņ Ņ ň ƨíƕŁ ųƆň ƢƉĥ ň ň ƎƉł ŦŵƕĪ ŦĭĬŁ ĜĴŁĭƢƤëƆ Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ł .ĴƼƊƤŷƆ ƨìſĥĭł ĜĴƼƍƙƆ ťũƌĿĥĭł ň Ō ťƄſĥ Ņ ljųëƆ Ņ ł ƎƉĪ ň ųƆ ƢƉĥ Ņ ƦƙƇſ ťŬƆŴƘ Ņ Ō .ljŤƃ ň ł ťŨĥĪ ƎƉň :ƨíƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ ł Ņ ťƉĿĪ IJƢƉ ô Ņ ƅƀƉűƟ ĖťƄƇƉł

2 3 4

1

2

1

2 3 4 5 6

7 8

East Syriac John of Ephesus

ŦƦƍſűƉ űƀƉŤŨ ťƌĬ ƎƍŶŴſ ô .űƇſŁĥ ťſƦſƦƣ ŧĿĪ IJĿŴƤŨ įƢƏŁŁĥ ŻƄƟŁ ƦƍƤŨĭ ñųŨĪ ƎƍŶŴſ IJƢƉĪ ŧƢſűŨ ťƍƤƊƤƉ ô .űƀƉŤŨ ŴƊƀƟĥĪ ťƀƘĭĪĿ ƦƇƖŨ ĶƢŨ ô ƁƃŴƀźƌĥĪ ťƃƢſƢźƘ ƋſƢƘĥ ƈƕ űƀƉĥĪ ťƘŴƠƐƘĥ ĶĬƢŨĥĭ ľƢƕĭ ƁƘĿĥ ĜťƍſƭĭŤƏ .ťƀƍƀźƍźƏŴƠƆ .ťƊƀƊŶ Ƣƀū ŦĭĬô ťƀŨŴƠƖſ ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ ƋƀƏŁŁĥ ƎƉŁĭ .ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ťƀƏŤƆ ƎƍŶŴſĭ ťƀƏĥĪ ƎƍŶŴſ Ļĥ ťƄƉĭ .ŧƢƟƦƉ ĸŴƐƘĥĪ űƀƉŤŨ ƦſŤſĿŴƏ ƈƀƃĬ ħƦƃĥ ò ò ò ò ťƀŷƌűƉ ƁƍŨ ťƍŨŴŹĪ ŦƦƀƖƣŁ .ĬƦſĪĭŁ ò ò ŦƦƀƌŁűƕ ŦƦƀƖƣŁ ťƀƏŤŨĭ ò .ŦŁŴŬƇƘ ƦƆƦŨ

1 2

3

4 5 6 7

8

159

Ņ Ō Ņ ŏ ŦƦƍſűƉ Ō Ņ ljĬŅ ƎƍŶŴſ Ņł ŏ ŧĿĪŅ IJĿŴƤŨ űƀƉŤŨ ô ň Ō Ņ ň ťſƻƦƣ .űƇſŁĥ ł ł ň ŻƄƟŁ ƦƍƤŨĭ ł ł Ņ ł įƢƏŁŁĥ ł ťƍƤƊƤƉ ŧƢſűŨ Ō ŨŅ ųŨĪ ñ Ņ ƎƍŶŴſ IJƢƉĪ .űƀƉŤ ô Ņ ł ň ĶƢŨ ň ł ŴƊƀƟĥĪ Ō ł Ņ ŏ ƦƇƖŨ ł ƋſƢƘĥ Ō ô Ņ Ņ ł ťƀƘĭĪĿ ň ŏ Ņ Ō Ō ŏ ł ťƃƢſƢźƘ ł ł ťƘŴƠƐƘĥ ĶĬƢŨĥĭ ƁƃŴƀźƌĥĪ ł Ō ĜťƍſǓĭŤƏ ł ł ƁƘĿĥ Ņ ł ň ƈƕł űƀƉĥĪŅ ľƢƕĭ ŏ ł Ō Ō ł ƏŴƠëƆ .ťƀƍƀźƍź Ņ Ō ł Ƣƀūň ŦĭĬ Ņ ô ťƀŨŴƠƖſ ŅŅ ŏ ł .ťƊƀƊŶ ň ň Ņ ŏ ł ł ŏ Ō ƋƀƏŁŁĥ Ņł Ō .ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ťƀƏƧ ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ ƎƉŁĭ Ņ ň Ņ ň ň ƎƍŶŴſĭ ŏ ťƀƏĥĪ ł ł ƎƍŶŴſ ĻĥŅ ťƄƉĭ ĸŴƐƘĥĪ ň ň .ŧƢƟƦƉ ł Ō ň ł Ņ Ņò Ō Ņ ħǁĥ Ņ ŏ ƈƀƃĬ ŦƼƖƣŁ űƀƉŤŨň Ņ ƻŤſĿŴƏ òŅ ŏ ò Ņ ƌűƉł ťƍŨŴŹĪ Ō ł ƁƍŨ ò ł ťƀŷì .ĬƻĪĭŁ Ņ òŅ Ņ Ņ Ō ò Ņ ł ŦƼƌ ł ł ƦƆƦŨ Łűƕ ŦƼƖƣŁŅ ťƀƏŤŨĭ Ņ ò Ƙň .ŦŁŴŬÿƇ

1 2

3

4 5 6 7

8

8.2 East Syriac The Alphabet The East Syriac alphabet is primarily used by the Assyrians (Church of the East) and Chaldeans. It is also used in modern times by the Syrian Orthodox in headings or subheadings of texts. The alphabet is given in the following table: Name

ł Ņ ƚƆĥ ƼŨň ł Ņ ƈƊū ł Ņ ƦƆĪ ŦĬň ĭĥĭł ƎſĮł ƼŶňň ƼŹ

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Standalone Position

Serto

ť Ū ŭ ű ų Ŵ ŵ Ÿ Ż

ť ũ Ŭ ű ų Ŵ ŵ ŷ ź

ĥ Ũ ū Ī Ĭ ĭ Į Ŷ Ź

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ ĭ Į į İ

ĥ ħ Ĩ Ī Ĭ ĭ Į į İ

160

The Estrangelo and East Syriac Scripts Name

Final Position

Middle Position

Initial Position

Serto

ĪŴſŏ ƚƃŅ ł Ņ űƊëƆ ƋƀƉŌ ķŴƌŏ ł ǂƊƏň ťƕň ťƘň ŧĪň ĽŅ ƚƟŅ ƥſĿŌ ƎƀƣŌ ł ĭĥŁ

Standalone Position

Ɓ ƅ ƈ Ƌ Ǝ Ƒ Ɨ ƚ ƞ ơ Ƣ ƥ Ʀ

ƀ Ƅ Ƈ Ɗ ƍ Ɛ Ɩ ƙ ƞ Ơ Ƣ Ƥ Ʀ

ſ ƃ Ɔ Ɖ ƌ Ə ƕ Ƙ Ľ Ɵ Ŀ ƣ Ł

IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

IJ Ĵ ĵ Ķ ķ ĸ ĺ Ļ Ľ ľ Ŀ ŀ Ł

East Syriac has the optional ligature ƫ at the end of words for ŦŁ, and ƭ for IJĬ. East Syriac has its own vowel system. While West Syriac has five vowels, East Syriac has seven. They are also pronounced differently: Serto Vowel East Syriac Sound ő Ņ ŅťŶƦƘ šŎ Read o as in dot

Ņ Ņ ťƙƟĮ ŅŅ ŦƞŨĿ ŅŅ ŦƞũŶ Ņ ŦĽŅ ƞƕ

› ºŅ š¡ º šŌŏ š

Ň š šŊ šŋ IJŎ ĭŎ ĭő

Read a as in father Read e as in men Read a as in day Read ee as in meet Read oo as in boo Read o as in note

ŏ ň Note that West Syriac š and š correspond to two vowels in East Syriac. It is crucially important that you distinguish between language and script. The language is the same, regardless of the script it is written in: the words are the same, the grammar is the same, the meaning is the same. The sound is not the same. For instance, I was raised reading West Syriac. I can perfectly read any text in the East Syriac script with the same speed I read it in West Syriac. In either case, I pronounce it in West Syriac. If you are interested to hear the sound of East Syriac, I encourage you to listen to some of the East Syriac readings in Healey’s Leshono Suryoyo (Gorgias Press, 2005).

East Syriac

161

Notes on Pronunciation There are differences in pronunciation between West and East Syriac. A few of these are listed here. Ň ő Ŏ is read awa not aba. The letter ħŔ when soft is pronounced as w ; e.g., ťŨĥ The letter į is pronounced like West Syriac ƃŔ. The letter Ļ is usually read with Qushoyo as p. Further, the paȨȨel verbal forms double the second root consonant; e.g., West Syriac ł ň ƈũƟ read qabel, but East Syriac ƈũŋƟŎő read qabbel. ŏ prefix, Recall that in West Syriac, if a word begins with an ĥ and is preceded by a ĵĭűŨ łŅ Ņ ł ‘and father’. In East Syriac, the the vowel of the ĥ moves to the prefix; e.g., ťŨĥ ‘father’ ťŨĥĭ őŇ ŏ prefix is used, this leads to a vowel remains on the ĥ, e.g., ťŨĥĭ Ŏ . When more than one ĵĭűŨ Ņ ł ‘and of the father’ has two different number of vowels in the word; e.g., West Syriac ťŨĥĪĭ őŇ ő syllables or vowels, but East Syriac ťŨĥĪĭ Ŏ Ŏ has three syllables or vowels. ł Words beginning with a consonant followed by ĭš (with a Phthoʘo) in West Syriac Ň Ņ ł ‘day’ is have ĭš (with a Zqofo) in East Syriac which is pronounced o; e.g., West Syriac ťƉŴſ Ň read yawmo, but East Syriac ťƉŴſŇ is read yoma. Texts Each of the following texts is given in Serto and East Syriac. The first sentence of each text has been vocalized in the East Syriac dotted system. St. Ephrem

ő Ň Ň Ŏő ƋſƢƘĥ ťƍƠƤƙƉ ŋ Ŏ IJƢ ôŇ Ɖ .ťŶĭĿĪ ŧƢƍƃĭ Ŋ Ŏ .űƊƕŁĥ ƎƉŁĭ .űƇſŁĥ ŦƦƍſűƉ ƎƀũſƞƍŨ ô .űƊƆŁŁĥ ĶĬƢŨĥ IJƢƉĭ ħŴƠƖſ IJƢƊƆĭ ô ô .ŦŁĥ ŦƦƍſűƉ ƭĿĭŤƆ ķƢƉĪ ŭƐƣ ƦƍƤŨĭ ô ò .ƋƏ ŦƦƀūŴƏĭ ťƣƱűƉĭ ŧƲƉŤƉĭ ò ťƊƀƟ ƦƍũƆĭ ò ò .ƚƆĥ ŦƦƆĭƦũƆĭ ťƤƍƆĭ ñ ƭĿĭŤŨ ųŨĭ .űƍƕ ŦƦƍſűƉ ô

Mimro

ő ŦųƆĥ Ň Ňő ŇŇ ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ħĬ Ŏ Ŏ Ň Ň ő Ŏ ŇŇ .ťƍƙƆŴſ Ŏ Ŏ ƋŶĿĪ ŋ ťƍſŤƆ ĜƢƀƙƣ ƚƇƉĪ ťŨƢƆĭ ĖŦŁŴƄƇƊŨ ťŨĿ Ʈſűũƕ ô ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ƋŶĿĪ ťƍſĥ .ųƍƙƆŴſ ƁŬƏ Ŧĭųƌ ĜťƍƇźŨ ƋŶĿĪ ťƍſĥĭ ĖŧƢƀƤƃ ŦĭųƌĪ ŦƞƉ ťƆ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4

ň ł IJƢƉ Ņ ł ƋſƢƘĥ Ņ ň ťƍƠƤƙƉ .ťŶĭĿĪŏ ŧƢƍƃĭ ô Ņ Ņ Ō ň Ō ň ŦƦƍſűƉ ň ň ƎƉŁĭ Ņ ł .űƇſŁĥ Ō ł .űƊƕŁĥ ƎƀũſƞƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ ł IJƢƉĭ ł ł ň ĶĬƢŨĥ .űƊëƆŁŁĥ ô Ņ ħŴƠƖſł IJƢƊëƆĭ ô Ņ ł Ņň ŏ ł Ņ ŭƐƣ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ņ ķƢƉĪ ł ł .ŦŁĥ ŦƦƍſűƉ ô Ō IJĬĿĭƧ Ņ Ņ ò ŏ Ņ ł ŧǔƉŤƉĭ ň Ō .ƋƏŅ ŦƼūŴƏĭ ťƣǓűƉĭ Ņ Ņ ò ŏ ł ň ňò ł Ņ ň ł ŦƦëƆĭƦũƆĭ Ņò ł ťƤƍÿƆĭ ťƊƀƟ ƦƍũëƆĭ .ƚƆĥ Ņ ŏ ųŨĭ ł ŦƦƍſűƉ ñ IJĬĿĭŤŨ .űƍƕ ô Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ŏ ħĬł ŦųëƆĥ ĜťƍƙëƆŴſ Ņ Ņ ŏ ƋŶĿĪ Ņ ł ň Ņ ťƍſƧ .ťƍƙëƆŴſ Ō ł ƚƇƉĪ ň ł ťŨƢëƆĭ Ņł ł ĜƢƀƙƣ Ņ ŏ ł Ņł ĖŦŁŴƄÿƇƊŨ ťŨĿ IJųſűũƕ ô Ņň Ņ ł ň Ņ ťƍſĥ ĜťƍƙƆŴſ ƋŶĿĪ ň ň ňŅ Ō ł Ŧĭųƌ .ųƍƙëƆŴſ ƁŬƏ Ņ ň ƋŶĿĪŅ ťƍſĥĭł ĜťƍƇźŨ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4

162

Madrosho

The Estrangelo and East Syriac Scripts

Ň ƎſĿƞ ŋ ƊŨ Ŋ ƈƀźƟ Ŏ ŦĬő Ň ƘŊ ƢƉŎ ĥŋ .ťŶƞ ķŴſĬƞŨ ƑƀƄƌĭ ĖŦƦƣŴƟ ƢƉĥ ŧƲƉĥ ķĭųſƱƦŨ ò ĿŴŷƌ .ƁŶĥ ƎƀƉĪ ķĥĪ Ŧŵŷƌĭ ĖƎƀſƢƃŴƌ ĭĥ

1

2

The Wolf, the Fox, and the Lion

ő Ň ő ő ő ĥ űƃő .ťŇſĿĥĭ Ň ĽŇ ĭƢ Ŏ ťƇƕ ô ũŎ ŶŁ Ŏ Ŋ Ŏ ŎŇ Ķ ő űŋƉŊ Ň ťŨĥĪŋ ő Łĭ Ň .ťũƌĿĥĭŎ ťƇſĥĭŎ ŦŵƕŊ ĭĪ ô ķŴƌĥ ŭƇƘĪ ťŨĥűƆ ťſĿĥ ƢƉĥ ƎſűſĬ .ķƦƍƀŨ ĜƁƆ ťƇſĥĭ ĜƅƆ ƋƆ ŦŵƕĪ ťŨĥĪ ƢƉĥ .ťƇƕƦƆ ťũƌĿĥĭ ƈƕ ĿŴƣĭ ƦƊŶŁĥ ƎƀƆĬ ťſĿĥ ƗƊƣ űƃĭ .ųƠƍŶĭ ťŨĥĪ .ŭƇƘ Ʀƌĥô :ťƇƕƦƆ ƢƉĥĭ ŦĭĬŁ ƎƉ ŦŵƕĪ ťƇƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ ťƇſĥĭ ĜĴƦƀƍƙƆ ťũƌĿĥĭ ĜĴŁĭƢƤƆ .ĴƦƀƊƤŷƆ ťŬƆŴƘ ťƌųƆ ƦƙƇſ ťƄſĥ ƎƉĪ ųƆ ƢƉĥ .ťƌŤƃ ƅƀƉűƟ ťƉĿĪ ťŨĥĪ ƎƉ :ťƇƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ ĖťƄƇƉ IJôƢƉ

1 2 3 4 5 6

Ņ Ō ł ŦĭųƌĪ ň ň ŦƞƉ ň ƧŅ ĖŧƢƀƤƃ Ō ň ň ƈƀźƟ ƎſĿƞƊŨ ŦĬŅ ň ň .ťŶƞƘ ƢƉĥł Ō ł ŏ ň ƑƀƄƌĭ ķŴſĬƞŨ ň Ņ ĖŦƦƣŴƟŏ ƢƉĥł ň ň ķĭųſǓƦŨ ŏ ł ł ŧǔƉĥ ò ł ł ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ .ƁŶĥ ň Ņ ķĥĪň Ŧŵŷƌĭ ň ň ƎƀƉĪ Ō Ņ ŏ ĭĥł ĖƎƀſƢƃŴƌ

Ņ ł ň ň Ņ Ō Ņ ł ƨíƕŁĭ ĭƢũŶŁĥ ĶűƉ ťŨĥĪ ô ł ł űƃł .ťſĿĥĭ Ņ ł .ťũƌĿĥĭ ƨìſĥĭł Ŧŵƕň ĭĪô ĽŅ ň ň ł Ņ Ō ł ň ň Ņ ķŴƌĥŏ ŭƇƘĪ ťŨĥűëƆ ťſĿĥ ƢƉĥł ƎſűſĬ ł Ņ ł .ķƦƍƀŨ Ņ ł ĜƁƆŌ ƨìŅ ſĥĭł ĜƅƆŅ ƋƆł ŦŵìŅ ƕň Ī ťŨĥĪ Ņ Ō ƢƉĥł ň ťũƌĿĥĭ Ņ ł .ƨíƕƦëƆ ň Ņ ťſĿĥ ƗƊƣ ł ł ł ƦƊŶŁĥ ł ł ň ƎƀƆĬ ł űƃĭ ƈƕł ĿŴƣĭ ň ł .ųƠƍŶĭ ťŨĥĪŌ ł ň ł Ʀƌĥł :ƨíƕƦëƆ ł ň ƢƉĥĭ .ŭƇƘ ô Ņ Ņ ň ƨíƕŁ ųƆň ƢƉĥ ň ň ƎƉł ŦŵƕĪ ŦĭĬŁ ĜĴŁĭƢƤëƆ Ņ Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ł ł .ĴƼƊƤŷƆ ƨìſĥĭ ĜĴƼƍƙƆ ťũƌĿĥĭł

1

2

1 2 3 4 5 6

ň Ō ťƄſĥ Ņ ljųëƆ Ņ ł ƎƉĪ ň ųƆ ƢƉĥ 7 Ņ ƦƙƇſ ťŬƆŴƘ Ņ Ō .ljŤƃ ň ł ťŨĥĪ ƎƉň :ƨíƕŁ ųƆ ƢƉĥ 8 ł Ņ ťƉĿĪ 8 IJƢƉ ô Ņ ƅƀƉűƟ ĖťƄƇƉł Ņ ł correspond to East Syriac ťſĿĥĭ Ņ ł , ƨìŅ ſĥĭł , ťũƌĿĥĭ Ň őŎ , Note that in Sentence 1, West Syriac ťſĿĥĭ ő Ň ő , ťũƌĿĥĭ ťƇſĥĭ Ŏ Ň Ŏ . Do you see a difference? East Syriac retains the vowels on ĥ. 7

John of Ephesus

Ň Ň Ň ŇŇ Ň Ňð ŧĿĪŇ IJĿŴƤŨ Ŏ ŦƦƍſűƉ Ŏ űƀƉ Ŏ ŤŨ ťƌĬ ƎŇ ƍŶőŎŴſŎ .űƇŋſŁ Ŏ ĥŋ ťŇſƦſƦƣ Ŏ ŧƢſűŨ ťƍƤƊƤƉ įƢƏŁŁĥ ŻƄƟŁ ƦƍƤŨĭ ñ ƎƍŶŴſ IJƢƉĪ .űƀƉŤŨ ųŨĪ ô ƋſƢƘĥ ŴƊƀƟĥĪ ťƀƘĭĪĿ ƦƇƖŨ ĶƢŨ ô ťƘŴƠƐƘĥ ĶĬƢŨĥĭ ƁƃŴƀźƌĥĪ ťƃƢſƢźƘ ľƢƕĭ ƁƘĿĥ ĜťƍſƱĭŤƏ ƈƕ űƀƉĥĪ

1 2 3

Ņ Ō Ņ ŏ ŦƦƍſűƉ Ō Ņ ljĬŅ ƎƍŶŴſ Ņł ŏ ŧĿĪŅ IJĿŴƤŨ űƀƉŤŨ ô ň Ņ Ō ň .űƇſŁĥ ťſƻƦƣ ł ň ł ł ł Ņ ł ł ŧƢſűŨ ťƍƤƊƤƉ įƢƏŁŁĥ ŻƄƟŁ ƦƍƤŨĭ Ō Ņ Ņ ñ ƎƍŶŴſ IJƢƉĪ .űƀƉŤŨ ųŨĪ ô Ņ ł ň ĶƢŨ ň ł ŴƊƀƟĥĪ Ō ł ťƀƘĭĪĿ ł Ņ ŏ ƦƇƖŨ ƋſƢƘĥ ô Ō ň ŏ Ņ Ņ Ō Ō Ņ ł ŏ ł ł ťƘŴƠƐƘĥ ĶĬƢŨĥĭ ƁƃŴƀźƌĥĪ ťƃƢſƢźƘł ł Ō ł ł ƁƘĿĥ ĜťƍſǓĭŤƏ Ņ ł ň ƈƕł űƀƉĥĪŅ ľƢƕĭ

1 2 3

East Syriac

.ťƀƍƀźƍźƏŴƠƆ .ťƊƀƊŶ Ƣƀū ŦĭĬô ťƀŨŴƠƖſ ťƀƏŤƆ ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ ƋƀƏŁŁĥ ƎƉŁĭ .ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ĸŴƐƘĥĪ ƎƍŶŴſĭ ťƀƏĥĪ ƎƍŶŴſ Ļĥ ťƄƉĭ .ŧƢƟƦƉ ò ŦƦƀƖƣŁ űƀƉŤŨ ƦſŤſĿŴƏ ƈƀƃĬ ħƦƃĥ ò ò ťƀŷƌűƉ ò .ĬƦſĪĭŁ ƁƍŨ ťƍŨŴŹĪ ò ò ƦƆƦŨ ŦƦƀƌŁűƕ ŦƦƀƖƣŁ ťƀƏŤŨĭ ò .ŦŁŴŬƇƘ

4 5

ŏ ł Ō Ō ł ƏŴƠëƆ .ťƀƍƀźƍź Ņ Ō ł Ƣƀūň ŦĭĬ Ņ ô ťƀŨŴƠƖſ ŅŅ ŏ ł .ťƊƀƊŶ ň ň Ņ ŏ ł ł ŏ Ō ƋƀƏŁŁĥ Ņł Ō .ŦŁĿŴƕĮ ťƀƏƧ ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ ƎƉŁĭ

163 4 5

Ņ ň Ņ ň ň ƎƍŶŴſĭ ŏ ťƀƏĥĪ ł ł ƎƍŶŴſ ĻĥŅ ťƄƉĭ ĸŴƐƘĥĪ 6 ň ň .ŧƢƟƦƉ ŌŅ ŏ ň ł Ņ Ņò ł Ō Ņ ħǁĥ 7 ŦƼƖƣŁ űƀƉŤŨň Ņ ƻŤſĿŴƏ ƈƀƃĬ 7 ł òł òŅ ł òŅ ŏ Ō .ĬƻĪĭŁ ƁƍŨ ťƀŷìƌűƉ ťƍŨŴŹĪ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ņ ò ł ł 8 ƦƆƦŨł ŦƼƌò Ņ ŁűƕŌ ŦƼƖƣŁ 8 Ņ ťƀƏŤŨĭ ň Ņ ò .ŦŁŴŬÿƇƘ Ň ð . In some types, this line is Note in sentence one that the line is on top of the ƍ in ŦƦƍſűƉ Ŏ

slanted.

6

9 How Do I Do That? In this final chapter we learn how to use the dictionary, how to read manuscripts, how to type Syriac on the computer, and how to read Garshuni. The first topic, on how to use the dictionary, is essential if you want to move forward with Syriac. The other topics are optional.

9.1 How to Use the Dictionary? Sooner or later you need to consult the dictionary. You probably know that all dictionaries list words in alphabetical order. Syriac dictionaries also sort items in alphabetical order, but what sort of items? There are two types of Syriac dictionaries. The first type arranges entries by roots, not words. If you want to find a word, you first must know its root, and then you can look up Ņ Ņ Ŕ ‘book’, ťŨĭǁ Ņ ŏ Ŕ Ņ ‘writer’, ťƍŨŵŨǂƉ Ņ ł ł ł the root in alphabetical order. For example, the words ťŨǁ ň ň ł ł ‘history’ will all be given under the root ħǁ. So will the verbs ħǁ, ħǁł , ħǁĥ, etc. Dictionaries that list words by roots include Thomas Audo’s1 Syriac-to-Syriac dictionary, Awgin Manna’s2 Syriac-Arabic dictionary, Costaz’s3 Syriac-French-English-Arabic dictionary, and Brockelmann’s4 Syriac-Latin dictionary. You probably would want to avoid those at the beginning until you become a pro and know how to figure out roots. But in case you want a challenge, there is a section below that gives you hints on finding the root of a word. If you are a beginner, the easiest dictionary to use from this category is Costaz’s. Ņ Ņ Ŕ ‘book’ and ťŨĭǁ Ņ ŏŔ Ņ The second type of dictionaries lists words in alphabetical order; ťŨǁ Ņ Ņ preceding ťŨĭǁ Ņ ŏ Ņ and probably with many other entries ‘writer’ are listed under Ĵ with ťŨǁ Ņ ł ł ł ‘history’ will be listed under Ķ. This is what you would expect in between. Then, ťƍŨŵŨǂƉ from a normal dictionary, but even then things are not that straightforward. Dictionaries that list words alphabetically, rather than under their roots, are easy to use when you are looking up a noun. If you want to look up a verb, you have to look it up in the singular 3rd person ň ł ł ł type. For example, ħǁ ł ň ‘she wrote’, and ħǁĥ masculine form of the ƈƖƘ ‘he wrote’, ƦŨǁ ł ‘composed’, etc. are listed under ħǁ. The main dictionary that uses this method is Margoliouth’s Compendious Syriac Dictionary which I very much recommend you get.

1 Thomas Audo, Treasure of the Syriac Language (ťƀìſĿŴƏ ťƍƤƆĪ ŦƦƊƀƏ) (Mousol, 1897, reprinted in Chicago in 1978, Holland in 1985, and Gorgias Press in 2007). 2 Eugene Manna, Chaldean-Arabic Dictionary (Gorgias Press reprint, 2007). 3 Louis Costaz, Syriac-English [-French-Arabic] Dictionary (Dar Al-Machriq, 2002) 4 Carl Brockelmann, Lexicon Syriacum (Georg Olms Verlag, 1995).

164

How to Read Manuscripts?

165

How to Find the Root? Finding the root of a word requires some experience. I will aim to give you some guidelines here, but this is not a comprehensive how-to guide. The first thing you would want to do is to strip any prefixes or suffixes from the word. For instance, you know about the ĵĭűŨ prefixes. If the word begins in one or more of these ł ł is ħǁ. But remember that letters, try to remove them; e.g., the root of ħǁĭł and ħǁĪĭ ł ‘chewed’; if you take the Ɔ out, you end ĵĭűŨ letters can be part of the word such as ƑƖëƆ up with the two-letter Ƒƕ which is unlikely to be a root as most roots have three letters. ň ł If a verb begins with ĥ it may be of the ƈƖƘĥ type. Try to remove it to see if you end ň ł up with a three letter root; e.g., ħǁĥ yields ħǁ which is a plausible root. But recall that ł ň ‘he said’, you end up with ƢƉ, not there is a class of initial-ĥ verbs. If you remove ĥ from ƢƉĥ likely to be a root. Familiarize yourself with the ĥ-initial verbal forms in the Appendix. ŏ ň The letters in ƦƍƉĥ also act as prefixes to future tense verbs and participles; e.g., ħĭǁĥ ň ł ň ł ‘he writes’ (the present or active participle of the ƈƖƘ type verb), ‘I shall write’, ħǂƉ ŏ ň ŏ ň ħĭǂƌ ‘he will write’, ħĭǁŁ ‘you will write’. If you remove the ƦƍƉĥ letter at the beginning of all these verbs you will end up with ħĭǁ or ħǁ. In the former, you know that the ĭ is part of the future tense vowel, so if you remove it you end up with ħǁ. In general, if you are out of prefixes or suffixes to remove, and you still have more than three letters and one of them is weak (ĥ, ĭ, or IJ), you can try to remove it as well. ň ň There is also the passive Łĥ prefix in verbs (and its variants Ʀƌň, ƦƉň, and ŁŁ). Those ň ň ň ň ň ň should be removed to find the root; e.g., ħǁŁĥ, ħǁƦƌň , ħǁƦƉň , ħǁŁŁ all of which have the root ħǁ. There are also the suffixes which attach to nouns. We came across some already; e.g., Ņ ŏ Ņ ŅťſšŅ and ŦŁĭš will find nouns ending in ljŅ, ŦŁ, ŦƼìƌĭ, and many Ŕ . Once you read more texts you Ō Ņ which we came across already. others. There is also the adverb ending ƻĥ ň ł ‘he wrote it’, and the possessive Finally, there are the object suffixes to verbs, e.g., ųŨǁ Ņň suffixes to nouns ųŨǁ ‘his book’. Those need to be removed to find the root. There will always be words whose roots are difficult to find, especially those whose roots contain weak letters (ĥ, ĭ, or IJ) as they tend to interchange. Do you know that the root Ņ of ŦƼŨł ‘house’ is ŁŴŨ? I had no idea until I started composing my concordance to the Syriac New Testament.1 It took me a while to figure out this one!

9.2 How to Read Manuscripts? There will be times when you will find yourself in front of a manuscript. I was exposed to manuscripts at a very early age at church because my church until this day does not have printed texts of the entire liturgical cycles. We use manuscripts. You may also find yourself 1

G. Kiraz, Concordance to the Syriac New Testament, volumes 1-6 (Brill, 1993).

166

How Do I Do That?

in need to study an unpublished text, and may have to go to a library where the text is preserved in some ancient manuscript. If you find yourself in such a situation, take special care when you handle the manuscript. Don’t do what I did when I once visited the British Library and ordered a sixth century manuscript to read. What happened? Well, I just mentioned that I was exposed to manuscripts since I was a young kid. As such I handled manuscripts the same way I handled any modern printed book; it was not special. When I was studying at Oxford, I decided to publish the text of Saint George’s life. I learned that there is a sixth century manuscript at the British Library. I went down there armed with a letter of recommendation from Sebastian P. Brock. The librarian very kindly brought me the manuscript. It was not easy to open it as the binding was tight. I did what I was used to doing before. I placed the manuscript flat on the table, pressed hard to open it, then to ensure it remained open while I was copying the text, I pressed on it even harder with my left elbow and started copying with my right hand. After a few minutes the librarian saw me and was horrified. He ran and in a very polite British-like manner showed me how to place the manuscript on a book stand that had special arms to keep the manuscript open. So how should you read manuscripts? With care! The first thing you will need to get used to is the hand-writing of the scribe. There is an album of dated Syriac manuscripts by William Hatch.1 It is not the cheapest of all books, but you can use it to get familiarity with a number of scripts. There are manuscripts which are palimpsests. At a time when paper was too expensive, scribes took older manuscripts they no longer needed and rubbed off the writing, then wrote on top of the old writing. These are harder to read, especially if you are interested in the rubbed older writing. The Sinai manuscript of the Old Syriac Gospels is a palimpsest and is very difficult to read. I mentioned that we still use manuscripts at church. Since manuscripts are rare, you cannot expect to have your own copy in hand. All deacons stand around a larger book stand, Ņ ŏ , and chant together. As the gudo gets crowded, you may be unlucky and end called the ŧĪŴū up reading upside down. Syriac children who grow up reading at church are experts in reading texts at any angle! Reading manuscripts is fun and gives you a bit of a challenge. Spend some time reading manuscripts from Hatch’s album. You can start with Biblical texts and compare the manuscript hand with the printed text.

9.3 How to Type in Meltho? The Meltho fonts are Unicode fonts which work, at least, on the Windows platforms. This section describes how to use the fonts to type Syriac texts. As installation may change from 1

William Hatch, An Album of Dated Syriac Manuscripts (Gorgias Press, 2002).

How to Type in Meltho?

167

time to time depending on the latest operating system, simply follow the instructions that come with the fonts. The Meltho fonts can be downloaded from the Beth Mardutho Web site at www.bethmardutho.org. Once you install the fonts and setup your computer to use Syriac (instructions are found at the Web site listed above), you will see a language icon with “EN” (for English) on the bottom tray of your screen. If you click on it, you will see the languages that you set up

your computer with. In my case, I have the languages shown in the following illustration. To type in Syriac, first open Microsoft Word. Click where you want to type Syriac, then click on the “EN” icon shown above and click on “Syriac.” You can now type away. There are two types of keyboard layouts, which you would have chosen during the setup process. The ‘standard’ one follows the Arabic keyboard, while the phonetic one is, well, phonetic. Letters are on the normal keys, and vowels and other marks are on the shift keys. The fonts are smart enough to figure out the various shapes of the letters (initial, middle, final, or stand alone) and ligatures, and to add spacing, or longer connections, between letters when you add specific vowels to make sure that vowels do not hit letters. But this is not perfect in all fonts (see under Fine Turning Spacing below). The basic usage of the Meltho fonts, and the location of letters, vowels, and marks is very well documented in the Meltho package. Make sure to read it first. What I aim to do here is to describe issues that are not covered in the documentation. Order of Key Strokes The Meltho fonts contain hundreds of rules that fine tune the spacing between letters, especially when vowels or diacritic points are used. For example, there is a rule that makes the connection in ƄƇ longer if there is syomé on the Ƅ; otherwise, the syomé will hit the Ƈ. ò ò Compare ťƄƇƉ with ťƄÿƇƉ. If this rule did not exist, you will end up with ťƄƇƉ where the syomé hits the Ƈ. That is ugly. ł There are also rules that define the vertical location of vowels and diacritic points: š on ł ĥ is high, but on IJł is low. The rules work on the assumption that you first type the letter, then in the case of ƦƙƃűŬŨ letters the Rukokho or Qushoyo point, then syomé if any, then the vowel if any. If you type the vowel then syomé, you may not get the intended result. So keep this order in mind: first letter, then Rukokho or Qushoyo, then syomé, then vowel.

168

How Do I Do That?

Controlling Letter Shapes While the fonts determine the shape of a letter depending on its location in a word, sometimes you may want to override that choice. For instance, in many places in the Primer, I had to type part of a word. For instance, if I want to say “ťź of ťźŨ,” how do I type the middle İ at the beginning of ťź? Usually it will come out as ťŹ. There are two control letters that you use to override the shape of letters. The first is called “No-Width Non Break”. The term “No-Width” indicates that the character has 0 width and cannot be seen. “Non Break” means that the character forces the letter not to break (i.e., to connect). You type this letter by holding the Alt and Ctrl keys that are on the right (very important!) of the space bar, and then pressing on ‘V’. This combination of Alt+Ctrl+V inserts this character. Hence, if you press Alt+Ctrl+V, then İ, then another Altr+Ctrl+V, you get ź, a middle letter that connects on both sides. If you want it to connect only on the right, then type Alt+Ctrl+V then İ; the result is Ż. Similarly, if you want an initial version of this letter, type İ then Alt+Ctrl+V, and you will get Ź. The other control character is “No-Width Optional Break.” This character forces a connection between two letters to break. You type it by holding the Alt and Ctrl keys that are on the right of the space bar, and then pressing B. For example, in older Estrangelo texts, the letter ĸ does not connect to the left as in ħƑƌ instead of ŪƐƌ. You can get this by pressing Alt+Ctrl+B after you type ĸ. In Serto, some people like to have a straight non curvy ĥ in the middle of a word as in ĪŦĽ instead of ĪĥĽ. You can accomplish this by inserting an Alt+Ctrl+B after the ĥ. You can use these two control letters to break ligatures that are automatically built into the fonts if you don’t like them. Many people do not like the Nj ligature and prefer ŻƏ. Simply add an Alt+Ctrl+V between the two letters. Also some don’t like the inter-word ligature ǃ. Simply type ĵ, then space, then Alt+Ctrl+B, then ĥ and you will get ĥ ĵ. Fine Tuning Spacing Even with the hundred of rules embedded in the fonts that control spacing, the fonts are far ň ò ŏ the from being perfect. I came across some difficulties writing this book. For example in ŦĮĭĮ šŏ vowel is too close to the syomé. You can add an extra small space by clicking on the “Insert” menu, then “Symbol…,” then the “Special Characters” tab, then choose “1/4 Em space,” then click on “Insert.” This inserts a small space which you can make even smaller ň ò Įŏ. by changing the point size of the space. Doing so can perfect the spacing as in ŦĮĭ Typesetting Poetry You may want to typeset a Mimro poem by justifying it from both sides. You can do this by making the alignment of the paragraph “Justify Low” (from the “Format” menu, pick “Paragraph” and set the alignment). This will add a longer connection at the end of each word. Also, instead of hitting the “Enter” key at the end of each line, hold the Shift key and hit “Enter.” Here is an example:

How to Type in Meltho?

169

ƎƌĿĪŴÿÿÿÿƖƆ ŦŁ ķƢÿÿÿƉ ťÿÿÿÿſƢƉ ƅÿÿÿƆ ƎÿÿÿƍſƢƟ ò ƈÿÿƕ ťÿÿƊŶǓ űÿÿũƕĭ ķŁŴÿÿƖŨ ƗÿÿƊƣ ķƦÿÿƤƙƌ ò ťÿÿÿÿƃƨƉĪĭ ŧǔÿÿÿÿƀƕĪ ŧƢÿÿÿÿƉ ķƢÿÿÿÿƉ ťÿÿÿÿſƢƉ ò ĖķƦÿƤƙƌ ƈÿƕ ťÿƊŶǓ űÿũƕĭ ķŁŴÿƖŨ ƗƊƣ Special Symbols In Microsoft Word, if you want to type a Unicode symbol, you can type its code then hit Alt+X. For example, you have seen the ‫ ڔ‬symbol which I used as a place holder for letters. Its Unicode value is 25cc (Unicode numbers are in hex so they include the letters a-f in addition to digits). If you type 25cc then Alt+x, you will get the symbol. Conversely, if you press Alt+X next to a letter or symbol, you will get its Unicode value. Not that this is an easy way to type, but if you know that the Unicode code for ĥ is 0710, then you can type the number followed by Alt+X and the letter ĥ will be typed! How to Create a New Diacritic Sometimes you may need a special diacritic mark on a letter. For instance, a colleague was working on Masoretic manuscripts, and he needed to place a dot in the middle of Ļ like this . . No such dot exists in the Unicode definition for Syriac and it is not present in any of the Syriac fonts. Luckily, Microsoft Word allows you to overlay one character on another. It is a bit complicated but can be done. First you need to find the two characters that make the combination that you need. Here, we can use Ļ and the English period to create . . Click on the “Insert” menu, then click on “Fields”. You will get the following dialog box.

”

”

Under “Categories,” pick “Equations and Formulas” as shown above. Then under “Field Names”, click on “Eq.” Then click on the “Field Codes” button. Another button will appear next to it called “Options…”. Click on it. Then you will get the following dialog box.

170

How Do I Do That?

Now, click on \O(), which is the overlay command, and click on “Add to Field”. You can now edit the text box where “EQ \O()” appears to read “EQ \O(Ļ, .).” In other words, you type the two characters you want to overlay with a comma separator. Now click OK twice. Word will overlay the period on top of Ļ. But you are not done yet. Now, you need to change the location of the period raising it a bit, and maybe changing its point size. Right-click on the Ļ that was generated, and click “Toggle Field codes” to get “EQ \O(Ļ, .).” Then highlight the period. Now click on the “Format” menu, then click on “Fonts.” The following dialog box will show.

Click on the “Character Spacing” tab. Set “Position” to “Raised”, and adjust it to 3 pt as shown above. You have to play with this number until it places the period where you want it vertically. If the period is too big, you can change its point size. If you want to move it horizontally to the right, you can insert a space before it (or ½ space) and play with the point size of the space as well until the horizontal location is where you want it to be. You can cut-and-past the new character anywhere else in the document. If you know how to record a macro, you can record the entire process and save it in a macro and assign the macro to a key.

Reading Garshuni

171

9.4 Reading Garshuni Garshuni is a term, whose origins no one knows, that refers to another language being written in Syriac letters. The most popular form of Garshuni is Arabic Garshuni where the script is Syriac, but the text is Arabic. Other forms of Garshuni are Ottoman Turkish Garshuni, and Malayalam Garshuni. Arabic Garshuni Many manuscripts are written in Garshuni and you may come across them one day, that is if you know Arabic. There is a simple one-to-one mapping between Arabic letters and their Syriac counterpart. There are a few Arabic letters that do not have a counterpart in Syriac: ĩ is used for Ν, ı for υ. In addition, ĨŔ for ύ, ĪŔ for Ϋ, ĴŔ for Υ, ŁŔ is used for Ι, and Ľœ for ν. ò Two dots on Ĭ indicate Γ. The Arabic vowels are used instead of the Syriac vowels. Here is a sample text1 in the Arabic script and in Garshuni:

ΔϨγ ϱήΒόϟ΍ ϦΑ΍ αϮϳέϮϐϳήϏ Ϊϟ˵ϭ 1244 ΔϨγ ΔϴϛΎτϧ΍ ϲϓ ΐ˷ϫήΗϭ 1226 Ϧϣ Ϧϳήθόϟ΍ ϲϓ ˬ΢Βλ΃ϭ ΎϨϫΎϛ Ϣϴγ ΚϴΣ ϞϘ˵ϧ ΎϬϨϣϭ ˬαΎΑϮΟ ϰϠϋ ΎϔϘγ΃ ˬϩήϤϋ .ΐϠΣ ϰϟ΍ ϢΛ ϦϴΒ˷ϗϻ ΔϴϔϘγ΃ ϰϟ· ˬϥΎϳήϔϤϟ΍ ϡΎϘϣ ϰϟ΍ ϲϗέ ˬ1264 ΔϨγϭ ϡΎϋ ΐ΋Ύϧ Ϯϫϭ ˬΔϔϗΎγ΃ βϴ΋έ ήϴΒϛ ϱ΍ ϕήθϤϟ΍ ΩϼΒϟ ΔϴϛΎτϧ΍ ϙήϳήτΒϟ Γήτϴδϟ΍ ΖΤΗ ϙ΍άϧ΁ ΖϧΎϛ ϲΘϟ΍ ϦΑ΍ φϔϟ ΔϏ΍ήϣ ϲϓϭ .ΔϴϟϮϐϤϟ΍ .1286 ΔϨγ ΓήϴΧϷ΍ ϪγΎϔϧ΃ ϱήΒόϟ΍

ò ųƍƏ IJƢũƖƭ ƎŨĥ ĸŴſĿŴŬſƢū Ŕ Ŕ űƆ˵ĭ ò ò ƋƀƏ ĉ Ƽì ˷ Ŕ Ŷ 1244 ųƍƏ ųƀƃŤźƌĥ ƁƘ ĉ ħĬĿŁĭ ťƙƠƏĥ ĉ ĬƢƊƕ ƎƉ ƎſƢƤƖƭ ƁƘ ŸŨĽĥĭ ljĬŤƃ ò ųƀƙƠƏĥ ƁƆĥĊ ƈƠƌĄ ŦųƍƉĭ ĸŤŨŴŮ ƁƇƕ ò ųƍƏĭ ŪƇŶ Ɓƭ ĶŁŔ ƎƀũƟƧ Ɓƭ ƁƟĿ 1264 ĉ ò ĉ ĭĬĭ ųƙƟŤƏĥ ƑƀſĿ Ƣƀũƃ IJĥ ķŤſƢƙƊƭ ĶŤƠƉ ò ĉ ľƢƤƊƭ ĪƨũƆ ųƀƃŤźƌĥ ĴƢſƢźũƆ ĶŤƕ ŪſŤƌ Ĉ ò ĬƢźƀƐƭ ƦŶŁ ĴĥűƌĥŔ ƦƌŤƃ IJƦƭ ò ò IJƢũƖƭ ƎŨĥ žƙƆ ųūĥƢƉ ƁƘĭ ųƀƆŴŬƊƭ Ŕ Ŕ ò ĬƢƀƃƧĥ ò Ŕ ĉ ųƏŤƙƌĥĉ .1286 ųƍƏ 1226

Introduction to the Chronicle of Bar Ebroyo (ϱήΒόϟ΍ ϦΑ΍ ϦϳΪϟ΍ ϝΎϤΟ Νήϔϟ΍ ϲΑϷ ϥΎϣΰϟ΍ ΦϳέΎΗ) by Jean Maurice Fiey (Dar Al-Mashriq, 1991), p. (12). 1

172

How Do I Do That?

Ottoman Turkish Garshuni My grandfather used to write his letters in Ottoman Turkish but using the Syriac alphabet. This is what we call Ottoman Garshuni. Many secular publications from the late 1800s and early 1900s are written in this form. Malayalam Garshuni Malayalam Garshuni refers to Malayalam texts written in Syriac letters. Unlike the previous forms of Garshuni, where special symbols modify Syriac letters to represent sounds not found in Syriac, Malayalam Garshuni uses a mixture of Syriac and old Malayalam letters, intertwined beautifully. The colophon shown above contains two names in Malayalam Garshuni, one of which is discussed here. (I am grateful to István Perczel of Tübingen University, who took the photograph and who was able to provide the reading, which he in turn learned from Fr George Kurukkoor of the Pastoral Orientation Centre, Ernakulam.) The name is at the beginning of line 5. It is Edapullikulangra. Here is the word in a mixture of Syriac and Malayalam letters (I used modern Malayalam letters for the lack of an old Malayalam font):

ĥ Ŕñ Ċ ŴƄſ ĊĊ ŴƘ÷ĥ ň

The word is made up of the following letters: Syriac ĥ (but without the vowel) for E, Malayalam ÷ da, Syriac ŴƘ for pu, Malayalam ĊĊ ll, Syriac IJ for i, Syriac Ŵƃ for ku, Malayalam Ċ la, Malayalam Ŕñ ngra, and finally an ĥ for a.

Appendix Verb Paradigms The derivation of Syriac verbs depends on a number of factors: the type of the root from which it is derived, its ‘measure’, tense, number, person, and gender. These are described below in greater details. Root Types

Syriac verbs are derived from roots which usually consist of three letters, although there are ł ł ň ‘she roots that consist of two or four letters. For example, the verbs ħǁ ‘he wrote’, ƦŨǁ ň ň wrote’, ħǁŁĥ ‘it was written’, etc., are all derived from the three-letter root ħǁ. The paradigms of a particular verb very much depend on the letters that make up the root, and the position of those letters in the root. For example, roots whose first letter is ƌ may have a paradigm that differs from roots whose first letter is IJ. Roots whose last letter is ĥ may have their own special paradigm. Roots are classified as either ‘strong’ or ‘weak’. A STRONG ROOT does not contain any of the letters ĥ, ĭ, or IJ; e.g., ƈźƟ, ħǁ, ŪƐƌ. A WEAK ROOT contains at least one of the letters ĥ, ĭ, or IJ; e.g., ƢƉĥ, ħƻ, ĵŤƣ, ŧƢƟ. The position of the weak letter in the root is important. A root whose first letter is ĥ such as ƢƉĥ has a different paradigm than a root whose third letter is ĥ such as ŧƢƟ. Grammars refer to the position of a letter in a root differently. One can do so by the terms first, second and third as we have already done in this paragraph. Alternatively, we can use initial, middle and final since there are three letters only; e.g., we say that ħƻ has an initial IJ, ĵŤƣ has a middle ĥ, and ƢƉĥ has a final Ŀ. Some grammars use the letters of the root ƈƖƘ as an indicator (where Ļ indicates the first/initial letter, ĺ indicates the second/middle letter, and ĵ indicates the third/final letter). For example, we say that ħƻ is a IJ-Ļ (read Ļ, then IJ) verb (i.e., its Ļ-position letter is IJ), ĵŤƣ is a ĥ-ĺ verb (i.e., its ĺ-position letter is ĥ ), and ƢƉĥ is a Ŀ-ĵ verb (i.e., its ĵ-position letter ň is Ŀ). In her A Compendious Syriac Dictionary under the entry for ơƇƏ, for instance, J. Smith tells us that in the future it “is conjugated like a ƎƘ verb” (p. 379); i.e., like a verb whose Ļł . position letter is ķ like ŪƐƌ Additionally, certain letters in certain positions in the root may also affect the paradigm. For example, roots whose first letter is ƌ differ in the future tense from regular verbs. Usually there is a reason for this. The future of the regular verb is derived by adding the prefix ňƌ as in ŏ ħĭǂƌň ‘he will write’. If the root itself begins with a ƌ then its ƌ merges with that of the prefix. ł ň not ŪƐƍƌ ł ň . The paradigm tables that follow For example, the future of the root ŪƐƌ is ŪƐƌ are: 173

174

Appendix Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10

Table 11 Table 12 Table 13

Regular strong verbs. These are verbs deriving from roots whose letters do not contain ĥ, ĭ, or IJ. Strong verbs whose initial letter is sibilant (i.e., Į, ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ). Strong verbs whose initial letter is ƌ. Strong verbs whose final letter is guttural (i.e., Ĭ, į, or ĺ), or Ŀ. Weak verbs whose initial letter is ĥ. Weak verbs whose middle letter is ĥ. Weak verbs whose final letter is ĥ. Weak verbs whose initial letter is IJ. Weak verbs whose middle letter is IJ or ĭ. Doubled verbs. These are verbs whose second and third letters are the same such as ĮŵŨ. The doubled verb is also called geminate in some grammars. Attaching object pronoun suffixes to regular verbs. Attaching object pronoun suffixes to final ĥ verbs. Some irregular verbs.

The Measure

The term ‘measure’, sometimes called in other grammars ‘pattern’, ‘template’, ‘form’, ‘stem’, or ‘conjugation’, refers to a verbal pattern in Semitic languages. The function of this pattern is not always clear. The root letters form the basis of this pattern, and one has to pick a particular root to serve as a place holder for the root letters. Historically grammarians used the root ƈƖƘ, and we shall do the same here. Each ‘measure’ or pattern simply adds vowels and letters to the base ƈƖƘ. The measures are: ł ƈƖƘ It is the base measure, and has a vowel on the middle letter. This vowel is ł ň ł ň ƌ ‘he descended’. sometimes š as in ħǁ ‘he wrote’, or š as in Ʀŷì Dictionaries usually indicate the vowel for each particular root or verb. ł ň ƈƖƘ While it sometimes gives a more intensive meaning than the base ň ł measure, in many cases the meaning of a ƈƖƘ verb is not related to that ň ł measure. In the root ħƢƟ, for example, the ƈƖƘ ł form ħƢƟ of its ƈƖƘ ň ł ň means “he came near,” while the ƈƖƘ from ħƢƟł means “he offered.” ň ł While it sometimes gives a causative meaning, in many cases the meaning ƈƖƘĥ ň ł ł measure. In the root of an ƈƖƘĥ verb is not related to that of its ƈƖƘ ň ł means “to fight”. ħƢƟ cited above, ħƢƟĥ ň Each of the above measures has a ‘passive’ counterpart that begins with the Łĥ prefix. The word ‘passive’ is in single quotes because passiveness is its general function. But it is important to keep in mind that the ‘passive’ counterpart of a measure may give a meaning that is totally unrelated. The ‘passive’ measures are:

Verb Paradigms

ň ň is the passive counterpart of ƈƖƘ ł . ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ň ł ł ł ƈƖƘŁĥ is the passive counterpart of ƈƖƘ. ň ł ň ł ł ƈƖƘŁŁĥ is the passive counterpart of ƈƖƘĥ.

175

Tense

Syriac has the following tenses: Past The past tense is also called in other grammars ‘perfect’, and indicates a complete action. Future The future tense is also called in other grammars ‘imperfect’, and indicates an incomplete action. Present The present tense is also called in other grammars ‘active participle’. To the above, one adds the imperative which indicates an order, the participle which is called in other grammars ‘passive participle’, and the infinitive. Number Person and Gender

Syriac verbs are also defined by number, person, and gender. Number can be either singular or plural, person can be 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, and gender can be masculine, feminine or common.

176

Appendix

Table Organization

Each paradigm table spans over many pages. The columns specify verb types or ‘measures’. ň ň , ƈƖƘ ň ł and its passive counterpart ł and its passive counterpart ƈƖƘŁĥ These are ƈƖƘ ň ł and its passive counterpart ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł ł ň , and ƈƖƘĥ ł ł ň . The columns spread over two facing ƈƖƘŁĥ pages, and are marked by A, B, C, etc. The rows give tense (past, future, present, as well as the participle, imperative and infinitive), number (singular and plural), person (1st, 2nd, and 3rd), and gender (masculine and feminine). Each row spans two facing pages. Rows are numbered and may continue to the following pair of pages. For instance, Table 1 occupies pages 262 to 267. Pages 262 and 263 contain rows 1 to 25, and pages 264 and 265 contain rows 26 to 49. The notes occupy pages 266 and 267. A cell is identified by its column letter heading and row numerical heading, the same ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ň , the past way grids are identified in maps. In Table 1, for example, cell C5 gives ƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ň ň singular 1st person form of the ƈƖƘŁĥ. A cell may contain variant forms which are separated by ‘/’. Full Rukokho and Qushoyo marks are given in Table 1 only, but can be applied throughout. Empty cells indicate that the form does not exist for that particular morphological ň setting. For instance, all ŁĥŔ-type verbs are passive by nature and do not exist in the present tense (which is also the active participle); hence, you will find in Table 1 cells C26-37, E26-37, and G26-37 empty.

Verb Paradigms

177

Table 1. Regular Strong Verbs The root of a strong verb does not contain ĥ, ĭ, or IJ. The roots ħǁ and ƋƇƣ are such roots. In the ƈƖłƘ, the vowel on the second letter of the past and future tenses varies from verb to verb, and can be known from experience or simply by consulting the dictionary. The dictionary usually gives for each verb its past tense vowel and its future tense vowel. For ŏ ł ŏ ň ł ň example, ħǁ has š in the past tense and š in the future ħĭǂƌň , while ƋƇƣ has š in the past ł ł tense and š in the future tense ƋƇƤƌň . In general (but not always), transitive verbs (i.e., verbs ł that express an action and normally require an object) have the vowel š in the past tense, ŏ and š in the future tense); intransitive verbs (i.e., verbs that express a situation and do not ň ł require an object such as to sleep) have the vowel š in the past tense, and š in the future ł tense. Further, verbs ending in į, ĺ, or Ŀ tend to have š in the past and future tense; e.g. ł ł ň ł -ƗƊƤƌ ł ň ‘listened-shall listen’, and ĿŴƣ ł -ĿŴƤƌ ł ň ‘jumpedįƦƘ-įƦƙƌ ‘opened-shall open’, ƗƊƣ shall jump’ (for which see Table 4). It is important to note that the past tense and future ł measure. All other measures have a standard vowel. tense vowels apply only to the ƈƖƘ ł ň Column A in Table 1 gives the paradigm for ħǁ and Column B for ƋƇƣ. Other vowel combinations are given in the notes. The Entries ħǁ and ƋƇƣ from Compendious Syriac Dictionary Here are the first few lines of the entries ħǁ and ƋƇƣ from Smith’s Compendious Syriac Dictionary that illustrate how the vowels of verbs are indicated.

ň Ņ Ņ ŏ ŏ ł ħǁ fut. ħĭǂƌň , imper. ħĭǁ, act. part. [present] ħǁŅ , ťŨǁ , pass. part. Ō Ņ Ō Ņ Ō Ūſǁ, ťũſǁ, ŦƦũſǁ. A) to write, write out, copy out… ň fut. ƋƇƤƌ ň Ņ , ťƊÿƇƣ ł ň , act. part. [present] ƋƇƣ Ņ Ņ , pass. part. ťƊƀƇƣ Ņ Ō . A) ƋƇƣ Ō ł to come to an end, be finished, concluded… opp. IJƢƣ As you can see, the first thing that is given is the past tense and the future with the proper vowel.

178 Table 1. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

Infinitive

A

B

C

A

B

C

ň ň ł PȨal1 ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘ ň ŏ ł ł Past š, future š EthpȨel Past š, future ĭš ň ň ł œ ň ħǁ ƋƇƣ ħǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł ň ƦŔ ŨłœǁŁĥ ƦŨǁ ƦƊíƇƣ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ ł ň Ŕ œŔ œ ŔłŔ œ œ ň œ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ƦŨǁ ƦƊƇƣ ƦŨǁŁĥ œ ł œ ň œ ň ň IJƦŨǁ IJƦƊƇƣ IJƦŨǁŁĥ ô ŔŔ œ ô ô Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł ň ƦƊíƇƣ ƦŨǁ Ŕ ň ň ƦŔ Ũňœǁ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ œŁĥŔ ň ň ł ň ŏ ň / ŴƊƇƣ ŏ Ŕ ł Ŕ œ / ŴŨǁ ŏ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ň / ŴŨǁŁĥ ķŴŨǁ ķŴƊíƇƣ ķŴŨǁŁĥ ô ŔŔ œ ô ô Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ò ł ò ň Ŕ ł Ŕ œ / 2ƁŨǁ ò ň ò ň ň ò ň ň / ƁƊíƇƣ ò ň Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ň / ƁŨǁŁĥ ƎƀŨǁ ƎƀƊíƇƣ ƎƀŨǁŁĥ ô ŔŔ œ ô Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ô ŏœ ň ŏœ ł œ ŏœ ň œ ň ķĭƦƊƇƣ ķĭƦŨǁ ķĭƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ ŔŔ Ŕ ňœ ò ň ňœ ò ł œ ňœ ò ň œ ň ƎſƦƊíƇƣ ƎſƦŨǁ ƎſƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ ŔŔ Ŕ ň œň ň ň ł œ ł œ ň ň ł łƎƍŨǁ ł ƎƍƊƇƣ / ƎƊƇƣ ƎƍŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ / ƎŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ / ƎŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ŏ ň ł ň ħĭǂƌ ħǁƦƌ ƋƇƤƌ Ŕ œ Ŕň ŔŔ œŔň ŏ ň ŏ ň ň ň ł ňœ 3ƁŨĭǁŁ ƋƇƣŁ ħǁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŁŁŔœ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ œ / ħĭǁŁ ŏ ň ň ň ł ňœ ħĭǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ ħǁ ƋƇƣŁ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŁŁŔœ Ō ňœ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ł ň ƎƀƊíƇƣŁ ƎƀŨǁŁ ƎƀŨŌœǁ Ŕ œ ŁŁŔœ ŏ ň ň ň ł ň ƋƇƣĥ ħĭǁĥ ħǁ Ŕ œ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŁĥŔ ŏ ƌň ł ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴƊíƇƤ ķŴŨŏœǁƦƌ ķŴŨǂƌ Ŕ œŔň Ņ łœ ň Ņ òň Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň ƎƊíƇƤƌ ƎŨǂƌ ƎŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ ňœ ŏ ł ň œ ŏ ŏ œ ķŴƊíƇƣŁ ķŴŨǁ ķŴŨǁŁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŁŁŔœ Ņ łœ ňœ Ņ ò ňœ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň œ ƎƊíƇƣŁ ƎŨǁŁ ƎŨò œ ǁ Ŕ ŁŁŔ ŏœ ň ň œ ň ł ň ƋƇƤƌ ħǁƦƌ ħĭǂƌ ŔŔ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ œ ł œ Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔň ħĭǁ ƋƇƣ ħǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ ł Ō ł / ƁƊƇƣ ł ň Ō Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ / ƁŨĭǁ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ƁŨǁ ƎƀƊíƇƣ ƎƀŨĭǁ ƎƀŨǁ ô ô Ŕ Ŕ œ ô œ Ŕ œ ŁĥŔ ŏ ł ł ň ŏ ł / ŴƊƇƣ ŏ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ / ŴŨĭǁ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ŴŨǁ ķŴŨĭǁ ķŴƊíƇƣ ķŴŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ ô ô œ Ŕ œ ŁĥŔ ò ł ò ň ł / ƁƊíƇƣ ò ŏ ò ł ň ò ň Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ / ƁŨĭǁ ò ň œ Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ƁŨǁ ƎƀƊíƇƣ ƎƀŨĭǁ ƎƀŨǁ ô ô Ŕ Ŕ œ ô œ Ŕ œ ŁĥŔ ł ł ň ŏŔ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ň ħǂƉ ƋƇƤƉ ŴŨǁƦƉ Ŕ œ Ŕň

179

D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ň ł ň ħǁŁĥ ħǁ Ŕ œ łœŔ Ŕ œ łœ ň ƦŨǁŁĥ ƦŨǁ Ŕ łŔ œ łœ Ŕ Ŕ łŔ œ łœ œ Ŕ ł œ ł œ Ŕň œ Ŕňœ łœ ƦŨǁŁĥ ƦŨǁ œ ň ł œ ł ł ň IJƦŨǁ IJƦŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ œ ô Ŕ œ œŔ ň ƦŨǁ ƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ňŔ œ łœ Ŕ ňŔ œ łœŔ ň ł ł ł ň ŏ Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ŴŨǁ ŏ Ŕ ł œ ł œ Ŕ ň / ŴŨǁŁĥ ķŴŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œŔ ô Ŕ œ œ ķŴŨǁŁĥ ò ň ł ò ł ł ň ò ň Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ƁŨǁ ò ň Ŕ ł œ ł œ Ŕ ň / ƁŨǁŁĥ ƎƀŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ƎƀŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ œŔ ŏœ łœ łœ ň ŏœ ňœ łœ ķĭƦŨǁŁĥ ķĭƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ ł œ ł œ ň ňò œ ň œ ł œ ƎſƦŨǁŁĥ ƎſƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ łœ ňœ łœ ł ň łœ łœ ň łƎƍŨǁ ł ƎƍŨǁŁĥ Ŕ œ łœŔ Ŕ / ƎŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ / ƎŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ň ł ħǁƦƌ ħǂƌ Ŕ œ łœ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ łŔ ň ł ň ħǁŁ ħǁ Ŕ œ łŔ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔœ ň ł ň ħǁŁ ħǁ Ŕ œ łŔ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔœ ŌŔ œ łŔ œ Ō Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔňœ ƎƀŨǁŁ ƎƀŨǁ ň ň ł ň ħǁ ħǁĥ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ Ŕ œ łœ ŏŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ŏŔ œ łŔ ķŴŨǁƦƌ ķŴŨǂƌ Ņò œ ł œ ň Ņò œ ł ƎŨǁƦƌ ƎŨǂƌ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ň ł œ ŏ ŏ œ ķŴŨǁŁ ķŴŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŔŁœ Ņò œ ł œ Ņò œ ł œ ň œ ƎŨǁŁ ƎŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁŁŔ ňœł ł ħǁƦƌ ħǂƌ Ŕ œ łœ Ŕ ň Ŕ Ŕ ň ł ň ħǁ ħǁ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ Ŕ œ łœ ň ł ł ł ň Ō Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ƁŨǁ Ō Ŕ ł œ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ƁŨǁ ƎƀŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ô Ŕ œ œ ƎƀŨǁ ň ł ł ł ň ŏ Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ŴŨǁ ŏ Ŕ ł œ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ŴŨǁ ķŴŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ô Ŕ œ œ ķŴŨǁ ò ň ł ò ł ł ň ò ň Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ƁŨǁ ò ň Ŕ ł œ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ƁŨǁ ƎƀŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ƎƀŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ŏŔ Ņœ łœ Ŕ ň ŏŔ Ņœ łŔ ŴŨǁƦƉ ŴŨǂƉ D

E

ň ł ħǁĥ Ŕœ Ŕ ł ƦŨǁĥ Ŕ łŔ œ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň œ Ŕł ƦŨǁĥ œ ň ł IJƦŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ł ƦŨǁĥ Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ ň ł ŏ Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ŴŨǁĥ ķŴŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ò ň ł ò ň Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ƁŨǁĥ ƎƀŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ŏœ ňœ ł ķĭƦŨǁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ ň œ ł ƎſƦŨǁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň ł ňœ ł łƎƍŨǁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ / ƎŨǁĥ ň ħǂƌ Ŕ œ Ŕł ň ł ħǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ ň ł ħǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ƎƀŨǁŁ ň ł ħǁĥ Ŕœ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł ķŴŨǂƌ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕł ƎŨǂƌ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ķŴŨǁŁ Ņò œ ł œ ƎŨǁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ň ħǂƌ Ŕ œ Ŕł ň ł ħǁĥ Ŕœ Ŕ ňœ ł Ō Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ƁŨ ƎƀŨǁĥ Ŕ ô Ŕ ǁĥ ňœ ł ňœ ł ŏ ķŴŨǁĥ Ŕ Ŕ / ŴŨǁĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ ò ň ł ň Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ƁŨǁĥ òƎƀŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ŏŔ Ņœ Ŕ ł ŴŨǂƉ F

ł ł ň ħǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ œ Ŕł œ œň ƦŨ Ŕ ł Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ƦŨǁŁŁĥ œ ł ł ň IJƦŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł ň ƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ œ œ ł ł ň ŏ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ œ ň / ŴôŨǁŁŁĥ ķŴŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ò ł ł ň ò ň Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ œ ň / ƁŨǁŁŁĥ ƎƀŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ŏ œ ł œ ł œ œň ķĭƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ ł œ ł œ œ ň ƎſƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ ł œ œň ł ł ň łƎƍŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ / ƎŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł ł ħǁŁƦƌ Ŕ œ Ŕœ œň ł łň 4ħǁŁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł łň 4ħǁ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ň œ 4ƎƀŨǁŁŁ ł ł ň ħǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ķŴŨǁŁƦƌ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕł œ œ ň ƎŨǁŁƦƌ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ň œ 4ķŴŨǁŁŁ Ņò œ ł œ ň œ 4ƎŨǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ łœ łœ œ ň ħǁŁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ł ł ň ħǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł ł ň Ō Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ œ ň / ƁŨǁŁŁĥ ƎƀŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł ł ň ŏ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ œ ň / ŴŨǁŁŁĥ ķŴŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ò ł ł ň ò ň Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ œ ň / ƁŨǁŁŁĥ ƎƀŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ŴŨǁŁƦƉ G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

180 Table 1. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A

B

Separated Pronoun 26

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

C

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ł PȨalƈƖƘ

M = Masculine F = Feminine

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

ň ħǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ņœ Ņ ťŨŅœǁ Ŕ œ ň Ņ œ ł ħǁ Ʀƌĥ ô ŔŔ œ œ ł Ņœ Ŕ Ņœ IJƦƌĥ ô ô ťŨǁ ň ljĥŅ ô ħǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ņœ Ņœ Ŕ Ņœ ljĥŅ ô ťŨǁ Ōœ Ŕ Ņœ ƎƀŨǁ ŅœòŔ Ņœ ƎŨǁ ŏœ ł Ōœ Ņœ 5ķĭƦƌĥ Ŕ ô ƎƀŨǁ ò ň ł Ņ œ Ņ 5ƎſƦƌĥ ƎŨǁ ô œŔ œ Ōœ Ŕ Ņœ ł ƎƀŨǁ 5ƎƍŶ ŅœòŔ Ņœ ł ƎŨǁ 5ƎƍŶ Ō Ūſǁ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŅŔ ŌŔ œ ťũſǁ Ō œ ł Ūſǁ Ʀƌĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ œ ł ŅŔ ŌŔ œ IJƦƌĥ ô ô ťũſǁ Ō ljĥŅ ô Ūſǁ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŅŔ ŌŔ œ ljĥŅ ô ťũſǁ ŌŔ ŌŔ œ Ǝƀũſǁ ŅŔò ŌŔ œ Ǝũſǁ ŏœ ł Ō Ō œ ķĭƦƌĥ Ŕ Ŕ ô Ǝƀũſǁ ňœ ł Ņ ò Ō œ ƎſƦƌĥô Ǝũſǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ ŌŔ œ łƎƍŶ Ǝƀũſǁ ŅŔò ŌŔ œ ł Ǝũſǁ ƎƍŶ A

Contracted Pronoun

EthpȨel

œ łœ Ŕ Ņœ ƦŨǁ œ Ņ IJƦŨǁ ô łœ Ŕ œ Ņ ŔňŔ Ņœ ťƍŨǁ Ņ Ņœ Ŕ Ņœ ťƍŨǁ ŏ œ Ōœ Ņœ ķĭƼŨǁ Ŕ ňœ Ņœò Ņœ ƎſƦŨǁ Ŕ Ōœ Ŕ Ņœ łƎƍƀŨǁ ł ŅœòŔ Ņœ ƎƍŨǁ

ň ħǁƦƉ ŔŔ œŔ ň Ņœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň ťŨǁƦƉ ł Ʀœ ŨłœǁƦƉ Ŕ œŔ ň ł IJôƦœ ŨłœǁƦƉ Ŕ œŔ ň Ņ ŔňŔ œ Ŕ ň ťƍŨǁƦƉ Ņœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň ťƍŅŨǁƦƉ Ōœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň ƎƀŨǁƦƉ Ņò œ ł œ ň ƎŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŏœ Ōœ łœ ň ķĭƼŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ Ņ œ ł œ ň ƎſƦŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ Ō Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň łƎƍƀŨǁƦƉ ł Ņœ łœ ň ƎòƍŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ 6

œ łŔ ŌŔ œ Ʀũſǁ œ Ō IJƦũſǁ ô ŅŔ Ŕ œ Ņ Ŕ ŌŔ œ ťƍũſǁ Ņ ŅŔ ŌŔ œ ťƍũſǁ ŏœ Ō Ō œ ķĭƼũſǁ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ Ņ ò Ō œ ƎſƦũſǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ ŌŔ œ łƎƍƀũſǁ ł ŅŔò ŌŔ œ Ǝƍũſǁ B

C

181

D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ň ħǂƉ Ŕ œ łŔ ŅŔ œ łŔ ťŨǂƉ œ ł Ŕ ǂƉ œ łŔ ƦŨ œ ł IJƦŨǂƉ ô łŔ œ Ŕ Ņ Ŕň œ łŔ ťƍŨǂƉ Ņ ŅŔ œ łŔ ťƍŨǂƉ ŌŔ œ łŔ ƎƀŨǂƉ ŅŔ œ łŔ ò ƎŨǂƉ ŏœ Ō œł ķĭƼŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ Ņ œ ł òƎſƦŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ œ łŔ łƎƍƀŨǂƉ ł ŅŔ œ łŔ ò ƎƍŨǂƉ ł ħǂƉ Ŕ œ łŔ ŅŔ œ łŔ ťŨǂƉ œ ł Ŕ œ ł ŔƉ ƦŨǂ œ ł IJƦŨǂƉ ô łŔ œ Ŕ Ņ Ŕł œ łŔ ťƍŨǂƉ Ņ ŅŔ œ łŔ ťƍŨǂƉ ŌŔ œ łŔ ƎƀŨǂƉ ŅŔ œ łŔ ò ƎŨǂƉ ŏœ Ō œł ķĭƼŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ Ņ œ ł ƎſƦŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ œ łŔ łƎƍƀŨǂƉ ŅŔ œ łŔ ò ƎƍłŨǂƉ D

ł 6ħǁƦƉ Ŕ œ łœ Ŕ ň ŅŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ťŨǁƦƉ œ ł Ŕ ǁƦƉ œ łœ Ŕ ň ƦŨ œ ł ň IJƦŨǁƦƉ ô łŔ œ œ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ł œ ł œ Ŕ Ɖň ťƍŨǁƦ Ņ ŅŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ťƍŨǁƦƉ ŌŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ƎƀŨǁƦƉ Ņò œ ł œ ň ƎŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŏœ Ō œ łœ ň ķĭƼŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ Ņ œ ł œ ň ƎſƦŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň łƎƍƀŨǁƦƉ Ņò œ ł œ ň ƎƍłŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ E

ň ħǂƉ Ŕœ Ŕł ŅŔ œ Ŕ ł ťŨǂƉ œ ł Ŕ ǂƉ œ Ŕł ƦŨ œ IJƦŨǂƉ ô łŔ œ Ŕ ł Ņ Ŕňœ Ŕ ł ťƍŨǂƉ Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ł ťƍŨǂƉ ŌŔ œ Ŕ ł ƎƀŨǂƉ ŅŔ œ òŔ ł ƎŨǂƉ ŏœ Ō œ ł ķĭƼŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǂƉ ňœ Ņ œ ò ł ƎſƦŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ œ Ŕ ł łƎƍƀŨǂƉ ł ŅŔ œ òŔ ł ƎƍŨǂƉ ł ħǂƉ Ŕœ Ŕł ŅŔ œ Ŕ ł ťŨǂƉ œ ł Ŕ ǂƉ œ Ŕł ƦŨ œ IJƦŨǂƉ ô łŔ œ Ŕ ł Ņ Ŕłœ Ŕ ł ťƍŨǂƉ Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ł ťƍŨǂƉ ŌŔ œ Ŕ ł ƎƀŨǂƉ ŅŔ œ òŔ ł ƎŨǂƉ ŏœ Ō œ ł ķĭƼŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ Ņ œ ò ł ƎſƦŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŌŔ œ Ŕ ł łƎƍƀŨǂƉ ŅŔ œ òŔ ł ƎƍłŨǂƉ F

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ł ł ħǁŁƦƉ Ŕ œ Ŕœ œ ň Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ťŨǁŁƦƉ œ ł Ŕ ǁŁƦƉ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ƦŨ œ ł œ ň IJƦŨǁŁƦƉ ô łŔ œ Ŕ œ Ņ Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œ ň ťƍŨǁŁƦƉ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ťƍŨǁŁƦƉ œ ň Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ł œ ƦƉ ƎƀŨǁŁ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕł œ œ ň ƎŨǁŁƦƉ ŏ œ Ō œ łœ œ ň ķĭƼŨǁŁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ Ņ œ òłœ œ ň ƎſƦŨǁŁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ łœ œ ň Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƉ łƎƍƀŨǁ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕł œ œ ň ƎƍłŨǁŁƦƉ G

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

182 Table 1. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs (iii. Notes) The PȨal verbs come in 5 past-future vowel combinations, two of which appear in the table above (columns A and B). The rest are listed below. The other verb type conjugations of these verbs follow Columns C-G above. 1 [A-B]

ł

ł

Past š, future š

Singular

2nd 1st 3rd

Plural

Past Tense (Perfect)

3rd

2nd 1st

Singular

2nd 1st 3rd

Plural

Future Tense (Imperfect)

3rd

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

Sing.

M 2nd

Pl.

Imperative

1st

M

F M F

ł ƈƊƕ ł ň ƦƇƊƕ ł ƦƇƊƕ ł IJƦƇƊƕ ô ň ň ƦƇƊƕ ŏ ł / ŴƇƊƕ ķŴƇƊƕ ô ł ò ň ł / ƁíƇƊƕ ƎƀíƇƊƕ ôò ł ŏ ł ķĭƦíƇƊƕ ň ò ł ƎſƦíƇƊƕ ł ł ł / ƎƇƊƕ ƎƍÿƇƊƕ ł ň ƈƊƖƌ ł ň ƈƊƕŁ ł ň ƈƊƕŁ Ō ň ƎƀƇƊƕŁ ł ň ƈƊƕĥ ŏ ň ķŴƇƊƖƌ Ņ ò ň ƎƇƊƖƌ ŏ ň ķŴƇƊƕŁ Ņ ò ň ƎƇƊƕŁ ł ň ƈƊƖƌ ł ƈƊƕ Ō ł / ƁƇƊƕ ƎƀƇƊƕ ô ł ŏ ł / ŴƇƊƕ ķŴƇƊƕ ô ł ò ň ł ò / ƁƇƊƕ ƎƀƇƊƕ ô ł

ł

ň

Past š, future š

ł űũƕ ł ň Łűũƕ ł Łűũƕ IJŁűũƕ ô ł ň ň Łűũƕ ŏ ł / ĭűũƕ ķĭűũƕ ô ł ň ł / IJűũƕ Ǝòſűũƕ ôò ł ŏ ł ķĭŁűũƕ ňò ł ƎſŁűũƕ ł ł ł / ķűũƕ Ǝƌűũƕ ň ň űũƖƌ ň ň űũƕŁ ň ň űũƕŁ Ō ň ƎſűũƕŁ ň ň űũƕĥ ŏ ň ķĭűũƖƌ Ņò ň ķűũƖƌ ŏ ň ķĭűũƕŁ Ņò ň ķűũƕŁ ň ň űũƖƌ ň űũƕ Ō ň / IJűũƕ Ǝſűũƕ ô ň ŏ ň / ĭűũƕ ķĭűũƕ ô ň ò ň ň / IJűũƕ Ǝſűũƕ ôòň

ň

ĭšŏ ň űŬƏ ł ň ŁűŬƏ ň ŁűŬƏ IJŁűŬƏ ô ň ň ň ŁűŬƏ ŏ ň / ĭűŬƏ ķĭűŬƏ ô ň ò ň ň / IJűŬƏ ƎſűŬƏ ôò ň ŏ ň ķĭŁűŬƏ ňò ň ƎſŁűŬƏ ł ň / ķűŬƏ ň ƎƌűŬƏ ŏ ň ĪŴŬƐƌ ŏ ň ĪŴŬƏŁ ŏ ň ĪŴŬƏŁ ň Ō ƎſűŬƏŁ ŏ ň ĪŴŬƏĥ ň ŏ ķĭűŬƐƌ Ņ ò ň ķűŬƐƌ ň ŏ ķĭűŬƏŁ Ņ ò ň ķűŬƏŁ ŏ ň ĪŴŬƐƌ

Pastš, future

ŏ ĪŴŬƏ Ō ŏ / IJĪŴŬƏ ƎſĪŴŬƏ ô ŏ ŏ ŏ / ĭĪŴŬƏ ķĭĪŴŬƏ ô ŏ ò ŏ ò ň ŏ / IJĪ ƎſĪŴŬƏ ô ŴŬƏ

183 The IJò suffix (including the Syomé) is a late In early texts ň ł West ň Syriacň development. and contemporary East Syriac texts one finds ħǁ, ƋƇƣ, ħǁŁĥ, etc. for the past tense (perfect) plural 3rd feminine. 3 [A7-G7] The form with a file IJ is rare. ô ł ł ň œ œ ň œ as in ħŁǁŁŁŁ 4 [G12-G14, G18, & G19] Forms which begin with ŁŁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕ œ œ œ (G12) are reduced in ł ł œň œ spelling to two Łs only as in ħǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ . 5 [A34-A37] These forms are pronounced as their contracted counterparts in B34-B37, respectively. Also note that while the rest of the tables give the contracted forms, the non contracted are more common, especially in early manuscripts. 6 [C38-C49 & E38-E49] Apart from C38/E38 and C42/E42, the rest of the passive participle ň ň ł ł ň forms for the ƈƖƘŁĥ and the ƈƖƘŁĥ are identical. However, note the soft ŁŔ (2nd letter of œ the root) in column C and the hard Ł in column E. 2 [A7-G7]

184

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

185

Table 2. Strong Verbs with Initial Sibilant Letters Į, ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ Verbs that begin in Į, ĸ, Ľ , or ŀ differ from the verbs in Table 1 only in the ‘measures’ ň Ŕ ň and ƈƖƘŁĥ ł ł Ŕ ň . The rest of the measures are identical to those of Table 1. ƈƖƘŁĥ In the case of Į -initial verbs, two transformations take place. First, the Į places itself in ň ň ň ň Ŕ ň . This transformation is called the middle of ŁĥŔ; e.g., the ƈƖƘŁĥ of ƚƟĮł becomes ƚƟŁĮĥ ň ň ň METATHESIS. Second, the Ł of ŁĥŔ turns into a Ī giving ƚƟĪĮĥ. This transformation is called ASSIMILATION. ň The same transformations occur in the case of Ľ-initial verbs, except that the Ł of ŁĥŔ ň ň Ŕ by metathesis, then ŪƇňŹ Ľĥň by assimilation. assimilates into İ ; e.g., ŪƆĽ becomes ŪƆŁĽĥ ň In the case of ĸ-initial and ŀ-initial verbs, only metathesis takes place; e.g., ĪųƏ ň ň ň ň ň becomes ĪĬƦƏĥ , and ƋƇƣ becomes ƋƆƦƣĥ. ň ŁĥŔň, and ł (as a starting point), ƈƖƘ Table 2 gives for each of the above verbs the ƈƖƘ ň ł , ƈƖƘĥ ň ł , and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł ł ň follow the paradigms in Table 1, ł ł ŁĥŔň measures. For the ƈƖƘ ƈƖƘ Columns D, F, and G, respectively. The initial-Į verb ƚƟĮł occupies Columns A-C on pp. 270 ň occupies Columns D-F on pp. 271 & 273, the initial-Ľ verb & 272, the initial-ĸ verb ĪųƏ ň occupies ŪƆĽ occupies Columns G-I on pp. 274 & 276, and the initial-ŀ verb ƋƇƣ Columns J-L on pp. 275 & 277.

186

Į ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ (i. Past,

Table 2. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs with Initial Sibilant Letters ,

5 6 7 8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

Singular

3rd

2

Infinitive

B

C

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

B

C

ň ň ł ł ň Initial Į: Ł turns into Ī in ƈƖƘŁĥ & ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ň ł ł ň ł ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘ

M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F)

1

A

ƚƟĮł ł ň ƦƙƟĮ ƦƙƟĮł ł IJƦƙƟĮ ô ň ň ƦƙƟĮ ŏ ł / ŴƙƟĮł ķŴƙƟĮ ô ň ł / ƁƙƟĮ ł òƎƀƙƟĮ ôò ŏ ķĭƦƙƟĮł ň ò ł ƎſƦƙƟĮ ł ł / ƎƙƟĮł ƎƍƙƟĮ ŏ ň ĻŴƟŵƌ ŏň ĻŴƟĮŁ ŏň ĻŴƟĮŁ Ō ň ƎƀƙƟĮŁ ŏň ĻŴƟĮĥ ŏ ň ķŴƙƟŵƌ Ņ ò ň ƎƙƟŵƌ ŏ ň ķŴƙƟĮŁ Ņ ò ň ƎƙƟĮŁ ŏ ň ĻŴƟŵƌ ĻŴƟĮŏ Ō ŏ / ƁƘŴƟĮŏ ƎƀƘŴƟĮ ô ŏ ŏ ŏ ķŴƘŴƟĮ / ŴƘŴƟĮ ô ò ŏ ò ň ŏ / ƁƘŴ ƎƀƘŴƟĮ ô ƟĮ ł ň ƚƟŵƉ A

ň ň ƚƟĪĮĥ ł łň ƦƙƟĪĮĥ ň ň ƦƙƟĪĮĥ ň ň IJƦƙƟĪĮĥ ô ň łň ƦƙƟĪĮĥ ŏ ň ň / ŴƙƟĪĮĥ ň ň ķŴƙƟĪĮĥ ô ò ň ň ň ň / ƁƙƟĪĮĥ ò ň ƟĪĮĥ Ǝƀƙ ô ŏ ň ň ķĭƦƙƟĪĮĥ ň ò ň ň ƎſƦƙƟĪĮĥ ň ň ł ň ň / ƎƙƟĪĮĥ ƎƍƙƟĪĮĥ ň ň ƚƟĪŵƌ ň ň ƚƟĪĮŁ ň ň ƚƟĪĮŁ Ō ĪĮłňŁ ƎƀƙƟ ň ň ƚƟĪĮĥ ŏ Īŵłƌň ķŴƙƟ Ņ ò Īŵłƌň ƎƙƟ ŏ ĪĮłňŁ ķŴƙƟ Ņ ò ĪĮłňŁ ƎƙƟ ň ň ƚƟĪŵƌ łň ƚƟĪĮĥ ň Ō ł ň / ƁƙƟĪĮĥ ƎƀƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ň ŏ ł ň / ŴƙƟĪĮĥ ķŴƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ò ň ò ň ł ň / ƁƙƟĪĮĥ ƎƀƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ŏ Ņ ň ŴƙƟĪŵƉ

łłň ƚƟĪĮĥ ł ĪĮłňĥ ƦƙƟ łłň ƦƙƟĪĮĥ łłň IJƦƙƟĪĮĥ ô ň ĪĮłňĥ ƦƙƟ ŏ ł ł ň / ŴƙƟĪĮĥ ł ň ķŴƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ò ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƙƟĪĮĥ ƎƀƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ŏ łłň ķĭƦƙƟĪĮĥ òň łłň ƎſƦƙƟĪĮĥ łłň ł ł ł ň / ƎƙƟĪĮĥ ƎƍƙƟĪĮĥ łłň ƚƟĪŵƌ łłň ƚƟĪĮŁ łłň ƚƟĪĮŁ Ō łň ƎƀƙƟĪĮŁ łłň ƚƟĪĮĥ ŏ łň ķŴƙƟĪŵƌ òłň ƎƙŅƟĪŵƌ ŏ łň ķŴƙƟĪĮŁ òłň ƎƙŅƟĪĮŁ łłň ƚƟĪŵƌ łłň ƚƟĪĮĥ Ō ł ł ň / ƁƙƟĪĮĥ ł ň ƎƀƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ŏ ł ł ň / ŴƙƟĪĮĥ ł ň ķŴƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ò ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƙƟĪĮĥ ƎƀƙƟĪĮĥ ô ł ŏ Ņł ň ŴƙƟĪŵƉ

187

Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) D

E Initial ĸ

F

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ĪųňƏ ł Əň ŁĪų ŁĪųňƏ ň IJŁ ô ĪųƏ ň Əň ŁĪų ŏ ň Ə / ĭôĪųňƏ ķĭĪų ň ň Ə / IJôòĪųňƏ ƎſòĪų ŏ ķĭŁĪųňƏ ň òň Ə ƎſŁĪų ƎƌłĪųňƏ / ķĪųňƏ ĪųłƐƌň ň ĪųłƏŁ ň ĪųłƏŁ Ō ƏŁň ƎſĪų ň ĪųłƏĥ ŏ Ɛƌň ķĭĪų ò ň ķĪŅųƐƌ ŏ ƏŁň ķĭĪų ò ň ķĪŅųƏŁ ĪųłƐƌň ĪųłƏ Ō ł Ə / IJôĪųłƏ ƎſĪų ŏ ł Ə / ĭôĪųłƏ ķĭĪų łò ň ł Ə / IJôĪųƏ ƎſòĪų ĪųłƐƉň D

ň ĪĬňƦƏĥ ł ň ł ƦƏ ŁĪĬ ĥ ň ŁĪĬňƦƏĥ ň ň IJŁ ô ĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň ň ƦƏ ŁĪĬ ĥ ň ň ň ň ŏ ƦƏĥ / ĭôĪĬƦƏĥ ķĭĪĬ ò ň ƦƏĥň ň ň ƦƏĥň / IJôĪĬ ƎſòĪĬ ŏ ň ķĭŁĪĬňƦƏĥ ň òň ň ƦƏĥ ƎſŁĪĬ ň ň ƎƌłĪĬňƦƏĥ / ķĪĬňƦƏĥ ĪĬňƦƐƌň ň ĪĬňƦƏŁ ň ĪĬňƦƏŁ ł ň Ō ƦƏ ƎſĪĬ Ł ň ĪĬňƦƏĥ ł ň ŏ ƦƐ ķĭĪĬ ƌ ł ķĪŅĬòƦƐƌň ł ň ŏ ƦƏ ķĭĪĬ Ł ň ł ò ķĪŅĬƦƏŁ ĪĬňƦƐƌň ł ň ĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň ł ň Ō ƦƏĥ ƎſĪĬ / IJôĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň ł ň ŏ ƦƏĥ ķĭĪĬ / ĭôĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň ò ł ň ň ƦƏĥ ƎſòĪĬ / IJôĪĬƦƏĥ ň ŏŅ ĭĪĬƦƐƉ

ł ł ň ĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň ł ƦƏ ŁĪĬ ĥ łł ň ŁĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň IJŁĪĬƦƏĥ ô ł ł ň ň ƦƏ ŁĪĬ ĥ ň ň ł ł ł ł ŏ ķĭĪĬƦƏĥ / ĭĪĬƦƏĥ ô ł ň òƎſĪĬƦƏĥ ň ł ł ň / IJĪĬƦƏĥ ôòł ŏ ł ł ň ķĭŁĪĬƦƏĥ òň ł ł ň ƎſŁĪĬƦƏĥ ł ł ň ł ł ł ň / ķĪĬƦƏĥ ƎƌĪĬƦƏĥ ł ł ň ĪĬƦƐƌ ł ł ň ĪĬƦƏŁ ł ł ň ĪĬƦƏŁ Ō ł ň ƎſĪĬƦƏŁ ł ł ňĥ ĪĬƦƏ ŏ ł ň ķĭĪĬƦƐƌ Ņò ł ň ķĪĬƦƐƌ ŏ ł ň ķĭĪĬƦƏŁ Ņò ł ň ķĪĬƦƏŁ ł ł ň ĪĬƦƐƌ ł ł ň ĪĬƦƏĥ ł ň Ō ł ł ň / IJĪĬƦƏĥ ƎſĪĬƦƏĥ ô ł ł ň ŏ ł ł ň / ĭĪĬƦƏĥ ķĭĪĬƦƏĥ ô ł ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / IJĪĬƦƏĥ ƎſĪĬƦƏĥ ôòł ŏŅ ł ň ĭĪĬƦƐƉ

E

F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

188

Į ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ (ii. Active

Table 2. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs with Initial Sibilant Letters ,

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

B

C

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ň ň ł ł ň Initial Į: Ł turns into Ī in ƈƖƘŁĥ & ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ň ł ł ň ł ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘ

M = Masculine F = Feminine

26

A

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

ƚƟĮňŅ Ņ Ņ ťƙƟĮ ƦƙłƟĮŅ ł IJƦ ô ƙƟĮŅ Ņ ňŅ ťƍƙƟĮ ŅŅ Ņ ťƍƙƟĮ Ō Ņ ƎƀƙƟĮ Ņ òŅ ƎƙƟĮ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƙƟĮ ň Ņ òŅ ƎſƦƙƟĮ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀƙƟĮ łŅ òŅ ƎƍƙƟĮ ƚƀƟĮŌ Ņ Ō ťƙƀƟĮ ł Ō ƦƙƀƟĮ ł Ō IJƦƙƀƟĮ ô Ņ Ō ťƍƙƀƟĮ ŅŅ Ō ťƍƙƀƟĮ Ō Ō ƎƀƙƀƟĮ Ņò Ō ƎƙƀƟĮ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƙƀƟĮ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦƙƀƟĮ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƙƀƟĮ łŅò Ō ƎƍƙƀƟĮ A

ň Ɖň ƚƟĪŵ Ņ ł ň ťƙƟĪŵƉ ł ł Ɖň ƦƙƟĪŵ ł ł Ɖň IJôƦƙƟĪŵ ň Ɖň ťƍŅƙƟĪŵ Ņ ł ň ťƍŅƙƟĪŵƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƙƟĪŵƉ Ņ òł ň ƎƙƟĪŵƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƙƟĪŵƉ ň Ņ ł ň ƎòſƦƙƟĪŵƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍƀłƙƟĪŵƉ ł Ņ ò ĪŵłƉň ƎƍƙƟ

łł ň ƚƟĪŵƉ Ņ ł ň ťƙƟĪŵƉ ł ł ň ƦƙƟĪŵƉ ł ł ň IJƦƙƟĪŵƉ ô Ņ łł ň ťƍƙƟĪŵƉ ŅŅ ł ň ťƍƙƟĪŵƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƙƟĪŵƉ Ņ òł ň ƎƙƟĪŵƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƙƟĪŵƉ ň Ņ ł ň ƎòſƦƙƟĪŵƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍłƀƙƟĪŵƉ Ņ òł ň ƎƍłƙƟĪŵƉ

B

C

189

and Passive Participles) D

E Initial ĸ

F

ł ƈƖƘ

ň Łĥň ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ň Ņ ĪųƏ Ņ Ņ ŧĪųƏ ŁĪłųƏŅ ł Ņ IJŁ ô ĪųƏ Ņ ň Ņ ljĪųƏ ŅŅ Ņ ljĪųƏ Ō Ņ ƎſĪųƏ Ņò Ņ ķĪųƏ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƻĪųƏ ň Ņò Ņ ƎſŁĪųƏ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍſĪųƏ łŅò Ņ ƎƌĪųƏ Ō űſųƏ Ņ Ō ŧűſųƏ Ō ŁűſłųƏ IJŁűſųƏ ô ł Ō Ņ Ō ljűſųƏ ŅŅ Ō ljűſųƏ Ō Ō ƎſűſųƏ Ņò Ō ķűſųƏ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƻűſųƏ ň Ņò Ō ƎſŁűſųƏ ł Ō Ō ƎƍſűſųƏ łŅò Ō ƎƌűſųƏ D

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ň Ɖň ĪĬƦƐ Ņ ł ň ŧĪĬƦƐƉ ł ł Ɖň ŁĪĬƦƐ ł ł Ɖň IJôŁĪĬƦƐ ň Ɖň ljŅĪĬƦƐ Ņ ł ň ljŅĪĬƦƐƉ Ō ł ň ƎſĪĬƦƐƉ Ņò ł ň ķĪĬƦƐƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƻĪĬƦƐƉ ň Ņ ł ň ƎòſŁĪĬƦƐƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍſłĪĬƦƐƉ ł ň ł Ņ ò ƦƐ ƎƌĪĬ Ɖ E

ł ł ň ĪĬƦƐƉ Ņ ł ň ŧĪĬƦƐƉ ł ł ň ŁĪĬƦƐƉ ł ň IJŁĪĬƦƐƉ ô ł Ņ ł ł ň ljĪĬƦƐƉ Ņ Ņ ł Ɖň ljĪĬƦƐ Ō ł ň ƎſĪĬƦƐƉ Ņò ł ň ķĪĬƦƐƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ƦƐƉ ķĭƻĪĬ ňò Ņ ł ň ƎſŁĪĬƦƐƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍłſĪĬƦƐƉ Ņò ł ň ƎƌłĪĬƦƐƉ F

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

190

Į ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ (i. Past,

Table 2. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs with Initial Sibilant Letters ,

5 6 7 8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

Singular

3rd

2

Infinitive

H

I

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ň ň ł ł ň Initial Ľ: Ł turns into İ in ƈƖƘŁĥ & ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ň ł ł ň ł ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘ

M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F)

1

G

ň ŪƆĽ ł ň ƦũíƆĽ ň ƦũƆĽ ň IJƦũƆĽ ô ň ň ƦũíƆĽ ň ŏ ň / ŴũƆĽ ķŴũíƆĽ ô ň ò ň ň / ƁũƆĽ ƎƀũíƆĽ ôò ŏ ň ķĭƦũƆĽ ň ò ň ƎſƦũíƆĽ ň ł ň / ƎũƆĽ ƎƍũƆĽ ŏ ň ħŴƆƞƌ ŏ ň ħŴƆĽŁ ŏ ň ħŴƆĽŁ Ō ň ƎƀũíƆĽŁ ŏ ň ħŴƆĽĥ ķŴũŏíƆƞƌň Ņ ò ň ƎũíƆƞƌ ŏ ň ķŴũíƆĽŁ Ņ ò ň ƎũíƆĽŁ ŏ ň ħŴƆƞƌ ŏ ħŴƆĽ ŏ Ō ŏ / ƁŨŴƆĽ ƎƀŨŴƆĽ ô ŏ ŏ ŏ / ŴŨŴƆĽ ķŴŨŴƆĽ ô ò ŏ ò ň ŏ / ƁŨŴíƆĽ ƎƀŨŴƆĽ ô ł ň ŪƆƞƉ G

ň ň ŪǑ Ľĥ ň ƦũłíǑł Ľĥ ň ň ƦũǑ Ľĥ ň ň IJƦ ô ũǑ Ľĥ ň ƦũňíǑł Ľĥ ň ň ŏ ň Ľĥň / ŴũǑ ķŴũíǑ Ľĥ ô ò ň Ľĥň ň ň Ľĥň / ƁũíǑ òƎƀũíǑ ô ŏ ň ň ķĭƦũǑ Ľĥ ň ò ň ň ƎſƦũíǑ Ľĥ ň ň ň ł Ľĥ / ƎũǑ Ľĥň ƎƍũǑ ň ŪǑ ƞƌň ň ň ŪǑ ĽŁ ň ň ŪǑ ĽŁ ň ƎƀũŌíǑł ĽŁ ň ň ŪǑ Ľĥ ķŴũŏíǑł ƞƌň òł ň ƌ ƎũŅíǑƞ ň ł ķŴũŏíǑ ĽŁ ň Ņ Ǝũò íǑł ĽŁ ň ŪǑ ƞƌň ň ŪǑł Ľĥ ł Ľĥň Ō ł Ľĥň / ƁũǑ ƎƀũíǑ ô ł Ľĥň ŏ ł Ľĥň / ŴũǑ ķŴũíǑ ô ò ł Ľĥň ò ň ł Ľĥň / ƁũíǑ ƎƀũíǑ ô ŏ Ņ ƞƉň ŴũíǑ

ł ň ŪǑł Ľĥ ň ƦũłíǑł Ľĥ ł ň ƦũǑł Ľĥ łł ň IJƦũǑ Ľĥ ô ň ł ƦũňíǑ Ľĥ łł ň ŏ ł ł Ľĥň / ŴũǑ Ľĥ ķŴũíǑ ô ò ł ł Ľĥň ň ł ł Ľĥň / ƁũíǑ òƎƀũíǑ ô ŏ łł ň ķĭƦũǑ Ľĥ ò ň ł ł Ľĥň ƎſƦũǑ łł ň ł ł ł Ľĥň / ƎũǑ Ľĥ ƎƍũǑ łł ň ŪǑ ƞƌ ł ň ŪǑł ĽŁ ł ň ŪǑł ĽŁ Ō ł ĽŁň ƎƀũíǑ ł ň ŪǑł Ľĥ ŏ ł ƞƌň ķŴũíǑ Ņò ł ň ƎũíǑ ƞƌ ł ŏ ĽŁň ķŴũíǑ ň Ņ Ǝũò íǑł ĽŁ ł ŪǑł ƞƌň ł ň ŪǑł Ľĥ łł ň Ō ł ł Ľĥň / ƁũǑ Ľĥ ƎƀũíǑ ô ň ň ł ł ł ł ŏ Ľĥ / ŴũǑ Ľĥ ķŴũíǑ ô ò ł ł Ľĥň ò ň ł ł Ľĥň / ƁũíǑ ƎƀũíǑ ô ŏ Ņ ł ƞƉň ŴũíǑ

H

I

191

Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) J

K Initial ŀ

L

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ň ƋƇƣ ł ň ƦƊíƇƣ ň ƦƊƇƣ ň IJƦƊƇƣ ô ň ň ƦƊíƇƣ ň ŏ ň / ŴƊƇƣ ķŴƊíƇƣ ô ň ò ň ň / ƁƊƇƣ ƎƀƊíƇƣ ôò ŏ ň ķĭƦƊƇƣ ň ò ň ƎſƦƊíƇƣ ň ł ň / ƎƊƇƣ ƎƍƊƇƣ ł ň ƋƇƤƌ ł ň ƋƇƣŁ ł ň ƋƇƣŁ Ō ň ƎƀƊíƇƣŁ ł ň ƋƇƣĥ ŏ ň ķŴƊíƇƤƌ Ņ ò ň ƎƊíƇƤƌ ŏ ň ķŴƊíƇƣŁ Ņ ò ň ƎƊíƇƣŁ ł ň ƋƇƤƌ ł ƋƇƣ ł Ō ł / ƁƊƇƣ ƎƀƊíƇƣ ô ł ŏ ł / ŴƊƇƣ ķŴƊíƇƣ ô ò ł ò ň ł / ƁƊíƇƣ ƎƀƊíƇƣ ô ł ň ƋƇƤƉ J

ň ň ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ň ł Ʀƣ ƦƊíƆ ĥ ň ň ƦƊƆƦƣ ĥ ň ň IJƦ ô ƊƆƦƣĥ ł ň ň Ʀƣ ƦƊíƆ ĥ ň ň ŏ ķŴƉÿ / ŴƊƆƦƣĥ ô ò ň ň òƎƀƉň ÿ / ƁƊíƆƦƣĥ ô ŏ ň ň ķĭƦƊƆƦƣĥ ň ò ň ň ƎſƦƊíƆƦƣĥ ň ň ƎƍłƉÿ / ƎƊƆƦƣĥ ň ň ƋƆƦƤƌ ň ň ƋƆƦƣŁ ň ň ƋƆƦƣŁ ł ň Ō Ʀƣ ƎƀƊíƆ Ł ň ň ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ň ŏ ƦƤ ķŴƊíƆ ƌ ł ò Ņ ƦƤƌň ƎƊíƆ ł ň ŏ Ʀƣ ķŴƊíƆ Ł ł ň ò Ņ ƎƊíƆƦƣŁ ň ň ƋƆƦƤƌ ł ň ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ň ƎƀƉŌÿ / ƁƊƆƦƣĥ ô ł ň ķŴƉŏÿ / ŴƊƆƦƣĥ ô ò ł ň ò ň ÿ / ƁƊíƆƦƣĥ ƎƀƉ ô ŴƊŏíƆŅƦƤƉň K

ł ł ň ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ň ł Ʀƣ ƦƊíƆ ĥ ň ł ł ƦƊƆƦƣĥ ł ł ň IJƦƊƆƦƣĥ ô ł ň ň Ʀƣ ƦƊíƆ ĥ ł ň ł ŏ ķŴƉÿ / ŴƊƆƦƣĥ ô ò ł ł ň òƎƀƉň ÿ / ƁƊíƆƦƣĥ ô ŏ ł ł ň ķĭƦƊƆƦƣĥ òň ł ł ň ƎſƦƊƆƦƣĥ ł ł ň ł ÿ / ƎƊƆƦƣĥ ƎƍƉ ł ł ň ƋƆƦƤƌ ł ł ň ƋƆƦƣŁ ł ł ň ƋƆƦƣŁ Ō ł ň ƎƀƊíƆƦƣŁ ł ł ň ƋƆƦƣĥ ŏ ł ň ķŴƊíƆƦƤƌ Ņò ł ň ƎƊíƆƦƤƌ ŏ ł ň ķŴƊíƆƦƣŁ Ņò ł ň ƎƊíƆƦƣŁ ł ł ň ƋƆƦƤƌ ł ł ň ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ł ň ƎƀƉŌÿ / ƁƊƆƦƣĥ ô ł ł ň ķŴƉŏÿ / ŴƊƆƦƣĥ ô ò ł ł ň ò ň ÿ / ƁƊíƆƦƣĥ ƎƀƉ ô ŏ Ņ ł ƤƉň ŴƊíƆƦ L

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

192

Į ĸ, Ľ, or ŀ (ii. Active

Table 2. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs with Initial Sibilant Letters ,

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

H

I

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ň ň ł ł ň Initial Ľ: Ł turns into İ in ƈƖƘŁĥ & ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ň ł ł ň ł ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘŁĥ ƈƖƘ

M = Masculine F = Feminine

26

G

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

ŪƆňĽŅ Ņ ĽŅ ťũíƆ ł ĽŅ ƦũíƆ ł ĽŅ IJƦ ô ũíƆ ťƍŅũƆňĽŅ Ņ ĽŅ ťƍŅũíƆ Ō ĽŅ ƎƀũíƆ ƎũŅíƆòĽŅ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼũíƆ Ľ ň Ņ ò Ņ ƎſƦũíƆĽ Ō ĽŅ ƎƍƀłũíƆ ƎƍłũŅíƆòĽŅ Ō ŪƀƆĽ Ō ťũŅƀƆĽ Ō ƦũłƀƆĽ Ō IJƦ ô ũłƀƆĽ Ō ťƍŅũƀƆĽ Ō ťƍŅũŅƀƆĽ Ō ƎƀũŌƀƆĽ Ō ƎũŅƀòíƆĽ ŏ Ō ķĭƼũŌƀƆĽ ň Ō ƎſƦũŅƀòíƆĽ Ō ƎƍƀłũŌƀƆĽ Ō ƎƍłũŅƀòíƆĽ G

ň ŪǑ ƞƉň ťũŅíǑł ƞƉň ƦũłíǑł ƞƉň IJôƦũłíǑł ƞƉň ň ťƍŅũǑ ƞƉň ťƍŅũŅíǑł ƞƉň ƎƀũŌíǑł ƞƉň ƎũŅíǑł ƞòƉň ŏ ķĭƼũŌíǑł ƞƉň ň ƎòſƦũŅíǑł ƞƉň ƎƍƀłũŌíǑł ƞƉň ò ƎƍłũŅíǑł ƞƉň H

ł ŪǑł ƞƉň ťũŅíǑł ƞƉň ƦũłíǑł ƞƉň ł ň IJƦ ô ũłíǑ ƞƉ ł ťƍŅũǑł ƞƉň ťƍŅũŅíǑł ƞƉň ƎƀũŌíǑł ƞƉň ƎũŅíǑł ƞòƉň ŏ ķĭƼũŌíǑł ƞƉň ň ƎòſƦũŅíǑł ƞƉň ƎƍłƀũŌíǑł ƞƉň ò ƎƍłũŅíǑł ƞƉň I

193

and Passive Participles—Continued) J

K Initial ŀ

L

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

PȨal

EthpȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

ƋƇňƣŅ Ņ ƣŅ ťƊíƇ ł ƣŅ ƦƊíƇ ł ƣŅ IJƦ ô ƊíƇ ťƍŅƊƇňƣŅ Ņ ƣŅ ťƍŅƊíƇ Ō ƣŅ ƎƀƊíƇ ƎƊŅíƇòƣŅ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƊíƇ ƣ ň Ņ ò Ņ ƎſƦƊíƇƣ Ō ƣŅ ƎƍƀłƊíƇ ƎƍłƊŅíƇòƣŅ Ō ƋƀƇƣ Ō ťƊŅƀƇƣ Ō ƦƊłƀƇƣ Ō IJƦ ô ƊłƀƇƣ Ō ťƍŅƊƀƇƣ Ō ťƍŅƊŅƀƇƣ Ō ƎƀƊŌƀƇƣ Ō ƎƊŅƀòíƇƣ ŏ Ō ķĭƼƊŌƀƇƣ ň Ō ƎſƦƊŅƀòíƇƣ Ō ƎƍƀłƊŌƀƇƣ Ō ƎƍłƊŅƀòíƇƣ J

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ƋƆňƦƤƉň Ņ Ʀł ƤƉň ťƊíƆ ł Ʀł ƤƉň ƦƊíƆ ł Ʀł ƤƉň IJôƦƊíƆ ťƍŅƊƆňƦƤƉň Ņ Ʀł ƤƉň ťƍŅƊíƆ Ō Ʀł ƤƉň ƎƀƊíƆ ł ƎƊŅíƆòƦƤƉň ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƊíƆ ƦƤƉ ňò Ņ ł ň ƎſƦƊíƆƦƤƉ Ō Ʀł ƤƉň ƎƍƀłƊíƆ ł ƎƍłƊŅíƆòƦƤƉň K

ł ƋƆłƦƤƉň Ņ Ʀł ƤƉň ťƊíƆ ł Ʀł ƤƉň ƦƊíƆ ł Ʀł ƤƉň IJƦ ô ƊíƆ ł ťƍŅƊƆłƦƤƉň Ņ Ʀł ƤƉň ťƍŅƊíƆ Ō Ʀł ƤƉň ƎƀƊíƆ ł ƎƊŅíƆòƦƤƉň ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƊíƆ ƦƤƉ ňò Ņ ł ň ƎſƦƊíƆƦƤƉ Ō Ʀł ƤƉň ƎƍłƀƊíƆ ł ƎƍłƊŅíƆòƦƤƉň L

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

194

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

195

Table 3. Strong Verbs with Initial ƌ Verbs whose first letter is ƌ differ from the standard verb in Table 1 as follows: ł (Columns A-C): the future, imperative, and infinitive delete the initial 1. The ƈƖƘ ŏ œ ň , retaining ƌ. For example, past tense ơƙƌł becomes future ľŴƙƌŏœň (A11), not ľŴƙƍƌ ŏ ŏ łœ ň the hard Ļœ. The imperative is ľŴƘ (A21), not ľŴƙƌ. The infinitive is ơƙƉ ł œ ň , again retaining the hard Ļœ. The past tense, present tense, and (A25), not ơƙƍƉ participles follow the same paradigms as Table 1. ň ň ň ł ł ł Ŕ ň : these follow the same paradigm as Table 1. 2. The ƈƖƘŁĥŔ , ƈƖƘ and ƈƖƘŁĥ They are not shown in this table. ň ł ł ł ň (Columns D & E): these delete the initial ƌ in all tenses. 3. The ƈƖƘĥ and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ňł ň œ ł ; and ơƘŁŁĥ ł œ ł ň (E1), not ơƙƌŁŁĥ łœ ł ň. For example, ơƘĥœ (D1), not ơƙƌĥ In East Syriac, the deletion of the ƌ gives rise to the doubling of the second letter; e.g., ŏ ň œ ł appeq, ơƘŁŁĥ ł œ ň meppaq, ơƘĥ ł œ ł ň ettappaq. (Recall that the Ļœ in East Syriac is read ň œ ľŴƙƌ neppuq, ơƙƉ as a p not as an f .)

196

ƌ

Table 3. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs with Initial (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) A M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

25

M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 Infinitive

ŏ

ł

Past š, future ĭš

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

B

ơƙƌł ł ň ƦƠƙƌ ƦƠƙƌł ł IJƦƠƙƌ ô ň ň ƦƠƙƌ ŏ ł / ŴƠƙƌł ķŴƠƙƌ ô ò ł ň ł / ƁƠƙƌ òƎƀƠƙƌ ô ŏ ķĭƦƠƙƌł ň ò ł ƎſƦƠƙƌ ł ł / ƎƠƙƌł ƎƍƠƙƌ ľŴƙƌŏň ŏň ľŴƘŁ ŏň ľŴƘŁ Ō ň ƎƀƠƘŁ ň ľŴƘĥŏ ŏ ň ķŴƠƙƌ Ņòň ƎƠƙƌ ŏ ň ķŴƠƘŁ Ņòň ƎƠƘŁ ľŴƙƌŏň ľŴƘŏ Ō ŏ / ƁƟŴƘŏ ƎƀƟŴƘ ô ŏ ŏ ŏ ķŴƟŴƘ / ŴƟŴƘ ô ò ŏ ò ň ŏ / ƁƟŴƘ ƎƀƟŴƘ ô ł ň ơƙƉ A

ł

PȨalƈƖƘ

ł

C

ł

Past š, future š

ł ŪƐƌ ƦũłƐƌň ł ƦũƐƌ ł IJƦ ô ũƐƌ ƦũňƐƌň ł / ŴôũƐƌ ł ķŴũŏƐƌ ł / ƁôũòƐƌ ł ƎƀòũňƐƌ ŏ ł ķĭƦũƐƌ ň ł ƎſƦũòƐƌ ł ł / ƎũƐƌ ƎƍłũƐƌ ŪƐłƌň ň ŪƏłŁ ň ŪƏłŁ ň ƎƀũŌƏŁ ň ŪƏłĥ ķŴũŏƐƌň ò ň ƎũŅƐƌ ň ķŴũŏƏŁ òň ƎũŅƏŁ ŪƐłƌň ŪƏł Ō ł / ƁôũƏł ƎƀũƏ ŏ ł / ŴôũƏł ķŴũƏ ò ł ň ł / ƁôũƏ ƎƀòũƏ ł ň ŪƐƉ B

ň

ł

Past š, future š

ƈƙƌł ł ň ƦƇƙƌ ƦƇƙƌł IJôƦƇƙƌł ň ň ƦƇƙƌ ŏ ł / ŴƇƙƌł ķŴƇƙƌ ô ò ł ň ł ƎƀƇƙƌò / ƁƇƙƌ ô ŏ ķĭƦíƇƙƌł ň ò ł ƎſƦíƇƙƌ ł ł / ƎƇƙƌł ƎƍÿƇƙƌ ňň ƈƙƌ ňň ƈƘŁ ňň ƈƘŁ Ō ň ƎƀƇƘŁ ňň ƈƘĥ ŏ ň ķŴƇƙƌ Ņ òň ƎƇƙƌ ŏ ň ķŴƇƘŁ Ņ òň ƎƇƘŁ ňň ƈƙƌ ƈƘň Ō ň / ƁƇƘň ƎƀƇƘ ô ň ň ŏ ķŴƇƘ / ŴƇƘ ô ò ň ò ň ň / ƁƇƘ ƎƀíƇƘ ô ł ň ƈƙƉ C

197

D

E

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ơƘňĥ ł ĥł ƦƠƘ ł ƦƠƘňĥ ňł IJƦ ô ƠƘ ĥ ň ĥł ƦƠƘ ł ł ķŴƠŏƘňĥ / ŴôƠƘňĥ ł ł ƎƀòƠňƘňĥ / ƁôƠòƘňĥ ŏ ł ķĭƦƠƘňĥ ò ň ƠƘňĥł ƎſƦ ł ł ƎƍłƠƘňĥ / ƎƠƘňĥ ơƙňƌł ł ơƘňŁ ł ơƘňŁ Ō Łł ƎƀƠƘ ł ơƘňĥ ŏ ƌł ķŴƠƙ ƎƠŅƙòƌł ŏ Łł ķŴƠƘ ł ƎƠŅƘòŁ ơƙňƌł ł ơƘňĥ ł ł ƎƀƠŌƘňĥ / ƁôƠƘňĥ ł ł ķŴƠŏƘňĥ / ŴôƠƘňĥ ł ł ƎƀòƠňƘňĥ / ƁôƠòƘňĥ ŴƠŏƙŅƉł D

ł ň ơƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƦƠƘ ł ň ƦƠƘłŁŁĥ łł ň IJƦ ô ƠƘŁŁĥ ł ň ň ŁŁĥ ƦƠƘ ł ň ł ň ķŴƠŏƘłŁŁĥ / ŴôƠƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ƎƀòƠňƘłŁŁĥ / ƁôƠòƘłŁŁĥ ŏ ł ň ķĭƦƠƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ò ň ƠƘłŁŁĥ ƎſƦ ł ň ł ň ƎƍłƠƘłŁŁĥ / ƎƠƘłŁŁĥ ł ơƘłŁƦƌň łň ơƘłŁŁ łň ơƘłŁŁ Ō ŁłňŁ ƎƀƠƘ ł ň ơƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ŏ ŁƦƌ ķŴƠƘ ł ƎƠŅƘòŁƦƌň łň ŏ ŁŁ ķŴƠƘ łň ƎƠŅƘòŁŁ ł ơƘłŁƦƌň ł ň ơƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ƎƀƠŌƘłŁŁĥ / ƁôƠƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ķŴƠŏƘłŁŁĥ / ŴôƠƘłŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ƎƀòƠňƘłŁŁĥ / ƁôƠòƘłŁŁĥ ŏ Ņ ł Ɖň ŴƠƘŁƦ E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

198

ƌ

Table 3. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs with Initial (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

29

Present Tense (Active Participle)

28

ŏ

ł

Past š, future ĭš 3rd

27

B

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

ňŅ ơƙƌ Ņ Ņ ťƠƙƌ ƦƠłƙƌŅ ł IJƦ ô ƠƙƌŅ Ņ ňŅ ťƍƠƙƌ ŅŅ Ņ ťƍƠƙƌ Ō Ņ ƎƀƠƙƌ ŅòŅ ƎƠƙƌ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƠƙƌ ň òŅ ƎſƦƠŅ ƙƌ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀƠƙƌ òŅ ł Ņ ƙƌ ƎƍƠ ơƀƙƌŌ Ņ Ō ťƠƀƙƌ ł Ō ƦƠƀƙƌ ł Ō IJƦƠƀƙƌ ô Ņ Ō ťƍƠƀƙƌ ŅŅ Ō ťƍƠƀƙƌ Ō Ō ƎƀƠƀƙƌ Ņò Ō ƎƠƀƙƌ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƠƀƙƌ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦƠƀƙƌ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƠƀƙƌ ł Ņò Ō ƎƍƠƀƙƌ

A

ł

PȨalƈƖƘ

ň

C

ł

Past š, future š

ň Ņ ŪƐƌ Ņ Ņ ťũƐƌ ƦũłƐƌŅ ł Ņ IJƦ ô ũƐƌ Ņ ň Ņ ťƍũƐƌ ŅŅ Ņ ťƍũƐƌ Ō Ņ ƎƀũƐƌ ò Ņ ƎũŅƐƌ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼũƐƌ ň ò Ņ ƎſƦũŅ Ɛƌ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀũƐƌ ò Ņ ł Ņ Ɛƌ Ǝƍũ Ō ŪƀƐƌ Ņ Ō ťũƀƐƌ ł Ō ƦũƀƐƌ IJƦũƀƐƌ ô ł Ō Ņ Ō ťƍũƀƐƌ ŅŅ Ō ťƍũƀƐƌ Ō Ō ƎƀũƀƐƌ Ņò Ō ƎũƀƐƌ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼũƀƐƌ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦũƀƐƌ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀũƀƐƌ łŅò Ō ƎƍũƀƐƌ B

ň

ł

Past š, future š

ňŅ ƈƙƌ Ņ ƨƙƌŅ ƦƇłƙƌŅ ł IJƦ ô ƇƙƌŅ Ņ ňŅ ťƍíƇƙƌ Ņ Ņ ťƍŅíƇƙƌ Ō Ņ ƎƀƇƙƌ òŅ ƎƇŅƙƌ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƇƙƌ ň òŅ ƎſƦíƇŅ ƙƌ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀƇƙƌ òŅ ł Ņ ƙƌ ƎƍíƇ ƈƀƙƌŌ Ņ ƨƀƙƌŌ ł Ō ƦƇƀƙƌ ł Ō IJƦƇƀƙƌ ô Ņ Ō ťƍíƇƀƙƌ Ņ Ņ Ō ťƍíƇƀƙƌ Ō Ō ƎƀƇƀƙƌ Ņò Ō ƎƇƀƙƌ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƇƀƙƌ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦíƇƀƙƌ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƇƀƙƌ ł Ņò Ō ƎƍíƇƀƙƌ

C

199

D

E

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ňœ ł ơƙƉ Ņ œł ťƠƙƉ ł œł ƦƠƙƉ ł œł IJƦƠƙƉ ô Ņ ňœ ł ťƍƠƙƉ ŅŅ œł ťƍƠƙƉ Ō œł ƎƀƠƙƉ Ņ òœł ƎƠƙƉ ŏ Ō œł ķĭƼƠƙ Ɖ ň Ņ œł òƎſƦƠƙƉ ł Ō œł ƎƍƀƠƙƉ ł Ņ òœł ƎƍƠƙƉ łœ ł ơƙƉ Ņ œł ťƠƙƉ ł œł ƦƠƙƉ ł œł IJƦƠƙƉ ô Ņ łœ ł ťƍƠƙƉ ŅŅ œł ťƍƠƙƉ Ō œł ƎƀƠƙƉ Ņ òœł ƎƠƙƉ ŏ Ō œł ķĭƼƠƙƉ ň Ņ œł ƎòſƦƠƙƉ ł Ō œł ƎƍƀƠƙƉ ł Ņ òœł ƎƍƠƙƉ D

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ł œł ň ơƘŁƦƉ Ņ œł ň ťƠƘŁƦƉ ł œł ň ƦƠƘŁƦƉ ł œł ň IJƦƠƘŁƦƉ ô Ņ ł œł ň ťƍƠƘŁƦƉ Ņ Ņ œł ň ťƍƠƘŁƦƉ Ō œł ň ƎƀƠƘŁƦƉ Ņ ò œł ň ƎƠƘŁƦƉ ŏ Ō œł ň ķĭƼƠƘŁƦƉ ň Ņ œł ň ƎòſƦƠƘŁƦƉ ł Ō œł ň ƎƍƀƠƘŁƦƉ ł Ņò œ ł ň ƎƍƠƘŁƦƉ E

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

200

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms Table 4. Strong Verbs Ending in a Guttural (Ĭ, į, ĺ) or Ŀ

ł

201

Verbs whose last letter is a guttural (i.e., Ĭ, į, or ĺ) or Ŀ tend to have an š vowel on the ň ň ł ň ł ň second letter (i.e., just before the guttural); e.g., ƗƇŨŁĥ (C1), not ƗƇŨŁĥ; ƗƇŨł (D1), not ƗƇŨł ; ł ł ň . This is the only difference between Table 4 and Table 1. Note that the ł (F1), not ƗƇŨĥ ƗƇŨĥ ň ł ł (Column E) and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł ł ň measures (Column G) already end in šł. ƈƖƘŁĥ

202

Ĭ į, ĺ) or Ŀ (i. Past, Future, Imperative,

Table 4. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs Ending in a Guttural ( , A

ł PȨal ƈƖƘ

M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

Ending in guttural

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

Infinitive

B

ł ƗƇŨ ł ň ƦƖíƇŨ ł ƦƖƇŨ ł IJƦƖƇŨ ô ň ň ƦƖíƇŨ ł ŏ ł / ŴƖƇŨ ķŴƖíƇŨ ô ò ł ò ň ł / ƁƖíƇŨ ƎƀƖíƇŨ ô ŏ ł ķĭƦƖƇŨ ň ò ł ƎſƦƖíƇŨ ł ł ł / ƎƖƇŨ ƎƍƖƇŨ ł ň ƗƇũƌ ł ň ƗƇŨŁ ł ň ƗƇŨŁ Ō ň ƎƀƖíƇŨŁ ł ň ƗƇŨĥ ŏ ň ķŴƖíƇũƌ Ņ ò ň ƎƖíƇũƌ ŏ ň ķŴƖíƇŨŁ Ņ ò ň ƎƖíƇŨŁ ł ň ƗƇũƌ ł ƗƇŨ ł Ō ł / ƁƖƇŨ ƎƀƖíƇŨ ô ł ŏ ł / ŴƖƇŨ ķŴƖíƇŨ ô ò ł ò ň ł / ƁƖíƇŨ ƎƀƖíƇŨ ô ł ň ƗƇũƉ A

Ending in Ŀ

C

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ EthpȨel

ł ƢƊū ŁƢłƊūň ł ŁƢƊū ł IJŁ ô ƢƊū ŁƢňƊūň ł / ĭôƢƊū ł ķĭƢŏƊū ł / IJôǔƊū ł ƎſòƢňƊū ŏ ł ķĭŁƢƊū ň ł ƎſŁǔƊū ł / ķƢƊū ł ƎƌłƢƊū ŏ ň ĿŴƊŬƌ ŏ ň ĿŴƊūŁ ŏ ň ĿŴƊūŁ Ō ň ƎſƢƊūŁ ŏ ň ĿŴƊūĥ ŏ ň ķĭƢƊŬƌ Ņ ň ķǔƊŬƌ ŏ ň ķĭƢƊūŁ Ņ ň ķǔƊūŁ ŏ ň ĿŴƊŬƌ ŏ ĿŴƊū Ō ŏ / IJĿŴƊū ƎſĿŴƊū ô ŏ ŏ ŏ / ĭĿŴƊū ķĭĿŴƊū ô ŏ ň ŏ ŏ ƎſǓŴƊū / IJôǓŴƊū ł ň ƢƊŬƉ

ł ň ƗƇŨŁĥ ł ł Łĥň ƦƖíƇŨ ł Łĥň ƦƖƇŨ ł ň IJƦ ô ƖƇŨŁĥ ň ł Łĥň ƦƖíƇŨ ł ň ŏ ł Łĥň / ŴƖƇŨ ķŴƖíƇŨ ô Łĥ ò ł Łĥň ň ł Łĥň / ƁƖíƇŨ ƎƀòƖíƇŨ ô ŏ ł ň ķĭƦƖƇŨ Łĥ ň ò ł ň ƎſƦƖíƇŨŁĥ ł Łĥň / ƎƖƇŨ ł Łĥň łƎƍƖƇŨ ł ň ƗƇŨƦƌ ł ň ƗƇŨŁŁ ł ň ƗƇŨŁŁ Ō ł ŁŁň ƎƀƖíƇŨ ł ň ƗƇŨŁĥ ŏ ł Ʀƌň ķŴƖíƇŨ ò ł Ʀƌň ƎƖŅíƇŨ ŏ ł ŁŁň ķŴƖíƇŨ ò ł ŁŁň ƎƖŅíƇŨ ł ň ƗƇŨƦƌ ł ň ƗƇŨŁĥ ň Ō ł ň / ƁƖƇŨŁĥ ƎƀƖíƇŨŁĥ ô ł ň ŏ ł ň / ŴƖƇŨŁĥ ķŴƖíƇŨŁĥ ô ł ň ò ò ň ł ň / ƁƖíƇŨŁĥ ƎƀƖíƇŨŁĥ ô ł ŏ Ņ ň ŴƖíƇŨƦƉ

B

C

203

and Infinitive) D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ƗƇłŨł ƦƖłíƇŨł ƦƖƇłŨł ł IJƦ ô ƖƇŨł ň Ũł ƦƖíƇ ŏ ł Ũł / ŴƖƇłŨł ķŴƖíƇ ô ò ł Ũł ň ł ƎƀòƖíƇŨł / ƁôƖíƇ ŏ ķĭƦƖƇłŨł ò ň ƖƇłŨł ƎſƦ ƎƍłƖƇłŨł / ƎƖƇłŨł ƗƇłũłƌ ƗƇłŨłŁ ƗƇłŨłŁ Ō ŨłŁ ƎƀƖíƇ ň ƗƇłŨłĥ ŏ ũłƌ ķŴƖíƇ Ņ ò ũłƌ ƎƖíƇ ŏ ŨłŁ ķŴƖíƇ Ņ ò ŨłŁ ƎƖíƇ ƗƇłũłƌ ƗƇłŨł Ō ł Ũł / ƁƖƇł Ũł ƎƀƖíƇ ô ł ł ŏ ł ķŴƖíƇŨ / ŴƖƇ ô Ũł ò ł ò ň ł Ũł / ƁƖíƇ ƎƀƖíƇ ô Ũł ŏ Ņ ł ŴƖíƇũƉ D

ň ƗƇłŨłŁĥ ň ƦƖłíƇŨłŁĥ ň ƦƖƇłŨłŁĥ ł ň IJƦ ô ƖƇŨłŁĥ ň ŨłŁĥň ƦƖíƇ ň ň ķŴƖŏíƇłŨłŁĥ / ŴôƖƇłŨłŁĥ ň ň ƎƀòƖňíƇłŨłŁĥ / ƁôƖòíƇłŨłŁĥ ň ŏ ķĭƦƖƇłŨłŁĥ ò ň ƖƇłŨłŁĥň ƎſƦ ň ň ƎƍłƖƇłŨłŁĥ / ƎƖƇłŨłŁĥ ƗƇłŨłƦƌň ň ƗƇłŨłŁŁ ň ƗƇłŨłŁŁ Ō ŨłŁŁň ƎƀƖíƇ ň ƗƇłŨłŁĥ ŏ ŨłƦƌň ķŴƖíƇ ƎƖŅíƇòŨłƦƌň ŏ ŨłŁŁň ķŴƖíƇ ň ƎƖŅíƇòŨłŁŁ ƗƇłŨłƦƌň ň ƗƇłŨłŁĥ ň ň ƎƀƖŌíƇłŨłŁĥ / ƁôƖƇłŨłŁĥ ň ň ķŴƖŏíƇłŨłŁĥ / ŴôƖƇłŨłŁĥ ň ň ƎƀòƖňíƇłŨłŁĥ / ƁôƖòíƇłŨłŁĥ ŏ Ņ ł ň ŴƖíƇŨƦƉ E

ł ĥł ƗƇŨ ł ĥł ƦƖíƇŨ ł ĥł ƦƖƇŨ ł ł IJƦ ô ƖƇŨĥ ň ĥł ƦƖíƇŨ ł ł ŏ ł ĥł / ŴƖƇŨ ķŴƖíƇŨ ô ĥ ò ł ĥł ň ł ĥł / ƁƖíƇŨ ƎƀòƖíƇŨ ô ŏ ł ł ķĭƦƖƇŨ ĥ ł ĥł òƎſƦň ƖƇŨ ł ĥł / ƎƖƇŨ ł ĥł ƎƍłƖƇŨ ł ƌł ƗƇũ ł Łł ƗƇŨ ł Łł ƗƇŨ Ō Łł ƎƀƖíƇŨ ł ĥł ƗƇŨ ŏ ƌł ķŴƖíƇũ ƎƖŅíƇũòƌł ŏ Łł ķŴƖíƇŨ Ņ ŨòŁł ƎƖíƇ ł ƌł ƗƇũ ł ĥł ƗƇŨ ł ł Ō ł ĥł / ƁƖƇŨ ƎƀƖíƇŨ ô ĥ ł ł ŏ ł ĥł / ŴƖƇŨ ķŴƖíƇŨ ô ĥ ò ł ĥł ň ł ĥł / ƁƖíƇŨ ƎƀòƖíƇŨ ô ŏ Ņ ł ŴƖíƇũƉ F

ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƗƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƦƖíƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƦƖƇŨ ł ł ň IJƦ ô ƖƇŨŁŁĥ ł ň ň ŁŁĥ ƦƖíƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ł ł ň ķŴƖŏíƇŨ / ŴôƖƇŨŁŁĥ ł ň ò ł ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƎƀòƖňíƇŨ / ƁôƖíƇŨŁŁĥ ŏ ł ł ň ķĭƦƖƇŨ ŁŁĥ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ òƎſƦň ƖƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ł ł ň ƎƍłƖƇŨ / ƎƖƇŨŁŁĥ ł ň ł ŁƦƌ ƗƇŨ łň ł ŁŁ ƗƇŨ łň ł ŁŁ ƗƇŨ łň Ō ŁŁ ƎƀƖíƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƗƇŨ ł ň ŏ ŁƦƌ ķŴƖíƇŨ ł ƎƖŅíƇŨòŁƦƌň łň ŏ ŁŁ ķŴƖíƇŨ łň Ņ ŨòŁŁ ƎƖíƇ ł ň ł ŁƦƌ ƗƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƗƇŨ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ł ł ň ƎƀƖŌíƇŨ / ƁôƖƇŨŁŁĥ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ł ł ň ķŴƖŏíƇŨ / ŴôƖƇŨŁŁĥ ł ň ò ł ł ň ł ŁŁĥ ƎƀòƖňíƇŨ / ƁôƖíƇŨŁŁĥ ŏ Ņ ł ň ŴƖíƇŨŁƦƉ G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

204

Ĭ į, ĺ) or Ŀ (ii. Active and

Table 4. Regular ‘Strong’ Verbs Ending in a Guttural ( , A

B

ł

M = Masculine F = Feminine

PȨalƈƖƘ Ending in guttural

26

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

ł Ņ ƗƇŨ Ņ Ņ ťƖíƇŨ ł Ņ ƦƖíƇŨ ł Ņ IJƦƖíƇŨ ô Ņ ł Ņ ťƍƖƇŨ ŅŅ Ņ ťƍƖíƇŨ Ō Ņ ƎƀƖíƇŨ Ņ ò Ņ ƎƖíƇŨ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƖíƇŨ ň Ņ ò Ņ ƎſƦƖíƇŨ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀƖíƇŨ łŅ ò Ņ ƎƍƖíƇŨ Ō ƗƀƇŨ Ņ Ō ťƖƀƇŨ ł Ō ƦƖƀƇŨ ł Ō IJƦ ô ƖƀƇŨ Ņ Ō ťƍƖƀƇŨ ŅŅ Ō ťƍƖƀƇŨ Ō Ō ƎƀƖƀƇŨ Ņò Ō ƎƖƀíƇŨ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƖƀƇŨ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦƖƀíƇŨ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƖƀƇŨ łŅò Ō ƎƍƖƀíƇŨ A

Ending in Ŀ

ł Ņ ƢƊū Ņ Ņ ŧƢƊū ł Ņ ŁƢƊū ł Ņ IJŁƢƊū ô Ņ ł Ņ ljƢƊū ŅŅ Ņ ljƢƊū Ō Ņ ƎſƢƊū ķǔŅƊūŅ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƻƢƊū ň ƎſŁǔŅƊūŅ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍſƢƊū ƎƌłǔŅƊūŅ Ō ƢƀƊū Ņ Ō ŧƢƀƊū ł Ō ŁƢƀƊū ł Ō IJŁ ô ƢƀƊū Ņ Ō ljƢƀƊū ŅŅ Ō ljƢƀƊū Ō Ō ƎſƢƀƊū Ņ Ō ķǔƀƊū ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƻƢƀƊū ň Ņ Ō ƎſŁǔƀƊū ł Ō Ō ƎƍſƢƀƊū Ņ Ō ƎƌłǔƀƊū B

C

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ EthpȨel

ł ƦƉň ƗƇŨ Ņ ł ň ťƖíƇŨƦƉ ł ł ƦƉň ƦƖíƇŨ ł ł ƦƉň IJôƦƖíƇŨ ł ƦƉň ťƍŅƖƇŨ Ņ ł ň ťƍŅƖíƇŨƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƖíƇŨƦƉ ò ł ň ƎƖŅíƇŨƦƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƖíƇŨƦƉ ň ò ł ň ƎſƦƖŅíƇŨƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍƀłƖíƇŨƦƉ ò ł ƦƉň ł Ņ íƇŨ ƎƍƖ C

205

Passive Participles) D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ƗƇłũƉ Ņ ł ťƖíƇũƉ ł ł ƦƖíƇũƉ ł ł IJƦƖíƇũƉ ô Ņ ł ł ťƍƖƇũƉ ł Ņ Ņ íƇũƉ ťƍƖ Ō ł ƎƀƖíƇũƉ Ņ ł ò ƎƖíƇũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƖíƇũƉ òň Ņ ł ƎſƦƖíƇũƉ Ō ł ƎƍłƀƖíƇũƉ łŅ ł ò ƎƍƖíƇũƉ ł ł ƗƇũƉ Ņ ł ťƖíƇũƉ ł ł ƦƖíƇũƉ ł ł IJƦƖíƇũƉ ô Ņ ł ł ťƍƖƇũƉ ŅŅ ł ťƍƖíƇũƉ Ō ł ƎƀƖíƇũƉ Ņ ł ò ƎƖíƇũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƖíƇũƉ ň Ņ ł ƎòſƦƖíƇũƉ Ō ł ƎƍłƀƖíƇũƉ Ņ ł ò ƎƍłƖíƇũƉ D

ł ł ň ƗƇŨƦƉ Ņ ł ň ťƖíƇŨƦƉ ł ł ň ƦƖíƇŨƦƉ ł ł ň IJƦƖíƇŨƦƉ ô Ņ ł ł ň ťƍƖƇŨƦƉ ŅŅ ł ň ťƍƖíƇŨƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƖíƇŨƦƉ ò ł ň ƎƖŅíƇŨƦƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƖíƇŨƦƉ ň ò ł ň ƎſƦƖŅíƇŨƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍłƀƖíƇŨƦƉ ò ł ň ƎƍłƖŅíƇŨƦƉ E

ł ł ƗƇũƉ Ņ ł ťƖíƇũƉ ł ł ƦƖíƇũƉ ł ł IJƦƖíƇũƉ ô Ņ ł ł ťƍƖƇũƉ ł ŅŅ ťƍƖíƇũƉ Ō ł ƎƀƖíƇũƉ Ņ ò ł ƎƖíƇũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƖíƇũƉ ň Ņ ò ł ƎſƦƖíƇũƉ ł ł Ō ƎƍƀƖíƇũƉ łŅ ò ł ƎƍƖíƇũƉ ł ł ƗƇũƉ Ņ ł ťƖíƇũƉ ł ł ƦƖíƇũƉ ł ł IJƦƖíƇũƉ ô Ņ ł ł ťƍƖƇũƉ ł ŅŅ ťƍƖíƇũƉ Ō ł ƎƀƖíƇũƉ ƎƖŅíƇũòƉł ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƖíƇũƉ ň ƎſƦƖŅíƇũòƉł Ō ł ƎƍłƀƖíƇũƉ Ņ ò ł ƎƍłƖíƇũƉ F

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ł ł ň ƗƇŨŁƦƉ Ņ ł ň ťƖíƇŨŁƦƉ ł ł ň ƦƖíƇŨŁƦƉ ł ł ň IJƦƖíƇŨŁƦƉ ô Ņ ł ł ň ťƍƖƇŨŁƦƉ ŅŅ ł ň ťƍƖíƇŨŁƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƖíƇŨŁƦƉ Ņ òł ň ƎƖíƇŨŁƦƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƖíƇŨŁƦƉ ň Ņ òł ň ƎſƦƖíƇŨŁƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍłƀƖíƇŨŁƦƉ Ņ òł ň ƎƍłƖíƇŨŁƦƉ G

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

206 Table 5. Initial ĥ Verbs

Appendix

ň

ň

ň

ł ‘he ate’, ƢƉĥł Unlike strong verbs, initial ĥ verbs take a vowel, š, on the first letter; e.g., ƈƃĥ ňł ‘he said’, ĵĮĥ ‘he went’. Compare this with strong verbs whose first letter does not take a ł ł vowel like ħǁ, ơƙƌ. The paradigm of initial ĥ verbs differs substantially from that of Table 1 as follows: ł (Table 5, Columns A & B): 1. The ƈƖƘ ň ł Ŕ ň (compare with a. Past (A1-A10 & B1-B10), the initial ĥ is retained as in ƈƃĥ ł regular ħǁ which has no vowel on the first letter). b. Future (A11-A20 & B11-B20), orthographically it looks like the regular ŏ ň ŏ Ŕ ň (compare with regular ħĭǂƌ strong verb; e.g., ĵŴƃŤƌ ), but here the initial ĥ is silent (but never underlined). When the future vowel is šŏ, then the ň ŏ Ŕ ň (A11), but when the future vowel is šł, then prefix vowel is š as in ĵŴƃŤƌ Ō ł Ō (B11). the prefix vowel is š as in ƢƉŤƌ ł ŏł c. Imperative (A21-A24 & B21-B24), the vowel on ĥ is š as in ĵŴƃĥŔ ŏ (compare with regular ħĭǁ which has no vowel on the first letter). But in Ō cases when the future prefix vowel is š, the initial ĥ is silent and can be ł ô (B21). underlined as in ƢƉĥ d. Infinitive (A25 & B25), like the future, it is written like the regular verb, but the ĥ is silent (and not underlined). The vowel on the prefix Ɖ follows ň ł ň (A25), while šŌ in ƢƉŤƉ ł Ō (B25). the vowel of the future: š in ƈƃŤƉ e. Present or active participle (A26-A37 & B26-B37) is regular and follows Table 1. ł ŌŔ ł f. Passive participle (A38-A49 & B38-B49), the vowel on ĥ is š as in ƈƀƃĥ Ō Ō ł (compare with regular Ūſǁ which has no vowel on the first and ƢƀƉĥ letter). ň ň ň ł ň is retained, but moves to the prefix; 2. The ƈƖƘŁĥ (Column C): The š vowel of ƈƃĥ ň ň ň Ŕ ň ň (C1), not ƈƃĥŁĥ ň ň ň ; future ƈƃĥƦƌ ň Ŕ ň ň (C11), not ƈƃňĥƦƌ ; imperative e.g., past ƈƃĥŁĥ łň ł ň ŏ Ņ ň ň ŏ Ņň ň ƈƃĥŁĥ (C25), not ŴƿĥƦƉ; passive participle Ŕ Ŕ (C21), not ƈƃĥŁĥň ; infinitive ŴƿĥƦƉ ň ň ň ň ň (C38), not ƈƃĥƦƉ. Whenever a verb has a vowel on the initial ĥ, it too ƈƃĥƦƉ Ŕ ł ł ň (C2), not ƦƿĥŁĥ ł ł ň. moves to the prefix; e.g., ƦƿĥŁĥ Ŕ ň ł 3. The ƈƖƘ (Column D): a. Past (D1-D10) is regular. ł (A11-A20), the vowel of b. Future (D11-D20), as in the future of the ƈƖƘ ł ň Ŕ ł (D11), not ƈƃŤƌ ňł the ĥ, š in this case, moves to the prefix; e.g., ƈƃŤƌ ň (compare with regular ħǂƌł ). c. Imperative (D21-D24), here too the vowel of ĥ moves to the prefix as in łň ƈƃĥŁĥ Ŕ (D21).

Verb Paradigms

ł

207

ŏ Ņ ł ŴƿŤƉ Ŕ

d. Infinitive (D25), the š vowel of the ĥ moves to the prefix; e.g., ŏ Ņł ŏ Ņ ł ). (D25), not ŴƿŤƉ (compare with regular ŴŨǂƉ e. Present or active participle (D26-D37) and passive participle (D38-D49), ň Ŕ ł (D26), not here too the vowel of the ĥ moves to the prefix; e.g., ƈƃŤƉ ł łň ł Ŕ ł (D38), not ƈƃŤƉ ł . ƈƃŤƉ; ƈƃŤƉ ň ň ł ł Ŕ (Column E): The š vowel of ƈƃĥłň is retained, but moves to the prefix 4. The ƈƖƘŁĥ as 2 above. ň ł ł ň turns into a ĭ throughout the column; e.g., 5. The ƈƖƘĥ (Column F): The ĥ of ƈƃĥ ň œ ł (F1), not ƈƃĥĥ ň ł ; future ƈƃŴƌ ň œ ł (F11), not ƈƃŤƌ ň ł ; imperative ƈƃĭĥ ň œ ł (F21), past ƈƃĭĥ ŏ Ņœ ł ŏ Ņ ł ň ł ňœ ł not ƈƃĥĥ ; infinitive ŴƿŴƉ (F25), not ŴƿŤƉ ; present (active participle) ƈƃŴƉ ň ł œ ł (F38), not ƈƃŤƉ ł ł. (F26), not ƈƃŤƉł ; and passive participle ƈƃŴƉ ň ł ł (Column G): The ĥ turns into a ĭ as in 5. 6. The ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

208

ĥ

Table 5. Initial Verbs (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) A M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

ŏ

Infinitive

B

ł PȨal ƈƖƘ

C

ł

Future ĭš

Future š

A

B

ň ƈƃĥł ł ň Ʀƿĥ ň Ʀƿĥł łň IJƦƿĥ ô ň ň Ʀƿĥ ŏ ň łň ķŴƿĥł / Ŵƿĥ ô ò łň ò ň ł ň / Ɓƿĥ Ǝƀíƿĥ ô ŏ ň ķĭƦíƿĥł ň ò ň ƎſƦíƿĥł ł ł ň / Ǝƿĥłň Ǝƍíƿĥ ŏ ň ĵŴƃŤƌ ŏ ň ĵŴƃĥŁ ŏ ň ĵŴƃĥŁ Ō ň ƎƀƿĥŁ ň ĵŴƃĥŏ ŏ ķŴƿŤƌň Ņ ò ň ƎƿŤƌ ŏ ň ķŴƿĥŁ Ņ ò ň ƎƿĥŁ ŏ ň ĵŴƃŤƌ ł ĵŴƃĥŏ Ō ŏ ł / ƁƆŴƃĥŏ ł ƎƀƆŴƃĥ ô ł ŏ ŏ ŏł ķŴƆŴƃĥ / ŴƆŴƃĥ ô ò ŏł ò ň ŏ ł / ƁƆŴƃĥ ƎƀíƆŴƃĥ ô ł ň ƈƃŤƉ

ň ƢƉĥł ł ň ŁƢƉĥ ň ŁƢƉĥł ň IJŁƢƉ ô łĥ ň ň ŁƢƉĥ ŏ ł ň / ĭƢƉĥł ň ķĭƢƉĥ ô ň ł ň / IJǔƉĥł ň òƎſƢƉĥ ô ŏ łň ķĭŁƢƉĥ ň ň ƎſŁǔƉĥł ł ł ň / ķƢƉĥłň ƎƌƢƉĥ ł Ō ƢƉŤƌ ł Ō ƢƉĥŁ ł Ō ƢƉĥŁ Ō Ō ƎſƢƉĥŁ Ō ƢƉĥł ŏ ƌŌ ķĭƢƉŤ Ņ Ō ķǔƉŤƌ ŏ Ō ķĭƢƉĥŁ Ņ Ō ķǔƉĥŁ ł Ō ƢƉŤƌ ƢƉĥłô ƎſƢŌƉĥłô / IJƢƉĥłô ŏ ł / ĭƢƉĥł ķĭƢƉĥ ô ô ň ł ł ƎſǔƉĥô / IJǔƉĥô ł Ō ƢƉŤƉ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ EthpȨel

ň ňň ƈƃĥŁĥ ł łň ƦƿĥŁĥ ň ňň ƦƿĥŁĥ ň ňň IJƦƿĥŁĥ ô ň łň ƦƿĥŁĥ ŏ ň ňň ň ňň ķŴƿĥŁĥ / ŴƿĥŁĥ ô ò ň ňň ò ň ň ň ň / ƁƿĥŁĥ ƎƀíƿĥŁĥ ô ŏ ň ňň ķĭƦíƿĥŁĥ ň ò ň ňň ƎſƦíƿĥŁĥ ň ňň ł ň ň ň / ƎƿĥŁĥ ƎƍíƿĥŁĥ ň ň ň ƈƃĥƦƌ ň ňň ƈƃĥŁŁ ň ňň ƈƃĥŁŁ Ō łň ƎƀƿŁŁ ň ňň ƈƃĥŁĥ ŏ ł ķŴƿĥƦƌň Ņ ł Ǝƿĥò Ʀƌň ŏ łň ķŴƿĥŁŁ Ņ łň Ǝƿò ĥŁŁ ň ň ň ƈƃĥƦƌ łň ƈƃĥŁĥ łň Ō łň ƎƀƿĥŁĥ / ƁƿĥŁĥ ô łň ŏ łň ķŴƿĥŁĥ / ŴƿĥŁĥ ô ò łň ò ň ł ň / ƁƿĥŁĥ ƎƀíƿĥŁĥ ô ŏ Ņ ň ň ŴƿĥƦƉ C

209

D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ƈƃĥň ł ł Ʀƿĥ ł Ʀƿĥň ňł IJƦƿĥ ô ň ł Ʀƿĥ ŏ ł ňł ķŴƿĥň / Ŵƿĥ ô ò ňł ò ň ň ł / Ɓƿĥ Ǝƀíƿĥ ô ŏ ł ķĭƦíƿĥň òň ňł ƎſƦíƿĥ ł ň ł / Ǝƿĥňł Ǝƍíƿĥ ň ł ƈƃŤƌ ň ł ƈƃĥŁ ň ł ƈƃĥŁ Ō ł ƎƀƿĥŁ ł ƈƃĥň ŏ ķŴƿŤƌł Ņ ò ł ƎƿŤƌ ŏ ł ķŴƿĥŁ Ņ ò ł ƎƿĥŁ ň ł ƈƃŤƌ ł ƈƃĥň Ō ł ňł Ǝƀƿĥň / Ɓƿĥ ô ŏ ł ňł ķŴƿĥň / Ŵƿĥ ô ò ňł ò ň ň ł / Ɓƿĥ Ǝƀíƿĥ ô ŏ Ņ ł ŴƿŤƉ D

ł łň ƈƃĥŁĥ ł łň ƦƿĥŁĥ ł łň ƦƿĥŁĥ ł łň IJƦƿĥŁĥ ô ň łň ƦƿĥŁĥ ŏ łň ł łň ķŴƿĥł Łĥ / ŴƿĥŁĥ ô ò ł łň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƿĥŁĥ ƎƀíƿĥŁĥ ô ŏ ł łň ķĭƦíƿĥŁĥ òň ł łň ƎſƦíƿĥŁĥ ł łň ł ł ł ň / ƎƿĥŁĥ ƎƍíƿĥŁĥ ł ł ň ƈƃĥƦƌ ł łň ƈƃĥŁŁ ł łň ƈƃĥŁŁ Ō łň ƎƀƿĥŁŁ ł łň ƈƃĥŁĥ ŏ ł ķŴƿĥƦƌň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƿĥƦƌ ŏ łň ķŴƿĥŁŁ Ņ ò łň ƎƿĥŁŁ ł ł ň ƈƃĥƦƌ ł łň ƈƃĥŁĥ Ō ł łň ł łň ƎƀƿĥŁĥ / ƁƿĥŁĥ ô ŏ ł łň ł łň ķŴƿĥŁĥ / ŴƿĥŁĥ ô ò ł łň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƿĥŁĥ ƎƀíƿĥŁĥ ô ŏ Ņ ł ň ŴƿĥƦƉ E

ň ł ƈƃĭĥ ł ł Ʀƿĭĥ ň ł Ʀƿĭĥ ň ł IJƦƿĭĥ ô ň ł Ʀƿĭĥ ŏ ň ł ň ł ķŴƿĭĥ / Ŵƿĭĥ ô ò ň ł ò ň ň ł / Ɓƿĭĥ Ǝƀíƿĭĥ ô ŏ ň ł ķĭƦíƿĭĥ òň ň ł ƎſƦíƿĭĥ ň ł ł ň ł / Ǝƿĭĥ Ǝƍíƿĭĥ ň ł ƈƃŴƌ ň ł ƈƃĭŁ ň ł ƈƃĭŁ Ō ł ƎƀƿĭŁ ň ł ƈƃĭĥ ŏ ķŴƿŴƌł Ņ ò ł ƎƿŴƌ ŏ ł ķŴƿĭŁ Ņ ò ł ƎƿĭŁ ň ł ƈƃŴƌ ň ł ƈƃĭĥ Ō ň ł ň ł Ǝƀƿĭĥ / Ɓƿĭĥ ô ŏ ň ł ň ł ķŴƿĭĥ / Ŵƿĭĥ ô ò ň ł ò ň ň ł / Ɓƿĭĥ Ǝƀíƿĭĥ ô ŏ Ņ ł ŴƿŴƉ F

ł ł ň ƈƃĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň ƦƿĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň ƦƿĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň IJƦƿĭŁŁĥ ô ň ł ň ƦƿĭŁŁĥ ŏ ł ł ň ł ł ň ķŴƿĭŁŁĥ / ŴƿĭŁŁĥ ô ò ł ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƿĭŁŁĥ ƎƀíƿĭŁŁĥ ô ŏ ł ł ň ķĭƦíƿĭŁŁĥ òň ł ł ň ƎſƦíƿĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň ł ł ł ň / ƎƿĭŁŁĥ ƎƍíƿĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň ƈƃĭŁƦƌ ł łň ƈƃĭŁŁ ł łň ƈƃĭŁŁ Ō łň ƎƀƿĭŁŁ ł ł ň ƈƃĭŁŁĥ ŏ ł ķŴƿĭŁƦƌň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƿĭŁƦƌ ŏ łň ķŴƿĭŁŁ Ņ ò łň ƎƿĭŁŁ ł ł ň ƈƃĭŁƦƌ ł ł ň ƈƃĭŁŁĥ Ō ł ł ň ł ł ň ƎƀƿĭŁŁĥ / ƁƿĭŁŁĥ ô ŏ ł ł ň ł ł ň ķŴƿĭŁŁĥ / ŴƿĭŁŁĥ ô ò ł ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƿĭŁŁĥ ƎƀíƿĭŁŁĥ ô ŏ Ņ ł ň ŴƿĭŁƦƉ G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

210

ĥ

Table 5. Initial Verbs (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

29

Present Tense (Active Participle)

28

ŏ

Future ĭš 3rd

27

C

ł

M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

B

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

PȨalƈƖƘ

Ņ ƈƃĥň Ņ Ņ ƨƃĥ ł Ņ Ʀƿĥ ł Ņ IJƦƿĥ ô Ņ ňŅ ťƍíƿĥ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƍíƿĥ Ō Ņ Ǝƀƿĥ Ņ Ņ Ǝƿĥò ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƿĥ ň Ņ Ņ ƎſƦíƿĥò ł Ō Ņ Ǝƍƀƿĥ ł Ņ òŅ Ǝƍíƿĥ ł ƈƀƃĥŌ Ņ ł ƨƀƃĥŌ ł Ōł ƦƇƀƃĥ ł Ōł IJƦ ô Ƈƀƃĥ Ņ Ōł ťƍíƇƀƃĥ Ņ Ņ Ōł ťƍíƇƀƃĥ Ō Ōł ƎƀƇƀƃĥ Ņò Ōł ƎƇƀƃĥ ŏ Ō Ōł ķĭƼƇƀƃĥ ň Ņò Ōł ƎſƦíƇƀƃĥ ł Ō Ōł ƎƍƀƇƀƃĥ ł Ņò Ōł ƎƍÿƇƀƃĥ

A

ł

Future š

Ņ ƢƉĥł Ņ Ņ ŧƢƉĥ ł Ņ ŁƢƉĥ ł Ņ IJŁƢƉĥ ô Ņ łŅ ljƢƉĥ ŅŅ Ņ ljƢƉĥ Ō Ņ ƎſƢƉĥ Ņ Ņ ķǔƉĥ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƻƢƉĥ ň Ņ Ņ ƎſŁǔƉĥ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍſƢƉĥ łŅ Ņ ƎƌǔƉĥ ł ƢƀƉĥŌ Ņ Ōł ŧƢƀƉĥ ł Ōł ŁƢƀƉĥ ł ł IJŁ ô ƢƀƉĥŌ Ņ Ōł ljƢƀƉĥ ŅŅ Ō ł ljƢƀƉĥ Ō Ōł ƎſƢƀƉĥ Ņ Ōł ķǔƀƉĥ ŏ Ō Ōł ķĭƻƢƀƉĥ ň Ņ Ōł ƎſŁǔƀƉĥ ł Ō Ōł ƎƍſƢƀƉĥ łŅ Ōł ƎƌǔƀƉĥ

B

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ EthpȨel

ň ƈƃĥňƦƉň Ņ ł ƨƃĥƦƉň ł ł ƦƿĥƦƉň ł ł IJôƦƿĥƦƉň ň ťƍŅíƿĥňƦƉň Ņ ł ťƍŅíƿĥƦƉň Ō ł ƎƀƿĥƦƉň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƿĥƦƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƿĥƦƉň ň Ņ ł ƎòſƦíƿĥƦƉň Ō ł ƎƍƀłƿĥƦƉň ł Ņ ł ƎòƍíƿĥƦƉň C

211

D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ň ł ƈƃŤƉ Ņ ƨƃŤƉł ł ƦƿŤƉł ł ł IJƦƿŤƉ ô Ņ ň ł ťƍíƿŤƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍíƿŤƉ Ō ƎƀƿŤƉł Ņ ł ƎƿŤƉò ŏ Ō ķĭƼƿŤƉł òň Ņ ł ƎſƦíƿŤƉ Ō ƎƍłƀƿŤƉł ł Ņ łò ƎƍíƿŤƉ ł ł ƈƃŤƉ Ņ ƨƃŤƉł ł ƦƿŤƉł ł ł IJƦƿŤƉ ô Ņ ł ł ťƍíƿŤƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍíƿŤƉ Ō ƎƀƿŤƉł Ņ ò ł ƎƿŤƉ ŏ Ō ķĭƼƿŤƉł ň Ņ ƎòſƦíƿŤƉł Ō ƎƍłƀƿŤƉł Ņ ò ł ƎƍłíƿŤƉ D

ł ł ň ƈƃĥƦƉ Ņ ł ƨƃĥƦƉň ł ł ƦƿĥƦƉň ł ł ň IJƦƿĥƦƉ ô Ņ ł ł ň ťƍíƿĥƦƉ Ņ Ņ ł Ɖň ťƍíƿĥƦ Ō ł ƎƀƿĥƦƉň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƿĥƦƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƿĥƦƉň ň Ņ ł ƎòſƦíƿĥƦƉň Ō ł ƎƍłƀƿĥƦƉň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƍłíƿĥƦƉ E

ň ł ƈƃŴƉ Ņ ƨƃŴƉł ł ƦƿŴƉł ł ł IJƦƿŴƉ ô Ņ ň ł ťƍíƿŴƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍíƿŴƉ Ō ƎƀƿŴƉł Ņ ò ł ƎƿŴƉ ŏ Ō ķĭƼƿŴƉł ň Ņ ò ł ƎſƦíƿŴƉ ł Ō ł ƎƍƀƿŴƉ ł Ņ ò ł ƎƍíƿŴƉ ł ł ƈƃŴƉ Ņ ƨƃŴƉł ł ƦƿŴƉł ł ł IJƦƿŴƉ ô Ņ ł ł ťƍíƿŴƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍíƿŴƉ Ō ƎƀƿŴƉł Ņ ò ł ƎƿŴƉ ŏ Ō ķĭƼƿŴƉł ň Ņ ò ł ƎſƦíƿŴƉ Ō ƎƍłƀƿŴƉł Ņ ò ł ƎƍłíƿŴƉ F

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ł ł ň ƈƃĭŁƦƉ Ņ ł ƨƃĭŁƦƉň ł ł ƦƿĭŁƦƉň ł ł ň IJƦƿĭŁƦƉ ô Ņ ł ł ň ťƍíƿĭŁƦƉ Ņ Ņ ł ň ťƍíƿĭŁƦƉ Ō ł ƎƀƿĭŁƦƉň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƿĭŁƦƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƿĭŁƦƉň ň Ņ ò ł ň ƎſƦíƿĭŁƦƉ Ō ł ƎƍłƀƿĭŁƦƉň Ņ ò ł ň ƎƍłíƿĭŁƦƉ G

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

212

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms Table 6. Middle ĥ Verbs

213

ň ‘asked’ have the following peculiarities: Verbs whose middle (i.e., second) letter is ĥ like ĵŤƣ ł (Table 6, Column A): 1. The ƈƖƘ ň a. Past (A1-A10), the vowel of the past is usually š but moves from ĥ back to ň ň (A1), not ĵŤƣ. the previous letter as in ĵŤƣ ł b. Future (A11-A20), the vowel of the future is š and also moves to the ł ł ň (A11), not ĵŤƤƌň . In cases when the suffix previous consonant as in ĵŤƤƌ ň ł ŏ ňň Ō ň ň (A14), ķŴƆŤƤƌ begins with a consonant, an š replaces the š as in ƎƀƆŤƣŁ (A16), etc. c. Imperative (A21-A24) and infinitive (A25), the vowel also moves to the ł ł ň ł ň (A25), not ĵŤƤƉ previous consonant; e.g., ĵŤƣł (A21), not ĵŤƣ; ĵŤƤƉ . d. Present or active participle (A26-37), is regular as in Table 1, but in the ň sing. 3rd masc. (A26), the ĥ is read as if it were a IJ; e.g., ĵŤƣŅ shoyel. e. Passive participle (A38-A49), the vowel moves back to the previous Ō consonant as well; e.g., ƈſŤƣŌ (A38), not ƈſŤƣ. ň ň 2. The ƈƖƘŁĥŔ (Column B): In the entire column, the vowel of ĥ moves back to the ň ň ň ň previous consonant; e.g., ĵĥƦƣĥ (B1), not ĵĥƦƣĥ. Also note that this verb is ŀinitial, and metathesis takes places as in Table 2, Column K. ň ł ł ł Ŕ ň (Columns C & D): They are regular, but the ĥ with a vowel 3. The ƈƖƘ and ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ňł on it is pronounced as if it were a IJ; e.g., ĵŤƣł shayel (C1), ĵŤƤƌ nshayel (C11), ňł Ņł łł ň łł ŏ ŴƆŤƤƉ mshayolu (C25), ĵŤƤƉ mshayel (C26), ĵŤƤƉ mshayal (C38); ĵĥƦƣĥ eshtayal łł ŏ Ņł (D1), ĵĥƦƤƌň neshtayal (D11), ŴƆĥƦƤƉň meshtayolu (D25), etc. ň ł 4. The ƈƖƘĥ (Column E): It is regular, but the vowel of ĥ moves to the previous ň ł ň ł (E1), not ĵŤƣĥ , etc. The passive participle (E38-49) is not consonant; e.g., ĵŤƣĥ attested in the language. ł ł ň (Column F): It is not attested in the language. 5. The ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

214

ĥ

Table 6. Middle Verbs (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) A M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

F

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

M

Infinitive

B

C

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘ

PȨal

EthpȨel

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

B

C

ĵŤƣň ł ň ƦƆŤƣ ƦƆŤƣň ň IJƦƆŤƣ ô ň ň ƦƆŤƣ ŏ ň / ŴƆŤƣň ķŴƆŤƣ ô ò ň ň / ƁƆŤƣ òƎƀíƆŤƣ ô ň ŏ ķĭƦíƆŤƣň ň ò ň ƎſƦíƆŤƣ ł ň / ƎƆŤƣň ƎƍíƆŤƣ ĵŤƤƌłň łň ĵŤƣŁ łň ĵŤƣŁ Ō ňň ƎƀƆŤƣŁ łň ĵŤƣĥ ŏ ňň ķŴƆŤƤƌ Ņ ňò ň ƎƆŤƤƌ ŏ ňň ķŴƆŤƣŁ Ņ ňò ň ƎƆŤƣŁ ĵŤƤƌłň ĵŤƣł Ō ł / ƁƆŤƣł ƎƀƆŤƣ ô ŏ ł ķŴƆŤƣ / ŴƆŤƣ ô ł ò ò ň ł / ƁƆŤƣ ƎƀíƆŤƣ ô ł ł ň ĵŤƤƉ A

ň ň ĵĥƦƣĥ ł Ʀň ƣňĥ ƦƆĥ ň ň ƦƆĥƦƣĥ ň ň IJƦƆĥƦƣĥ ô ň Ʀň ƣňĥ ƦƆĥ ň ň ŏ ň ň / ŴƆĥƦƣĥ ķŴƆĥƦƣĥ ô ò ň ň ò ň ň ň /ƁƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƀíƆĥƦƣĥ ô ŏ ň ň ķĭƦíƆĥƦƣĥ ň ň òň ƎſƦíƆĥƦƣĥ ň ň ł ň ň /ƎƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƍíƆĥƦƣĥ ň ĵĥƦƤƌň ň ň ĵĥƦƣŁ ň ň ĵĥƦƣŁ Ō ň ňŁ ƎƀƆĥƦƣ ň ň ĵĥƦƣĥ ŏ ň ƌň ķŴƆĥƦƤ Ņ ň ò ƌň ƎƆĥƦƤ ŏ ň ňŁ ķŴƆĥƦƣ Ņ ň ò ňŁ ƎƆĥƦƣ ň ĵĥƦƤƌň ł ň ĵĥƦƣĥ ł ň Ō ł ň / ƁƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƀƆĥƦƣĥ ô ł ň ŏ ł ň /ŴƆĥƦƣĥ ķŴƆĥƦƣĥ ô ò ł ň ò ň ł ň / ƁƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƀíƆĥƦƣĥ ô ŏ Ņ ň ŴƆĥƦƤƉ

ň ĵŤƣł ł ł ƦƆŤƣ ň ƦƆŤƣł ňł IJƦƆŤƣ ô ň ł ƦƆŤƣ ň ŏ ň ł / ŴƆŤƣ ķŴƆŤƣ ô ł ò ň ò ň ň ł / ƁƆŤƣ ƎƀíƆŤƣ ô ł ŏ ň ķĭƦíƆŤƣł òň ňł ƎſƦíƆŤƣ ňł ł ň ł / ƎƆŤƣ ƎƍíƆŤƣ ň ĵŤƤƌł ňł ĵŤƣŁ ňł ĵŤƣŁ Ō ł ƎƀƆŤƣŁ ňłň ĵŤƣĥ ŏ Ƥłƌ ķŴƆŤ Ņ łò ƎƆŤƤƌ ŏ ł ķŴƆŤƣŁ Ņ łò ƎƆŤƣŁ ň ĵŤƤƌł ň ĵŤƣł ň Ō ň ł / ƁƆŤƣ ƎƀƆŤƣ ô ł ň ŏ ň ł / ŴƆŤƣ ķŴƆŤƣ ô ł ò ň ò ň ň ł / ƁƆŤƣ ƎƀíƆŤƣ ô ł ŏ Ņł ŴƆŤƤƉ

215

D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

D

ňł ĵŤƣĥ ł ňł ƦƆŤƣĥ ňł ƦƆŤƣĥ ňł IJƦƆŤƣĥ ô ň ňł ƦƆŤƣĥ ł ŏ ň ł / ŴƆŤƣĥ ķŴƆŤƣĥ ô ň ò ł ò ň ň ł / ƁƆŤƣĥ ƎƀíƆŤƣĥ ô ň ŏ ňł ķĭƦíƆŤƣĥ òň ňł ƎſƦíƆŤƣĥ ł ň ł / ƎƆŤƣĥ ňł ƎƍíƆŤƣĥ ĵŤƤƌňł ň ł ĵŤƣŁ ň ł ĵŤƣŁ Ō ň ł ƎƀƆŤƣŁ ňł ĵŤƣĥ ŏ ňł ķŴƆŤƤƌ Ņ ňò ł ƎƆŤƤƌ ŏ ň ł ķŴƆŤƣŁ Ņò ň ł ƎƆŤƣŁ ĵŤƤƌňł ňł ĵŤƣĥ ł Ō ň ł / ƁƆŤƣĥ ƎƀƆŤƣĥ ô ň ł ŏ ň ł / ŴƆŤƣĥ ķŴƆŤƣĥ ô ň ò ł ò ň ň ł / ƁƆŤƣĥ ƎƀíƆŤƣĥ ô ň ŏ Ņ ł ŴƆŤƤƉ E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The EttaphȨal forms are not attested in the language

łł ň ĵĥƦƣĥ ł ł ňĥ ƦƆĥƦƣ łł ň ƦƆĥƦƣĥ łł ň IJƦƆĥƦƣĥ ô ň ł ňĥ ƦƆĥƦƣ łł ň ŏ ł ł ň / ŴƆĥƦƣĥ ķŴƆĥƦƣĥ ô ò łł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƀƆĥƦƣĥ ô ŏ łł ň ķĭƦíƆĥƦƣĥ òň łł ň ƎſƦíƆĥƦƣĥ łł ň ł ł ł ň /ƎƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƍíƆĥƦƣĥ łł ĵĥƦƤƌň łł ň ĵĥƦƣŁ łł ň ĵĥƦƣŁ Ō ł ň ƎƀƆĥƦƣŁ łł ň ĵĥƦƣĥ ŏ ł ň ķŴƆĥƦƤƌ Ņ ł òň ƎƆĥƦƤƌ ŏ ł ň ķŴƆĥƦƣŁ Ņ ł ò ň ƎƆĥƦƣŁ łł ĵĥƦƤƌň łł ň ĵĥƦƣĥ łł ň Ō ł ł ň / ƁƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƀƆĥƦƣĥ ô łł ň ŏ ł ł ň / ŴƆĥƦƣĥ ķŴƆĥƦƣĥ ô ò łł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁôƆĥƦƣĥ ƎƀƆĥƦƣĥ ŏ Ņł ň ŴƆĥƦƤƉ

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

F

216

ĥ

Table 6. Middle Verbs (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

B

C

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘ

PȨal

EthpȨel

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

ň ĵŤƣŅ Ņ ƧŤƣŅ ƦƆłŤƣŅ ł IJƦƆ ô ŤƣŅ Ņ ňŤƣŅ ťƍíƆ Ņ Ņ ŤƣŅ ťƍíƆ ƎƀƆŌŤƣŅ ƎƆŅŤƣŅò ŏ ķĭƼƆŌ ŤƣŅ ň ƎſƦíƆŅ ŤƣŅò ł Ō ŤƣŅ ƎƍƀƆ ł Ņ ŤƣŅò ƎƍíƆ ƈſŤƣŌ Ņ ƨſŤƣŌ ł Ō ƦƇſŤƣ ł IJƦ ô ƇſŤƣŌ Ņ Ō ťƍíƇſŤƣ Ņ Ņ Ō ťƍíƇſŤƣ Ō Ō ƎƀƇſŤƣ Ņò Ō ƎƇſŤƣ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƇſŤƣ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦíƇſŤƣ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƇſŤƣ ł Ņò Ō ƎƍÿƇſŤƣ

A

ň ĵĥƦƤƉň Ņ ł ƧĥƦƤƉň ł Ʀł ƤƉň ƦƆĥ ł Ʀł ƤƉň IJôƦƆĥ ň ťƍŅíƆĥƦƤƉň Ņ ł ň ťƍŅíƆĥƦƤƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƆĥƦƤƉ Ņò ł ň ƎƆĥƦƤƉ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƆĥƦƤƉ ň Ņ ł ň ƎòſƦíƆĥƦƤƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍƀłƆĥƦƤƉ ł Ņ ł ň ƎòƍíƆĥ ƦƤƉ B

ňł ĵŤƤƉ Ņ ƧŤƤłƉ ƦƆłŤƤłƉ ł IJƦƆ ô ŤƤłƉ Ņ ňŤƤƉ ł ťƍíƆ Ņ Ņ ŤƤłƉ ťƍíƆ ƎƀƆŌŤƤłƉ ƎƆŅŤƤłƉò ŏ ķĭƼƆŌ ŤƤłƉ ò ň Ņ ŤƤłƉ ƎſƦíƆ ł Ō ŤƤłƉ ƎƀíƆ ł Ņ ŤƤłƉò ƎƍíƆ ł ĵŤƤł Ɖ Ņ ƧŤƤłƉ ł ƤłƉ ƦƆŤ ł ƤłƉ IJƦƆŤ ô łł ł Ņ ŤƤ ťƍíƆ Ɖ Ņ Ņ ƤłƉ ťƍíƆŤ Ō ƤłƉ ƎƀƆŤ Ņ ƤłƉò ƎƆŤ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƆŤ ƤƉ ňò Ņ ł ƎſƦíƆŤƤƉ ł Ō ƤłƉ ƎƍƀƆŤ ł Ņ ƤłƉò ƎƍíƆŤ C

217

D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

D

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

The EttaphȨal is not attested in the language

38 The AphȨel passive participle is not attested in the language

łł ĵĥƦƤƉň Ņ ł ƧĥƦƤƉň ł ł ň ƦƆĥƦƤƉ ł ł ň IJƦƆĥƦƤƉ ô Ņ łł ň ťƍíƆĥƦƤƉ Ņ Ņ ł ň ťƍíƆĥƦƤƉ Ō ł ň ƎƀƆĥƦƤƉ Ņ ł ƤƉ ò ň ƎƆĥƦ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƆĥƦƤƉ òň Ņ ł ň ƎſƦíƆĥƦƤƉ ł Ō ł ň ƎƍƀƆĥƦƤƉ ł Ņ ĥƦł ƤƉ ò ň ƎƍíƆ

ĵŤƤňƉł Ņ ƧŤƤňƉł ƦƆłŤƤňƉł ł IJƦƆ ô ŤƤňƉł Ņ ŤƤňƉł ťƍíƆ Ņ Ņ ŤƤňƉł ťƍíƆ ƎƀƆŌŤƤňƉł ň ƎƆŅŤƤò Ɖł ŏ ķĭƼƆŌ ŤƤňƉł ň ň ƎſƦíƆŅ ŤƤò Ɖł ł Ō ŤƤňƉł ƎƍƀƆ ł Ņ ŤƤňòƉł ƎƍíƆ

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

E

F

218

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

219

Table 7. Final ĥ Verbs Verbs whose final letter is ĥ have the following peculiarities: ł (Table 7, Columns A & B): 1. The ƈƖƘ a. Past (A1-A10 & B1-B10), the past distinguishes between transitive (Column A) and intransitive (Column B) verbs. They differ as follows: Ņ Ņ (A10), i. Sing. 3rd m. (Row 1): the transitive ends in ťš as in ťƄŨ Ō Ō (B1). while the intransitive ends in IJš as in IJűŶ Ņ Ŕ (A2), but the ii. Sing. 3rd f. (Row 2), the transitive form is ǂŨ ł ň ). ł ň (B2) (compare with ƦŨǁ intransitive is regular as in ƻűŶ ł iii. Sing. 2nd m. & f. (Rows 3 & 4), the transitive has an š on the ł (A3) and IJƼƄŨ second letter as in ƼƄŨ ô ł (A4), while the Ō œ Ō (B3) and IJƻűŶ intransitive keeps the š as in ƻűŶ ô œ Ō (B4), both retain the regular hard Łœ which distinguishes it from singular 1st person ƻűŶ Ŕ Ō (B5), with a soft ŁŔ. Ō iv. Sing. 1st (Row 5), both columns have š as in ƼƄŨ Ŕ Ō Ŕ Ō and ƻűŶ (again, note the soft ŁŔ). ł v. Plurals (Rows 6-10), the transitive has š on the second letter as in ł (A6), while the intransitive has šŌ as in ŴſűŶ Ō (B6). Also note ŴƄŨ ł Ō that the final ĥ disappears in ŴƄŨ (A6) and turns into IJ in ŴſűŶ (B6). b. The rest of the tenses (A11-A49 & B11-A49), both columns are identical, but differ from the regular verb. The contracted participle forms (e.g., A28) always have a hard Łœ even those that have not been indicated. 2. The rest of the forms should be studied from the table as their endings differ substantially from the regular verb.

220

ĥ

Table 7. Final Verbs (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) A M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

25

M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 Infinitive

ł PȨal ƈƖƘ

Transitive (š )

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

Ņ

B

Ņ ťƄŨ Ņ ǂŨ Œ ł ƼƄŨ ł IJƼƄŨ ô ƼƄŨ Ŕ Ō ŏł ł ķĭŤƄŨ / ŴƄŨ ł ò ò ň ł / ƁƄŨ ƎƀƀƄŨ ŏ ł ķĭƼƄŨ ň ò ł ƎſƼƄŨ ł ł ł / ƎƀƄŨ ƎƍƀƄŨ ň ň ťƄũƌ ň ň ťƄŨŁ ň ň ťƄŨŁ ň ň ƎƀƄŨŁ ň ň ťƄŨĥ ŏ ň ķŴƄũƌ Ņ òň ƎƀƄũƌ ŏ ň ķŴƄŨŁ Ņ òň ƎƀƄŨŁ ň ň ťƄũƌ Ō ƁƄŨ Ņ ň Ņ / ƁƄŨ ƎƀƀƄŨ ŏł ł ķĭŤƄŨ / ŴƄŨ Ņ / ƁƄŨ Ņò ò ň ƄŨ Ǝƀƀ Ņ ň ťƄũƉ A

C

Ō

Intransitive (š )

Ō IJűŶ ƻűŶ Ŕł ň Œ Ō ƻűŶ œ Ō IJƻűŶ ƻűŶ Ŕ Ō ŏ Ō /ŴſűŶ Ō ķŴſűŶ ň Ō ò /IJűŶ Ōò ƎƀſűŶ ŏ Ō ķĭƻűŶ òň Ō ƎſƻűŶ ł Ō / ƎſűŶ Ō ƎƍſűŶ ň ň ŧűŷƌ ň ň ŧűŶŁ ň ň ŧűŶŁ ň ň ƎſűŶŁ ň ňĥ ŧűŶ ŏ ň ķĭűŷƌ òň ƎſŅűŷƌ ŏ ňŁ ķĭűŶ ň ƎſŅűŶòŁ ň ň ŧűŷƌ Ō IJűŶ Ņ Ņ / IJűŶ ƎƀſňűŶ ŏł ł ķĭĥűŶ / ĭűŶ Ņ / IJűŶ Ņò ƎƀſòňűŶ Ņ ň ŧűŷƉ B

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ EthpȨel

Ō ň ƁƄŨŁĥ ł ł Łĥň ƼƄŨ œ Ō ň ƼƄŨŁĥ œ Ō ň IJƼƄŨŁĥ ô ň ƼƄŨ Ŕ Ō Łĥ Ō ň ŏ Ō ň / ŴƀƄŨŁĥ ķŴƀƄŨŁĥ Ō ň ò ň Ō ň / ƁòƄŨŁĥ ƎƀƀƄŨŁĥ ŏ Ō ň ķĭƼƄŨŁĥ ň ò Ō ň ƎſƼƄŨŁĥ Ō ň ł Ō ň / ƎƀƄŨŁĥ ƎƍƀƄŨŁĥ ň ň ťƄŨƦƌ ň ň ťƄŨŁŁ ň ň ťƄŨŁŁ ň ŁŁň ƎƀƄŨ ň ň ťƄŨŁĥ ŏ Ʀƌň ķŴƄŨ ƎƀŅƄòŨłƦƌň ň ķŴƄŏŨŁŁ Ņ ò ł ŁŁň ƎƀƄŨ ň ň ťƄŨƦƌ ł ň ƁƄŨŁĥ Ņ ň ƁƄŨŁĥ ô ł ň / ŴƄŨŁĥ ł ň ķĭŏŤƄŨŁĥ Ņ ò ň / ƁƄŨŁĥ Ņò ň ƎƀƀňƄŨŁĥ ň ŏŅ ŴƀƄŨƦƉ C

221

D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

Ō ł ƁƄŨ ł ł ƼƄŨ œ Ō ł ƼƄŨ œ Ō ł IJƼƄŨ ô ƼƄŨ Ŕ Ō ł Ō ł ŏ Ō ł / ŴƀƄŨ ķŴƀƄŨ ò ň Ō ł / ƁƄŨ ò Ō ł ƎƀƀƄŨ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƄŨ òň Ō ł ƎſƼƄŨ Ō ł ł Ō ł / ƎƀƄŨ ƎƍƀƄŨ ň ł ťƄũƌ ň ł ťƄŨŁ ň ł ťƄŨŁ ň ł ƎƀƄŨŁ ň łň ťƄŨĥ ŏ ł ķŴƄũƌ Ņò ł ƎƀƄũƌ ŏ ł ķŴƄŨŁ Ņò ł ƎƀƄŨŁ ň ł ťƄũƌ Ņ ł ťƄŨ Ņ ł ƁƄŨ ŏł ł ł ķĭŤƄŨ / ŴƄŨł ò ň Ņ ł / ƁƄŨ ò Ņ ł ƎƀƀƄŨ ŏŅ ł ŴƀƄũƉ D

Ō ł ň ƁƄŨŁĥ ł ł Łĥň ƼƄŨ œ Ō ł ň ƼƄŨŁĥ œ Ō ł ň IJƼƄŨŁĥ ô ň ƼƄŨ Ŕ Ō ł Łĥ Ō ł ň ŏ Ō ł ň / ŴƀƄŨŁĥ ķŴƀƄŨŁĥ Ō ł ň / ƁƄŨŁĥ ò ň ƄŨŁĥ ò Ō ł ň Ǝƀƀ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƄŨŁĥ òň Ō ł ň ƎſƼƄŨŁĥ Ō ł ň ł Ō ł ň / ƎƀƄŨŁĥ ƎƍƀƄŨŁĥ ň ł ň ťƄŨƦƌ ň ł ň ťƄŨŁŁ ň ł ň ťƄŨŁŁ ň ł ň ƎƀƄŨŁŁ ň ł ň ťƄŨŁĥ ŏ ł ň ķŴƄŨƦƌ Ņò ł ň ƎƀƄŨƦƌ ŏ ł ň ķŴƄŨŁŁ Ņò ł ň ƎƀƄŨŁŁ ň ł ň ťƄŨƦƌ Ņ ł ň ťƄŨŁĥ Ņ ł ň ƁƄŨŁĥ ŏł ł ň ł ł ň ķĭŤƄŨŁĥ / ŴƄŨŁĥ ò ň Ņ ł ň / ƁƄŨŁĥ ò Ņ ł ň ƎƀƀƄŨŁĥ ŏŅ ł ň ŴƀƄŨƦƉ E

Ō ł ƁƄŨĥ ł ł ƼƄŨĥ œ Ō ł ƼƄŨĥ œ Ō ł IJƼƄŨĥ ô ł ƼƄŨĥ Ŕ Ō Ō ł ŏ Ō Ũĥł / ŴƀƄŨĥ ķŴƀƄ ô Ō ł / ƁòƄŨĥ Ō ł ò ň ƄŨĥ Ǝƀƀ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƄŨĥ òň Ō ł ƎſƼƄŨĥ Ō ł ł Ō ł / ƎƀƄŨĥ ƎƍƀƄŨĥ ň ł ťƄũƌ ň ł ťƄŨŁ ň ł ťƄŨŁ ň ł ƎƀƄŨŁ ň ł ťƄŨĥ ŏ ł ķŴƄũƌ Ņ òł ƎƀƄũƌ ŏ ł ķŴƄŨŁ Ņò ł ƎƀƄŨŁ ň ł ťƄũƌ Ņ ł ťƄŨĥ Ņ ł ƁƄŨĥ ŏł ł ł ł ķĭŤƄŨĥ / ŴƄŨĥ ò ň Ņ ł / ƁƄŨĥ ò Ņ ł ƎƀƀƄŨĥ ŏŅ ł ŴƀƄũƉ F

Ō ł ň ƁƄŨŁŁĥ ł ł ň ƼƄŨŁŁĥ œ Ō ł ň ƼƄŨŁŁĥ œ Ō ł ň IJƼƄŨŁŁĥ ô ł ň ƼƄŨŁŁĥ Ŕ Ō Ō ł ň ŏ Ō ł ň / ŴƀƄŨŁŁĥ ķŴƀƄŨŁŁĥ ò ň Ō ł ň / ƁƄŨŁŁĥ ò Ō ł ň ƎƀƀƄŨŁŁĥ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƄŨŁŁĥ òň Ō ł ň ƎſƼƄŨŁŁĥ Ō ł ň ł Ō ł ň / ƎƀƄŨŁŁĥ ƎƍƀƄŨŁŁĥ ň ł ň ťƄŨŁƦƌ ň łň ťƄŨŁŁ ň łň ťƄŨŁŁ ň łň ƎƀƄŨŁŁ ň ł ň ťƄŨŁŁĥ ŏ ł ň ķŴƄŨŁƦƌ Ņ òł ň ƎƀƄŨŁƦƌ łň ķŴƄŏŨŁŁ Ņò łň ƎƀƄŨŁŁ ň ł ň ťƄŨŁƦƌ Ņ ł ň ťƄŨŁŁĥ Ņ ł ň ƁƄŨŁŁĥ ô ŏł ł ň ł ł ň ķĭŤƄŨŁŁĥ / ŴƄŨŁŁĥ Ņòł ň òƎƀƀƄŨŁŁĥ ň Ņ ò ł ň / ƁƄŨŁŁĥ ŏŅ ł ň ŴƀƄŨŁƦƉ G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

222

ĥ

Table 7. Final Verbs (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

29

Present Tense (Active Participle)

28

Ņ

PȨalƈƖƘ

Transitive (š ) 3rd

27

C

ł

M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

B

2nd

1st

Ō

Intransitive (š )

ň Ņ ťƄŨ Ņ Ņ ťƀƄŨ ň Ņ œ ƄŨ Ƽ œł Ņ IJôƼƄŨ Ņň Ņ ťƍƄŨ ŅŅ Ņ ťƍƀƄŨ ň Ņ ƎƀƄŨ Ņò Ņ ƎƀƄŨ ŏœ ň Ņ ķĭƼƄŨ ňœŅ ò Ņ ƎſƼƄŨ ł ň Ņ ƎƍƀƄŨ łŅ ò Ņ ƎƍƀƄŨ ň ťƄŨ

M F M F M F M F M F M F M

ňŅ ŧűŶ Ņ Ņ ťſűŶ œ ňŅ ƻűŶ œł Ņ IJôƻűŶ Ņň Ņ ljűŶ ŅŅ Ņ ťƍſűŶ ňŅ ƎſűŶ Ņò Ņ ƎſűŶ ŏœ ň Ņ ķĭƻűŶ ň òŅ Ǝſƻœ Ņ űŶ ł ňŅ ƎƍſűŶ òŅ ƎƍſłŅűŶ ň ŧűŶ Ņ ł ťſűŶ œ ň ƻűŶ œŅ ł IJôƻűŶ Ņň ljűŶ ŅŅ ł ťƍſűŶ ň ƎſűŶ òł ƎſŅűŶ ŏœ ň ķĭƻűŶ ň òł Ǝſƻœ Ņ űŶ ł ň ƎƍſűŶ òł ƎƍſłŅűŶ

Ņ ł ťƀƄŨ œ ň ƼƄŨ œŅ ł IJôƼƄŨ Ņň ťƍƄŨ ŅŅ ł ťƍƀƄŨ ň ƎƀƄŨ Ņò ł ƎƀƄŨ ŏœ ň ķĭƼƄŨ ňœŅ ò ł ƎſƼƄŨ ł ň ƎƍƀƄŨ łŅ ò ł ƎƍƀƄŨ

F M F M F M F M F M F A

B

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ EthpȨel

ň ƦƉň ťƄŨ Ņ ł ň ťƀƄŨƦƉ ň ƦƉň ƼƄŨ ł ł ň IJôƼƄŨƦƉ ň ƦƉň ťƍŅƄŨ Ņ ł ň ťƍŅƀƄŨƦƉ ň ƦƉň ƎƀƄŨ Ņ ò ł ƦƉň ƎƀƄŨ ŏ ň ķĭƼƄŨ ƦƉň ň Ņò ł ň ƎòſƼƄŨ ƦƉ ň ƦƉň ƎƍƀłƄŨ Ņ ò ł ƦƉň ƎƍłƀƄŨ C

223

D

E

F

G

ň ł ƈƖƘ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ň ł ťƄũƉ Ņ ł ťƀƄũƉ œ ň ł ƼƄũƉ œ ł ũƉ ł IJôƼƄ Ņň ł ťƍƄũƉ ŅŅ ł ťƍƀƄũƉ ň ł ƎƀƄũƉ Ņ ł ò ƎƀƄũƉ ŏ ň ł ķĭƼƄũƉ òň Ņ ł ƎſƼƄũƉ ł ň ł ƎƍƀƄũƉ łŅ ł ò ƎƍƀƄũƉ ł ł ƁƄũƉ Ņ ł ťƀƄũƉ ň ł ƼƄũƉ IJƼƄũƉ ô ł ł Ņł ł ťƍƄũƉ ł ťƍŅƀŅƄũƉ ň ł ƎƀƄũƉ ò łƉ ƎƀŅƄũ ŏ ň ł ķĭƼƄũƉ ň ò ł ƎſƼŅ ƄũƉ ň ł ƎƍłƀƄũƉ ò łƉ ƎƍłƀŅƄũ D

ł ň ťƄňŨƦƉ Ņ ł ň ťƀƄŨƦƉ ň ł ň ƼƄŨƦƉ ň IJƼƄŨƦƉ ô ł ł Ņň ł ň ťƍƄŨƦƉ ŅŅ ł ň ťƍƀƄŨƦƉ ň ł ň ƎƀƄŨƦƉ Ņò ł ň ƎƀƄŨƦƉ ŏ ň ł ň ķĭƼƄŨƦƉ ň Ņ ł ň ƎòſƼƄŨƦƉ ň ł ň ƎƍłƀƄŨƦƉ Ņò ł ň ƎƍłƀƄŨƦƉ E

ň ł ťƄũƉ Ņ ł ťƀƄũƉ œ ň ł ƼƄũƉ œł ł IJôƼƄũƉ Ņň ł ťƍƄũƉ ŅŅ ł ťƍƀƄũƉ ň ł ƎƀƄũƉ Ņò ł ƎƀƄũƉ ŏ ň ł ķĭƼƄũƉ ň Ņò ł ƎſƼƄũƉ ł ň ł ƎƍƀƄũƉ łŅ ò ł ƎƍƀƄũƉ ł ł ƁƄũƉ Ņ ł ťƀƄũƉ ň ł ƼƄũƉ IJôƼłƄũƉł Ņ ł ł ťƍƀƄũƉ ŅŅ ł ťƍƀƄũƉ ň ł ƎƀƄũƉ Ņò ł ƎƀƄũƉ ŏ ň ł ķĭƼƄũƉ ň Ņò ł ƎſƼƄũ Ɖ ň ł ƎƍłƀƄũƉ Ņò ł ƎƍłƀƄũƉ F

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ň ł ň ťƄŨŁƦƉ Ņ ł ň ťƀƄŨŁƦƉ ň ł ň ƼƄŨŁƦƉ ł ł ň IJôƼƄŨŁƦƉ Ņň ł ň ťƍƄŨŁƦƉ ŅŅ ł ň ťƍƀƄŨŁƦƉ ň ł ň ƎƀƄŨŁƦƉ Ņò ł ň ƎƀƄŨŁƦƉ ŏ ň ł ň ķĭƼƄŨŁƦƉ ň Ņò ł ň ƎſƼƄŨŁƦƉ ň ł ň ƎƍłƀƄŨŁƦƉ Ņò ł ň ƎƍłƀƄŨŁƦƉ G

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

224

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

225

Table 8. Initial IJ Verbs Verbs whose initial letter is IJ have the following peculiarities: ł (Column A): 1. The ƈƖƘ Ō ň a. Past (A1-A10), the initial IJ takes an š vowel as in űƇſŌ (A1), with the exception of ŁűÿƇſ Ŕ ł ň (A2) and ŁűÿƇſ Ŕ ň ň (A5) which are regular. Ō b. Future (A11-A20) and infinitive (A25), the š is retained but the IJ turns ň ł ł into an ĥ as in űƆŤƌŌ (A11) and űƆŤƉŌ (A25). Some verbs have an š ň Ō Ō ł Ō and ħƻ instead of š; two that come to mind are ĺűſ . The future of ňň ň ň ň ł ł the former is ĺűƌ, ĺĪŁ, etc., and that of the latter is ħƦƌň , ħŁŁ, etc. ł ň ł ň and ħƦƉ Their infinitives are also peculiar: ĺűƉ . ł Ō c. Imperative (A21-A24), the initial IJ is retained as in űƇſŌ (A21). Again, ň ň Ō ł and ħƻ the imperatives of ĺűſ are peculiar: ĺĪł for the former, and ħŁ for the latter. d. Present or active participle (A26-A37), these are regular. e. Passive participle (A38-A49), these follow the regular verb but with an Ō Ō (A38). šŌ on the IJ as in űƀƇſ ň ň 2. The ƈƖƘŁĥ (Column B): in cases when the IJ does not have a vowel (if one Ō imposes on it the regular paradigms) then it takes an š, which we place on the ň Ō ň ň ň previous consonant as in űƇſŁĥ (B1), compare with regular ħǁŁĥ. ň ł ł ł ň (Column D) are regular. 3. The ƈƖƘ (Column C) and ƈƖƘŁĥ ň ł ł ł ň (Column F): The initial IJ turns into ĭ as in 4. The ƈƖƘĥ (Column E) and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ň ł (E1) and űƆĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň (F1). As such, these are conjugated like the ĥ-initial verbs űƆĭĥ ň Ō ‘wail’, however, retain ň Ō ‘suck’ and džſ in Table 5, Columns E & F. The verbs ơƍſ łň ł ň the IJ as in ơƍſĥ and džſĥ.

226 Table 8. Initial

IJ Verbs (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) A

M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

Infinitive

B

C

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘ

PȨal

EthpȨel

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

űƇňſŌ ŁűłíƇſň ŁűƇňſŌ ň IJŁű ô ƇſŌ ŁűňíƇſň ň ķĭűŏíƇňſŌ / ĭű ô ƇſŌ ň ò ň íƇňſŌ / IJű Ǝſű ô ò íƇſŌ ŏ ķĭŁűƇňſŌ ň ƎſŁűò íƇňſŌ ƎƌűłƇňſŌ / ķűƇňſŌ űƆłŤƌŌ Ō űƆłĥŁ Ō űƆłĥŁ Ō ƎſűŌíƆĥŁ Ō űƇłſĥ ķĭűŏíƆŤƌŌ ķűŅíƆòŤƌŌ Ō ķĭűŏíƆĥŁ Ō ķűŅíƆòĥŁ űƆłŤƌŌ űƇłſŌ ł ƎſűŌíƇłſŌ / IJű ô ƇſŌ ł ķĭűŏíƇłſŌ / ĭű ô ƇſŌ ł ò ň íƇłſŌ / IJű Ǝſű ô ò íƇſŌ ł Ō űƆŤƉ A

Ōň űƇňſŁĥ ň ŁűłíƇſłŁĥ Ōň ŁűƇňſŁĥ ň Ōň IJŁ ô űƇſŁĥ ň ŁűňíƇſłŁĥ Ōň Ōň ķĭűŏíƇňſŁĥ / ĭôűƇňſŁĥ Ōň Ōň ƎſòűňíƇňſŁĥ / IJôűòíƇňſŁĥ ŏ Ōň ķĭŁűƇňſŁĥ ň Ōň ƎſŁűòíƇňſŁĥ Ōň Ōň ƎƌłűƇňſŁĥ / ķűƇňſŁĥ Ō űƇňſƦƌň Ōň űƇňſŁŁ Ōň űƇňſŁŁ ň ƎſűŌíƇſłŁŁ Ōň űƇňſŁĥ ķĭűŏíƇſłƦƌň ķűŅíƇòſłƦƌň ň ķĭűŏíƇſłŁŁ ň ķűŅíƇòſłŁŁ Ō űƇňſƦƌň ł ň űƇſŁĥ ł ň / IJôűƇſŁĥ ł ň ƎſűŌíƇſŁĥ ł ň / ĭôűƇſłŁĥň ķĭűŏíƇſŁĥ ł ň ł ň / IJôűòíƇſŁĥ ƎſòűňíƇſŁĥ Ņ Ō ň ĭűŏíƇſƦƉ B

űƇňſł ŁűłíƇſł ŁűƇňſł ň IJŁ ô űƇſł ŁűňíƇſł ķĭűŏíƇňſł / ĭôűƇňſł ƎſòűňíƇňſł / IJôűòíƇňſł ŏ ķĭŁűƇňſł ò ň űƇňſł ƎſŁ ƎƌłűƇňſł / ķűƇňſł űƇňƀłƌ ł űƇňſŁ ł űƇňſŁ ł ƎſűŌíƇſŁ ň łň űƇſĥ ķĭűŏíƇƀƌł òł ķűŅíƇƀƌ ķĭűŏíƇſłŁ ķűŅíƇòſłŁ ň łƌ űƇƀ űƇňſł ƎſűŌíƇňſł / IJôűƇňſł ķĭűŏíƇňſł / ĭôűƇňſł ƎſòűňíƇňſł / IJôűòíƇňſł ł ŏ Ņ ƀƉ ĭűíƇ C

227

D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ł Łĥň űƇſ ł ł Łĥň ŁűíƇſ ł ł Łĥň ŁűƇſ ł ň IJŁ ô űƇſł Łĥ ň ł Łĥň ŁűíƇſ ł ł Łĥň / ĭűƇſ ł ň ķĭűŏíƇſ ô ł Łĥ ł ł Łĥň / IJűòíƇſ ł ň ƎſòűňíƇſ ô ł Łĥ ŏ łł ň ķĭŁűƇſ Łĥ ł ł Łĥň òƎſŁň űƇſ ł ł Łĥň / ķűƇſ ł ł Łĥň ƎƌłűƇſ ł ł Ʀƌň űƇſ ł ł ŁŁň űƇſ ł ł ŁŁň űƇſ Ō ł ŁŁň ƎſűíƇſ ł ł Łĥň űƇſ ŏ ł Ʀƌň ķĭűíƇſ ò ł Ʀƌň ķűŅíƇſ ŏ ł ŁŁň ķĭűíƇſ Ņò ł ŁŁň ķűíƇſ ł ł Ʀƌň űƇſ ł ł Łĥň űƇſ ł ł Łĥň / IJűƇſ ł ň ƎſűŌíƇſ ô ł Łĥ ł ł Łĥň / ĭűƇſ ł ň ķĭűŏíƇſ ô ł Łĥ ł ł Łĥň / IJűòíƇſ ł ň ƎſòűňíƇſ ô ł Łĥ ł ň ĭűŏíƇŅſƦƉ D

ł űƆňĭĥ ł ĭĥł ŁűíƆ ł ŁűƆňĭĥ ň ł IJŁ ô űƆĭĥ ň ĭĥł ŁűíƆ ł ł ķĭűŏíƆňĭĥ / ĭôűƆňĭĥ ł ł ƎſòűňíƆňĭĥ / IJôűòíƆňĭĥ ŏ ł ķĭŁűƆňĭĥ ò ň űƆňĭĥł ƎſŁ ł ł ƎƌłűƆňĭĥ / ķűƆňĭĥ űƆňŴƌł ł űƆňĭŁ ł űƆňĭŁ Ō ĭŁł ƎſűíƆ ł űƆňĭĥ ŏ Ŵƌł ķĭűíƆ ķűŅíƆòŴƌł ŏ ĭŁł ķĭűíƆ ł ķűŅíƆòĭŁ űƆňŴƌł ł űƆňĭĥ ł ł ƎſűŌíƆňĭĥ / IJôűƆňĭĥ ł ł ķĭűŏíƆňĭĥ / ĭôűƆňĭĥ ł ł ƎſòűňíƆňĭĥ / IJôűòíƆňĭĥ ĭűŏíƆŅŴƉł E

ł ň űƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ł ĭŁŁĥ ŁűíƆ ł ň ŁűƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ł ň IJŁ ô űƆĭŁŁĥ ł ň ň ĭŁŁĥ ŁűíƆ ł ň ł ň ķĭűŏíƆłĭŁŁĥ / ĭôűƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ƎſòűňíƆłĭŁŁĥ/ IJôűòíƆłĭŁŁĥ ŏ ł ň ķĭŁűƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ò ň űƆłĭŁŁĥ ƎſŁ ł ň ł ň ƎƌłűƆłĭŁŁĥ/ ķűƆłĭŁŁĥ ł űƆłĭŁƦƌň łň űƆłĭŁŁ łň űƆłĭŁŁ łň Ō ĭŁŁ ƎſűíƆ ł ň űƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ŏ ĭŁƦƌ ķĭűíƆ ł ķűŅíƆòĭŁƦƌň łň ŏ ĭŁŁ ķĭűíƆ łň Ņò ĭŁŁ ķűíƆ ł űƆłĭŁƦƌň ł ň űƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ƎſűŌíƆłĭŁŁĥ / IJôűƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ķĭűŏíƆłĭŁŁĥ / ĭôűƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ň ł ň ƎſòűňíƆłĭŁŁĥ / IJôűòíƆłĭŁŁĥ ł ĭűŏíƆŅĭŁƦƉň F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

228 Table 8. Initial

IJ Verbs (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A

M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

2nd

1st

B

C

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘ

PȨal

EthpȨel

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

ňŅ űƇſ Ņ Ņ ŧűíƇſ ł Ņ ŁűíƇſ ł Ņ IJŁ ô űíƇſ ňŅ ljŅűƇſ Ņ Ņ ljŅűíƇſ Ō Ņ ƎſűíƇſ òŅ ķűŅíƇſ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƻűíƇſ ň òŅ ƎſŁűŅíƇſ Ō Ņ ƎƍſłűíƇſ òŅ ƎƌłűŅíƇſ ŌŌ űƀƇſ ŌŌ ŧűŅƀƇſ ŌŌ ŁűłƀƇſ Ō IJŁ ô űłƀƇſŌ ŌŌ ljŅűƀƇſ ŌŌ ljŅűŅƀƇſ ŌŌ ƎſűŌƀƇſ ŌŌ ķűŅƀòíƇſ ŏ ķĭƻűŌƀƇŌſŌ ň ŌŌ ƎſŁűŅƀòíƇſ ŌŌ ƎƍſłűŌƀƇſ ŌŌ ƎƌłűŅƀòíƇſ

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F A

Ō ň ň ƦƉ űƇſ Ņ ł ƦƉň ŧűíƇſ ł ł ƦƉň ŁűíƇſ ł ł ƦƉň IJôŁűíƇſ Ō ň ň ƦƉ ljŅűƇſ Ņ ł ƦƉň ljŅűíƇſ Ō ł ƦƉň ƎſűíƇſ Ņò ł ƦƉň ķűíƇſ ŏ Ō ł ň ƦƉ ķĭƻűíƇſ ňò Ņ ł ň ƎſŁűíƇſƦƉ Ō ł ƦƉň ƎƍſłűíƇſ łŅ ł ň ƦƉ ƎòƌűíƇſ B

ň łƉ űƇƀ Ņ łƉ ŧűíƇƀ ł łƉ ŁűíƇƀ ł łƉ IJŁ ô űíƇƀ ň łƉ ljŅűƇƀ Ņ łƉ ljŅűíƇƀ Ō łƉ ƎſűíƇƀ Ņ ł Ɖò ķűíƇƀ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƻűíƇƀ Ɖ ňò Ņ ł ƎſŁűíƇƀƉ Ō łƉ ƎƍſłűíƇƀ Ņ ł Ɖò ƎƌłűíƇƀ ł łƉ űƇƀ Ņ łƉ ŧűíƇƀ ł łƉ ŁűíƇƀ ł łƉ IJŁ ô űíƇƀ ł łƉ ljŅűƇƀ Ņ łƉ ljŅűíƇƀ Ō łƉ ƎſűíƇƀ Ņ ł Ɖò ķűíƇƀ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƻűíƇƀ Ɖ ňò Ņ ł ƎſŁűíƇƀƉ Ō łƉ ƎƍłſűíƇƀ Ņ ł Ɖò ƎƌłűíƇƀ C

229

D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ł ƦƉň űƇſ Ņ ł ƦƉň ŧűíƇſ ł ł ƦƉň ŁűíƇſ ł ł ƦƉň IJŁ ô űíƇſ ł ł ƦƉň ljŅűƇſ Ņ ł ƦƉň ljŅűíƇſ Ō ł ƦƉň ƎſűíƇſ Ņò ł ƦƉň ķűíƇſ ŏ Ō ł ň ƦƉ ķĭƻűíƇſ ňò Ņ ł ň ƎſŁűíƇſƦƉ Ō ł ƦƉň ƎƍłſűíƇſ ò ł ƦƉň ƎƌłűŅíƇſ D

űƆňŴƉł Ņ ŴƉł ŧűíƆ ł ŴƉł ŁűíƆ ł ŴƉł IJŁ ô űíƆ ljŅűƆňŴƉł Ņ ŴƉł ljŅűíƆ Ō ŴƉł ƎſűíƆ ķűŅíƆòŴƉł ŏ Ō ķĭƻűíƆ ŴƉł ň ƎſŁűŅíƆòŴƉł Ō ŴƉł ƎƍſłűíƆ ƎƌłűŅíƆòŴƉł űƆłŴƉł Ņ ŴƉł ŧűíƆ ł ŴƉł ŁűíƆ ł ŴƉł IJŁ ô űíƆ ljŅűƆłŴƉł Ņ ŴƉł ljŅűíƆ Ō ŴƉł ƎſűíƆ ķűŅíƆòŴƉł ŏ Ō ķĭƻűíƆ ŴƉł ň ƎſŁűŅíƆòŴƉł Ō ŴƉł ƎƍłſűíƆ ƎƌłűŅíƆòŴƉł E

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

ł űƆłĭŁƦƉň ł ň Ņ ĭŁƦƉ ŧűíƆ ł ň ł ĭŁƦƉ ŁűíƆ ł ň ł ĭŁƦƉ IJŁ ô űíƆ ł ljŅűƆłĭŁƦƉň ł ň Ņ ĭŁƦƉ ljŅűíƆ ł ň Ō ĭŁƦƉ ƎſűíƆ ł ķűŅíƆòĭŁƦƉň ŏ Ō ł ň ĭŁƦƉ ķĭƻűíƆ ňŅ ò ł ň ƎſŁűíƆĭŁƦƉ ł ň Ō ĭŁƦƉ ƎƍłſűíƆ ł ƎƌłűŅíƆòĭŁƦƉň F

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

230

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

231

Table 9. Middle ĭ/IJ Verbs Middle ĭ verbs are called as such because they originally may have had a ĭ in the middle. These verbs now appear as two-letters; e.g., ƋƟŅ ‘rose up’ where ľ is the first letter and Ķ is the third letter. The second letter, the ĭ, is no longer there. However, if you want to look up ƋƟŅ in the dictionary, you have to look it up under ĶŴƟ. These verbs exhibit the following characteristics in their paradigm: ł (Columns A & B): 1. The ƈƖƘ Ņ ł Ņ (A2), etc. The only a. Past (A1-A10), the vowel is š as in ƋƟŅ (A1), ƦƊƟ Ō exception is the verb ƼƉ Ŕ Ō where the vowel is IJš as shown in B1-B10. ŏ ŏ b. Future (A11-A20) and imperative (A21-A24), the vowel is ĭš as in ĶŴƠƌ Ō (B11) as (A11). The only exception is the verb ƋƏŅ whose future is ƋƀƐƌ shown in B11-B24. The prefixes take no vowel apart from the singular ň ŏň 1st person which takes š as in ĶŴƟĥ (A15). Ņ Ņ . c. Infinitive (A25), has the vowel š with a Ɖ prefix; e.g., ƋƠƉ d. Present or active participle (A26-A37), the 3rd sing. masc. has ĥ in the ň middle which is pronounced as if it were a IJ; e.g., ĶŤƟŅ qoyem (A26). The Ņ Ņ (A27) and ƎƀƊƀƟ Ō Ņ (A32). rest of the forms have IJ as in ťƊƀƟ Ō e. Passive participle (A38-A49), has the vowel IJš as in ƋƀƟŌ (A38). ň ň ł ň ł 2. The ƈƖƘŁĥ does not exist. The ƈƖƘŁŁĥ is used instead. ň ł ł ň ł 3. The ƈƖƘ (Column C) and ƈƖƘŁĥ (Column D): The middle letter appears as a ň ł ň ł (C1), compare with ħǁ IJ and is conjugated like the regular verb; e.g., ƋƀƟ ; ň ł ł ň ł ł ƋƀƟŁĥ (D1), compare with ħǁŁĥ. Ō ň ł Ō ł . The future, apart 4. The ƈƖƘĥ (Column E): The middle vowel is IJš as in ƋƀƟĥ Ō ł (E15), has no vowel on the prefix. The passive from sing. 1st person ƋƀƟĥ Ņ Ņ (E38). participles (E38-E49) have š as in ƋƠƉ ň ł ň ł ł 5. The ƈƖƘŁŁĥ (Column F): It follows the vocalization of the ƈƖƘĥ.

232

ĭIJ

Table 9. Middle / Verbs (i. Past, Future, Imperative, and Infinitive) A M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

ƋƟŅ

Infinitive

B

ł ƈƖƘ

ƋƟŅ ł Ņ ƦƊƟ ƦƊƟŅ Ņ IJƦƊƟ ô ň Ņ ƦƊƟ Ņ ŏ Ņ / ŴƊƟ ķŴƊƟ ô ò Ņ ò ň Ņ / ƁƊƟ ƎƀƊƟ ô ŏ ķĭƦƊƟŅ ň ò Ņ ƎſƦƊƟ ł Ņ / ƎƊƟŅ ƎƍƊƟ ĶŴƠƌŏ ŏ ĶŴƟŁ ŏ ĶŴƟŁ Ō ŏ ƎƀƉŴƟŁ ň ĶŴƟŏĥ ŏ ŏ ķŴƉŴƠƌ Ņò ŏ ƎƉŴƠƌ ŏ ŏ ķŴƉŴƟŁ Ņò ŏ ƎƉŴƟŁ ĶŴƠƌŏ ĶŴƟŏ ŏ Ō ŏ / ƁƉŴƟ ƎƀƉŴƟ ô ŏ ŏ ŏ / ŴƉŴƟ ķŴƉŴƟ ô ò ŏ ò ň ŏ / ƁƉŴƟ ƎƀƉŴƟ ô Ņ ƋƠƉ A

ƼƉŌ ƼƉŌ ł ŁƼƉŌ ŁƼƉŌ IJŁ ô ƼƉŌ ň ŁƼƉŌ ŏ ķĭƼƉŌ / ĭôƼƉŌ ň ò Ō ƎſòƼƉŌ /IJôƼƉ ŏ Ō ķĭŁƼƉ ò ň ƼƉŌ ƎſŁ ƎƌłƼƉŌ /ķƼƉŌ Ō ƋƀƐƌ Ō ƋƀƏŁ Ō ƋƀƏŁ Ō Ō ƎƀƊƀƏŁ ň ƋƀƏŌĥ ŏ Ō ķŴƊƀƐƌ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƐƌ ŏ Ō ķŴƊƀƏŁ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƏŁ Ō ƋƀƐƌ ƋƀƏŌ Ō Ō /ƁôƊƀƏŌ ƎƀƊƀƏ ŏ Ō / ŴôƊƀƏŌ ķŴƊƀƏ ò ň Ō /ƁƊƀƏ ƎƀòƊƀƏ ô Ō ŏ Ņ ŴƊƐƉ ƋƏŅ

/

B

C

ň ł ƈƖƘ PaȨel / PaȨȨel

ň ł ƋƀƟ ł ł ƦƊƀƟ ň ł ƦƊƀƟ ł IJƦƊƀƟ ô ň ň ł ƦƊƀƟ ŏ ň ł / ŴôƊƀƟ ň ł ķŴƊƀƟ ò ł ò ň ň ł / ƁƊƀƟ ƎƀƊƀƟ ô ň ŏ ň ł ķĭƦƊƀƟ òň ň ł ƎſƦƊƀƟ ł ň ł / ƎƊƀƟ ň ł ƎƍƊƀƟ ň ł ƋƀƠƌ ň ł ƋƀƟŁ ň ł ƋƀƟŁ Ō ł ƎƀƊƀƟŁ ň łň ƋƀƟĥ ŏ Ơłƌ ķŴƊƀ Ņò ł ƎƊƀƠƌ ŏ ł ķŴƊƀƟŁ Ņò ł ƎƊƀƟŁ ň ł ƋƀƠƌ ň ł ƋƀƟ ł Ō ň ł / ƁƊƀƟ ƎƀƊƀƟ ô ň ł ŏ ň ł / ŴƊƀƟ ķŴƊƀƟ ô ň ò ł ò ň ň ł / ƁƊƀƟ ƎƀƊƀƟ ô ň ŴƊŏƀŅƠłƉ C

233

D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ł ň ƋƀƟŁĥ ł ł ňĥ ƦƊƀƟŁ ł ł ň ƦƊƀƟŁĥ ł ň IJƦƊƀƟŁĥ ô ł ň ł ňĥ ƦƊƀƟŁ ł ň ŏ ł ł ň / ŴƊƀƟŁĥ ķŴƊƀƟŁĥ ô ł ò ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƊƀƟŁĥ ƎƀƊƀƟŁĥ ô ł ŏ ł ł ň ķĭƦƊƀƟŁĥ òň ł ł ň ƎſƦƊƀƟŁĥ ł ł ł ň /ƎƊƀƟŁĥ ł ł ň ƎƍƊƀƟŁĥ ł ł ň ƋƀƟƦƌ ł ł ň ƋƀƟŁŁ ł ł ň ƋƀƟŁŁ Ō ł ň ƎƀƊƀƟŁŁ ł ł ň ƋƀƟŁĥ ŏ ł ň ķŴƊƀƟƦƌ ł ň Ņ ò ƟƦƌ ƎƊƀ ŏ ł ň ķŴƊƀƟŁŁ ò ł ň ƎƊŅƀƟŁŁ ł ł ň ƋƀƟƦƌ ł ł ň ƋƀƟŁĥ ł ň Ō ł ł ň / ƁƊƀƟŁĥ ƎƀƊƀƟŁĥ ô ł ł ň ŏ ł ł ň / ŴƊƀƟŁĥ ķŴƊƀƟŁĥ ô ł ò ł ň ò ň ł ł ň / ƁƊƀƟŁĥ ƎƀƊƀƟŁĥ ô ł ł Ɖň ŴƊŏƀŅƟƦ D

ł ƋƀƟĥŌ ł Ōł ƦƊƀƟĥ ł ƦƊƀƟĥŌ Ōł IJƦƊƀƟĥ ô ň Ōł ƦƊƀƟĥ Ōł ŏ Ō ł / ŴƊƀƟĥ ķŴƊƀƟĥ ô ò Ōł ò ň Ō ł / ƁƊƀƟĥ ƎƀƊƀƟĥ ô ł ŏ ķĭƦƊƀƟĥŌ ò ň Ōł ƎſƦƊƀƟĥ ł Ō ł / ƎƊƀƟĥŌł ƎƍƊƀƟĥ ƋƀƠƌŌ Ō ƋƀƟŁ Ō ƋƀƟŁ Ō ŌŁ ƎƀƊƀƟ ł ƋƀƟĥŌ ŏ Ō ķŴƊƀƠƌ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƠƌ ŏ Ō ķŴƊƀƟŁ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƟŁ ƋƀƠƌŌ ł ƋƀƟĥŌ Ōł Ō Ō ł / ƁƊƀƟĥ ƎƀƊƀƟĥ ô Ōł ŏ Ō ł / ŴƊƀƟĥ ķŴƊƀƟĥ ô ò Ōł ò ň Ō ł / ƁƊƀƟĥ ƎƀƊƀƟĥ ô Ņ ŴƊŏƠƉ E

Ō ň ƋƀƟŁŁĥ ł Ō ŁŁňĥ ƦƊƀƟ Ō ň ƦƊƀƟŁŁĥ Ō ň IJƦƊƀƟŁŁĥ ô ň Ō ňĥ ƦƊƀƟŁŁ Ō ň ŏ Ō ň / ŴƊƀƟŁŁĥ ķŴƊƀƟŁŁĥ ô ò Ō ň ò ň Ō ň /ƁƊƀƟŁŁĥ ƎƀƊƀƟŁŁĥ ô ŏ Ō ň ķĭƦƊƀƟŁŁĥ òň Ō ň ƎſƦƊƀƟŁŁĥ Ō ň ł Ō ň /ƎƊƀƟŁŁĥ ƎƍƊƀƟŁŁĥ Ō ň ƋƀƟŁƦƌ Ō ňŁ ƋƀƟŁ Ō ňŁ ƋƀƟŁ Ō Ō ňŁ ƎƀƊƀƟŁ Ō ň ƋƀƟŁŁĥ ŏ Ō ƌň ķŴƊƀƟŁƦ Ņ ò Ō ƌň ƎƊƀƟŁƦ ŏ Ō ňŁ ķŴƊƀƟŁ Ņ ò Ō ňŁ ƎƊƀƟŁ Ō ň ƋƀƟŁƦƌ Ō ň ƋƀƟŁŁĥ Ō ň Ō Ō ň /ƁƊƀƟŁŁĥ ƎƀƊƀƟŁŁĥ ô Ō ň ŏ Ō ň /ŴƊ ķŴƊƀƟŁŁĥ ô ƀƟŁŁĥ ò Ō ň ò ň Ō ň /ƁƊƀƟŁŁĥ ƎƀƊƀƟŁŁĥ ô ŏ Ņ ň ŴƊƟŁƦƉ F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

234

ĭIJ

Table 9. Middle / Verbs (ii. Active and Passive Participles) A M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

29

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27 28

ƋƟŅ

2nd

1st

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ĶŤƟŅ Ņ Ņ ťƊƀƟ ł Ņ ƦƊƀƟ Ņ IJƦƊƀƟ ô ł Ņ ň Ņ ťƍƊƀƟ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƍƊƀƟ Ō Ņ ƎƀƊƀƟ Ņò Ņ ƎƊƀƟ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƊƀƟ ň Ņò Ņ ƎſƦƊƀƟ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀƊƀƟ ł Ņò Ņ ƎƍƊƀƟ ƋƀƟŌ Ņ Ō ťƊƀƟ ł Ō ƦƊƀƟ ł Ō IJƦ ô ƊƀƟ Ņ Ō ťƍƊƀƟ Ņ Ņ Ō ťƍƊƀƟ Ō Ō ƎƀƊƀƟ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƟ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƊƀƟ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦƊƀƟ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƊƀƟ ł Ņò Ō ƎƍƊƀƟ

A

B

ƋƏŅ

/

ƼƉŌ ň ĶŤƏŅ Ņ Ņ ťƊƀƏ ł Ņ ƦƊƀƏ IJƦƊƀƏ ô ł Ņ Ņ ň Ņ ťƍƊƀƏ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƍƊƀƏ Ō Ņ ƎƀƊƀƏ Ņò Ņ ƎƊƀƏ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƊƀƏ ň Ņò Ņ ƎſƦƊƀƏ ł Ō Ņ ƎƍƀƊƀƏ ł Ņò Ņ ƎƍƊƀƏ ƋƀƏŌ Ņ Ō ťƊƀƏ ł Ō ƦƊƀƏ ł ƏŌ IJƦ ô Ɗƀ Ņ Ō ťƍƊƀƏ Ņ Ņ Ō ťƍƊƀƏ Ō Ō ƎƀƊƀƏ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƏ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƊƀƏ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦƊƀƏ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƊƀƏ ł Ņò Ō ƎƍƊƀƏ

B

C

ň ł ƈƖƘ PaȨel / PaȨȨel

ň ł ƋƀƠƉ Ņ ł ťƊƀƠƉ ł ł ƦƊƀƠƉ ł IJƦƊƀƠƉ ô ł Ņ ň ł ťƍƊƀƠƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍƊƀƠƉ Ō ł ƎƀƊƀƠƉ ò łƉ ƎƊŅƀƠ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƊƀƠƉ òň Ņ ł ƎſƦƊƀƠƉ Ō ł ƎƍłƀƊƀƠƉ ł Ņ ƀƠ ò łƉ ƎƍƊ ł ł ƋƀƠƉ Ņ ł ťƊƀƠƉ ł ł ƦƊƀƠƉ ł IJƦƊƀƠƉ ô ł Ņ ł ł ťƍƊƀƠƉ Ņ Ņ ł ťƍƊƀƠƉ Ō ł ƎƀƊƀƠƉ ò łƉ ƎƊŅƀƠ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼƊƀƠƉ ň Ņ ł ƎòſƦƊƀƠƉ Ō ł ƎƍłƀƊƀƠƉ ò łƉ ƎƍłƊŅƀƠ C

235

D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł Ɖň ƋƀłƟƦ ł Ɖň Ņ ƟƦ ťƊƀ ł Ɖň ł ƟƦ ƦƊƀ ł Ɖň ł ƟƦ IJƦ ô Ɗƀ ł Ɖň ťƍŅƊƀłƟƦ ł Ɖň Ņ ƟƦ ťƍŅƊƀ ł Ɖň Ō ƟƦ ƎƀƊƀ ł Ɖň Ņ ò ƟƦ ƎƊƀ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƼƊƀ ƟƦƉ ł Ɖň Ņ ƟƦ òƎſƦň Ɗƀ ł Ɖň Ō ƟƦ ƎƍƀłƊƀ ł Ɖň Ņ ò ƟƦ ƎƍłƊƀ D

Ō ƋƀƠƉ Ņ Ō ťƊƀƠƉ ł Ō ƦƊƀƠƉ Ō IJƦƊƀ ô ł ƠƉ Ņ Ō ťƍƊƀƠƉ Ņ Ņ Ō ťƍƊƀƠƉ Ō Ō ƎƀƊƀƠƉ Ņò Ō ƎƊƀƠƉ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƼƊƀƠƉ ň Ņò Ō ƎſƦƊƀƠƉ ł Ō Ō ƎƍƀƊƀƠƉ ł Ņò Ō ƎƍƊƀƠƉ Ņ ƋƠƉ Ņ Ņ ťƊƠƉ ł Ņ ƦƊƠƉ Ņ IJƦƊƠƉ ô ł Ņ Ņ ťƍƊƠƉ Ņ Ņ Ņ ťƍƊƠƉ Ō Ņ ƎƀƊƠƉ Ņ Ņ ò ƎƊƠƉ ŏ Ō Ņ ķĭƼƊƠƉ ň Ņ Ņ ò ƎſƦƊƠƉ Ō Ņ ƎƍłƀƊƠƉ Ņ Ņ ò ƎƍłƊƠƉ E

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Ō ň ƋƀƟŁƦƉ Ņ Ō ň ťƊƀƟŁƦƉ ł Ō ň ƦƊƀƟŁƦƉ ł ƟŌŁƦƉň IJôƦƊƀ Ō ň ťƍŅƊƀƟŁƦƉ Ņ Ō ň ťƍŅƊƀƟŁƦƉ Ō Ō ň ƎƀƊƀƟŁƦƉ Ņò Ō ň ƎƊƀƟŁƦƉ ŏ Ō Ō ň ķĭƼƊƀƟŁƦƉ ň Ņ Ō ň ƎòſƦƊƀƟŁƦƉ Ō Ō ň ƎƍƀłƊƀƟŁƦƉ ł Ņò Ō ň ƎƍƊƀƟŁƦƉ F

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

236

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

237

Table 10. Doubled Verbs Doubled, also called geminate, verbs are verbs where the second and third letters are the same; e.g., ĮŵŨ. Unless the second letter has a vowel, the doubled letter is collapsed into one; ň ň (B1). i.e., ŵŨł (A1) but ĮŵŨŁĥ ł (Column A) is particular to this type of verb and does not resemble the The ƈƖƘ regular verb with the exception of the passive participle (A38-A49). The present sing. 3rd ň person masc. ĮŤŨŅ (A26) is read as if the ĥ were a IJ, boyez. ň ň ň ł ł ł ň (Column D) are regular and The ƈƖƘŁĥ (Column B), ƈƖƘ (Column C), and ƈƖƘŁĥ follow Table 1. ň ł ł ł ň (Column F) collapse the two Į s into one, with a The ƈƖƘĥ (Column E) and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ň œ ł (E1) and ŵŨŁŁĥ ł œ ł ň (F1). hard ħœ as in ŵŨĥ

238 Table 10. Doubled Verbs—where the second and third letters are the same (i. Past, Future, A M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

Infinitive

B

C

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘ

PȨal

EthpȨel

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

ŵŨł łň ŁŵŨ ŁŵŨł IJŁŵŨ ô ł ňň ŁŵŨ ŏ ł / ĭŵŨ ķĭŵŨ ô ł ò ň ł / IJŵŨ ƎſŵŨ ôòł ŏ ķĭŁŵŨł ňòł ƎſŁŵŨ ł ł / ķŵŨł ƎƌŵŨ ŏň ĮŴũƌ ŏň ĮŴŨŁ ŏň ĮŴŨŁ Ō ň ƎſŵŨŁ ň ĮŴŨĥŏ ŏ ň ķĭŵũƌ Ņò ň ķŵũƌ ŏ ň ķĭŵŨŁ Ņò ň ķŵŨŁ ŏň ĮŴũƌ ĮŴŨŏ Ō ŏ / IJĮŴŨ ƎſĮŴŨ ô ŏ ŏ ŏ / ĭĮŴŨ ķĭĮŴŨ ô ŏ ò ň ŏ / IJĮŴŨ ƎſĮŴŨ ôò ŏ ł ň ŵũƉ A

ň œ Ŕň ĮŵŨŁĥ ň ŁŔĮŵłŨłœŁĥŔ œ ň œ Ŕň ŁĮŵŨŁĥ ň IJŁĮŵŨŁĥ ô œň œŔ ň ŁŔĮŵňŨłœŁĥŔ ň ŏ ň œ Ŕ ň / ĭĮŵŨŁĥ ķĭĮŵŨŁĥ ô ň œŔ ň œ Ŕň ň œ Ŕ ň / IJĮôò ŵŨŁĥ ƎſĮòň ŵŨŁĥ ŏœ ň œ ň ķĭŁĮŵŨŁĥ Ŕ ň òňòœ ň ƎſŁĮ ŵŨŁĥŔ ň œ Ŕň ň œ Ŕ ň / ķĮŵŨŁĥ łƎƌĮŵŨŁĥ ň œŔň ĮŵŨƦƌ ň œ Ŕň œ ĮŵŨŁŁ ň œ Ŕň œ ĮŵŨŁŁ ň ƎſĮŵŌŨłœŁŁŔœ ň œ Ŕň ĮŵŨŁĥ ķĭĮŵŏŨłœƦƌ Ŕň Ņ ň ķĮŵò ŨłœƦƌ Ŕ ň ł ŏ œ ķĭĮŵŨŁŁŔœ Ņ ň ķĮŵò ŨłœŁŁŔœ ň œŔň ĮŵŨƦƌ ł œ Ŕň ĮŵŨŁĥ ň Ō ł œ Ŕ ň / IJĮŵŨ ƎſĮŵŨŁĥ ô ł œ ŁĥŔ ň ŏ ł œ Ŕ ň / ĭĮŵŨŁĥ ķĭĮŵŨŁĥ ô łœ Ŕ ň ò ň ł œ Ŕ ň / IJĮŵŨŁĥ ƎſĮŵŨŁĥ ô ò łœ Ŕ ŏŅ ň ĭĮŵŨƦƉ B

ň łœ ĮŵŨ ŁŔĮŵłŨłœ œ ň łœ ŁĮŵŨ œ ň łœ IJôŁĮŵŨ ŁŔĮŵňŨłœ ŏ ň ł œ / ĭĮŵŨ ķĭĮŵŨ ô ň łœ ň łœ ň ł œ / IJô ò ĮŵŨ ƎſĮòň ŵŨ ŏ ň łœ ķĭŁĮŵŨ òň ň łœ ƎſŁĮŵŨ ň łœ ł ň ł œ / ķĮŵŨ ƎƌĮŵŨ ň łŔ Įŵũƌ ň łŔ ĮŵŨŁ ň łŔ ĮŵŨŁ Ō łŔ ƎſĮŵŨŁ ň ł œň ĮŵŨĥ ŏ łŔ ķĭĮŵũƌ Ņ łŔò ķĮŵũƌ ŏ łŔ ķĭĮŵŨŁ Ņò ł ķĮŵŨŁ Ŕ ň łŔ Įŵũƌ ň łœ ĮŵŨ ň ł œ / IJĮŵŨ ƎſĮŌ ŵŨ ô ň łœ ň ł œ / ĭĮŵŨ ķĭĮŏ ŵŨ ô ň łœ ň łœ ň ł œ / IJô ò ĮŵŨ ƎſĮòň ŵŨ ŏŅ ł ĭĮŵũƉ C

239

Imperative, and Infinitive) D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ł ł œ Ŕň ĮŵŨŁĥ ň ŁŔĮŵłŨłœŁĥŔ œ ł ł œ Ŕň ŁĮŵŨŁĥ ň IJŁĮŵŨŁĥ ô œ ł łœ Ŕ ň ŁŔĮŵňŨłœŁĥŔ ň ł ł œ Ŕ ň / ĭĮŵŨŁĥ ķĭĮŏ ŵŨŁĥ ô ł łœ Ŕ ł ł œ Ŕ ň / òIJôĮŵŨŁĥ ł ł œ Ŕň ƎſĮòň ŵŨŁĥ ŏœ ł łœ ň ķĭŁĮŵŨŁĥ Ŕ ňò œ ł ł œ ň ƎſŁĮŵŨŁĥŔ łƎƌĮŵŨŁĥ ł ł œ Ŕ ň / ķĮŵŨŁĥ ł ł œ Ŕň ł łœ Ŕ ň ĮŵŨƦƌ ł ł œ Ŕň œ ĮŵŨŁŁ ł ł œ Ŕň œ ĮŵŨŁŁ Ō ł œ Ŕň œ ƎſĮŵŨŁŁ ł ł œ Ŕň ĮŵŨŁĥ ŏ łœ Ŕ ň ķĭĮŵŨƦƌ Ņò ł œ ň ķĮŵŨƦƌ Ŕ ň ł ŏ œ ķĭĮŵŨŁŁŔ œ Ņò ł œ ň œ ķĮŵŨŁŁ Ŕ ł łœ Ŕ ň ĮŵŨƦƌ ł ł œ Ŕň ĮŵŨŁĥ ň ł ł œ Ŕ ň / IJĮŵŨŁĥ ƎſĮŌ ŵŨŁĥ ô ł łœ Ŕ ň ł ł œ Ŕ ň / ĭĮŵŨŁĥ ķĭĮŏ ŵŨŁĥ ô ł łœ Ŕ ł ł œ Ŕ ň / IJô ò ĮŵŨ ł ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎſĮòň ŵŨŁĥ ŏŅ ł ň ĭĮŵŨƦƉ D

ň œł ŵŨĥ ł œł ŁŵŨĥ ň œł ŁŵŨĥ ł IJŁŵŨĥ ô ňœ ň œł ŁŵŨĥ ł ŏ ň œ ł / ĭŵŨĥ ķĭŵŨĥ ô ňœ ł ò ň ň œ ł / IJŵŨĥ ƎſŵŨĥ ô òňœ ŏ ň œł ķĭŁŵŨĥ ò ň ň œł ƎſŁŵŨĥ ň œł ł ň œ ł / ķŵŨĥ ƎƌŵŨĥ ň œł ŵũƌ ň œł ŵŨŁ ň œł ŵŨŁ ł ƎſŵŌŨŁœ ň œł ŵŨĥ ķĭŵŏũƌœł ò œł ķŵŅũƌ ł ķĭŵŏŨŁœ ò œł ķŵŅŨŁ ň œł ŵũƌ ň œł ŵŨĥ ł Ō ň œ ł / IJŵŨĥ ƎſŵŨĥ ô ňœ ł ŏ ň œ ł / ĭŵŨĥ ķĭŵŨĥ ô ňœ ł ò ň ň œ ł / IJŵŨĥ ƎſŵŨĥ ô òňœ ŏ Ņœ ł ĭŵũƉ E

łł ň ŵŨŁŁĥ ł ł ňĥ ŁŵŨŁŁ łł ň ŁŵŨŁŁĥ ł ň IJŁŵŨŁŁĥ ô ł ł ň ŁŵňŨŁŁĥ ł ň ŏ ł ł ň / ĭŵŨŁŁĥ ķĭŵŨŁŁĥ ô ł ł ň ò ň ł ł ň /IJŵŨŁŁĥ ƎſŵŨŁŁĥ ôòł ŏ łł ň ķĭŁŵŨŁŁĥ òň ł ł ň ƎſŁŵŨŁŁĥ łł ň ł ł ł ň /ķŵŨŁŁĥ ƎƌŵŨŁŁĥ łł ň ŵŨŁƦƌ łłň ŵŨŁŁ łłň ŵŨŁŁ łň ƎſŵŌŨŁŁ łł ň ŵŨŁŁĥ ŏ ł ƌň ķĭŵŨŁƦ Ņ ò ł ƌň ķŵŨŁƦ ŏ ł ňŁ ķĭŵŨŁ Ņ ò ł ňŁ ķŵŨŁ łł ň ŵŨŁƦƌ łł ň ŵŨŁŁĥ ł ň Ō ł ł ň /IJŵŨŁŁĥ ƎſŵŨŁŁĥ ô ł ł ň ŏ ł ł ň /ĭŵŨŁŁ ķĭŵŨŁŁĥ ô ł ĥ ł ň ò ň ł ł ň /IJŵŨŁŁĥ ƎſŵŨŁŁĥ ôòł ŏ Ņ ł ƦƉň ĭŵŨŁ F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

240 Table 10. Doubled Verbs—where the second and third letters are the same (ii. Active and A M = Masculine F = Feminine 26

3rd

30 31 32 33 34 35

Singular

29

3rd

36

38

3rd Singular

39 40

45 46 47 48 49

2nd

1st

3rd Plural

44

Passive Participle

41

43

2nd

1st

37

42

2nd

1st

Plural

28

Present Tense (Active Participle)

27

2nd

1st

B

C

ł ƈƖƘ

ň ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘ

PȨal

EthpȨel

PaȨel / PaȨȨel

ň ĮŤŨŅ ŅŅ ŦŵŨ łŅ ŁŵŨ IJŁŵŨ ô łŅ Ņň Ņ ljĮŤŨ ŅŅ Ņ ljŵŨ ŌŅ ƎſŵŨ Ņ Ņò ķŵŨ ŏ ŌŅ ķĭƻŵŨ ň Ņ Ņò ƎſŁŵŨ ł ŌŅ ƎƍſŵŨ ł Ņ Ņò ƎƌŵŨ Ō ŵſŵŨ ŅŌ ŦŵſŵŨ ł Ō ŁŵſŵŨ ł Ō IJŁ ô ŵſŵŨ Ņ Ō ljŵſŵŨ ŅŅ Ō ljŵſŵŨ Ō Ō ƎſŵſŵŨ Ņò Ō ķŵſŵŨ ŏ Ō Ō ķĭƻŵſŵŨ ň Ņò Ō ƎſŁŵſŵŨ ł Ō Ō ƎƍſŵſŵŨ łŅò Ō ƎƌŵſŵŨ

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F A

ň ƦƉň ĮŵŨ Ņ ł ň ŦĮŵŨƦƉ ł ł ƦƉň ŁĮŵŨ ł ł ƦƉň IJôŁĮŵŨ ň ƦƉň ljŅĮŵŨ Ņ ł ň ljŅĮŵŨƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎſĮŵŨƦƉ ò ň Ņ ł ƦƉ ķĮŵŨ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƻĮŵŨƦƉ ňŅ ł ň ƎòſŁĮŵŨƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍſłĮŵŨƦƉ ò ň ł Ņ ł ƦƉ ƎƌĮŵŨ B

ňł ĮŵũƉ Ņ ł ŦĮŵũƉ ł ł ŁĮŵũƉ IJŁĮŵũƉ ô ł ł Ņňł ljĮŵũƉ ŅŅ ł ljĮŵũƉ Ō ł ƎſĮŵũƉ Ņ ł ò ķĮŵũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƻĮŵũƉ òň Ņ ł ƎſŁĮŵũƉ Ō ł ƎƍłſĮŵũƉ łŅ ł ò ƎƌĮŵũƉ łł ĮŵũƉ Ņ ł ŦĮŵũƉ ł ł ŁĮŵũƉ IJŁĮŵũƉ ô ł ł Ņłł ljĮŵũƉ ŅŅ ł ljĮŵũƉ Ō ł ƎſĮŵũƉ Ņ ł ò ķĮŵũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƻĮŵũƉ ňŅ ł ƎòſŁĮŵũƉ Ō ł ƎƍłſĮŵũƉ Ņ ł ò ƎƌłĮŵũƉ C

241

Passive Participles) D

E

F

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁĥ

ň ł ƈƖƘĥ

ł ł ň ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

EthpaȨal / EthpaȨȨal

AphȨel

EttaphȨal

ň ł ŵũƉ Ņ ł ŦŵũƉ ł ł ŁŵũƉ ł ł IJŁ ô ŵũƉ Ņň ł ljŵũƉ ljŵŅŅũƉł Ō ł ƎſŵũƉ Ņò ł ķŵũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƻŵũƉ ň Ņò ł ƎſŁŵũƉ ł Ō ł ƎƍſŵũƉ łŅò ł ƎƌŵũƉ ł ł ŵũƉ Ņ ł ŦŵũƉ ł ł ŁŵũƉ IJŁŵũƉ ô ł ł Ņ ł ł ljŵũƉ ljŵŅŅũƉł Ō ł ƎſŵũƉ Ņò ł ķŵũƉ ŏ Ō ł ķĭƻŵũƉ ň Ņò ł ƎſŁŵũƉ ł Ō ł ƎƍſŵũƉ łŅò ł ƎƌŵũƉ

ł ł Ɖň ĮŵŨƦ ł Ɖň ŦĮŅŵŨƦ ł ł Ɖň ŁĮŵŨƦ ł ł Ɖň IJŁ ô ĮŵŨƦ ł ł Ɖň ljŅĮŵŨƦ Ņ ł Ɖň ljŅĮŵŨƦ Ō ł Ɖň ƎſĮŵŨƦ Ņò ł ň ķĮŵŨƦ Ɖ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƻĮŵŨƦƉ ò ň ĮŵŨƦ Ņ ł Ɖň ƎſŁ Ō ł Ɖň ƎƍſłĮŵŨƦ Ņ ł ò Ɖň ƎƌłĮŵŨƦ D

E

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

łł ň ŵŨŁƦƉ Ņ ł ň ŦŵŨŁƦƉ ł ł ň ŁŵŨŁƦƉ ł ł Ɖň IJôŁŵŨŁƦ łł ň ljŅŵŨŁƦƉ Ņ ł ň ljŅŵŨŁƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎſŵŨŁƦƉ ł ň Ņ ò ŁƦƉ ķŵŨ ŏ Ō ł ň ķĭƻŵŨŁƦƉ ňŅ ł ň ƎòſŁŵŨŁƦƉ Ō ł ň ƎƍſłŵŨŁƦƉ ł ň ł Ņ ò ŁƦƉ ƎƌŵŨ F

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

242

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

243

Tables 11 & 12. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs Tables 11A-11F give all the verbal forms in Table 1 with the object suffixes. Each of the tables is dedicated to one of the columns in Table 1. Column A of Tables 11A-11F always gives the unsuffixed form. The rest of the columns give the various object suffixes according to number, person, and gender. Tables 12A & 12B give the object suffixes when they attach to final ĥ verbs. ň ň ł ł ň (Table 11D) forms are usually passive and Note that ƈƖƘŁĥ (Table 11B) and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ hence never take an object suffix. In the rare occasions these forms have an active meaning, they may (though very rarely) take object suffixes.

244 Table 11 A. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs: PȨal (Table 1, Columns A & B)

1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

3rd

16 17 18

2nd

Singular

1st

C M F M F C M F

C M F M F C

Sing.

M F 2nd

M F

24 25

F

Pl.

Imperative

23

M

M

3rd

20

22

F

2nd

1st

19

21

M

F

Plural

15

Future Tense (Imperfect)

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

Infinitive

A

B

C

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

Ō Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ƎƀŨǁŁ ŏ ň ħĭǁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴŨǂƌ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň ƎŨǂƌ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ķŴŨǁŁ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň œ ƎŨǁŁ ŏ ħĭǂƌ Ŕ œ Ŕň ŏ ħĭǁ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŏ ƁŨĭǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ ŏ ŴŨĭǁ ô Ŕ ŏŔ œ ŏŔ Ŕ œ ķŴŨĭǁ ò ŏ ƁŨĭǁ ô Ŕ ŏŔ œ ò ňŔ Ŕ œ ƎƀŨĭǁ ł ħǂƉ Ŕ œ Ŕň

ňœ Ŕ łœ ųŨǁ ň ł œ ĬƦŨǁ Ŕ ŔŔ Ņœ ł œ IJųſƦŨǁ ŔŔ ô Ōœ ł œ IJĬŴſƦŨǁ ŔŔ ô ňœ ł œ ĬƦŨǁ ŔŔ ł ŏ IJĬŴŨǁ ô œŔ œ ł IJųƀŨǁ ô ò Ņœ Ŕ œ ŏœ ł IJųƀƌĭƦŨǁ ô Ņ ŔŔ œ ňœ ò ł IJųƀƍſƦŨǁ ô Ņ ŔŔ œ ł IJųƀƍŨǁ ô Ņ ŔŔ œ œ Ŕň IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǂƌ ň IJĬŴƀŨǁŁ ô Ō Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň œ IJųƀŨĭǁŁ ô Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ňŔ œ Ŕ œ ųŨǁŁ ň IJųƀƍƀŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ ň IJĬŴƀŨǁĥ ô ŌŔ œ Ŕ IJųƀƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň IJųƀƍ ô Ņ Ũǂƌ ň IJųƀƌŴŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ œ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň œ IJųƀƍ ô Ņ ŨǁŁ IJĬŴƀŨǂƌ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕň ŏ IJųƀŨĭǁ ô ŅŔ Ŕ œ ŏ IJĬŴƀŨĭǁ ô ŌŔ Ŕ œ ŏ IJĬŴŨŁŴƃ ô ŏœ Ŕ œ ŏ IJųƀƌŴŨŁŴƃ ô Ņ ŏœ Ŕ œ òŏ IJųƀŨĭǁ ô ŅŔ ŏŔ œ ò IJųƀƍƀŨĭǁ ô Ņ ňŔ Ŕ œ ňŔ œ Ŕ ň ųŨǂƉ

ł ħǁ ŔŔ œ ň ƦŨ Ŕ ł œǁ Ŕ œ œ ŔłŔ œ ƦŨǁ œ ł IJƦŨǁ ô ŔŔ œ ƦŨǁ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ ňœ ł ŴŨǁ ô ŔŔ œ ò ł ƁŨǁ ô ŔŔ œ ŏœ ł œ ķĭƦŨǁ ŔŔ ňœ ò ł œ ƎſƦŨŔ ǁ Ŕ ł œ ƎŨǁ ŔŔ ŏœ ň ħĭǂƌ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ ň ħĭǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ ŏ ň ħĭǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ

A

B

ñ Ņœ Ŕ łœ ųŨǁ Ņ ł œ ĬñƦŨǁ Ŕ ŔŔ Ņœ ł œ ñ ŔŔ ĬƦŨǁ Ō ł ñ œ ŔŔ œ ųſƦŨǁ Ņœ ł œ ĬñƦŨǁ ŔŔ ŏ ñ œ Ŕ łœ ĬŴŨǁ ñ Ņò œ Ŕ ł œ ųŨǁ ŏ ł ñŅ œ ŔŔ œ ųƌĭƦŨǁ ň ł ñ Ņ œ òŔ Ŕ œ ųƍſƦŨǁ ł ñŅ ŔŔ œ ųƍŨǁ ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕň ųƀŨǂƌ ň ñ ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ ųƀŨǁŁ ŏ ň ñ ňŔ œ Ŕ œ ųƀŨĭǁŁ ň ñ Ņ ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ ųƍƀŨǁŁ ň ñ ŌŔ œ Ŕ ųƀŨǁĥ ñ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ųƌŴŨǂƌ ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň ųƍŨǂƌ ň ñ Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ œ ųƌŴŨǁŁ ň ñ Ņ ŅŔ œ òŔ œ ųƍŨǁŁ ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕň ųƀŨǂƌ ŏ ñ ňŔ Ŕ œ ųƀŨĭǁ ŏ ñ ŌŔ Ŕ œ ųƀŨĭǁ ñ ŏœ Ŕ ŏœ ĬŴŨŁŴƃ ñ Ņ ŏœ Ŕ ŏœ ųƌŴŨŁŴƃ ŏ ñ ŅŔ ò Ŕ œ ųŨĭǁ ŏ ñ Ņ ňŔò Ŕ œ ųƍƀŨĭǁ ñ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ň ųŨǂƉ C

ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņœ Ŕ łœ Ņ ł ĴƦŨǁ ŔŔ ŔŔ œ Ņ ł ĴƦŨǁ Ŕ œ ŔŔ œ ĴŴŨǁ Ŕ ŏœ Ŕ łœ Ņ ƅŨǁ Ŕòœ Ŕ łœ ł ƅƍŨǁ ŔŅ Ŕ Ŕ œ ƅŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕň ň ƅŨǁŁ Ŕ ŅŔ œ Ŕ œ

ň ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕĥ ƅƌŴŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ƅƍŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň

ƅŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕň

ƅŨǂƉ Ŕ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ň D

245

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ł ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ňœ Ŕ œ ň ł ƁƃƦŨǁ ô Ŕ ŔŔ œ ňœ ł œ ƁƃƦŨǁ ŔŔ ô ł ŏ ƁƃŴŨǁ ô õ œŔ œ ò ł ƁƄŨǁ ô õ ňœ Ŕ œ ł ƁƄƍŨǁ ô Ŕň Ŕ Ŕ œ ƁƄŨǂƌ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ň ƁƄŨǁŁ ô Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ œ

ň ƁƄŨǁĥ ô Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ ƁƄƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ŕ ň ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ò ƁƄƍŨǂƌ ô Ŕ ň Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕň

ƁƄŨǂƌ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň

ł ƁƍŨǁ ô łœ Ŕ œ ł ł ƁƌƦŨǁ ô Ŕ ŔŔ œ Ņœ ł ƁƌƦŨǁ ô ŔŔ œ Ōœ ł œ ƁƍſƦŨǁ ŔŔ ô ł ƁƌŴŨǁ ô ŏœ Ŕ œ ł ƁƍŨǁ ô ò Ņœ Ŕ œ ŏœ ł ƁƍƌĭƦŨǁ ô Ņ ŔŔ œ ňœ ò ł ƁƍƍſƦŨǁ ô Ņ ŔŔ œ ƁƍŨǂƌ ô ł Ŕ œ Ŕň ň ƁƍŨǁŁ ô ł Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň œ œ Ŕœ ƁƍƀŨ ô ł Ŕ ĭǁŁ ň ƁƍƍƀŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ ƁƍƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ò ƁƍƍŨǂƌ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕň ň ƁƍƌŴŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ œ òň ƁƍƍŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ œ

ŏŔ Ŕ ł Ŕ œ ķŴƄŨǁ ŏŔ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ň œ ķŴƃƦŨǁ

ŏŔ œ Ŕ ł Ŕ œ ķŴƃƦŨǁ ŏŔ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ ķŴƃŴŨǁ ŏŔ ò Ŕ ł Ŕ œ ķŴƄŨǁ ŏŔ Ņ Ŕ ł Ŕ œ ķŴƄƍŨǁ ŏŔ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň ķŴƄŨĭǂƌ ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň œ ķŴƄŨĭǁŁ

ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň ķŴƄŨĭǁĥ ŏŔ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴƄƌŴŨǂƌ ŏŔ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň ķŴƄƍŨǂƌ ŏŔ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň ķŴƄŨĭǂƌ

ňŔ Ŕ ł œ ƎƀƄŨǁ Ŕ ň ł œ ƎƀƃƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ

ł ň Ŕ œ Ũǁ ƎƀƃƦ ŔŔ œ ň Ŕ Ũǁ ŏœ Ŕ łœ ƎƀƃŴ ňŔ ò Ŕ ł œ ƎƀƄŨǁ Ŕ ňŔ Ņ Ŕ ł œ ƎƀƄƍŨǁ Ŕ ŏœ ň ň ƎƀƄŨĭǂƌ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ ň ň ƎƀƄŨĭǁŁ Ŕ Ŕ œ Ŕœ

ň Ŕ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň ƎƀƄŨĭǁĥ ň Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ƎƀƄƌŴŨǂƌ ň Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň ƎƀƄƍŨǂƌ ň Ŕ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň ƎƀƄŨĭǂƌ

ň ƁƄŨǂƉ ô Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ

łŔ ŏŔ œ Ɓƍ ô ƀŨĭǁ ŏ ƁƍƀŨĭǁ ô ŌŔ Ŕ œ ŏ ƁƌŴŨŁŴƃ ô ŏœ Ŕ œ ŏ ƁƍƌŴŨŁŴƃ ô Ņ ŏœ Ŕ œ òŏ ƁƍŨĭǁ ô ŅŔ ŏŔ œ ò ƁƍƍƀŨĭǁ ô Ņ ňŔ Ŕ œ ň ƁƍŨǂƉ ô łŔ œ Ŕ

ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ Ɖň ķŴƄŨǂ

ň Ŕłœ Ŕ ň ƎƀƄŨǂƉ

E

F

G

H

łœ Ŕ łœ ƎŨǁ ł ł œ ķƦŨǁ Ŕ ŔŔ Ņœ ł œ ķƦŨǁ ŔŔ Ōœ ł œ ƎſƦŨǁ ŔŔ

1 2 3 4 5

ŏœ Ŕ łœ ķŴŨǁ Ņò œ ł œ ƎŨǁ Ŕ ŏœ ł œ ŅƎƌĭƦŨǁ ŔŔ ň Ņ œ òŔłŔ œ ƎƍſƦŨǁ

6 7 8 9 10

ł Ŕ œ Ŕň ƎŨǂƌ ł Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ƎŨǁŁ ł Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕň œ ƎƀŨĭǁŁ Ņ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ƎƍƀŨǁŁ

11 12 13 14 15

Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň ƎƌŴŨǂƌ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň ƎƍŨǂƌ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕň œ ƎƌŴŨǁŁ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕň œ ƎƍŨǁŁ łŔ ŏŔ œ ƎƀŨĭǁ ŌŔ ŏŔ œ ƎƀŨĭǁ ŏœ Ŕ ŏœ ķŴŨŁŴƃ Ņ ŏœ Ŕ ŏœ ƎƌŴŨŁŴƃ ŅŔ ò ŏŔ œ ƎŨĭǁ Ņ ňŔò ŏŔ œ ƎƍƀŨĭǁ łŔ œ Ŕ ň ƎŨǂƉ I

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

246 Table 11 B. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs: EthpȨel/ (Table 1, Column C)

1

5 6 7 8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19 20 Sing.

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

M F

ò ł ň ƁŨǁ ô œ Ŕ œŁĥŔ

M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F

24 25

C

ň ň ħǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ň ƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ łœ Ŕ łœŔ œ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ƦŨǁŁĥ œ ň ň IJƦŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ň ƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ łœŔ ň ň ŴŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ò ň ň ƁŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ŏœ ň œ ň ķĭƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ ňœ ò ň œ ň ƎſƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ ň ň ƎŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ň ħǁƦƌ ŔŔ œŔň ň ň ħǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ œŔœ ň ň ħǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ œŔœ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ƎƀŨǁŁŁ ň ň ħǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł ķŴŨŏœǁƦƌ Ŕ œŔň Ņ łœ ň ƎŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ł ň ŏ ķŴŨœ ǁŁŁ Ŕ œŔœ Ņ łœ ňœ ƎŨò œ ǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ň ħǁƦƌ ŔŔ Ŕ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ħǁŁĥ ł ň ƁŨǁ ô œ Ŕ œŁĥŔ ł ň ŴŨǁ ô œ Ŕ œŁĥŔ

M

2nd

B

Pl.

Imperative

23

2nd 1st

21 22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

Singular

3rd

2

A

Infinitive

ŏŔ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ň ŴŨǁƦƉ A

ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ųŨǁŁĥ ň ł œň ĬƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ņœ ň œ ň IJųſƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ ô Ōœ ň œ ň IJĬŴſƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ ô ň ł œň ĬƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ł ň IJĬŴŨǁŁĥ ô ŏœ Ŕ œŔ ł ň IJųƀŨǁŁĥ ô ò Ņœ Ŕ œŔ ŏœ ň ň IJųƀƌĭƦŨǁŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ňœ ò ň ň IJųƀƍſƦŨǁŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ň ň IJųƀƍŨǁŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł IJĬŴƀŨ Ŕ œŔň ô Ō œ ǁƦƌ ł ň IJĬŴƀŨǁŁ ô Ō œ Ŕ œ Ŕ Łœ ł ň IJĬŴƀŨǁŁŁ ô Ōœ Ŕ œŔ œ Ņ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ IJųƀ ô ƍƀŨǁŁŁ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň IJĬŴƀ ô ŨǁŁĥ ł IJųƀ Ŕ œŔň ô ƌŴŅŨŏœǁƦƌ Ņò ł œ ň IJųƀ Ŕ Ŕ ô ƍŅŨœ ǁƦƌ ŏ Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ IJųƀ ô ƌŴŨǁŁŁ Ņò ł œ ň œ IJųƀ Ŕ Ŕ ô ƍŅŨœ ǁŁŁ ł Ō œ IJĬŴƀŨǁƦƌ Ŕ œŔň ô Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň IJųƀ ô ŨǁŁĥ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň IJĬŴƀ ô ŨǁŁĥ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň IJĬŴ ô ŨǁŁĥ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň IJųƀƌŴ ô Ņ ŨǁŁĥ Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň IJųôƀòŨǁŁĥ ł ň ò Ņ ŨňœǁŁĥ IJųôƀƍƀ Ŕ œŔ ň ŏ Ņ œ ň ĬŁŴŨǁƦƉ Ŕ ŔŔ Ŕ B

ň ñ Ņœ Ŕ łœŔ ųŨǁŁĥ Ņ ł œň ĬñƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ņœ ň œ ň ñ ŔŔ Ŕ ĬƦŨǁŁĥ Ō ň ň ñ œ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ųſƦŨǁŁĥ Ņ ł œň ĬñƦŔ Ũǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ň ŏ ñ œ Ŕ łœŔ ĬŴŨǁŁĥ ň ñ Ņò œ Ŕ ł œŁĥŔ ųŨǁ ŏ ň ň ñŅ œ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ųƌĭƦŨǁŁĥ ňœ ò ň œ ň ñ Ņ ƦŨǁŁĥ ųƍſ ŔŔ Ŕ ň ň ñŅ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ųƍŨǁŁĥ ñ Ōœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň ųƀŨǁƦƌ ň ñ Ōœ Ŕ łœŔ œ ųƀŨǁŁŁ ň ñ Ōœ Ŕ łœŔ œ ųƀŨǁŁŁ Ņ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ųñƍƀŨǁŁŁ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ñ ŨǁŁĥ ųƀ ł ųñƌŴŅŨŏœǁƦƌ Ŕ œŔň Ņ łœ ň ųñƍŅŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ųñƌŴŨǁŁŁ Ņ łœ ňœ ųñƍŅŨò œ ǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ł Ō œ ñ ǁƦƌ ųƀŨ Ŕ œŔň ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ñ ŨǁŁĥ ųƀ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ñ ŨǁŁĥ ųƀ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ñ ŨǁŁĥ ĬŴ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ñ Ņ ŨǁŁĥ ųƌŴ Ņò œ ł œ ň ųñŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ñųƍŅ ƀòŨǁŁĥ Ņ Ņ ñ Ŕ ŏŔ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň ĬŁŴŨǁƦƉ C

ň ƅŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ņœ Ŕ łœŔ Ņ ł œň ĴƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Łĥ Ŕ Ņ ł ň ĴƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œŁĥŔ ň ĴŴŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ŏœ Ŕ łœŔ Ņ ň ƅŨǁ Ŕ ò œ Ŕ ł œŁĥŔ ň ň ƅƍŨǁŁĥ ŔŅ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ƅŨǁƦƌ Ŕ Ņœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ƅŔŨǁŁŁ

Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƅŔŨǁŁĥ ł ƅŔƌŴŅŨŏœǁƦƌ Ŕ œŔň Ņ łœ ň ƅŔƍŅŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ

ƅŨǁƦƌ Ŕ Ņœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň

Ņ Ņ ĴŁŴŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŏŔ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň D

247

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ł ň ƁƄŨǁŁĥ ô ňœ Ŕ œŔ ň ł ň ƁƃƦŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œŁĥŔ ň ł ň ƁƃƦŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œŁĥŔ ł ň ƁƃŴŨǁŁĥ ô õ ŏœ Ŕ œŔ ò ň œ ł œŁĥň ƁƄ Ŕ Ŕ ô õ Ũǁ ň ň ƁƄƍŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕň Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł ƁƄŨǁƦƌ ô Ŕ ňœ Ŕ œŔ ň ň œ Ŕ ł œ ŁŁŔňœ ƁƄ ô Ŕ Ũǁ

ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƁƄ ô Ŕ ŨǁŁĥ ł ň ŨŏœǁƦƌ ƁƄ Ŕ œŔň ô Ŕ ƌŴ Ņò ł œ ň ƁƄ Ŕ Ŕ ô Ŕ ƍňŨœ ǁƦƌ

ł ƁƄŨǁƦƌ ô Ŕ ňœ Ŕ œŔ ň

ň Ņ ň ƁƃŁŴŨǁƦƉ ô õ Ŕ ŏŔ Ŕ œ Ŕ E

ł ň ƁƍŨǁŁĥ ô łœ Ŕ œŔ ł ł œň ƁƌƦŨǁ Ŕ ô Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Łĥ łœ ň œ ň ƁƌôƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ Ōœ ň œ ň ƁƍſƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ ô

ł ň ƁƌŴŨǁŁĥ ô ŏœ Ŕ œŔ ł ň ƁƍŨǁ ô ò Ņ œ Ŕ œŁĥŔ ŏœ ň ň ƁƍƌĭƦŨǁŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ňœ ò ň ň ƁƍƍſƦŨǁŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł ƁƍŨǁƦƌ ô łœ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň ł ň ƁƍŨǁŁŁ ô łœ Ŕ œŔ œ ł ň ƁƍŨǁŁŁ ô łœ Ŕ œŔ œ Ņ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ Ɓƍ ô ƍƀŨǁŁŁ ł Ɓƍ Ŕ œŔň ô ƌŴŅŨŏœǁƦƌ Ņò ł œ ň Ɓƍ Ŕ Ŕ ô ƍŅŨœ ǁƦƌ ŏ Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ Ɓƍ ô ƌŴŨǁŁŁ Ņò ł œ ň œ Ɓƍ Ŕ Ŕ ô ƍŅŨœ ǁŁŁ ł œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň Ɓƍƀ ô ŨǁŁĥ ł ň Ɓƍƀ Ŕ œŔ ô ŨŌœǁŁĥ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƁƌŴ ô ŨǁŁĥ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƁƍƌŴ ô Ņ ŨǁŁĥ Ņ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƁôòƍŨǁŁĥ ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƁôòƍƍƀŅ ŨǁŁĥ Ņ ň IJŁŴŨǁƦƉ ô Ŕ ŏŔ Ŕ œ Ŕ F

ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴƄŨǁŁĥ ň ķŴƃŏŔƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ łœ Ŕ łœŔ

ň ķŴƃŏŔƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ łœŔ ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴƄŨǁŁĥ ò Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴƄŏ Ŕ ŨǁŁĥ ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ķŴƄƍŨǁŁĥ ŏŔ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ň ķŴƄŨǁƦƌ ň ň ķŴƄŏŔŨǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ œŔœ ň ň ķŴƄŏŔŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł Ŕň ķŴƄŏŔƌŴŨŏœǁ Ŕ œƦƌ Ņ łœ ň ķŴƄŏŔƍŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ŏŔ Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ň ķŴƄŨǁƦƌ

Ņ œ ň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ ķŴƃŁŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ G

ňŔ Ŕ ň œ ň ƎƀƄŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň ň ł œ ƎƀƃŔ ƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ łœŔ ň ƎƀƃňŔƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ňœ Ŕ łœŔ ňŔ Ŕ ň œ ň ƎƀƄŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň œň ň ò ƎƀƄŔ ŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ ňŔ Ņ Ŕ ň œ ň ƎƀƄƍŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ň ň ƎƀƄŨǁƦƌ Ŕ ŔŔ Ŕ ň ň ƎƀƄňŔŨǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ œŔœ

ň ň ƎƀƄňŔŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ œŔ ł ƎƀƄňŔƌŴŨŏœǁƦƌ Ŕ œŔň Ņ łœ ň ƎƀƄňŔƍŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ňŔ Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ň ƎƀƄŨǁƦƌ Ŕ

ňŔ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕ ň ƎƀƃŁŴŨǁƦƉ Ŕ Ŕ H

ł œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƎŨǁŁĥ ł ł œň ķƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ņœ ň œ ň ķƦŨǁŁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕĥ Ōœ ň œ ň ƎſƦŨǁŁĥ ŔŔ Ŕ

ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ķŴŨǁŁĥ Ņò œ ł œ ň ƎŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ň ŏ Ņ œ Ŕ Ŕ œ Ŕň ƎƌĭƦŨǁŁĥ Ņ ň œ ò Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕň ƎƍſƦŨǁŁĥ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

łœ Ŕ łœ Ŕ ň ƎŨǁƦƌ ł œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ƎŨǁŁŁ ł œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ƎŨǁŁŁ Ņ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ƎƍƀŨǁŁŁ

11 12 13 14 15

ł ƎƌŴŅŨŏœǁƦƌ Ŕ œŔň Ņ łœ ň ƎƍŅŨò œ ǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň œ ŅƎƌŴŨǁŁŁ Ņ łœ ňœ ƎƍŅŨò œ ǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƎƀŨǁŁĥ Ō œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƎƀŨǁŁĥ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ķŴŨǁŁĥ ŏ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƎƌŴŅŨǁŁĥ Ņ œ ò Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƎŨǁŁĥ ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕň ƎƍŅƀòŨǁŁĥ ł ŏ Ņ œ ň ķŁŴŨǁƦƉ Ŕ ŔŔ Ŕ I

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

248 Table 11 C. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs: PaȨel/PaȨȨel (Table 1, Column D)

1

3rd Singular

2

5 6 7

1st

3rd

2nd

9 10

1st

11

16 17 18

3rd

19

1st

C

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F 2nd

24 25

F

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

15

Future Tense (Imperfect)

14

Singular

3rd

12

M

M

8

13

2nd

F

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

M

M F

A

B

C

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

ŏŔ Ņœ łŔ ŴŨǂƉ

ňœ œ łœ ųŨǁ ň ňœ łœ ĬƦŔ Ũǁ Ŕ Ņœ ňœ łœ IJųſƦŨ Ŕǁ ô Ōœ ňœ łœ IJĬŴſƦŨ Ŕǁ ô ňœ ňœ łœ ĬƦŨŔ ǁ ł IJĬŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁœœ ł IJųƀƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏœ œ œ œ łœ IJųƀŨ ô ò Ņ œǁ ň Ņ ňœ œ łœ IJųƀ ô ò ƍƀŨǁ ŏœ ň ł IJųƀƌĭƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ ňœ ò ň ł IJųƀƍſƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ ň ł IJųƀƍŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ œ ł Ŕƌ IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕǂ ł IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔ Łœ ł IJĬŴƀŨǁŁ ô ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ ł IJųƀƍƀŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ łň IJĬŴƀŨǁ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕĥ ł IJųƀƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ łò IJųƀƍŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ł IJųƀƌŴŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ œ łò IJųƀƍŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ œ ł IJĬŴƀŨǂƌ ô ŌŔ œ Ŕ ň ł IJųƀŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ ł IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ł IJųƀƌĭ ô ŏœ œ œ ô Ņ /IJĬŴŨǁ ł IJųƀŨǁ ô ò ŅŔň œ œ ł IJųƀƍƀŨǁ ô ò Ņ ňŔ œ œ ň ŏ Ņœ ł ĬŁŴŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ

ň ħǁ Ŕ œ łœ ƦŨ Ŕ ł Ŕ ǁœłœ œ Ŕňœ łœ ƦŨǁ œ ň ł IJƦŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ƦŨǁ Ŕ ňŔ œ łœ ň ł ŴŨǁ ô Ŕňœ œ ŏŔ œ łœ ķŴŨǁ ò ň ł ƁŨǁ ô Ŕňœ œ ò ňŔ œ łœ ƎƀŨǁ ŏœ ňœ łœ ķĭƦŨǁ Ŕ ňò œ ň œ ł œ ƎſƦŨǁ Ŕ ň ƎŨǁ Ŕ œ łœ ň ħǂƌ Ŕ œ łŔ ň ħǁŁ Ŕ œ łŔ œ ň ħǁŁ Ŕ œ łŔ œ ŌŔ œ łŔ œ ƎƀŨǁŁ ň œ ł ňœ ħŔǁĥ ŏŔ œ łŔ ķŴŨǂƌ Ņò œ ł ƎŨǂƌ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ ķŴŨǁŁ Ŕ œ łŔ œ Ņò œ ł œ ƎŨǁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ň ħǂƌ Ŕ œ łŔ ň ħǁ Ŕ œ łœ ň ł ƁŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ň ł ŏ Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ŴŨǁ ķŴŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ò ň ł ò ň Ŕ ň œ ł œ / ƁŨǁ ƎƀŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ

Infinitive A

B

ñ Ņœ œ łœ ųŨǁ Ņ ňœ łœ ĬñƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ņœ ňœ łœ ñ Ŕǁ ĬƦŨ Ō ň ñ œ Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ųſƦŨ Ņœ ňœ łœ ĬñƦŨǁ Ŕ ŏ ñ œ ǁœłœ ĬŴŨ Ņ ŏœ œ łœ ųñƌŴŨǁ ñ Ņò œ ǁœłœ ųŨ ň ñ Ņ ň œ ǁœ ł œ ųƍƀŨ ŏ ň ñ Ņ œ Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ųƌĭƦŨ ň ň ñ Ņ œ ò Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ųƍſƦŨ ň ñ Ņ Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ųƍŨ œ ł Ŕƌ ñ Ō Ŕǂ ųƀŨ ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœłŔŁœ ųƀŨ ñ ŌŔ œ łŔ œ ųƀŨǁŁ ñ Ņ ŌŔ œ łŔ œ ųƍƀŨǁŁ ň ñ Ō Ŕ œ ł Ŕĥ ųƀŨǁ ñ Ņ ŏŔ œ łŔ ųƌŴŨǂƌ ł ñ Ņ ŅŔ œ òŔ ųƍŨǂƌ ñ Ņ ŏŔ œ łŔ œ ųƌŴŨǁŁ ł ñ Ņ ŅŔ œ òŔ œ ųƍŨǁŁ ñ ŌŔ œ łŔ ųƀŨǂƌ ň ñ ňŔ œ łœ ųƀŨǁ ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœłœ ųƀŨ ñ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ/ĬŴŨǁ ñ ŏœ œ łœ ųƌŴŨǁ ò ñ ŅŔ Ŕ łœ ųŨǁ ň ñ Ņò ňŔ Ŕ łœ ųƍƀŨǁ Ņ ŏ Ņœ ł ĬñŁŴŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ C

ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņœ œ łœ Ņ ň ĴƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œ łœ Ņ ň ĴƦŨ Ŕ œ Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ĴŴŨ Ŕ ŏ œ ǁœłœ ƅƌŴŨǁ ŔŅ ŏœ œ łœ Ņ ƅŨ Ŕ ò œ ǁœłœ ň ƅƍƀŨǁ ŔŅ ňœ œ łœ ň ƅƍŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁœ ł œ œ ł Ŕƌ ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕǂ ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁœłŔŁœ ň ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ ł Ŕĥ ƅƌŴŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ ŏŔ œ łŔ œ łò Ŕ ƅƍŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǂƌ

ƅŨǂƌ Ŕ ŅŔ œ łŔ

Ņ Ņ ĴŁŴŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ ŏŔ œ łŔ D

249

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ł ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ňœ œ œ ň ň ł ƁƃƦŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ œ ňœ ňœ łœ ƁƃƦŨ Ŕǁ ô ł ŏ ƁƃŴŨ ô õ œ ǁœœ ł ƁƄƌŴŨǁ ô õ ň ŏœ œ œ ò œ łœ ƁƄŨ ô õ ň œǁ ň ł ƁƄƍƀŨǁ ô ň ňœ œ œ ň ł ƁƄƍŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁœ œ œ ł Ŕƌ ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕǂ ł ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁœŔ Łœ łň ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕĥ ł ƁƄƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ŕň ŏŔ œ Ŕ łò ƁƄƍŨǂƌ ô Ŕ ň ŅŔ œ Ŕ

ł ƁƄŨǂƌ ô Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ

ň ŏ Ņœ ł Ɓƃ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǂƉ ô Ŕ ŁŴŨ E

ł ƁƍŨǁ ô łœ œ œ ł ň ł ƁƌƦŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ œ Ņœ ň ł ƁƌƦŨ ô Ŕ ǁœ œ Ōœ ňœ łœ ƁƍſƦŨ Ŕǁ ô ł ƁƌŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁœœ ł ƁƍƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏœ œ œ œ łœ ƁƍŨ ô ò Ņ œǁ ň ł ƁƍƍƀŨǁ ô Ņ ňœ œ œ ŏœ ň ł ƁƍƌĭƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ ňœ ò ň ł ƁƍƍſƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ œ ł Ŕƌ ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕǂ ł ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœŔ Łœ ł ƁƍŨǁŁ ô łŔ œ Ŕ œ ł ƁƍƍƀŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŌŔ œ Ŕ œ ł ƁƍƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ łò ƁƍƍŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ ł ƁƍƌŴŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ œ łò ƁƍƍŨǁŁ ô Ņ ŅŔ œ Ŕ œ ň ł ƁƍƀŨǁ ô łŔ œ œ ł ƁƍƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ł Ɓƍƌĭ ô Ņ /ƁƌŴŨǁ ô ŏœ œ œ ò ł ƁƍŨǁ ô ŅŔňŔ œ ł ƁƍƍƀŨǁ ô Ņò ňŔ Ŕ œ ł ŏ Ņœ ł ƁƌôŁŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǂƉ F

ŏŔ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ķŴƄŨǁ ŏŔ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ ķŴƃƦŨǁ

ňœ łœ ŏŔ œ Ŕǁ ķŴƃƦŨ ŏ Ŕ ŏ œ ǁœłœ ķŴƃŴŨ ŏŔ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ ķŴƄƌŴŨǁ ňœ łœ ŏŔ ò Ŕǁ ķŴƄŨ Ņ ň œň œ łœ ķŴƄŏŔƍƀŨǁ ňœ łœ ŏŔ Ņ Ŕǁ ķŴƄƍŨ ňœł ŏŔ Ŕǂ ķŴƄŨ Ŕƌ ňœł œ ŏ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŔ Ł ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ł Ŕ ňĥ ķŴƄŨǁ ŏŔ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ ł Ŕ ķŴƄƌŴŨǂƌ ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ łò Ŕ ķŴƄƍŨǂƌ ňœł ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ǂƌ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ

Ņ ķŴƃŏŔŁŴŨǂƉ Ŕ ŏŔ œ łŔ G

ňŔ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ƎƀƄŨǁ ňŔ Ŕ ł œ ł œ ƎƀƃƦŨǁ Ŕ

ň ň Ŕ œ Ũǁ ƎƀƃƦ Ŕ œ łœ ň Ŕ ŏ œ ǁœłœ ƎƀƃŴŨ ňŔ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ ƎƀƄƌŴŨǁ ňœ łœ ňŔ ò Ŕǁ ƎƀƄŨ Ņ ň œň œ łœ ƎƀƄňŔƍƀŨǁ ňœ łœ ňŔ Ņ Ŕǁ ƎƀƄƍŨ ňœł ňŔ Ŕǂ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕƌ ňœł œ ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŔ Ł ň Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ł Ŕ ňĥ ƎƀƄŨǁ ňŔ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ łŔ ƎƀƄƌŴŨǂƌ ň Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ łò Ŕ ƎƀƄƍŨǂƌ ňœł ň Ŕ Ŕ ǂƌ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ

ňŔ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ łŔ ƎƀƃŁŴŨǂƉ Ŕ H

łœ œ łœ ƎŨǁ ł ňœ łœ ķƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ņœ ňœ łœ ķƦŨŔ ǁ Ōœ ňœ łœ ƎſƦŨ Ŕǁ

1 2 3 4 5

ķŴŨŏœǁœłœ Ņ ŏœ œ łœ ƎƌŴŨǁ Ņ ƎŨò œ ǁœłœ Ņ ň œň œ łœ ƎƍƀŨǁ ňœ łœ Ņ ŏ œ Ŕǁ ƎƌĭƦŨ ňœ łœ Ņ ň œ ò Ŕǁ ƎƍſƦŨ

6 7 8 9 10

œ ł Ŕƌ ƎŨłŔǂ ƎŨłŔǁœłŔŁœ łŔ œ łŔ œ ƎŨǁŁ Ņ ŌŔ œ łŔ œ ƎƍƀŨǁŁ

11 12 13 14 15

ŏŔ œ łŔ ƎƌŴŅŨǂƌ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ łò Ŕ ƎƍŨǂƌ Ņ ŏŔ œ łŔ œ ƎƌŴŨǁŁ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ łò Ŕ œ ƎƍŨǁŁ łŔňœ łœ ƎƀŨǁ ƎƀŨŌŔǁœłœ ŏœ œ łœ Ņ ŏ œ ǁœł/œ ķŴŨǁ ƎƌŴŨ ŅŔòŔ łœ ƎŨǁ Ņò ňŔňŔ łœ ƎƍƀŨǁ ł ŏ Ņœ ł ķŁŴŨǂƉ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ I

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

250 Table 11 D. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs: EthpaȨal/ EthpaȨȨal (Table 1, Column E)

1

3rd Singular

2

5 6 7

1st

3rd

2nd

9 10

1st

11

16 17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

C

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

F

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

15

Future Tense (Imperfect)

14

Singular

3rd

12

M

M

8

13

2nd

F

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

M

Infinitive

A

B

C

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

ł ň ň œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ħǁ ųŨǁ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ň ň ňœ łœ ň ĬƦŔ Ũǁ ƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ŕ łŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ł Ņ ł œ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň œ Ŕ œ œŔ ƦŨǁŁĥ IJųſƦŨǁ ô Ōœ ňœ łœ ň œ ł ł ň IJƦŨǁŁĥ IJĬŴſƦŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ô Ŕ œ œŔ ô ň ňœ ňœ łœ ň ł ň œ œ ƦŨǁŁĥ ĬƦŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ łœ łœ ň ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň / ŴŨǁŁĥ IJĬŴŨǁ ô Ŕ ł ł Ŕň ô ŏŔ œ œ Ŕ ł ň ķŴŨǁŁĥ IJųƀƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏ œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ò ł ł ň ò Ņ œ ǁœłœ ŁĥŔň / ƁŨǁŁĥ IJųƀŨ ô Ŕ ł œ ł œ Ŕň ô œ œŔ ò ň Ŕ ǁŁĥ Ņ ň œ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎƀŨ IJųƀ ô ò ƍƀŨǁ ŏœ łœ łœ ň ŏœ ň ł ň ķĭƦŨǁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ IJųƀƌĭƦŨǁ ô Ņ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ňœ ò ň ł ň ò ň œ Ŕ ł œ ł œ Ŕň ƎſƦŨǁŁĥ IJųƀƍſƦŨǁ ô Ņ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł ň ň ł ň ƎŨǁŁĥ Ŕ œ łœŔ IJųƀƍŨǁ ô Ņ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł œ ł œ Ŕ ƌň ħǁƦƌ Ŕ œ łœ Ŕ ň IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁƦ ł ň ł ň ħǁ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔœ IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł ň ł ň ħǁ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔœ IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł ň Ō Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔňœ ƎƀŨǁ IJųƀƍƀŨ ô Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł ň ł ň ħǁ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ŁĥŔ ŏŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ł ķŴŨǁƦƌ IJųƀƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ Ņò œ ł œ ň œ łœ Ŕ ň ò Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ƎŨǁƦƌ Ŕ Ŕ IJųôƀƍŨ ŏ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁŁŔňœ ł ň ķŴŨǁ IJųƀƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ Ņò œ ł œ ň œ ł ň ƎŨǁ Ŕ ŁŁŔ IJųƀƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł œ łœ Ŕ ň ħǁƦƌ Ŕ œ łœ Ŕ ň IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁƦƌ ł ň ň ł ň ħǁ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ IJųƀŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ ŁĥŔ ł ł ň ł ň ƁŨǁ IJĬŴƀŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œŁĥŔ ô Ō Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł ł ň ł ň ķĭŏ / ŴŨǁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ œ Ŕ IJųƀƌĭ ô Ņ /IJĬŴŨǁ ô ŏ œ œ œŁĥŔ ò ł œ ł œ Ŕ ň IJųƀƍƀŨ ł œ Ŕň ƎƀŨň / ƁŨ ô Ŕ ǁŁĥ ô ò Ņ Ŕ œ Łĥ ô ò Ņ ň Ŕ /IJųƀŨǁ ň ŏ Ņœ łœ ň ŏŔ Ņœ łœ Ŕ ň ŴŨǁƦƉ ĬŁŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁƦŔ Ɖ A

B

ň ñ Ņ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųŨǁ ň ň ň ñ Ŕ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ĬƦŨǁ Ņ ň ň ñ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ĬƦŨǁ Ō ň ň ñ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųſƦŨǁ Ņ ň ň ñ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ĬƦŨǁ ň ñ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ĬŴŨǁ ň ñ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƌŴŨǁ ň ñ Ņò œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųŨǁ ň ň ñ Ņ ň œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƍƀŨǁ ŏ ň ň ñ Ņ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƌĭƦŨǁ ň ň ň ñ Ņ œ ò Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƍſƦŨ ň ň ñ Ņ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƍŨǁ œ łœ Ŕ ň ñ Ō Ŕ ǁƦƌ ųƀŨ ň ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁŁŔœ ųƀŨ ň ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁŁŔœ ųƀŨ ň ñ Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁŁŔœ ųƍƀŨ ň ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁĥŔ ųƀŨ ñ Ņ ŏŔ œ łŔ ųƌŴŨǂƌ òœ łœ ň ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ųƍŨ Ŕ ň ł œ ŏ Ņ œ ñ Ŕ ǁŁŁŔœ ųƌŴŨ ò ň ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœ ł œ ŁŁŔœ ųƍŨ œ łœ Ŕ ň ñ Ō Ŕ ǁƦƌ ųƀŨ ň ň ñ ň Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƀŨǁ ň ñ Ō Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƀŨǁ ň ñ Ņ /ĬŴŨǁ ñ ŏ œ œ ł œŁĥŔ ųƌĭ ò ň ñ Ņ ò ň Ŕ /ųŨǁ ñ Ņ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔ ųƍƀŨ Ņ Ņœ łœ ň ñ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ ĬŁŴŨ Ŕ C

ň ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ Ņ ň ň ĴƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ Ņ ň ň ĴƦŨǁ Ŕ œ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ĴŴŔŨǁ ň ƅƌŴŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ň Ņ ƅŨǁ Ŕ ò œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ň ƅƍƀŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ň œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ň ň ƅƍŨǁ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ň ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁŁŔœ ň ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁĥŔ ŏŔ œ łŔ ƅƌŴ Ŕ Ņ Ũǂƌ òœ łœ ň ƅƍŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ Ŕ

œ łœ Ŕ ň ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ

Ņ Ņœ łœ ň ĴŁŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ Ŕ D

251

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ł ň ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ň œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ň ň ł ň ƁƃƦŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ

ňœ ňœ łœ ň ƁƃƦŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ô ł ň ŏ ƁƃŴŨǁ ô õ œ œ œ ŁĥŔň ł ƁƄƌŴŨǁ ô õ ň ŏ œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ò ł ň ƁƄŨǁ ô õ ň œ ň œ œ ŁĥŔň ł ƁƄƍƀŨǁ ô ň ň œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ň ł ň ƁƄƍŨǁ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁƦƌ ł ň ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł ň ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁœœ ŁĥŔ ł ƁƄƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ŕň ŏŔ œ Ŕ òœ łœ ň ƁƄƍŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ ň Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ

œ łœ Ŕ ň ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁƦƌ

ň Ņœ łœ ň ƁƃŁŴŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ E

ł ň ƁƍŨǁ ô ł œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł ň ł ň ƁƌƦŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ Ņœ ň ł ň ƁƌƦŨǁ ô Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ Ōœ ňœ łœ ň ƁƍſƦŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ ô

ł ň ƁƌŴŨǁ ô ŏ œ œ œ ŁĥŔň ł ƁƍƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏ œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł ň ƁƍŨǁ ô ò Ņ œ ň œ œ ŁĥŔň ł ƁƍƍƀŨǁ ô Ņ ň œ œ œ ŁĥŔ ŏœ ň ł ň ƁƍƌĭƦŨǁ ô Ņ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ňœ ò ň ł ň ƁƍƍſƦŨǁ ô Ņ Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ œ łœ Ŕ ň ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁƦƌ ł ň ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł ň ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŁŔœ ł ň ƁƍƍƀŨ ô Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœœ ŁŔŁœ ł ƁƍƌŴŨǂƌ ô Ņ ŏŔ œ Ŕ òœ łœ ň ƁƍƍŨ Ŕ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ň ł œ ŏ Ņ œ ƁƍƌŴŨ ô Ŕ ǁŁŁŔœ ò ł ň ƁƍƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœ œ ŁŁŔœ ň ł ň ƁƍƀŨǁ ô ł Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł ň ƁƍƀŨǁ ô Ō Ŕ œ œ ŁĥŔ ł ň Ɓƍƌĭ ô Ņ /ƁƌŴŨǁ ô ŏ œ œ œŁĥŔ ò ł ň ƁƍƍƀŨ ô Ņ ò ň Ŕ /ƁƍŨǁ ô Ņ Ŕ Ŕ œ ŁĥŔ ł Ņœ łœ ň ƁƌŁŴŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ F

ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƄŨǁ ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƃƦŨǁ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƃƦŨǁ ŏ Ŕ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƃŴŨǁ ŏ Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƄƌŴŨǁ ŏ Ŕ ò Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƄŨǁ ŏ Ŕ Ņ ň œ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƄƍƀŨǁ ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴƄƍŨǁ ňœ łœ ň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ ňœ łœ ňœ ŏ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁŔ ňœ łœ ň ŏŔ Ŕǁ ķŴƄŨ Łĥ Ŕ ł ŏ œ ķŴƄƌŴŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ ŏŔ Ŕ òœ łœ ň ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ķŴƄƍŨ Ŕ ňœ łœ ň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ

Ņœ łœ ň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ ķŴƃŁŴŨ Ŕ G

ň Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ł œ Łĥň ƎƀƄŨǁ Ŕ ň ň ł ł œ œ ƎƀƃƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ

ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ň œ ł œ Łĥň ƎƀƃƦŨǁ Ŕ ň ň ł œ ŏ œ œ ƎƀƃŴŨǁ Łĥ Ŕ Ŕň ň Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ Łĥ ƎƀƄƌŴŨǁ Ŕ ňœ łœ ň ň ò ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁĥŔň ň ň Ņ ƎƀƄƍƀŨǁ Ŕ ň œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔ ň Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ň œ ł œ Łĥň ƎƀƄƍŨǁ Ŕ ňœ łœ ň ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁƦƌ Ŕ ňœ łœ ňœ ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁŔ ňœ łœ ň ňŔ Ŕǁ ƎƀƄŨ Łĥ Ŕ ň ł œ ƎƀƄƌŴŨǂƌ Ŕ Ņ ŏŔ Ŕ òœ łœ ň ň Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ƎƀƄƍŨ Ŕ ňœ łœ ň ň Ŕ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ

ł œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎŨǁ ł ňœ łœ ň ķƦŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ņœ ňœ łœ ň ķƦŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ Ōœ ňœ łœ ň ƎſƦŨǁ Ŕ ŁĥŔ

ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ķŴŨǁ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎƌŴŨǁ Ņò œ œ ł œ ň ƎŨǁ Łĥ Ŕ ň œ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ŅƎƍƀŨǁ Ņ ŏ œ Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎƌĭƦŨǁ Ņ ň œ ò Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎƍſƦŨǁ

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

œ łœ Ŕ ň ƎŨłŔǁƦƌ ň ƎŨłŔǁœłœ ŁŁŔœ ň ƎŨłŔǁœłœ ŁŁŔœ Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁŁŔňœ ƎƍƀŨ

11 12 13 14 15

Ņ ŏŔ œ łŔ ƎƌŴŨǂƌ òœ łœ ň Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁƦƌ ƎƍŨ Ŕ ŅƎƌŴŨŏ Ŕ ǁœłœ ŁŁŔňœ òœ łœ ňœ Ņ Ņ Ŕǁ ŁŁ ƎƍŨ Ŕ

ł Ŕ ň œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎƀŨǁ Ō Ŕ œ ł œ ŁĥŔň ƎƀŨǁ ŏ œ œ ł Łĥ Ņ ŏ œ œ ł œ/ķŴŨǁ œ Ŕň ƎƌŴŨǁ Ņ Ŕ ò Ŕ ł œ ŁĥŔň Ņ ò ň Ŕ /ƎŨǁ ƎƍƀŨ ł ŏ Ņœ łœ ň Ņ ň Ŕ ŏ Ŕ ǁƦƉ ƎƀƃŁŴŨ ķŁŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ œ łœ Ŕ ň Ŕ Ŕ ǁƦƉ H

1

I

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

252 Table 11 E. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs: AphȨel (Table 1, Column F)

1

3rd Singular

2

5 6 7

1st

3rd

8

2nd

9 10

1st

11

16 17 18

3rd

19

1st

24 25

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

F

ò ň Ŕ ň œ Ŕł ƎƀŨǁĥ

F M F C

M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F 2nd

C

M

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

15

Future Tense (Imperfect)

14

Singular

3rd

12 13

2nd

B

ň ł ħǁĥ Ŕœ Ŕ ł ƦŨǁĥ Ŕ łŔ œ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň œ Ŕł ƦŨǁĥ œ ň ł IJƦŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ł ƦŨǁĥ Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ ň ł ŏ Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ŴŨǁĥ ķŴŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

A

M F

/

ò ň ł ƁŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ

ŏœ ňœ ł ķĭƦŨǁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ňò œ ň œ ł ƎſƦŨǁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ňœ ł ň ł łƎƍŨǁĥ Ŕ Ŕ / ƎŨǁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕ ň ħǂƌ Ŕ œ Ŕł ň ł ħǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ ň ł ħǁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ƎƀŨǁŁ ň ł ħǁĥ Ŕœ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł ķŴŨǂƌ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕł ƎŨǂƌ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ķŴŨǁŁ Ņò œ ł œ ƎŨǁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ň ħǂƌ Ŕ œ Ŕł ň ł ħǁĥ Ŕœ Ŕ ň ł Ō Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ƁŨǁĥ ƎƀŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ň ł ŏ Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ŴŨǁĥ ķŴŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ò ň ł ò ň Ŕ ň œ Ŕ ł / ƁŨǁĥ ƎƀŨǁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ ŏŔ Ņœ Ŕ ł ŴŨǂƉ

Infinitive A

ň Ŕ œ Ŕł ųŨǁĥ ň ň ł ĬƦŔ ŨŔǁœ Ŕ ĥ Ņœ ňœ ł IJųſƦŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ô Ōœ ňœ ł IJĬŴſƦŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ô ňœ ňœ ł ĬƦŨŔ ǁĥŔ œ Ŕł IJĬŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁĥ œ Ŕł IJųƀƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ œ Ŕł IJųƀŨ ô ò Ņ œ ǁĥ ňœ ł Ņ ň œ ǁĥ IJųƀ Ŕ ô ò ƍƀŨ ň ŏ œ œ Ŕł IJųƀƌĭƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ ňœ ò ňœ ł IJųƀƍſƦŨ Ŕ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ ł ň œ IJųƀƍŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁĥŔ IJĬŴƀŨǂ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ƌł ł IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł IJųƀƍƀŨ ô Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔĥ œ Ŕ ƌł IJųƀƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕǂ œ ò Ŕ ƌł IJųƀƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ ł IJųƀƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ òł IJųƀƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœŔ Łœ œ Ŕ ƌł IJĬŴƀ ô ŨŌŔǂ ň ł IJųƀŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ĥ ł IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔĥ ł IJųƀƌĭ ô ŏ œ ǁœŔĥ ô Ņ /IJĬŴŨ œ Ŕ ĥł IJųƀŨ ô ò Ņ Ŕǁ ň ł IJųƀƍƀŨ ô ò Ņ ň Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ĥ ň ŏ Ņœ ł ĬŁŴŨǂ Ŕ Ŕ ŔƉ B

Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕł ųñŨǁĥ Ņ ňœ ł ĬñƦŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥŔ Ņœ ňœ ł ñ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ĬƦŨ Ō ňœ ł ñ œ Ŕ ǁĥ ųſƦŨ Ŕ Ņœ ňœ ł ñ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ĬƦŨ œ Ŕł ñ ŏ œ ǁĥ ĬŴŨ œ Ŕł ñ Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ ųƌŴŨ œ Ŕł ñ Ņò œ ǁĥ ųŨ ňœ ł ñ Ņ ň œ ǁĥ ųƍƀŨ Ŕ ň ŏ œ Ŕł ñ Ņ œ Ŕ ǁĥ ųƌĭƦŨ ň ňœ ł ñ Ņ œ ò Ŕ ǁĥ ųƍſƦŨ Ŕ ł ň œ ñ Ņ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ųƍŨ ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ƌł ųƀŨǂ ł ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ųƀŨ ł ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ųƀŨ ł ñ Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ųƍƀŨ ł ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔĥ ųƀŨ œ Ŕ ƌł ñ Ņ ŏ Ŕǂ ųƌŴŨ œ ò Ŕ ƌł ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ ųƍŨ ł ñ Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ųƌŴŨ ł ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœòŔŁœ ųƍŨ œ Ŕ ƌł ñ Ō Ŕǂ ųƀŨ ň ł ñ ň Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ĥ ųƀŨ ł ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔĥ ųƀŨ ł ñ Ņ /ĬŴŨ ñ ŏ œ ǁœŔĥ ųƌĭ ò ł ñ Ņ Ŕǁ ųŨ Ŕĥ ňŔ ł Ņ ò ň Ŕǁ ñųƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕĥ Ņ ŏ Ņœ ł ñ Ŕ Ŕ ŔƉ ĬŁŴŨǂ C

Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕł ƅŔŨǁĥ Ņ ňœ ł ĴƦŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥ Ņ ňœ ł ĴƦŨ Ŕ Ŕ œ Ŕ ǁĥ ł œ ŏ œ ĴŴŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ œ Ŕł ƅƌŴŨ Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ Ņ œ ł ƅŨ Ŕ Ŕ ò œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ň Ņ œ ƅƍƀŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ňœ ł ƅƍŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ œ Ņ ƅŨǂ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ƌł ł ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁœŔĥ œ Ŕ ƌł ƅƌŴŨ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕǂ œ ò Ŕ ƌł ƅƍŨ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ

œ Ŕ ƌł ƅŨ Ŕ Ņ Ŕǂ

Ņ Ņ ĴŁŴŨǂ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ Ɖł D

253

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ň Ŕ œ Ŕł ƁƄ ô Ŕ Ũǁĥ ň ňœ ł ƁƃƦŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥ ňœ ňœ ł ƁƃƦŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ô œ Ŕł ŏ ƁƃŴŨ ô õ œ ǁĥ œ Ŕł ƁƄƌŴŨ ô õ ň ŏ œ ǁĥ ò œ Ŕł ƁƄŨ ô õ ň œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ƁƄƍƀŨ Ŕ ô ň ň œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ƁƄƍŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁĥ ň œ ƁƄŨǂ ô Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ƌł ł ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁœŔĥ œ Ŕ ƌł ƁƄƌŴŨ ô Ŕ ň ŏ Ŕǂ œ ò Ŕ ƌł ƁƄƍŨ ô Ŕ ň Ņ Ŕǂ

œ Ŕ ƌł ƁƄŨ ô Ŕ ň Ŕǂ

ň Ņ ƁƃŁŴŨǂ ô Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ Ɖł E

ł Ŕ œ Ŕł Ɓƍ ô Ũǁĥ ł ňœ ł ƁƌƦŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥ Ņœ ňœ ł ƁƌƦŨ ô Ŕ ǁĥŔ Ōœ ňœ ł ƁƍſƦŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ô

œ Ŕł ƁƌŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁĥ œ Ŕł ƁƍƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ œ Ŕł ƁƍŨ ô ò Ņ œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ƁƍƍƀŨ Ŕ ô Ņ ň œ ǁĥ ň ŏ œ œ Ŕł ƁƍƌĭƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ ňœ ò ňœ ł ƁƍƍſƦŨ Ŕ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ ƁƍŨǂ ô ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ƌł ł ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł ƁƍŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ ł ƁƍƍƀŨ ô Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ œ Ŕ ƌł ƁƍƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕǂ œ ò Ŕ ƌł ƁƍƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ ł ƁƍƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǁœŔŁœ òł ƁƍƍŨ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœŔ Łœ ň ł ƁƍƀŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ĥ ł ƁƍƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔĥ ł Ɓƍƌĭ ô Ņ /ƁƌŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁœŔĥ ò ł ƁƍŨ Ŕĥ ô Ņ Ŕǁ ňŔ ł ň Ņ ò ƁƍƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕĥ ô Ŕǁ ł ŏ Ņœ ł ƁƌŁŴŨǂ ô Ŕ Ŕ ŔƉ F

ň ł ķŴƄŏ Ŕ Ũǁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕ ł ķŴƃŏŔƦŨǁĥ Ŕ łŔ œ Ŕ

ňœ ł ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ǁĥ ķŴƃƦŨ Ŕ ňœ œ ł ŏ ŏ ķŴƃŴŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ł ňœ ŏ ķŴƄƌŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ŏ ò ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ł ňœ ŏ Ņ ķŴƄƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕ ň œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ ķŴƄƍŨ Ŕ ňœ ł ŏ ķŴƄŨǂ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕƌ ň ł ŏ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ Łœ ňœ ł ŏŔ Ŕǁ ķŴƄŨ Ŕĥ ŏ œ ķŴƄƌŴŨ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǂŔ ƌł ŏŔ Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ œ ò Ŕ ƌł ķŴƄƍŨ ňœ ł ŏŔ Ŕǂ ķŴƄŨ Ŕƌ

ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕ Ɖł ķŴƃŁŴŨǂ G

ň ł ƎƀƄňŔŨǁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕ ł ƎƀƃňŔƦŨǁĥ Ŕ łŔ œ Ŕ

ňœ ł ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ǁĥ ƎƀƃƦŨ Ŕ ňœ œ ł ň ŏ ƎƀƃŴŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ł ňœ ň ƎƀƄƌŴŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ ňœ ł ň ò ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥŔ ł ňœ ň Ņ ƎƀƄŔ ƍƀŨň œ ǁĥ Ŕ ňœ ł ň Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁĥ ƎƀƄƍŨ Ŕ ňœ ł ň ƎƀƄŨǂ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕƌ ň ł ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ Łœ ňœ ł ňŔ Ŕǁ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕĥ ň œ ƎƀƄƌŴŨ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǂŔ ƌł ňŔ Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ œ ò Ŕ ƌł ƎƀƄƍŨ ňœ ł ňŔ Ŕǂ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕƌ

ň Ŕ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕ Ɖł ƎƀƃŁŴŨǂ Ŕ H

ł Ŕ œ Ŕł ƎŨǁĥ ł ňœ ł ķƦŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁĥŔ Ņœ ňœ ł ķƦŨŔ ǁĥŔ Ōœ ňœ ł ƎſƦŨ Ŕ ǁĥŔ

ňœ ł ķŴŨŏœǁĥ Ŕ ňœ ł Ņ ŏ œ ǁĥ ƎƌŴŨ Ŕ Ņò œ ň œ ł ƎŨǁĥŔ ňœ ł ŅƎƍƀŨň œ ǁĥ Ŕ ň ŏ œ Ŕł Ņ œ Ŕ ǁĥ ƎƌĭƦŨ ňœ ł Ņ ň œ ò Ŕ ǁĥ ƎƍſƦŨ Ŕ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ƌł ƎŨǂ ł ƎŨłŔǁœŔŁœ ł ƎŨłŔǁœŔŁœ Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁłœ ƎƍƀŨ

11 12 13 14 15

œ Ŕ ƌł Ņ ŏ Ŕǂ ƎƌŴŨ œ ò Ŕ ƌł Ņ Ņ Ŕǂ ƎƍŨ Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǁœŔŁłœ ƎƌŴŨ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ǁœòŔŁłœ ƎƍŨ ň ł ƎƀŨłŔǁœ Ŕ ĥ ł ƎƀŨŌŔǁœŔĥ ł ƎƌĭŅ/ķŴŨŏœǁœŔĥ ò ł ƎŨŅŔǁ Ŕĥ ňŔ ł ŅƎƍƀŨ ò ň Ŕǁ Ŕ Ŕĥ ł ŏ Ņœ ł ķŁŴŨǂ Ŕ Ŕ ŔƉ I

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

254 Table 11 F. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to Verbs: EttaphȨal (Table 1, Column G)

1

3rd Singular

2

5 6 7

1st

3rd

2nd

9 10

1st

11

16 17 18

3rd

19

1st

C

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F 2nd

24 25

F

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

15

Future Tense (Imperfect)

14

Singular

3rd

12

M

M

8

13

2nd

F

Plural

4

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

M

Infinitive

M F

A

B

C

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

ł ł ň ň Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œň ħǁŁŁĥ ųŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł ň ň ň œ ł œ œň ĬƦŔ ŨŔǁŁŁĥ ƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ łŔ œ Ŕ œ œ ł ň ł ł Ņ œ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œň œ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ IJųſƦŨǁŁŁĥ ƦŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ō œ ł œ ł œ œň œ ł ł ň IJƦŨǁŁŁĥ IJĬŴſƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ô ł œ œň ň œ ł œ ł œ œň ň œ ƦŨǁŁŁĥ ĬƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ ł œ œň œ Ŕł œ œň ŏ œ ǁŁŁĥ /ŴŨǁŁŁĥ IJĬŴŨ ô Ŕ ł Ŕł ň ô ŏŔ œ Ŕ œ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ķŴŨǁŁŁĥ IJųƀƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ œ ǁŁŁĥ ł œ œň ò ł ł ň ò Ņ œ ǁœŔŁŁĥ /ƁŨǁŁŁĥ IJųƀŨ ô Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ô ň œ ł œ œň ò ňŔ œ Ŕ œ œ Ņ ň œǁ ƎƀŨǁŁŁĥ IJųƀ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ô ò ƍƀŨ ŏ œ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ ł œ œ Ŕł œ œň ķĭƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ IJųƀƌĭƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ň œ ò ł œ ł œ œň ò ň œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ƎſƦŨǁŁŁĥ IJųƀƍſƦŨ Ŕ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ł ň ł œ ƎŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ IJųƀƍŨ Ŕœœ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ł łœ œ ň łœ œ ň ħǁ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ IJĬŴƀŨǁ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ł łň łň ħǁŁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ IJĬŴƀŨǁ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ł łň łň ħǁŁŁ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ IJĬŴƀŨǁ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ łň Ō Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ň œ ƎƀŨǁŁŁ IJųƀƍƀŨ ô Ņ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁŁœ œ ł ł ň ł œ œň ħǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁŁĥ łœ œ ň ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ķŴŨǁŁƦƌ IJųƀƌŴŨ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ ǁœŔŁƦƌ òłœ œ ň Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕł œ œ ň ƎŨǁŁƦƌ IJųƀƍŨǁ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łň ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕł œ ň œ ķŴŨǁŁŁ IJųƀƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ Ņò œ ł œ ň œ òł ň ƎŨǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ IJųƀƍŨǁ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ł ł łœ œ ň ħǁŁƦƌ Ŕ œ Ŕœ œň IJĬŴƀŨǁ ô Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ł ł ň ň ł œ œň ħǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ IJųƀŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł ł ň ł œ œň ƁŨǁŁŁĥ IJĬŴƀŨ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁŁĥ ł ł ň ł œ œň ķĭŏ/ŴŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕ œ œ IJųƀƌ ô Ņ ĭŏ/IJĬŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁœŔŁŁĥ ł œ œň ò ł ł ň ò Ņ Ŕ ǁœŔŁŁĥ /ƁŨǁŁŁĥ IJųƀŨ ô Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ô ň ł œ œň ò ňŔ œ Ŕ œ œ ƎƀŨǁŁŁĥ IJųƀƍƀŨ ô ò Ņ ň Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ň ŏ Ņœ łœ œ ň ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ŴŨǁŁƦƉ ĬŁŴŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƉ A

B

ł ň ñ ŅŔ œ Ŕ œ œ ųŨǁŁŁĥ Ņ ň œ ł œ œň ĬñƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ œ ł œ ł œ œň ñ Ŕ Ŕ ĬƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ō ł ł ň ñ œ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ųſƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ņ ł ł ň ñ œ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ĬƦŨǁŁŁĥ ł ň ñ ŏœ œ Ŕœ œ ĬŴŨǁŁŁĥ ł ň ñ Ņ ŏœ œ Ŕœ œ ųƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ ł œ œň ñ Ņò œ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ųŨǁ ň ł œ œň ñ Ņ ň œ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ųƍƀŨǁ ŏ ł œ ł œ œň ñ Ņ œ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ųƌĭƦŨ Ŕ ň ł œ Ŕł œ œň ñ Ņ œ ò Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ųƍſƦŨ ł œ ł œ œň ñ Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ųƍŨ Ŕ łœ œ ň œ Ō ñ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ųƀŨǁ łň ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ųƀŨǁ łň ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ųƀŨǁ łň ñ Ņ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ųƍƀŨǁ ł œ œň ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ųƀŨǁ łœ œ ň ñ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ųƌŴŨǁ łœ œ ň ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁƦƌ ųƍŨǁ łň ñ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ųƌŴŨǁ łň ñ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ųƍŨǁ łœ œ ň ñ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ųƀŨǁ ň ł ň ñ ň Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ Łœ Łĥœ ųƀŨ ł œ œň ñ Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁŁĥ ųƀŨ ł œ œň ñ ŏ œ ǁœŔŁŁĥ ųƌñŅĭŏ/ĬŴŨ ò ł œ œň ñ Ņ Ŕǁ ųŨ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ň Ŕ ł œ œň Ņ ò ň Ŕǁ ñųƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕ ŁŁĥ Ņ ŏ Ņœ łœ œ ň ñ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƉ ĬŁŴŨǁ C

ł ň ƅŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ ŅŔ œ Ŕ œ œ Ņ ň ł ň ĴƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ Ņ ł ł ň ĴƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ œ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ ł ň ĴŴŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ ŏ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ƅƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ ŔŅ ŏœ œ Ŕœ œ Ņ ł œ œň ƅŨǁ Ŕ ò œ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ň ł œ œň ƅƍƀŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ň œ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ƅƍŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ łœ œ ň œ Ņ ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ł œ œň œ ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁŁ

ł œ œň ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ łœ œ ň ƌ ƅƌŴŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦ łœ œ ň ò œ Ņ Ņ ƅƍŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łœ œ ň ƅŨǁ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ

Ņ Ņ łœ œ ň ĴŁŴŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƉ D

255

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ł ň ƁƄŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ ňŔ œ Ŕ œ œ ň ň ł ň ƁƃƦŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ

ň œ ł œ ł œ œň ƁƃƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ô ł ň ŏ ƁƃŴŨǁŁŁĥ ô õ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ƁƄƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ ô õ ň ŏœ œ Ŕœ œ ł œ œň ò ƁƄŨǁ ô õ ň œ ň œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł œ œň ƁƄƍƀŨǁ ô ň ň œ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ƁƄƍŨ Ŕ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ łœ œ ň ň œ ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łň ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ł œ œň ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ łœ œ ň ƁƄƌŴŨǁ ô Ŕ ň ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ òłœ œ ň ƁƄƍŨǁ ô Ŕ ň Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łœ œ ň ƁƄŨǁ ô Ŕ ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ

ň Ņ łœ œ ň ƁƃŁŴŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƉ E

ł ň ƁƍŨǁŁŁĥ ô łŔ œ Ŕ œ œ ł ň ł ň ƁƌƦŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ Ŕ œ Ŕœœ Ņœ ł ł ň ƁƌƦŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ŕ œ Ŕœœ Ō œ ł œ ł œ œň ƁƍſƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ ô

ł ň ƁƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ ô ŏ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ƁƍƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ ô Ņ ŏœ œ Ŕœ œ ł œ œň ƁƍŨǁ ô ò Ņ œ ň œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł œ œň ƁƍƍƀŨǁ ô Ņ ň œ œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ŏ œ ł œ ł œ œň ƁƍƌĭƦŨ Ŕ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ň ł œ ò œ Ŕ ł œ Łĥœň ƁƍƍſƦŨ ô Ņ Ŕ ǁŁ łœ œ ň ƁƍŨǁ ô ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łň ƁƍŨǁ ô ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ łň ƁƍŨǁ ô ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ł œň œ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁ Ɓƍƍƀ ô Ņ Ũǁ łœ œ ň ƁƍƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łœ œ ň Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁƦƌ Ɓƍƍ ô Ņ Ũǁ łň ƁƍƌŴŨǁ ô Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ òł ň ƁƍƍŨǁ ô Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁœ œ ň ł œ œň ƁƍƀŨ ô ł Ŕ ǁœ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł œ œň ƁƍƀŨ ô Ō Ŕ ǁœŔŁŁĥ ł œ œň Ɓƍƌ ô Ņ ĭŏ/ƁƌŴŨ ô ŏ œ ǁœŔŁŁĥ ò ł œ œň ƁƍŨ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕǁ ň Ŕ ł œ œň ň Ņ ò ƁƍƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ô Ŕǁ ł ŏ Ņœ łœ œ ň ƁƌŁŴŨǁ ô Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƉ F

ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ķŴƄŨǁŁŁĥ ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ł Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œň ķŴƃƦŨǁŁŁĥ

ł œ œň ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ķŴƃƦŨǁ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ Ŕ ŏ œ ǁŁŁĥ ķŴƃŴŨ Ŕ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ ǁŁŁĥ ķŴƄƌŴŨ Ŕ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ ò ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ ň Ņ œ ķŴƄƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ķŴƄƍŨ Ŕ łœ łœ œ ň ŏ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁƦƌ ł œ ł œň œ ŏ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁ ł œ ł œ œň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ ł ŏ œ œ œň ķŴƄƌŴŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łœ œ ň ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁƦƌ ķŴƄƍŨǁ łœ łœ œ ň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁƦƌ ķŴƄŨ Ŕ

łœ œ ň ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕ ŁƦƉ ķŴƃŁŴŨǁ G

ň Ŕ Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ƎƀƄŨǁŁŁĥ ň Ŕ Ŕ ł Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œň ƎƀƃƦŨǁŁŁĥ

ň Ŕ œ Ŕ ł œ Ŕł œ œň ƎƀƃƦŨǁŁŁĥ ň Ŕ ŏ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ƎƀƃŴŨǁŁŁĥ ň Ŕ Ņ ŏ œ œ Ŕł œ œ ň ƎƀƄƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ň Ŕ ò Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ ł œ ł œ œň ň ň Ņ œ ƎƀƄƍƀŨ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ł œ ł œ œň ň Ŕ Ņ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ƎƀƄƍŨ Ŕ łœ łœ œ ň ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁƦƌ ł œ ł œň œ ň ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁ ł œ ł œ œň ň Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ ł ň œ œ œň ƎƀƄƌŴŨǁ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƌ łœ œ ň ň Ŕ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁƦƌ ƎƀƄƍŨǁ łœ łœ œ ň ň Ŕ Ŕ ǁŁƦƌ ƎƀƄŨ Ŕ

łœ œ ň ň Ŕ ŏ Ŕ Ņ œ Ŕ ŁƦƉ ƎƀƃŁŴŨǁ Ŕ H

ł Ŕ œ Ŕł œ œň ƎŨǁŁŁĥ ł ň œ ł œ œň ķƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ œ ł œ ł œ œň ķƦŨǁŁŁ Ŕ Ŕ ĥ Ō œ ł œ ł œ œň ƎſƦŨǁŁŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ

ŏ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ķŴŨǁŁŁĥ Ņ ŏ œ œ Ŕł œ œň ƎƌŴŨǁŁŁĥ Ņò œ œ ł œ œ ň ĥ ƎŨǁ Ŕ ŁŁ ł œ œň ň œ ň œ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ŅƎƍƀŨǁ ł œ ł œ œň Ņ ŏ œ Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ƎƌĭƦŨ Ŕ ň ł œ Ŕł œ œň Ņ œ ò Ŕ ǁŁŁĥ ƎƍſƦŨ łœ œ ň ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ƎŨǁ ł œň œ ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁ ƎŨǁ ł œň œ ł Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁ ƎŨǁ ł œň œ Ņ Ō Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁ ƎƍƀŨǁ łœ œ ň Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁƦƌ ƎƌŴŨǁ łœ œ ň Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁƦƌ ƎƍŨǁ ł œň œ Ņ ŏ Ŕ œ Ŕ ŁŁ ƎƌŴŨǁ ł œň œ Ņ Ņ Ŕ œ ò Ŕ ŁŁ ƎƍŨǁ ň ł œ œň ƎƀŨłŔǁœ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł œ œň ƎƀŨŌŔǁœŔŁŁĥ ł œ œň ƎƌŅĭŏ/ķŴŨŏœǁœŔŁŁĥ ò ł œ œň ƎŨŅŔǁ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ň Ŕ ł œ œň ŅƎƍƀŨ ò ň Ŕǁ Ŕ Ŕ ŁŁĥ ł ŏ Ņœ łœ œ ň ķŁŴŨǁ Ŕ Ŕ Ŕ ŁƦƉ I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

256

ĥ

Table 12 A. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to a Final Verb: PȨal (Table 7, Column A)

1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F

2nd

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

F Infinitive

A

B

C

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

Ņ ťũū Ņ Ʀũū ł Ƽũū ł IJƼ ô ũū Ō Ƽũū ł Ŵũū Ɓũłūò ŏ ł ķĭƼũū ň ł ƎſƼò ũū ł Ǝƀũū ň ƌň ťũŬ ň ňŁ ťũū ň ň ťũūŁ ň ň ƎƀũūŁ ň ň ťũūĥ ŏ ň ķŴũŬƌ Ņ Ŭƌ ò ň Ǝƀũ ŏ ň ķŴũūŁ Ņ ūŁ ò ň Ǝƀũ ň ň ťũŬƌ Ō Ɓũū Ņ Ɓũū ł Ŵũū ŏł ķĭŤũū ň Ņ ūò Ǝƀƀũ Ņ ň ťũŬƉ

IJųƀũū ô Ņ ň Ņ ĬƦũū Ņ ł IJųſ ô Ƽũū Ō ł IJĬŴſƼũū ô ň Ō ĬƼũū ŏ IJĬĭŤũū ô ł IJųƀƀũū ô Ņł ò ŏ ł IJųƀƌĭ ô Ņ Ƽũū ň ò ł IJųƀƍſ ô Ņ Ƽũū ł IJųƀƍ ô Ņ ƀũū ň ƌň IJĬŴƀ ô ũŬ ň ňŁœ IJĬŴƀ ô ũū ň IJĬŴƀũūŁ ô ň œ ň IJųƀƍƀũūŁ ô Ņ ň œ ň IJĬŴƀũūĥ ô ň IJųƀƌŴũŬƌ ô Ņ ŏ ň IJųƀƍƀũŬƌ ô ŅŅ ò ň ň IJųƀƌŴũūŁ ô Ņ ŏ œ Ņ ò ň IJųƀƍ ô Ņ ƀũūŁ ň ň IJĬŴƀ ô ũŬƌ Ō IJĬôŴƀũū ŌŅ IJĬŴſ ô Ťũū ŏ IJĬĭŤũū ô ŏł IJųƀƌĭŤũū ô Ņ ł IJųƀƍƀũū ô Ņň Ņ ò ň ň ųƀũŬƉ

A

B

ñŅ ųũū Ņ Ņ ĬñƦũū Ņ ł ĬñƼũū Ō ł ųſñƼũū Ņ Ō ĬñƼũū ŏł ñ Ťũū Ĭĭ ñŅł ò ųƀũū ŏ ł ñ Ņ Ƽũū ųƌĭ ň ò ł ñ Ņ Ƽũū ųƍſ ł ųƍñŅƀũū ň ƌň ñ ũŬ ųƀ ň ňŁœ ñ ũū ųƀ ň ñ ň œ ųƀũūŁ ň ñŅ ň œ ųƍƀũūŁ ň ñ ň ųƀũūĥ ñŅ ŏ ň ųƌŴũŬƌ ñ ŅŅ ò ň ųƍƀũŬƌ ň ñŅ ŏ œ ųƌŴũūŁ Ņ ò ň ųƍñŅƀũūŁ ñ ň ň ųƀũŬƌ Ō ñ ũū ųƀ ŌŅ ųſñŤũū ŏ ñ ŏł ĬĭŤũū ł ñ Ņ ũū ųƌĭŤ ñ Ņň Ņ ò ųƍƀũū ň ñŅ ųƀũŬƉ C

ƅũū ŔŅ Ņ Ņ ĴŔƦũū

Ņ Ō ĴŔƼũū ŏł ĴĭŔŤũū Ņł ò ƅŔƀũū

ł ƅƍŔŅƀũū ň ƌň ƅŔƀũŬ ň ňŁœ ƅŔƀũū ň ƅƀũūĥ Ŕ ň ƅƌŴũŬƌ ŔŅ ŏ ň ò ň ƅƍƀ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ũŬƌ

ƅƀũŬƌ Ŕ ň ň

ň ƅƀũŬƉ ŔŅ D

257

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ƁƄũū ŔŅ ň Ņ Ɓƃ ô Ʀũū ň Ō Ɓƃ ô Ƽũū ŏł Ɓƃĭ ô õ Ťũū ƁôƄƀũū õňł ò

ł ƁƄƍ ô Ŕ ň ƀũū ň ƌň ƁƄ ô Ŕ ƀũŬ ň ňŁœ ƁƄ ô Ŕ ƀũū ň ƁƄƀũūĥ ô Ŕ ň ƁƄƌŴũŬƌ ô Ŕň ŏ ň ƁƄƍƀũŬƌ ô ŔňŅ ò ň

ƁƄƀũŬƌ ô Ŕ ň ň

Ɓƍũū ô Ņ ł Ņ ƁƌôƦũū Ņ ł ƁƌôƼũū Ō ł Ɓƍſ ô Ƽũū ŏł Ɓƌĭ ô Ťũū Ņł ò Ɓôƍƀũū ŏ ł Ɓƍƌĭ ô Ņ Ƽũū ň ò ł Ɓƍƍſ ô Ņ Ƽũū ň ƌň Ɓƍ ô ƀũŬ ň ňŁœ Ɓƍƀ ô ũū ň ƁƍƀũūŁ ô ň œ ň ƁƍƍƀũūŁ ô Ņ ň œ ƁƍƌŴũŬƌ ô Ņ ŏ ň ƁƍƍƀũŬƌ ô ŅŅ ò ň ň ƁƍƌŴũūŁ ô Ņ ŏ œ Ņ ò ň Ɓƍƍ ô Ņ ƀũūŁ

ň ƁƄƀũŬƉ ô Ŕň

Ō Ɓƍƀ ô ũū ŌŅ Ɓƍſ ô Ťũū ŏ ƁƌĭŤũū ô ŏł ƁƍƌĭŤũū ô Ņ ł Ɓƍƍƀũū ô Ņň Ņ ò ň ƁƍƀũŬƉ ô ł

E

F

ŏŔ Ņ ķŴƄũū ŏ Ŕ Ņ ķŴƃƦũū

Ō ķŴƃŏŔƼũū ŏł ŏ Ŕ Ťũū ķŴƃĭ Ņł ò ķŴƄŏ Ŕ ƀũū

ŏ Ŕ Ņ ƀũū ł ķŴƄƍ ň ƌň ķŴƄŏŔƀũŬ ň ňŁœ ķŴƄŏŔƀũū ŏŔ ň ň ķŴƄƀũūĥ ŏŔ Ņ ŏ ň ķŴƄƌŴũŬƌ ŏŔ Ņ Ņ ò ň ķŴƄƍƀũŬƌ

ŏŔ ň ň ķŴƄƀũŬƌ

ŏŔ Ņ ň ķŴƄƀũŬƉ G

ňŔ Ņ ƎƀƄũū ƎƀƃňŔƦũū Ŕ Ņ

Ō ƎƀƃňŔƼũū ŏł ň Ŕ Ťũū Ǝƀƃĭ Ņł ò ƎƀƄňŔƀũū

ň Ŕ Ņ ƀũū ł ƎƀƄƍ ň ƌň ƎƀƄňŔƀũŬ ň ňŁœ ƎƀƄňŔƀũū

Ņ Ǝũū ł Ņ ķƦũū Ņ ł ķƼũū Ō ł ƎſƼũū ŏł ķĭŤũū Ņł ò Ǝƀũū ŏ ł ƎƌĭŅƼũū ň ò ł ƎƍſŅƼũū

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ň ƌň ƎƀũŬ ň ňŁœ Ǝƀũū ň ňœ ƎƀũūŁ Ņ ň ňœ ƎƍƀũūŁ

ňŔ ň ň ƎƀƄƀũūĥ ňŔ Ņ ŏ ň ƎƀƄƌŴũŬƌ ňŔ Ņ Ņ ò ň ƎƀƄƍƀũŬƌ

11 12 13 14 15

Ņ ŏ ň ƎƌŴũŬƌ ŅŅ ò ň ƎƍƀũŬƌ Ņ ŏ ňœ ƎƌŴũūŁ Ņ ò ň ƎƍŅƀũūŁ

ňŔ ň ň ƎƀƄƀũŬƌ

16 17 18 19 20

Ō Ǝƀũū ŌŅ ƎſŤũū ŏł ķĭŤũū Ņ ŏł ƎƌĭŤũū Ņň Ņ ò Ǝƍƀũū ň ł ƎƀũŬƉ

ňŅ ň ƎƀƄƀũŬƉ H

1

I

21 22 23 24 25

258

ĥ

Table 12 B. Attaching Object Pronoun Suffixes to a Final Verb: PaȨel /PaȨȨel (Table 7, Column D)

1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F

2nd

24 25

M

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

F Infinitive

A

B

C

D

Unsuffixed Verb

Sing 3rd M (Him)

Sing 3rd F (Her)

Sing 2nd M (You)

Ō ł Ɓũū ł ł Ƽũū œ Ō ł Ƽũū œ IJƼũū ô Ō ł Ƽũū Ŕ Ō ł Ō ł Ŵƀũū Ō ł Ɓòũū ŏ Ō ł ķĭƼũū òň Ō ł ƎſƼũū Ō ł Ǝƀũū ň ł ťũŬƌ ň ł ťũūŁ ň ł ťũūŁ ň ł ƎƀũūŁ ň ťũňūłĥ ŏ ł ķŴũŬƌ ò ł ƎƀŅũŬƌ ŏ ł ķŴũūŁ ò ł ƎƀŅũūŁ ň ł ťũŬƌ Ņ ł ťũū Ņ ł Ɓũū ł ł Ŵũū ŏł ł ķĭŤũū òň Ņ ł Ǝƀƀũū ŏŅ ł ŴƀũŬƉ

ň ł ųƀũū ň ł ł ĬƼũū Ŕ Ņ Ō ł IJųſƼ ô ũū Ō Ō ł ũū IJĬŴſƼ ô ň Ō ł ĬƼũū ŏ ł IJĬôŴƀũū ò IJųƀƀ ô Ņ ũūł ŏ Ō ł IJųƀƌĭƼ ô Ņ ũū ň Ō ł IJųƀƍſƼ ô Ņ ò ũū Ō ł IJųƀƍƀ ô Ņ ũū IJĬŴƀũ ô ň Ŭłƌ IJĬŴƀũ ô ň ūłŁœ IJĬŴƀũ ô ň ūłŁœ IJųƀƍƀũ ô Ņ ň ūłŁœ ň IJĬŴƀũ ô ň ūłĥ IJųƀƌŴũ ô Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ò IJųƀƍƀ ô Ņ Ņ ũŬłƌ IJųƀƌŴũ ô Ņ ŏ ūłŁœ Ņ ò ūŁ ł IJųƀƍ ô Ņ ƀũ IJĬŴƀũ ô ň Ŭłƌ Ņ ł IJĬŴƀ ô ũū ŌŅ ł IJĬŴſŤũ ū ô ŏł ł IJĬĭŤũ ô ŏ ū IJųƀƌĭŤũ ô Ņ ł ūł ł IJųƀƍƀũ ô Ņ ň Ņ ūò ň ĬŁŴƀŏ ũŅŬłƉ

A

B

Ņ ł ųñƀũū Ņ ł ł ĬñƼũū Ņ Ō ł ñ ũū ĬƼ Ō Ō ł ñ ũū ųſƼ Ņ ñ Ō ūł ĬƼũ ŏ ł ñ ƀũū ĬŴ Ņò ł ųñƀũū ŏ Ō ł ñ Ņ ũū ųƌĭƼ ň Ō ł ñ Ņ ò ũū ųƍſƼ Ō ł ñ Ņ ũū ųƍƀ ñ ň Ŭłƌ ųƀũ ñ ň ūłŁœ ųƀũ ñ ň ūłŁœ ųƀũ ñ Ņ ň ūłŁœ ųƍƀũ ň ñ ň ūłĥ ųƀũ ñ Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ųƌŴũ ñ Ņ Ņ ũòŬłƌ ųƍƀ ñ Ņ ŏ ūłŁœ ųƌŴũ Ņò ł ųƍñŅƀũūŁ ñ ň Ŭłƌ ųƀũ Ņ ł ųñũū ŌŅ ł ñ ū ųſŤũ ŏ ñ ŏ ł ūł ĬĭŤũ ñ Ņ ł ūł ųƌĭŤũ ñ Ņ ň Ņ ūłò ųƍƀũ Ņ ŏŅ ł ĬñŁŴƀũŬƉ C

Ņ ł ƅŔƀũū Ņ ł ł ĴŔƼũū Ŕ Ņ ĴƼũ Ŕ Ō ūł ŏ ł ĴŴŔƀũū Ņò ł ƅŔƀũū

Ō ł ƅƍƀ Ŕ Ņ ũū ƅƀũ Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ ƅƀũ Ŕ ň ūłŁœ ň ƅƀũ Ŕ ň ūłĥ ƅƌŴũ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ƅƍƀ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ũòŬłƌ

ƅƀũ Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ

Ņ ŏŅ ł ĴŔŁŴƀũŬƉ D

259

E

F

G

H

I

Sing 2nd F (You)

Sing 1st C (Me)

Pl 2nd M (You)

Pl 2nd F (You)

Pl 1st C (Us)

ň ł ƁƄŔƀũū ň ł ł Ɓƃ Ŕ ô Ƽũū ň Ō ł ƁƃƼũ ū ô ŏ ł ƁƃŴ ô õ ƀũū ňò ł ƁƄ ô õ ƀũū

Ō ł ƁƄƍƀ ô Ŕ ň ũū ƁƄƀũ ô Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ ƁƄƀũ ô Ŕ ň ūłŁœ ň ƁƄƀũ ô Ŕ ň ūłĥ ƁƄƌŴũ ô Ŕ ň ŏ Ŭłƌ ò ƁƄƍƀ ô Ŕ ň Ņ ũŬłƌ

ƁƄƀũ ô Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ

ň ŏŅ ł Ɓƃ ô Ŕ ŁŴƀũŬƉ E

ł ł Ɓƍ ô ƀũū ł ł ł ƁƌôƼũū Ŕ Ņ Ō ł ƁƌƼ ô ũū Ō Ō ł ũū ƁƍſƼ ô ŏ ł ƁƌŴ ô ƀũū Ņò ł Ɓƍ ô ƀũū ŏ Ō ł ƁƍƌĭƼ ô Ņ ũū ň Ō ł ƁƍƍſƼ ô Ņ ò ũū Ɓƍƀũ ô ň Ŭłƌ Ɓƍƀũ ô ň ūłŁœ Ɓƍƀũ ô ň ūłŁœ Ɓƍƍƀũ ô Ņ ň ūłŁœ ƁƍƌŴũ ô Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ò Ɓƍƍƀ ô Ņ Ņ ũŬłƌ ƁƍƌŴũ ô Ņ ŏ ūłŁœ Ņò ł Ɓƍƍ ô Ņ ƀũūŁ Ņ ł Ɓƍ ô ũū ŌŅ ł ƁƍſŤũ ô ū ŏ ƁƌĭŤũ ô ŏ ł ūł ƁƍƌĭŤũ ô Ņ ł ūł ł Ɓƍƍƀũ ô Ņ ň Ņ ūò ł ŏŅ ł ƁƌôŁŴƀũŬƉ F

Ō ł ķŴƄŏŔƀũū ķŴƃŏƼũū Ŕł ł

ŏ Ŕ Ō ūł ķŴƃƼũ ŏ Ŕ ƀũū ŏ ł ķŴƃŴ Ņò ł ķŴƄŏ Ŕ ƀũū

ŏ Ŕ Ņ ũū Ō ł ķŴƄƍƀ ŏ Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ ķŴƄƀũ ŏ Ŕ ň ūłŁœ ķŴƄƀũ ŏ Ŕ ň ūłňĥ ķŴƄƀũ ŏ Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ķŴƄƌŴũ ŏ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ũòŬłƌ ķŴƄƍƀ

ŏ Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ ķŴƄƀũ

ŏŅ ł ķŴƃŏŔŁŴƀũŬƉ G

Ō ł ƎƀƄňŔƀũū ƎƀƃňŔƼũū Ŕł ł

ň Ŕ Ō ūł ƎƀƃƼũ ň Ŕ ƀũū ŏ ł ƎƀƃŴ Ņò ł ƎƀƄňŔƀũū

ň Ŕ Ņ ũū Ō ł ƎƀƄƍƀ ň Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ ƎƀƄƀũ ň Ŕ ň ūłŁœ ƎƀƄƀũ

ł ł Ǝƀũū ł ł ł ķƼũū Ŕ Ņ Ō ł ķƼũū Ō Ō ł ƎſƼũū

ňŔ ŏ Ņ ł ƎƀƃŁŴƀũŬƉ H

2 3 4 5

ŏ ł ķŴƀũū Ņò ł Ǝƀũū Ō ł Ņ ŏ ũū ƎƌĭƼ Ō ł Ņ ň ò ũū ƎƍſƼ

6 7 8 9 10

ƎƀũňŬłƌ ƎƀũňūłŁœ ƎƀũňūłŁœ Ņ ň ūłŁœ Ǝƍƀũ

ň Ŕ ň ūłňĥ ƎƀƄƀũ ň Ŕ Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ƎƀƄƌŴũ ň Ŕ Ņ Ņ ũòŬłƌ ƎƀƄƍƀ

ň Ŕ ň Ŭłƌ ƎƀƄƀũ

1

11 12 13 14 15

Ņ ŏ Ŭłƌ ƎƌŴũ ƎƍƀŅŅũòŬłƌ Ņ ŏ ūłŁœ ƎƌŴũ Ņò ł ƎƍŅƀũūŁ

16 17 18 19 20

Ņ ł Ǝũū ŌŅ ł ƎſŤũū ŏł ł ķĭŤũ ŏ ł ūł ŅƎƌĭŤũ ū Ņ ň Ņ ūłò Ǝƍƀũ ł ŏŅ ł ķŁŴƀũŬƉ I

21 22 23 24 25

260

Appendix

[This page is empty.]

Verb Paradigms

261

Tables 13. Some Irregular Verbs and Four-Letter Verbs This table gives a few irregular verbs, and introduces verbs which consist of four (not three) letters. ň The verb ĵĮĥł (Column A): The ĵ becomes silent when it has a vowel, and its vowel ň ł ň . Similarly, in the participles (which are not listed in not ƦƆĮĥ moves to the Į ; e.g., ƦƆĮĥ Ŕ Ņ ô ł (A2), Ŕ òŅ Ņ . ň but ƧĮĥ Ņ Ņ , ƎƀƆĮĥ Ō Ņ , ƎƆĮĥ the table), one has ĵĮĥ ô ô ô Ņň The verb ŦŁĥ (Column B) is both initial-ĥ and final-ĥ. As such its conjugation is more or less a combination of Table 5 (Columns A & B) and Table 7 (Column A). Note that the ň Ō future tense prefix has š as in ŦŁŤŔ ƌŌ (B11). The verb ťƀìŅ Ŷ (Column C) has its own pecularities. As it ends in ĥ, it has some of the features found in Table 5. ň ň ł ň (D2) and ƦŨųſ D) has a silent middle letter apart from ƦŨųſ The verb ħųſ ô ł (Column ň ň (D 5). Its future is ĵƦƌ which is conjugated like an initial ƌ verb (see Table 3). The infinitive łœ ň ł ň is very rare, and one usually finds ĵƦƉ ħųƉ . ň The verb ơƇƏ (Column E) looses its ĵ in the future, imperative, and infinitive. In such cases, it is conjugated like an initial ƌ verb (see Table 3). Skipping Column F for a moment, there are verbs whose roots consist of four letters, ň ł ň ł (Column G). Its conjugation is similar to the ƈƖƘ rather than three. One such verb is ƋūĿŁ ň ł regular verb such as ħǁ (Table 1, D1), but with the insertion of the second letter (Ŀ) after the first letter. ň ň There are two measures that have not been covered: ƈƖƙƏł and ƈƖƙƣł . An example ň ł from the root ħĬĿ, and an example of the latter is űũƖƣ ň ł from the of the former is ħĬƢƏ root űũƕ. These are conjugated like four-letter verbs. Column F gives an example ň ł. conjugating ħĬƢƏ

262 Table 13. Some Irregular Verbs in the PȨal M = Masculine F = Feminine C = Common (M & F) 1

4 5 6 7

Past Tense (Perfect)

3

8

3rd

9 10

17 18

3rd

19

1st

2nd

M F C M F M F C M F M F C M F M F C

F M F

24 25

F

M

Pl.

Imperative

21

23

2nd

Sing.

20

22

2nd 1st

Plural

16

Future Tense (Imperfect)

15

Singular

3rd

12

14

2nd 1st

11

13

2nd 1st

Plural

2

Singular

3rd

M

Infinitive

A

B

C

ň ĵĮĥł

Ņň ŦŁĥ

Ņ ťƀŶ Ņň ŦŁĥŔ Ņň ŁŁĥ ŔŔ œ ł Ŕň ƻŁĥ œ łň IJƻŁĥ ô Ŕ Ōň ƻŁĥ Ŕ Ŕ łň ĭŁĥŔ ò ł Ŕň IJŁĥ ŏœ łň ķĭƻŁĥ Ŕ ňœ łň ƎſƻŁĥŔ ł ł Ŕň ƎƍſŁĥ ň Ō ŦŁŤƌ Ŕ ň Ōœ ŦŁĥŁ Ŕ ň Ōœ ŦŁĥŁ Ŕ Ō Ōœ ƎſŁĥŁ Ŕ ňŌ ŦŁĥŔ ŏ Ō ķĭŁŤƌ Ŕ Ņ Ōò ķŁŤƌ Ŕ ŏ Ōœ ķĭŁĥŁ Ŕ Ņò Ō œ ķŁĥŁ Ŕ ň Ō ŦŁŤƌ Ŕ Ņ ŦŁœ Ņ IJŁœ ł ĭŁœ ò ň Ņœ ƎƀſĥŁ ň ň ŦŁŤƉ Ŕ

ň ĵĮĥł ň ƦƆĮĥ Ŕ ô ł ň ƦƆĮĥł ň IJƦƆĮĥ ô ł ň ƦƆĮĥ Ŕ ô ň ŏ ł ň / ŴƆĮĥł ň ķŴƆĮĥ ô ò ň ň ł ň / ƁƆĮĥ òƎƀíƆĮĥ ô ł ŏ ň ķĭƦíƆĮĥł ň ò łň ƎſƦíƆĮĥ ł ł ň / ƎƆĮĥłň ƎƍíƆĮĥ ł Ō ĵĮŤƌ łŌ ĵĮĥŁ łŌ ĵĮĥŁ Ō ƎƀƆĮĥŁ ô Ō Ō ĵĮĥł ķŴƆĮŤƌ ô ŏ Ō Ņ ƎƆĮŤƌ ô ò Ō Ō ķŴƆĮĥŁ ô ŏ ŅŌ ƎƆĮĥŁ ô ò ł Ō ĵĮŤƌ ĵĮň Ō ň / ƁƆĮň ƎƀƆĮ ô ŏ ň ķŴƆĮ / ŴƆĮ ô ň ò ò ň ň / ƁƆĮ ƎƀíƆĮ ô ň ł Ō ĵĮŤƉ A

B

Ņ ťƀŶ ƼŶ ŔŅ œ ƀŶ ł Ƽ œ IJƼƀŶ ô ł ƼƀŶ Ŕ Ō ł ŴƀŶ łò ƁƀŶ ŏœ ł ķĭƼƀŶ ňœ ł ƎſƼƀŶ ł ƎƀƀŶ ňŌ ň Ō / ťŷƌ ťŶŤƌ ň Ō / ťŶŁ ňŌ ťŶĥŁ ň Ō / ťŶňŁŌ ťŶĥŁ Ō Ō / ƎƀŶŁ ŌŌ ƎƀŶĥŁ ňŌ ň Ō / ťŶĥ ťŶĥĥ ŏ Ō / ķŴŷƌŏŌ ķŴŶŤƌ Ņò Ō / Ǝŷƌ Ņò Ō ƎŶŤƌ ŏ Ō / ķŴŶŁ ŏŌ ķŴŶĥŁ Ņò Ō / ƎŶŁ Ņò Ō ƎŶĥŁ ňŌ ň Ō / ťŷƌ ťŶŤƌ Ō ƁƀŶ Ņ ƁƀŶ ŏ ł / ŴƀŶ ł ķĭŴƀŶ ň ł ò / ƁƀŶ łò ƎƀƀƀŶ Ņ ň / ťŷƉ Ņ ň ťŶŤƉ C

263

D

ň ĵƦƌœ ň

/

ħųſł

ħųſ Ŕô ł ƦŨųſ Ŕ łœ ň œ Ŕ ł ƦŨųſ ô œ IJƦŨųſ ô Ŕô ł ƦŨųſ Ŕ ňœ ň ŏ Ŕ ô ł / ŴŨ ķŴŨųſ ô ł ô Ŕ ųſ ò ł ò ň Ŕ ô ł / ƁŨ ƎƀŨųſ ô ô Ŕ ųſ ŏœ ł ķĭƦŨųſ Ŕô ňœ ł ƎſƦŨųſ Ŕô łƎƍŨųſ ł Ŕ ô / ƎŨųſ Ŕô ł ň ĵƦƌœ ň ň ĵŁŁœ œ ňň ĵŁŁœ œ Ō ňœ ƎƀƆŁŁ Ŕ ň œň ĵŁĥ ŏ ň ķŴƆƦƌ Ŕ ò ň ŅƎƆƦƌ Ŕ ň ŏ ķŴƆŁŁŔ œ Ņ ò ňœ ƎƆŁŁ Ŕ ňœ ň ĵƦƌ ħĬ Ŕł Ņ Ŕ ł / ƁŨĬ ƁŨĬ ô Ŕł ŏ Ŕ ł / ŴŨĬ ķŴŨĬ ô Ŕł òŔ ł ò ň Ŕ ł / ƁôŨĬ ƎƀŨĬ łœ ň ł ň ĵƦƉ / ħųƉ D

E

F

G

ň ơƇƏ

ň ł ħĬƢƏ

ň ł ƋūĿŁ

ň ơƇƏ ƦƠíƇƏ Ŕ ł ň œ ň ƦƠƇƏ œ ň IJƦƠƇƏ ô ƦƠíƇƏ Ŕ ň ň ň ŏ ň / ŴƠƇƏ ķŴƠíƇƏ ô ò ň ò ň ň / ƁƠíƇƏ ƎƀƠíƇƏ ô ŏœ ň ķĭƦƠƇƏ ňœ ò ň ƎſƦƠíƇƏ ň ł ň / ƎƠƇƏ ƎƍƠƇƏ łň ơƐƌ ł ňœ ơƏŁ ł ňœ ơƏŁ Ō ňœ ƎƀƠƏŁ łň ơƏĥ ŏ ň ķŴƠƐƌ Ņ ò ň ƎƠƐƌ ŏ ňœ ķŴƠƏŁ Ņ ò ňœ ƎƠƏŁ łň ơƐƌ ơƏł Ō ł / ƁƠƏł ƎƀƠƏ ô ŏ ł ķŴƠƏ / ŴƠƏ ô ł ò ò ň ł / ƁƠƏ ƎƀƠƏ ô ł ł ň ơƐƉ E

ň ł ňœ łœ ħĬƢƏ ƋūĿŁ ł ƦŨĬƢƏ ƦƊūĿŁ Ŕ łŔ ł Ŕ ł œ œ œ Ŕň ł œ ňœ łœ ƦŨĬƢƏ ƦƊūĿŁ œ ň œ ňœ łœ IJƦŨĬƢƏ IJƦƊūĿŁ ô Ŕ ł ô ł ƦŨĬƢƏ ƦƊūĿŁ Ŕ ňŔ ł Ŕ ň œ œ ł ň ŏ ň œ ł œ / ŴƊūĿŁ ŏ Ŕ ň ł / ŴŨĬƢƏ ķŴŨĬƢƏ ô ňœ œ ô Ŕ ł ķŴƊūĿŁ ł ň ň œ ł œ / ƁƊūǓŁ ň ň Ŕ ň ł / ƁŨĬǔƏ ƎƀŨĬǔƏ ô Ŕ ł ƎƀƊūǓŁ ô ňœ œ ŏœ ň ł ŏœ ňœ łœ ķĭƦŨĬƢƏ ķĭƦƊūĿŁ Ŕ ňœ ň ł ň œ ňœ łœ ƎſƦŨĬƢƏ ƎſƦƊūĿŁ Ŕ ł Ŕ ň Əł / ƎŨĬƢƏ ł ň œ ł œ / ƎƊūĿŁ ňœ łœ ƎƍŨĬƢ Ŕ ň ł ƎƍƊūĿŁ ňœ łŔ ħĬƢƐƌ ƋūĿƦƌ Ŕň ł ňœ ł Ŕ œ ħĬƢƏŁ ƋūĿŁŁ Ŕň ł œ ňœ ł Ŕ œ ħĬƢƏŁ ƋūĿŁŁ Ŕň ł œ Ō œ ł œ ŌŔ ł œ ƎƀŨĬƢƏŁ ƎƀƊūĿŁŁ ň ň œ ł œň ħĬƢƏĥ ƋūĿŁĥ Ŕň ł ŏ œ łŔ ŏŔ ł ķŴŨĬƢƐƌ ķŴƊūĿƦƌ Ņ œ łŔ ŅŔ ł ƎŨĬǔƐƌ ƎƊūǓƦƌ ŏ œ łŔ œ ŏŔ ł œ ķŴŨĬƢƏŁ ķŴƊūĿŁŁ Ņ œ łŔ œ ŅŔ ł œ ƎŨĬǔƏŁ ƎƊūǓŁŁ ňœ łŔ ħĬƢƐƌ ƋūĿƦƌ Ŕň ł ňœ łœ ħĬƢƏ ƋūĿŁ Ŕň ł ł ň Ō ň œ ł œ / ƁƊūĿŁ Ō Ŕ ň ł / ƁŨĬƢƏ ƎƀŨĬƢƏ ô ňœ œ ô Ŕ ł ƎƀƊūĿŁ ł ň ŏ ň œ ł œ / ŴƊūĿŁ ŏ Ŕ ň ł / ŴŨĬƢƏ ķŴŨĬƢƏ ô ňœ œ ô Ŕ ł ķŴƊūĿŁ ł ň ň œ ł œ / ƁƊūǓŁ ň ň Ŕ ň ł / ƁŨĬǔƏ ƎƀŨĬǔƏ ô ňœ œ ô Ŕ ł ƎƀƊūǓŁ ŏ Ņœ łŔ ŏŔ Ņ ł ŴŨĬƢƐƉ ŴƊūĿƦƉ F

G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Glossary of Grammatical Terms Ņ

ABSOLUTE STATE, the form of the noun that does not have an ending such as ħǁ ŅŅ . ‘book’ as opposed to *emphatic ťŨǁ ADJECTIVE a word that modifies a noun. Syriac adjectives are declinable with respect to Ņ Ōł Ņ Ō ňò Ņ ň Ō ł ťƀÿǑ Ņ Ō ĥł ťƀÿǑ Ņ ł ‘tall boy’, ŦǂſĿ ĥ ŦƼǑ ‘tall girl’, ťƄſǓĥ ‘tall number and gender; e.g., ťƄſĿ Ņ Ņ Ō ł Ņ òŅ ł boys’, ŦǂſǓĥ ŦƼÿǑ ‘tall girls’. Ō Ņ ADVERBS, words that describe or modify verbs. Adverbs in Syriac have the ending ƻŤ š; Ŕ ŌŅ Ōł e.g., ƻŤƍƀƤƕ ‘strongly’. AFȨEL, see APHȨEL. ň ł APHȨEL, a transliteration of ƈƖƘĥ, a *measure of the Syriac verb. ASPECT, marks the verb as being complete (i.e., not in a state of change or flux), or incomplete (i.e., in progress or otherwise conveying a sense of change). A verb whose event has completed is said to be a *perfect verb; a verb whose event is still not complete is said to be an *imperfect verb. ASSIMILATION, a process by which a sound becomes similar to an adjacent sound; e.g., ň ň ň the Ł of passive Łĥ turns into a Ī in ƚƟĪĮĥ. See Table 2 in the Appendix. CARDINAL NUMBERS, numbers used to count (e.g., one, two, three). Syriac cardinal numbers are declined with respect to gender. ň ò Ņ ƥſĿŌ CONSTRUCT STATE, a form of the noun used to indicate possessiveness; e.g., ljųƃ ‘head of the priests’. CONTRACTION, the formation of a new word from two or more individual words; e.g., Ņ Ņ ‘you are crying’. ł Ņ from Ʀƌĥô ťƀƄŨ ƼƄŨ DEFINITE ARTICLE, used before singular and plural nouns that refer to a particular member of a group as in English the. Syriac does not have a definite article. DEMONYM, suffix used to denote the members of a people or inhabitants of a place. Ņ Ņ ŏ ĿĪł ‘Damascene’, and its feminine counterpart Ņ Ņ as in ťƀƟŴƐƉ Syriac uses the suffix ťſš Ņ Ņ Ņ ŏ ł ŦƻĭŅ as in ŦƼƟŴƐƉ ĿĪ. DIMINUTIVE, a form of the word that describes the smallness of an object. Diminutive in Ņ ŌŅ Ņ ŏ or the feminine suffix ŦƼƌš Syriac is marked by the masculine suffix ljĭš Ŕ ; e.g., Ņ ŌŅ łň ŏ Ņ ‘booklet’, ŦƼƌ ŅljŴŨǁ Ŕ ŁƢūĥ ‘little letter, e-mail’. Ņ Ņ ‘book’ as opposed to EMPHATIC STATE, the form of the noun with an ending as in ťŨǁ Ņ absolute ħǁ. HOMOGRAPH, one of a group of words that share the same spelling but have different meanings. Consonantal homographs in Syriac share the same spelling of letters but Ņ ł ‘father’ and ťŨĥŅň ‘fruit’. may have different vowels; e.g., ťŨĥ

265

266

Glossary of Grammatical Terms

IMPERATIVE, a tense which refers to commands, instructions, or requests for action; e.g., ŏ ħĭǁ ‘write’. IMPERFECT, a verb that denotes an incomplete action, which usually corresponds to the ŏ future tense in Syriac; e.g., ħĭǂƌň ‘he will write’. See *perfect. INDEFINITE ARTICLE, used before singular nouns that refer to any member of a group; e.g., English a and an. Syriac does not have an indefinite article. Ņ MEASURE, called in Syriac ƨìƀƃł , a pattern that defines the sequence of letters and vowels in a word with respect to the *root. Using the root ƈƖƘ to denote the three letters of ň ł , and ƈƖƘĥ ň ł , in ł , ƈƖƘ a root, there are three basic verbal measures in Syriac: ƈƖƘ ň ň ł ł ň , and ƈƖƘŁŁĥ ł ł ň. addition to their corresponding *passive measures ƈƖƘŁĥ, ƈƖƘŁĥ METATHESIS, the reversal of the order of two adjacent letters; e.g., Ł and ŀ interchange ň ň ň ň place in ƋƆƦƣĥ from ƋƇƣ+Łĥ. See Table 2 in the Appendix. MORPHOLOGY, the field within linguistics that studies the internal structure of words. OBJECT, what is affected by a sentence. The object in Syriac is usually marked by ĵ; e.g., Ņ Ō ł ł ŦƼƇźƆ ơƤƌ ‘he kissed the girl’. OBJECT PRONOUN, replaces the object with a reference as it in English I read it. Object pronouns in Syriac take the form of suffixes and are declined by number, person, and gender. See Table 11 in the Appendix for examples. ORDINAL NUMBERS, numbers that express orders (e.g., first, second, third). Syriac ordinal numbers are declined with respect to gender. ł , the basic *measure of the Syriac verb. PȨAL, a transliteration of ƈƖƘ ň ł PAȨEL, a transliteration of ƈƖƘ, a *measure of the Syriac verb. PARTICIPLE, a form of the verb that acts like an adjective modifying a noun. In English, participles end in ing, ed, or en such as I like to see smiling faces, I ate a boiled egg, and he has eaten dinner. Syriac participles are declined with respect to number, person, and gender. See the tables in the Appendix for examples. PASSIVE VERB, a verb in a sentence where the subject receives the action expressed in the ň ň Ņ Ņ ħǁŁĥ ‘the book was written’. Passive verbs in Syriac start with the verb; e.g., ťŨǁ ň ŁĥŔ prefix. PERFECT, a verb that denotes a complete action, which usually corresponds to the past ł tense in Syriac; e.g., ħǁ ‘he wrote’. See *imperfect verb. PERSON, reference to the speaker, the addressee or others. Syriac defines three person: 1st ň ł ł ‘you (s. m.)’, IJƦƌĥ used with the personal pronoun ljĥŅ ‘I’; 2nd person used with Ʀƌĥ ô ô ô ŏ ł ň ł ‘you (s. f.)’, ķĭƦƌĥ ô ‘you (pl. m.)’, and ƎſƦƌĥô ‘you (pl. f.)’; and 3rd person used with ĭĬŏ ŏ ň ‘they (m.)’, and ƎƀƌĬ ň ň ‘they (f.)’. ‘he’, IJĬŌ ‘she’, ķŴƌĬ POSSESSIVE PRONOUN, attributes ownership to someone or something. Syriac ň Ņ ‘his book’, ųŨǁ ñ Ņ Ņ ‘her possessive pronouns take the form of suffixes as in ųŨǁ book’, and are declined with respect to number and gender.

Glossary of Grammatical Terms

267

PUNCTUATION MARKS symbols, in Syriac primarily points, which serve to indicate the structure and organization of writing, as well as intonation and pauses to be observed when reading aloud. RELATIVE CLAUSE, a clause that modifies a noun with the use of a *relative pronoun. RELATIVE PRONOUN, links two clauses of a sentence into a larger clause. In the English sentence here is the bottle which I bought this morning, the relative pronoun which joins here is the bottle with the relative clause I bought this morning. In Syriac, Ī is the relative Ō ŏ łł Ō ł ň ł ‘We shall thank and shall pronouns as in IJƦŶŁŁĥĪň ƈſĥŴƍƊƖëƆ ĜųƆň ĪŴŬƐƌĭ Ŕ ŏ ň ŧĪŴƌ worship him, Emmanuel who descended [from heaven]’. ROOT, three letters (sometimes two or four) from which words are derived; e.g., ħǁ is the ł Ņ Ņ ‘book’ are derived. root from which the verb ħǁ ‘he wrote’ and the noun ťŨǁ STRONG ROOT, a *root whose letters do not include ĥ, ĭ, or IJ. SYLLABIFICATION, the process by which one divides a word into syllables. There are two types of syllables in Syriac: open syllable consisting of a consonant and a vowel such Ņ as Ƨ, and a closed syllable consisting of two consonants separated by a vowel such as ķŴƉŏ. TENSE, expresses the time at which an event described by a sentence occurs. Syriac has three basic tenses: past, present and future. To these one adds the *imperative, *participles, and *infinitive. WEAK ROOT, a *root whose letters include at least one ĥ, ĭ, or IJ.

Syriac-English Glossary ň ťŨĥŅ ł father ťŨĥŅ ł ł Abgar ƢŬŨĥ ň was lost űŨĥł Ņ Ņ òŅ ł fathers ŦŁųŨĥ Ŕ ł ŏŔ ŏ your (pl.) father ķŴƃŴŨĥ ł our Father ķŴŨĥŏ Ņ ň feather ŧƢŨĥ ŅŅ ł Abraham ĶĬƢŨĥ Ņ łň letter ŦŁƢūĥ Ŕ Ņ ŌŅ łň small letter, e-mail* ŦƼƌ ŁƢūĥ Ŕ Ŕ ł I gazed ƦƠſĪĥ Ŕ ň ŌŅ Adam ĶĪĥŅ Ņ O! ĭĥ Ņ Ņ ŏ black ťƊƃĭĥ Ņ ł gave birth to you ĴŁűƆĭĥ Ŕ ň ŏ Ņ nation ŦƦƉĭĥ Ņ ŏ Edessa IJĬĿĭĥ Ņ ŏ road, path, way ťŶĿĭĥ Ņ ŏ meeting ťƕĿĭĥ łň beware ĿĬĪĮĥ ň ň Ņ ô ƚƟĪĮĥ he was crucified ŦĭĬ ň went ĵĮĥł Ņ (he) goes ĵĮĥň Ņ (she) goes Ƨô ĮĥŅ Ņ (they m.) go ƎƀƆĮĥ ô ŌŅ ł ô Ō we go ƎƍƀƆĮĥ ŅŅ (they f.) go ƎƆĮĥ ô òŅ I (f.) go Ɓìô ƍƆĮĥ ô Ņ ł brother ťŶĥŅ łňò brothers ťŶĥ Ņ Ņò ł sisters ŦŁŴŶĥ Ŕ ł my sisters IJŁŴŶĥ ô ŔŅò ł òł my brothers ƁŶĥ fruit

ł Ōł ƢƠƀŶĥ ŅŌ ô another (m.) ljƢŶĥ ňŅ others (m. pl.) ljǔŶĥ ŅŌ ô another (f.) ŦŁƢŶĥ Ŕ ô Ō Ņ hand (feminine) ŧűſĥ Ō Ņ łŔò hands ťſűſĥ łŔò Ō my hands IJűſĥ ł as, according to ƅſĥ Ŕ Ņ ł where ťƄſĥ Ņ ł stag ƨìſĥ Ō yes, yea! Ǝſĥ Ņ ł who, which, what ťƍſĥ Ņ ł he who Ī ťƍſĥ Ņ Ō Isaac ơŷƐſĥ Ō ł ł ô IJĬŴſƻĥ they brought himĭĭĬ ô ň ate ƈƃĥł Ņ eats ƈƃĥňŔ Ō Ņ eat (pl., m.) ƎƀƿĥŔ Ņ òŅ eat (pl., f.) Ǝƿĥ Ŕ ò Ŕł Ņ ň foreigners ťƀƍƐƃĥ ł succeeded (m. pl.) ĭƢƤƃĥ ô łł succeeded (f. pl.) IJǔƤƃĥ ô ł ň ł he wrote ħǁĥ Ņ Ņ ł God ŦųëƆĥ ł my God IJųƆĥ ô Ņ ł ł Ņ our God ķųëƆĥ Ņ Ņ Ņ ł divine (m.) ťſųëƆĥ Ņ Ņ Ņ ł divine (f.) ŦƻųëƆĥ ł Ōň Elizabeth ƗũƤƀƆĥ ň ł taught ƚƆĥ ł ł taught (f.) ƦƙëƆĥ ň Ņ one thousand ƚƆĥ ňŅ ŏ ň ň electronic ťƀƌĭǔźƠƆĥ ň mother ťƉĥŅ Ahiqar

268

Ņ

Amid, modern DiyarbakirűƀƉĥ Ŕ Ō

ł ƎƀƉĥŌ ł said, composed ƢƀƉĥŌ Ņ ň ƢƉĥł ň lamb ŧƢƉĥ ň said ƢƉĥł say (imperative, f.) IJƢƉĥ ô ł ôŅ Ņ Ņ ł I say ljŅôĥ ƢƉĥł = ljƢƉĥ ň she said ŁƢƉĥ Ŕł ň if ķĥ ň I ljĥŅ ŅŅ Ō ň English ťƀƤƀƇŬƌĥ ň them ķŴƌĥŏ ň ň Ō Internet* ŻƌƢźƌĥ person ƥƌĥŅô òŅ Ņ ô people, mankind ťƤƌĥ ł ł wife of ŁƦƌ Ŕ ô ĥň Ņ porch ŦŴźƏĥ ł ł Asia ťƀƏĥ ł ň was arranged űūĿƦƏĥ Ŕ ł Ō ł I shall translate it IJĬŴſƢũƕĥ ô ł I translated ŁƢũƕĥ Ŕň ł Ō awaken (m. sing.) Ƣƀƕĥ łŌ awaken (m. pl.) ĭƢƀƕĥ ô ł awaken (f. sing.) IJƢƀƕĥ ô Ōł awaken (f. pl.) IJǔƀƕĥ ô Ō Ņ Ņ ł palace ljűƘĥ Ņ ŏ Ōň bishop ťƘŴƠƐƀƘĥ Ņ ňň Ephesus ĸŴƐƘĥ Ņ ŏ ŏ ňň bishopric ŦŁŴƘŴƠƐƘĥ Ŕ ň ł Ephrem ƋſƢƘĥ ł they aroused ŴƊƀƟĥ ô Ōł Ņ Ņ łĥ Arabic ťƀŨĿ ł ťŬƀūĿĥ desirable ŔŅ Ō Ņ ň ô sacraments ŦĮǓĥ Amen

Ņ ł lion ťſĿĥ Ņ ŏ Ņ ŅŅ Aramaic ŦŁŴƀƉĿĥ Ŕ Ņ ł rabbit ťũƌĿĥ Ņ ł earth, land, floor ťƕĿĥ Ņ Ņ ł ground ŦƦƕǓĥ Ŕ ł Ō left ƁƘĿĥ Ņ ł grant ŦŴƣĥ ŏ ł pour ĪŴƣĥ ł ł ň ŒŁĿĪƦƣĥ was sent Ŕ Ō ň I drank ƻƦƣĥ Ŕ ň ň became complete ƋƆƦƣĥ ł ł ň ŒŁĿĿƦƣĥ it became certain Ŕ ŅŅ sign ŦŁŔ ĥ Ņň he came ŦŁĥŔ Ō Ŕň was elected ƁũūŁĥ ł ł ň was presented (as a gift) ƎƣĪŁĥ ň they (m.) became friendsĭƢũŶŁĥ ô ł ł Ŕň became furious ƦƊŶŁĥ Ŕ ł ł Ŕň they suffocated ŴƠƍŶŁĥ ô ň Ŕň became to be known ƦƕűſŁĥ Ŕ ł Ŕł Ō Ŕň ň Ŕ was given ħųſŁĥ Ōň was born űƇſŁĥ Ŕ ň ŔŅ òŅ Ŕ they are coming (f.) ƎſŁĥ ł ł Ŕň was gathered, compiled ƥƍƃŁĥ ň yesterday ƁƇƉŁĥ ô Ņ Ŕň Ōł Ŕ he was elevated ƁƇƕŁĥ ň was baptized űƊƕŁĥ Ŕ ň Ŕň Ō was instructed IJĪĿŁĥ Ņ Ņ ł Ŕł countries ŦŁĭǓŁĥ Ŕ ł Ŕň ł was added ƚƏĭŁŁĥ Ō ł ň descended IJƦŶŁŁĥ ł ň became a pupil űƊëƆŁŁĥ Ŕł Ō ň was made ƋƀƏŁŁĥ ł ň ł ŁŁĥ was ordained įƢƏ Ņ Ņ baby ťũŨ ŏŅ please! ŴƖũŨ ł ł Baghdad ĪĥűŬŨ ł inside ŴŬŨ

Syriac-English Glossary

Ņ Ņ ñ Ņ immediately ŦƦƖƤŨ ųŨ Ŕ Ņ duck ťźŨł Ņ Ņ ň idleness ťƍÿƇźŨ ł Ņ ł between us ķƦƍƀŨ Ŕ Ņ Ō evil, evil one ťƤƀŨ ł ň ƼŨ library, archives ťƃǓĥ Ŕ ň Ņ ł ƼŨ refuge ťƏŴū Ŕ ň Ņ Ō ŏ ł baptistery ŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ ƼŨ Ŕ Ŕ ň Ō Mesopotamia ƎſǓųƌł Ƽ Ŕ Ũň Ņ ňƌ ƼŨ ťũƤ network Ŕ ň Ņ house ŦƼŨł ł Ņ Ņ IJƦƌĥ Ŕ = IJƼƄŨ ô ô ťƀƄŨ ô ł ŔŅ you (f) are crying

Ō Ō ł ƎƀƖƀƇŨ Ņ ň without űƖÿƇŨ ňł bath ťƍŨ òł children ƁƍŨ Ņ Ņò ł children of man, people ťƤƍƀƍŨ Ņ Ņ ƦƍŨ Daughters of the ťƊƀƟ Ŕ Ņò are immersed

Covenant

Ņ ťƖŨ Ņ Ņ ô ťƖŨ he requested ŦĭĬ Ņ ŏŅ supplication ŦŁŴƖŨ Ŕ son, son of ƢŨł Ņ Ņ ô ƢŨł man, human (lit. ‘son ofťƤƌĥ wanted, asked

man’)

Ņ ƢŨł ťƊƣ Ņ son ŧƢŨ my son IJƢŨ ô ň Ņ Ō blessed (m. sing.) ťƄſƢŨ Ō Ō blessed (m. pl.) ƎƀƄſƢŨ Ņ Ō blessed (f. pl.) ƎƄſǔŨ Ō ignorant ƢſƢŨ in the beginning ƼƤſƢŨ Ŕ Ō Ō Ņ Ņ ň Creation ŦƻǔŨ Ŕ ň Ņ Ņ ł bless IJƢƉ Ŕ = IJƢƊƃƢŨ ô ĴƢŨ ô Ŕň ł namesake

my lord but

ł ĶƢŨ

269 daughter of David virgin dwelling in a strange country

űſĭĪŌ ł ŁƢŨ Ŕ ł ŏô Ņ ŦƦëƆĭƦŨ Ņ ŏ Ņ łŔ ŦŁŴŨŁĭƦŨ Ŕ

ł Ņ ĿƦŨ Ŕ ł Ņ Ō ň head down ųƤſĿ ĿƦŨ Ŕ ŅŔ after you ĴĿŔŅƦŨ ň łŔ Ņ afterwards ƎƃĿƦŨ Ņ elected ťũū Ņ ł side ťũū òŌ ł sides Ǝƀũū ł (something) happened ŀűū within Ŵūł Ņ ŏ well (noun) ťŨŴū Ņ ł nut ŦĮŴū Ņ ł treasure Ŧŵū particle Ƣƀūň Ņ ł camel ƨƊū Ņ he reclined ťƍū Ņ ň wing ťƙū òŌ ň wings Ǝƀƙū Ņ ł North ťƀŨƢū ł ł my bones ƁƉǔū Ņ Ō wolf ťŨĥĪ Ņň bear ťŨĪ uncle ŧĪĪŅŅ Ņ ł lest ťƊëƆĪĪ ňŅŅ òł golden ťƀƍŨĬĪ Ņ Ņ miserable ťſĭĪ David űſĭĪŌł Ņł Daysan (a river’s name) ƪſĪ Ņ ł monastery (f.) ŧƢſĪ ŅŅ ł monk ťſƢſĪ Ņ Ņ Ņ Ŕň masculine ťƀƌƢƃĪ Ņ ł perhaps ťƊëƆĪ ò ł blood (i.e., water) ƁƉĪ ňŅ they compare ƎƀƉĪ Denha ťŷìł ƌĪň after

270

century ŧĿĪŅŅ Ņ ł stair, step ťūĿĪ Ņ ł step, rank ťūĿĪ Ņ Ņ ŏ ĿĪł Damascene ťƀƟŴƐƉ Ņ yard ŦŁĿĪŅ Ņ Ņ gift ťƍƣĪ ð abbreviation for Hallelujah Ĭ behold ŦĬŅ give (imperative) ħĬł Ņ Ņ ł flower ťũŨĬ ňŅ this (f.) ŧĪĬ ł ł guided us ƎſĪĬ guided me Ɓìô ƍłſĪĬł Ņ ŏŅł membership ŦŁŴƉĪĬ Ŕ Ņ ň glory ŧĿĪĬ Ŕ he ĭĬŏ that ĭĬł Ņô to be ŦĭĬ ňò Ņ ŏ studies ťƀūĭĬ ŏ ŏ he is, that is to say ŴſĭĬ I shall be Ɓìô ƍŅſĭĬŅ I was ƻĭĬ Ŕ Ō ň Ņ ƻĭĬ ł remember Īųƕ Ņ ł mind ljĭĬ ň Ņ then ƎſĪň IJĬŅ = ƎſűſĬ Ņ ł nave ƨƄſĬ ŌŔ Ņ now ƈƀƃĬ Ņ łŔ Ņ like this, in this manner ťƍƃĬ ň Ņ these ƎƀƆĬ ŅŅ this (m.) ljĬ Ņ Ņ now ťƣĬ goose ŦĮĭŅł Ņ ł rose ŧĪĿĭ Ņ ł paper ťƟĿĭ Ņ ł time ťƍŨĮ bell ťūŅ Įł ň ò Ō Įł righteous ťƠſĪ it is required ľĪĮňŅ

Syriac-English Glossary

Ņ ŏ ŦĮĭĮ ŅŅ ŏ shaking ťƕŵƕĭĮ sings ƢƉĮłŅ Ō Ņ sing (pl. m.) ƎſƢƉĮ Ņ Ņ sing (pl., f.) ķǔƉĮ Ņ ŏ small, young ŧĿŴƕĮ Ņ ŏ small, minor ŦŁĿŴƕĮ composed ƢƀƟĮŌ ŅŅ Ō solitary ťƀƤƀũŶ Ņ ł friend ŧƢũŶ one (masculine) űŶł Ņ one (feminine) ŧűŶ ňŅò together ŧĪűŶ Ņ ŔŏŔ ł joy ŦŁĭűŶ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ ŏ love ťŨŴŶ ň òł debts, sins ťŨŴŶ Ņ thread ťŹŴŶŏ Ō ŏ rods ƎſǔŹŴŶ Ņ ŏ palms ťƍƘŴŶ look (pl., f.) IJǓŴŶ ô ŏ òł Ņ ŏ your thoughts ƅƀũƣŴŶ Ņ saw (past tense of to see) ŦŵŶ Ņ ŏł apple ŧĿĭŵŶ ň ŏł apples ŧǓĭŵŶ Ņ sinned ťźŶ ň he sins ťźŶŅ ł ł we sinned ƎƍƀźŶ ň Ņ ò sins, trespasses ŦųźŶ ŅŅ ł sinner ťƀźŶ Ņ Ņ sinner (f.), sinful ŦƼźŶł money

woman living he became alive life he ought debtor tailor our lives

Ņ ô ťƀìŅ Ŷ ŦĭĬ

Ņł ťƀŶ

ňò ł ťƀŶ Ņł ĭĬô ŏ ŪƀŶ ŅŅł ťũƀŶ Ņ Ņł ťźƀŶ òłł ƎƀƀŶ

Ņ ƨìƀŶł my strength ƁƇƀŶ ô ł Ņ Ō ł wise man ťƊƀƄŶ ŒŔ ł Ŕ ł she made wise ƦƊƄŶ ŏ Ŕ ł ň their wisdom ķĭĬƦƊƄŶ Ņ ł milk ťũÿƇŶ Ņ ł sweet (sing.) ťƀÿƇŶ òŅ ł sweet (plural) ťƀÿƇŶ Ņ ŏ ł pleasantness ŦŁŴƀÿƇŶ Ŕ Ņ òŅ ł beautiful ŦƼÿƇŶ Ŕ Ņ Ōł fervent ťƊƀƊŶ ň Homs (in Syria) ƞƊŶ Ņ ł wine ŧƢƊŶ Ņ ł five hundred ŦŤƊƤƊŶ Ņ Hamah (in Syria) ƦŔƊŶ Ņł Hannah ťƍŶ ł strangled ơƍŶ ň ł strangled him ųƠƍŶ Ņ Ō enviable ŦƦƊƀƐŶ Ņ Ō diligent ťźƀƙŶ Ņ Ņł sorcerer ťƣƢŶ Ņ ł end ŦŁƢŶ Ŕ Ņ ŏŅ computer ŦƦŨŴƤŶ łŅ ŸƤŶ is necessary Ņ Ō Ņ dinner ŦƼƊƤŶ Ŕ Ņ Ņ sister ŦƦŶ Ŕ ñ ŅŔ Ņ her sister ĬƦŶ Ņ much ŪŹ Ņ more than ƎƉň ŪŹ Ņň news ťũŹ Ņ Ņ good ŦƦũŹ Ŕ ł ŏ blessed you are ƅƀŨŴŹ ŅŅ ŏ blessed ťƍŨŴŹ Ō ł ĿŴŹŏ Tur Abdin Ǝſűũƕ Ņ ŏ mountain ŧĿŴŹ Ņ Ō money ťƊƀŹ ŅòŅ they are flying (f.) ƎƐƀŹ Ņ ň order, system* ťƐƄŹ power

ň young ƨŹ Ņ ŏ ł youthfulness, youth ŦŁŴƀÿǑ Ŕ Ņ Ō are buried ķǔƀƊŹ ňŅò ł mistakes ljŴƖŹ Ņ ŏ Ņ straying, error ŦŁŴƀƖŹ Ŕ Ō is carrying (m.) ƎƀƖŹ Ņ Ō is carrying (f.) ťƍƀƖŹ Ņ ł taste ťƊƖŹ ŒŔ ł ł she fed ƦƊƖŹ Ņ ł chief ťƟƢŹ is known ƗſűſŌŔŌ he knew ĺűſłŌ knows ĺűſłŔŅ Ņ Ņ òł learnings ŦƦƕűſ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ņ learning ťƍƙëƆŴſŏ ňò Ņ ŏ the arts, learnings ťƍƙëƆŴſ day ĶŴſŏ Ņ Ņò ň ò days ŦƦƉŴſł and ťƉŴſł ł òł days of ƁƉŴſ Ņ ł today ƎƉŴſ Ņ Ņ ł today ťƍƉŴſ ňòł pigeons ljŴſ Ņ Ņ Ŕ ŏ benefit ljĿŁŴſ ŅŅ ŌŌ single, solitary, onlyťſűƀŷſ begotten

Ņ łſ ŧűÿƇ she gave birth ŁűÿƇſ Ŕł ň ň you (sing., m.) learned ƦƙƇſŌ sea ťƊſŅł suckle ơƍſňŌ ŏ ł Jacob ħŴƠƖſ ŅŅ ŏ ł Jacobite ťƀŨŴƠƖſ Ņ Ōł heavy, rich ŧƢƀƠſ he grew ħƢſňŌ Ņ ł month ťŶƢſ Ņ ŏ Ņ heritage ŦŁĭŁƢſ Ŕ Jesus ĺŴƤſŏň ň Ņ sits ħƻ Ŕ birth

Syriac-English Glossary they are sitting (pl. m.)

Ō ŔŅ ƎƀŨƻ òŅ

they are sitting (pl., f.)ƎŨƻ ŔŅ

Ō Ƣſƻł Ņ Ō ł extra ŧƢſƻ Ņ Ō sickness ťŨŤƃ Ņ Ō fair, just ljŤƃ ňò Ō stones ťƘŤƃ when, at the time űƃł Ņ Ņ priest ljųƃ Ņ ŏ Ņ priesthood ŦŁŴƌųƃ Ŕ Ņ Ņ juice ĸŴƉŴƃ Ņ ŏ priest ŧƢƉŴƃ ŅŅ ŏ nickname, last name ťƀƌŴƃ Ņ window ŦŁŴƃł all ƈƃŏ Ņ ł dog ťũÿƿ ŏŔ ŏ all of you ķŴƄÿƿ Ņ ň ƈƃŏ = ķűƖÿƿ Ņň ŏ every timeķűƕ Ņ how many ťƊƃ then Ǝƃň Ņ ŏ association ŦƦƣŴƍƃ ŅŅň harp, Kenoro ŧƢƍƃ Ņ ň gathering ťƤƍƃ Ō ňŅ Christians ťƍƀźƐſǔƃ Ŕ Ņ Ō short ŦƻƢƃ Ŕ Ō ł successful ŧƢƀŅƤƃ Ņ ŅŔ book ťŨǁ ňò Ņ books ťŨǁ Ŕ ŏ ŅŔ Ņ booklet ljŴŨǁ Ņ no, not Ƨ Ņ ŏň trouble ŦŁĭƧ Ņ ň heart ťũëƆ Ņ Ō intelligent ťũƀũëƆ ňŔ ł Ņ ô ųƄũƆ he held him ŦĭĬ Ņ ň Lebanon ƎƍũƆ ł outside ƢũëƆ ł dressed, put on (garment) ƥũëƆ more, a lot

271

Ņ ŏ ťŶŴƆ ňò ŏ boards ťŶŴƆ to, towards ŁŴëƆ ŔŅ ň Ņ deserves ƋŷëƆ Ņ ł bread ťƊŷƆ for me, to me ƁƆŌ there is not ƼƆł Ņ Ō night ťƀÿLJ ŏ why? ķŴƊëƆ Ņ why? ƎƊëƆ for us ƎƆł Ņ Ņ òł ŏ end of days ŦƦƉŴſ ĻŴƐëƆ Ŕ łŅ Ō Ņ ƋƇƖëƆ forever and everƎƀƊÿƇƕ ŏ according ŁŴƙëƆ Ŕ Ņ crumbs ťźƠƆň ŅŅ ň tongue, language ťƍƤëƆ Ņ Ņ Ō of Christ, A.D.ŦƼŷì ƀƤƉ = Ķ Ņ ŌĤ verse poem ŧƢƉŤƉ Ņ ŏ ł spring ťƕŴũƉ Ņ ł perfumed ťƊƐũƉ Ņ łł blessed ŦǁƢũƉ ŔŅ taxation ŦŁĥűƉ Ŕł ł ň Ņ then ƎſűƉ ň ň certain, some ĶűƉ East ťŷìŅ ƌűƉ Ŕł ňŅòŔł easterners ťƀŷƌűƉ Ņ Ņ ł metrical poem ťƣĿűƉ ł ł is trusted, believed in ƎƊſųƉ Ņ Ō diligent ŧƢſųƉ Ņ Ņ ł birth ŧűëƆŴƉ ň ŏ Moses ťƣŴƉ Ņ òŅ ŏ poems ŦƦŷƣŴƉ Ŕ ŅŅ ł beneficial ljĿŁŴƉ Ņ ł ljň ǓŁŴƉ useful łł sings, chants ƢƉŵƉ ň ł restores to life ťŷƉ Ņ ň immediately ŧűŷƉ Ō strike (imperative) ƁŷƉ black-board

272

IJĬŴƀŷƉ ô Ō Ņ Ō weak ƨìƀŷƉ Ņ Ņ ŷƉł life-giving ťƍƀì Ņ ł ł printing press ŦƦƖũźƉ Ņ Ņ ł the one who sets in ťƍƐƄźƉ strike him

order

ŏ ƈźƉň Ņ ň rain ŧƢźƉ Ņ arrived ƦźƉ Ŕ Ņ ł honorable ŧƢƠƀƉ died ƼƉ Ŕ Ō Ņ Ō dead man ŦƼƉ Ņ ŏŔ ł virtue ŦŁĭĿƼƉ ŔŅ Ņ virtues ŦŁǓƼƉ Ŕ ł Ņ ň from this time ťƄƉ Ņ ň food ƨƄƉ Ŕ ł ň ł you are preaching Ʀƌĥ ô ĮƢƄƉ ňŔ full of ƨÿƉ ňň verbs, words ƨƉò ň Ņ ô ƨƉ became full ŦĭĬ Ņ ň salt ťŷÿƇƉ ò ł ň my words ƁÿƇƉ ŌŅ ł fully ƻ Ŕ ŤƀÿƇƉ Ņ ł king ťƄÿƇƉ Ņ ŏ ł kingdom ŦŁŴƄÿƇƉ Ŕ ň ł spoke džƉ Ņ Ņ ł speaker ƨÿƇƉ ň ł teaches ƚƇƉ Ņ ŏŅ ł teaching, doctrine ŦŁŴƍƙÿƇƉ Ŕ Ņ ň word ŦƦÿƇƉ Ŕ ň anointing him ųŷƤƊƉň from ƎƉň Ņ ň ƎƉň suddenly ťƀÿƇƣ Ņ Ō viola ťƄƤƀƍƉ Ņ ł ł he was preaching ŦĭĬô ƢũƐƉ Ņ ŏŅ ł bathing ŦŁŴƀŷƐƉ Ŕ ŅŌ ň poor ťƍƄƐƉ ŅŅ ł the one who makes ljƢũƖƉ because

Syriac-English Glossary (something) pass

Ņ Ō ŏ ł ŦƻĪŴƊƖƉ Ŕ ŏ ł MaȨnu ŴƍƖƉ Ņ ł West ťŨƢƖƉ ł ł defiled ƈƙÿƇƙƉ Ņ ł shines ťūƢƙƉ Ņ Ŕŏ Ņ ł Maphrianate ŦŁŴƍſƢƙƉ Ŕ ŅŅ ł commentator ťƍƠƤƙƉ ň can, able ŦƞƉ Ņ Ņ ň middle ŦƼƕƞƉ ň ň Egypt ƎſĿƞƉ ł ł is accepted ƈũƠƉ ł ň ł ł ł you ƦƌDŽũƠƉ = ƦƇũƠƉ ô baptism

are receiving

ň ł I present ljĥŅ ô ħƢƠƉ ň Ņ Lord of all ƈƃŏ ŧƢƉ ł ň ł ň ł you growƦƌĥ ô ťŨƢƉ = ƼŨƢƉ Ņ ł womb ťƖŨƢƉ ň Ņ his lord ĬƢƉ Ņ Ņ ł merciful ťƍƊŶƢƉ Ņ Ņ Lord ťſƢƉ my Lord IJƢƉ ô Ņ ł Ņ our Lord ķƢƉ ň ł he appeases ťƕƢƉ ł ň Ņ ł ƉŅ you Ʀƌĥô ľƢƉ = ƦƟƢ cleanse

ŅŅ ł monitor* ťƍſŁƢƉ łł he is jumping ĿŴƤƉ Ņ ň oil ťŷƤƉ Ō Christ ťŷìŅ ƀƤƉ łœ ł you Ʀƌĥ ô ŸƄƤƉň = ƦœŷłƄƤƉň find tradition deacon gives to drink joining (in an activity) changes

Ņ ŏ Ņ ł ŦŁŴƍƊÿƇƤƉ Ŕ ŅŅ ł ťƍƤƊƤƉ ň ł ťƠƤƉ Ņ ŏŅ ł ň ŦŁŴƍƘŁĭƦƤƉ Ŕ ł ł ň ƚƇŶƦƤƉ

ň ŏŅ ł ň ĬŁŴƍƤƌ Ŕ Ŕ ƢŨƦƉ Ō ł ň are named ƎƀLJĪƦƉ ňł ň is shown ŦŴŶƦƉ Ņòł ň are shown (f.) ƎſŴŶƦƉ Ō ł ň are thinking ƎƀũƤŶƦƉ ł ł ň you are born ŁűÿƇſƦƉ ňł Ŕ ň titled, named ťƍƃƦƉ łł Ŕ ň to blame ĵűƕƦƉ łł ň you are remembering ŁĪųƕƦƉ ŏ Ņ Ŕ ň arrange, separate ŴƏƢƘƦƉ ň Ŕ ň was called, was named ŧƢƟƦƉ ł ł ň becomes near ħƢƟƦƉ Ņ ł Ŕ ň she is approaching, ťŨƢƟƦƉ becoming man

coming near they are called feeding is required is settled are placed nourishes he will rest he shall go he shall say he will come al-Nabak (near

ň ň ƎſƢƟƦƉ ň ŏ Ņ łŔ ĬŁŴƀƏĿƦƉ Ŕ ł Ņ ň ťƖŨŁƦƉ ł ł ň ħŁĭŁƦƉ Ō Ō ň ƎƀƊƀƏŁƦƉ ň ł ň ťƏĿŁƦƉ ň ł ƎūŤƌ ł Ō ĵĮŤƌ ł Ō ƢƉŤƌ ň Ō ŦŁŤƌ Ŕ ƅũƌłł

Homs, Syria)

űŬƌ Ŕł ł attracted him IJĬĭűŬƌ ô ŏ Ŕ ŏ ŏ they shall commit ķĭĿŴŬƌ attracted

adultery

ŏ

they shall become aware ķŴƇŬňƌ they shall judge he shall mention Nadan he shall he shall believe intelligent a long time

ŏ ŏ ķŴƌĭűƌ ł ň Ƣƃűƌ ķűƌŅŅ ň ň Ŧĭųƌ ň ł ƎƊſųƌ Ņ Ōł ŧƢſųƌ Ņ ŏ ò Ņ ł ł ŧƢūŴƌ ťƀƍƣĪ

Syriac-English Glossary

ň ł ŧĪŴƌ

we shall thank

ŏ ł ķĭĪŴƌ Nuh (Noah) įŴƌŏ ŌŅ Ŕ ŏ they differ ƎƀſƢƃŴƌ Ņ ŏ fish ljŴƌ Ņ ŏ dot ŦŵƟŴƌ Ņ ł ŏ kiss ŦƦƠƣŴƌ Ŕ ň ň he shall be crucified ƚƟĪŵƌ let us look ĿŴŷìŏ ƌ ň ň let us see Ŧŵŷƌ ŏ ňƌ they shall dig ķĭƢƙŷ ŌŅ Ō hesitatingly ƻƨì Ŕ ƀźƌ slaughtered ƑƀƄƌŌŔ Ņ ŏŅ law ťƏŴƊƌ ň ň he shall strike ťŷƊƌ ł ň he shall anoint ŸƤƊƌ he shall anoint you ƅŷƤƊƌ ŔŅ ň ŏ he shall extend įĭƦƊƌň they (m.) will thank

(in length) takes we shall worship they (m.) will worship

ň Ņ ŪƐƌ ĪŴŬƐ Ŕ ŏ ňƌ ŏŔ ň ķĭűŬƐƌ

ňŔ ò ŏ Ņ ťƃŴƐƌ Ņ ŏ ň temptation ljŴƀƐƌ ŏ ň they shall do ķĭűũƖƌ he shall enter ĵŴƖƌŏň Ņ Ņòň melodies ŦƦƊƖƌ Ŕ fell ƈƙƌł went out ơƙƌł ł they went out ŴƠƙƌ ô Ņ ł self, soul ťƤƙƌ yourself (m. sing.) ƅƤƙƌ ŔŅ ł yourself (f. sing.) ƁƄƤƙƌ ô Ŕň ł Ņ Ņ òł selves, souls ŦƦƤƙƌ Ŕ ò ŏ Ņ yourselves (m. pl.)ķŴƃƦƤƙƌ Ŕ Ŕ ł ňŔ Ŕ Ņ ò ł yourselves (f. pl.) ƎƀƃƦƤƙƌ ň Ņ ò ňƌ splendor ťƍŶƞì scribes

Ō Ō Ǝƀũſƞƌ ň lay Ƨƞƌň ŏ ł they shall pray ķŴƆƞƌ Ņ ŅŅ Ŕ ň feminine ťƀƌƦũƠƌ ŏ ň they shall pick ķŴƙźƠƌ ŏ ň they (m.) will cry out ķŴƖƠƌ ŏ ň they shall read ķĭƢƠƌ ň ł let us bow ƎƃƢƌ ň women ťƤƌò ň ŏ ň he shall forgive ľŴũƤƌ Ņ ň eagle ŧƢƤƌ Ō plucked ƚſƦƌ ň let us give ĵƦƌň ŏ ň they became full ķŴƇƉƦƌ Ŕ ł ł he shall be confirmed ƋƀƟƦƌ Ŕň ňŅ ł ň the Severians ťƍſǓĭŤƏ ň I am putting ljŅôĥ ĶŤƏŅ Ņ ł hope ŧƢũƏ ňò Ō ł many ŦŤƀŬƏ Ōò Ō ł many ƎſŤƀŬƏ ŅŅ Ņ Ō ł plural ťƀƌŤƀŬƏ ň Ņ is witnessing ĪųƏ Ņ Ō ŏ dialogue poem ŦƼūŴƏ Ŕ Ŕ łŅ ŏ our need ƎƍƠƌŴƏ Ņň ň Severus ĸĭĿŴƏ ŌŅ ŏ in Syriac ƻŤſĿŴƏ Ŕ Ņ ŅŅ ŏ Syriac (f.) ŦƼſĿŴƏ Ņ Ņ ƏŅ Satan ťƍź ł apart from ƢźƏ Ņ ł ł food ŦŁƢũƀƏ ň ò ŏ ƏŅ authors ťƉŴƀ ŅŅ literary work ťƊƀƏ ł Ō Ņ we put ƎƍƀƊƀƏ Ņ treasure ŦƦƊƀƏŌ Ņ ł fool ƨƄƏ Ņ Ņ òŔ ł offenses ŦŁŴÿǀƏ Ŕ łŔ he closed ƢƄƏ ň ascended ơƇƏ Nisibis

273

ƋƏŅ ň blind ťƊƏ ŒŔ ł ň she held fast ǂƊƏ ł ň Ņ ň Ņ you hate Ʀƌĥ ô ťƍƏ = ƼƍƏ ŒŁƢƖƏ visited Ŕł ň Ņò Ņ suffice ƎƠƙƏ Ņ ň book ŧƢƙƏ Ņ ŏ Ō polish ŦŁŴƇƀƠƏ Ŕ they damaged ŴŶƢƏ ô ł they scribed, copied (m.) ŴŹƢƏ ô ł ň make (imperative) űũƕ make him IJųſűũƕ ô Ņň ŅŅ happening, doing, deed ŧűũƕ Ņ ł slave, servant ŧűũƕ ňò ł slaves ŧűũƕ òł ł slaves of IJűũƕ łŅ passes Ƣũƕ Ņ ô Ƣũƕ łŅ was passing ŦĭĬ łŔ ťƉŅűƕ until Ņ ŅŅŅòŌ ecclesiastical ŦƼƌ Ŕ Łűƕ enter ĵŴƕŏ ň òŅ ł wicked ƧŴƕ ŅŅ ł Ŕ ŏ Ottoman ťƀƍƉŁŴƕ goat ŦŵìŅ ƕň Ō is clothed ƚƀźƕ ŅŔ Ņ custom ŧűƀƕ on ƈƕł Ņ Ņň upper ťƀÿƇƕ Ņ ł prelates ťƍLjƕò Ņ Ņ world ťƊÿƇƕ reason ƦƇƕ Ŕ łň Ņł people ťƊƕ is baptized űƊƕ Ŕň Ņ Ņ ł hard labor ƨƊƕ I made ƦƇƊƕ ŔŌ ň ň ŏ łł Emmanuel ƈſĥŴƍƊƕ Ō Ņ they are living ƎſƢƊƕ ň òň grapes ťũƍƕ put, composed

274

ł űƍƕ Ņ ŏ ŅŔ Ņ self-denial ŦŁŴſŴƍ Ŕ ƕ Ņ ł earth ŧƢƙƕ Ņ compelled Ŧƞƕ compelled him IJųſƞƕ ô Ņ they tore ĭƢƠƕ ô ł Ņ ł bed ťƏƢƕ ł ran away ľƢƕ Ņ Ōł strong ťƍƀƤƕ Ņ Ōł strong (f.) ŦƦƍƀƤƕ ň became strong ƎƤƕ Ō ł old ơſƦƕ Ņ ł beautiful ťſŤƘ Ņ òŅ ł beautiful ŦƻŤƘ Ŕ ł Ņ body ŧƢŬƘ Ŕ Ņ ŏ division ťŬëƆŴƘ ŔŅ Ņ ł Paul ĸŴƆŴƘ ŏ exit (pl., m.) ŴƟŴƘ ô ŅŅ ŏ payment ťƍƕĿŴƘ Ņ ň Peter ĸĭƢźƘ Ņ ŏ łŌ ł patriarchate ŦŁŴƃƢſƢźƘ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ Ņ quenches ťŬƀƘ ň ł divide (imperative) ŭƇƘ Ŕ Ņ ŏ ň part ŦŁŴŬÿƇ Ƙ Ņ Ņ òŔ ň parts ŦŁŴŬÿƇ Ƙ Ŕ Ņ Ņ lunch ŦƼƍƘ Ņ ŏ ł pancake* ťƃŴƄƍƘ Ņł deliver ŦƞƘ ł Ņ ô űƠƘ he ordered ŦĭĬ Ņ ŏŅ savior ťƟĭƢƘ Ņ ł Ņ bird ŦƦŶƢƘ Ŕ ŏ Ņ Ņ table ŧĿĭƦƘ Ŕ ł open (sing., m.) įƦƘ they hunted ĭĪô ĽŅ near him IJĬĭĪĥĽ ô Ņł ň impurity ŦŁĥĽ ŔŅ desired ťŨĽŅ ŅŅ ň will ťƍƀŨĽ died

Syriac-English Glossary

ł ŒŁƦŨĽ Ŕ ł ŏ ň Zion ķŴſĬĽ Ņ ŏ ł thirst ŦŁŴſĬ ŔŅ Ľ picture ŦŁĿĭĽŏ listen ŁĭĽ Ŕ ŏ near űſĽ Ŕň ł pray (imperative, pl.) ŴƆĽł Ņ ŏ prayer, intercession ŦŁŴƆĽ Ŕ Ō turn ƁƆĽ Ņ òŅ ň crafts ŦƦƖƌĽ Ŕ Ņ ł morning ŧƢƘĽ ň ň ł received him ĬƦÿƇũƟ Ņ ł tomb ŧƢũƟ ň tombs ŧǔũƟł Ņ Ō ł holy ťƤſűƟ Ņ Ō ł holy (f.) ŦƦƤſűƟ ŅŔ in front ĶűƟ ł ŅŔ in front of you ƅƀƉűƟ ň òŔ ł the ancient ones ťƉűƟ Ņ Ņ ł first ŦƼƉűƟ ň Ņ òŔ ŏ flower ƨŨŴƟ rise, get up ĶŴƟŏ Ņ stature ŦƦƉŴƟ Ŕ ł Ō ł łŌ Constantinople ťƀƍƀźƍź ƏŴƟŏ Ņ Ō Ņ Cyril ĸŴLjſĿŴƟ Ņ truth ŦƦƣŴƟŏ Ō killed, slain ƈƀźƟ ŅŅ train ŧƢźƟ Ņ voice ƨƟŅ ł ň ĸĭĪŴƇƟ Ņ Ņ Claudius CaesarƢƐƟ Ņ ŏ person ťƉŴƍƟ Ņ cried aloud ťƖƟ Ō clipped ƞſƞƟ ň he approached, came near ħƢƟ Ņ ŏ Ņ reader ťſĭƢƟ Ņ ł ł paper, leaf, card ťƐƀŹƢƟ Ō ł Ņ ô ŪſƢƟ he was near ŦĭĬ Ņ Ō ł neighbor ťũſƢƟ she adorned

Ņ Ō ŦƻƢƟ Ŕ Ņ elder, priest ťƤƀƤŌ Ɵł Ņ Ō ŏŔ ł ťƠƀƆĭƦƟ Catholicos Ņł big ťŨĿ Ō Ō they are angry ƎſŵƀūĿ Ņ ŏ persecution ťƀƘĭĪĿ Ņ car ŦƻĪĿŅ ł Ō ŏ Rome ťƉĭĬĿ Ņ ŏ spirit ťŶĭĿ Ņ ŌŅ ŏ spiritual ŦƼƍŶĭĿ Ŕň Ņ drunkenness ŦŁŴſĭĿ Ŕ ŏ ŅŅ ŏ gift ťƍƀƉĭĿ Ņ ŏ sign ťƊƣĭĿ Ōł far (absolute) ơƀŶĿ Ņ Ō far (emphatic) ťƠƀŶĿ ň Ņ Rachel ƈŶĿ ň he loved ƋŶĿ ň Ņ lover of ƋŶĿ ň ł mercies ťƊŶǓ ň ǓŅ loved ones ťƊŶ ň love of ƦƊŶĿ Ŕ ł ň lying ťƉĿ high ťƉĿŅŅ Ņ ł evening ťƤƉĿ Ņ ŅłŅ shepherds ŦŁŴƕǓ Ŕ ł painted ƋƣĿ ŏ forgive (imperative) ľŴũƣ Ņ Ō glorious ŦƦŷìƀũƣ ł forgave ơũƣ ł we forgave ƎƠũƣ ň Ņ forgiver, forgives ơũƣ Ņ ŏ ł adolescence ŦŁĭƢũƣ Ŕ ň ł sent it (m. it) ĬĿűƣ ł ô ĭĿűƣ łł they sent ĭĭĬ Ņ łł ñ sent it (f. it) ĬŁĿűƣ ŏ Ņ praise ťŷŨŴƣ = ħŴƣ Ņ ŏ praise ťŷŨŴƣ ŅŅ ŏ Sultan ťƍźëƆŴƣ village

Syriac-English Glossary

Ņ ŏ beauty ŧƢƘŴƣ ł jumped ĿŴƣ Ņ wall ŧĿŴƣŏ Ņ ŏ beginning IJĿŴƣ Ņ Ō simple ťƊƀŷƣ Ņ ł Ō Chicago ŴŬƄƀƣ Ņ ň quietness ťƀÿƇƣ rest ŦŁŴƀÿƇƣ Ŕ ŏ ł Ō apostles ťŷìňò ƀƇƣ Ņ Ņ peace ťƊÿƇƣ ŒŔ ł ň ended ƦƊÿƇƣ Ņ Ņ boiling ťƠÿƇƣ Ņ name ťƊƣ ňò Ņ nouns ŦųƊƣ ň ŏ Samuel ƈſĥŴƊƣ Ō ŏ Shmuni ƁƌŴƊƣ Ņ ł heaven ťƀƊƣ ŅŅ ł heavenly ťƍƀƊƣ ł listen (imperative) ƗƊƣ ł ô ŴƖƊƣ they heard ĭĭĬ ô ł Ņ Ņ = Ɓìô ƍƖƊƣ Ņ Ņ I listen ljĥŅ ô ťƖƊƣ she heard ƦƖƊƣ Ŕ ł ň Ōł he departed Ɓƍƣ Ņłò years ťƀƍƣ year Ʀƍƣ Ŕł Ņ ň sleep ŦƦƍƣ Ŕ ł overflown Ɨƙƣ Ņ Ņ is fit ŧƢƙƣ ňŅ carries ƈƠƣ

ł Ņ Ņ come to an endťƊëƆŴƣŏ ƈƠƣ Ņ ł tribe ŦƦŨƢƣ ŔŅ banquet, breakfast ŦŁĭƢƣ Ŕ ŏŅ Ōł began IJƢƣ Ōł Ņ ô IJƢƣ he began ŦĭĬ Ōł true ƢſƢƣ Ņ Ōł true ŧƢſƢƣ ň Ņ drinks ŦƦƣ Ŕ Ņ Ō Ņ sixth ťſƻƦƣ Ŕ Ŕ Ņ come ŦŁ ňŅ repents ħĥŁ ł she will rest ƎūňĥŁ łŌ you shall go ĵĮĥŁ ň Ō she will come ŦŁĥŁ Ŕ ŏ commit adultery ĿŴūŁ Ņ breast ŧĪŁ Ņ ŏ Ŕň miracle ŦŁĿŴƉĪŁŔ ŏ again ħĭŁ Ņ Ō ł faith ŦƻĪĭŁ Ŕ ň under ƼŶŁ ŅŔ ŏ Ņ repentance ŦŁŴũſŁ Ŕ Ņ Ō repenting ones ƎƀũſŁ ŌŅ Ō confidently ƻƨìƀƃŁ Ņ ŅŔ ò Ō Ŕ ł pupils (f.) ŦŁűƀƊëƆŁ Ŕ three (feminine) ƦƆŁ Ŕ Ņ Ō Ņ thirty ƎſƦëƆŁ ň ň łŔ Ņ thirteen ŧǔƐƕƦëƆŁ Ņ September ĮŴƉŏŁ Ņ Ō amazing ŦųƀƉŁ

275

there eighty fox make us

Ņł ƎƉŁ Ō Ņ ƎƀƍƉŁ Ņ ł ƨíƕŁ ł ł ň ł = ƎƇƕŁ ƎƆł ƈƕŁ

enter

ň IJĬŴƀƠƤƘŁ ô Ō ł Ņ table-land, plateau ťƍƟŁ Ņ Ņ tutor ŦĥĿŁ łň you shall desire Ĩ ĿŁ Ō ň ñ ūĿŁ you shall desire her ųƀ ŏ ł both of them ķĭųſǓŁ Ō Ņ ŏ ŁƞſĿŁ correct faith, ťŷŨŴƣ Ŕł she/it eases him

Orthodox

ł ĺĿŁ Ņ ł door ťƕĿŁ ŏ ł they broke it IJĬŴƕĿŁ ô ł my sense, my mind IJƼƕĿŁ ô Ŕ Ō ł corrected ĽĿň Ł Ņ ŏ ň glory ŦƦŶŴũƣŁ ŏ ň you shall forgive ķŴƠũƣŁ Ņ Ō ł story ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ Ņ Ņ ò ł stories ŦƼƖƣŁ Ŕ Ņ ł nine hundred ŦŤƊƖƣŁ Ņ ƎſƢƣŁ Ō ň November IJƢŶĥ ô ň ň you shall drink ŦƦƣŁ ł ł ň you shall change ƚƇŶƦƣŁ Ō ň you shall drink it IJĬŴſƦƣŁ ô he broke

Index Ȩé, 23, 24, 25, 33, 140 Ȩʛoʛo, 7 Ĭ} 79, 80 abbreviation mark, 79, 80 absolute, 149 active participles, 93 adjectives, 42 and number, 53 adverbs, 99, 152 AfȨel, 100 Akkadian, 92 alphabet, 139 Alphabet, 32 aspect, 70 Béth, 1, 2, 6, 33, 139 bonus words Ĭ}, 79, 80

ł ťŨĥŅ, 51 ƼŨ Ŕ ň , 54 Ņ Ņ ň , 46 ŧƢƍƃ IJƢƉ ô Ņ Ņ , 48 ł ŦƼƠƍƘ Ŕ Ōł , 43 Ņ Ɵł, 61 ťƐƀŹƢ Ņ ŏ , 66 ťŶĭĿ

Coakley, xix conjunction Ƣƀūň, 100 construct, 101, 149 contraction, 93 demonym, 128, 151 diacritic points, 141 and homographs, 122 Œ feminine marker on Ł, 108 dictionary, using the, 164 diminutive, 125, 150 Dolath, 1, 2, 6, 33, 139 doubling, 144 emphatic, 149 enclitic, 117 Enclitic and pronouns, 122 enclitics, 148 Garshuni, 171 gender, 13, 148 and body parts, 44 and numerals, 45 and pronouns, 46 Gender, 39

Gomal, 1, 2, 6, 33, 139 ʗboʛo, 12 Hé, 6, 7, 9, 33, 139 Healey, xix, 160 ʗéth, 10, 11, 14, 33, 139 homographs and diacritic points, 122 imperative, 67 imperfect, 70, 152 interrogative, 86 Koph, 16, 17, 20, 33, 139 ligatures, 142 Ligatures ĵĥ, 17

Ƨ, 17 Lomadh, 16, 17, 20, 33, 139 Madrosho, 88 Malayalam, xxiv, 126, 171– 172 manuscripts, 165 Meltho fonts, 166 Mim, 16, 17, 20, 33, 106, 107, 140 months and seasons, 126 morphology, 59 Nöldeke, xix nouns, 148 number, 50, 148 and adjectives, 53 numbers, 153 andresolving ambiguities, 129 cardinal, 154 ordinal, 99, 154 numbers, in letters, 82 numerals, 153 and gender, 45 Nun, xxii, 16, 17, 20, 33, 75, 140 object, 75 object pronoun, 75 object suffixes, 82, 152 Olaph, 1, 2, 6, 22, 23, 33, 139 orthographic signs, 141 participles, 68 particles, 96 passive, 82 perfect, 70, 152 Phé, 23 276

phonology, 143 Phthoʘo, 2, 161 poetry Madrosho, 88 sughitho, 92 verse, 85 possessive possessive, 147 without using Ī, 92 possessive pronoun, 71 possessive suffixes, 150 possessive without Ī, 105 pronouns and gender, 46 demonstrative, 47, 147 personal, 47, 146 prounouns interrogative, 147 punctuation, 46, 86, 142 Qoph, 28, 29, 32, 33, 140 Qushoyo, 32, 34, 35, 108, 145, 161, 176 Rboʛo, 2 relative clause, 66 relative pronoun, 66 Rish, 28, 29, 32, 33, 140 Robinson, xix roots, 53, 155 how to find, 165 Rukokho, 32, 34, 35, 145, 176 Schwa, 143 scripts East Syriac, 139, 159 Scripts East Syriac, 1 Estrangelo, xxi, 1, 139, 156, 157, 168 Serto, 1, 139, 142, 156, 159, 160, 161, 168 Shin, 28, 29, 32, 33, 140 silent letters, 47 Simkath, 23, 24, 27, 33, 106, 107, 140 ʙodhé, 23, 33, 140 state, 149 subject pronouns, 93 subject suffixes, 123, 152 Sugitho, 92 Sumerian, 92 syllabification, 144

Index syomé, 26, 27, 28, 37, 38, 46, 51, 52, 55, 58, 67, 69, 72, 73, 167, 168 Taw, 13, 28, 29, 32, 33, 106, 107, 140 templates, 59 tense, 56, 151 future, 64 imperative, 67 past, 59 present, 56, 63 ʝéth, 10, 11, 14, 33, 139 Thackston, xix Turkish, 172 Unicode, 166, 169 verbs, 151 vocalization, 36, 117 vowels under letters, 138 vowel changes, 123 vowel deletion, 144 vowels, 151 East Syriac, 141 inserting, 22

metathesis, 22 Waw, 6, 7, 8, 9, 18, 21, 33, 139 word order, 82 word play, 137 writing system, 139 Yoda, 82, 86 Yudh, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 33, 139 Zayn, 6, 7, 9, 33, 139 Zqopho, 2 Ņ ł Ī Construction, 86 ťƍſĥ Ō ƻĥ Ŕ , 40, 153 ƦƍƉĥ,ł 165 ň , 114, 151 ƈƖƘĥ ň Łĥ, 101, 129 ň with ĸ and ŀ, 125 ŁĥŔ, 82 with Į and Ľ, 118 ň ň , 151 ƈƖƘŁĥ ł ł ň , 151 ƈƖƘŁĥ ł ł ň , 151 ƈƖƘŁŁĥ

Colophon

277

ƦƙƃűŬŨ, 145 Ņ Ņ , 35 ƦƙƃűŬŨ ĵĭűŨ, 21, 76, 82, 143

ħ, 21 Ī, 21 ĭ, 8, 21 ĵ, 21

ŏ , 129 ĵĭűŨ Ī double possession, 74 quotation mark, 66 relative pronoun, 66 ƈſĪ, 73 Ņ , 107, 152 ŦĭĬ and enclitic, 117 ł , 114, 151 ƈƖƘ ň ł , 114, 151 ƈƖƘ Ņ Ņ ŏ , 35, 145 ťƀƣŴƟ Ņ Ŕ Ņ œ ŏ , 35, 145 ťƄƃĭĿ

ò IJĬŴŨĥ ťƀźŶĭ ťſĭĪ IJűſŤŨ ƻŤƤƀƇŬƌĥ ťƀìſĿŴƏ ťƍƤLJ ŦƦƇƖƉ IJĬĭƻĥĪ ljĬ ťŨǁ ƅſƦƏĥĭ ƋƇƣ Ŕ ô űſĭĪ ƢŨ ťſŁŴƘƢƃ ƎſŁĿĥ ƢŨ ťƀìƍƊſĪĥ ķŴźƌĥ ƢŨ ťƀƊŷƆ ƼŨ ƁūĿŴū ĭĬĪ ťſŴźƠƐƀƘ ŧƢƍƃĪ òŔ ĜťƀǑƢŨ ƚƏŴſ ħŴƠƖſ ťƤƀƤƟ IJűſDŽƕ ĬŁŴƀƇźŨ ťƀìſĿŴƏ ťƍƤƆ ŧƢƟĪ ťƀìſĿŴƏ ĶĭĽƢŨ ƢŨ ťƀƏŴũſĥ Ŕ ò Ƽƃĭĥ ƨÿƇƊƉ ĽĿĭŁ ĨĿĬ ĬŁŴƊƀƇƖŨĭ ĜťƀƐƙƏĥ ųƄſŵƃŔ ĸŤƀƭ ťƍƤƊƤƉ IJűſDŽƕ ĬŁĭƢũƤŨĭ ò ťƀƏĿŴƃ ƈƕ ĭĬ Ūſƻ űƃ ťƀƆĽŴƉ IJĭŤůŮ ĶŤƌųŨ ĸŴƀƐƀìƍƌŴſĪ IJƢƉ IJűſDŽƕ ƁƠƀźƉƢū òťƍƙƇƉĪ ťƍƙƇƉĭ ťƍſĪųƉĪ ò ò ò ťƍſĪųƉĪ IJĬŴƙƍƃ ƼìŶŁ ťƀìſǓŴƏ ťƀūĭĬ ŧƢƟ ĬŁĭűƀƊƆƦŨĭ ĜťƀƊƀƇƤſĿĭĥ ô ķĭųƿ ƎƀƤſǔŨ IJĬŴſƢźƍƌ ťſƢƉ ťƀƤƀƇŬƌĥ ĴĭƢŨ ƼŨĪ ķŤƀźƐũƏ IJƢƉ ťƤſűƟĭ ťƟƢŹ ljƦƕĭűſĭ ô ò ƎƀƆĬ IJĭĬĭ ò ĖŦƦƉŴſò ĴŴƀźƌĥĪ ťƃƢſƢźƘ ťƀƉűƟ ƁƃĮ ĸŴƀŹŤƍŬſĥ IJƢƉ ķƢƉ ķƢƉŴƃ ƥſĿ ƁƉŴƀŨ ô ò ťƤƊŶĪ ųŬƍŨ ŦƼìƍſĿŁ ŦƦƍŨŵƆ ťƉƦŷƆ ŪƀŹŁĥĭ ĖĖŦŁǔƀŬƌ ťƀƍƤƆ ĬŁŴũƀƏ ĿŴźŶ ƅƊƐƌ ťſƢƉ ĸŴLjſĿŴƟ IJƢƉ ŴƤƍƃŁĥ űƃ ĨĿŴũƏŁŴƇƏ ƦƍſűƊŨ Ŧųƭ ŁűƇſĪ ŧƢſűŨ ŭƀŨ Ʀƍƣ ťƠƆŴƏĪ ò ŦƼìƍƙƇƉ ljĬ ťƀƣŴƍƄŨ ųŨ ŴũƀŹŁĥĭ .ťſƦƍƣ ťƀìƍŶĭĿ ťƀƣŴƍƄŨ IJĬŴƌųƃ Ƌƕ ťƄſƢƉĥ ŸìƌűƉĪ ƋſƢƘĥ ô ĖĸŴƍŹ ƼŨĪ ħŴƠƖſ ťƍƙƇƉĭ ĿƦƭĭ ƢŨ ĸĭĥĿűƌĥ ťƍƙƇƉĭ ĵŴƄƀìƌ ķŤŮ ň ň ƦÿÿƖƍƉĪ Ņ ł Ō ł ųÿÿƙëƆĥ ŒŔ ł ň ŅljŤÿÿƊÿLJ Ņ ťÿÿÿÿÿƊƃĥ Ņ Ņ ł ŧűÿÿÿÿ ň Ŕ ÿŶĪ ťÿÿÿÿÿŷÿƇƉ ň Ņ ł Ņ Ņ ŏ Ņ ŧűÿÿÿÿÿŶ Ņ Ņ ô ŧűūĿŴÿÿÿÿ ň Ŕ Ņ ƎÿÿÿÿÿƃĬ ŅŔ Ņ ťÿÿÿÿÿſƢŶĥ ÿƏŏ ħǁĪ ťÿÿÿÿÿŨĭǁ Ŕ ƋƇƣ ťƆĪ ťŷŨŴƣ ŦųƆŤƆĭ ƋƇƣ